' 

te; 


® 1 ^ y v V -V  ’ v v y . y *5 


*/ 

y y 
7 h# 


^ V, , '\,  V\„  V ^ 
y y -y  y 4f, 

y.  y ^ y y 
,Vv '%•••'  * •• 


• • v ,y  „y  , i 


......  . __  I «|  ” fs 

**l  ' W ‘ Ari  r wi- 


^ t\u  SlifoIogiVi,/ 

**s 

PRINCETON,  N.  J. 

Purchased  by  the  Hammill  Missionary  Fund. 

Division  *Zn  3 

s„,,„„  .A116ZM 

Number 

^ i ^ 2 ^ ^ y ^ T y ^ ^ y ^ y x y 

4^2*5*1  * * -y  ^ 

V%:  Vwv„v^vvvvv- 

■4*«*W****  ***  ***  *^‘ 


•v  v , Y., Y t.1VJ>v  Y y Y 
v v Y V V Y %.  Y Y • -V-  Y 
~ V V Y V v y Y Y.,  Y Y Y 
v .Y  Y Y ,Y  Y >i'.M.««l  i.'fcv 


;v  . Y .V  ,Y,,Y  , Y V ,Y  ,-V  Y A , 

> Y ,Y  'Tut  , Y,Y  * Y V „ A • A 

‘Y  ,Y  .Y  ,Y  ,Y  *Y  ,Y  ,Y  Y'  A 

* Y Y . Y Y V Y Y v V A A 

Y_7Y  Y y V .v  v v v a 

! iY  ,f»Y  ,Yj>Y  ,Tf  y -Y  -Y  , A A 

V V , Y V 'V  V Y Y v V A 

« -v  V 4 4 V . 'V  4 -V  v A> 

Y Y„Y  Y > t>-  Y Y Y L>. 

& , Y ,Y  Y _av  Y Y Y . Y .y  , A a 

i ^ J Y Y . V , v Y v Y A A 

^ y*Y  Y^ Y Y*Y  YVv  y* aAA 

| ^ v * 1^2  v Y *Y  V*  v V Y 1 V * A '■'  ,. 

' v V v V , v V v r V v v V v V v ,-Ai 

l ••'  Y„Y  ,Y„y  v Y„  Y^Y  v Y Aft 

&$$$* 

Y J Y Vy  Y^  Y^y  ^ Y . Y v v a ,\ 

§® IyJy,' Y^Y  Y Y y a J 

Y Y Y Y Y Y ,Y  Y .Y  Y A A 

VI  Y Y Y 'Y  '-a-  a 
f?Y^YTn|-%Y^Y  Y Y Y Y Y 

Y ^y%  y J-y Iy%  v y y ' A A 
a'i.  Y_*.Y ,Y , Y « Y . Y .Y  . Y . Y A 

* . Y , Y^-Y  a Y ,Y,YwY.  . Y . Y A A 

^iY,Yv.Y,Y,Y.Yvy  V Y Y A- 

4^4  m ~ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 x ' 

v ‘4  '4.4  4 '4\V4  .4  '4.  '4  -X'  a 


r\ 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 


https://archive.org/details/mitoyashikitaleoOOmacl 


A BUDGET  OF  LETTERS  FROM  JAPAN 

By  ARTHUR  COLLINS  MACLAYi  A.M.,  LL.B. 


“ It  is  not  unworthy  of  a place  beside  the  best  and  most  in- 
structive of  the  lighter  descriptive  books  relating  to  the  Empire.” 
— Japan  Weekly  Maily  Yokohama. 

14  It  still  is  the  most  intelligent  and  thorough  work  in  existence 
as  a study  of  Japanese  character.” — New  York  Herald. 

“ No  other  modern  book  on  Japan  gives  so  full,  authentic,  and 
entertaining  an  account  as  this.” — Brooklyn  Daily  Times. 

“This  book  is  a charming  picture  of  Japan.” — The  Critic , 
New  York  City. 

“ As  far  as  it  goes,  and  considering  the  extent  of  Buddhism  it 
goes  far,  this  volume  furnishes  an  effective  reply  to  the  assaults 
of  Canon  Taylor,  both  early  and  late,  a reply  which  not  only 
leaves  the  Canon  in  a poor  position,  but  which  gives  to  it  the 
ridiculous  aspect  of  a series  of  elaborate  charges  which  were 
already  effectually  disposed  of  before  they  were  put  into  print.” 
— The  Independent , New  York  City. 


One  vol.,  crown  octavo  cloth 


Price,  $2.00 


MI  TO  YASHIKI 


A TALE  OF  OLD  JAPAN 


BEING  A FEUDAL  ROMANCE  DESCRIPTIVE  OF  THE  DECLINE  OF 
THE  SHOGUNATE  AND  OF  THE  DOWNFALL  OF  THE 
POWER  OF  THE  TOKUGAWA  FAMILY 


BY 


y 

ARTHUR  COLLINS  MACLAY,  A.M.,  LL.B. 

AUTHOR  OF  "A  BUDGET  OF  LETTERS  FROM  JAPAN  ” 


SECOND  EDITION 


G.  P.  PUTNAM’S  SONS 


NEW  YORK 


LONDON 


=7 


WBST  TWENTY-THIRD  ST.  27  KING  WILLIAM  ST.,  STRAND 

<Jbe  Jnicktrbockcr  jprtss 

1890 


COPYRIGHT  1889 

BY  ARTHUR  COLLINS  MACLAY 


[All  rights  reserved ] 


Ube  Ifcnfcfcerbocfccr  press,  IRcw  JJorb 

Electrotypcd  and  Printed  by 

G.  P.  Putnam’s  Sons 


PREFACE. 


In  the  year  1875,  when  I was  in  the  service  of  the 
Japanese  government  at  Tokio,  it  chanced  that  my  place 
of  residence  was  located  north  of  the  old  Yedo  castle 
grounds,  while  my  office  lay  to  the  south  of  them,  thus 
rendering  it  necessary  for  me  to  pass  twice  each  day 
through  the  centre  of  that  vast  system  of  feudal  fortifica- 
tion. One  stormy  day,  as  I was  trudging  homeward  in 
company  with  an  inveterate  pedestrian, — a young  Eng- 
lishman who  persisted  in  taking  “constitutional  exer- 
cise ” in  all  kinds  of  weather, — he  suddenly  halted 
at  the  bridge  that  crossed  the  broad  moat  before 
the  Sakurada  gateway  and  exclaimed  : “ Here  is  the 
spot  where  was  enacted  the  most  thrilling  episode  in 
modern  Japanese  history.  On  a day  like  this,  about 
fourteen  years  ago,  the  de  facto  ruler  of  the  Japanese 
empire  was  attacked  at  the  head  of  this  bridge,  in  the 
very  midst  of  his  guards,  by  a band  of  seventeen  Mito 
ronins,  and  was  ignominiously  beheaded.  For  adroit- 
ness and  daring  I will  match  the  deed  against  any  found 
in  the  annals  of  any  nation.”  Being  deeply  interested 
in  his  graphic  account  of  the  tragedy,  I eagerly  read  up 
all  the  narratives  of  the  sanguinary  occurrence  that 
could  be  found,  and  came  to  the  conclusion  that  the 
affair  was  worthy  to  be  woven  into  the  warp  and  woof  of 
a romance  by  some  novelist, — little  imagining,  however, 
that  I myself  would  ever  attempt  such  a work.  For 
many  years  the  incidents  of  this  thrilling  episode  in 
Japanese  history  have  lain  fallow  in  my  mind.  After 
the  cordial  and  flattering  reception  accorded  to  my  “ Bud- 


IV 


Preface. 


get  of  Letters  ” three  years  ago,  I began  to  seriously  con- 
sider the  matter  of  writing  a Japanese  romance  based  on 
this  historic  fact.  While  yet  undecided  as  to  what  course 
to  pursue  in  the  premises,  I happened  to  read  in  the 
New  York  Independent  an  article  concerning  Japanese 
novels,  wherein  the  writer  expressed  the  hope  that  some 
American  author  would  work  up  this  realm  of  romance, 
saying  : “ There  is  a vast  stock  to  draw  from.  Judicious 
selections,  easy  to  make,  will  be  gladly  received,  we  are 
sure.  No  small  proportion  of  such  stock  is  historical. 
When  not  entirely  that,  or  when  the  incidents  of  the 
several  tales  are  woven  of  truth  and  fable,  facts  and 
the  wildest  legends,  the  inlook  it  gives  us  into  states  of 
Japan’s  national  existence,  which  are  fast  passing  away, 
are  too  valuable  to  be  neglected.” 

I have  accordingly  endeavored  to  picture  in  this  tale 
of  old  Japan  the  workings  of  that  wonderful  system  of 
espionage  that  characterized  the  Tokugawa  dynasty 
of  Shoguns, — a system  that  covered  the  empire  like 
a net,  and  which  was  interwoven  with  innumerable 
incidents  of  the  most  thrilling  interest.  I have  also 
depicted  in  mild  colors  the  official  corruption  peculiar 
in  a marked  degree  to  the  regime  of  the  later  Sho- 
guns. And,  finally,  I have  endeavored  to  picture  the 
amazement  and  bewilderment  of  keen  pagan  intellects, 
strongly  imbued  with  atheistical  ideas,  when  brought 
in  contact  with  the  mighty  realities  of  the  Christian  civil- 
ization of  the  nineteenth  century.  While  freely  availing 
myself  of  the  license  and  the  latitude  accorded  to  the 
novelist,  yet  in  historic  and  geographical  matters  I have 
striven  to  lay  accurate  details  before  the  reader.  Through 
the  meshes  of  the  assassination  scene  I have  woven  the 
thread  of  Sir  Rutherford  Alcock’s  brilliant  description 
of  that  romantic  event.  In  those  portions  of  the  book 
into  which  I have  incorporated  the  atheistical  objections 
of  pagan  intellects  to  Christianity  I have,  two  or  three 
times,  found  the  Japanese  ideas  on  the  subject  so  com- 
pletely covered  by  some  expressions  used  in  a recent 
magazine  controversy  in  the  United  States  between 


Preface. 


v 


Christianized  intellects,  that  I have  taken  those  expres- 
sions verbatim  and  have  woven  them  into  my  text  after 
having  enclosed  them  within  quotation  marks. 

In  conclusion,  I would  state  that  the  title  Mito 
Yashiki  means,  when  liberally  rendered  into  English, 
“ The  feudal  palace  of  the  Prince  of  Mito  ” ; and  it  is 
pronounced,  like  all  Japanese  words,  after  the  Con- 
tinental method, — i having  the  sound  of  e,  and  a having 
the  broad  sound.  The  accent  should  be  placed  on  the 
first  syllable  of  each  word,  and  o should  be  lon^.  Thus, 
when  slowly  pronounced,  Mito  Yashiki  = Me-to  Yah'- 
she-ke.  When  quickly  pronounced,  as  it  always  is  in 
ordinary  conversation,  Yashiki  sounds  as  if  it  contained 
but  two  syllables, — thus,  Yash'-ke. 

Arthur  C.  Maclay. 

55  Liberty  St.,  New  York  City 
October  i,  18S9. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  PACE 

I. — The  Nakashima  F amily i 

In — Kioto  in  the  Year  1853  . * . .17 

III.  — An  Evening  on  the  Kamogawa  Shoals  2S 

IV.  — A Courier  Despatch 51 

V.  — A Mutual  Compact 61 

VI. — Tys  Plot  Thickens 73 

VII. — An  Overland  Journey 89 

VIII. — Yedo 107 

IX. — Mito  Yashiki 115 

X. — Life  at  Mito  Yashiki 128 

XI. — A Brief  Interview  with  the  Old  Prince  141 

XII. — A Change  of  Scene 152 

XIII.  — Ship  Ahoy  ! .161 

XIV.  — Shadows 171 

XV. — When  Greek  Meets  Greek  ....  186 

XVI. — A Convocation  at  the  Citadel  . . . 197 

XVII. — Hikon£  Castle 214 

XVIII. — A Metaphysical  Siesta 227 

XIX. — Orange  Blossoms 246 

XX. — A Retrospect 258 

XXI. — Iyesada 266 

XXII. — Iyemochi . 275 

XXIII. — The  Entering  in  of  the  Wedge  . . . 280 

XXIV. — The  Cat  Plays  with  the  Mouse  . . 291 

XXV. — And  the  Mouse  Escapes 304 


viii  Contents. 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

XXVI. — An  Unexpected  Meeting 316 

XXVII. — The  Flight 324 

XXVIII. — Mountain  Scenes 332 

XXIX. — The  Conspiracy 366 

XXX. — “ Beware  the  Ides  of  March  ! ” . . . 373 

XXXI. — The  Fate  of  the  Head 382 

XXXII. — A Brief  Historic  Resume 390 

XXXIII. — The  Dav^i  of  a New  Era 399 

XXXIV. — Light  Breaks  through  the  Clouds  . . . 409 

XXXV. — The  Light  of  the  World 422 

Conclusion 454 


MITO  YASHIKI. 


CHAPTER  I. 

THE  NAKASHIMA  FAMILY. 

In  the  year  1853  of  the  Christian  era,  there  dwelt  in 
a little  hamlet  nestled  in  a sequestered  glen  at  the  foot 
of  the  Atago  Mountains,  in  the  western  part  of  the 
province  of  Yamashiro,  near  to  the  city  of  Kioto,  in  the 
central  part  of  Japan,  an  obscure  family  bearing  the 
name  of  Nakashima.  They  traced  their  ancestry  back 
to  the  eighth  century  of  our  era,  to  a certain  kugt,  or 
court  noble,  attached  to  the  imperial  household  in 
Kioto.  Those  were  days  of  affluence  and  power  for  the 
family  ; but  as  the  Mikado  was  stripped  of  one  preroga- 
tive after  another,  and  as  successive  sources  of  revenue 
were  cut  off,  from  that  time  until  the  seventeenth  cen- 
tury, by  ambitious  and  unscrupulous  generals,  who 
grasped  all  the  executive  and  administrative  functions 
pertaining  to  his  office,  the  imperial  household  was  re- 
duced to  great  poverty,  and  was  obliged  to  cast  adrift 
many  courtiers,  retainers,  and  descendants  of  ancient 
kugls  through  lack  of  means  wherewith  to  support  them. 

In  the  year  1600,  Nakashima  Isami,  one  of  these 
ronin  descendants,  enlisted  in  the  service  of  Tokugawa 
Iyeyas,  and  was  engaged  in  many  desperate  battles  under 
that  valiant  and  victorious  warrior,  subduing  factious 
chieftains  in  various  parts  of  the  realm.  But  during  the 
years  of  profound  peace  that  prevailed  throughout  the 
empire  subsequent  to  the  founding  of  the  Tokugawa 


1 


2 


Mito  Yashiki. 


dynasty  of  Shoguns,  the  art  of  war  did  not  require  such 
multitudes  of  followers  ; and,  as  the  Shoguns  could  not 
support  all  who  might  desire  to  enlist  in  their  service,  it 
naturally  came  to  pass  that  those  samurai  who  were 
without  money  or  influence  were  compelled  to  resort  to 
peaceful  avocations  for  their  livelihood. 

Of  this  luckless  number  was  Nakashima  Toyada,  one 
of  the  descendants  of  Nakashima  Isami.  Finding  him- 
self politely  released  from  further  fealty  to  the  house  of 
Tokugawa,  and  excused  from  all  further  necessity  of  eat- 
ing the  rice  of  his  recent  master,  he  reluctantly  became 
ronin,  and  drifted  from  Yedo  to  Kioto  about  the  mid- 
dle of  the  last  century.  In  vain  did  he  seek  to  attach 
himself  to  the  service,  either  of  the  Mikado  or  to  that 
of  some  kugt ; for  the  tide  of  wealth  and  of  power  had 
set  toward  Yedo,  and  gloom  and  poverty  had  settled 
upon  the  ancient  court  of  the  empire. 

Seeking  in  vain  for  some  other  employment  that  should 
harmonize  with  his  notions  of  the  dignity  of  a samurai 
and  a patrician  of  the  realm,  he  finally  purchased,  with 
what  scanty  funds  he  possessed,  a small  piece  of  land 
beside  the  frothing  waters  that  rushed  headlong  from 
their  sources  in  Atago-Yama,  and  dashed  wildly  through 
the  glen  among  the  foot-hills  a few  miles  northwest  of 
Kioto.  There  he  built  a modest  cottage  and  established 
his  family  shrine.  Having  a thorough  knowledge  of  the 
native  literature, and  being  no  tyro  in  the  art  of  fencing, 
he  derived  a fair  living  from  giving  instruction  in  these 
branches  to  the  youth  of  Kioto.  He  also  had  a natural 
talent  for  sketching  and  for  painting  in  water-colors, 
and,  although  it  was  considered  far  beneath  the  dignity 
of  a samurai  to  earn  money  like  an  artisan,  yet  being 
endowed  with  a fair  share  of  good  sense  (which  revealed 
no  reason  why  the  lofty  notions  of  a class  that  furnished 
him  not  a grain  of  rice  should  be  held  precious  in  his 
sight),  he  deemed  it  best  to  pocket  his  dignity  and  to 
derive  all  the  revenue  possible  from  ornamenting  choice 
fans  and  screens  with  his  brush, — the  beauty  of  the 
surrounding  country  furnishing  many  inspired  scenes. 


The  Nakashima  Family. 


3 


Thus  employed,  he  passed  the  balance  of  his  days  in 
serene  contentment.  And  his  son,  following  his  ex- 
ample, gradually  accumulated  sufficient  funds  wherewith 
to  purchase  adjoining  land,  and  to  considerably  enhance 
the  value  of  the  estate  by  careful  horticulture. 

The  present  head  of  the  family,  grandson  of  the  origi- 
nal settler,  Nakashima  Yotori  by  name,  was  an  urbane 
gentleman  of  fifty  winters.  He  lived  in  the  old  home- 
stead, or  rather  upon  the  site  of  the  old  homestead, 
for  the  original  building  had  been  so  frequently  repaired 
that  there  was  but  little  of  the  former  material  left  in  it. 

Like  all  structures  in  Japan,  it  was  built  almost  en- 
tirely of  wood.  The  roof  was  tiled  ; the  gable  ends  were 
plastered  with  lime,  the  upper  story  had  a balcony  along 
its  front  side  overlooking  the  garden  and  the  stream  ; and 
along  the  edge  of  the  balcony  railing  was  a shelf  upon 
which  was  ranged  a row  of  porcelain  flower-pots  of 
various  colors  and  designs,  containing  chrysanthemums 
of  many  brilliant  hues,  and  also  containing  several  sprouts 
of  a species  of  thick-leaved  cactus  of  dwarfed  proportions, 
from  whose  broken  leaves  exuded  a thick  oil  that  was 
used  by  the  ladies  as  a pomatum  for  the  hair,  serving  to 
keep  it  in  shape  with  it*  gum-like  tenacity.  From  this 
balcony  a fine  view  of  the  glen  could  be  obtained. 
Along  the  front  and  along  the  back  of  the  lower  story  of 
the  house,  were  wide  verandas,  whose  polished  floors 
abundantly  testified  to  the  tidiness  of  the  worthy  house- 
wife ; and  the  ends  of  the  house  were  neatly  plastered  in 
white  in  the  spaces  between  the  broad  wooden  uprights 
and  the  cross-beams,  thus  presenting  a unique  panelled 
appearance  quite  pleasing  to  the  eye. 

The  rooms  in  the  house  were  separated,  not  by  parti- 
tions, but  by  s/iojees  (sliding  doors  made  of  wood  and 
paper),  set  loosely  in  grooves  so  as  to  render  them  easily 
removable  in  hot  weather.  The  floors  were  all  covered 
with  tatamis  (thick  rush  mats).  A broad  ladder  with 
wide  steps  instead  of  rounds  gives  access  to  the  upper 
story,  which  is  fitted  up  in  exactly  the  same  manner  as 
the  lower  one.  In  order  to  prevent  the  rain  driving 


4 


Mito  Yashiki. 


through  the  house  when  storms  chance  to  hurl  themselves 
against  either  of  its  exposed  sides,  deep  grooves  were 
placed  along  the  outer  edges  of  the  balconies  and  of  the 
verandas  into  which  may  be  slipped  ahme  doors  ( “ rain 
doors  ” made  of  light  wood).  At  nighttime  these  were 
always  brought  forth  from  the  closet  at  the  end  of  each 
balcony  and  at  the  end  of  each  veranda,  and  were  slid 
into  their  respective  places  and  bolted  there,  thus  making 
the  house  quite  dark  inside,  and  serving  not  only  to 
prevent  the  pouring  in  of  sudden  and  violent  tempests, 
but  also  to  obstruct  the  ingress  of  all  intruders.  As  a 
matter  of  course  the  house  had  neither  garret  nor  cellar, 
as  such  appurtenances  were  unknown  in  the  empire. 

The  road  that  leaves  Kioto  toward  the  northwest,  after 
winding  through  temple  grounds  and  groves  of  maple 
and  cherry-trees,  continues  its  devious  course  through 
several  miles  of  gradually  ascending  country  until  it 
merges  in  the  foot-hills  of  Atago-Yama  where,  when  it 
reaches  our  hamlet,  it  passes  beside  the  boxwood  hedge 
that  separates  the  front  yard  of  our  homestead  from  the 
highway.  Through  this  evergreen  barrier,  ingress  may 
be  obtained  by  means  of  a gateway,  whose  heavy  wooden 
portals  stand  ajar  from  daylight  until  nightfall,  giving  to 
passing  travellers  bright  glimpses  of  the  home-life  within. 

Entering  the  front  yard,  we  find  ourselves  facing  the 
veranda  where  the  O-kami-san  is  busily  engaged  in  sweep- 
ing off  the  dust — exemplary  housewife  as  she  is.  On  the 
right-hand  side  the  yard  is  separated  from  that  of  the 
next-door  neighbor  by  a hedge  of  hollyhock  shrubbery, 
while  on  the  left-hand  side  high  copses  of  camellia  bushes 
ranged  together  closely  in  a line  before  a closely  woven 
bamboo  fence  served  admirably  to  shut  off  intrusive  in- 
spection in  that  direction.  Upon  a bamboo  trellis  beside 
this  fence  there  crept  a morning-glory  vine,  while  in  the 
middle  of  the  yard  a grotesquely  trimmed  pine  tree  over- 
shadowed with  its  spreading  branches  a large  porcelain 
basin  full  of  water,  wherein  gold-fishes  were  sporting 
amid  the  shadows  cast  upon  the  tiny  waves  by  the  clouds 
and  leaves  overhead  ; and  copses  of  fragrant  olea  beside 


The  Nakashima  Family. 


5 


the  gateway  and  at  the  ends  of  the  veranda,  that  filled  the 
air  with  delicious  perfume  during  the  autumn  months, 
together  with  clumps  of  flowering  almonds  and  sweet- 
scented  jessamines,  gave  forth  perpetually  their  subtle 
charms,  and  abundantly  testified  to  the  taste  and  the  skill 
of  the  inmates  of  the  dwelling.  A stately  cherry-tree  be- 
side the  wood-lined  well  at  the  end  of  the  house  seemed 
buoyed  up  with  clouds  of  pink  and  white  blossoms, 
which  sprinkled  the  grass  with  showers  of  petals. 

At  the  back  of  the  house  the  ground  was  laid  out  in  a 
neat  garden,  where  were  carefully  cultivated  long  rows 
of  radishes  and  leeks.  A bamboo  fence  separated  this 
garden  from  the  adjoining  one,  and  also  from  the  girdle 
of  underbrush  that  skirted  the  dark  woods  upon  the 
steep  mountain-side  that  sloped  upwards  from  the  fence. 

The  scenery  surrounding  the  hamlet  was  subdued  and 
beautiful.  From  the  front  balcony  of  the  homestead  you 
gazed  upon  the  slopes  down  to  the  glittering  sands  of  the 
mountain  stream.  Deep  verdure  embowered  the  oppo- 
site side  of  the  glen,  where  cooling  cascades  among  the 
ravines  invited  during  the  hot  summer  months  throngs 
of  pleasure-seekers  from  the  sultry  city.  Numerous 
copses  of  feathery  bamboo  trees  appeared  like  nodding 
plumes  amid  the  darker  foliage  of  chestnut,  beech,  oak 
and  cryptomeria  that  screened  the  lairs  of  the  wild  boar 
and  the  retreats  of  the  deer,  which,  during  the  summer 
and  the  autumn  months,  invaded  the  precincts  of  the 
hamlet  and  devoured  more  than  their  fair  proportion  of 
the  sweet  potatoes  and  the  watermelons. 

Either  up  or  down  the  glen  the  view  was  circumscribed 
with  deeply  wooded  hills  and  with  towering  crags,  which 
sheltered  the  place  so  effectually  from  the  wintry  winds 
that  orange-trees  grew  around  the  hamlet,  and  the  sago- 
palm  flourished  beside  the  hedges,  and  the  roses, 
camellias,  and  chrysanthemums  bloomed  out-doors  in 
midwinter.  The  soft  mantle  of  snow  which,  at  rare  inter- 
vals, descended  upon  the  landscape,  faded  like  a dream 
before  the  powerful  rays  of  the  midday  sun.  The  stream 
was  never  frozen,  and  the  plash  of  its  waves  washing  the 


6 


Mito  Yashiki. 


sands  against  the  pebbles  and  the  boulders  in  its  chan- 
nel, filled  the  air  with  soft  whisperings,  which  the  children 
likened  to  the  murmurings  of  vast  throngs  of  monkeys 
in  mighty  convocation  amid  the  secluded  forests  in  the 
uplands  where  they  dwelt. 

But  let  us  leave  the  balcony  and  inspect  in  detail  the 
interior  arrangements  of  the  house,  beginning  with  the 
reception  room  down  stairs.  This  large  room  extends 
from  the  front  veranda  to  the  back  veranda.  As  we 
enter  it  from  the  front  yard,  we  have  on  our  left  hand  a 
couple  of  closets  in  which  the  bedding  has  been  stowed 
away  for  the  day.  A little  beyond,  on  the  same  side  of 
the  room,  is  a space  raised  a few  inches  above  the  floor, 
allotted  to  the  few  ornamental  things  usually  found  in 
native  houses,  and  which  is  usually  the  most  picturesque 
portion  of  the  interior  ; here  you  will  see  the  handsomely 
lacquered  sword-rack  ; here  also  is  the  sombre-looking 
lacquered  chest  containing  the  suit  of  armor  in  which 
Nakashima  Isami  fought  at  the  battle  of  Sekigahara,  two 
hundred  and  fifty-three  years  ago,  and  which  still  shows 
upon  the  massive  bronze  helmet  the  long  and  deep  scar 
left  by  the  keen  sword  of  some  powerful  warrior  of  the 
League,  whose  routed  legions  were  chased  by  the  relent- 
less Tokugawa  Iyeyas  far  into  the  night,  and  whose 
fierce  soldiers  frequently  turned  and  stretched  low  many 
an  ardent  pursuer  whose  heedless  zeal  had  carried  him 
away  from  the  supporting  body  of  troops  into  some  fatal 
ambuscade. 

Above  this  warlike  display  is  a shelf  holding  a pair  of 
blue  vases.  Above  this  again  are  two  brackets  whereon 
are  placed  two  handsomely  lacquered  boxes  containing 
writing  utensils,  seals,  and  correspondence.  While  yet 
higher  up,  across  the  top  of  the  space,  are  little  closets 
where  the  ladies  keep  their  best  dresses  and  choice 
girdles  ; each  lady  has  but  one  gala  suit,  which  will  serve 
for  many  years,  fearing  nothing  from  change  of  style  in 
a country  where  styles  vary  but  little  in  a century.  At 
each  corner  of  this  space  is  a post  composed  of  the 
trunk  of  a small  tree,  the  bark  of  which  has  not  been 


The  Nakashima  Family. 


7 


removed,  and  whose  knot-holes  have  been  polished  until 
they  shine.  The  charming  rusticity  of  this  place  is  sug- 
gestive of  the  primitive,  mode  of  living  in  primeval 
times,  when  saplings  and  trees  propped  up  the  thatch  of 
ancient  huts.  The  wall  beyond  the  closets  and  the 
sanctum  is  decorated  with  hanging  scrolls,  upon  which 
are  designs  of  birds,  flowers,  and  mountain  scenery,  and 
which,  as  the  breeze  plays  through  the  room,  gently  flut- 
ter from  the  wall  like  trailing  banners,  and  fall  back  into 
position,  tapping  it  with  the  ivory  ends  of  the  sticks  on 
which  they  are  mounted. 

On  the  opposite  side  of  the  room,  sliding  doors  sepa- 
rate us  from  two  smaller  rooms  : the  one  opening  on  the 
front  veranda  being  used  during  the  day  as  a place  for 
sewing,  smoking,  and  lounging,  and  during  the  night  as 
the  bedchamber  of  the  three  brothers  ; and  that  one 
which  opens  on  the  back  veranda  being  used  as  the 
dining-room,  and  occasionally  as  a sleeping-room.  Be- 
yond these  rooms,  in  a little  wing  attached  to  the  other 
end  of  the  house,  were  the  kitchen  and  the  bath-room. 
In  the  middle  of  the  floor  of  each  room  was  sunk  a 
granite  block,  which  had  been  hollowed  out  sufficiently 
to  admit  a few  handfuls  of  ashes  being  placed  therein  to 
serve  as  the  bed  for  little  heaps  of  burning  charcoal,  over 
which  the  hands  could  be  warmed  in  cold  weather. 

The  household  comprised  the  parents,  three  sons,  one 
daughter,  and  an  old  man-servant  whose  father  and 
grandfather  had  served  the  Nakashima  family  in  a simi- 
lar capacity.  When  Nakashima  Toyada  settled  at  the 
base  of  Atago-Yama,  he  took  a fancy  to  a young  wood- 
chopper  who  daily  passed  his  gateway  in  the  morning, 
armed  with  an  axe  and  a coil  of  rope,  on  his  way  up  to 
the  well  wooded  ravines  in  the  mountains,  to  gather 
fagots  and  fire-wood  for  the  city  market  ; and  in  the 
evening  he  had  always  noticed  how  cheerfully  he  trudged 
homeward,  with  his  heavy  load  of  wood  tied  upon  his 
back  ; and,  with  that  knowledge  of  human  nature  which 
his  military  experience  had  developed  in  him,  he  per- 
ceived in  this  youth  qualities  of  faithfulness  and  industry 


8 


Mito  Yashiki. 


which,  if  they  could  but  be  attached  to  his  own  interests 
and  to  those  of  his  family,  would  render  the  boy  a valu- 
able auxiliary  to  his  household.  Overtures  were  ac- 
cordingly made  to  the  young  mountain  boor,  who,  in 
consideration  of  food,  clothing,  and  wages  equivalent  to 
one  dollar  per  month,  was  induced  to  abandon  his  life 
among  the  ravines,  and  take  to  gardening  and  light 
household  duties,  which  avocations  proved  so  congenial 
to  his  tastes  that  old  age  found  him  still  thus  engaged  ; 
and  his  descendants  followed  his  example,  thus  making 
the  service  hereditary, — an  occurrence  by  no  means  un- 
common during  the  peaceful  times  of  Old  Japan. 

The  youngest  child  was  O-Hana,  ayoung  la$sof  fifteen 
summers,  who,  in  addition  to  being  the  household  pet, 
possessed  a comeliness  of  person  and  animation  of  feat- 
ures that  turned  the  heads  of  the  young  bloods  from  the 
city  to  that  extent,  that  the  exchequer  of  the  tea  booth  at 
the  head  of  the  glen  testified  handsomely  to  the  frequency 
of  their  saunterings  up  the  road  to  catch  glimpses  of  the 
witch  of  the  hamlet. 

Was  she  handsome  ? Not  according  to  your  ideas, 
perhaps,  my  Caucasian  friend.  Nevertheless,  she  was 
certainly  pretty.  It  is  true  that  her  jet-black  hair,  al- 
though done  up  in  a manner  that  might  have  met  your 
approval,  was  glistening  with  oily  juice  from  the  cactus 
leaves,  already  described  ; but  her  forehead  was  full,  fair, 
and  shapely  ; her  heavy  eyebrows  and  sparkling  black 
eyes  were  surely  handsome  ; the  nose  you  will  call  the 
weak  feature  of  her  face,  because  it  is  neither  Roman, 
Grecian,  nor  aquiline  in  profile,  and  is  rather  inclined  to 
flatness  at  the  bridge ; but  the  rosy  dimpled  cheeks,  the 
small  mirthful  mouth,  the  pearly  teeth,  and  the  round 
plump  chin  you  will  admit  to  be  very  pretty,  and  quite 
sufficient  to  excuse  the  pronounced  admiration  of  the 
Kioto  youth,  meandering  of  a summer’s  eve  along  the 
road  ; and,  finally,  you  must  admit  without  hesitation 
that  her  delicately  shaped  hands  and  feet  are  above 
criticism.  She  is  only  a little  over  five  feet  in  height ; 
but  her  demeanor  is  that  of  a refined  and  courteous 


The  Nakashivia  Family. 


9 


woman.  She  has  ceased  to  romp  through  the  hamlet 
with  childish  glee,  but  nothing  can  stop  her  chasing  the 
butterflies  through  the  garden  shrubbery.  One  gorgeous 
butterfly  in  particular  she  has  nick-named  Taiko-Sama, 
because  of  his  brilliant  colors  presenting  such  a warlike 
appearance,  resembling  an  army  with  many  banners. 
This  martial  fellow  she  chases  on  every  available  occa- 
sion : no  matter  what  her  occupation  may  be — whether 
it  be  rice-cooking,  clothes-mending,  or  even  the  formid- 
able attempt  to  satiate  her  marvellous  appetite  with 
bowls  of  steaming  rice, — she  drops  rice,  needle,  and 
chopsticks,  and  darts  off  in  wild  pursuit  of  Japan’s  most 
famous  warrior,  until  recalled  by  pangs  of  appetite,  or  by 
duty. 

Nor  can  lectures  on  propriety  induce  her  to  abandon 
her  favorite  pastime  of  battledoor  and  shuttlecock.  With 
wooden  tile  in  hand,  she  knocks  the  shuttlecock  over  the 
hedge  to  the  little  lady  in  the  adjoining  yard,  who  mer- 
rily sends  it  back  with  a hearty  stroke  until  the  continued 
clicking  of  the  two  battledoors  against  the  metallic  ball 
of  the  tiny  shuttlecock  beats  with  the  regularity  of  clock- 
work, to  be  disturbed  only  by  the  exultant  laughter  of 
that  one  who  triumphantly  lands  the  tuft  of  white 
feathers  in  her  adversary’s  domain. 

Our  young  lady’s  household  duties  are  not  of  a very 
onerous  nature.  At  daylight,  she  is  up  with  her  mother 
helping  to  slide  back  the  ahrni  doors.  Then  she  assists 
in  the  preparation  of  breakfast  : she  cuts  up  the  daikon 
into  dainty  slices  ; she  washes  out  the  rice  and  puts  it 
into  the  iron  pot  over  the  fire  ; she  broils  a carp  over  the 
glowing  coals  in  the  brazier,  and,  finally,  when  every 
thing  has  been  fully  prepared,  she  helps  to  serve,  the 
meal.  After  breakfast,  she  sweeps  out  all  the  rooms  and 
washes  off  the  verandas  before  settling  herself  down  on 
the  mats  for  a season  of  sewing  and  gossiping  with  her 
mother,  at  which  occupation  she  will  probably  be  inter- 
rupted by  the  young  lady  from  the  next  house,  who 
comes  in  to  compare  notes  on  their  recent  visit  to  the 
festival  at  the  Gihon  temple  in  the  city,  when  thousands 


IO 


Mito  Yashiki. 


of  people  crowded  in  from  the  country  and  thronged  the 
numerous  tea  booths  from  morn  till  eve,  feasting  on 
sweetmeats  and  oranges.  This  precious  season  of  amia- 
ble discourse  will  be  prolonged  until  the  shortening 
shadows  of  the  trees  and  shrubbery  announce  the 
approach  of  high  noon,  when  the  session  will  be  ad- 
journed in  order  to  make  preparation  for  dinner. 

In  the  afternoon  she  employs  her  time  as  seems  most 
agreeable  to  herself.  Perhaps  she  will  call  on  her  young 
neighbors  ; possibly  she  may  stroll  up  the  ravine  in 
search  of  wild  flowers  ; or  she  may  help  the  old  servant 
to  trim  the  bushes  and  the  hedges.  And  when  the  sun 
begins  to  approach  the  summit  of  Atago-Yama,  heralding 
the  speedy  return  of  her  father  and  brothers  from  the 
city,  she  hastens  to  aid  her  mother  in  preparing  the 
evening  meal.  And  with  the  closing  day,  the  ahmt 
doors  are  slid  together,  and  early  slumbers  settle  upon 
the  household.  Thus  passed  the  life  of  our  young  lady, 
like  the  merry  stream  coursing  through  the  glen,  unevent- 
ful and  happy  like  that  of  her  sisters  throughout  the 
land. 

Our  young  lady’s  mother  was  a kind  little  body  (she 
was  no  larger  than  ned-san  herself)  upon  whom  forty-five 
years  had  pressed  but  lightly.  Though  wrinkled  in 
forehead  and  face,  yet  her  hair  was  raven-hued,  and  the 
black  had  but  slightly  faded  from  her  mild  eyes.  It  was 
evident  that  in  her  youth  she  must  have  borne  a strong 
resemblance  to  her  daughter.  She  was  the  child  of  a 
retainer  of  one  of  the  kugts  in  Kioto.  She  had  met  her 
destined  husband  when  he  gave  fencing  lessons  to  her 
brothers  in  the  large  courtyard  of  her  father’s  house. 
The  daughters  of  samurai  in  feudal  times  frequently 
were  instructed  in  the  use  of  weapons,  and  you  will  not 
feel  shocked  to  know  that  she  also  took  lessons  in  the  use 
of  the  swords  (particularly  of  the  short  one),  and  that  she 
learned  all  the  motions  of  the  graceful  and  pretty  spear 
exercise.  Nor  will  it  much  surprise  you  to  be  informed 
that  at  the  age  of  eighteen  she  married  her  instructor  and 
admirer,  and  followed  him  to  the  hamlet  among  the 


The  Nakashima  Family. 


1 1 


ravines,  where  twenty-seven  years  of  wedded  life  had 
slipped  away  quietly  and  peacefully. 

The  three  sons  were  hardy  young  fellows  of  somewhat 
diverse  temperaments.  The  youngest  one,  Kunisaburo, 
was  just  entering  upon  his  eighteenth  year.  He  was 
rather  tall  and  slim,  yet  agile  and  muscular  in  a high 
degree,  being  very  skilful  in  fencing  and  archery.  He 
was  gay  and  vivacious  as  became  his  years,  but  there  was 
no  viciousness  in  his  nature.  The  second  son,  Junzo, 
was  twenty-one  years  of  age.  He  was  rather  low  in 
stature,  but  he  was  powerfully  built  ; and  he  was  as  wiry 
and  quick  as  a cat.  He  was  put  together  upon  the  native 
ideal  of  a soldier.  In  fact,  in  the  fencing  arena,  he  had 
not  his  equal  in  Kioto,  although  some  of  the  long-armed 
samurai  from  Aidzu,  comprising  the  garrison  in  the 
S/iiro,  allowed  him  to  score  but  few  points  against  then? 
in  the  bouts.  He  was  his  father’s  favorite  assistant  in 
teaching  the  sword  and  spear  exercises  to  the  youth  in 
Kioto  ; for  the  old  gentleman  was  becoming  too  old  and 
rheumatic  to  bend  and  unbend  himself  with  the  great 
quickness  required  in  delivering  the  terrific  cuts  and 
thrusts.  He  would,  therefore,  sit  upon  the  veranda  over- 
looking the  combatants,  and  would  give  forth  a series  of 
lectures  composed  of  principles  derived  from  his  many 
years  of  experience  ; which  principles  would  then  be 
practically  illustrated  by  his  son  and  the  pupil,  pitted 
against  each  other  in  the  courtyard.  While  the  comba- 
tants rested  from  their  vigorous  exertions,  he  smoked  his 
pipe  and  discussed  the  battles  0/  Nobunaga  and  Hide- 
yoshi  with  the  master  of  the  house. 

The  eldest  son,  Tomokichi,  was  twenty-five  years  of 
age.  Although  he  was  an  expert  swordsman  and 
frequently  aided  his  father  in  giving  instruction  in  the 
use  of  the  foils,  nevertheless  his  tastes  did  not  run  in  that 
direction.  In  build  and  features  he  somewhat  resembled 
the  second  son  ; but  the  resemblance  ended  there.  He 
was  thoughtful,  reserved,  and  studious.  He  was  well 
read  in  the  history  of  the  empire,  in  the  meagre  poetry  of 
the  nation,  and  in  the  light  romance  literature  descriptive 


I 2 


Mito  Yashiki. 


for  the  most  part  of  famous  duels  and  feuds  between 
rival  clans  in  the  Yedoj \ashikis  or  when  coming  in  colli- 
sion upon  the  Tokaido.  But  above  every  thing  he 
thirsted  for  information  regarding  foreign  peoples  and 
countries, — a thirst,  in  fact,  that  was  characteristic  of  a 
large  number  of  his  countrymen.  He  diligently  ransacked 
all  the  circulating  literature  in  the  city  for  any  morsel  of 
information  relating  to  the  unknown  regions  beyond  the 
vast  waters  encircling  his  native  islands. 

So  ardent  was  he  in  his  pursuit  of  knowledge  in  this 
direction,  that  on  one  occasion  when  the  Dutch  Embassy 
passed  through  Kioto  on  its  return  to  Nagasaki  from 
Yedo,  where  it  had  been  rendering  its  periodical  homage 
to  the  Shogun,  he  clandestinely  visited  the  hotel  where 
the  Dutchmen  and  their  suite  were  staying,  and  took 
abundant  notes  on  their  personal  appearance  and  pecu- 
liarities ; and  on  the  occasion  of  the  next  visit,  he  was 
fortunate  enough  to  find  one  of  his  father’s  friends 
attached  to  the  guards,  and,  through  his  influence  he  was 
able  to  secure  a small  chart  of  the  world.  This  transac- 
tion had  to  be  conducted  with  profound  secrecy,  for,  had 
the  authorities  been  aware  of  what  was  going  on,  the  head 
of  our  young  friend,  together  with  that  of  his  coadjutor, 
would  speedily  have  fallen  into  the  same  pit. 

Hiding  the  precious  document  under  his  garment,  he 
quietly  slipped  out  of  the  hotel  and  hastened  homeward 
with  wild  delight,  and  hid  the  trophy  in  his  closet 
beneath  the  lacquered  chest  containing  his  few  worldly 
possessions.  Whenever  he  could  be  quite  sure  that  no 
member  of  the  household  would  come  up-stairs,  he 
would  there  spread  it  out  on  the  mats  for  study.  As  he 
had  taken  the  precaution  to  mark  the  principal  places  in 
native  characters,  he  found  the  map  quite  intelligible. 
By  degrees  the  members  of  the  family  were  let  into  the 
secret,  and  their  profound  agitation  was  soon  merged 
into  feelings  of  intense  curiosity  and  delight  at  the  mys- 
terious information  conveyed  by  this  colored  paper. 
P'rom  that  time  the  chart  became  the  treasured  secret  of 
the  Nakashima  family. 


The  Nakashivia  Family. 


*3 


Upon  another  occasion,  during  one  of  his  rambles 
among  the  book-stores,  he  found  in  a heap  of  discarded 
printed  matter  a roll  of  manuscript  which  appeared  to 
be  a translation  into  Japanese  of  portions  of  some  work 
explaining  the  general  principles  of  some  foreign  creed. 
It  may  have  been  in  the  library  of  some  French  or  Por- 
tugese priest  in  the  old  days  when  Xavier  and  the  Jesuits 
were  welcomed  to  Kioto ; or  it  may  have  been  translated 
from  the  books  of  some  Dutchman  in  Deshima  at 
Nagasaki  by  some  native  interpreter,  to  gratify  the  curi- 
osity of  some  inland  friend.  Eagerly  purchasing  the 
document,  he  took  it  home  and  held  a family  consulta- 
tion as  to  its  exact  purport.  It  speedily  dawned  upon 
them  that  it  was  an  exposition  of  the  dreaded  teachings 
of  the  sect  designated  Christian,  against  which  there  had 
been  promulgated  by  the  Shogun,  two  hundred  years 
before,  laws  written  in  blood  ; against  the  introduction 
of  which  within  the  empire  the  seal  of  death  had  been 
placed  ; and  against  whose  God  defiance  had  been  hurled 
and  sentence  of  death  had  been  pronounced  in  case  he 
should  dare  to  trespass  on  the  sacred  soil  of  the  realm. 

To  keep  the  document  within  the  family  after  having 
arrived  at  a full  comprehension  of  its  meaning,  would 
place  the  entire  household  under  the  ban  of  death.  And, 
even  as  the  matter  stood,  it  was  more  than  probable 
that,  in  case  the  document  were  delivered  up  to  the 
authorities,  and  an  investigation  as  to  its  origin  were  in- 
stituted, the  frightened  bookseller  would  disclaim  ever 
having  had  it  in  his  possession,  and  the  burden  of  ac- 
counting for  its  appearance  would  thus  be  shifted  upon 
the  melancholy  Nakashima  family,  where  it  would  rest 
heavily,  leading,  perchance,  to  torture  and  death.  The 
realization  of  this  position  staggered  the  family  and  cast 
a deep  gloom  over  their  spirits  for  many  days.  # It  was 
finally  decided  to  keep  the  matter  quiet,  to  enshrine  the 
luckless  document  among  the  treasured  secrets  of  the 
family,  and  to  relegate  it  to  the  secluded  chest  with  the 
chart.  At  the  same  time  the  members  of  the  family 
lodged  a vehement  protest  against  any  further  turning 


H 


Mito  Yashiki. 


of  their  peace  of  mind  upside  down  in  gratifying 
thirst  for  knowledge  ; and  the  head  of  the  house  felt 
compelled  to  mildly  intimate  that,  while  it  was  highly 
commendable  for  a young  man  to  cultivate  literary  tastes, 
yet  care  should  be  used  to  select  such  literature  as  did 
not  imperil  the  lives  of  his  kindred. 

Such  was  the  Nakashima  family.  Although  I have 
not  entered  into  a detailed  description  of  the  worthy 
sire,  yet  I imagine  that  you  are  pretty  familiar  with  him 
in  view  of  the  side  lights  that  have  been  cast  upon  him. 
He  was  unusually  tall  for  a native, — lacking  but  one  inch 
of  six  feet.  Descended  from  an  ancestry  of  warriors, 
inheriting  a strong  physique,  which  he  had  further 
strengthened  by  many  years  of  vigorous  exercise  with 
the  heavy  foils,  he  was  a fine  specimen  of  Japanese 
manhood.  Brought  up  amid  delightful  scenery,  and  liv- 
ing in  the  beautiful  climate  of  Yamashiro,  his  tempera- 
ment was  serene  and  happy. 

Delightful  indeed  was  the  climate.  While  upon  the 
northern  slopes  of  the  lofty  mountain  ranges — not 
seventy  miles  away, — the  snow  packed  six  feet  deep  in 
the  village  streets,  and  the  people  shivered  beneath 
heavy  quilts  during  the  violence  of  the  wintry  gales  that 
swept  across  the  Japan  Sea  from  Siberia,  here,  upon 
the  southern  slopes  of  this  same  mountain  range,  shel- 
tered from  the  stinging  blasts  of  the  north,  there  reigned 
a climate  matchless  for  salubrity  and  mildness,  where 
flowers  bloomed  in  midwinter,  where  the  siestas  of  the 
hot  summers  were  cooled  by  breezes  from  the  Pacific, 
where  spring  clothed  the  hills  and  valleys  with  deepest 
verdure,  and  where  autumn  was  a veritable  paradise. 
Removed  from  the  pageantry  and  pomp  of  court  and 
camp,  he  had  developed  a thoughtful  and  studious  spirit 
that  had  well  versed  itself  in  the  doctrines  of  Shinto, 
Buddha,  and  Confucius  ; and,  though  having  but  little 
regard  for  the  precepts  contained  in  any  of  these  creeds, 
yet  he  rather  leaned  toward  Confucianism. 

The  principle  of  rigid  obedience  of  children  toward 
parents,  of  subordinates  toward  superiors,  of  the  young 


The  Nakashima  Family. 


*5 


toward  the  old,  exactly  suited  his  military  tastes  and 
ideas.  Nevertheless  he  prided  himself  on  being  unfet- 
tered by  any  creed,  of  being  a free  and  bold  thinker, 
and  of  possessing  a rugged  and  stoical  nature.  Toward 
friends  he  was  courteous  and  obliging;  toward  enemies 
he  was  as  unrelenting  in  his  hostility  as  death  itself. 
While  extracting  from  life  all  possible  enjoyment,  yet 
he  held  death  in  supreme  and  utter  contempt.  Although 
he  was  a kind  husband  and  father,  yet  he  affected  an 
utter  indifference  for  the  fair  sex,  deeming  their  ensnar- 
ing charms  beneath  the  notice  of  a soldier’s  mind,  and 
but  leading  onward  to  enervation  and  debauch. 

He  represented  a type  of  stoics,  indeed  rare  in  old 
Japan,  yet  a type  that  really  existed  even  amid  the  wild- 
est corruptions  of  feudalism,  and  which  ever  served  as  a 
sobering  influence  on  the  levity  and  the  licentiousness 
of  the  times  when  the  carnival  of  vice  prevailed  through- 
out the  land.  It  was  a type  that  was  strongly  atheistical 
in  all  its  tendencies.  It  was  a type  combining  what 
would  seem  to  us  many  incongruous  elements, — reckless 
courage,  relentless  hate,  contemptible  treachery,  fiendish 
cruelty,  unutterable  contempt  for  weakness,  supreme 
veneration  for  power,  unwavering  loyalty  for  friends, 
amiable  condescension  toward  their  families,  contempt 
for  violent  death,  mingled  with  superstitious  dread  at  the 
subtle  and  mysterious  encroachments  of  disease  (not 
above  appealing  to  incantations  and  exorcisms  at  the 
hands  of  quacks  and  bonzes ),  vast  respect  for  superior 
powers,  combined  with  a flat  refusal  to  recognize  any 
moral  principle  or  law  in  the  universe  that  could  bind 
them  against  their  inclinations  ; abstemious  in  diet,  yet 
indulging  unhesitatingly  in  mad  revels  when  occasion 
required  ; while  honestly  intending  to  cultivate  rigid  and 
austere  virtues,  yet  never  considering  themselves  bound 
by  any  scruples  of  conscience  when  it  became  expedient 
to  cast  aside  integrity  and  principle  ; — verily,  a queer 
combination  of  physical  bravery  and  moral  cowardice. 

Does  not  this  type  remind  you  of  a house  built  on 
shifting  sands  ? It  was  capable  under  favorable  circum- 


Mito  Yashiki. 


16 

stances  of  performing  many  grand  deeds  ; but  under 
adverse  conditions  the  moral  and  ethical  structure  that 
it  had  raised  would  be  shown  to  be  without  foundation. 
Ah  ! Quietly  and  gently  flowed  the  stream  among  the 
sequestered  glens  and  remote  villages  of  the  empire,  but 
turbid  and  troubled  were  the  waves  amid  the  contami- 
nating influences  of  great  centres  of  population.  Such 
was  Nakashima  Yotori — a genial  and  amiable  pagan. 


CHAPTER  II. 


KIOTO  IN  THE  YEAR  1853. 

In  the  year  1853  Kioto  was  probably  the  most  secluded 
capital  city  in  the  world.  Situated  in  a lovely  valley  near 
the  southern  end  of  Lake  Biwa,  in  the  heart  of  the  main 
island  of  the  Japan  group,  it  was  screened  from  the  gaze 
of  America  by  five  thousand  miles  of  ocean  billows,  from 
the  scrutiny  of  Asia  by  tempestuous  seas  and  rock-bound 
coasts,  and  from  the  commercial  enterprise  of  Europe  by 
intervening  continents  and  by  many  thousand  leagues  of 
waves  ; and,  in  coalition  with  these  formidable  barriers 
of  nature,  there  brooded  within  the  council  chambers  of 
the  Yedo  castle  the  fierce  spirit  of  the  Tokugawa  House 
that  had  hurled  defiance  at  humanity,  and  sealed  with 
blood,  two  centuries  before,  the  gates  of  the  empire 
against  the  universe.  Far  removed  from  the  great  high- 
ways of  commerce,  the  profound  repose  of  Kioto  was 
not  even  disturbed  by  the  appearance  at  rare  intervals  of 
ill-starred  barks  that  tempests  chanced  to  drive  upon 
those  inhospitable  shores. 

But,  as  present  conditions  are  best  understood  in  the 
light  of  past  events,  let  us  change  the  scene  and  go  back 
twenty-five  centuries,  to  the  time  when  native  history 
begins.  The  first  vision  that  rises  to  our  view  is  sylvan  i 
in  its  aspect.  I see  a vast  woodland — a virgin  forest — 
covering  the  entire  province  of  Yamashiro,  clothing  the 
mountain  ranges  to  their  very  summits,  and  stretching 
many  hundred  miles  away  to  the  distant  waves  of  the 
encompassing  seas.  Here  in  the  valley  of  Yamashiro 
grow  the  pine,  the  oak,  the  beech,  the  camphor  tree,  the 
lordly  cryptomeria,  and  the  mighty  kayaki,  whose  colos- 


17 


i8 


Mito  Yashiki. 


sal  trunk  is  destined  to  form  in  coming  centuries  a stately 
pillar  in  some  vast  temple.  Here  the  climbing  vines  of 
wild  wistaria  drape  the  boughs  with  lavender-colored 
festoons,  and  the  copses  of  feathery  bamboos  grow  beside 
the  pools  and  the  damp  margin  of  the  stream. 

From  its  sources  in  the  northern  range,  the  Kamo- 
gawa  (River  of  the  Wild  Ducks)  pours  its  torrents 
through  the  underbrush  southward  toward  the  sea.  Here 
dwell  the  aboriginal  Ainos,  the  heavily-bearded  savages 
whose  ancestors  came  from  the  far  north  and  had  spread 
themselves  southward  over  all  the  islands  in  sparsely 
peopled  settlements. 

Along  the  course  of  the  stream,  wherever  long  and 
wide  stretches  of  sandy  soil  appear,  and  also  in  the 
woods  where  natural  clearings  occur,  and  upon  the  hills 
and  mountain  slopes  where  springs  gush  forth  from  their 
rocky  fastnesses, — there  cluster  the  huts  and  the  wigwams 
of  the  Ainos.  Simple  structures  indeed  are  they, — fragile 
frames  of  saplings,  covered  with  bark,  with  skins  of  wild 
animals,  and  with  coarse  thatch  plucked  among  the 
sedges.  With  barbed  flint  they  spear  the  carp  and  the 
trout  in  the  shoals  of  the  river  ; with  clubs,  stones, 
arrows,  and  sharpened  poles  they  hunt  the  bear,  the 
wolf,  the  badger,  the  deer,  the  wild  boar,  the  fox,  and 
the  monkey  ; while  with  the  sacred  spark,  brought  per- 
chance from  some  volcano,  the  busy  squaws  send  the 
curling  smoke  above  the  tree-tops  to  warn  the  absent 
Nimrods  of  the  approach  of  the  evening  meal.  Ah  ! in 
those  days  the  centuries  passed  as  if  they  had  been  but 
decades.  The  years  sped  along  unregistered  and  un- 
chronicled. Spring  was  known  by  the  budding  of  leaves, 
autumn  was  known  by  the  gorgeous  colors  of  the  forests, 
and  winter  was  heralded  by  the  snow-capped  mountain 
peaks  and  by  the  myriads  of  wild  ducks  coming  from  the 
northern  shores.  Immured  in  forest  solitudes,  living  on 
the  spoils  of  the  chase,  almost  entirely  ignorant  of  agri- 
culture,— so  lived  unknown  generations  of  aborigines. 

But  the  scene  fades  away.  Fifteen  centuries  have 
fled.  And,  lo  ! the  second  vision  rises  to  our  view.  I 


Kioto  in  the  Year  1853. 


19 


see  the  surface  of  the  land  covered  with  well  tilled  fields, 
with  villages,  with  groves,  and  with  shrines.  I see  be- 
side the  shoals  of  the  Kamogawa  the  white  walls  and 
the  heavily  tiled  roof  of  the  imperial  palace,  surrounded 
by  a city  whose  dimensions  attain  unto  a full  square 
league.  What  has  wrought  this  change  ? A race  of  nut- 
brown  warriors  from  the  archipelago  beneath  the  tropics, 
borne  to  the  southern  shores  of  the  Japan  islands  on  the 
mighty  current  of  the  Black  Stream,  overran  the  land 
and  drove  the  aborigines  northward.  They  cleared  the 
country,  and  then  Inari,  the  mythical  fox-god,  brought 
in  his  mouth  from  China  a tuft  of  the  rice-plant,  which 
the  people  planted  in  their  fields,  and  filled  the  land  with 
abundant  crops  ; and  the  picturesque  shrines  scattered 
through  the  groves  have  been  erected  in  his  honor  ; there 
is  he  venerated  and  worshipped  ; and  when  in  the  gloam- 
ing his  flitting  form  is  seen  threading  the  narrow  cause- 
ways through  the  rice-fields,  he  is  believed  to  be  bent 
upon  some  errand  of  mercy,  as  when  in  days  of  yore  he 
left  the  portals  of  Cathay  and  skimmed  the  sea-girt  isles, 
bearing  his  priceless  gift  between  his  teeth. 

Thus  the  people  were  enabled  to  derive  their  suste- 
nance from  the  ground,  and  were  no  longer  bound  down 
to  a mere  animal  existence  by  the  uncertainties  of  a 
livelihood  dependent  on  the  chase.  Agriculture  and 
horticulture  made  rapid  progress.  Architecture  was 
speedily  developed.  These  favorable  conditions  gave 
birth  to  literature  ; the  classics  of  Confucius  were  intro- 
duced from  China,  and  were  extensively  studied  ; pot- 
tery, woven  fabrics,  and  paper  were  manufactured  ; and 
cutlery  and  bronze  ware  were  most  skilfully  made.  And 
finally,  in  the  year  793  a.d.,  the  Emperor  Kwammu 
abandoned  Nara,  and  selected  the  little  village  of  Uda, 
at  the  foot  of  the  hills  on  the  east  side  of  the  Kamo- 
gawa, and  founded  Kioto. 

And  now,  in  the  year  1853  of  the  Christian  Era,  a 
thousand  years  after  its  foundation,  we  have  before  us 
the  romantic  city  of  Kioto.  The  primeval  woodland  has 
disappeared  from  valley  and  from  mountain  slope.  Well 


20 


Alito  Yashiki. 


trimmed  forests  cover  the  mountains  ; and  innumerable 
groves  of  maple  and  cherry-trees  are  scattered  over  the 
foot-hills  and  among  the  glens,  gardens,  and  parks  sur- 
rounding the  city  ; while  the  rose,  the  lily,  the  lotus,  the 
chrysanthemum,  and  the  wistaria  fill  every  yard  with 
beauty  and  fragrance.  The  Kamogawa,  no  longer  en- 
cumbered with  driftwood,  nor  harassed  with  impeding 
underbrush  entangling  its  shores,  has  spread  itself  on 
either  side  beyond  its  ancient  limits,  until  it  has  become 
a broad,  shallow  river,  requiring  five  long  wooden  bridges 
to  span  its  shores  During  heavy  rains  it  becomes  a 
deep  and  rapid  stream,  rushing  through  the  city  with 
tremendous  velocity  ; but  during  the  summer  it  becomes 
so  shallow  and  peaceable  that  mats  are  spread  upon  its 
sands  and  low  platforms  are  built  over  its  shallow  waves, 
and  the  entire  leisure  element  of  the  city  turns  out  to  sit 
cross-legged  in  the  bed  of  the  stream,  to  make  merry  and 
to  enjoy  the  cool  breezes  that  surge  up  and  down  the 
channel.  The  stream  runs  due  north  and  south,  and  fully 
three  quarters  of  the  city  will  be  found  upon  the  western 
bank  where  the  level  ground  stretches  away  for  seven  or 
eight  miles  before  reaching  broken  ground  ; while  upon 
the  eastern  bank  but  a few  minutes  of  walking  will  lead 
to  foot-hills. 

The  city  is  laid  out  in  a very  regular  manner.  The 
streets  cross  each  other  at  right  angles,  running  east  and 
west  by  north  and  south.  They  are  not  paved  ; they  are 
wide  and  clean,  and  the  system  of  drainage  is  entirely 
above  ground,  in  gutters  that  line  each  side  of  the  high- 
way. The  houses  are  but  two  stories  high,  and  are  all 
built  of  wood.  The  suburbs,  the  foot-hills,  and  the  sur- 
rounding mountains  are  filled  with  vast  temples,  superb 
monasteries,  parks,  gardens,  and  villas, — a girdle  of  ro- 
mantic beauty  and  magnificence  such  as  no  other  city  in 
the  world  can  boast  of. 

In  and  around  this  city  of  four  hundred  thousand  in- 
habitants there  are  no  less  than  four  thousand  temples 
and  monasteries,  mostly  Buddhist.  If  we  calculate  that 
upon  an  average  there  are  twenty-five  priests  attached  to 


Kioto  in  the  Year  1853.  2 r 

each  temple  and  to  each  monastery,  then  there  must  be 
fully  one  hundred  thousand  of  these  shaven  gentlemen  in 
Kioto.  And  they  seem  to  have  cast  over  the  entire  popu- 
lation such  a spell  of  lassitude  and  indifference  to  worldly 
occupations  that  the  reputation  of  the  citizens  for  pride, 
laziness,  and  dilettanteism  stands  unmatched  throughout 
the  empire.  There  are,  however,  extensive  industries 
carried  on  in  a leisurely  manner.  The  usual  trades  and 
mercantile  occupations  find  free  scope  to  act ; and  the 
special  manufactures  of  silk,  bronze,  porcelain,  and  em- 
broidery are  justly  and  widely  celebrated  for  their  ex- 
quisite and  unsurpassed  workmanship.  Yet  time  is 
considered  of  no  consequence  to  anybody,  and  the 
artisans  are  notoriously  slow  in  executing  orders  for 
work,  as  they  are  perpetually  running  off  on  some  picnic 
or  celebrating  some  one  of  the  innumerable  fete  days  at 
the  neighboring  temples. 

Since  the  laying  of  the  foundation  of  the  city  marvel- 
lous changes  have  marked  the  history  of  the  world.  The 
Normans  conquered  England  ; the  Crusades  convulsed 
Christendom  ; Columbus  discovered  America ; hardy 
mariners  circumnavigated  the  globe  ; a mighty  nation 
sprang  into  existence  in  the  North  American  wilderness, — 
but  what  cared  the  Kioto  people  for  all  that?  Did  not 
the  Mikado,  the  descendant  of  the  sun-goddess,  dwell  in 
their  lovely  city  ? And  were  not  they  all  the  descend- 
ants of  the  gods,  and  therefore  inherently  superior  to  the 
rest  of  mankind,  who  had  probably  descended  from  in- 
ferior deities,  or  from  beasts  ? Why  should  the  vulgar 
bickerings  of  outside  barbarians  in  any  way  interest  the 
Japanese?  Smoke  your  pipe,  quaff  your  tea,  loiter  away 
whole  days  in  the  theatre ; frequent  the  wrestling 
matches  ; don  your  gala  dress  and  drink  sake  whenever 
the  temple  in  your  district  has  a fete  day  ; revel  in 
carousal  and  debauch  as  far  as  your  means  will  allow' ; 
take  but  languid  interest  in  public  affairs ; demolish 
strangers  with  refined  hauteur  and  cultured  repartee, — and 
occasionally  work.  That  was  the  correct  style  in  Kioto 
in  1853.  With  a licentious  court  and  a lazy,  sensual 


22 


Mito  Yashiki. 


priesthood,  the  people  surely  did  not  have  much  to  ele- 
vate them. 

In  the  northern  part  of  the  city,  a few  hundred  yards 
west  of  the  shoals  of  the  river,  stood  the  Gosho,  the 
palace  of  the  Mikado.  It  comprised  a collection  of 
structures  in  the  midst  of  parks  and  gardens  that  covered 
twenty-six  acres  of  land.  The  entire  place  was  enclosed 
within  rectangular  walls  pierced  by  six  gates,  one  of 
which  opened  on  the  north,  one  on  the  east,  one  on  the 
south,  and  three  on  the  west.  These  walls  were  quite 
unique.  They  were  about  ten  feet  high,  were  very  broad, 
and  were  heavily  tiled.  They  sloped  inward  slightly 
from  base  to  roof.  The  framework  of  the  walls  was  com- 
posed of  wood,  and  the  large  rectangular  spaces  between 
the  uprights  and  the  cross-beams  were  plastered  so  as  to 
present  the  singular  appearance  of  an  unpainted  wooden 
wall  having  large  white  panels  and  a black  cap.  As  a 
defence  they  were  comparatively  useless  ; but  to  the  ob- 
servant mind  the  well  grained  wood  and  the  dazzling 
plaster  told  the  history  of  the  Mikado’s  fortunes,  and  be- 
spoke the  simplicity  of  the  primitive  court. 

The  Shogun  and  the  Daimios  surrounded  themselves 
with  thrice-moated  castles,  whose  ramparts  were  of  hewn 
stone  and  sodded  embankments  ; but  the  Gosho  required 
no  moat,  because  its  style  of  architecture  antedated  the 
age  of  stone  by  many  centuries,  and  went  back  to  the 
patriarchal  days  when  the  Mikado  lived  among  his  peo- 
ple in  his  simple  rustic  residence.  Did  not  the  islands  of 
Dai-Nippon  and  the  denizens  thereof  even  now  belong  to 
the  descendant  of  the  sun-goddess  ? Why,  then,  should 
he  abandon  the  simplicity  of  his  ancestors  and  imitate  the 
innovations  of  the  Shogun,  who  might  well  dread  the 
people  because  of  his  cruelty  and  tyranny  ? The  wigwam 
of  the  sachem,  unmoated,  stood  beside  the  shoals  of  the 
Kamogawa  free  of  access  to  the  tattooed  savages  ; the 
thatched  cottages  of  his  descendants,  unmoated,  stood 
for  many  centuries  amid  the  groves  and  the  gardens  of 
Yamato,  unmolested  ; therefore,  it  became  the  ancient 
dynasty,  as  its  imperial  power  has  been  wrested  away  by 


Kioto  in  the  Year  1853.  23 

usurping  servants,  to  screen  itself  within  the  simple 
wooden  barriers  of  the  Gosho,  until  the  time  should  come 
to  fling  open  the  gates  and  to  go  forth  to  resume  the 
sway  of  empire.  Aye  ! keep  the  gates  closed.  Let  not 
the  world  cast  its  vulgar  gaze  upon  the  humiliation  of  the 
ancient  dynasty. 

Many  palaces  have  stood  within  the  precincts  of  the 
Gosho.  The  first  one  was  built  about  793  a.d.  In 
1177  it  was  destroyed  by  fire.  The  second  one  was 
destroyed  in  a similar  manner  in  the  year  1249.  The 
third  one  was  destroyed  a few  years  later.  And  during 
the  seventeenth  and  eighteenth  centuries  five  successive 
palaces  were  thus  destroyed.  These  conflagrations  were 
sometimes  occasioned  by  the  carelesness  of  people  within 
the  palace,  and  sometimes  they  were  started  by  warring 
factions  in  the  city  during  their  fierce  struggles  for 
supremacy.  These  fires,  when  once  started  among  the 
thousands  of  tinder-boxes  outside  the  palace  walls, 
speedily  gathered  great  headway,  and  would  roll  their 
vast  waves  of  flame  to  the  uttermost  limits  of  the  city, 
overleaping  every  obstruction  and  storming  every  barrier 
with  fiery  assault. 

Within  the  walls  of  the  Gosho  you  will  find  consider- 
able massive  architecture  and  some  pretty  garden  land- 
scape. The  buildings  are  all  of  wood.  They  are  but  one 
story  high,  and  have  immensely  heavy  roofs  as  a protec- 
tion against  being  thrown  down  by  the  jarring  tremors 
of  earthquakes.  In  the  southern  part  of  the  enclosed 
quadrangle  stands  the  Secluded  Purple  Hall,  a building 
about  one  hundred  feet  long  by  sixty  feet  deep,  and 
facing  the  southern  side  of  the  enclosure.  Within  its 
lofty  chambers  important  ceremonies  are  held.  Here  the 
Mikados  are  enthroned,  and  here  they  grant  audiences 
on  New  Year’s  Day. 

Northeast  of  this  hall  a corridor  will  lead  you  to  a 
smaller  building,  where  is  kept  a copy  of  the  sacred  mir- 
ror, with  which  the  sun-goddess  was  enticed  from  her 
cave  at  some  remote  cjcle  of  time,  and  which  she 
bestowed  upon  the  Mikado’s  ancestor,  together  with  a 


24 


Mito  Yashiki. 


sword  and  a stone  as  insignia  of  authority.  Northwest  of 
the  Purple  Hall  stands  the  Pure  and  Cool  Hall  (so  chris- 
tened because  of  a stream  of  water  that  bubbles  beneath 
its  steps),  a building  about  sixty  feet  by  forty,  and  facing 
eastward,  wherein  levees  were  held,  and  also  wherein 
were  performed  on  great  fete  days  the  sacred  rites  connec- 
ted with  Shintoism.  Northeast  of  this  chastely  christened 
hall  stands  the  Lesser  Palace,  a building  about  seventy 
feet  by  forty,  and  also  facing  eastward,  and  looking  out 
upon  a pretty  garden  filled  with  evergreen  shrubbery,  and 
containing  a miniature  lake.  Within  its  handsome  au- 
dience chambers  his  Majesty  receives  the  high  officials  of 
his  court  and  the  priests  of  Shinto  and  of  Buddha. 

North  of  this  stands  the  August  Study,  a building  of 
nearly  the  same  dimensions  as  the  Lesser  Palace,  and 
also  facing  eastward.  In  this  beautiful  suite  of  apart- 
ments, the  Mikado  and  his  court  listen  to  lectures  on 
Chinese  literature,  to  dissertations  on  poetry  and  music, 
and  to  instruction  upon  whatever  subject  he  may  desire 
information.  Northward  again  we  find  a building  about 
fifty  feet  by  thirty,  wherein  are  held  theatrical  perform- 
ances for  the  amusement  of  the  court.  Northward  again  we 
find  the  imperial  palace,  wherein  the  Mikado  resides.  It 
is  a large  building  (ninety  feet  by  seventy-four)  facing 
the  east, — the  source  of  light  and  the  quarter  whence  came 
the  imperial  dynasty. 

This  palace  contains  eleven  rooms.  The  middle  one 
on  the  east  side  was  his  Majesty’s  sitting-room  ; and 
directly  behind  it  was  his  bedroom  ; while  on  all  sides 
he  was  surrounded  by  suites  of  rooms  filled  with  attend- 
ants, so  that  he  was  guarded  from  all  intrusion.  In  a 
closet  near  the  imperial  chambers  were  the  mystic  stone 
and  a copy  of  the  sword  forming  part  of  the  insignia  of 
the  imperial  authority.  Near  the  northern  end  of  the 
palace  were  two  pleasure  pavilions,  where  tea  could  be 
served,  poetry  could  be  composed,  the  miniature  land- 
scape of  the  garden  could  be  enjoyed,  or  where,  per- 
chance, a longing  gaze  could  be  cast  upon  the  hazy  blue 
of  the  distant  mountains.  Tne  palace  of  the  Empress 


Kioto  in  the  Year  1853. 


25 


was  quite  distant  from  that  of  the  Mikado.  It  was 
reached  by  a long  corridor  that  led  by  the  imperial  bath- 
rooms and  the  suite  of  the  heir-apparent.  It  was  a large 
building  facing  the  east,  and  it  contained  a splendid 
suite  of  rooms. 

Such  was  the  Gosho  in  1853.  Although  the  buildings 
were  massive,  although  the  paintings  on  the  screens  and 
the  panels  had  been  executed  by  the  best  native  artists, 
yet  an  air  of  extreme  simplicity  distinguished  the  entire 
place.  As  far  as  possible,  paint  had  been  ignored,  and 
the  natural  graining  of  the  wood  highly  polished  ap- 
peared in  all  the  woodwork.  The  bare  condition  of 
rafters,  posts,  pillars,  planks,  steps,  and  railings  bespoke 
the  chaste  simplicity  of  the  ancient  regime.  There  was 
no  display  of  magnificent  furniture,  plate-glass  mirrors, 
stately  equipage,  costly  carpets,  priceless  gems,  and 
silver  dinner  services.  All  the  floors  were  covered  with 
simple  rush  mats,  or  tatamis ; everybody  sat,  ate,  and 
slept  on  the  floors,  using  square  embroidered  cushions 
for  seats,  low  lacquered  stands  for  tables,  and  heavy 
silken  quilts  for  beds  ; everybody  patronized  chopsticks 
and  porcelain  dishes ; horses  and  carriages  were  un- 
known throughout  the  empire  ; and  jewelry,  in  our  sense 
of  the  term,  was  almost  an  unknown  quantity,  because 
the  ladies  never  disfigured  themselves  with  ear-rings,  the 
gentlemen  knew  nothing  of  gold  watches  and  chains,  and 
the  court  never  possessed  massive  diadems  and  costly 
sceptres  requiring  a fortress  and  a regiment  of  troops  to 
guard  them.  A few  finger-rings,  perchance  a score  of 
bracelets  for  a few  fair  wrists,  some  highly  ornamented 
sword  hilts  and  scabbards,  and  a few  simple  ornaments 
for  the  ladies’  hair,  comprised  about  all  that  could  be 
designated  as  jewelry. 

The  places  where  decoration  and  ornamentation  cen- 
tred were  the  elaborate  screens  and  the  panels  of  the 
sliding  doors.  Here  the  efforts  of  the  most  skilful 
artists  had  exquisitely  reproduced  nature  in  her  varied 
moods.  Cherry  blossoms,  chrysanthemums,  pine  trees 
of  grotesque  shapes,  flocks  of  wild  geese,  bamboo  trees 


26 


Mito  Yashiki. 


dripping  with  rain,  stately  maples,  fishes  frolicking  amid 
waves,  rainbows  arching  the  hills,  glades,  and  woods, — 
these  were  a few  of  the  designs  around  the  walls  of  the 
stately  apartments,  poor  substitutes,  indeed,  for  the  beau- 
teous realities  of  the  outside  world. 

In  this  vicinity,  then,  had  dwelt  the  Mikados  for  over 
a thousand  years.  To  the  outside  world  they  appeared 
to  be  shrouded  in  profoundest  mystery.  Popular  rumor 
pictured  them  as  objects  of  deepest  reverence.  Nobody 
approached  them,  except  on  bended  knees, — even  the 
Shoguns  being  obliged  to  conform  to  this  regulation. 
Their  feet  never  touched  the  ground,  but  trod  upon 
cloths,  so  that  the  sacred  person  might  not  be  defiled  by 
contact  with  the  earth.  They  must  sit  motionless  upon 
the  throne  for  a certain  number  of  hours  each  day,  in 
order  that  the  empire  might  have  peace.  Their  persons 
were  so  sacred  that  nobody  was  permitted  to  lay  hands 
thereon  ; therefore  their  hair  and  nails  might  have  grown 
to  an  unseemly  length,  had  they  not  been  clandestinely 
trimmed  during  sleeping  hours.  The  dishes  from  which 
they  had  partaken  of  food  were  forthwith  dashed  in 
pieces,  in  order  that  nobody  else  might  ever  use  them. 
And  the  very  rice  that  they  ate  was  picked  over  kernel 
by  kernel,  in  order  that  no  broken  or  imperfect  grain 
might  find  lodgment  within  the  imperial  stomach. 

Such  was  the  halo  of  majesty  thrown  about  the  person 
of  the  Mikado.  In  such  light  did  the  court  wire-pullers 
present  the  imperial  puppet  to  the  outside  world.  But 
to  the  inmates  of  the  palace  these  profoundly  mysterious 
personages  appeared  as  amiable  gentlemen  of  languid 
temperaments,  much  given  to  pleasure  of  every  descrip- 
tion, and  quite  unconventional  in  their  deportment. 
Stripped  of  all  political  power,  they  spent  their  time  in 
diversions  almost  childish  in  their  nature,  and  in  traffick- 
ing in  honorary  titles  that  the  Shogun  and  his  minions 
could  not  purchase  from  any  other  source. 

While  the  Aidzu  samurai , stationed  in  the  moated 
castle  a mile  or  so  southwest  of  the  Gosho,  seemed  to  be 
standing  guard  in  behalf  of  the  Tokugawa  House  over  a 


Kioto  in  the  Year  1853. 


27 


mere  family  of  dilettanti  and  imbeciles,  yet  there  dwelt 
within  those  whitened  walls  the  germs  of  sovereignty 
that  were  destined  speedily  to  expand  and  regain  their 
pristine  power ; and  the  idle  warriors  who  loitered 
around  the  imperial  portals,  carelessly  guarding  the  help- 
less creatures  within,  little  dreamed  of  the  wild  scenes  of 
carnage  and  turmoil  destined  speedily  to  rage  around 
that  quiet  place,  and  rouse  the  whole  empire  from  its 
profound  repose  of  two  centuries.  As  to  the  traveller’s 
eye  the  inky  clouds  drifting  over  the  summits  of  the 
distant  mountain  ranges  bespeak  the  black  storm  gather- 
ing behind  those  mighty  peaks,  so  the  mutterings  of 
Mito  and  of  Satsuma  ominously  heralded  to  the  political 
leaders  of  the  realm  an  era  of  profound  agitation  and 
social  upheaval  not  far  distant. 


CHAPTER  III. 


AN  EVENING  ON  THE  KAMOGAWA  SHOALS. 

In  the  month  of  July,  1853,  the  Nakashima  family  be- 
came the  guests,  for  a few  days,  of  Mr.  Yamada,  a re- 
tainer of  a huge  in  Kioto.  Leaving  their  house  in  charge 
of  their  faithful  servant,  they  journeyed  in  the  cool  of 
the  morning  toward  the  city,  the  ladies  travelling  in 
kagos,  while  the  gentlemen  leisurely  strolled  down  the 
shady  glen,  through  the  groves  and  ^gardens  environing 
the  suburbs,  and,  after  threading  the  dusty  streets,  found 
themselves  before  the  massive  gateway  of  their  host  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  Gosho,  where  the  obsequious  gatekeeper 
received  them  with  profuse  salutation.  Escorting  them 
into  his  Tittle  lodge  beside  the  gateway,  he  brought  a 
basin  and  a bucket  of  water  wherewith  to  wash  their 
feet.  Their  dusty  sandals  were  speedily  exchanged  for 
socks  and  neat  straw  slippers,  wherein  they  made 
their  way  across  the  courtyard  to  their  host’s  house, 
where  they  were  warmly  welcomed  by  the  members  of 
the  Yamada  family.  Etiquette  prescribed  that  the  house 
of  the  Japanese  gentleman  should  be  set  somewhat  back 
from  the  public  street,  and  that  it  should  be  approached 
through  stately  portals  and  spacious  courtyards  ; and 
that  the  humble  domicile  of  the  laborer  and  of  the  arti- 
san should  open  directly  on  the  public  thoroughfares. 

The  .Yamada  mansion  was  built  upon  the  sandy  soil 
that  stretched  some  distance  back  from  the  west  bank  of 
the  river.  It  was  a double-storied  wooden  structure. 
Wide  verandas  screened  its  lower  story  on  all  sides,  and 
airy  balconies,  freighted  with  flowering  shrubs,  were 
perched  at  various  points  around  the  upper  one.  The 

28 


An  Evening  on  tJ\e  Kamogawa  Shoals.  29 

grounds  all  around  the  house  were  tastefully  and  beauti- 
fully laid  out  with  gravelly  walks,  boxwood  hedges, 
bamboo  copses,  and  pine  trees  trimmed  into  grotesque 
forms  representing  turtles  and  storks ; while  a trellis- 
work  that  arched  the  doorway  was  weighted  down  with 
blossoming  wistaria  and  morning-glories.  Heaps  of 
white  pebbles  from  the  river-bed,  resembling  banks  of 
snow,  were  placed  at  the  angles  of  the  flower-beds,  amid 
cushions  of  velvety  moss  ; while  between  the  crevices 
of  the  stones  there  sprouted  feathery  ferns  that  nodded 
all  day  long,  coquetting  with  the  zephyrs.  At  one  end 
of  the  house  an  orange-tree  cast  its  shadows  upon  the 
veranda,  and  almost  tendered  its  golden  fruit  to  persons 
standing  there.  The  back  yard  was  shaded  by  a stately 
camphor  tree.  Beside  the  party-fence  stood  a couple 
of  cherry-trees,  and  scattered  at  various  points  were 
peach-trees  and  quince-trees  that  contributed  their  share 
of  blossoms  and  shade  for  the  premises. 

Our  friends  were  duly  ushered  upstairs,  where  all  of 
the  shojees  had  been  removed,  thus  making  the  entire 
story  a cool  pavilion,  open  on  all  sides  to  the  breezes. 
After  the  usual  salutations  and  enquiries  had  been  ex- 
hausted, tea  and  tobacco  were  duly  discussed  for  half  an 
hour  or  so  ; after  which,  the  conversation  beginning  to 
diverge  upon  subjects  of  special  interest  to  each  sex, 
the  gentlemen  naturally  drifted  over  to  one  balcony, 
while  the  ladies  drifted  over  to  another  one,  where  poli- 
tics and  household  matters  were  respectively  discussed. 

“ It  is  a matter  of  regret  to  me,  honorable  sirs,”  re- 
marked Mr.  Yamada,  “that  I can  furnish  no  male  com- 
panions for  your  entertainment  on  these  occasions,  when 
you  honor  me  so  greatly  with  your  visits.  But,  as  you 
well  know,  the  gods  have  frowned  on  me  and  no  male 
offspring  have  been  given  to  me  ; so  that  to-day  I am 
without  an  heir  to  burn  incense  at  my  tomb  and  to  trans- 
mit my  unworthy  name  to  another  generation, — for  my 
two  daughters  cannot  be  of  service  in  such  matters.” 

“ Have  no  regret  in  this  matter  so  far  as  we  are  con- 
cerned, honorable  sir,”  replied  the  Nakashimas  ; “the 


30 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


wide  scope  and  the  great  suggestiveness  of  your  conver- 
sational powers  require  no  supplementing.  Our  minds 
are  indeed  busy  from  the  moment  of  our  entry  to  the 
time  of  our  departure  from  your  residence.  When  one 
has  a well  occupied  mind,  what  other  pleasure  can  he 
desire  ? ” 

“You  exalt  my  powers  too  highly.  Nevertheless,  in 
order  that  we  may  have  abundance  of  company,  we  will 
spend  this  evening  in  one  of  the  picnic  booths  on  the 
Kamogawa  shoals.  There  we  shall  be  surrounded  with 
company  and  shall  discuss  unreservedly  the  public  mat- 
ters of  our  country.” 

The  greater  part  of  the  morning  was  spent  in  alter- 
nately smoking  their  tiny  pipes  and  sipping  hot  tea  from 
diminutive  cups  ; occasionally,  however,  their  conversa- 
tional fusillade  of  flattery,  condolence,  and  gossip  would 
be  varied  with  a game  of  chess.  At  midday  dinner 
was  served  upstairs.  The  natives  took  their  meals  in 
whatever  room  they  pleased  ; although,  as  a matter  of 
convenience,  meals  were  generally  served  in  the  room 
nearest  to  the  kitchen,  yet,  as  tables  and  chairs  were  un- 
known, the  food  could  be  served  in  any  part  of  the  house. 

The  duty  of  reinvigorating  the  inner  man  devolved 
upon  the  Misses  Yamada,  two  amiable  damsels  aged 
respectively  sixteen  years  and  fourteen  years.  Pretty, 
did  you  inquire  ? Well,  yes  ; decidedly  so  as  to  the 
general  expression  of  good  nature  that  animated  their 
features,  and  somewhat  so  as  to  the  qualities  of  each 
feature.  Do  you  admire  jet-black  hair  and  sparkling  black 
eyes,  offset  by  rosy  cheeks  and  ruby  lips,  that  enshrine 
the  whitest  of  teeth  and  the  merriest  of  smiles  ? Do 
you  admire  respectful  demeanor  and  obliging  ways  ? 
Do  you  admire  perfect  hands  and  feet,  and  a clear, 
though  dark  complexion  ? 

Either  of  these  young  ladies,  I imagine,  will  find 
grace  in  your  eyes.  Miss  Masago,  the  elder  one,  is 
rather  tall  for  a Japanese  lady,  being  somewhat  over 
five  feet  high  ; her  form  is  slender  and  lithe  ; her  man- 
ners are  supremely  lady-like,  according  to  the  unwritten 


A?i  Evening  on  the  Kamogawa  Shoals.  3 1 

code  that  prevails  among  all  peoples  possessing  any  de- 
gree of  culture  ; and  her  grave  countenance  is  sweet 
and  refined  in  expression.  Miss  Seisho,  the  younger 
one,  is  short,  plump,  and  merry,  being  a fair  sample  of 
her  sisters  throughout  the  empire  ; her  face  is  cheerful 
and  pretty,  and  she  well  knows  how  and  when  to  subdue 
her  blithesome  temperament,  and  to  assume  a digni- 
fied yet  winning  bearing.  According  to  Japanese  ideas 
these  ladies  are  well  educated.  They  read  and  write  the 
native  language,  and  also  have  a fair  knowledge  of  the 
Chinese  characters  ; they  can  compose  poetry  according  to 
the  stiff  rules  of  the  times,  and  can  hum  a few  melodies 
of  native  production  ; and,  above  all,  they  are  well- 
versed  in  those  supremely  important  duties  that  pertain 
to  the  household.  As  to  geography,  arithmetic,  foreign 
history,  chemistry,  or  philosophy,  they  do  not  possess 
even  a schoolboy’s  ideas. 

The  tub  heaped  full  of  steaming  rice  was  duly  brought 
upstairs  ; the  tiny  lacquered  stands,  containing  various 
pieces  of  vegetables  and  raw  carp  sliced  into  small  bits 
and  accompanied  by  soy,  were  duly  placed  before  each 
person  ; then  all  gathered  around  the  collation  in  a 
circle,  decorously  sitting  on  their  heels,  while  Madam 
Yamada  dipped  forth  with  a small  wooden  shovel  the 
steaming  rice  into  beautiful  porcelain  bowls,  which  she 
duly  handed  around  to  guests  and  family,  and  which 
speedily  disappeared  before  the  steady  assaults  of  chop- 
sticks and  teeth.  The  hungry  ones  were  able  to  dispose 
of  three  or  four  bowls.  At  the  end  of  the  meal,  clear  tea 
was  passed  around  in  small  cups,  for  the  natives  were 
not  accustomed  to  drink  during  their  meals.  Right 
daintily  has  her  ladyship  performed  her  duties  ; and 
now,  while  the  recipients  of  her  bounty  are  scattered 
around  on  the  tatamis , leisurely  indulging  in  tea  and  to- 
bacco, she  tarries  at  the  bowl  finishing  her  repast.  Her 
face  is  but  slightly  wrinkled,  her  hair  is  still  raven-hued, 
and  the  lustre  has  but  slightly  faded  from  her  black  eyes. 
Her  teeth  sparkle  like  bits  of  jet,  with  the  hideous  cor- 
rosive coating  that  matrons  put  thereon  after  marriage. 


32 


Mito  Yashiki . 


This  upper  story  made  a very  picturesque  dining-room. 
To  the  northward  were  the  parks  and  the  white  walls  of 
the  Gosho  ; to  the  eastward,  seen  through  the  foliage  of 
the  camphor  tree,  were  the  mountain  ranges  that  formed 
the  barrier  for  that  side  of  the  valley  ; to  the  southward 
lay  the  gray  roofs,  the  white  gable  ends,  and  the  green 
gardens  of  the  city  ; while  to  the  westward,  beyond  the 
limits  of  the  city,  stood  another  range  of  lofty  mountains. 
Every  passing  breeze  was  caught.  Here  our  friends 
spent  the  greater  part  of  the  afternoon  in  smoking  and 
chatting. 

Toward  evening  the  party  prinked  up  somewhat  and 
strolled  toward  the  river,  where  they  arrived  at  dusk. 
Stepping  from  platform  to  platform,  and  walking  along 
narrow  planks,  they  finally  reached  a couple  of  booths, 
quite  in  the  middle  of  the  stream.  These  they  rented 
for  the  evening,  and  at  once  prepared  to  make  them- 
selves comfortable.  There  were  hundreds  of  these  booths 
built  upon  the  shoals  and  out  into  the  stream  ; and  thou- 
sands of  people  frequented  them  during  the  hot  summer 
evenings,  picnicking  and  feasting  to  their  hearts’  content. 
Each  booth  was  about  ten  feet  square,  and  was  con- 
structed in  a very  simple  manner.  Four  stout  posts,  one 
at  each  corner,  were  driven  deep  into  the  sands  ; cross- 
pieces were  then  tied  on  ; boards  were  then  duly  laid 
across  until  there  had  been  constructed  a platform  about 
one  foot  above  the  sand  or  the  water — as  the  case  might 
be  ; and  finally  mats  were  spread  over  the  platforms,  thus 
making  delightful  little  places  for  recreation.  The  posts 
extended  about  five  feet  above  the  platform,  and  cords 
were  stretched  from  tip  to  tip,  along  which  paper  lanterns 
of  varied  colors  were  strung  for  use  on  nights  when  the 
moon  was  not  shining. 

Vendors  of  fruit,  sakt,  and  melons  were  on  the  bank, 
and  their  couriers  threaded  the  maze  of  booths,  receiving 
and  executing  orders  with  energy  and  boundless  suavity. 
Waiter-girls  were  buzzing  around  like  butterflies  from 
booth  to  booth,  in  response  to  clapping  hands — the  uni- 
versal hailing  signal  of  the  country.  Thousands  of  peo- 


A?i  Evening  on  the  Kamogawa  Shoals.  33 


pie  were  spread  over  the  mats  enjoying  themselves  by 
drinking  sake,  eating  fruit,  sipping  tea,  smoking  tobacco, 
or  dabbling  hands  or  feet  in  the  cool  waters  of  the  stream. 
The  murmur  of  their  voices  could  be  heard  some  dis- 
tance away.  The  view  from  the  wooden  bridge  that 
spanned  the  stream  below  was  grotesque  and  weird, — as 
if  the  water-elfs  had  turned  out  to  feast  beneath  the  moon- 
beams. 

Our  friends  had  wended  their  way  to  the  outermost 
limits,  and  had  selected  a couple  of  booths  on  the  chan- 
nel of  the  stream,  where  the  construction  of  scaffolding 
had  ceased,  and  thus  had  secured  private  boxes, — so  to 
speak.  Here  they  spread  themselves  over  the  mats,  and 
luxuriated  in  the  cooling  breezes  that  surged  down  the 
channel  freighted  with  cool  mountain  air.  Sitting  upon 
the  edge  of  the  platform,  they  dipped  their  dusty  feet 
into  the  waters  that  flowed  beneath,  after  which  ablution 
they  put  on  neat  straw  slippers,  and  tying  their  wooden 
clogs  in  a bunch,  hung  them  up  on  one  of  the  posts  to 
await  departure  for  home. 

Every  thing  was  now  ready  for  feasting  and  gossiping. 
Clapping  his  hands,  Mr.  Yamada  summoned  a waiter- 
girl,  through  whom  he  ordered  vermicelli,  lotus-root 
(sugared),  raw  carp  and  soy,  sake,  melons,  and  tea  ; which 
articles  having  been  speedily  produced,  serious  inroads 
were  at  once  made  into  them.  The  young  ladies  amused 
themselves  by  taking  the  quarter  sections  of  melon 
rinds  and  rigging  them  up  as  boats,  with  chopsticks  for 
masts  and  paper  napkins  for  sails  ; which  clumsy  crafts 
they  would  then  launch  upon  the  stream,  and  would 
wager  melon  seeds  upon  the  length  of  time  that  they 
would  keep  afloat. 

After  an  hour  or  so  of  gossiping,  nibbling,  and  smoking, 
the  ladies,  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  natural  selec- 
tion— so  to  speak, — monopolized  one  booth,  while  the 
gentlemen  occupied  the  other  ; and  from  that  time  diver- 
gent tides  of  conversation  flowed  onward  far  into  the  night. 

It  was  indeed  a superb  night  for  picnics.  The  full 
moon  hovered  over  the  mountain  tops  and  suffused  the 


34 


Mito  Yashiki. 


valley  of  the  Mountain-Castle  with  its  bright  rays,  giving 
to  the  wimpling  waters  of  the  river  the  sheen  of  silver. 
But  our  gentlemen  friends  had  become  so  absorbed  in 
conversation  that  they  took  but  little  notice  of  their  sur- 
roundings. The  buzz  and  the  hum  of  conversation  went 
up  on  all  sides  ; the  ladies  laughed  and  talked  and  threw 
crumbs  to  the  fishes  that  glided  up  within  the  shadow  of 
the  booths  ; a steady  stream  of  travel  rumbled  unceas- 
ingly over  the  bridge  ; — but  they  heeded  nothing, — not 
even  the  solemn  tones  of  the  monastery  bells  that  filled 
the  valley  with  their  booming  vibrations  ever  and  anon. 

“ Nay,  sir,  but  the  latest  rumors  that  have  drifted  down 
from  Yedo  are  of  a very  disturbing  nature,”  Mr.  Yamada 
was  saying  in  a low  voice,  as  if  fearful  of  being  over- 
heard ; “ and  no  one  is  able  to  foretell  what  possible  com- 
plications may  arise  in  the  near  future.  Through 
my  connection  with  the  Gosho  as  retainer  of  a kugd  I am 
in  a position  to  obtain  much  important  information  of  a 
profoundly  secret  nature.  You  will  remember  that  the 
present  Emperor,  Osa-hito,  ascended  the  throne  six 
years  ago  at  the  age  of  sixteen,  and  although  even  now 
he  is  a young  man,  yet  he  possesses  much  tenacity  of 
purpose  and  considerable  political  sagacity.  Although  he 
is  shut  up  within  a few  acres  of  enclosed  ground,  pre- 
sumably having  no  contact  with  the  outside  world,  yet 
he  keeps  himself  better  informed  about  public  affairs 
than  is  generally  supposed.  His  spies  in  Yedo  furnish 
him  with  much  accurate  information,  and  occasionally 
he  sends  special  spies  to  particular  Daimiates  to  pick  up 
whatever  news  may  be  available. 

“ This  underground  service,  as  you  well  know,  is  an 
extremely  dangerous  one,  because  the  secret  emissaries 
of  the  Shogun  are  as  thickly  strewn  over  the  land  as  ants 
over  a bowl  of  rice  ; they  penetrate  everywhere,  and 
mercilessly  assassinate  any  one  whom  they  presume  to  be 
acting  as  spies  against  their  master.  We  have  lost  some 
valuable  men  during  the  last  five  years  ; one  was  found 
hacked  to  pieces  in  the  purlieus  of  Shinagawa,  the  south- 
ern suburb  of  Yedo, — officially  reported  to  have  been 


An  Evening  on  the  Kamogaiva  Shoals.  35 


slain  in  a drunken  brawl  with  rortins  (but we  know  better) ; 
another  one  was  slain  on  the  Nakasendo,  near  a moun- 
tain village  in  Shinano,  by  a cut  from  behind  that  slashed 
its  way  between  his  ribs  and  split  through  the  backbone, 
causing  instant  death, — officially  reported  to  have  been 
slain  by  robbers  (but  we  know  better)  ; and  the  last  one 
was  murdered  near  Hikon4,  on  Lake  Biwa,  only  eight 
months  ago,  on  his  way  back  from  Yedo  with  highly  val- 
uable verbal  information,  as  we  subsequently  were  told  ; 
he  fought  like  a demon,  and  slew  four  of  his  adversaries 
and  wounded  several  others,  but  finally  fell  beneath  a 
spear  thrust  in  his  throat, — officially  reported  to  have 
been  the  victim  of  some  long-standing  vendetta  (but  we 
ktmv  better). 

“A  spy  is  a double-edged  sword  in  your  hands.  He 
may  be  bribed  by  your  adversary  to  transmit  false  in- 
formation to  you,  or  to  suppress  important  details,  or 
even  to  act  as  a spy  against  yourself.  Great  care  is  re- 
quired in  selecting  your  man.  Our  master  never  em- 
ploys strangers.  He  usually  finds  some  faithful  retainer 
connected  in  some  capacity  with  some  one  of  the  one 
hundred  and  fifty  kugt  families  here  in  Kioto.  But  since 
the  recent  information  lately  transmitted  to  us  from 
Yedo,  the  Shogun  has  issued  orders  to  the  commandant 
of  the  Castle  here  in  Kioto  to  increase  the  rigor  of  his 
surveillance  over  the  members  and  the  kindred  of  the 
imperial  household,  in  order  that  their  whereabouts  may 
be  located  on  very  short  notice. 

“ In  compliance  with  this  stringent  order  they  have  in- 
creased their  guards,  and  have  surrounded  us  with  a web 
of  espionage,  so  complete  in  all  its  details  that  we  hardly 
dare  to  open  our  mouths  for  fear  of  being  reported, 
through  some  obscure  channel,  to  the  Shogun  as  being 
the  utterer  of  seditious  sentiments.  I do  not  doubt  but 
what  at  this  moment  some  sneaking  cur  has  reported  my 
departure  from  my  house  in  company  with  yourself,  and 
that  our  families  are  in  for  an  evening’s  carouse  on  the 
Kamogawa  shoals,  and  ihat  interesting  piece  of  informa- 
tion has  been  probably  discussed  ere  this  by  the  officers 


36 


Mito  Yashiki. 


within  the  council-chambers  at  the  Castle,  and  a memo- 
randum has  doubtless  been  duly  noted  opposite  my  name 
on  the  tabulated  list  that  they  keep  of  all  kugis,  of  all 
kugts'  retainers  and  servants,  and  of  everybody  having  in- 
tercourse with  said  knges.  In  fact,  I dared  not  commu- 
nicate to  you  at  my  own  house  the  important  information 
that  I wish  to  convey,  because  I knew  not  what  shojee  or 
what  tatami  had  ears.  So  I brought  you  out  here  under 
the  screen  of  jollification  and  good-fellowship,  and 
I think  that  I have  given  the  spies  the  slip  for  this  even- 
ing, at  least,  for  I do  not  see  in  our  vicinity  the  glitter  of 
watchful  eyes.” 

“Your  words,  honored  sir,  agitate  me  exceedingly,” 
said  Mr.  Nakashima  ; “ your  language  sounds  like  that  of 
a romance  of  the  Ashikaga  period.  Though  I have  been 
intimate  with  you  during  these  many  years,  yet  have  I 
never  been  aware  of  these  facts  that  you  have  just  been 
divulging.  It  is  not  unlikely,  then,  that  your  long  ab- 
sence from  home  during  last  spring  was  caused  by  your 
being  engaged  in  one  of  these  dangerous  expeditions  in 
behalf  of  Osa-hito.”1 

“Your  surmise  is  entirely  correct,”  replied  Mr.  Yam- 
ada,  “ and  as  ihat  expedition  forms  but  a prelude  to  the 
information  that  I am  about  to  impart  to  you,  I shall 
now  give  a brief  account  of  it.  Early  this  year,  vague 
rumors  floated  up  from  Nagasaki  to  the  effect  that  it  had 
been  reported  by  the  Dutch  in  the  island  of  Deshima 
that  some  barbarian  power  contemplated  sending  an  ex- 
pedition to  our  shores.  These  rumors  failed  to  specify 
when  the  expedition  would  appear ; also  whether  it 
would  be  of  a hostile  nature,  or  merely  a friendly  visit. 
I was  delegated  to  find  out  further  details  relating  to  this 
matter.  Knowing  that  the  Dutch  Embassy  was  about  to 
leave  Yedo  on  its  return  to  Nagasaki,  I determined  to 

1 Komei-Tenno,  the  I22d  Mikado  in  descent  front  the  first 
Mikado,  Jimmu-Tenno  (660-585  H.c.),  ascended  the  Imperial  throne 
in  1847,  and  died  in  1867.  His  reign  of  twenty  years  thus  covered 
the  most  piomentous  period  in  Japanese  history.  It  is  with  this  period 
that  this  hook  has  to  deal.  Prior  to  his  death  Komei-Tenno  was 
called  Osa-hito,  in  accordance  with  ancient  custom. 


An  Evening  on  the  Kamogawa  Shoals.  3 7 


fall  in  with  it  on  some  part  of  its  route,  and  pick  up  what 
information  I could. 

“ I accordingly  shaved  my  head  and  disguised  myself 
as  a mendicant  monk,  and  slipped  out  of  my  house  one 
night,  after  leaving  word  with  my  family  that  business  in 
Osaca  required  my  attention  foe  a number  of  days.  In- 
stead of  going  there,  however,  I made  my  way  to  Lake 
Biwa,  and  then  followed  the  Tokaido  until  I came  to 
Nagoya,  about  three  days’  journey  from  Kioto.  I there 
changed  my  garb  and  assumed  that  of  a blind  shampooer, 
who  also  shaves  his  head  like  a priest.  I then  began 
journeying  back  slowly  over  the  same  road  to  Kioto.  I 
travelled  generally  in  the  dusk  of  evening, — for  what 
does  a blind  man  care  for  daylight  ? Thus  I avoided 
scrutiny.  And  I strengthened  the  part  that  I was  acting 
by  blowing  my  whistle  continually  along  the  road  and  by 
groping  along  with  my  long  staff.  Arriving  at  some 
wayside  inn  late  in  the  evening,  I would  solicit  the  privi- 
lege of  plying  my  vocation  upon  the  travellers  sojourn- 
ing there,  and  would  generally  make  enough  by  sham- 
pooing and  rubbing  the  tired  muscles  in  their  backs  and 
legs  to  pay  for  a night’s  lodging.  The  daytime  I spent 
in  loitering  between  stations. 

“ The  great  difficulty  with  which  I was  obliged  to 
contend,  was  to  disguise  my  eyes  so  as  to  make  them 
harmonize  with  the  part  that  I was  acting.  There  are 
various  kinds  of  blindness.  Those  who  are  born  blind 
have  bleared  eyes,  pitifully  expressionless  and  vacant. 
Then  you  have  those  over  whose  eyes  whitish  films  and 
cataracts  have  grown  ; these  people  go  about  with  dead- 
fish  eyes.  Then  you  have  those  who  have  gone  blind 
from  ophthalmia  and  other  diseases  ; their  eyes  in  many 
cases  appear  to  have  entirely  sloughed  away,  causing  the 
shrivelled  lids  to  contract  and  close  up  tightly  over  the 
empty  sockets. 

“ Now,  this  last  form  of  blindness  I could  simulate 
fairly  well  by  tightly  closing  my  eyes  (naturally  deep-set 
in  their  sockets)  and  keeping  up  a twitching  of  my  eye- 
lids, as  if  afflicted  with  nervous  disorders.  A slight 


38 


Mito  Yashiki. 


touch  of  dark  coloring  applied  to  the  outside  of  my  lids 
aided  the  disguise  by  giving  a diseased  appearance  to 
those  members.  But  I could  not  keep  up  the  unnatural 
motions  for  any  great  length  of  time  ; therefore  I left 
the  main  road  and  spent  the  daytime  loitering  among  the 
woods  and  groves  beside  the  thoroughfare,  where  I,  un- 
observed, could  watch  the  passing  travellers.  When 
dusk  came  on  I would  resume  the  main  road,  and  would 
w'alk  on  to  the  next  convenient  resting-place  for  the 
night,  where  it  would  not  be  necessary  to  practise  blind- 
ness for  over  an  hour  or  so.  Thus  I went  slowly  back 
over  the  road  toward  Kioto,  waiting  to  be  overtaken  by 
the  Embassy,  and  I was  kept  waiting  a number  of  days. 

“ One  day,  as  I was  in  a grove  of  scrub-pines  near  the 
highway,  I saw  a cavalcade  of  horsemen  and  norivions 
approaching  from  the  direction  of  Nagoya.  There  must 
have  been  twenty  horses  loaded  down  with  bundles, 
baskets,  and  boxes.  To  my  surprise  several  of  these 
norimons  were  without  occupants ; this  curious  fact, 
however,  was  speedily  explained  by  seeing  a group  of 
strangely  dressed  people  walking  along  the  road  some 
distance  behind,  and  attended  by  about  a dozen .samurai. 1 

“ There  were  four  foreigners.  Two  of  them  had  hair 
like  bleached  hemp,  light-blue  eyes,  and  very  white 
skins  ; both  of  these  were  tall  and  powerfully  built  men, 
and  one  of  them  carried  at  his  waist  a fragile  sword  that 
could  have  been  severed  with  one  blow  of  my  sword. 
The  third  foreigner  had  brown  hair,  brown  eyes,  and 
white  skin  ; and  he  was  somewhat  shorter  in  stature, 
but  was  very  thick-set  and  powerful  in  his  build.  The 
fourth  man  was  slender  in  structure,  yet  he  was  taller 

1 This  word  is  used  either  in  the  singular  or  the  plural  number. 
These  are  the  double-sworded  gentlemen  that  we  see  so  often  repre- 
sented in  Japanese  pictures.  They  were  the  retainers  of  the  Daimios. 
They  were  hound  (in  theory)  body  and  soul  to  the  interests  of  their 
respective  lords.  They  were  to  gird  them  around  with  a living 
wall,  standing  between  them  and  every  danger.  In  return  for  such 
service  they  were  to  receive  annual  pensions  of  rice.  They  formed 
the  military  caste  of  Japan.  They  were  the  aristocrats  of  the  realm. 
Their  swords  were  typical  of  their  genteel  and  chivalrous  breeding. 


An  Evening  on  the  Kamogazva  Shoals.  39 


than  the  average  Japanese  ; his  hair  was  jet-black,  his 
eyes  were  also  black,  and  his  complexion  was  consider- 
ably darker  than  that  of  the  other  gentlemen.  Such 
a mixture  of  color  and  features  amazed  me  immeasu- 
rably. 

“ I was  also  astonished  at  the  freedom  allowed  to  these 
barbarians  by  the  guards  in  attendance  ; but  I presume 
that  the  matter  had  been  settled  upon  a money  basis 
satisfactory  to  all  parties  concerned.  While  we  Japanese 
suppose  that  these  foreigners  are  being  duly  escorted  in 
closed  norimons  through  our  country,  yet,  as  a matter  of 
fact,  they  are  spying  out  every  thing. 

“ These  fellows  came  sauntering  down  the  road,  talk- 
ing and  laughing  like  boon  companions.  Occasionally 
they  would  stop  and  gather  flowers,  herbs,  specimens  of 
soil,  and  stones,  which  were  carefully  done  up  in  small 
parcels,  then  placed  in  small  lacquered  boxes,  and  finally 
hid  away  in  the  norimons  as  if  they  were  articles  of  great 
value.  What,  in  the  name  of  Kobu-Daishi,  did  they  do 
that  for,  do  you  suppose  ? 

“ My  feelings  against  these  barbarians  were  those  of 
anger  and  disgust.  I was  angry  because  such  people 
were  allowed  so  great  freedom  in  examining  our  country  ; 
and  I was  disgusted  because  my  countrymen  deigned  to 
affiliate  with  such  uncouth  and  graceless  people  upon 
terms  of  such  intimacy.  ‘A  fine  report  I shall  make  of 
you  to  my  master  ! ’ said  I in  my  sleeve.  I remained  in 
seclusion  until  they  had  gone  a full  league  down  the 
road  ; then  I came  forth  and  followed  them  slowly  until 
near  sunset,  when  they  stopped  at  an  inn. 

“ After  dusk  I strolled  into  the  town  blowing  my 
whistle  and  groping  along  with  my  staff,  at  the  same 
time  making  enquiries  for  hotels  ; and  I was  referred 
to  the  only  one  in  the  place,  where  I duly  made  appli- 
cation for  a night’s  lodging.  At  first  I was  peremp- 
torily ordered  off  by  a rude  officer,  who  informed  me  that 
the  place  was  filled  with  the  guards  and  the  attendants  of 
the  foreign  embassy,  but,  upon  its  appearing  that  I was 
a helpless,  blind  shampooer  in  quest  of  trade,  permission 


40 


Mito  Yashiki. 


was  granted  for  me  to  take  up  my  quarters  with  the  ser- 
vants in  the  kitchen. 

“ My  evening  meal  was  quickly  served  ; after  which  I 
humbly  begged  to  be  allowed  to  ply  my  vocation  upon 
the  weary  limbs  of  the  travellers  in  the  inn  ; to  which 
reasonable  request  no  objection  was  raised  by  the 
fatigued  members  of  the  suite,  upon  many  of  whom  I 
plied  my  trade,  and  soon  had  worked  myself  into  their 
very  best  graces.  It  was  finally  suggested  by  some  one 
that  the  foreigners  in  the  back-room  upstairs  might  be 
refreshed  with  a course  of  rubbing.  This  suggestion  gave 
rise  to  a heated  controversy,  some  urging  that  such  a 
thing  would  be  unprecedented,  while  others  urged  that 
it  would  come  within  the  letter  of  their  instructions  to 
escort  the  foreigners  carefully  and  to  keep  them  in  good 
health  during  the  journey. 

“At  this  juncture  my  simple  enquiry  as  to  whether  the 
foreign  gentlemen  were  not  human  beings  constructed 
like  ourselves,  and  likely  to  be  benefited  with  similar  treat- 
ment, provoked  great  laughter,  and  was  pronounced  to 
be  a shrewd  bid  for  fresh  custom.  Nevertheless  the  ob- 
servation put  everybody  into  good  humor,  so  that  it  was 
finally  settled  that  I should  shampoo  the  foreign  gentle- 
men, receiving  from  the  treasurer  the  customary  fee  of  two 
tin , while  I was  instructed  by  that  urbane  and  upright 
gentleman  to  charge  the  foreigners  themselves  a bu 
apiece — nearly  thirty  times  more  than  I received. 

“ This  financial  basis  appearing  satisfactory  to  the  down- 
stairs party,  I was  ushered  upstairs  into  a large  apart- 
ment opening  toward  the  back  on  a veranda.  I was 
duly  introduced,  and  was  then  left  quite  alone  with 
those  strange  creatures,  to  perform  whatever  rubbing 
they  might  call  for.  The  room  was  but  dimly  lighted 
with  an  andon  (paper  lantern). 

“ I began  upon  the  captain  of  the  company,  who  lay 
stretched  on  the  tatamis  in  one  corner  of  the  room.  As 
I was  now  compelled  to  simulate  blindness  to  the  utmost 
of  my  capacity,  I could  observe  nothing  for  several  min- 
utes. While  rubbing  and  squeezing  the  muscles  of  his 


An  Evening  on  the  Kamogawa  Shoals.  4 1 


arms,  neck,  and  shoulders,  I kept  up  a perpetual  winking. 
I was  amazed  to  find  him  shaped  in  every  way  like  our- 
selves. When  I rolled  him  over  on  his  face  and  began 
to  operate  upon  the  muscles  of  his  back  and  legs,  I was 
further  amazed  to  find  how  heavily  he  was  built.  He 
was  as  heavy  and  as  massive  as  one  of  our  gigantic 
wrestlers.  Why  so  powerfully  constructed  a gentleman 
should  be  contented  with  twirling  a puny  little  sword, 
like  a girl  dallying  with  a needle,  was  beyond  my  com- 
prehension. 

“ As  I rubbed  and  thumped  his  back,  I took  sly 
glances  around  the  room.  The  black-haired  barbarian 
lay  upon  his  stomach  beside  the  andon  and  appeared  to 
be  writing  in  a small  book  which  he  would  hastily  slip 
into  his  pocket  whenever  footsteps  approached  the 
room.  The  wretch  was  doubtless  entering  his  observa- 
tions on  the  country  made  during  the  day.  I felt  like 
drawing  forth  my  short  sword  from  beneath  my  clothes 
and  pinning  him  to  the  floor.  The  brown-haired  fellow 
was  lying  on  some  silk  cushions  and  was  busily  engaged 
in  talking  to  the  yellow-haired  beast,  who  sat  on  the 
veranda  smoking  a pipe  of  vast  dimensions  and  occasion- 
ally ejecting  from  between  his  lips  some  muddy  fluid  into 
a flower-pot  beside  him. 

“Truly  they  were  a strange  set  of  fellows!  Their 
voices  were  strong  and  coarse,  and  came  up  from  their 
very  stomachs,  for  when  I was  rubbing  the  back  of 
the  big  fellow  he  coughed  and  spoke  to  the  black- 
haired fellow,  whereupon  my  hand  fairly  trembled  with 
the  deeply  intoned  vibrations  beneath  ; and  when  he 
laughed  at  my  tickling  his  ribs  during  the  process  of 
punching  and  pinching,  I felt  as  if  I were  handling  an 
earthquake,  because  of  the  suppressed  gurglings  within 
the  caverns  of  his  breast.  After  finishing  him  up,  the 
brown-haired  fellow  came  to  me,  and  was  duly  kneaded 
and  thumped.  He  was  not  so  large  as  the  captain,  but  he 
was  wonderfully  well  knit  and  tough.  He  was  exceedingly 
ticklish,  and  laughed  immoderately  whenever  I touched 
his  ribs.  It  did  not  take  me  long  to  finish  him  up. 


42 


Mito  Yashiki. 


Then  I went  to  work  on  the  other  yellow-haired  fellow. 
He  was  exceedingly  large-boned,  but  he  was  as  limp  and 
as  flabby  as  a baby,  and  smelt  like  a mangy  dog.  He 
did  not  have  enough  vitality  to  laugh  when  I made  spe- 
cial efforts  to  tickle  his  ribs,  but  he  dozed  and  grunted, 
and  grunted  and  dozed,  like  an  immense  pig. 

“ Having  finished  with  him,  I sat  waiting  for  the 
black-haired  man  to  come  and  take  his  turn  ; in  the 
meantime  I blinked  at  the  light  like  an  owl,  and  fur- 
tively watched  him  between  the  blinks.  Suddenly  he 
looked  up  from  his  writing  and,  beckoning  me,  said  in  a 
low  and  musical  voice  : ‘ Come  over  here,  Mr.  Shampooer. 
and  work  on  me  near  the  veranda  ; the  air  is  fresher  here.’ 
Like  a simpleton,  I coolly  went  over  to  him  and  began  to 
talk,  when  it  came  over  me  like  a thunder-clap  that  I 
was  supposed  to  be  blind,  and  that  the  foreigners  were 
supposed  to  be  ignorant  of  our  language  ; yet  so  smooth 
and  so  natural  had  been  his  speech  that  I was  drawn  to 
his  side  like  a charmed  bird.  1 was  overwhelmed  with 
confusion  and  fear  at  my  indiscretion,  for  if  my  action 
had  been  observed  by  anybody  watching  my  move- 
ments, my  head  would  soon  have  parted  company  with 
my  shoulders.” 

“ Excuse  my  interruption,  sir,”  exclaimed  Mr.  Naka- 
shima  in  an  undertone,  “ but  did  you  just  now  feel  a tre- 
mor of  this  platform  whereon  we  are  sitting  ? ” 

“ I did  not,  sir.  Daughters,  are  you  shaking  the 
booth  ? ” 

“ No,  sir  ; we  are  quietly  listening  to  the  account  of 
the  latest  freaks  of  the  demon  of  the  Maruyama  cas- 
cades,” replied  his  daughters. 

“Yet  I felt  a decided  tremor,”  said  Mr.  Nakashima  ; 

“ The  people  in  the  adjacent  booths  all  appear  to  be 
quietly  enjoying  themselves.  My  son,  will  you  kindly 
step  over  into  the  water  and  carefully  look  beneath  the 
platform  and  see  if  any  one  is  there  listening  to  our 
conversation  ? ” 

His  youngest  son,  who  was  sitting  on  the  edge  of  the 
booth,  accordingly  slipped  down  into  the  water,  and 


An  Evening  on  the  Kamogcewa  Shoals.  43 


gazed  beneath.  The  bright  moonlight  revealed  nothing 
but  the  rippling  waves  and  the  sandy  shoals  as  far  as  he 
could  see.  A heavy  piece  of  drift-wood,  however,  had 
been  borne  by  the  current  against  one  of  the  posts,  and 
this  appeared  to  be  the  cause  of  their  agitation.  But  the 
party  now  became  aware  of  the  possibility  of  some  one 
creeping  beneath  them  and  thus  catching  the  drift  of 
their  conversation. 

The  young  men  therefore  agreed  to  take  turns  in  look- 
ing over  the  side  of  the  booth  every  few  minutes  or  so, 
and  occasionally  stepping  into  the  water  and  thoroughly 
inspecting  the  shoals  beneath  the  flooring  of  the  booth. 
Such  was  the  system  of  espionage  prevailing  in  those 
days  that  the  people  never  knew  when  they  were  being 
watched. 

“ I trust  you  will  excuse  my  interruption,  sir,”  said  Mr. 
Nakashima. 

“ Nay,  sir,  mention  it  not.  I am  under  boundless  obli- 
gation to  you  for  your  caution,”  replied  Mr.  Yamada. 
“ With  the  bright  moonlight  overhead,  and  with  a clear 
sweep  for  the  eyes  on  all  sides  of  us,  it  never  occurred 
to  me  that  those  sneaking  Tokugawa  reptiles  could  creep 
beneath  us.  Never  fear  now.  Let  them  come  on  if  they 
wish  to  taste  this  steel  that  I shall  thrust  between  the 
chinks  in  this  flooring  just  as  soon  as  I hear  a sound 
below.  But  let  me  see  ; I was  at  the  point  where  I was 
outwitted  by  that  black-haired  devil  of  a Hollander. 
Well,  to  continue,  I was  feeling  extremely  uncomfortable. 
I determined,  however,  to  put  a bold  face  on  the  matter, 
and  to  make  the  best  of  it ; for  I perceived  that  no  one 
appeared  to  notice  this  by-play,  and  that  the  matter  lay 
entirely  between  the  black-haired  Hollander  and  myself. 
* Mr.  Shampooer,’  said  he,  in  a soft  voice,  ‘you  do  not 
appear  to  be  totally  blind,  nor  am  I totally  dumb  as 
regards  your  language.  You  have  exposed  yourself  as 
well  as  I have  done.  Therefore  we  must  both  be  fast 
friends  and  keep  each  other’s  secrets,  or  we  shall  both 
come  to  grief.  Now,  we  are  over  here  near  the  veranda 
where  we  cannot  be  heard,  and  I wish  to  hold  friendly 


44 


Mito  Yashiki. 


converse  with  you  for  a few  moments.  You  are  no  more 
of  a blind  shampooer  than  I am.  I was  impressed  by  the 
cast  of  your  countenance  when  you  came  into  the  room, 
and  being  the  doctor  of  the  Dutch  settlement  in  Deshima 
at  Nagasaki,  I have  become  very  familiar  with  the  vari- 
ous forms  of  eye  diseases  prevailing  in  this  country. 
In  fact,  I know  more  of  such  subjects  than  your  people 
know.  Therefore  when  you  began  to  pound  and  to 
thump  your  first  victim,  I opened  the  door  of  this 
andon  here,  punched  a hole  through  the  paper,  and,  thus 
screened  as  to  my  head,  took  profound  interest  in  your 
performances  from  that  time  onward.  Oh,  you  are  a 
wonderful  shampooer,  my  friend ! You  handled  that 
last  victim  about  as  delicately  as  a wild  boar  would 
manipulate  a sweet  potato  ! ’ 

“ ‘ However,  I don’t  care  any  thing  about  your  history. 
All  I wish  from  you  is  direct  answers  to  a few  questions 
about  the  customs  and  features  of  the  country  around 
Kioto  and  Lake  Biwa.  You  of  course  know  that  we 
Hollanders  are  not  allowed  to  learn  your  language  under 
penalty  of  banishment  from  your  shores.  Nevertheless, 
I have  obtained — never  mind  how1 — a pretty  fair  mas- 
tery of  the  common  language  of  your  people.  I do 
not  use  it,  however,  to  your  country’s  detriment,  but 
only  to  secure  geographical  and  scientific  matter  per- 
taining to  your  country  for  my  own  information  and 
pleasure.’ 

“ Thus  he  talked.  His  pronunciation  was  strangely 
accurate.  And  his  language,  though  not  couched  in  the 
exact  forms  of  our  own  people,  yet  was  wonderfully 
clear,  comprehensive,  and  thoughtful.  And  he  had  a 
capacity  for  getting  at  facts  and  at  ideas  (even  through 
the  medium  of  imperfect  expression)  that  was  perfectly 
amazing.  The  exactness  with  which  our  minds  came  in 
contact  almost  convinced  me  that  he  was  a native  of 
Japan.  How  could  the  mind  of  a being  whose  ancestors 
never  had  any  connection  or  communication  with  mine, 
and  who,  instead  of  being  descended  from  the  gods,  had 
descended  from  beasts,  thus  commune  with  my  mind  and 


An  Evening  on  the  Kamogawa  Shoals.  45 


exchange  ideas  so  similar  to  my  own — yea,  even  superior 
to  my  own  ? How  do  you  explain  such  things  ? ” 

“ I do  not  know  how  to  account  for  it,”  said  Mr. 
Nakashima,  “ unless  upon  the  supposition  that  we  have 
been  misinformed  about  these  barbarians,  and  also  about 
our  own  country.  There  is  a mystery  about  this  entire 
subject  that  grows  deeper  all  the  time.  We  live  in  a 
strange  period  of  Japanese  history.” 

“However  that  may  be,”  replied  Mr.  Yamada,  “of 
one  thing  I am  certain,  that  if  there  be  many  men  like 
that  black-haired  doctor  in  foreign  countries,  then  we 
will  have  much  to  learn  from  outside  barbarians.  That 
man  elicited  all  the  information  that  I had  to  convey 
about  the  city  of  Kioto,  its  history,  its  temples,  its 
religions,  its  theatres,  and  about  its  silk  and  porcelain 
manufactures  ; and  he  probed  for  a vast  amount  of  in- 
formation concerning  adjoining  provinces  that  I knew 
nothing  about.  Truly,  I was  amazed  at  the  depth  of  my 
ignorance  concerning  Japan  outside  of  my  native 
province  of  Yamashiro.  Pray,  what  do  we  folks  here 
know  about  what  is  transpiring  in  Satsuma,  or  in  Nambu, 
or  in  Musashi,  or  even  in  so  near  a place  as  Kaga  ? 
Verily,  our  ignorance  and  narrow-mindedness  in  such 
things  are  abominable ; like  frogs  in  a well,  we  see 
nothing  but  the  sky  directly  overhead.  Pray,  what  do 
you  or  I know  about  what  is  happening  just  beyond 
these  mountains  surrounding  us,  over  in  the  adjoining 
provinces  of  Tamba,  Omi,  or  Yamato?  Truly,  our  igno- 
rance is  deplorable  in  the  extreme  ! ” 

“ I am  sure,  sir,”  replied  Mr.  Nakashima,  “ that  I know 
no  more  about  the  features  of  Nambu  or  Awomori 
than  I know  about  the  uttermost  bounds  of  barbarism. 
I know  a little  about  Satsuma  through  rumor,  but  noth- 
ing definite.  Verily,  we  Japanese  are  profoundly  igno- 
rant about  what  is  transpiring  within  the  four  seas 
environing  our  own  country.  My  knowledge  of  Japan 
is  limited  by  these  mountains  here.  And  the  scope  of 
my  general  information  seems  to  be  circumscribed  by  a 
series  of  original  lectures  on  the  art  of  thrusting,  parry- 


46 


Mito  Yashiki. 


ing,  and  smiting  with  bamboo  foils.  With  what  else  am 
I conversant  ? I know  absolutely  nothing  about  foreign 
countries,  and  I know  but  little  of  my  own  country  be- 
yond the  mountain  walls  of  Yamashiro.  This  is  truly 
a shameful  state  of  affairs.  And  yet  I am  reputed  to 
be  an  educated  Japanese  gentleman  ! Truly,  Yamashiro 
is  a well,  and  I am  a frog  living  therein  ! Pray,  sir, 
what  else  did  that  black-haired  gentleman  inquire 
about  ? ” 

“Well,  he  wished  to  know  what  kind  of  fish  lived  in 
Lake  Biwa.  Who  knows  ? He  then  inquired  as  to  the 
varieties  of  fish  found  in  the  waters  of  Osaca  Bay  and 
off-shore  along  the  coast.  Do  you  know  ? Ha  ! ha  ! I 
thought  it  quite  likely  that  you  were  not  familiar  with 
that  morsel  of  information.  Then  he  wished  to  know 
the  names  of  the  various  animals,  insects,  trees,  herbs, 
and  flowers,  that  grew  in  our  province  ; concerning 
which,  I am  pleased  to  say,  I was  able  to  give  some  in- 
formation. 

“ Then  he  desired  to  know  the  amount  of  rain  that  fell 
in  Yamashiro  and  in  the  adjoining  provinces  during  the 
year.  How  would  you  answer  such  a question  as  that  ? 
You  hesitate  ! Well,  I am  not  surprised.  And  finally, 
he  wanted  details  about  the  history  of  Kioto  and  of  the 
imperial  family,  concerning  which  I gave  him  consider- 
able information  very  reluctantly,  because  it  seemed  to 
me  that  he  was  trespassing  beyond  the  limit  of  legiti- 
mate inquiry.  I began  to  garble  facts  and  to  suppress 
details  ; but  he  corrected  my  false  statements  at  once 
with  utmost  precision  to  my  great  confusion  and  amaze- 
ment. Verily,  the  fellow  had  read  up  our  country’s 
history  from  some  source  or  other  with  most  commend- 
able accuracy. 

“ During  a half  hour  of  shampooing  he  compelled  me 
to  disgorge  an  amount  of  information  that  I did  not 
know  was  in  my  possession,  and  an  amount  quite  suffi- 
cient to  take  off  my  head.  Once  or  twice  the  shojee  was 
slid  back  by  the  interpreter,  who  looked  in  to  see  how 
my  work  was  progressing,  but  the  doctor  informed  him 


An  Evening  on  the  Kamogawa  Shoals.  47 


that  his  sore  back  and  legs  required  special  rubbing  to 
ease  them.  I heard  the  interpreter  translate  this  to  the 
officer  of  the  guard.  I suspected  that  the  interpreter 
and  the  doctor  were  upon  very  familiar  terms,  for  there 
was  a sly  chuckle  in  his  voice  as  he  made  his  inquiries. 
At  last  my  work  was  completed,  and  I was  led  out  into 
my  kitchen  quarters,  where  I spent  a somewhat  uneasy 
night. 

“ In  the  early  dawn  I left  the  hotel  and  had  gone  well 
on  my  way  before  sunrise.  By  midday  I had  reached  a 
convenient  clump  of  trees  where  I tarried  until  nightfall, 
thus  allowing  the  embassy  to  precede  me  into  Kioto. 
Then  I came  quietly  into  the  city,  and  slipped  into  my 
house  unobserved. 

“ During  the  weeks  that  I was  waiting  for  my  hair  to 
grow  again,  I compared  notes  with  the  spies  who  had 
been  delegated  to  watch  other  portions  of  the  embassy’s 
route.  My  report,  compiled  from  these  sources,  was 
duly  submitted  to  the  Emperor  and  to  his  councillors. 

“ It  therein  appeared  that  the  embassy  left  Nagasaki 
about  six  weeks  before  the  end  of  the  year,  and  travelled 
overland  nearly  two  hundred  miles  to  the  Shimonoseki 
Straits.  Embarking  there  in  boats,  they  came  through 
the  Inland  Sea  to  Osaca,  a distance  of  about  two  hun- 
dred and  fifty  miles.  Thence  they  passed  overland  by 
way  of  Nagoya  and  the  Tokaido  to  Yedo,  where  they 
tarried  until  after  the  commencement  of  the  new  year. 
On  New  Year’s  Day  they  called  on  the  Shogun,  and 
were  allowed  to  do  him  homage.  After  that  event  they 
returned  to  Nagasaki  by  the  same  route  that  they  came. 
It  seemed  that  the  foreigners  were  kept  closely  guarded 
on  the  upward  journey,  but  that  on  the  return  journey 
they  were  allowed  more  liberty  in  consideration  of  their 
gracious  reception  by  the  Shogun.  It  also  appeared  that  I 
was  the  only  spy  who  had  obtained  personal  access  to 
the  foreigners.  My  information  was  pronounced  varied 
and  instructive. 

“ Nothing  of  importance  had  been  gleaned  at  Naga- 
saki or  on  the  upward  journey.  At  Yedo,  however, 


48 


Mito  Yashiki. 


there  were  various  rumors  set  afloat  by  the  foreigners  to 
the  effect  that  some  barbarian  naval  expedition  would 
soon  appear  off  the  coast  of  Japan.  These  rumors  ex- 
cited considerable  fear  and  conjecture  in  the  metropolis 
as  to  the  object  of  such  an  expedition.  Such  were  the 
main  features  of  our  report.  A few  days  ago,  however, 
a secret  messenger  came  through  the  inland  mountain 
roads  from  Yedo,  bearing  to  us  the  important  informa- 
tion that  a foreign  fleet  had  put  in  its  appearance  in  the 
bay  a few  miles  south  of  Yedo,  creating  great  consterna- 
tion in  that  region.  Our  spies  in  Yedo  also  notified  us 
that  they  needed  two  or  three  assistants  to  render  aid 
in  the  work  of  securing  information.  You  well  know 
that  our  emperors  have  long  been  treated  like  puppets 
by  the  Shoguns,  and  that  our  present  Emperor  has  long 
chafed  at  the  undignified  and  degrading  position  in 
which  he  has  been  placed.  You  also  know  that  Satsuma 
and  the  southwestern  Daimios  have  long  been  bitterly 
hostile  to  the  encroachments  of  the  Tokugawa  Shoguns, 
and  that  they  are  carefully  watching  for  a favorable 
opportunity  to  overturn  the  Yedo  tyrant  ; therefore,  it  is 
of  vital  importance  to  our  cause  that  we  keep  well  posted 
on  all  matters  of  a public  nature,  in  order  to  know  how  to 
act.  If  we  can  create  such  violent  discontent  among  the 
provinces  as  to  create  a revolution,  whereby  the  house  of 
Tokugawa  may  be  overthrown,  who  knows  but  what  our 
Emperor  may  regain  his  prestige  and  ancient  power  ? 

“ I do  not  imagine  that  the  southwestern  Daimios  have 
any  special  love  or  admiration  for  our  imperial  master, 
nor  do  I think  that  they  would  worry  themselves  much 
about  him  under  ordinary  circumstances  ; but  their 
hatred  for  the  house  of  Tokugawa,  dating  from  the  time 
when  Tokugawa  Iyeyas  routed  the  legions  of  the  league 
and  stormed  the  castle  of  Osaca,  where  perished  the 
only  son  of  Hideyoshi,  cherished  friend  and  ally  of  Sat- 
suma, has  become  of  late  years  so  very  pronounced  that 
the  Shogun  hardly  dares  to  cast  his  eyes  in  their  direc- 
tion. And,  in  order  to  gratify  their  spite  against  the 
house  of  Tokugawa,  who  knows  but  what  our  Emperor 


An  Evening  on  the  Kamogawa  Shoals.  49 


may  form  a coalition  with  the  southwestern  Daimios  for 
allies,  and  thus  regain  his  former  power  ?” 

“Aye,  who  knows?”  exclaimed  the  Nakashimas. 

For  a while  they  all  sat  musing  over  the  strange  ideas 
suggested  by  the  extraordinary  narration  of  Mr.  Yamada  ; 
which,  though  told  in  a few  concise  words  in  this  chapter, 
yet  occupied  a long  time  when  interspersed  with  abundant 
gestures,  frequent  explanatory  comments,  and  answers  to 
queries  from  the  attentive  listeners,  together  with  alter- 
nate smoking  of  pipes  and  sipping  of  tea.  It  was  draw- 
ing well  on  toward  the  middle  watches  of  the  night  as 
timed  by  the  deep-toned  mournful  notes  of  the  massive 
bells  of  the  temples.  Mr.  Nakashima  was  gazing  dreamily 
across  the  river  upon  the  sombre  groves  that  covered  the 
mountain  sides,  in  whose  sylvan  depths  the  booming 
vibrations  announced  the  presence  of  monasteries  em- 
bowered there. 

“Sir,”  said  Mr.  Yamada,  abruptly,  addressing  Mr. 
Nakashima,  “ what  say  you  to  allowing  your  sons  to 
assist  me  in  this  matter  of  collecting  information  for  our 
common  master,  the  Emperor?  I know  that  this  propo- 
sition is  a sudden  one,  and  that,  from  the  danger  con- 
nected therewith,  it  must  shock  you  somewhat.  I have 
cast  my  eyes  around  for  assistants,  and  I can  find  no  one 
so  well  suited  for  the  Yedo  circuit  as  your  sons.  The 
fact  that  their  ancestors  were  retainers  of  Tokugawa 
Iyeyas  will  aid  them  immensely  in  attaching  themselves 
to  the  retinue  of  some  Tokugawa  lord  in  Yedo  ; while 
their  blood  relationship  to  the  imperial  family — remote 
though  it  be — insures  their  loyalty  to  our  cause.  I have 
long  considered  this  plan,  and  my  prime  object  in  bring- 
ing you  down  here  this  evening  was  to  submit  it  to  you 
in  confidence.  I can  well  see  that  your  sons  are  eager 
for  the  service,  and  need  no  urging  to  enter  upon  the 
dangerous  career  of  imperial  spies  ; but  at  the  same  time 
I can  well  understand  the  solicitude  of  your  paternal 
heart,  and  I therefore  do  not  urge  upon  you  an  immediate 
answer.  You  may  consider  this  matter  at  your  leisure, 
and  notify  me  in  due  time  of  your  decision.” 


50 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“Honorable  sir,”  replied  Mr.  Nakashima,  “I  cannot 
feel  otherwise  than  highly  honored  at  the  supreme  con- 
fidence you  repose  in  me  and  in  my  sons.  My  loyalty 
and  zeal  for  our  imperial  master  will  ever  remain  stead- 
fast ; and  my  friendship  for  the  house  of  Tokugawa 
surely  cannot  be  very  strong  after  the  shabby  treatment 
our  family  has  received  at  their  hands.  Yet,  as  your 
proposition  is  an  important  one,  requiring  serious  and 
careful  consideration,  I will  duly  weigh  it  in  consultation 
with  my  sons,  and  you  will  have  our  reply  at  an  early 
day.” 

Our  friends  now  wended  their  way  homeward,  where 
they  indulged  in  a brief  siesta  upon  the  balconies,  and 
then  the  master  ordered  the  servant  to  slip  the  shojees 
into  the  grooves  in  the  middle  of  the  room,  and  to  spread 
out  the  bedding  on  the  tatamis  on  both  sides  of  this  ex- 
temporized partition.  Gentle  slumbers,  like  a soft  mist, 
then  settled  down  upon  their  busy  brains,  and  dreams  of 
flashing  blades  and  mangled  bodies  reflected  the  gory 
recitals  of  the  host. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


A COURIER  DESPATCH. 

In  the  gray  dawn  of  a morning  in  August  a courier 
stood  beside  the  western  gateway  of  the  Shogun’s  castle 
in  Yedo.  It  was  beside  the  outermost  moat,  at  a place 
where  the  flat  lands  surrounding  the  waters  of  the  bay 
abruptly  merged  into  the  rolling  hill  country  that  undu- 
lated far  away  in  all  directions  to  the  distant  mountains. 
The  broad  ditch  that  had  closely  clung  to  the  grassy 
ramparts  in  all  their  twists  and  turns  on  the  low  lands 
now  found  itself  confronted  with  a high  hill,  through 
which  it  had  to  pierce  its  way.  On  either  side  of  the 
mighty  cutting  the  swarded  embankments  sloped  upward 
in  graceful  curves  of  living  green,  opening  up  a sweet 
vista  of  deeply  shaded  waters,  upon  whose  placid  bosom 
the  gorgeous  lotus  plants  unfolded  their  broad  leaves  to 
catch  the  rosy  petals  of  their  glorious  blossoms  ; along 
whose  margin  the  reeds  and  lilies  grew  beneath  the 
shadows  of  the  dwarfed  pines  that  stretched  forth  their 
grotesque  branches  upon  frail  bamboo  trellises  ; and 
where  the  poky  little  wild  ducks  from  far  northern  lakes 
floated  in  myriad  squadrons  during  the  winter  months, 
giving  to  the  landscape  an  appearance  that  cannot  be 
otherwise  described  than  as  Japanesque.  A fragile 
wooden  bridge  crossed  the  moat  below  the  cutting,  and 
a wide  causeway  gradually  curved  up  the  hillside  toward 
the  portals  of  the  massive  gateway  that  stood  at  the  top 
of  the  cutting. 

This  gateway  was  a massive  double-storied  tower  of 
rectangular  proportions.  It  was  constructed  of  wood, 
plaster,  and  tiles.  The  beams  and  the  planks  were  of 


51 


52 


Mito  Yashiki. 


immense  size,  and  were  plated  with  thick  sheets  of  iron. 
The  heavy  wooden  gates  were  also  heavily  plated  with 
iron,  and  were  thickly  studded  with  massive  iron  nails. 
When  the  massive  wings  swung  inward  on  their  grating 
hinges  they  swept  nearly  all  the  space  beneath  the  second 
story.  There  was,  however,  a small  room  on  either  hand 
for  the  accommodation  of  the  guards  who  opened  the 
gates  at  sunrise,  and  who  opened  the  little  wicket  gate 
(inlaid  within  one  of  the  wings)  to  duly  accredited 
persons  demanding  entrance  after  sunset.  The  upper 
story  was  one  immense  room,  pierced  on  all  sides  with 
heavily  barred  windows  for  archers  and  matchlock-men 
to  discharge  their  missiles  upon  assaulting  ranks  be- 
neath. 

The  gates  had  not  yet  been  opened  for  the  day,  and 
the  guards  slumbered  in  the  lower  rooms  of  the  tower. 
Outside  of  the  gateway,  leaning  against  its  massive  posts, 
stood  the  courier,  awaiting  the  delivery  of  the  despatch 
that  he  had  been  notified  to  call  for  at  daybreak.  He 
was  a tall  muscular  fellow,  tanned  from  head  to  heels  in 
a manner  quite  sufficient  to  have  excited  the  envy  of 
some  professional  athlete.  On  his  feet  were  straw  san- 
dals ; around  his  loins  was  a scanty  rag  ; around  his 
shoulders  was  flung  a dark-blue  cotton  tunic  as  a pre- 
caution against  cold  during  inaction  ; upon  his  head  was 
a broad-brimmed  coolie  hat  woven  out  of  bamboo  strips  ; 
and  in  his  hand  he  held  a coarse  cotton  handkerchief, 
with  which  he  industriously  brushed  off  the  mosquitoes 
that  seemed  inclined  to  breakfast  on  his  bare  legs. 

But  the  despatch  was  delayed.  If  you  will  follow  the 
road  inside  the  gateway  for  half  a mile  or  so  over  the 
brow  of  the  hill,  past  the  barracks  and  past  the  mansions 
of  the  gentry,  to  that  stately  yashiki 1 near  the  innermost 

1 “ A yashiki  was  a style  of  feudal  architecture  peculiar  to  Yedo. 
The  central  feature  was  a palace  of  vast  proportions.  Around  this, 
on  all  sides,  were  gardens,  lawns,  and  courtyards,  covering  frequently 
many  acres  of  ground.  All  this  was  then  hemmed  in  with  an  unbro- 

ken line  of  barracks  arranged  in  a quadrangle  and  having  heavily 
barred  windows  and  iron-bound  gates  of  massive  proportions.  Each 


A Courier  Despatch. 


53 


moat,  you  will  find  the  lights  still  glimmering  in  the 
council-chamber  of  the  presiding  officer  of  the  Gorojio.' 
There  had  been  a stormy  night  session  of  that  body.  It 
was  long  past  midnight  before  the  Daimios  in  council 
had  summoned  their  respective  escorts  and  had  been 
borne  in  their  norimons  to  their  respective  yashikis. 
There  had  been  much  wild  and  fierce  discussion  over 
the  answer  that  should  be  given  to  the  letter  of  Millard 
Fillmore,  the  President  of  the  United  States  of  North 
America,  which  had  been  delivered  by  a powerful  fleet 
of  vessels  a fortnight  before  to  the  Shogun’s  envoy  about 
twenty  miles  below  Yedo. 

The  contents  of  the  letter  were  friendly  enough,  but 
they  proposed  to  invade  the  policy  of  two  centuries  and 
to  inaugurate  changes  whose  momentous  consequences 
could  not  be  foreseen.  No  conclusion  had  been  arrived 
at  except  to  speedily  summon  an  experienced  interpreter 
from  Nagasaki  and  to  instruct  the  governor  of  that  city 
to  collect  whatsoever  information  he  could  from  the 
Dutch  merchants  in  Deshima  concerning  the  history  and 
the  characteristics  of  this  strange  nation  beyond  the 
seas.  The  presiding  officer  has  just  put  the  official  seal 
to  his  communications  to  the  governor  of  Nagasaki,  and 
his  secretary  is  now  placing  the  despatches  in  a long 
lacquered  box,  something  like  a lady’s  glove-box  ; and 
now,  after  tying  that  up  carefully  and  placing  it  within  a 
square  box  of  larger  dimensions  attached  to  a long  stick, 
he  locks  the  lid  carefully  with  a duplicate  key  and  gives 
it  to  his  servant  to  carry  in  haste  to  the  courier  waiting 

Daimio  had  his yashiki  in  Yedo,  wherein  he  and  his  army  of  retainers 
resided  during  their  long  visits  under  the  Tokugawa  regime.  But  few 
of  these  grand  structures  remain  ; many  were  Burnt  during  the  Revo- 
lution, and  some  of  the  finest,  having  been  turned  into  government 
offices,  were  set  on  fire  and  destroyed  by  stoves  improperly  set  up 
therein.” — “A  Budget  of  Letters  from  Japan,”  page  132.  note. 

] “ The  Shogun  was  assisted  in  his  deliberations  and  executive 
functions  by  the  Gorojio , or  council  of  smaller  Daimios  ; and  as  the 
Shogun  was  oftener  a puppet  than  not,  the  government  of  Japan  came 
at  last  to  be  practically  vested  in  the  president  of  this  council — -a 
man,  under  ordinary  circumstances,  of  comparatively  low  rank.” — 
B/aekwootfs  Magazine,  vol.  101,  p.  430. 


54 


Mito  Yashiki. 


at  the  western  gateway.  With  flying  feet  he  speeds  by 
the  gardens  and  the  barracks  and  reaches  the  gateway 
just  as  the  drowsy  guards  are  awaking  the  echoes  of  the 
place  with  stentorian  yawns.  At  sight  of  the  lacquered 
chest,  stamped  with  the  gilded  crests  of  the  Tokugawas, 
they  prostrate  themselves  upon  the  tatamis  and  receive  it 
with  reverential  hands.  The  doors  are  flung  back  and 
the  expectant  courier  is  ushered  in  to  receive  his  burden. 
Making  profound  obeisance,  he  proceeds  with  trembling 
hands  to  wrap  the  chest  carefully  in  oil-paper  to  protect 
it  during  its  long  journey  overland  to  the  western  gates 
of  the  empire.  Then  drawing  forth  his  jade-stone  mono- 
gram from  his  tobacco-pouch,  he  stamps  with  nervous 
hand  his  signature  to  the  receipt,  that  states  that  on  that 
day  he  duly  received  from  the  proper  officer  a govern- 
ment despatch  contained  in  box  number  200  for  trans- 
mission to  the  next  station  on  the  Nakasctido  (Inland 
Road),  twelve  miles  from  Yedo.  Then  fastening  his 
tunic  to  one  end  of  the  pole,  he  swings  the  chest  over 
his  shoulder,  and  rushes  down  the  causeway  just  as  the 
morning  sun,  rising  from  the  broad  bosom  of  the  Pacific, 
is  tinting  with  its  beams  the  shores  of  the  sea-girt  isles. 

The  courier  is  now  fully  under  way,  and  very  rapidly 
does  he  speed  westward  over  the  hills.  After  a sharp 
trot  of  about  an  hour  and  a half  he  rushed  panting  into 
a village  where  the  first  relay  was  stationed.  The  post- 
office  was  an  ordinary  native  house,  in  front  of  which 
stood  several  coolies  and  pack-horses.  In  one  of  the 
large  front  rooms  that  served  as  an  office  were  the  relay 
couriers  lying  around  upon  the  tatamis , smoking  pipes 
and  sipping  tea.  As  soon  as  it  was  announced  that  a 
despatch  from  Yedo  was  on  its  way  up  the  street,  a tall, 
muscular  fellow  at  once  sprang  up  and  stripped  himself 
for  work.  So  quick  was  he  in  his  preparation  that,  ere 
the  glittering  body  of  the  approaching  courier  had  swung 
past  the  gateway,  he  stood  in  the  street  ready  for  the 
despatch.  The  box  was  instantly  seized  by  the  post- 
master, its  number  and  alleged  contents  quickly  noted  in 
the  register,  a receipt  duly  given  therefor,  and,  after  a 


A Courier  Despatch. 


55 


delay  of  barely  five  minutes,  it  was  again  speeding  along 
the  road  toward  its  destination. 

Thus  it  sped  onward  all  day  long  with  fresh  couriers 
at  intervals  of  ten  or  twelve  miles.  At  night  it  was  nearly 
one  hundred  miles  from  Yedo,  upon  the  verge  of  the 
mighty  mountain  regions  of  the  interior.  It  was  care- 
fully guarded  at  the  village  post-office  until  daylight, 
when  it  was  again  on  its  way  up  into  the  grand  moun- 
tains of  central  Japan,  where  it  sped  onward  all  day  long 
over  mountain  passes  thousands  of  feet  high  ; deep  down 
into  valleys  well  shaded  with  forests  of  maple,  crypto- 
meria,  beech,  and  oak  ; past  the  base  of  the  volcano 
Asamayama,  that  lifted  its  smoking  head  eight  thousand 
feet  above  sea  level  ; past  engroved  temples  and  villages 
tucked  away  amid  gulches  and  ravines,  where  monkeys 
and  deer  abounded,  and  where  bears  and  panthers  waged 
war  against  the  wild  boars  ; past  hot  mineral  springs, 
and  past  hamlets  embowered  in  bamboo  groves  ; over 
lofty  mountains  whence  could  be  seen  mighty  Fujisan  on 
the  eastern  coast,  and  massive  Hakusan  that  linked  the 
corners  of  five  provinces  on  the  western  coast  ; through 
vales  that  were  filled  with  the  rustlings  of  mountain  tor- 
rents freighted  with  the  melted  snows  of  a past  winter  ; 
through  some  of  the  grandest  and  most  picturesque 
mountain  scenery  in  the  world.  Yet  the  couriers  heeded 
none  of  these  things,  but,  with  bated  breath  and  bowed 
heads,  sped  over  passes,  through  vales,  and  across  tor- 
rents, bearing  onward  yet  deeper  into  the  mountain  fast- 
nesses the  message  of  the  Shogun.  The  nut-brown, 
glistening  hounds  chased  the  parting  day  with  hurried 
feet,  for  the  sun  sets  early  in  these  deep  valleys,  and  they 
must  at  all  hazards  make  their  eighty  miles  of  journey. 
Late  in  the  evening  the  last  courier  rushed  down  into  the 
sweet  valley  of  Agematsu  and  deposited  his  burden  with 
the  village  postmaster.  Thus  has  it  come  one  hundred 
and  eighty  miles  on  its  way. 

At  daylight  on  the  third  day  it  was  again  on  its  way 
over  mountains  that  gradually  merged  into  foot-hills  until 
the  courier  leaped  forth  upon  the  plains  of  Mino  among 


56 


Mito  Yashiki. 


wheat  fields,  rice  fields,  and  groves  of  mulberry-trees. 
By  dusk  the  despatch  had  been  borne  quite  across  the 
province  of  Mino  near  to  the  mountain  barriers  of  Lake 
Bi\ya.  And  on  the  fourth  day  it  had  skirted  the  lovely 
hill  country  encircling  the  eastern  and  southern  shores 
of  Lake  Biwa,  had  passed  over  the  northern  barrier  of 
Yamashiro  into  Kioto,  and  thence  had  gone  onward  to 
Osaca  on  the  shores  of  the  Inland  Sea,  thus  making 
nearly  four  hundred  miles  in  four  days. 

Here  the  scene  changed.  Instead  of  continuing  the 
journey  by  following  the  road  along  the  shores  of  the 
Inland  Sea,  the  despatch  finds  a large  and  swift  boat 
with  two  sets  of  oarsmen  ready  to  receive  it.  Eight 
lusty  scullers — four  standing  on  each  side  of  the  stern — 
plied  the  long  narrow  blades  with  such  skill  and  power 
that  the  trembling  craft  rushed  through  the  blue  waters 
with  such  tremendous  speed  that,  ere  the  first  day’s  sun 
had  set,  its  sharp  prow  had  cut  through  nearly  eighty 
miles  of  waves,  and  was  threading  the  channels  of  the 
inland  archipelago.  Late  at  night  the  crew  turned  the 
prow  toward  the  lights  of  a village  on  the  shores  of  a 
hilly  islet.  Shooting  the  boat  high  up  on  the  sandy 
beach,  the  weary  crew  bivouacked  in  its  immediate 
vicinity,  while  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  despatch  con- 
veyed it  to  the  house  of  the  mayor,  where  he  was  hospi- 
tably entertained  during  the  night.  While  dawn  was  yet 
tarrying  in  the  east,  the  boat  had  been  shot  down  into 
the  waves  ; and  the  chanting  and  the  tramping  of  the 
scullers,  as  they  simultaneously  threw  themselves  inward 
and  then  outward  over  the  gunwales,  kept  up  a monoto- 
nous rhythm  of  motion  and  of  song  that  could  be  heard 
for  a great  distance  over  the  peaceful  waters.  All  day 
long  it  sped  through  the  maze  of  channels.  The  yakunin 
(officer)  lolled  upon  a tatami  amidships,  smoking  and 
dozing.  At  high  noon  they  lunched  at  a fishing  village 
ensconced  upon  the  shores  of  a picturesque  island.  And 
the  evening  shades  found  them  camping  on  the  shores  of 
a little  inlet  midway  through  the  channel.  The  next  day, 
having  shaken  themselves  clear  of  the  maze  of  islands, 


A Courier  Despatch. 


57 


they  came  into  wider  water,  where  they  hugged  the  shore 
of  the  mainland.  And  on  the  following  day  they  reached 
Shimonoseki  Straits,  the  gateway  to  the  open  sea. 

Here,  instead  of  sending  the  despatch  to  Nagasaki  by 
the  land  route,  it  was  found  that  the  orders  directed 
them  to  proceed  there  by  sea.  Accordingly  the  oarsmen 
were  changed  and  a stock  of  provisions  was  taken  aboard. 
Then  they  went  outside  and  crept  for  three  days  along 
the  sea-coast,  sometimes  among  clusters  of  islands  quite 
as  picturesque  as  the  inland  archipelago.  And  on  the 
evening  of  the  third  day  they  slipped  between  the  head- 
lands of  Nagasaki  harbor  and  went  skimming  along 
toward  the  landing,  where  the  adventurous  box,  after  a 
journey  of  nearly  one  thousand  miles,  was  duly  delivered  ; 
and  it  was  soon  on  its  way  to  the  palace  of  the  governor, 
who  received  it,  and  was  soon  deeply  buried  in  the  con- 
tents thereof. 

Early  on  the  morning  of  the  following  day,  a messenger 
hurried  from  the  gateway  of  the  palace  down  to  the  edge 
of  the  harbor,  where  had  been  fdled  in  about  half  an  acre 
of  land,  upon  which  were  built  the  warehouses  and  the 
residences  of  the  Dutch  merchants,  constituting  what  has 
become  known  to  the  world  as  Deshima.  Coming  to  the 
solitary  bridge  that  spanned  the  broad  canal  cutting  the 
island  from  the  mainland,  our  messenger  was  challenged 
by  the  guard  stationed  there,  who,  upon  a careful  exami- 
nation of  the  governor’s  passport,  at  once  ushered  the 
bearer  thereof  over  the  bridge  to  the  gateway  leading 
into  the  walled  compound  of  Deshima,  where  he  was 
challenged  by  another  guard,  who  took  the  passport  with 
profound  obeisance  and  examined  it  on  bended  knees. 
Passing  muster  here  also,  the  heavy  gates  were  swung 
open,  and  our  messenger  stepped  beyond  the  threshold  of 
the  “compound  ” that  had  served  as  a mercantile  prison 
for  over  two  centuries.  The  place  was  shaped  like  that 
part  of  a spreading  fan  upon  which  paper  is  usually 
pasted,  and  it  measured  six  hundred  feet  across  its  face, 
and  two  hundred  and  forty  feet  across  its  sides.  At  each 
corner  stood  a guard-house.  A broad  promenade 


58 


Mito  Yashiki. 


bounded  it  along  the  water’s  edge.  Two  well-gravelled 
walks  meeting  at  right  angles  in  the  centre  divided  the 
enclosure  into  four  nearly  equal  parts,  that  contained  the 
warehouses,  residences,  gardens,  and  flower-beds  of  the 
“factory.”  In  the  right-hand  corner  near  the  gateway, 
enclosed  by  a high  bamboo  fence,  stood  the  house  of  the 
Dutch  Resident,  in  a pretty  garden  filled  with  shrubbery 
and  flowers.  It  was  a double-storied  house,  built  after 
the  native  style.  In  front  of  it  stood  the  tall  flag-pole, 
from  whose  top  floated  the  flag  of  Holland. 

Our  messenger  was  duly  ushered  upstairs  into  the 
presence  of  the  Resident,  who,  loosely  attired  in  a Japa- 
nese robe,  was  sipping  his  morning  cup  of  coffee  on  the 
veranda.  He  received  the  governor’s  messenger  with 
profound  obeisance,  and,  while  the  interpreter  was  being 
summoned,  he  ordered  up  refreshments  for  his  guest. 
There  was  great  curiosity  in  the  community  to  know 
what  might  be  the  purport  of  this  early  communication 
from  the  governor  ; but  the  interpreter  promptly  put  in 
an  appearance,  and  the  message  was  found  to  be  tanta- 
lizingly  brief  and  characteristically  peremptory  : “ The 

Resident  is  commanded  by  the  governor  of'  Nagasaki  to 
appear  without  delay  at  the  palace.”  It  was  useless  to 
inquire  as  to  the  nature  of  the  business,  for  the  astute 
messenger  had  profoundly  bowed  himself  out  of  the 
house  as  soon  as  the  order  had  been  communicated.  The 
Resident  hastily  dressed  himself,  and,  summoning  his 
norimon,  went  ’to  the  palace  with  the  interpreter.  After 
being  regaled  with  tea  and  cakes  in  an  anteroom,  he  was 
ushered  into  the  august  presence  of  the  governor,  before 
whom  he  prostrated  himself  in  abject  salutation.  A long 
list  of  questions  was  then  put  to  him  through  the  inter- 
preter. He  was  requested  to  give  all  the  information  he 
could  concerning  the  population,  productions,  manufac- 
tures, and  general  resources  of  the  United  States  of 
North  America.  What  was  its  power  in  war?  What 
were  its  weak  points  ? What  were  its  capacity  and  its 
facilities  for  waging  foreign  war?  Was  it  on  good  terms 
with  the  nations  of  Europe  ? What  was  the  present  con- 


A Courier  Despatch. 


59 


dition  of  its  army  and  navy  ? How  many  days  would  it 
require  to  navigate  a fleet  from  those  shores  ? 

The  answers  to  these  and  to  a multitude  of  similar 
questions  were  duly  recorded  by  the  secretaries.  After 
a couple  of  hours  thus  spent,  a short  intermission  was 
allowed,  and  tea  and  tobacco  were  passed  around.  After 
that,  a few  general  questions,  that  appeared  to  have  sub- 
sequently suggested  themselves,  were  then  put.  Then 
the  Resident  was  requested  to  send  to  the  governor  all 
the  maps,  charts,  atlases,  and  books  descriptive  of  the 
United  States  and  of  Europe  that  he  could  spare,  and 
also  to  release  immediately  from  his  employ  the  senior 
interpreter  attached  to  the  “factory,”  to  be  sent  to  Yedo 
for  an  indefinite  period.  The  interview  was  then  termi- 
nated, and  the  Resident  was  forthwith  escorted  back  to 
his  home. 

The  office  of  the  governor  presented  a busy  scene  far 
into  the  night.  The  literature  and  the  atlases  that  the 
Resident  had  sent  up  with  his  compliments,  were  duly 
wrapped  up  in  oil-paper,  and  were  carefully  packed  in  a 
stout  lacquered  box,  which  was  duly  locked  and  sealed. 
The  busy  fingers  of  the  secretaries  were  many  hours  at 
work  on  the  despatches.  At  daybreak  the  last  item  had 
been  transcribed,  and  box  number  200  was  filled  with 
voluminous  despatches.  It  was  then  locked  with  the 
duplicate  key,  and  was  duly  delivered,  together  with  the 
box  of  books,  to  servants  who  at  once  hastened  to  the 
beach  with  them,  and  before  sunrise  the  swift  boat 
bearing  the  interpreter  and  the  yakunin  in  charge  of  the 
boxes  was  gliding  between  the  headlands  of  the  bay  on 
its  way  back  to  Osaca  through  the  Inland  Sea.  On  the 
eighth  day  after  its  departure  from  Nagasaki,  it  entered 
the  mouth  of  the  river  on  which  Osaca  is  situated. 
Without  delay  the  despatch  box  was  sent  flying  overland 
on  the  shoulders  of  couriers  toward  Yedo,  where  it 
arrived  within  four  days  at  the  yashiki  of  him  who  held 
the  duplicate  key  thereof. 

But  the  books  and  the  interpreter  not  being  adapted 
to  such  rapid  means  of  conveyance,  were  transferred  to  a 


6o 


Mito  Yashiki. 


long,  flat-bottomed  river-boat  in  charge  of  a yaku?ii?i  who 
had  been  delegated  to  escort  our  friend  to  Yedo  by  the 
Tokaido  (overland  shore  road)  as  rapidly  as  might  be 
consistent  with  comfort.  All  night  long  the  boatmen 
alternately  sculled,  towed,  and  punted  their  shallow  craft 
against  the  swift  current  of  the  Kamogawa  up  toward 
Kioto.  They  arrived  there  at  daylight.  Here  the  over- 
land journey  was  to  commence.  It  was  decided,  how- 
ever, at  the  suggestion  of  the  interpreter,  to  tarry  in 
Kioto  for  a couple  of  days  in  order  to  make  necessary 
preparations  for  the  long  journey  before  them.  But  back 
of  this  delay  was  a subtle  cause  unperceived  by  the  bluff 
old  yakunin,  but  the  undercurrent  of  which  will  appear  in 
the  next  chapter. 


CHAPTER  V. 


A MUTUAL  COMPACT. 

On  the  morning  of  the  day  when  our  friend  Konishi, 
the  interpreter,  arrived  in  Kioto,  he  set  out  with  his 
companion  ostensibly  for  a ramble  around  the  city.  His 
elderly  friend,  however,  soon  became  wearied  with  sight- 
seeing, and  suggested  that  a day  be  made  of  it  in  one  of 
the  fine  theatres  in  the  vicinity  of  Gihon-machi.  Here 
the  bluff  yakuniris  attention  was  rapturously  absorbed  in 
a sanguinary  plot  of  the  thirteenth  century  transacted  at 
Kamakura,  the  capital  of  the  Ashikaga  Shoguns.  In 
fact,  so  carried  away  was  he  with  the  wild  horrors  of  the 
scene,  that  he  repeatedly  roared  forth  his  approval  and 
shouted  forth  his  name  (in  accordance  with  native  usage) 
from  the  gallery-box  where  he  was  ensconced,  so  that 
the  actors  might  know  whose  approbation  their  meritori- 
ous performance  had  brought  down. 

Toward  noon  he  ordered  up  a repast  of  rice,  fish,  and 
sake  from  a neighboring  restaurant,  and,  under  the 
influence  of  the  exhilarating  beverage,  became  so  up- 
roarious when  the  play  was  resumed  in  the  afternoon, 
that  Konishi  was  vexed  and  mortified  beyond  measure, 
for  it  was  not  considered  very  good  form  for  knightly 
gentlemen  to  be  seen  in  such  places.  Finding  that  his 
friend  was  in  for  a tempestuous  gale  for  the  balance  of  the 
afternoon,  Konishi  left  him  in  charge  of  a couple  of 
friends  whom  he  had  invited  to  the  theatre,  and  excus- 
ing himself  on  the  plea  of  illness,  he  slipped  out  of  the 
building.  Having  thus  shaken  off  his  shadow,  his  move- 
ments were  by  no  means  uncertain,  but  showed  them- 
selves to  be  in  accordance  with  a well  studied  plan.  He 

61 


62 


Mito  Yashiki. 


rapidly  crossed  over  to  the  other  side  of  the  city,  and 
was  soon  wending  his  way  among  hedgerows  and  groves, 
following  the  road  toward  the  mountains  that  formed  the 
western  barriers  of  Yamashiro.  When  in  doubt  as  to  his 
route,  a few  polite  inquiries  at  wayside  cottages  always 
set  him  in  motion  toward  the  place  that  he  seemed 
desirous  of  reaching. 

At  last  he  entered  the  sequestered  glen  at  the  foot  of 
Atago-Yama.  Following  the  road  up  toward  the  hamlet, 
he  halted  before  the  Nakashima  gateway,  as  if  in  doubt 
about  his  bearings.  Perceiving  Madame  Nakashima 
demurely  sewing  upon  the  veranda,  he  clattered  across 
the  yard  upon  his  clumsy  wooden  clogs,  and  inquired  of 
her  whether  a gentleman  named  Nakashima  Tomokichi 
dwelt  anywhere  in  the  vicinity.  His  voice  speedily 
brought  from  upstairs  the  gentleman  in  question,  to- 
gether with  his  father  and  brothers.  It  soon  became 
manifest  that  the  arrival  of  Konishi  had  been  expected, 
and  that  he  and  Tomokichi  were  old  friends.  Profuse 
and  profound  salutations  were  exchanged,  and  Konishi 
was  speedily  refreshed  with  tea  and  tobacco,  and  he  was 
ceremoniously  introduced  by  Tomokichi  to  the  other 
members  of  the  family  as  Konishi  Yeyoshi,  vassal  of  the 
Daimio  of  Mito,  temporarily  detached  from  the  service 
of  said  clan  and  in  the  employ  of  the  Dutch  Resident  at 
Deshima  as  senior  interpreter,  and  a dear  friend  of  his 
excellency  the  governor  of  Nagasaki,  but  now  promoted 
to  be  an  adviser  to  the  Bakufu  1 in  matters  pertaining  to 
foreign  affairs,  because  of  his  scholarly  familiarity  with 
foreign  literature. 

After  much  general  conversation  the  gentlemen  retired 
upstairs,  and  the  old  lady  was  left  below  to  keep  watch 
on  the  gateway  and  to  announce  the  approach  of 
strangers.  In  the  back-room  upstairs  there  were  spread 
upon  the  floor  the  wonderful  chart  and  a large  map  of 

1 Baku  is  a curtain  such  as  the  Japanese  used  in  war  to  enclose  the 
part  of  the  camp  occupied  by  the  general,  and,  in  peace,  by  picnic 
parties.  The  curtain  was  emblematical  of  the  military  power,  and 
hence  the  office  from  which  the  country  was  administered  by  the  mili- 
tary vassal  was  called  bakufu , i.  e.,  curtain  office. — E.  Satow. 


A Mutual  Compact. 


63 

Japan.  Evidently  some  route  was  being  marked  out. 
The  gentlemen  seated  themselves  around  the  map,  and 
at  once  plunged  into  an  earnest  conversation  that  clearly 
showed  that  the  subject-matter  thereof  had  long  been 
carefully  under  consideration  by  each  one  of  them. 

“The  hotel  boy  brought  your  message  this  morning,” 
said  Tomokichi,  “ and  I was  beginning  to  fear  that  some 
unforeseen  event  had  intervened  to  prevent  your  promised 
visit.  I was  delighted  beyond  expression  to  hear  the 
familiar  sound  of  your  voice  downstairs.” 

“Yes,  I was  delayed  by  that  stupid  old  idiot  who  has 
been  delegated  to  shadow  me  to  Yedo,”  replied  Konishi, 
“and  if  a kindly  bottle  of  sakt  had  not  come  to  my  rescue 
I would  yet  be  wilting  in  the  close  atmosphere  of  the 
Gihon-machi  theatre.  If  that  old  fool  be  not  rollicking 
drunk  by  night  time  and  ready  to  turn  the  theatre  upside 
down,  I shall  be  very  much  mistaken  in  my  estimate  of 
his  capacity  for  working  iniquity.  I was  fortunate  in 
being  able  to  leave  him  in  the  keeping  of  a couple  of 
Aidzu  samurai , whose  acquaintance  I made  last  year  here 
in  Kioto,  and  I would  not  be  surprised  if  they  had  their 
hands  full  by  night,  for  I left  the  sakt1  bottle  filled  with 
some  of  the  headiest  stuff  that  I could  find,  and  if  he  be 
not  lively  enough  to  make  the  Kamogawa  run  up  hill 
when  the  play  ends,  it  will  not  be  my  fault.  I told  him 
that  I wanted  fresh  air  for  my  headache,  and  excused 
myself  for  the  balance  of  the  day.” 

“We  are  immeasurably  gratified  at  the  success  of  your 
stratagem,  and  we  are  deeply  mindful  of  the  honor  that 
you  have  conferred  upon  us  by  your  presence,”  replied 
Mr.  Nakashima. 

“Sir,  you  honor  me  too  highly,”  responded  Konishi. 

“ Father,”  said  Tomokichi,  “would  it  not  be  best  for 
us  to  hasten  with  the  matter  we  have  under  discussion, 
and  to  arrive  at  some  conclusion  before  it  becomes  neces- 
sary for  our  friend  Konishi  to  return  to  his  hotel  ? Kindly 
lay  before  him  our  plans,  and  solicit  his  advice  in  this 
matter  that  so  deeply  concerns  our  family  and  our  Em- 
peror’s honor.” 


64 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“Your  words  are  wisely  spoken,  my  son.  We  must, 
indeed,  hasten  with  our  discussion.  Know,  then,  honored 
sir,  that  we  desire  your  friendly  assistance  in  a matter  of 
profound  interest  to  ourselves.  Some  time  ago  it  was 
suggested  to  me  that  I should  allow  my  sons  to  engage 
in  the  secret  service  of  our  imperial  master.  You  well 
know  the  great  danger  that  accompanies  such  service, 
and  you  can  well  appreciate  the  great  kindness  of  our 
master  who,  although  sorely  in  need  of  such  aid,  yet  has 
waited  many  weeks  for  our  answer  to  the  proposal,  in 
order  that  we  may  well  consider  the  matter,  and  that  we 
may  do  nothing  that  shall  grieve  our  paternal  heart  in 
the  future.  I have  this  day  given  my  consent  that  my 
sons  may  engage  in  this  enterprise.  They  have  been 
appointed  to  the  Yedo  circuit.  Now  it  has  occurred  to 
my  eldest  son  that  our  ancient  vassalage  to  Tokugawa 
Iyeyas  might  be  of  great  use  to  us  in  the  present  emer- 
gency. You  are  from  the  Mito  branch  of  that  house. 
Why  could  not  my  two  eldest  sons  attach  themselves  to 
that  clan  through  your  influence,  and  then  be  located  in 
the  Mito  Yashiki  in  Yedo  as  retainers  of  the  Dairnio  of 
Mito  ? Can  we  not  have  shadows  at  the  Shogun’s  gate- 
way, and  ears  within  his  moats  ? Who  can  be  more  anx- 
ious to  check  the  boundless  arrogance  of  Tokugawa  than 
your  lord  ? 1 Pray  be  frank,  and  let  us  hear  your  candid 
views  on  the  subject.” 

“ The  honor  that  you  bestow  upon  me  by  reposing 
such  confidence  in  my  judgment  is  indeed  flattering,” 
replied  Konishi,  bowing  his  head  downward  until  his 
forehead  touched  the  tatamis,  “ but  the  matter  that  you 
lay  before  me  requires  delicate  handling  and  careful 
deliberation.  It  is  indeed  well  that  we  have  so  secluded 

1 Many  years  prior  to  the  advent  of  Perry’s  fleet  in  the  waters  of 
Yedo  Bay,  it  had  been  notorious  that  the  leaders  of  the  Mito  clan 
were  hostile  to  the  Shogunate.  They  not  only  cherished  a bitter  dis- 
like of  that  system  of  government,  but  they  were  the  patrons  of  a 
school  of  thought  that  advocated  the  abolishing  of  the  Shogunate  and 
the  reinstatement  of  the  Mikado  as  sole  hereditary  Emperor  of  the 
Japanese  Empire. 


A Mutual  Compact. 


65 


and  so  well  guarded  a place  wherein  to  carry  on  our  dis- 
cussion. It  is  now  well  known  to  you  that  I have  long 
carried  on  a secret  correspondence  with  your  eldest  son 
during  my  residence  at  Deshima  as  interpreter.  I made 
his  acquaintance  several  years  ago  here  in  Kioto  when  I 
was  accompanying  the  Dutch  Embassy  to  Yedo,  and  I 
was  then  much  attracted  by  his  intense  interest  in  all 
matters  relating  to  foreign  countries.  I risked  my  head 
in  smuggling  him  into  the  hotel  to  see  the  foreign- 
ers one  evening,  when  the  members  of  our  escort  were 
scattered  over  the  town  on  business  or  on  pleasure. 

“Since  that  time  I have  sent  him  many  letters  by 
friends  journeying  from  Nagasaki  to  Yedo,  wherein  was 
much  information  about  foreign  countries,  furnished  to 
me  by  the  Dutch  doctor  in  Deshima  in  return  for  in- 
formation I gave  him  about  our  country  and  language. 
This  doctor  was  indeed  a profound  and  insatiable 
scholar,  and  had  many  books  pertaining  to  foreign 
science,  history,  and  religion,  which  he  allowed  me  to 
examine  freely  in  return  for  secret  instruction  in  our 
language.  It  was  my  duty  to  report  myself  at  his  house 
in  the  morning.  During  the  delightful  days  of  spring, 
summer,  and  autumn,  we  sat  upon  the  balcony  overlooking 
the  peaceful  waters  of  the  beautiful  harbor,  and  would 
watch  the  fishing  boats  skimming  over  its  deep  blue 
waves.  We  spent  our  days  in  leisurely  study  and  con- 
versation. The  maps  were  spread  upon  the  tatamis , the 
books  were  laid  upon  the  table,  the  servants  brought  in 
tea  and  tobacco  every  hour  or  so,  and  we  lounged  around 
alternately  upon  the  chairs  while  conning  over  the  books, 
and  upon  the  tatamis  while  consulting  the  charts  and 
maps.  Sometimes  patients  from  the  city  were  ordered 
in  by  the  governor  for  treatment  by  the  foreign  doctor. 
And  at  other  times  we  spent  many  hours  in  examining 
specimens  of  stones,  herbs,  flowers,  and  soil  collected 
during  our  excursions  among  the  hills  and  around  the 
bay. 

“ If  you  were  to  consult  my  letters  during  that  period 
— not  only  to  your  son,  but  also  to  members  of  my  clan 


66 


Mito  Yashiki. 


in  secret  correspondence  with  myself — you  would  find 
therein  a faithful  transcript  of  many  curious  ideas  and 
observations.  If  I were  to  endeavor  to  give  you  an  ac- 
count of  all  the  information  that  I have  secured  about 
foreign  countries,  I would  hardly  know  where  to  begin. 
Our  conceit  about  the  progress  of  our  own  country  is 
unbounded.  We  are  many  centuries  behind  the  world. 
We  must  radically  change  our  institutions  or  speedily 
find  ourselves  at  the  mercy  of  some  unscrupulous  but 
shrewd  foreign  power.  I am  convinced  that  the  system 
of  government  by  proxy  in  our  country  is  injurious. 
The  Shogunate  stands  in  the  way  of  our  national  devel- 
opment. It  must  be  abolished.  But  we  must  proceed 
circumspectly  and  slowly.  I am  heartily  in  favor  of  your 
scheme  of  becoming  conversant  with  matters  at  Yedo. 
By  so  doing  we  can  be  in  a position  to  take  instant  ad- 
vantage of  a favorable  turn  in  the  tide  of  public  affairs, 
and  thus  restore  unity  to  our  sadly  divided  nation,  and 
in  this  way  take  the  first  step  forward.  Honored  sir,  I 
tender  my  humble  services  with  extreme  pleasure.  What- 
ever I can  do  to  aid  your  sons  in  their  dangerous  enter- 
prise shall  be  cheerfully  done.  Kindly  explain  some- 
what more  fully  your  scheme  as  thus  far  developed.” 

“ Our  plan,  sir,  is  almost  matured,”  replied  Mr.  Naka- 
shima.  “When  you  reach  Yedo,  fifteen  days  hence, 
you  can  suggest  to  your  lord  that  a friend  of  yours,  an 
ancient  vassal  of  the  Tokugawa  family  (now  living  near 
Kioto)  is  desirous  of  resuming  his  allegiance,  and  that 
his  two  sons  being  your  dear  friends  are  naturally  desir- 
ous of  connecting  themselves  with  the  Mito  branch  of 
that  family  and  to  be  retained  as  knights-in-waiting  at 
the  Mito  Yashiki  in  Yedo.  It  is  our  supposition  that  all 
of  the  Daimios  will  now  be  desirous  of  swelling  their 
ranks  in  view  of  the  rumored  approach  of  a foreign  fleet 
in  the  spring.  Having  secured  your  lord’s  permission, 
my  two  eldest  sons  can  then  depart  from  here  for  Yedo 
about  the  commencement  of  next  month,  and  can  arrive 
there  in  about  a fortnight  thereafter  in  good  season  to 
commence  observations.  This  simple  plan  is  contingent 


A Mutual  Compact.  67 

on  your  good  services  and  is  subject  to  any  amendment 
that  may  appear  to  be  necessary.” 

“I  have  no  amendment  to  offer,  sir,”  replied  Mr. 
Konishi.  “The  plan  is  good,  but  the  difficulty  will  come 
in  attempting  to  carry  it  out.  However,  we  will  not 
worry  over  that  now.  The  compact  between  us,  then,  is 
that  I shall  journey  on  to  Yedo  and  secure  for  your  sons 
two  appointments  as  knights-in-waiting  at  the  Mito 
Yashiki,  under  my  lord  the  Daimio  ; that  they  are,  within 
a reasonable  time  thereafter,  to  report  themselves  at  the 
Yashiki ; and  that  they  are  then  to  use  their  best  efforts 
to  ferret  out  all  information  they  can  to  benefit  our  great 
cause.  It  is  agreed  that  absolute  secrecy  and  good  faith 
are  to  characterize  all  of  our  proceedings.  It  does  not 
take  very  long  to  state  the  agreement,  does  it  ? Our 
minds  having  thus  met,  I would  suggest  that  the  compact 
be  reduced  to  writing  and  be  duly  executed  in  knightly 
fashion  by  the  parties  thereto.  Your  youngest  son  can  be 
preparing  duplicate  copies  of  the  compact  while  we  are 
waiting.  I must  soon  return  to  my  hotel,  for  I see  that 
the  sun  is  not  far  from  the  mountain  top.  The  shorter 
my  absence  from  head-quarters,  the  better  will  it  be.” 

“ Fortunately  our  evening  meal  is  now  ready  and  I will 
order  it  up  so  that  you  may  have  some  refreshment 
before  undertaking  another  long  walk,”  said  Mr.  Naka- 
shima.  And  here  he  clapped  his  hands  together  several 
times  as  a signal  for  the  ladies  downstairs  to  bring  up  the 
tub  of  steaming  rice,  the  broiled  carp,  the  bean-paste,  the 
soy , the  tea,  and  the  sakt.  The  ladies  spread  the  repast 
on  the  floor,  prostrated  themselves  on  the  tatamis  in 
salutation  of  their  guest  (who  returned  the  salute  with 
obeisance  equally  profound),  and  then  retired  below, 
leaving  the  company  to  continue  their  discussion  in 
seclusion. 

“ It  will  be  necessary,  sir,”  said  Konishi,  as  he  reached 
forward  and  pinched  out  a delicate  morsel  of  carp  with  his 
deft  chopsticks,  and  then  thrust  it  into  a mouthful  of  hot 
rice,  through  which  his  half-swallowed  words  managed  in 
some  way  to  creep  outward  to  the  attentive  ears  of  his 


63 


Mito  Yashiki. 


eager  listeners, — “ it  will  be  necessary  for  your  sons  to 
draw  up  a formal  letter,  over  their  signatures,  addressed 
to  me,  wherein  they  express  a desire  to  become  knights  in 
attendance  on  my  lord  the  Daimio  of  Mito,  and  wherein 
they  request  me  to  exert  my  influence  in  their  behalf  in 
the  matter.  You,  honored  sir,  as  head  of  the  family 
must  then  endorse  thereon  your  approval  under  signet. 
This  document  I will  take  with  me  to  Yedo,  and  will 
there  lay  it  before  my  father,  who  as  head  of  our  family, 
will  endorse  thereon  his  approval  of  the  application,  and 
we  will  then  lay  the  matter  before  our  lord,  who,  after  due 
consultation  with  the  head  men  of  our  clan,  will  probably 
express  himself  in  favor  of  adding  such  skilful  swords- 
men to  his  retinue.  The  proper  officer  will  then  billet  you 
in  the  barracks  of  the  Mito  Yashiki,  and  will  send  you 
through  the  proper  channels  a notification  of  your  ap- 
pointment duly  vised  by  the  Bakufu,  and  will  order  you 
to  report  immediately  at  Yedo  Tor  duty.  You  must  be 
very  careful  not  to  lose  this  document,  for  it  will  be  your 
passport  at  the  Hakone  Gate.1 

Unless  you  can  produce  it  there,  endless  trouble  will 
ensue.  After  passing  that  spot  you  will  find  your  course 
again  unimpeded  until  you  approach  Yedo,  when  you 

1 The  great  roads  that  led  to  Yedo  from  the  southwest,  the  west,  and 
the  north  converged  toward  a semicircle  of  mighty  mountain  harriers 
that  fringed  the  rolling  hill-country  surrounding  that  city  at  a dis- 
tance of  from  seventy  to  ninety  miles.  Amid  these  rugged  passes  the 
Bakufu  had  laid  its  iron  grip  upon  the  throat  of  every  road.  Every- 
body going  to  or  from  Yedo  was  compelled  to  he  examined  at  guarded 
gates  built  across  their  path.  After  the  Tokaido  had  left  behind  it  the 
garden-like  slopes  of  mighty  Fujisan,  it  plunged  into  the  wild  defiles 
of  the  Hakone  Mountains.  At  a point  near  Ilakone  I.ake,  at  an 
elevation  of  nearly  three  thousand  feet  above  the  Pacific  rolling  but  a 
few  miles  below,  stood  the  famous  Hakone  Gate,  through  which 
millions  of  vassals  had  trooped  for  over  two  hundred  years.  The 
haughtiest  Daimios  within  the  realm  had  here  unbent  their  pride, 
while  the  Shoguns’  emissaries  examined  their  retinues  to  see  that  no 
female  hostages  were  being  smuggled  from  the  Yedo  Yashikis. 
Entrenched  in  Yedo  with  the  boundless  billows  of  the  Pacific  Ocean 
at  their  backs  and  with  a mighty  mountain  wall  in  front  of  them,  the 
Tokugawas  bid  defiance  to  the  empire  and  wrung  tithes  and  homage 
from  nearly  two  hundred  principalities. 


A Mutual  Compact. 


69 


must  be  prepared  at  any  moment  to  produce  your  pass- 
port. When  you  enter  Shinagawa,  the  southern  suburb 
of  that  city,  you  will  find  yourselves  under  close  obser- 
vation from  many  quarters  and  your  words  must  be 
judicious  and  your  actions  must  be  circumspect.  Any 
thing  unusual  either  in  your  demeanor  or  in  your  lan- 
guage will  be  at  once  reported  by  spies  to  the  Bakufti. 
You  cannot  be  too  prudent  from  the  time  you  come 
within  sight  of  Yedo,  for  the  very  gate-posts  seem  to  have 
ears,  and  the  very  hebachis  over  which  you  bend  when 
whispering  into  a friend’s  ear  seem  to  be  able  to  transmit 
information  to  head-quarters.  Even  after  you  have 
entered  the  gates  of  our  Yashiki  you  must  continue  your 
caution  and  be  ever  on  the  alert  to  avoid  dropping  any 
word  to  indicate  the  real  purpose  of  your  appearance 
there.  Accustomed  to  the  secluded  life  of  these  serene 
mountains,  you  can  have  but  faint  conception  of  the 
duplicity  and  the  treachery  that  exist  in  our  great 
metropolis.” 

Thus  they  conversed  in  subdued  tones,  while  the  nim- 
ble chopsticks  furnished  periods  to  the  discourse  by 
tucking  away  liberal  supplies  of  hot  rice.  The  lengthen- 
ing shadows  of  the  cherry-trees  in  the  yard  betokened 
the  speedy  approach  of  eventide.  The  soft  notes  of  the 
vesper  bells  could  be  faintly  heard  throbbing  in  the 
groves  near  Kioto.  And  as  the  meal  drew  towards  its 
conclusion  the  copies  of  the  designated  documents  were 
duly  completed  and  ready  for  signature.  It  required 
but  a few  moments  for  the  papers  to  be  executed  and 
for  the  parties  thereto  to  pledge  their  knightly  honor  to 
the  faithful  fulfilment  of  the  terms  thereof.  Konishi 
carefully  wrapped  in  paper  the  letter  and  his  copy  of  the 
compact,  and  then  hid  the  packet  away  in  his  flowing 
sleeve.  He  then  quaffed  the  farewell  cup,  smoked  the 
parting  pipe,  and  took  respectful  leave  of  his  friends, 
and  hurried  downstairs,  where  he  put  on  his  clogs  and 
then  shuffled  across  the  yard  toward  the  gateway,  where 
his  friends  bid  him  a final  adieu  with  endless  bowing 
and  scraping. 


70 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


Down  the  road,  beside  the  frothing  stream,  down 
where  the  enshrined  gods  gazed  stupidly  upon  the  misty 
waters  tumbling  amid  boulders  at  the  rugged  throat  of 
the  glen,  out  among  the  maple  groves  and  the  yellow 
fields  of  ^ape-seed,  went  our  young  friend,  until  in  the 
dusky  gloaming  he  entered  the  quiet  streets  of  the  sub- 
urbs. Over  on  his  left  hand  the  white  walls  of  the 
imperial  palace,  plumed  with  nodding  trees,  stood  out 
serenely  in  the  moonbeams.  He  soon  found  himself 
in  the  courtyard  of  his  hotel,  where  he  was  warmly 
greeted  by  the  landlord  and  his  fair  lady,  who  congratu- 
lated him  on  his  having  had  so  fine  a day  for  seeing  the 
far-famed  sights  of  Kioto.  Giving  orders  for  his  evening 
meal  to  be  served  upstairs,  he  proceeded  to  the  bath- 
room, where  he  soon  found  himself  up  to  his  chin  boil- 
ing in  a huge  tub  of  water.  Stepping  forth  from  this  caul- 
dron, he  hastily  dashed  a bucketful  of  cold  water  over 
his  person  (partly  with  the  idea  of  cleansing  himself 
more  effectually  after  having  bathed  in  water  already 
used  by  a score  or  so  of  persons,  and  partly  with 
an  idea  of  closing  up  the  pores,  in  order  to  prevent 
catching  cold),  he  proceeded  to  dry  himself  with  a 
coarse  cotton  cloth  that  bore  but  the  faintest  resemblance 
to  a towel,  and  then,  in  accordance  with  the  free  and 
easy  manners  of  the  country,  sauntered  airily  upstairs, 
where  he  leisurely  dressed  himself. 

He  was  not  at  all  surprised  to  find  his  companion 
buried  in  a profound  slumber,  from  which  he  did  not 
appear  likely  to  emerge  before  next  noon.  From  the 
attendant  in  charge  of  the  room  Konishi  gathered 
a vivid  and  picturesque  description  of  the  afternoon’s 
debauch.  It  appeared  that  after  he  had  left  his 
“ shadow  ” to  the  gentle  and  attentive  guardianship  of 
his  Aidzu  friends,  matters  had  become  steadily  worse 
(as  might  have  been  expected).  As  the  play  progressed, 
the  tragic  scenes  crowded  each  other  with  ever-increas- 
ing interest,  and  the  enraptured  house  rose  to  the  excite- 
ment of  the  occasion  with  ever-increasing  demonstra- 
tions of  approbation.  The  “shadow,”  very  naturally, 


A Mutual  Compact. 


7i 


was  equal  to  the  situation,  and  with  each  potation  his 
approbation  rose  to  loftier  heights,  until  his  companions 
began  to  wish  themselves  at  home. 

Finally,  toward  the  close  of  the  day,  the  plot  reached 
a point  where  the  hero  of  the  day  was  to  become  the 
victim  of  a long-standing  vendetta.  When  the  luckless 
hero  was  set  upon  by  the  crowd  of  assassins  beside  the 
gateway  of  his  mansion,  the  “ shadow  ” roared  forth  his 
disapproval  in  no  uncertain  tones  ; and  when  the  vil- 
lains began  to  mar  the  beauty  of  that  manly  form  with  a 
profusion  of  highly  scientific  cuts  and  thrusts  delivered 
with  the  express  intent  of  prolonging  the  agony,  his 
actions  became  so  wild  that  confusion  prevailed  through- 
out the  house.  His  companions  were  finally  constrained 
to  coax  him  into  the  street.  Before  they  had  enticed 
him  beyond  the  vestibule,  however,  he  succeeded  in 
breaking  away  from  them  and  then  rushed  back  to  the 
box,  where  he  drew  his  long  sword,  and,  bestriding  the 
railing  of  the  gallery,  as  if  mounted  on  some  fiery 
charger,  began  to  deliver  a series  of  frightful  slashes  into 
the  air  and  in  the  direction  of  the  actors,  until  the  vicin- 
ity fairly  gleamed  with  the  sheen  of  flashing  steel. 

With  much  difficulty  his  companions  induced  him  to 
sheathe  his  formidable  blade  and  to  accompany  them 
into  the  street.  Once  outside  in  the  cool  air,  away  from 
the  excitement,  and  the  reaction  set  in  ; and  the  erst- 
while pugnacious  “shadow”  ambled  along  about  as  one 
might  imagine  a blind  horse  would  come  down  stairs. 
At  one  moment  he  would  bend  forward  between  his  sup- 
porting friends,  as  if  he  were  trying  to  emulate  Samson 
between  the  pillars  of  the  temple  ; then  he  would  list 
over  heavily  to  larboard,  taking  his  friends  along  with 
him  into  the  side  of  a house  ; then  he  would  appear  to 
rebound  diagonally  across  the  street,  ignobly  trailing 
one  guardian  in  the  dust  and  rudely  sitting  down  upon 
the  other  one  after  having  rolled  him  into  the  gutter. 
On  one  or  two  occasions  he  grasped  frantically  for  his 
sword  at  the  sight  of  a dog.  As  the  cool  air  began  to 
operate  upon  his  blood,  he  rapidly  became  drowsy,  and 


72 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


by  the  time  the  hotel  had  been  reached  he  had  to  be 
carried  upstairs.  Our  friend,  therefore,  found  himself 
obliged  to  take  his  evening  meal  alone,  chatting  with  the 
amiable  waiter-girl,  who  dipped  forth  the  steaming  rice 
in  response  to  repealed  calls  thereon. 

On  the  morrow  the  “ shadow  ” did  not  rise  until  late 
in  the  afternoon,  so  that  Konishi  had  abundant  time  to 
see  a few  sights  and  to  make  whatever  preparations 
were  necessary  for  the  next  day’s  journey.  At  daylight 
two  pack-horses  were  ready  at  the  gate  of  the  hotel  to 
receive  their  loads,  which  were  quickly  tied  on  with 
ropes.  Konishi  then  mounted  one  beast  and  sat  cross- 
legged  thereon,  while  the  “ shadow  ” did  likewise  with 
the  other  one,  and  they  started  on  their  long  journey  for 
Yedo.  For  the  purposes  of  this  chapter  it  will  suffice  to 
say  that  they  arrived  safely  at  their  destination,  after  a 
pleasant  and  uneventful  journey  of  a fortnight. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


THE  PLOT  THICKENS. 

Nearly  a month  after  the  events  narrated  in  the  last 
chapter,  the  commandant  of  the  Shiro  1 in  Kioto,  gave  an 
entertainment  in  the  audience  chamber  of  his  palace 
within  the  moats.  The  invited  guests  assembled  about 
the  middle  of  the  afternoon,  for,  in  a land  where  gas  and 
petroleum  were  unknown,  business  and  pleasure  were 
alike  sandwiched  in  between  sunrise  and  sunset.  The 
elegant  shojees  around  the  audience-chamber  were  re- 
moved, so  that  the  guests  arranged  around  the  sides  of 
the  room  could  gaze  upon  the  beauties  of  the  garden, 
where  musicians  concealed  amid  the  shrubbery  doled 
forth  at  intervals  weird  strains  of  monotonous  music,  and 
where  upon  an  extemporized  stage  the  geisha  girls  alter- 
nately danced  and  acted  pantomimes.  Course  followed 
course  with  deliberate  precision,  until  forty  covers  had 
been  served.  Sake  flowed  like  a steady  stream  ; and  by 
nightfall  the  revelry  had  run  so  high  that  the  captain  of 

1 In  the  western  part  of  the  city  of  Kioto,  about  a mile  southwest  of 
the  Gosho,  stood  the  castle  of  Ni-jo  built  by  Tokugawa  Iyeyas  in  the 
year  1601.  It  was  always  designated  in  ordinary  conversation  as  the 
Shiro  (Castle).  It  covered  many  acres  of  ground  and  was  a fine  speci- 
men of  feudal  architecture.  Ostensibly  it  was  intended  as  a stopping 
place  for  the  Shoguns  when  they  came  to  Kioto  to  render  homage  to 
the  Emperor — (an  event  that  occurred  only  about  once  in  a century) ; 
but,  as  a matter  of  fact,  its  moated  embankments  and  grotesque 
towers  held  a powerful  garrison  of  zealous  Aidzu  samurai,  who  while 
professing  to  be  acting  merely  as  a guard  of  honor  to  the  Emperor,  yet, 
in  reality,  instituted  over  him  a respectful  but  most  unrelenting  sur- 
veillance. Their  sentinels  lounged  at  the  very  gateways  of  the 
Gosho.  Thus  did  the  Tokugawas  hold  within  their  iron  grip  the 
imperial  seal. 


73 


74 


Mito  Yashiki. 


the  garrison  confused  his  identity  with  that  of  the  pretty 
dancers  on  the  stage,  and  made  several  futile  attempts  to 
perform  the  fan  jig  to  the  unbounded  amusement  of  the 
assembled  company.  It  was  rumored  that  the  command- 
ant himself  made  no  less  than  three  passes  with  his  chop- 
sticks for  the  dish  of  honeyed  lotus-root  before  he 
succeeded  in  picking  up  a morsel  of  that  delicious 
edible, — and  he  was  then  heard  to  enquire  what  kind  of 
fish  it  was  ! As  the  guests  were  all  inmates  of  the  Shiro, 
they  tarried  at  the  feast  long  after  the  moon  had  risen  and 
kept  up  their  songs  and  laughter  well  into  the  night. 

On  the  morning  following  this  convivial  gathering,  the 
commandant  very  naturally  slept  late.  Several  hours 
after  the  sun  had  risen  he  was  awakened  by  a commotion 
outside  of  his  apartments.  In  accordance  with  the  usage 
of  the  country  his  silken  quilts  had  been  spead  upon  the 
tatamis  so  that,  with  his  ear  to  the  floor  sounds  from 
distant  parts  of  the  palace  could  be  transmitted  to  that 
organ  with  remarkable  facility.  Rousing  himself,  he 
slipped  on  his  loose  robe  and  stepped  out  upon  the  pol- 
ished floor  of  the  wide  veranda  where  he  clapped  his 
hands  and  summoned  his  servant  and  enquired  of  him 
the  cause  of  the  recent  disturbance.  He  was  informed 
that  a courier  had  just  rushed  in  with  a despatch  from 
the  Bakufu  for  the  commandant  of  the  Shiro  at  Kioto. 

“ Shades  of  Kobu-Daishi  ! What  can  be  the  meaning  of 
that  ? My  regular  communication  from  that  quarter  is  not 
due  for  ten  days,”  muttered  the  commandant,  confusedly. 
“ Bring  me  the  despatch  at  once,”  said  he,  addressing  the 
servant. 

In  a few  minutes  the  obsequious  attendant  entered  the 
apartment  with  the  lacquered  despatch  box  in  his  hands, 
and,  kneeling  down  with  it  lifted  up  reverentially  to  his 
forehead,  he  bent  forward  low  upon  the  tatamis  and  laid 
it  at  his  master’s  feet.  Then  he  retired  into  an  adjacent 
apartment  to  await  orders.  With  eager  hands  the  box 
was  unlocked  and  the  despatch  from  the  Bakufu  was 
read  in  fear  and  trembling.  After  perusing  it  carefully, 
he  laid  it  down  in  his  lap  with  a sigh  of  relief.  Clapping 


The  Plot  Thickens. 


75 


his  hands,  he  ordered  the  attendant  to  bring  in  his 
breakfast,  and  he  then  picked  up  the  despatch  and 
proceeded  to  read  it  over  again. 

“ It  seems  to  me,”  murmured  he  to  himself,  slowly 
tapping  his  forehead  with  his  fingers,  “ that  this  name 
Nakashima  Yotori  herein  mentioned,  has  a familiar 
sound.  Where  have  I heard  it  ? Has  it  not  recently 
been  brought  to  my  attention  in  some  connection  or 
other?  Will  you  kindly  request  Mr.  Murata,  the  captain 
of  the  guards,  to  come  here  at  once  ? ” — said  he,  suddenly 
addressing  the  attendant  who  had  just  laid  down  the 
tray  containing  the  breakfast.  That  worthy  dignitary 
received  the  summons  to  report  to  his  commanding  offi- 
cer with  considerable  trepidation,  as  his  recollection  of 
the  feast  on  the  preceding  evening  contained  a vague 
impression  that  there  was  something  worthy  of  censure 
connected  therewith.  With  faltering  step  and  sheepish 
demeanor,  he  entered  the  dread  presence  of  the  com- 
mandant. 

“ Ah  ! Murata,  where  is  your  fan  ? ” said  that  officer, 
jocosely.  “You  will  have  to  take  some  private  lessons 
before  you  can  get  the  proper  swing  to  that  jig  step.” 

Murata  bowed  down  to  the  tatamis  in  response,  and 
then,  folding  his  hands  in  his  lap,  resignedly  prepared 
himself  for  a reprimand. 

“ By  the  way,  Murata,”  continued  the  commandant, 
“ that  is  not  what  I wanted  you  for.  I have  received  an 
order  from  Yedo  to  notify  the  two  eldest  sons  of  Naka- 
shima Yotori,  living  at  the  foot  of  Atago-Yama,  that  they 
have  been  appointed  as  knights  in  attendance  at  the  Mito 
Yashiki  in  Yedo,  and  that  they  are  to  report  at  once  for 
duty.  I am  instructed  to  hand  them  these  two  passports 
and  to  tender  them  whatever  assistance  they  may  need 
in  starting  on  their  journey.  Now,  there  is  a strangely 
familiar  ring  about  this  name,  and  there  lingers  in  my 
memory  a flavor  of  suspicion  in  connection  therewith.  I 
cannot  account  for  this  vague  impression.  Can  you  help 
me  out  in  the  matter  ? ” 

“ Most  assuredly  I can,”  quickly  replied  Mr.  Murata. 


7 6 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“ That  is  the  family  of  the  fencing  master.  Don’t  you 
remember  that  his  sons  last  spring  participated  in  the 
fencing  tournament  here  on  the  parade  ground  ? Don’t 
you  remember  the  remarkable  dexterity  of  his  youngest 
son  in  fencing  with  the  foils  ? Am  I not  rated  as  one  of 
the  flowers  of  Aidzu  in  that  knightly  accomplishment, 
and  did  not  that  presuming  youngster  adroitly  whack  me 
thrice  over  the  head  in  a single  bout  ? Yes,  sir,  I have  a 
very  vivid  recollection  of  that  name.” 

“Your  memory,  sir,  is  excellent,”  replied  the  com- 
mandant with  a smile.  “ I do  remember  something  about 
the  unexpected  outcome  of  your  bout.  But  has  not  that 
name  come  up  in  some  other  connection  here  recently  ? ” 

“Oh  ! yes,  I remember  now,”  said  Mr.  Murata,  draw- 
ing forth  a small  pocket-book  from  his  sleeve.  “ I have 
a memorandum  here  to  the  effect  that  they  are  apparently 
on  very  intimate  terms  with  that  foxy  scamp  Yamada. 
I have  also  another  memorandum  to  the  effect  that  they 
spent  an  evening  with  the  family  of  that  fellow  in  a pic- 
nic booth  on  the  Kamogawa  shoals.  Neither  of  these 
entries,  however,  shows  any  thing  against  the  Nakashi- 
mas.  But  the  actions  of  that  old  fox,  as  reported  by 
our  spies,  have  been  so  mysterious  during  the  last  year 
that  we  have  put  his  name  upon  our  black  list  as  that  of 
a person  to  be  watched  with  the  closest  scrutiny.  As 
yet  we  have  nothing  against  him  except  the  fact  of  his 
protracted  absence  from  home  on  two  or  three  occasions 
to  parts  unknown  to  us.  He  may  be  all  right,  but  we 
cleem  it  advisable  to  keep  our  eyes  on  him.  And,  very 
naturally,  as  we  have  him  under  such  close  scrutiny,  we 
look  with  more  or  less  suspicion  on  all  of  his  intimate 
acquaintances.  We  have  absolutely  nothing  against  the 
Nakashimas,  but  we  have  placed  their  names  on  our  red 
list  as  being  persons  whose  general  movements  should 
be  under  observation.  This  is  all  that  I know  about  the 
matter,  sir.” 

“You  have  cleared  up  my  mind  entirely,  sir,”  replied 
the  commandant  ; “ that  is  precisely  the  flavor  of  sus- 
picion that  I was  groping  after,  Well,  these  young  men 


The  Plot  Thickens. 


77 


are  in  luck,  anyhow.  It  would  be  advisable  to  remove 
their  names  from  your  list,  as  they  are  now  on  our  side. 
It  appears  that  their  ancestors  were  ancient  vassals  of 
Tokugawa  ; and  the  recent  prayer  of  the  present  head 
of  the  family  for  renewal  of  this  ancient  allegiance  has 
been  granted.  You  will  please  send  these  passports  to 
them  together  with  my  congratulations.  At  the  same 
time,  tender  to  them  my  humble  services  in  whatsoever 
they  may  choose  to  command.”  Thus  speaking,  he 
bowed  low  and  dismissed  the  captain  of  the  guards. 

As  the  Nakashimas  were  at  their  noon-day  meal,  a 
courtly  samurai  entered  their  gateway,  and  approached 
the  veranda.  His  noble  mien,  his  silken  garments,  and 
his  costly  swords  betokened  a gentleman  of  high  rank. 

“Does  Mr.  Nakashima  reside  here?”  inquired  the 
stranger. 

“ He  does,”  was  the  reply. 

“ I am  the  secretary  of  the  commandant  of  the  Shiro 
in  Kioto,  and  I have  the  honor  to  be  the  bearer  of  a 
message  from  him.  Know,  then,  that  we  this  morning 
received  a notification  from  the  Bakufu  to  the  effect 
that  your  eldest  sons  have  been  appointed  knights  in 
attendance  at  the  Mito  Yashiki,  in  Yedo,  and  that  they 
are  to  report  there  at  once  for  duty.  My  master,  the 
commandant,  tenders  his  hearty  congratulations,  and 
begs  that  you  will  condescend  to  accept  of  whatever 
assistance  he  may  be  able  to  render  in  connection  with 
your  journey.  Honored  sirs,  be  pleased  to  accept  these 
passports.  Command  my  humble  services.”  Saying 
this,  he  bowed  low  upon  the  tatamis  and  reverently 
handed  the  documents  to  Mr.  Nakashima,  who  bowed 
down  and  then  reverently  raised  them  to  his  forehead, 
while  he  drew  a long  breath  between  his  lips,  expressive 
of  his  supreme  gratification  at  the  honor  thus  bestowed 
upon  him. 

Ten  minutes  or  so  were  then  spent  in  introductions 
and  profuse  salutations.  Pipes  were  smoked,  tea  was 
quaffed,  and  then  the  courtly  secretary  took  respect- 
ful leave" of  the  family  and  departed.  Trained  from  in- 


78 


Mito  Yashiki. 


fancy  to  conceal  his  emotions,  the  samurai  is  cool  and 
self-possessed  to  an  astonishing  degree.  The  Nakashimas 
expressed  neither  surprise  nor  pleasure  at  this  unex- 
pected visit.  They  deliberately  resumed  their  meal  and 
discussed,  in  a business-like  way,  the  arrangements  for 
their  journey.  It  was  decided  that  the  young  men 
should  start  within  two  days.  They  were  to  travel  the 
entire  distance  on  foot,  consequently  they  could  carry 
nothing  but  their  swords,  their  wallets,  and  a change  of 
raiment  tied  up  in  a large  silken  cloth. 

The  night  before  their  departure  was  one  of  conflicting 
emotions.  Human  nature  asserted  itself  at  times,  and 
rueful  countenances  bespoke  sad  thoughts  of  the  mor- 
row. In  the  evening  the  old  gentleman  and  his  sons 
strolled  high  up  the  glen  to  a picturesque  tea-booth. 
It  was  near  a beautiful  cascade  that  fell  like  a mist  down 
the  black  face  of  a crag  into  a deep  pool,  where  gold- 
fishes nibbled  rice  and  cake-crumbs  that  had  been 
thrown  to  them  by  jolly  picnickers  in  the  afternoon,  and 
where  the  shadowy  minnows  sported  amid  the  long  grass 
that  lined  its  margin.  The  volume  of  the  waters  of  the 
pool  was  further  augmented  by  the  waters  of  a spring 
that  gushed  forth  from  a fissure  in  the  face  of  the  crag 
just  behind  the  sheet  of  descending  spray,  and  whose 
stream  being  conducted  through  a dragon’s  mouth 
carved  in  stone,  poured  forth  a jet  that  descended  into 
the  middle  of  the  rocky  basin. 

In  primeval  ages  the  spot  had  doubtless  been  the 
favorite  camping-place  of  some  Aino  chieftain  ; and,  in 
later  ages,  a Shinto  shrine  had  been  built  upon  a 
mossy  mound  at  the  water’s  edge  to  receive  the  humble 
offerings  of  rice,  fish,  and  game,  of  the  simple-minded 
mountain  dwellers  who  came  thither  to  propitiate  the 
unseen  powers  that  controlled  nature.  But,  with  the  ad- 
vent of  Buddhism  in  the  sixth  century  of  our  era,  the 
adroit  priests  of  that  creed  discovered  that  the  locality 
was  sacred  to  the  memory  of  Kwannon,  the  goddess  of 
mercy.  The  dreamy  fancies  of  the  primeval  settlers  were 
brushed  aside,  and,  while  their  thatched  shrine  was 


The  Plot  Thickens. 


79 


allowed  to  stand  beside  the  bubbling  waters,  a stately 
temple  was  erected  upon  a grassy  plateau  near  a grove 
of  maples,  somewhat  to  the  left  of  the  crag.  There  the 
neatly  matted  floors,  the  tastefully  lacquered  s/iojees,  and 
the  well  polished  floors  of  the  broad  verandas  bespoke 
the  abundance  of  the  contributions  that  flowed  in  from 
the  pilgrims  of  Yamashiro  and  Tamba. 

The  shrewd  priests,  with  an  eye  to  working  the  locality 
to  its  utmost  capacity,  announced  that  it  would  be  well 
also  to  propitiate  those  unseen  influences  of  the  neigh- 
borhood that  had  been  from  time  immemorial  accus- 
tomed to  the  Shinto  method  of  treatment.  This  adroit 
diplomacy  secured  the  adherence  of  the  small  faction 
that  still  clung  to  the  ancient  faith,  and  brought  in  a 
steady  stream  of  contributions  from  the  conservative 
fogies  of  the  neighborhood,  whereby  the  shrine  had  been 
kept  in  a fair  state  of  repair  and  the  dividends  of  the 
institution  had  been  much  increased.  At  some  remote 
time,  tradition  said,  a sick  person  had  bathed  in  the 
waters  of  the  pool  and  had  become  cured  of  his  mala- 
dies. Forthwith  the  ancient  monks  declared  that  who- 
ever bathed  in  a similar  fashion  would  enjoy  perfect 
health  for  one  year  (provided  the  bathing  was  accom- 
panied with  a suitable  offering).  For  many  centuries, 
therefore,  the  cooling  streams  pouring  into  the  flinty 
basin  had  been  utilized  by  myriads  of  ailing  humanity. 
In  the  gray  dawn,  at  high  noon,  under  the  sheen  of  the 
shimmering  moon,  you  were  liable  to  see  some  nude 
form  troubling  the  waters  of  the  pool. 

As  our  friends  came  upon  the  plateau  after  their  long 
climb  up  the  mountain  side,  they  saw  two  persons  drench- 
ing themselves  beneath  the  moon-lit  spray  of  the  cascade. 
A priest  before  the  shrine  of  the  temple  was  chanting  in 
deep  monotones  some  weird  liturgy  for  the  exorcism  of 
lurking  maladies,  and,  judging  from  the  vigor  of  his  in- 
cantations, the  mother  and  daughter  in  the  pool  must 
have  contributed  most  liberally  toward  the  temple  funds. 
For  the  space  of  fully  half  an  hour  he  continued  to  clap 
his  hands,  to  ring  his  bell,  and  to  bow  his  head  with  the 


8o 


Milo  Yashiki. 


most  unremitting  devotion.  With  graceful  indifference 
our  friends  passed  on  to  the  picnic  booth  and,  leaving 
their  heavy  wooden  clogs  ranged  in  a row  upon  the  ver- 
anda, walked  across  to  the  rear  balcony  overlooking  the 
ravine,  where  they  seated  themselves  upon  the  tatamis 
and  ordered  from  an  attendant  in  waiting  there  some  tea 
and  tobacco. 

The  view  from  the  balcony  extended  down  the  steep 
mountain  side  over  groves  of  pine,  beech,  and  maple,  far 
down  to  where  the  brook  rushed  through  thickets  of 
whispering  bamboo.  The  moon  was  shining  with  un- 
usual brilliancy,  lighting  up  the  mountain  with  great 
clearness.  A light  breeze,  with  the  faintest  suggestion 
of  a chill  about  it,  played  through  the  rooms  of  the  booth, 
and  rendered  useless  the  fans  that  our  friends  had  tucked 
in  their  girdle  when  they  left  the  house.  Demurely  they 
sat  beside  the  low  rustic  railing  of  the  balcony  gazing 
out  upon  the  beautiful  scenery,  and  quaffing  tea  at  inter- 
vals. They  seemed  to  be  buried  in  profound  thought, 
and  spoke  but  little,  occasionally  alluding  to  the  delight- 
ful coolness  of  the  evening  and  the  drowsy  humming  of 
the  priest.  After  the  lapse  of  about  half  an  hour  they 
espied  a samurai  slowly  ascending  the  last  steep  ascent 
in  the  road  leading  up  to  the  plateau.  From  their  keen 
interest  in  the  approach  of  this  gentleman  it  at  once  be- 
came manifest  that  they  were  expecting  the  arrival  of 
some  such  gentleman. 

“ It  is  he  ! ” exclaimed  they  in  subdued  tones,  when  he 
had  finally  reached  the  plateau.  “ Our  message  reached 
him  at  midday,  and  he  has  contrived  in  some  way  to 
give  the  Shiro  hounds  the  slip.” 

Mr.  Yamada — for  it  was  he — slowly  approached  the 
booth  and  profoundly  saluted  the  Nakashimas,  who 
thrice  bowed  down  upon  the  tatamis  in  response  thereto. 
He  was  soon  seated  beside  the  balcony  railing,  busily 
occupied  with  jauntily  whiffing  off  half-a-dozen  pipes  of 
tobacco,  and  in  vigorously  tapping  the  bronze  pipe-bowl 
on  the  brazen  edge  of  the  hebachi.' 

'In  old  Japan  stoves  were  unknown.  The  only  heating  apparatus 
was  the  hebachi.  This  was  a portable  brazier,  shaped  very  much  like 


The  Plot  Thickens. 


81 


“ Honored  sirs,  ’ said  Mr.  Yamada,  daintily  pressing  a 
pellet  of  tobacco  into  the  delicate  bowl  of  his  pipe, 
“ since  my  picnic  on  the  Kamogawa  shoals  last  summer 
I have  been  obliged  to  be  exceedingly  circumspect  in  all 
my  movements.  The  glitter  of  watchful  eyes  follows  me 
everywhere.  It  is  manifest  that  I have  been  blacklisted 
at  the  Shiro.  I will  wager  that  you  cannot  guess  how  I 
eluded  the  ‘ shadows  ’ this  evening.  Will  you  not  even 
venture  a suggestion  ? Well,  I dressed  myself  up  with 
my  best  garments,  as  you  see  me  here.  I put  the  finest 
touches  on  my  entire  toilette,  and  then  sallied  boldly  out 
of  my  front  gate  in  broad  daylight.  The  natural  conclu- 
sion to  be  drawn  from  my  appearance  would  be  that  I was 
either  out  for  a call  on  some  friend  or  out  for  a harmless 
stroll,  for  I did  not  appear  to  be  dressed  for  mischief ; 
and  it  did  not  take  me  very  long  to  see  that  nobody  was 
following  me. 

“ After  making  one  or  two  calls  I gradually  edged  off 

a large  broad-rimmed  flower-pot.  It  was  filled  with  soft  gray  ashes, 
upon  which  was  placed  a shovelful  of  burning  charcoal,  giving  forth 
intense  heat.  The  hands  were  warmed  over  these  coals  ; the  teapot, 
mounted  on  an  iron  tripod,  merrily  boiled  on  them ; and  pipes  were 
lit  and  relit  there  from  morning  till  night.  Sometimes  these  hcbachis 
were  stationary,  being  cut  out  of  a block  of  stone  and  sunk  in  the 
middle  of  the  floors  of  every  room.  Even  in  midwinter  no  other 
heating  appliance  was  known  in  Japan.  In  some  portions  of  the 
northern  part  of  Hondo,  and  along  its  western  coast,  and  in  Yesso, 
during  the  terrible  blizzards  that  came  over  from  Siberia,  the  people 
suffered  terribly  from  the  cold.  Malignant  catarrh,  influenzas,  rheu- 
matism, and  consumption  were  common  maladies.  During  these  Si- 
berian gales  a square  frame  was  placed  over  the  hebachi , and  then 
several  heavily  wadded  quilts  were  laid  over  the  frame  so  as  to  confine 
the  heat  thereunder.  The  family  would  then  crawl  beneath  these 
coverlids  and  keep  very  comfortable,  so  long  as  they  kept  their  heads 
outside  where  fresh  air  could  be  obtained.  So  comfortless  and  cheer- 
less was  existence  in  the  far  north  that  the  island  of  Yesso,  beyond  its 
southernmost  coasts,  was  a wilderness  peopled  by  a few  tribes  of 
Ainos  ; and,  during  the  cold  weather,  thousands  of  people  passed  in 
junks  from  Yesso  southward  across  Tsugaru  Straits  to  Hondo,  to 
escape  what  seemed  to  them  to  be  intolerable  winter.  Yet  the  climate 
of  Yesso  is  about  the  same  as  that  of  New  York  State.  But  just  fancy 
what  it  would  be  to  pass  a winter  on  the  shores  of  Lake  Ontario  with 
merely  a hebachi  in  a fragile  Japanese  house,  through  whose  shojees 
the  air  filters  like  water  through  a sieve  ! 


82 


Mito  Yashiki. 


toward  the  outskirts  of  the  city,  as  if  merely  on  pleasure 
bent,  and  by  dusk  I was  under  full  headway  through  the 
fields  and  hedgerows  for  Atago-Yama.  So  far  as  I have 
been  able  to  see,  my  bold  front  has  completely  bluffed 
my  ‘ shadow,’  for  I cannot  see  that  any  particular  notice 
has  been  taken  of  my  movements  since  leaving  home. 
Well,  well,  I did  not  come  here  to  discuss  myself.  There 
are  \Veightier  subjects  to  be  considered.  The  matter  of 
your  commission  from  the  Emperor  has  been  fully  ad- 
justed. Of  course  nothing  is  in  writing.  Although  the 
imperial  person  may  be  sacred,  yet,  if  the  Bakufu  were 
to  receive  tangible  evidence  of  intrigue  against  their 
power,  they  would  subject  the  feelings  of  our  master  to 
many  resentful  indignities.  And  documents,  even  under 
the  seal  of  heaven  itself,  would  not  protect  your  luckless 
persons  from  the  vengeance  of  those  Yedo  upstarts. 

“Yesterday  morning  I went,  in  company  with  the 
kugd,  whose  retainer  I am,  to  the  western  gateway  of  the 
Gosho.  Those  Aidzu  guards  (insolent  beasts  !)  admitted 
us  within  the  sacred  enclosure  after  duly  inspecting  the 
imperial  passport.  As  we  approached  the  imperial 
palace  through  the  shrubbery,  we  saw  several  persons 
playing  foot-ball  in  the  imperial  garden.  The  ball  was 
made  from  some  kind  of  skin,  and  was  about  as  large  as 
an  infant’s  head.  It  was  lacquered  in  white  and  was 
decorated  with  chrysanthemums  lacquered  in  natural 
colors.  They  were  kicking  it  along  right  vigorously, 
and  were  shouting  and  laughing  so  merrily  that  we 
halted  for  a moment  to  watch  them.  One  of  the  young 
ladies  in  the  party  finally  succeeded  in  kicking  it  into  a 
fish-pond,  and,  judging  from  the  hand-clapping  and  mer- 
riment that  ensued,  that  spot  must  have  been  the  adver- 
sary’s goal.  An  attendant  quickly  fished  it  out,  however, 
and  in  a moment  the  ball  was  flying  along  the  gravelly 
path  in  our  direction.  A tall,  slim  young  man  was 
bowling  it  along  with  great  vigor,  evidently  bent  on 
sending  it  into  the  little  pond  on  our  side  of  the  garden. 
He  was  closely  pursued  by  an  eager  group  of  young  men 
and  comely  women,  who  vainly  strove  to  head  him  off 


The  Plot  Thickens. 


83 


from  what  was  evidently  their  goal.  They  rushed  past 
us  through  the  shrubbery,  too  intent  on  the  game  to  pay 
us  the  slightest  notice.  Although  they  were  all  plainly 
dressed,  yet  from  their  silken  raiment  and  refined 
features  I at  once  perceived  that  we  had  before  us  the 
imperial  household,  and  I recognized  in  the  tall,  slim 
young  man  the  Emperor  himself.” 

“ Surely,  sir,”  exclaimed  Mr.  Nakashima,  voicing  the 
mute  amazement  of  the  listeners,  “ you  do  not  mean  to 
say  that  Tenshi  (the  son  of  heaven)  would  indulge  in 
such  riotous  proceedings  ! We  have  always  understood 
that  his  feet  never  touched  the  ground,  that  whenever 
he  went  out  for  an  airing  in  the  gardens  there  were  cloths 
spread  over  the  ground  for  him  to  tread  upon.” 

In  reply  to  this  Mr.  Yamada  laughed  softly,  and  then 
dreamily  smoked  his  pipe  and  demurely  cast  a thought- 
ful glance  down  the  moon-lit  glen.  In  the  deep  silence 
of  the  evening  the  voice  of  the  torrent  far  below  was 
borne  upward  on  the  still  air,  and  seemed  to  echo  his 
subdued  mirth.  Suddenly  rousing  himself  from  his 
revery,  he  briskly  smote  his  pipe  on  the  rim  of  the 
hebachi,  and  said  : “ Yes,  I am  well  aware  that  the  popu- 
lar idea  enshrines  our  master  as  if  he  were  a Buddhist 
god  upon  a pedestal  of  lotos  leaves.  But,  as  a matter  of 
fact,  we  who  are  admitted  within  the  sacred  precincts  of 
the  Gosho  know  that  he  is  very  much  like  ordinary 
mortals.  I was  amused  at  the  rude  shock  that  this 
popular  delusion  just  now  received.  It  did  not  occur  to 
me  that  you  were  entirely  ignorant  of  all  matters  pertain- 
ing to  the  inner  life  of  the  palace.  However,  it  would 
be  well  to  bear  in  mind  that  our  master,  although  proud 
of  his  ancestry  of  ten  thousand  ages, 1 and  haughty  in 

1 According  to  Japanese  cosmos  as  set  forth  in  their  ancient  books, 
the  universe  was  originally  like  a fowl’s  egg.  Then  the  yellow  part 
separated  from  the  white,  and  the  one  became  the  sky  and  the  other 
the  earth.  Then  a long  reed  sprang  out  of  the  earth  and  grew  up  into 
the  sky,  and  became  a kami , or  god.  From  this  god  a multitude  of 
other  kamis  sprang,  and  thereby  peopled  heaven.  Then,  after  count- 
less ages,  a pair  of  kamis,  male  and  female,  stood  one  day  upon  “ the 
bridge  of  heaven  ” (whatever  that  may  mean)  and  gazed  down  upon 


84 


Mito  Yashiki. 


his  bearing  toward  strangers,  yet  in  his  domestic  life  he 
is  merely  a courteous  and  intelligent  Japanese  gentleman. 

“Well,  when  we  had  satisfied  ourselves  with  watching 
the  foot-ball  game,  we  made  our  way  through  the  shrub- 
bery to  the  western  end  of  the  palace.  We  went  up  close 
to  the  side  of  the  superb  veranda,  and  waited  for  some  of 
the  court  ladies  to  appear.  But  not  a living  being  could 
we  see  within  the  deep  shade  of  the  magnificent  cham- 
bers. It  was  evident  that  the  inmates  had  either  joined 
the  Emperor  in  his  sport  or  were  watching  the  game. 
My  companion  then  respectfully  announced,  in  a deep 
voice,  that  visitors  were  awaiting  an  interview.  This 
served  to  awake  a beautiful  little  chiti  dog  that  had  been 
sleeping  on  an  embroidered  square  of  dark  blue  silk. 
He  bounced  around  the  room  in  a state  of  frantic  excite- 
ment, barking  vigorously  at  us  all  the  time.  This  dis- 
turbance speedily  brought  one  of  the  ladies  from  a 
distant  wing  of  the  building.  She  came  tripping  along 
noiselessly  over  the  superb  tatamis,  twirling  in  her  hand 
a spray  of  olea  frag  ram.  As  she  approached  we  recog- 
nized her  as  the  niece  of  my  companion.  She  graciously 
invited  us  to  enter  the  audience-chamber  and  state  our 
message. 

“ You  must  bear  in  mind  that,  in  accordance  with 
ancient  usage,  communications  delivered  at  the  palace 
are  transmitted  through  the  court  ladies.  Clapping  her 
hands,  she  speedily  summoned  an  attendant  from  an 
inner  chamber  and  ordered  tea  and  tobacco  to  be  set 
before  us.  My  companion  then  stated  that  we  had  come 
to  seek  a private  interview  with  the  Emperor  in  reference 
to  a matter  that  would  be  fully  explained  by  the  sealed 
letter  now  delivered  to  her  for  transmission.  Taking  the 

the  troubled  waters  that  covered  the  earth.  Querying  as  to  the 
depths  of  those  waters,  they  plunged  their  tridents  deep  beneath  the 
surging  billows,  and  when  they  drew  them  up  again  the  ocean’s 
muddy  ooze  that  slipped  off  the  points  became  the  islands  of  Japan — 
Dai-Nippon.  The  land  being  goodly,  the  godly  pair  came  down  and 
settled  there  thousands  of  centuries  ago.  And  the  Mikado  and  the 
Japanese  people  descended  from  them.  Hence  the  Emperor  speaks 
of  his  dynasty  as  having  ruled  for  “ ten  thousand  ages." 


The  Plot  T hickens. 


85 


envelope  and  lifting  it  to  her  forehead  she  hastened  to 
deliver  it  to  the  Emperor.  After  a delay  of  nearly  an 
hour  she  returned  and  announced  that  an  audience  had 
been  granted,  and  that  if  we  would  follow  her  into  the 
sitting-room  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  palace  that  we 
could  have  a personal  interview.” 

Here  Mr.  Yamada  again  laughed  softly  to  himself,  and 
tapped  his  pipe  vigorously  on  the  rim  of  the  brazier. 
“ I clearly  see,”  continued  he,  “ that  you  do  not  compre- 
hend such  simplicity  in  an  imperial  reception,  and  such 
utter  absence  of  ceremony.  But  you  must  bear  in  mind 
that,  while  pomp  and  ceremony  always  characterize  the 
Shogun’s  court,  on  the  other  hand,  the  Emperor’s  court 
is  based  upon  the  primitive  simplicity  of  an  era  that 
dates  back  more  than  ten  thousand  years.  While  the 
Shogun  delights  to  make  Daimios  tremble  and  creep  into 
his  presence  with  downcast  faces,  amid  hushed  throngs 
of  attendant  courtiers,  on  the  other  hand  the  Emperor 
scorns  pomposity  (except  on  those  exceedingly  rare  oc- 
casions when  the  Shogun  comes  down  to  Kioto  to  render 
him  humble  homage),  and  affably  receives  those  who  are 
entitled  to  access  to  his  presence.  You  must  also  bear 
in  mind  that  the  boundless  rapacity  of  the  Bakufu  has 
absorbed  the  revenues  of  the  entire  realm  in  a most 
heartless  manner,  and  that  the  pittance  which  has  been 
set  aside  for  maintaining  the  imperial  court  is  but  grud- 
gingly given,  and  comes  to  hand  with  extreme  tardiness. 
And  the  stipulated  allowance  credited  to  us  at  the  start 
becomes  sadly  shrunk  in  dimensions  before  it  gets  inside 
the  imperial  moats,  owing  to  a vicious  and  shameful 
usage  of  shaving  by  commissions  indulged  in  by  those 
officers  of  the  Shogun  through  whose  hands  it  passes  ; 
so  that,  even  were  our  master  inclined  to  be  ceremonious, 
those  unconscionable  rascals  at  Yedo  and  at  the  Shiro 
see  well  to  it  that  he  shall  not  possess  the  means  to  in- 
dulge any  such  tastes.” 

Here  the  speaker  lapsed  into  profound  meditation  for 
several  minutes  ; but  the  furious  energy  with  which  he 
puffed  his  pipe  and  smote  the  rim  of  the  brazier  there- 


86 


Mito  Yashiki. 


with  in  quick  succession  between  the  refillings,  bespoke 
his  suppressed  indignation  at  the  humiliation  heaped  up- 
on his  imperial  master.  And  the  Nakashimas  gazed  at 
him  in  silent  and  respectful  wonder,  as  if  stupefied  with 
amazement  at  such  strange  revelations. 

“ Well,”  resumed  he,  “ we  followed  her  ladyship 
through  some  stately  apartments,  until  we  entered  a 
lofty  chamber  that  opened  on  a broad  veranda  looking 
eastward.  In  one  corner,  near  the  spacious  veranda, 
were  some  superb  folding  screens  that  enclosed  a space 
equal  to  about  ten  tatamis.  As  we  approached  this  spot, 
a kuge  (whom  I recognized  as  the  adviser  and  secretary 
of  the  Emperor)  stepped  forth  and  received  us  most 
graciously.  He  then  escorted  us  behind  the  screens  into 
the  imperial  presence,  where  we  humbly  prostrated  our- 
selves upon  the  tatamis  until  bidden  by  his  Majesty  to 
rise.  Truly  he  is  a most  gracious  and  refined  gentleman  ! 
Instead  of  transmitting  his  conversation  through  his  sec- 
retary, he  communicated  with  us  directly.  He  was 
seated  upon  a magnificent  tiger-skin  near  the  veranda, 
where  a grand  view  of  Hiyeisan  could  be  obtained  as  it 
towered  above  the  blue  mountains  that  loomed  up  be- 
yond the  wooden  ramparts.  His  silken  robes  were  in 
subdued  colors.  He  discarded  head-gear,  and  his  hair 
was  arranged  like  that  of  any  gentleman  of  rank.  His 
recent  exercise  had  given  a color  to  his  face  and  a 
sparkle  to  his  eyes  that  rendered  his  countenance  comely 
and  animated.  At  his  right  hand  were  his  symbols  of 
sovereignty — the  stone,  the  sword,  and  the  mirror. 

“ The  admirable  simplicity  of  every  thing  rendered  the 
reception  exceedingly  impressive.  His  Majesty  enquired 
kindly  as  to  our  health,  and  expressed  the  hope  that  my 
recent  exploits  in  shadowing  the  Dutch  Embassy  from 
Nagoya  to  Kioto  had  not  reacted  injuriously  on  me  in 
any  way.  I disavowed  any  special  credit  for  that  per- 
formance, and  expressed  the  sincere  hope  that  my  feeble 
efforts  in  the  future  might  be  productive  of  more  pro- 
nounced benefit  to  the  great  cause.  By  degrees,  the 
conversation  gradually  drifted  to  the  subject-matter  of 


The  Plot  Thickens. 


8 7 


our  interview.  My  companion  stated  that  I had  at  last 
come  under  the  strict  scrutiny  of  the  Shiro  people,  and 
that  as  a natural  consequence  my  usefulness  had  become 
sadly  circumscribed  ; that  I had,  after  long  negotiations, 
finally  secured  the  services  of  two  young  men,  remotely 
connected  with  the  imperial  family  through  an  ancient 
kugi,  to  act  in  Yedo  as  spies ; and  that  I had  now  come 
to  make  full  report  about  the  matter  and  to  secure  the 
imperial  commission  for  the  enterprise. 

“ This  led  to  a long  talk  about  your  pedigree,  acquire- 
ments, and  loyalty.  Your  former  connection  with  Toku- 
gawa  was  deemed  a most  fortunate  circumstance.  His 
Majesty  was  particularly  pleased  with  the  strategy 
whereby  you  had  succeeded  in  resuming  your  allegiance. 
And  he  highly  approved  of  your  determination  to  pro- 
ceed at  once  to  Yedo.  He  has  received  your  names  as 
subjects  worthy  of  future  reward  in  case  our  cause  be 
substantially  aided  by  meritorious  conduct  on  your  part, 
and  he  has  duly  commissioned  you  as  his  secret  emis- 
saries at  the  court  of  the  Shogun.  In  witness  whereof 
I am  authorized  to  hand  to  you  a tiny  signet.  The  de- 
sign is  a chrysanthemum  flower.  It  is  engraved  upon  an 
exceedingly  small  stone  ; and  after  the  first  impression 
on  this  peculiar  paper  and  with  this  yellow  ink,  several 
petals  will  disappear,  so  that  the  signet  will  thereafter  be 
forever  useless.  Therefore,  you  can  use  it  but  once. 

“ In  some  great  emergency  when  it  becomes  necessary 
to  communicate  directly  with  the  Emperor,  or  to  indi- 
cate to  some  member  of  his  household  that  you  are  in 
his  special  employ,  and  therefore  entitled  to  a personal 
interview,  you  must  write  your  request  together  with 
your  names  on  this  paper  and  place  the  signet  stamp 
beneath.  When  you  have  done  this  then  will  you  be 
entitled  to  immediate  attention.  This  becomes  the  im- 
perial commission.  Then  crush  the  signet  to  atoms.  In 
the  meantime,  however,  keep  it  with  the  utmost  care.  It 
is  now  packed  in  silk  in  the  hollow  end  of  this  bronze 
pen-and-ink  holder,  a gift  to  you  from  his  Majesty.  No 
amount  of  jarring  can  disturb  it.  Nothing  indicates  its 


88 


Mito  Yashiki. 


presence  there.  And  when  you  wish  to  use  it,  take  your 
short  sword  and  cut  off  the  little  plate  soldered  on  the 
end  here.  The  paper  is  rolled  up  in  this  little  side  com- 
partment. The  yellow  ink  is  now  caked  in  this  little 
block  here  beside  the  pens,  and  can  be  easily  dug  out 
with  your  sheath-knife  point  and  prepared  for  use  when 
the  time  comes  for  you  to  utilize  the  signet.  I now 
have  the  pleasure,  honorable  sirs,  to  deliver  into  your 
hands  the  commission  from  our  master  for  your  perilous 
enterprise.” 

And  so  saying,  he  lifted  the  little  box  to  his  forehead, 
and,  bowing  low  down  on  the  tatamis , handed  it  to  Tom- 
okichi,  who,  bowing  equally  low,  reverently  took  it  in 
his  hands  and  lifted  it  thrice  to  his  forehead,  violently 
sucking  in  his  breath  through  his  teeth  between  times  as 
a token  of  his  profound  appreciation  of  the  honor  con- 
ferred. 

“Bear  in  mind,  sirs,”  said  Mr.  Yamada,  “that  all 
ordinary  communications  are  to  be  addressed  to  me.  It 
is  only  when  some  extraordinary  emergency  arises  that 
you  are  to  directly  communicate  with  the  Emperor  ; and 
after  that  occurrence  you  must  be  supplied  with  a new 
signet.  Therefore  use  great  care  and  judgment  as  to 
when  it  shall  be  necessary  to  go  over  my  head.” 

A long  and  earnest  conversation  then  ensued  regard- 
ing the  details  of  the  eventful  journey  to  be  commenced 
on  the  morrow.  Yashiki  life  in  Yedo  was  also  discussed. 
And  when  the  party  broke  up  and  strolled  down  the 
mountain  side,  they  were  questioning  among  themselves 
as  to  what  would  be  the  outcome  of  the  next  visit  of  the 
foreign  fleet  to  Yedo  in  the  spring.  And  when  they 
parted  company  in  the  shadow  of  the  gateway,  Mr. 
Yamada  bid  them  an  almost  affectionate  farewell  and  a 
warm-hearted  god-speed. 


CHAPTER  VII. 


AN  OVERLAND  JOURNEY. 

At  daybreak  on  the  following  morning  the  Nakashima 
household  was  astir.  The  rain-doors  were  duly  slid 
back,  and  preparations  for  an  early  breakfast  were  at 
once  begun.  The  old  lady  carefully  spread  upon  the 
floor  two  large  square  pieces  of  drab-colored  silk.  Upon 
each  one  of  these  she  placed  a black  suit  of  silk  cloth- 
ing, a couple  of  white  cotton  tunics,  two  pairs  of  black 
socks,  and  a broad  silken  girdle  striped  gray,  white, 
and  black.  Then  carefully  gathering  up  the  four  corners 
of  each  cloth,  she  securely  knotted  each  dainty  parcel 
for  carrying  by  hand.  This  simple  operation  completed 
the  packing  of  the  boys’  clothing  for  the  journey.  She 
then  hastened  to  the  kitchen  to  aid  her  daughter  in  mak- 
ing ready  the  early  meal. 

It  was  one  of  those  delicious  autumnal  mornings  for 
which  Kioto  is  so  justly  celebrated.  The  clear  and 
bracing  air  was  freighted  with  the  odor  of  jessamines 
and  olea  fragrans , and  the  gauzy  shreds  of  mist  that 
hung  along  the  mountain  sides,  as  if  entwined  amid  the 
deep  foliage  of  the  lofty  trees,  made  haste  to  flee  before 
the  warm  touch  of  the  morning  sun.  The  young  men 
were  up  quite  as  early  as  the  active  ladies,  and  busied 
themselves  with  collecting  their  few  treasures  into  small 
bundles,  to  be  placed  within  the  capacious  silken  cloths. 
The  chart  and  the  ancient  documents  were  carefully 
folded  up  in  white  paper,  and  were  hidden  away  in  the 
depth  of  Tomokichi’s  package.  Breakfast  was  then 
duly  despatched,  and  the  family  made  ready  for  the  de- 
parture, The  ladies  were  to  remain  in  charge  of  the 

89 


9° 


Mito  Yashiki. 


house  while  the  gentlemen  were  to  journey  on  to  Otsu, 
a town  about  ten  miles  distant,  at  the  southern  extremity 
of  Lake  Biwa,  where  they  were  to  spend  the  night,  and 
where  in  the  morning  they  were  to  part  company.  The 
gentlemen  sat  on  the  edge  of  the  veranda  and  tied  straw 
sandals  on  their  feet.  Then  they  tucked  their  frocks  up 
around  their  waists,  thrust  their  swords  into  their  gir- 
dles, grasped  their  bundles,  and  were  ready  for  the  jour- 
ney. Around  the  gateway  were  grouped  the  neighbors 
who  had  assembled  to  bid  them  farewell,  and  very  pic- 
turesque they  appeared  as  they  stood  there  in  the  bright 
sunlight  of  that  bracing  autumn  morning.  There  stood 
the  fond  mother  holding  the  child  by  the  hand,  while 
over  her  shoulders  peeped  the  bright  eyes  of  the  baby 
tied  on  her  back.  There  stood  the  village  misses  with 
their  rosy  cheeks,  black  hair,  and  bright  eyes.  They 
were  chattering  like  so  many  magpies  over  so  momentous 
an  epoch  in  the  serene  history  of  the  peaceful  hamlet  as 
the  departure  of  any  of  its  inhabitants  for  a camp-like 
yashiki  in  Yedo.  They  had  heard  that  Mito  was  the 
most  warlike  of  all  the  clans  ; — could  that  be  possible? 
How  terrible  to  think  of  entering  a place  where  glitter- 
ing swords  were  as  common  as  chopsticks  ! 

As  the  Nakashimas  came  through  the  gateway  into  the 
road,  they  were  saluted  with  profound  bows  and  respect- 
ful ejaculations  expressive  of  wishes  for  a happy  journey, 
which  greetings  were  duly  returned  with  gracious  cour- 
tesy and  with  profuse  farewells.  Then  the  entire  family 
went  down  the  road  as  far  as  the  place  where  the 
foothills  merge  into  the  fields  and  meadows,  and  there 
the  mother  and  the  daughter  took  a sorrowful  farewell  in 
that  undemonstrative  manner  peculiar  to  the  country. 
There  were  no  embracings,  no  handshakings,  no  kissing, 
no  gush  of  emotional  sentiment, — such  exhibitions  were 
unknown  in  that  strange  land.  There  was  merely  a 
profound  bow,  a parting  gift  of  silken  girdles  from 
mother  to  son,  and  of  soft  black  socks  from  sister  to 
brother,  a parting  adjuration  to  bring  honor  upon  the 
family  name,  another  bow  accompanied  with  motherly 


An  Overland  Journey. 


9i 


advice  about  avoiding  undue  exposure  to  heat  and  cold, 
— and  then  two  ladies  stood  alone  in  the  middle  of  the 
road  (occasionally  brushing  away  their  tears  with  their 
sleeves),  watching  a group  of  gentlemen  disappearing 
around  the  bend. 

“ Come,  mother,”  finally  exclaimed  the  daughter,  “ let 
us  cheer  up  and  go  back  to  the  house.  The  separation 
is  not  as  bad  as  it  might  be.  Father  and  Kunisaburo 
will  be  back  to-morrow,  and  we  can  now  pride  ourselves 
on  having  two  gallant  knights  at  Mito  Yashiki  in  Yedo. 
How  gay  ! How  delightful  to  be  able  now  to  receive 
regular  news  from  that  quarter  ! ” — Thus  does  the  joy- 
ousness of  youth  cast  off  sorrow  in  all  lands.  And  then 
they  trudged  back  home  to  their  daily  duties,  little 
dreaming  of  the  serious  nature  of  the  boys’ mission  at  the 
distant  yashiki, — for  all  information  of  that  nature  had 
been  carefully  and  considerately  withheld. 

Around  the  bend,  through  fields  and  temple  groves, 
across  the  northern  suburbs  of  Kioto,  straight  to  the 
other  side  of  the  valley  toward  the  base  of  Hiyei-san 
where  the  Tokaido  enters  the  foothills,  strode  the  four 
pedestrians  on  that  glorious  morning.  Long  before  mid- 
day they  entered  the  hills  and  had  commenced  to  climb 
the  range  of  low  mountains  that  separated  Yamashiro 
from  Omf  and  Lake  Biwa.  The  sun  was  now  shining 
with  great  power,  and  the  deep  shade  of  the  forests  that 
covered  the  slopes  was  delightfully  cool  and  refreshing. 
Tarrying  for  an  hour  or  so  at  a tea-house  picturesquely 
located  beside  a mountain  torrent,  they  soon  scaled  the 
pass  and  saw  through  the  trees  lovely  Lake  Biwa  stretch- 
ing away  to  the  northward,  among  the  lofty  ranges  that 
clasped  it  round  about.  It  did  not  take  long  to  descend 
the  reverse  slope  into  Otsu.  There  they  secured  an 
upstairs  room  overlooking  the  blue  waters  of  the  lake, 
and  ordered  dinner  to  be  brought  upas  soon  as  they  had 
bathed  and  dressed  themselves.  As  a matter  of  course, 
they  ordered  for  a side  dish  the  famous  raw  carp  fished 
from  the  lake  and  served  up  with  soy  while  the  flesh  yet 
quivered  with  life.  The  balance  of  the  day  was  spent  in 


92 


Mito  Yashiki. 


strolling  about  the  town  and  in  resting,  smoking,  and 
conversing  together. 

On  the  following  morning  they  all  went  some  distance 
down  the  stately  avenue  of  pine  trees  that  shaded  the 
greater  part  of  the  Tokaido  in  its  devious  course  over 
plain  and  mountain  to  Yedo.  At  the  first  tea-booth  they 
quaffed  the  farewell  cup  and  parted  company.  “ Bear  in 
mind,  my  sons,”  was  the  father’s  parting  behest,  “ that 
death  must  always  come  before  dishonor.  Death  ends 
every  thing,  but  dishonor  lives  to  afflict  friends  and 
kindred.  An  insult  must  always  be  avenged  with  blood 
unless  due  apology  be  made  therefor.  Never  abandon 
the  pursuit  of  an  enemy.  Follow  him,  if  necessary,  with 
smiles  and  cajoleries  ; follow  him  for  years  if  need  be  ; 
but,  at  the  supreme  moment,  smite  him  with  curses  and 
with  death.  Be  candid  with  your  friends,  but  wear  a 
mask  in  the  presence  of  strangers.  ’Spare  no  means  to 
induce  an  enemy  to  believe  the  contrary  of  what  you 
really  intend.  And,  in  carrying  out  a purpose,  hesitate 
at  nothing  that  you  may  deem  expedient.” 

High  noon  found  the  father  and  son  entering  the 
gateway  of  the  homestead  at  Atago-Yama,  and  it  found 
his  two  eldest  sons  striding  along  the  avenue  ten  miles  or 
so  beyond  the  point  where  the  parting  message  had  been 
given. 

The  Tokaido  was  a broad  avenue  (along  which  two 
teams  could  easily  drive  abreast)  stretching  from  Kioto 
to  Yedo,  a distance  of  three  hundred  and  twenty  miles. 
At  distances  of  every  five  miles  were  tea-booths  where 
refreshments  were  served  to  tired  travellers.  At  dis- 
tances of  every  ten  miles  or  so  were  villages  and  large 
towns.  Therefore  it  would  not  be  inapt  to  describe  this 
superb  highway  as  a magnificent  avenue,  stretching  over 
plain  and  mountain,  and  beaded  along  its  entire  length 
with  tea-booths,  villages,  towns,  and  cities  strung  along  at 
regular  intervals.  Between  the  cities  and  the  towns  the 
highway  was  a stately  avenue  of  tall  pine  trees  winding 
across  fields,  over  hills,  and  among  mountains.  The 
road-bed  was  well  gravelled  and  hardened  ; on  each  side 


An  Overland  Journey. 


93 


was  a well  swarded  embankment  upon  whose  green 
slopes  the  wearied  travellers  could  recline  ; and,  at  many 
places,  streams  of  water  bubbled  along  the  edge  of  the 
road  for  miles.  In  its  sinuous  course  the  road  passed 
through  a number  of  Daimiates,  and  it  devolved  upon 
each  Daimio  to  keep  that  portion  of  it  which  lay  within 
his  domain,  in  thorough  repair.  As  there  were  no  lum- 
bering teams  and  no  trains  of  artillery  ever  passing 
along,  the  turnpike  was  never  cut  up,  so  that  in  the 
rainiest  weather  it  was  always  in  a condition  fit  for  travel. 

The  Tokaido  was  a fair  sample  of  a magnificent  system 
of  highways  that  covered  the  entire  island  of  Hondo, — 
and,  as  for  that  matter,  the  islands  of  Kiushiu  and 
Shikoku  also.  All  the  great  roads  in  Hondo  finally  led  to 
Nihon-bashi,  a bridge  in  the  heart  of  Yedo.  The  great 
northern  turnpike  commenced  at  the  extreme  northern 
end  of  the  island  on  the  Tsugaru  Straits,  and  then  seek- 
ing the  milder  climate  that  prevailed  on  the  eastern 
slopes  of  the  mighty  mountain  spine  of  Hondo,  it  went 
southward  for  five  hundred  miles  over  mountain,  hill, 
valley,  river,  and  plain,  through  the  long  straggling 
provinces  of  Nambu,  Sendai,  and  Mito,  until  it  reached 
the  muddy  stream  bridged  by  the  Nihon-bashi.  The 
great  northwestern  turnpike  commenced  at  Niigata  over 
on  the  west  coast,  and,  after  crossing  the  rice  flats  and 
the  hemp  fields  of  the  Daimiate  of  Echigo,  wound 
through  the  magnificent  mountain  range  that  extends 
from  one  end  of  the  island  to  the  other,  and  was  finally 
merged  in  Yedo.  The  great  inland  road  (Nakasendo), 
along  which  our  fleet-footed  courier  so  recently  sped, 
began  at  Kioto,  skirted  the  eastern  slopes  of  the  water- 
shed that  borders  the  eastern  shores  of  Lake  Biwa,  then, 
turning  eastward,  traversed  the  fields  of  the  Daimiate  of 
Mino,  then  plunged  into  the  magnificent  mountain 
system  of  central  Hondo,  whence  it  finally  emerged  into 
the  beautiful  plains  surrounding  Y edo.  And  the  T okaido, 
also  commencing  at  Kioto,  shrank  from  the  rugged 
mountains  of  Shinano  and  sought  the  seashore  and 
reached  Yedo  by  that  circuitous  route. 


94 


Mito  Yashiki. 


In  addition  to  these  four  great  roads,  others  almost 
equally  grand  left  Kioto  on  its  other  side  and  passed 
south  to  Osaca,  and  then  went  westward  along  the  shores 
of  the  matchless  Inland  Sea  for  two  hundred  miles  to 
Shimonoseki  Straits.’  Upon  the  west  coast  a long,  strag- 
gling road  ran  through  the  length  of  the  provinces  that 
line  the  Japan  Sea.  And  a perfect  network  of  minor 
roads  covered  the  entire  empire.  All  of  these  highways 
were  in  constant  use.  Along  the  grand-trunk  roads,  the 
traffic  and  the  pageantry  of  the  empire  streamed  at  all 
seasons. 

Let  us  soar  like  the  falcon  far  above  the  central  peak 
of  Asamayama,  and  take  a bird’s-eye  view  of  the  realm. 
Far  toward  the  north  you  can  see  the  long  retinue  of 
some  Daimio,  pouring  down  the  length  of  the  island  be- 
twixt shore  and  mountain.  Far  away  in  the  south  you 
can  see  the  cavalcades  of  Tosa  and  Choshiu  meandering 
along  the  shores  of  the  Pacific  Ocean.  Toward  the  west 
the  retainers  of  Echizen  stream  through  the  defiles  and 
over  the  superb  passes  of  Shinano.  And  among  the  by- 
roads that  cover  the  realm  like  a cobweb,  you  can  see  a 
multitude  of  pack-horses  and  coolies  freighted  with  the 
produce  of  the  waters  and  of  the  fields.  Not  a steam- 
whistle,  not  a rumbling  train,  not  a wagon  anywhere  in 
sight ! The  carriers  of  burdens  are  human  beings,  and 
vicious  little  nags  ! 

Yonder  where  that  rugged  promontory  so  boldly 
ploughs  the  blue  Pacific,  and  where  a fishing  hamlet 
nestles  beneath  the  cliffs,  you  can  see  a long  line  of  pack- 
horses  ladened  with  salted  fish  captured  but  a few  days 
ago  by  the  venturesome  boats  whose  white  wings  now 
bespeck  the  distant  blue  of  the  mighty  deep  in  pursuit  of 
fresh  booty.  That  caravan  will  journey  along  the  sandy 
beach,  up  through  rice  fields  and  forests  deep  into  the 
mountain,  until  it  shall  reach  an  inland  city,  where  it 
will  unload,  and  will  take  back  to  the  seashore  hamlet  a 
cargo  of  rice,  charcoal,  and  saki.  That  caravan  toiling 
so  laboriously  over  those  mountains  toward  the  south  is 
freighted  with  an  inland  cargo  of  salt  and  edible  sea- 


A RESIDENCE  IN  THE  CELEBRATED 
MOORISH  PALACE  THE  “ ALHAMBRA,” 
WITH  THE  HISTORICAL  AND  ROMANTIC 
LEGENDS  CONNECTED  THEREWITH 


‘WASHINGTON  IRVING 


G.  P.  PUTNAM’S  SONS,  Publishers 

LONDON'  : NEW  YORK  : 

24  Bedford  St.,  Strand  27  and  2g  West  23d  Street 

Cbe  ftntcfterbocker  press 


The  beautiful  Spanish  ' Sketch-Book,*  The  Alhambra.*  •• — It'.  H.  Prescott 

H charming  edition  a$  a gift  or  for  tbc  library 


IDarro  Edition — — — ~~ 

Printed  from  new  electrotype  plates ; illustrated  with  photogravures 
from  photographs,  many  of  which  were  taken  specially  for  this  edition 
by  R.  H.  Lawrence,  Esq.  Each  page  is  surrounded  by  a Moorish  border 
in  red  and  gold,  the  designs  being  carefully  copied  from  the  decorations 
of  the  Palace. 

Two  volumes,  small  octavo,  binding  decorated  with  handsome  Moorish 


patterns  ; slip  covers,  gilt  tops,  in  box; $6.00 

Three-quarter  levant,  gilt  tops 12.00 

I I 


HE  ALHAMBRA  - 

^ 


i£*s3SS*3t' 


he  Conquest 


OF 


GRANADA 


WASHINGTON  IRVING 


HgapiDa  EtMtiou 

Printed  from  new  electrotype  plates ; illustrated  with  photogravures 
from  photographs,  many  of  which  were  taken  specially  for  this  edition. 
Each  page  is  surrounded  by  a Moorish  border  in  red  and  gray,  the 
designs  being  carefully  copied  from  Moorish  decorations. 

Two  volumes,  small  octavo,  binding  decorated  with  handsome  Moorish 

designs ; slip  covers,  gilt  tops,  in  box $ 6.00 

Three-quarter  levant,  gilt  tops 12.00 

Limited  Edition  (iso  numbered  sets),  with  proofs  of  the  Illustrations  on 
India  Paper.  Half  leather,  gilt  tops,  Roxburgh  style  . $1500 


G.  P.  PUTNAM’S  SONS,  Ppblishers, 

LONDON  : NEW  YORK  : 

24  Bedford  St.,  Strand  27  and  29  West  23d  Street 


Ube  Iknichcrbochcv  jprese 


Aji  Overland  yourney. 


95 


weed  ; while  that  one  passing  it  is  outward  bound  with  a 
mighty  cargo  of  earthenware,  ironware,  and  cotton  fabrics. 
That  long  dark  line  to  the  eastward,  winding  across  the 
Yedo  plains,  is  the  mighty  retinue  of  the  Daimio  of  Kaga, 
leaving  Yedo  on  a visit  home  to  the  west  coast.  Twenty 
thousand  retainers  swell  the  train.  Five  thousand  coolies 
grunt  and  sweat  under  boxes,  kagos,  and  norimotis.  The 
head  of  the  column  has  reached  the  mountains  before  the 
tail  has  straggled  out  of  the  gates  of  the  Y^a.ga.yaskiki. 

Let  us  descend  from  our  lofty  station  and  stand  beside 
the  avenue  at  the  point  where  it  merges  in  the  foothills, 
in  order  that  we  may  closely  inspect  the  stately  proces- 
sion. First  comes  a group  of  horsemen  clad  in  ancient 
armor,  and  carrying  spears  and  fluttering  ensigns,  embla- 
zoned with  the  heraldic  crests  of  their  mighty  lord, 
whose  approach  is  thus  announced,  and  whose  right  of 
way  is  thus  secured.  Woe  betide  those  who  turn  not 
aside  ! Then — oh  ! for  miles  and  miles — streams  an 
endless  train  of  coolies,  carrying  lacquered  boxes  con- 
taining the  princely  paraphernalia.  Then  comes  a long 
line  of  straggling  samurai  leisurely  sauntering  along  en- 
joying the  shade  and  the  scenery.  Then  more  horsemen 
follow.  After  that  comes  a squad  of  banner-bearers, 
pacing  along  with  dignified  deliberation.  Close  upon 
this  comes  a multitude  of  kagos,  bearing  the  ladies  and 
gentlemen  in  attendance  on  his  Grace.  Then  a vast 
throng  of  samurai  appear.  Following  them  comes  a 
myriad  of  coolies,  carrying  innumerable  baskets  and 
boxes  loaded  with  the  paraphernalia  and  the  impedi- 
menta of  this  army  of  retainers.  After  which,  come  a 
vast  throng  of  spearmen  and  archers,  along  cavalcade  of 
gallant  knights  in  armor,  preceding  a long  line  of  nori- 
mons,  bearing  his  lordship’s  household,  and  swarms  of 
elegantly  dressed  samurai.  A gap  of  half  a mile  or  so 
now  intervenes,  and  then  we  see  a stately  procession  of 
swordsmen,  spearmen,  bowmen,  and  banner-bearers  es- 
corting a superb  norimon  borne  slowly  along  upon  the 
shoulders  of  eight  stout  men.  Here  we  have  before  us 
the  lord  of  Kaga,  reclining  upon  cushions  and  enjoying 


96 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


the  scenery  from  his  latticed  window.  And  this  is  but 
the  middle  of  the  procession  ! For  two  days  the  strag- 
gling column  of  coolies  and  warriors  steadily  pours  over 
this  lofty  mountain  pass  into  the  mighty  ranges  beyond. 
And  upon  some  portion  of  the  network  of  highways  cov- 
ering the  empire  you  will  see  at  all  times  some  such  host 
streaming  either  homeward  or  Yedo-ward.  Such  pa- 
geantry has  covered  these  roads  for  two  hundred  and 
fifty  years. 

We  are  travelling  in  a country  whose  history  extends 
back  for  twenty-five  hundred  years,  to  a period  when  an 
unbroken  wilderness  covered  the  American  continents, 
when  England  was  covered  with  forests  and  marshes 
sparsely  peopled  by  tattooed  savages  living  in  caves  and 
fens,  when  Europe  was  a vast  solitude  within  whose 
gloomy  depths  roamed  tribes  fiercer  and  more  dangerous 
than  the  wild  beasts  that  swarmed  there,  and  when  Rome 
was  but  a village  of  banditti.  Two  hundred  and  fifty 
years  have  barely  elapsed  since  the  Jesuits  were  driven 
forth  with  such  terrible  slaughter  from  the  island  of 
Kiushiu  ; and  at  every  cross-road,  at  every  bridge-head, 
at  the  entrance  to  every  village,  and  in  the  streets  of 
every  city,  we  still  have  staring  us  in  the  face  the  blas- 
phemous language  of  the  following  proclamation,  which 
the  enraged  Tokugawas  posted  up  all  over  the  empire  at 
the  time  when  they  sealed  the  gates  of  the  country  with 
blood,  and  hurled  defiance  at  humanity  and  at  the  uni- 
verse : “So  tong  as  the  sun  shall  warm  the  earth , let  no 

Christian  be  so  bold  as  to  come  to  Japan  j and  let  all  kncnv 
that  the  king  of  Spain  himself  , or  the  Christian's  god , or  the 
great  god  of  all , if  he  violate  this  command , shall  pay  for  it 
with  his  head." 

The  empire  thus  closed,  comprised  nearly  four  thou- 
sand islands,  scattered  along  the  eastern  coast  of  Asia, 
and  trending  from  Formosa  on  the  south  up  in  a north- 
easterly direction  toward  the  peninsula  of  Kamtchatka. 
It  was  an  empire  nearly  two  thousand  miles  long,  but  not 
over  two  hundred  miles  wide  in  its  widest  part.  From 
one  extreme  to  the  other  this  archipelago  is  grandly 


An  Overland  Journey. 


97 


mountainous,  and  is  diversified  with  varied  and  exquisite 
scenery.  Among  the  islands  of  the  extreme  north  you 
will  find  the  seal,  the  otter,  the  fox,  the  wolf,  and  other 
fur-bearing  animals  that  thrive  in  those  bleak  and  wild 
regions  that  have  been  almost  deserted  by  human  beings. 
At  the  extreme  south,  among  the  Loo-Choo  islands,  you 
will  find  the  verdure  and  the  climate  of  the  tropics, — a 
region  where,  in  the  language  of  the  poet, 

“ Droops  the  heavy-blossomed  bower,  hangs  the  heavy-fruited  tree, — 
Summer  isles  of  Eden,  lying  in  dark-purple  spheres  of  sea.” 

And  the  climate  of  the  islands  of  Dai-Nippon  (grouped 
in  the  middle  of  the  archipelago)  is  a delightful  com- 
bination of  both  extremes, — that  of  Yesso  much  resem- 
bling that  of  New  York  State,  and  that  of  Kiushiu  being 
decidedly  sub-tropical ; while  that  of  Hondo,  the  main 
island  in  the  middle  of  the  group,  owing  to  a combina- 
tion of  circumstances  which  I shall  now  briefly  explain, 
is  most  wonderfully  varied.  This  long  and  narrow 
island  (upon  which  we  are  now  travelling)  is  shaped  like 
an  obtuse  angle  with  its  apex  pointing  eastward  into 
the  warm  Pacific  Ocean,  while  its  long  arms  stretching 
northward  and  southwesterly — five  hundred  miles  in 
each  direction — embrace  the  chilly  Japan  Sea  on  the 
west.  Thus  the  black  stream  from  the  equator  washes  its 
eastern  shores,  while  the  frigid  waters  of  the  Sea  of 
Okotsk,  flowing  southward  in  a steady  stream  between 
the  Japanese  archipelago  and  the  Asiatic  continent, 
washes  its  western  shores. 

In  addition  to  this  a mighty  range  of  mountains  ex- 
tends from  one  end  of  the  island  to  the  other,  divid- 
ing it  into  two  nearly  equal  halves  facing  east  and 
west.  Consequently  the  climate  of  the  western  half  is 
much  more  severe  than  that  of  the  eastern  half,  inas- 
much as  the  blizzards  coming  from  Siberia,  heavily 
charged  with  the  vapors  of  the  Japan  Sea,  are  caught 
by  this  mighty  scoop-net  of  mountain  ranges,  and  are 
forced  to  precipitate  their  snowy  freight  back  among 
the  valleys  and  upon  the  rice  flats  of  the  west  coast. 


98 


Mito  Yashiki. 


While  the  western  slopes  of  these  mountains  are  buried 
deep  in  snow,  the  eastern  slope  is  comparatively  free 
from  it,  and  the  southeastern  slope  has  a climate  as 
balmy  as  that  of  Sicily  ; and  along  the  shores  of  the 
Inland  Sea  you  have  one  of  the  choice  climates  of 
earth,  where  flourish  the  orange  and  the  fig. 

Although  Japan  is  a land  of  sunshine  and  of  flow- 
ers, yet  there  is  abundance  of  rain  there.  It  has  been 
estimated  that  in  England  the  number  of  overcast  and 
rainy  days  during  the  year  exceeds  the  number  of  sun- 
shiny ones.  In  Japan  the  ratio  is  about  ten  sunshiny 
days  to  three  rainy  and  overcast  days.  Yet  the  amount 
of  rainfall  in  Japan  is  three  times  as  great  as  it  is  in 
England.  When  it  does  rain  in  Japan,  it  does  so  with 
a vengeance.  With  its  numerous  lofty  mountain  sum- 
mits towering  many  thousands  of  feet  above  the  sur- 
rounding waters,  every  current  of  moist  air  landward 
bound  is  speedily  chilled,  and  is  compelled  to  pour  down 
its  liquid  freight  on  valley  and  field.  Japan  is,  there- 
fore, a land  of  small  rivers,  but  of  sudden  and  mighty 
torrents  ; a land  of  deep  verdure,  of  well-wooded  hills 
and  mountains  ; and  it  is  a land  of  lovely  lakes  and 
cascades. 

Of  course  there  is  abundance  of  beautiful  and  mag- 
nificent scenery  in  all  parts  of  the  world  Every 
country  has  its  natural  glories.  The  Yosemite  Valley 
is  matchless.  The  Falls  of  Niagara  are  peerless.  The 
White  Mountains  are  exceedingly  beautiful.  The  lake 
regions  of  Switzerland  and  of  Northern  Italy  are  of 
surpassing  loveliness.  The  Vale  of  Cashmere  and  the 
valleys  of  the  Lydder  and  the  Scinde  branching  there- 
from into  the  mighty  ranges  of  the  Himalayahs,  are  un- 
paralleled in  beauty  and  in  magnificence.  Yet,  take  it 
all  in  all,  the  empire  of  Japan,  with  its  superb  vol- 
canic cones  and  rugged  shores,  its  majestic  mountain 
ranges  sloping  seaward  and  ocean-ward,  its  bold  prom- 
ontories ploughing  the  mighty  deep,  its  exquisite  lakes 
mirrored  among  lofty  mountain  crests  thousands  of  feet 
above  sea-level,  its  bays,  inlets,  and  inland  archipelago 


An  Overland  Journey. 


99 


(comprising  three  thousand  islets  scattered  broadcast 
through  an  inland  sea),  its  garden-like  fields  and  embow- 
ered villages,  its  picturesque  hamlets  and  engroved  mon- 
asteries,— is  truly  the  most  beautiful  country  on  the  face  of 
the  globe  ; and  it  possesses  a combination  of  ocean,  moun- 
tain, lake,  and  temple  scenery,  which,  by  coining  an  ad- 
jective, we  may  justly  describe  as  Japanesque. 

But  we  must  now  hasten  with  our  journey.  As  in 
the  study  of  campaigns,  it  becomes  necessary  to  obtain 
in  advance  a correct  idea  of  the  theatre  of  war,  so  in 
this  tale  of  Old  Japan  it  seemed  expedient  at  this  junc- 
ture to  introduce  a brief  description  of  the  theatre  of 
coming  action.  The  operations  will  be  confined  entirely 
to  the  island  of  Hondo,  as  around  this  island  cluster  the 
romance  and  the  historic  events  of  the  empire.  Here 
you  will  find  the  bulk  of  the  population  ; here  are  located 
Kioto,  Yedo,  Nagoya,  and  other  great  cities ; and  here 
we  have  the  grandest  and  the  most  beautiful  scenery. 

Our  enterprising  knights  are  well  on  toward  the  end 
of  their  first  day’s  journey.  They  have  followed  the 
stately  avenue  all  day  through  a level  sandy  country. 
As  evening  comes  on  they  tarry  at  a village  in  the  vicin- 
ity of  some  well  wooded  hills.  The  hot-water  bath 
speedily  relaxes  their  contracted  muscles  and  puts  them 
in  condition  to  make  short  work  of  their  evening  meal. 

On  the  following  morning  they  were  off  at  an  hour  that 
would  correspond  to  seven  o’clock  by  our  method  of 
measuring  time.  The  road  led  over  a well  wooded  coun- 
try for  many  miles,  and  then,  toward  midday,  wound  up 
among  picturesque  hills,  amid  whose  cooling  shades  and 
embowered  hamlets  it  twisted,  until  late  in  the  afternoon 
it  finally  descended  the  reverse  slopes  of  the  range,  and 
led  through  a deeply  shaded  valley  into  the  rice  fields  of 
the  ancient  province  of  Is&.  Spending  the  night  at  the 
village  of  Seki,  they  continued  their  journey  on  the 
morrow  through  a long  stretch  of  level  country  toward 
the  waters  of  Owari  Bay.  During  the  afternoon  they 
were  much  delayed  by  meeting  the  extensive  train  of  one 
of  the  southern  Daimios,  for  which  they  were  obliged 


IOO 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


repeatedly  to  turn  aside.  On  this  day  they  covered  but 
eighteen  miles.  On  the  following  day,  however,  by  dili- 
gent walking  they  were  able  to  reach  the  city  of  Nagoya, 
near  the  head  of  Owari  Bay,  where  they  decided  to 
spend  a day  for  rest,  as  they  had  completed  the  first 
hundred  miles  of  their  journey.  It  was  also  decided 
that  the  remaining  two  hundred  and  twenty  miles  were 
to  be  walked  more  leisurely, — averaging  about  twenty 
miles  per  day.  Nagoya  was  a city  of  about  half  a 
million  souls,  and  was  the  capital  of  the  Daimio  of 
Owari,  whose  superb  castle  and  parks  covered  many 
acres  of  commanding  slopes  on  the  northern  boundary 
of  the  city. 

After  due  rest,  the  journey  was  resumed  along  the 
windings  of  the  stately  Tokaido.  For  two  days  they 
travelled  through  the  hilly  country  bordering  that  deep 
inlet  constituting  the  Bay  of  Owari.  Occasionally  they 
met  the  trains  of  Daimios.  On  the  third  day,  toward 
midday,  as  they  reached  the  crest  of  a range  of  hills, 
they  espied  through  the  trees  the  deep-blue  waters  of  the 
mighty  Pacific  spread  out  before  them.  The  distant 
roar  of  the  thundering  surf  could  be  distinctly  heard  as 
they  descended  the  slopes  toward  the  beach.  Following 
the  sandy  shore  for  some  distance,  they  finally  came  to  a 
deep  arm  of  the  sea,  over  which  it  was  necessary  to 
cross  by  boat  to  the  opposite  headland.  Here,  hemmed 
in  on  all  sides,  they  were  confronted  with  the  first  To- 
kugawa  barrier,  where  they  were  obliged  to  hand  their 
passports  to  the  Bakufu  officials  for  inspection.  Every- 
thing proving  satisfactory,  they  were  allowed  to  embark 
in  a small  fishing  boat,  and  were  sculled  three  miles 
across  to  the  town  of  Maizaka,  situated  on  a long  sandy 
spit.  Here  they  decided  to  spend  the  night.  They  se- 
cured a room  that  overlooked  the  roaring  breakers  and 
the  mighty  expanse  of  waters  as  well. 

In  the  night  a violent  storm  arose,  and  raged  along  the 
coast  for  two  days  with  such  fury  as  to  keep  our  young 
friends  weather-bound  during  its  continuance.  Toward 
evening  of  the  second  day  the  wind  subsided  and  the 


An  Overland  Journey. 


IOI 


steady  deluge  abated.  The  masses  of  sombre  clouds 
rushed  inland  toward  some  lofty  crest,  like  hostile  hosts 
gathering  around  some  standard.  Then  the  mighty 
ocean,  that  had  been  so  mercilessly  badgered  by  the  hur- 
ricane, arose  in  majestic  wrath  and  came  landward  in 
stupendous  billows,  and  smote  the  shore  with  such  terri- 
ble blows  that  the  hotel  fairly  trembled  with  the  shocks. 
Late  in  the  evening  the  moon  shone  forth  on  a scene  of 
terrific  grandeur.  As  far  as  the  eye  could  reach  were 
raging  white-crested  waves  that  massed  themselves  in 
tremendous  billows,  which  thundered  so  impetuously  on 
the  beach  that  the  hissing  waves  frothed  up  the  white 
sand  nearly  to  the  balcony,  where  our  awe-stricken 
friends  were  looking  forth  upon  the  wild  scene.  The 
wake  of  the  storm,  consisting  of  gauzy  shreds  of  clouds, 
was  flying  inland  to  the  cool  embrace  of  some  lofty 
mountain  summit.  A fishing  smack,  that  had  outridden 
the  tempest,  was  tumbling  shoreward  in  a very  demora- 
lized fashion,  creating  the  impression  that  it  was  trying 
to  probe  the  ocean’s  bed  alternately  with  prow  and  stern. 

A multitude  of  little  red  crabs  fled  up  the  beach  to  es- 
cape such  trip-hammer  thumping  as  was  being  inflicted 
thereon,  and  sought  refuge  in  the  hotel  yard  and  in  the 
village  street,  where  they  proved  themselves  to  be  an  end- 
less nuisance  to  the  kind-hearted  natives,  who  could  not 
bear  to  tread  on  them,  fearing,  forsooth  (devout  Bud- 
dhists as  they  were),  lest  by  crushing  the  little  creatures 
they  might  inadvertently  break  in  upon  the  cycle  of  ex- 
istence of  some  spirit  working  its  way  to  human  shape. 
High  upon  the  beach,  beyond  the  reach  of  the  rushing 
waters,  stretched  a long  line  of  fishing  boats,  with  their 
long,  narrow  prows  pointing  down  toward  the  heaps 
of  kelp  and  sea-weed  washed  up  by  the  angry  waves. 
Occasionally  a well-bronzed  fisherman  would  come  down 
to  the  shore  and  contemplatively  puff  his  pipe  while  gaz- 
ing seaward  to  diagnose  what  the  atmospheric  conditions 
might  indicate  for  the  weather  on  the  morrow,  as  his  last 
catch  of  fish  had  gone  inland  several  days  before,  and  his 
supply  was  running  very  low.  The  sea-birds  that  had 


102 


Mito  Yashiki. 


been  driven  from  the  storm-swept  waters  now  began,  on 
timorous  wing,  to  venture  on  the  deep  in  search  of  food. 

Our  young  friends  studied  the  tempestuous  scene  for 
long  hours.  The  landlady  had  closed  all  of  the  rain- 
doors  for  the  night,  but  had  left  open  the  balcony  to  ac- 
commodate the  gentlemanly  young  travellers  from  Kioto. 

“ How  far  does  your  chart  represent  this  water  as  ex- 
tending ?”  enquired  Junzo  of  his  brother. 

“ It  extends  fully  five  thousand  miles  in  the  direction 
of  the  rising  sun,  and  it  extends  fully  ten  thousand  miles 
from  north  to  south,”  was  the  reply. 

“ And  on  the  other  side  rises  a mighty  continent,  be- 
yond which  lies  another  body  of  water  almost  equally  as 
large  as  this  one,  I understand  you  to  say,”  said  Junzo; 
“ and  then,  beyond  that,  yet  mightier  continents,  upon 
whose  remotest  borders  lie  the  islands  of  Dai-Nippon.” 

“Precisely  so,”  replied  Tomokichi. 

“ That  much  I clearly  understand,”  said  Junzo  ; “ but 
how  this  vast  body  of  land  and  water  can  be  of  a circular 
shape,  I cannot  understand  at  all.  I think  that  you  did 
not  clearly  understand  what  your  Nagasaki  friend  said  in 
his  letters.  The  face  of  your  chart  is  surely  flat  enough, 
and  does  not  indicate  roundness  at  all,  so  far  as  I can 
see.” 

“ Well,  I must  confess  that  I cannot  explain  the  matter 
to  even  my  own  satisfaction,”  replied  Tomokichi  ; “ but 
the  letter  clearly  states  that  this  earth  is  a round  body  of 
land  and  water.  I am  going  to  probe  this  matter  deeper 
when  I reach  Yedo.  But,  if  the  earth  be  flat,  why  cannot 
you  see  the  land  looming  up  on  the  other  side  ? ” 

“ Because,”  replied  Junzo,  “our  eyes  are  not  made  to 
see  so  far,  perhaps.  Beyond  a certain  point,  things  be- 
come invisible  to  us.  With  proper  eyesight  we  might 
see  the  mountains  over  there  on  the  other  continent, 
I suppose." 

“ It  may  be  so — it  may  be  so,”  replied  his  brother 
slowly,  as  he  dreamily  watched  the  shimmering  foam  on 
the  beach  ; “ I am  free  to  confess  that  the  stupendous- 
ness of  the  mystery  enshrouding  the  entire  subject  quite 


An  Overland  Journey. 


103 


appalls  me.  We,  who  slumbered  and  dreamed  amid  the 
profound  repose  of  our  mountain  nest,  find  ourselves  un- 
able to  think  fast  enough  when  brought  for  the  first  time 
face  to  face  with  such  colossal  subjects  as  now  confront 
us  ; and,  in  our  dazed  amazement,  we  seek  refuge  in 
bewildered  speculations.” 

The  next  morning  broke  with  an  atmosphere  as  clear 
and  as  serene  as  crystal.  The  only  vestige  of  the  hurri- 
cane was  the  sonorous  voice  of  the  disturbed  ocean,  still 
complaining  of  the  rough  treatment  that  it  had  received. 
Oh  ! how  matchlessly  pure  and  cool  was  the  air  as  our 
young  travellers  continued  their  journey  along  the 
avenue  that  now  wound  for  three  days  among  hamlets, 
pine-clad  hillocks,  and  well-wooded  ridges  in  the  rear  of 
a broad  promontory  that  pushed  its  bold  cliffs  far  into 
the  deep.  On  the  afternoon  of  the  third  day  after  leav- 
ing Maizaka,  they  were  walking  along  the  ridge  of  a 
series  of  high  hills  when  they  espied,  down  the  long  vista 
ahead  of  them,  the  snow-capped  cone  of  Fujisan  loom- 
ing up  magnificently  in  the  clear  air,  far  above  the  mighty 
ranges  that  intervened  like  colossal  billows  of  adamant. 
They  tarried  a full  half  hour  at  a tea-booth,  to  enjoy  the 
beauty  of  this  far-famed  cone.  Then  they  descended 
into  the  exquisite  hill  country  environing  Shidzuoka. 

This  city  contained  a population  of  about  forty  thou- 
sand inhabitants,  and  in  ancient  times  was  the  capital  of 
Tokugawa  Iyeyas,  who  spent  many  years  of  his  life  there 
and  died  there.  Its  castle  ranked  next  to  that  of  Yedo 
as  to  size  and  impregnability,  and  it  was  occupied  by  a 
prince  of  the  house  of  Tokugawa,  with  a powerful  garri- 
son. Our  friends  found  themselves  in  streets  filled  with 
a bustling  crowd  of  citizens  and  samurai , where  they  were 
subjected  to  many  a polite  stare  as  being  strangers  in  the 
place.  Hardly  had  they  set  foot  within  their  hotel 
before  word  was  passed  up  to  their  rooms  that  two 
officials  desired  an  interview  with  them.  These  formida- 
ble gentlemen  were  then  duly  ushered  in  by  the  willing 
landlord,  who  fairly  bent  to  the  ground  each  time  these 
sublime  personages  opened  their  mouths  to  address  him 


104 


Mito  Yashiki. 


or  even  when  they  cast  glances  in  his  direction.  After  a 
mutual  exchange  of  profound  salutations,  the  visitors 
excused  their  intrusion  on  the  ground  that  it  was  their 
duty  to  keep  track  of  all  strangers  coming  to  town,  and, 
it  having  been  reported  to  them  that  two  gentlemen 
of  distinguished  mien  had  arrived,  it  devolved  on  them 
to  call  and  examine  their  credentials  and  make  report  to 
the  castle  in  order  that  the  official  record  there  might  be 
regular,  so  that  no  blame  could  at  any  future  time  be 
charged  by  the  government  against  the  commanding 
officer.  With  apparent  reluctance  and  humility  they 
then  proceeded  to  examine  and  to  copy  the  two  pass- 
ports willingly  handed  over  to  them  by  our  young  friends. 

“ Honored  sirs,”  enquired  the  officers,  “ in  what  man- 
ner have  you  prosecuted  your  journey  hitherto  ? ” 

“We  unworthy  creatures  have  journeyed  altogether  on 
foot,”  was  the  modest  reply. 

“Verily,  you  have  selected  a gallant  and  knightly 
method  of  travelling,  honored  sirs,”  responded  the 
officers  quickly.  “ May  the  balance  of  your  journey  be 
equally  prosperous.  And  may  you  enjoy  a long  and 
happy  service  with  the  lord  of  Mito.  Sirs,  we  humbly 
return  your  papers  as  being  in  all  respects  satisfactory. 
May  the  subtle  influences  of  air,  fire,  and  water  be  in 
your  favor.  Farewell.” 

On  the  next  morning  the  streets  were  filled  with  the 
retainers  of  the  Daimio  of  Satsuma,  sweeping  southward 
to  their  distant  home  in  Kiushiu.  All  day  long  the  end- 
less throng  poured  steadily  through  the  city.  Late  in  the 
afternoon  the  princely  norimon  came  slowly  along  amid 
hushed  throngs  of  attendants,  and  was  followed  by  a 
multitude  of  samurai.  Our  friends  decided  not  to 
continue  their  journey  until  the  following  day,  in  order 
to  avoid  meeting  the  reckless  and  quarrelsome  members 
of  that  most  warlike  clan.  All  next  day,  as  they  con- 
tinued their  journey,  they  met  detached  groups  of 
attendants,  men-at-arms,  carriers,  and  kagos,  streaming 
southward  in  the  wake  of  the  stately  column  of  their 
lord.  At  one  of  the  wayside  tea-booths,  a low-grade 


An  Overland  journey. 


105 


Satsuma  samurai , who  had  been  imbibing  too  freely  of 
sak /,  sallied  forth  into  the  road  munching  a boiled  sweet 
potato  of  huge  dimensions,  which  he  very  rudely  hurled 
at  the  head  of  Junzo,  who  chanced  to  be  passing  along  at 
that  moment.  Luckily,  however,  his  unsteady  arm  failed 
to  communicate  the  proper  bias  to  the  missile,  and  it 
missed  its  mark  and  spread  itself  out  like  a big  plaster  on 
the  bare  back  of  a /fog^bearer,  who  roared  lustily,  sup- 
posing that  a sword  or  an  arrow  had  gone  off  by  accident 
upon  that  unprotected  region. 

Now,  as  a matter  of  fact,  no  insult  could  have  been 
more  pointed  than  to  hurl  a common  edible  that  had  been 
touched  to  the  mouth  at  the  person  of  a samurai  with  the 
deliberate  intention  of  hitting  him  therewith  ; but,  from 
a diplomatic  standpoint,  a person  engaged  on  an  impor- 
tant mission  should  have  been  looking  in  an  opposite 
direction  and  thus,  as  the  missile  failed  to  reach  him, 
have  been  able  to  waive  with  becoming  dignity  the 
insult,  and  thus  to  avoid  a disturbance.  But  Junzo  was 
inexperienced.  He  took  notice  of  the  insult.  Therefore 
but  one  course  was  available.  He  was  bound  by  the  code 
of  feudal  etiquette  to  resent  it  at  once.  The  hot  blood 
mounted  his  face,  and,  uttering  an  imprecation,  he  turned 
upon  the  aggressor  with  his  drawn  sword,  and  he  would 
soon  have  been  involved  in  a mortal  combat  had  not  the 
companions  of  the  drunken  fellow  intervened  and  offered 
suitable  apology  for  his  beastly  conduct, — for  the  true 
samurai  admired  bravery  and  was  quick  to  make  amends 
for  unjustifiable  wrongs  done  to  fellow  samurai.  The 
expression  of  supreme  relief  that  came  over  the  kago- 
bearer's  countenance  when  he  ascertained  the  true 
nature  of  the  assault  upon  his  person,  and  the  sight  of 
the  red  disc  upon  his  broad  back  as  he  turned  around 
with  a contented  grunt  to  resume  his  journey  down  the 
avenue,  threw  everybody  into  fits  of  laughter  and  re- 
stored general  good-nature.  Nothing  of  note  occurred 
during  the  balance  of  the  day  to  annoy  them,  and  they 
journeyed  peacefully  along  the  shores  of  the  “ deep- 
sounding sea.” 


io6 


Mito  Yashiki. 


On  the  next  morning  the  journey  was  continued 
around  the  shores  of  Suruga  bay,  amid  most  magnificent 
scenery.  On  the  right  hand  lay  the  crescent-shaped  bay, 
whose  encompassing  headlands  ploughed  the  deep  half- 
way to  the  horizon  with  their  sylvan  crests  and  ridges. 
The  surf  bathed  the  shores  with  eternal  foam.  On  the 
left  hand  rose  the  mighty  cone  of  Fujisan, — a glorious 
and  magnificent  sight, — fields,  forests,  and  cinders 
sloping  upward  for  thirty  miles  from  shore  to  summit. 
In  the  latter  part  of  the  day,  deep  forests  along  the  shore 
shut  out  the  sea-view,  but  occasional  glimpses  of  the 
superb  cone  still  flashed  through  the  woods. 

All  next  day  the  road  led  behind  the  base  line  of 
Idzu  promontory  until  it  reached  at  night  the  shores  of 
Odawara  bay.  This  day’s  journey  was  one  of  great 
magnificence  and  beauty.  At  first  the  road  led  through 
garden-like  fields  around  the  base  of  Fujisan.  Then 
it  entered  the  gorges  of  the  colossal  ranges  of  the 
Hakone  Mountains,  among  which  it  writhed  and  twisted 
for  several  hours  until  it  came  out  at  the  famous  Barrier 
at  the  top  of  the  pass  near  the  southern  end  of  Hakonfe 
Lake  ; then  it  descended  through  mountain  scenery  of  the 
grandest  description  until  it  reached  the  castle  town  of 
Odawara  on  the  shores  of  the  bay.  From  this  point  our 
young  friends  continued  their  journey  next  day  along  the 
shores  of  this  lovely  inlet,  and  stopped  for  the  night  at 
Fujisawa.  Again  diverging  from  the  shore,  they,  on  the 
following  day,  continued  their  course  along  the  base-line 
of  Uraga  promontory,  through  picturesque  hills  and 
glades  until  they  reached  Kanagawa,  on  the  shores  of 
Yedo  Bay.  Here  they  took  their  midday  meal,  and  then 
they  journeyed  along  the  shores  of  the  bay  to  Kawasaki, 
just  twelve  miles  south  of  Nihon-Bashi.  Here  they  were 
delayed  a day  by  the  Daimio  of  Kii-shiu,  going  south- 
ward. And  on  the  following  day  they  reached  their 
hotel  in  Yedo,  where  they  decided  to  tarry  until  their 
arrival  had  been  communicated  to  Konishi  at  Mito  Yas- 
hiki.— And  thus  ended  the  overland  journey. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


YEDO. 

Early  on  the  morning  of  the  day  following  the  events 
narrated  in  the  last  chapter,  a large  brown  rat  was  nib- 
bling the  grains  of  rice  that  lay  at  the  door  of  a govern- 
ment warehouse  on  the  banks  of  the  Sumida  River  in 
Yedo.  From  the  balcony  of  the  hotel  on  the  opposite 
side  of  the  broad  canal  which,  at  that  point,  made  junc- 
tion with  the  river,  our  friend  Junzo  watched  him  with 
amused  interest.  The  dusky  rodent  leisurely  disposed 
of  the  stray  grains,  and  then  followed  the  scattered  trail 
down  to  the  plank  gangway  that  led  from  the  shore  to 
the  side  of  a large  junk  that  had  brought  the  grain  as  the 
tribute  from  some  southern  Daimio,  and  from  which 
coolies  had  been  unloading  it  on  the  previous  day. 

Here  the  animal  paused  to  study  the  ground  before 
proceeding  further.  He  sat  upon  his  haunches  and  med- 
itatively pointed  his  nose  into  the  fresh  breeze  that 
came  through  the  rigging  of  the  vessel,  as  if  he  might 
be  scenting  the  gale  for  indications  of  lurking  danger, — 
for,  at  that  early  hour,  the  drowsy  sailors  had  not  yet 
shaken  off  their  slumbers.  Hearing  no  sound,  and 
gathering  fresh  courage  from  the  arrival  of  auxiliaries  in 
the  shape  of  four  other  rats,  the  rapacious  plunderer  led 
the  way  along  the  plank,  nibbling  the  white  grains  that 
had  been  trailed  along  the  entire  length,  until  he  came 
to  the  gunwales.  Here  it  was  deemed  judicious  to  order 
a reconnoissance,  and  the  inquisitive  eyes  of  the  five 
depredators  peered  over  the  side  of  the  junk  into  the 
mysterious  depths  of  the  cabin.  Emboldened  by  the 
silence  that  prevailed,  they  ventured  in  various  directions 


TOT 


io8 


Mito  Yashiki. 


about  the  decks,  tasting,  touching,  and  handling  every 
thing  eatable  that  fell  in  their  way.  At  length,  when 
successive  reinforcements  had  swelled  the  invading 
forces  to  nearly  three-score  rats,  the  ceaseless  pattering 
of  so  many  feet  finally  caused  the  captain  and  the  stew- 
ard simultaneously  to  arise  to  a full  comprehension  of 
the  situation,  and  they  promptly  hurled  four  pairs  of 
wooden  clogs  into  the  midst  of  the  bandits,  thereby 
causing  a violent  stampede  along  the  plank,  during  which 
retrogade  movement  several  of  them  fell  overboard  and 
were  well  soaked  before  they  could  swim  ashore. 

The  Sumida  River,  on  whose  banks  the  above  scene 
was  transacted,  was  a shallow  and  rapid  stream,  whose 
waters  came  from  the  distant  mountains  on  the  north. 
It  flowed  through  the  eastern  part  of  Yedo  from  north  to 
south,  and  emptied  its  turbid  flood  into  the  blue  waves 
of  the  bay.  The  banks  of  the  southern  portion  of  the 
river  were  lined  with  fire-proof  godowns,  hotels,  and 
tea-houses.  The  banks  of  the  northern  portion  were 
lined  with  gardens,  parks,  groves,  and  yashikis.  Numer- 
ous canals  branched  off  from  the  stream  into  all  parts 
of  the  city,  bearing  cargoes  to  the  godowns  scattered 
everywhere  along  their  banks.  Loads  of  fish,  vegeta- 
bles, and  fruit  came  up  the  river  and  were  borne  along 
these  water-courses  to  the  great  market  beside  Nihon- 
Bashi,  in  the  very  heart  of  the  city.  Five  long  wooden 
bridges  spanned  the  stream  and  connected  the  eastern 
with  the  western  portion  of  the  city.  The  eastern  portion 
was  built  upon  the  level  stretch  of  country  that  extended 
around  the  head  of  the  bay.  Although  this  part  of  the 
city  covered  much  ground,  yet  the  population  was  by  no 
means  dense,  inasmuch  as  large  sections  were  occupied 
by  th & yashikis  of  Daimios  and  by  the  extensive  grounds 
of  wealthy  merchants,  who  sought  this  quarter  of  the  city 
to  escape  the  rolling  seas  of  flame  that  periodically 
swept  the  transpontine  city  from  moat  to  bay.  In  the 
upper  part  of  this  section  were  the  Mukojima  gardens, 
that  stretched  along  the  river  bank  for  a mile  or  so,  em- 
bowering it  with  cloud-like  masses  of  cherry  blossoms 


Yedo. 


109 


during  the  spring.  Here  picnicked  the  citizens  amid 
gardens  filled  with  fragrant  shrubs  and  screened  by 
bamboo  and  box-wood  copses.  During  the  spring  and 
summer  multitudes  of  pleasure-seekers  came  hither  in 
boats  that  floated  up  on  the  waters  of  the  Sumida,  and 
were  moored  beneath  the  overarching  trees. 

Crossing  now  over  to  the  western  portion  of  the  city 
we  find  before  us  a long  strip  of  flat  country,  about  two 
miles  wide  and  stretching  many  miles  northward  and 
southward.  This  section  of  Yedo  was  densely  packed 
with  the  stores  and  houses  of  the  mercantile  classes. 
These  structures  were  low,  double-storied  affairs,  built 
entirely  of  wood  and  covered  with  tiles.  A network  of 
canals  extended  up  to  the  very  moat  of  the  castle,  form- 
ing, in  fact,  a connecting  link  between  it  and  the  waters 
of  the  river  and  bay.  Through  the  streets  poured  an 
incessant  stream  of  commerce  and  of  military  pageantry. 
The  principal  thoroughfare  ran  north  and  south.  It 
commenced  where  the  Tokaido  merged  in  Shinagawa, 
the  southern  suburb  of  the  city,  where  congregated  the 
brothels,  the  hotels  of  ill-repute,  and  the  abodes  of  the 
poor, — the  lowest  slums  of  Yedo.  Passing  northward 
three  or  four  miles,  this  great  thoroughfare  reached  the 
wealthy  section  of  the  city,  and  went  through  two  or 
three  miles  of  broad  and  well  kept  streets,  until  it  finally 
led  through  the  temple  grounds  and  the  parks  of  the 
northern  suburbs  into  the  Oshiukaido,  the  great  northern 
highway.  In  all  portions  were  incessant  bustle  and 
activity.  At  regular  intervals  along  the  various  streets 
were  heavy  wooden  barriers  that  could  have  been  speed- 
ily thrown  across  the  road  to  stop  travel  in  times  of 
sudden  tumult  or  alarm.  Guards  of  samurai  were  scat- 
tered everywhere  to  secure  order,  and  to  be  available  in 
sudden  emergencies.  Whenever  a fire  broke  out  in  any 
part  of  the  city,  a member  of  the  guard  would  climb  a 
tall  ladder,  and,  after  locating  the  conflagration,  would 
sound  the  alarm  on  a large  bell  suspended  there  between 
high  poles. 

The  sanitary  condition  of  Yedo  was  very  poor.  All 


I IO 


Mito  Yashiki. 


the  drainage  was  above  ground  in  shallow  gutters  along 
the  sides  of  the  street.  In  every  back-yard  was  a gar- 
bage heap  whereon  rats,  crows,  and  dogs  operated  as 
scavengers,  busily  dodging  fresh  accumulations  hurled 
from  the  kitchen  door  or  window.  But  for  their  serv- 
ices and  the  natural  excellence  of  the  climate,  pestilence 
would  have  spread  sad  havoc  in  the  city.  As  it  was, 
however,  small-pox  was  the  regular  winter  epidemic. 
“ Dirt  can  not  be  unhealthy,  else  how  can  the  Heratee 
live  ? ” exclaims  the  traveller  in  Herat.  The  magnificent 
climate  of  that  portion  of  Afghanistan  alone  keeps  the 
population  above  ground.  You  might  have  said  the 
same  thing  about  Yedo.  The  flushing  of  the  numerous 
canals  with  the  regular  ebb  and  flow  of  tides,  aided  great- 
ly in  keeping  the  city  healthy,  for  vast  quantities  of  filth 
daily  found  its  way  into  the  bay  through  those  well- 
washed  water-courses. 

We  now  come  to  the  castle,  the  centre-piece  of  Yedo. 
In  the  year  1853,  Yedo  was  emphatically  a city  of  war- 
riors, and  it  was  fitting  that  the  massive  castle  of  the 
Tokugawas  should  have  formed  its  grand  central  feature. 
Out  of  a population  numbering  about  fifteen  hundred 
thousand  souls,  fully  half  a million  of  them  filled  the 
numerous  yashikis  scattered  over  all  parts  of  the  city. 
While  the  commercial  part  of  the  metropolis  was  built 
upon  the  flat  lands  bordering  the  bay,  the  aristocratic 
portion  was  built  upon  the  summit  and  at  the  base  of  the 
commanding  semicircle  of  bluffs  that  swept  around  the 
western  and  the  northern  sides  of  the  citizens’  quarters. 
These  bluffs  rolled  away  toward  the  north,  the  west,  and 
the  south,  into  the  undulating  hill  country  constituting 
the  Yedo  plains. 

The  castle  was  built  partly  upon  the  bluffs  and  partly 
upon  the  lowlands,  and  it  covered  a vast  extent  of  terri- 
tory. Its  general  plan  was  a triple  system  of  circum- 
vallation,  one  inside  the  other.  The  innermost  system 
comprised  the  citadel,  which  formed  the  heart  of  this 
entire  fortress.  It  was  a moated  enclosure,  a few  hun- 
dred yards  in  circumference,  located  on  the  edge  of  the 


Yedo. 


1 1 1 


bluffs,  about  two  miles  from  the  waters  of  the  bay.  It 
was  surrounded  by  a precipitous  and  well  swarded  em- 
bankment, that  rose  to  a great  height,  and  whose  summit 
was  crowned  with  ramparts,  composed  of  a foundation  of 
small  rough-hewn  granite  blocks,  fifteen  feet  high,  sur- 
mounted by  white  plastered  walls  about  ten  feet  high, 
with  several  square,  double-storied  towers  at  the  various 
angles.  This  enclosure  was  entered  by  a wooden  bridge 
thrown  over  a deep  ravine.  The  second  system  of  cir- 
cumvallation  was  much  more  extensive,  and  enclosed 
within  its  moats  and  swarded  embankments  three  or  four 
miles  of  territory — the  western  half  encircling  a great  ex- 
panse of  bluffs,  and  the  eastern  half  descending  to  the 
lowlands  and  embracing  a large  portion  thereof  within 
the  waters  of  its  deep,  broad  moats.  At  every  angle,  and 
at  every  gateway,  was  a massive,  square,  double-storied 
tower,  built  with  immense  timbers,  and  plastered  in  white. 
Along  the  top  of  the  ramparted  embankments  were  pine 
trees,  that  stretched  their  grotesque  branches  over  the 
murky  waters  at  various  points,  thus  beautifying  the  for- 
bidding aspect  of  the  martial  surroundings. 

The  third  system  of  circumvallation  was  eleven  miles 
in  circumference  ! Commencing  on  the  northeast  at  the 
Sumida  River,  about  one  mile  below  the  cherry  groves 
of  Mukojima,  it  went  due  west  for  a mile  or  so  over  the 
lowlands,  and  then  pierced  the  bluffs  and  continued  on 
in  the  same  straight  line  through  some  tremendous  cut- 
tings in  the  hills,  until  it  arrived  at  a point  about  two 
miles  northwest  of  the  citadel ; it  then  turned  sharply 
southwest,  and  then  southward,  following  the  hills  for 
several  miles,  until  it  arrived  at  a point  about  two  miles 
southwest  of  the  citadel,  where  it  turned  due  east  and 
descended  into  the  lowlands,  and  finally  reached  a point 
near  the  bay  ; here  the  moat  abandoned  the  rampart 
and,  merging  into  devious  canals,  came  out  on  the  bay 
below  the  mouth  of  the  Sumida,  nearly  five  miles  south 
of  the  point  whence  it  started. 

If  you  will  draw  a line  due  north  and  south  through 
the  city,  just  beneath  the  eastern  ramparts  of  the  citadel, 


I I 2 


Mito  Yashiki. 


you  will  divide  this  immense  system  of  fortification  into 
two  nearly  equal  parts.  You  will  find  the  western  por- 
tion to  be  almost  entirely  upon  the  bluffs,  and  to  be  filled 
with  yashikis , government  offices,  and  the  residences  of 
the  aristocracy  ; and  you  will  find  the  eastern  portion  to 
be  entirely  upon  the  lowlands,  and  filled  with  the  marts 
of  trade  and  with  the  residences  of  the  mercantile  classes. 
You  will  readily  perceive  that  the  term  “ castle  ” is  mis- 
leading, and  that  we  have  before  us  something  like  the 
fortified  cities  of  modem  Europe.  A large  part  of  the 
city  is  built  within  the  second  and  the  third  system  of 
moats,  although  it  was  not  the  intention  of  the  govern- 
ment to  defend  the  commercial  quarter  at  all  in  time  of 
war,  but  to  wipe  it  away  by  fire  when  the  enemy  ap- 
proached near  enough  to  render  it  probable  that  they 
might  seek  shelter  therein.  The  citadel  and  the  aristo- 
cratic quarters,  however,  were  rendered  almost  impreg- 
nable against  feudal  assaults. 

Let  us  now  take  a glimpse  at  the  yashikis.  There 
were  over  two  hundred  of  these  feudal  structures,  vary- 
ing in  size  from  a walled  enclosure  of  fifteen  acres  to 
immense  “ compounds  ” of  more  than  two  hundred  acres. 
They  were  scattered  in  various  parts  of  the  city,  but  the 
majority  were  to  be  found  along  the  summit  and  at  the 
base  of  the  bluffs.  The  proud  and  wealthy  Daimio 
sought  the  highlands  that  circled  around  the  bay,  or  en- 
sconced himself  at  their  base,  while  the  noble  of  mod- 
erate income  sought  the  flatlands  and  the  grassy  mead- 
ows that  sloped  gently  down  to  the  sandy  shoals  of  the 
Sumida.  Upon  the  hills  north  of  the  castle  stretched  the 
superb  grounds  of  Kaga  Yashiki,  whose  lord  was  the 
wealthiest  nobleman  in  the  realm.  To  the  west  of  this, 
just  beyond  the  northwestern  angle  of  the  castle,  lay  the 
beautiful  and  stately  grounds  of  Mito  Yashiki.  Among 
the  hills  bordering  the  western  side  of  the  castle  were  the 
vast  grounds  of  Owari  Yashiki  ; and,  rolling  away  from 
the  southwestern  angle  of  the  castle,  extended  the  im- 
mense enclosure  of  Kii-shiu  Yashiki. 

The  three  Daimios  of  Mito,  Owari,  and  Kii  were  the 


Ycdo. 


ii3 

heads  of  the  most  illustrious  families  in  the  realm. 
These  families  were  founded  by  the  three  youngest  sons 
of  Tokugawa  Iyeyas,  who  endowed  them  with  the 
wealthy  provinces  bearing  the  above  names.  Kii-shiu 
was  the  bold  and  massive  promontory  that  jutted  into 
the  Pacific  Ocean  about  one  hundred  and  thirty  miles 
south  of  Kioto.  It  was  an  exceedingly  choice  Daimiate. 
The  province  of  Owari  lay  at  the  head  of  Owari  Bay, 
along  whose  shores  we  so  recently  journeyed.  And  the 
province  of  Mito  lay  on  the  shores  of  the  Pacific  Ocean, 
about  seventy  miles  northeast  of  Yedo  (Mito  was, 
properly  speaking,  the  capital  of  Hitachi  province,  but 
in  popular  parlance  the  name  of  the  capital  city  became 
synonymous  with  that  of  the  province).  These  three 
families  were  known  as  the  Gosanke  (three  illustrious 
families).  They  were  permitted  to  wear  the  same  her- 
aldic crest  that  the  Shogun  wore — three  inverted  mallow 
leaves  trefoiled  in  a circle.  And,  in  default  of  direct 
issue  in  the  Tokugawa  line,  an  heir  to  the  feudal  throne 
must  be  chosen  from  the  Gosanke. 

From  the  year  1603  a.d.  to  the  year  1716,  the  first 
seven  Tokugawa  Shoguns  were  direct  descendants  of 
Iyeyas.  The  direct  issue  then  becoming  extinct,  the 
Kii  family  was  called  upon  six  successive  times  to  fur- 
nish a Shogun  ; or,  expressing  the  idea  in  political 
parlance,  the  succession  having  once  gotten  into  that 
family,  the  influential  head  men  of  that  powerful  clan 
took  exceedingly  good  care  that  it  should  contiirue  to 
revolve  within  the  ring.  The  year  1853  found  the  sixth 
member  of  that  clan  just  seated  on  the  throne  of  the 
Tokugawas.  Thus  had  Mito  and  Owari  been  utterly 
neglected  in  the  matter  of  succession.  Mito  had  long 
felt  sore  on  this  point.  The  yashikis  of  these  three 
mighty  princes  formed  a cordon  that  guarded  the  castle 
most  effectually  on  the  western  side.  In  the  other 
sections  of  the  city  were  the  yashikis  of  minor  nobles, — 
equally  grand,  although  covering  less  ground  than  those 
of  the  Gosanke  and  of  Kaga.  Within  these  immense 
“ compounds  ” were  groves,  orchards,  landscape  gardens, 


Mito  Yashiki. 


”4 

lawns,  artificial  ponds,  gravelled  walks,  and  acres  of 
shrubbery  and  of  bamboo  copses.  Every  thing  was  laid 
out  on  the  most  munificent  scale. 

The  climate  of  this  region  was  very  fine.  The  winters 
were  mild  and  open.  Snow  appeared  once  or  twice 
during  the  season  and  usually  disappeared  before  midday 
under  the  powerful  rays  of  the  sun.  Shrubs  and  flowers 
lived  and  bloomed  outdoors  in  the  coldest  months,  and 
many  kinds  of  vegetables  and  several  varieties  of  grain 
were  cultivated  in  midwinter.  The  spring  season, 
though  occasionally  very  windy,  was  delightfully  balmy. 
The  summer,  though  hot,  was  cooled  at  all  times  with 
delicious  breezes.  And  the  autumnal  months  were  per- 
fection. 

Such  was  Yedo  in  the  year  1853  ; a city  of  enterprise, 
bustle,  and  excitement.  Merchandise  from  all  parts  of 
the  empire  streamed  into  it  at  all  seasons.  Junks, 
loaded  with  the  products  of  the  seashore  provinces, 
swarmed  up  the  bay  and  poured  into  the  Sumida,  where 
they  emptied  their  cargoes  into  the  warehouses  along  its 
banks.  Numberless  caravans  from  the  inland  provinces 
converged  here  and  jostled  each  other  in  the  streets. 
Between  sunrise  and  sunset  all  creation  seemed  to  be 
outdoors  enjoying  the  warm  sunshine  and  the  balmy  air. 
The  falcon  that  soared  above  on  passing  wing,  looked 
down  on  twenty-eight  square  miles  of  tiled  roofs,  waving 
groves,  emerald  lawns,  embowered  parks  and  temples, 
vast  gardens,  and  white  towers,  and  well  shaded  ramparts. 
Truly  a strange  and  a unique  sight  ! It  would  seem  as 
if  a people  who  had  lived  twenty-five  centuries  all  by 
themselves  possessed  many  intensely  human  traits  of 
character.  Have  not  the  feudal  times  of  Europe  been 
reproduced  with  startling  exactness  in  this  remote  corner 
of  the  earth  ? How  homelike  the  moat,  the  tower,  the 
heraldic  crest,  and  the  mounted  knights ! Can  you  think 
of  Tokugawa  lording  it  over  the  Daimios,  and  not  think 
of  Charlemagne  reducing  the  Frankish  dukes  and  barons 
to  subjection  ? 


CHAPTER  IX. 


MITO  YASHIKI. 

The  month  of  October,  1853,  was  drawing  to  a close, 
and  all  the  arrangements  had  been  completed  for  the 
reception  of  Tomokichi  and  Junzo  in  their  new  home  at 
Mito  Yashiki.  One  bright  sunshiny  morning  they 
donned  their  best  clothes  and  were  duly  escorted  by 
their  friend  Konishi  to  the  princely  residence  of  their 
liege  lord,  four  miles  away.  Leaving  the  hotel,  they 
sauntered  slowly  through  the  citizens’  quarter,  until  they 
came  to  the  bridge  that  led  within  the  second  moat. 
Here  they  were  duly  challenged  by  the  guard,  and,  upon 
Konishi’s  countersign,  were  admitted  within  the  massive 
gateway. 

Here  they  followed  the  broad,  well  gravelled  road  for 
a long  distance  in  its  devious  course  between  the  white 
walls  of  feudal  “compounds,”  through  vast  parade 
grounds,  beside  the  deep  waters  of  the  innermost  moat, 
and  finally  emerged  at  the  Kiji-Bashi  (Pheasants’  Bridge) 
into  the  yashiki  region,  that  stretched  on  from  that  point 
northward  to  the  third  moat.  They  walked  leisurely 
through  long,  wide,  well  kept  avenues,  that  were  flanked 
on  either  side  by  glistening  lines  of  barrack-like  walls,  in 
whose  heavily  barred  windows  and  in  whose  massive 
gateways  loitered  groups  of  samurai,  enjoying  the  sun- 
shine and  the  delicious  air  while  taking  in  the  outer 
world.  At  length  they  crossed  the  outermost  moat  by 
the  Suido-Bashi  (Aqueduct  Bridge)  and  found  themselves 
in  the  beautiful  hill  country  that  lay  to  the  north  ofv  the 
castle. 


Mito  Yashiki. 


1 16 

Near  this  bridge,  the  large  square  wooden  tube  of  the 
Kanda  aqueduct  crossed  the  moat  into  the  castle  and 
thence  into  the  city,  bearing  the  pure  water  of  the  Kanda 
region  to  the  people  of  the  metropolis.  Beneath  the 
ooze  of  the  moat  at  this  point  formerly  was  situated  the 
renowned  well  from  whose  crystal  springs  bubbled  forth 
waters  so  delicious  that  the  Shoguns  for  many  genera- 
tions were  accustomed  to  steep  their  tea  therein,  so  that 
the  immediate  locality  became  known  as  “ the  Waters  of 
the  August  Tea.”  Upon  the  right  hand,  the  moat  was 
carried  through  the  hills  by  the  largest  cutting  in  the 
entire  circuit.  It  was  designated  as  “ the  Cutting  of 
Weeping  Sendai,”  because,  according  to  the  legends,  an 
ancient  Daimio  of  Sendai  was  compelled  to  cut  it  at  his 
own  expense,  by  order  of  the  Shogun,  either  as  a penalty 
for  some  political  offence,  or  to  keep  him  from  squander- 
ing his  patrimony  in  profligate  carousals  within  the 
brothels  of  Yoshiwara.  Our  friends  tarried  long  here  to 
take  in  the  rugged  beauty  of  the  scenery  and  to  locate 
the  points  of  historic  interest. 

Leaving  Suido-Bashi,  turning  sharply  to  the  left  and 
following  the  moat  for  a short  distance,  they  soon  found 
themselves  in  front  of  Mito  Yashiki,  which  overlooked 
the  moat  at  its  northwestern  angle, — a location  of  rare 
beauty  and  excellence,  commanding  on  the  eastern  side 
a fine  view  of  the  result  of  the  labors  of  sorrowful 
Sendai,  and  on  the  southwestern  side  looking  down  a 
long  vista  of  moat,  stretching  through  the  hills  toward 
beautiful  Owari  Yashiki.  Along  this  stretch  of  peaceful 
waters  the  gorgeous  petals  of  the  pink  lotus  bloomed  in 
midsummer,  and  myriads  of  wild  ducks  skimmed  in  mid- 
winter. 

The  approach  of  our  company  was  not  announced  by 
couriers  and  blare  of  trumpet.  They  were  but  humble 
retainers  of  Mito,  and  feudal  etiquette  required  no 
ceremony  when  they  presented  themselves  for  duty  at 
the  mansion  of  their  master.  No  grand  reception 
awaited  the  vassal  who  fell  into  the  ranks  of  his  lord. 
The  white  walls  basked  serenely  in  the  sunshine,  and 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


1 1 7 


groups  of  samurai  were  passing  in  and  out  of  the  massive 
gateway  that  faced  the  moat.  The  shape  of  this  stately 
yashiki  was  almost  quadrangular.  The  southern  side 
was  somewhat  longer  than  the  northern  one,  so  that  it 
would  not  be  inapt  to  compare  its  general  shape  to  that 
portion  of  an  unfolded  fan  whereon  the  paper  is  pasted. 
The  entire  “ compound  ” was  surrounded  with  a high 
plastered  wall  covered  with  tiles  and  pierced  with  a 
massive  gateway  on  each  face.  To  the  right  and  to  the 
left  of  each  gateway  the  walls  were  enlarged  into  long 
lines  of  stately  barracks,  erected  on  massive  stone 
foundations,  and  constructed  of  mighty  uprights  and 
crossbeams,  surmounted  with  an  exceedingly  heavy  tile 
roof. 

These  barracks  must  have  been  nearly  forty  feet  deep. 
The  outside  was  plastered  in  white,  and  was  pierced  at 
intervals  of  every  ten  yards  or  so  with  large  windows 
protected  with  heavy  bars  of  wood  painted  in  gloomy 
black.  The  inner  side  of  the  barracks  opened  out  freely 
on  the  beauties  of  the  grounds  within.  In  order  to  carry 
out  the  idea  of  a castle,  a miniature  dry  moat  ran  along 
outside  of  the  foundations.  The  massive  gateways  were 
edifices  in  themselves.  They  were  double-storied,  and 
were  built  of  immensely-heavy  timbers,  and  were  covered 
with  exceedingly  heavy  tiled  roofs.  They  were  square 
in  shape.  Through  the  lower  story  passed  the  entrance. 
The  great  doors  were  plated  with  iron,  and  were  studded 
with  heavy  iron  knobs.  They  swung  inward  on  creak- 
ing pin-hinges  that  revolved  in  deep  holes  sunk  in  the 
mighty  beams  above  and  below.  At  night-time  they 
were  barred  with  square  plated  posts  slipped  into  im- 
mense iron  staples.  Upon  each  side  of  the  entrance 
were  the  rooms  of  the  guard.  The  upper  story  was  one 
vast  room  intended  for  archers  to  ply  their  shafts  through 
barred  windows  upon  enemies  trying  to  force  the  gate- 
way ; but,  as  there  had  been  a profound  peace  of  two 
centuries  throughout  the  empire,  the  room  was  only  used 
on  those  grand  occasions  when  the  coming  of  the  lord 
of  Mito  filled  to  overflowing  the  accommodations  of  the 


1 18 


Mito  Yashiki. 


yashiki,  and  rendered  it  necessary  to  crowd  the  retainers 
upstairs. 

Now  let  us  approach  the  main  gateway  with  our 
friends.  Entering  the  shadows  of  the  portal,  they  were 
received  with  great  cordiality  by  the  samurai  on  guard, 
who  ushered  them  into  the  reception  room  on  the  left, 
where  they  were  invited  to  slip  off  their  clogs  and  to 
brush  the  dust  from  their  clothing.  Tea  and  tobacco 
were  then  set  before  them,  while  word  was  sent  within 
to  the  private  apartments  of  the  captain  of  the  gate  that 
some  gentlemen  awaited  his  pleasure.  After  the  lapse 
of  a few  minutes,  they  were  ushered  through  a suite  of 
well  matted  rooms  occupied  by  the  gentlemen  of  the 
guard,  until  they  came  to  the  private  apartments  of  the 
captain  of  the  gate.  The  floor  of  his  reception  room,  or 
office,  was  covered  with  tatamis  of  exquisite  whiteness 
and  softness,  edged  with  broad  bindings  of  brocaded 
silk.  The  heavily  barred  windows  to  the  south  looked 
out  upon  the  moated  ramparts  of  the  castle.  The  warm 
rays  of  the  sun  shone  in  upon  a superb  porcelain  flower- 
pot that  had  been  placed  in  the  deep  recess  of  the  win- 
dow, and  which  contained  an  extremely  fragrant  bulbous 
plant,  bearing  clusters  of  beautiful  pink  blossoms  that 
contrasted  well  with  the  glorious  Ming  Blue  of  the  en- 
amelling. The  shojces  were  of  cream-colored  paper,  and 
were  set  in  narrow  frames  lacquered  in  glistening  black. 
The  designs  thereon  were  from  nature,  and  represented 
flowers,  birds,  mountains,  and  cascades.  The  ceiling  was 
in  panels  of  highly  polished  woods  without  any  decora- 
tion except  the  finely  developed  graining. 

The  room  was  quite  bare  of  furniture.  On  one  side 
stood  an  elegantly  lacquered  sword-rack,  and  upon  the 
other  side  loomed  up  a tall  and  narrow  Dutch  clock, 
which  the  indulgence  of  the  Bakufu  had  allowed  some 
former  lord  of  Mito  to  import  through  the  Hollanders 
at  Deshima.  The  shojces  on  the  north  side  of  the  room 
had  been  removed,  and  you  could  look  out  upon  a broad 
veranda  and  upon  the  luxuriant  acres  of  the  vast  en- 
closure. Upon  the  edge  of  the  veranda  were  several  ex- 


Milo  Yashiki. 


i 19 


quisite  porcelain  flower-pots  of  large  dimensions.  One 
was  broad-brimmed,  of  a square  shape,  of  a deep-blue 
color  stamped  with  the  gilded  crest  of  Tokugawa  on  each 
face,  and  contained  a small  Ningpo  orange  shrub  that 
was  loaded  down  with  the  peculiar  egg-shaped  fruit  of 
that  variety  of  orange.  Another  pot  was  hexagonal  in 
shape,  and  was  tall  like  a jar.  The  groundwork  of  the 
enamelling  was  pure  white,  variegated  with  a delicate 
spray  of  wistaria  in  natural  colors  entwined  on  its  glossy 
surface.  It  contained  some  variety  of  the  iris,  whose 
light-blue  blossoms  contrasted  beautifully  with  the  laven- 
der-colored buds  of  the  wistaria.  Another  pot  was 
shaped  like  a boat,  and  contained  a rare  species  of 
dwarfed  pine  that  had  been  so  skilfully  trimmed  that  it 
resembled  the  masts  and  sails  of  a boat  under  full  sail. 

A broad  road,  whitened  with  pulverized  shells  and 
mixed  with  soft  fine  sand,  led  from  the  southern  gateway, 
bearing  to  the  left,  around  toward  the  western  portal, 
thence  up  toward  the  northern  one,  where  it  met  a simi- 
lar road  that  had  started  from  the  same  point  on  the 
south,  and  had  borne  around  by  the  right  toward  the 
eastern  gateway,  and  thence  to  the  northern  one.  A third 
road  led  up  through  lawns  and  groves  toward  the  palace 
of  the  lord.  Its  stately  roof  could  be  seen  among  the 
trees  on  the  higher  and  more  commanding  ground  at  the 
northern  end  of  the  “ compound.”  Groves,  shrines, 
target-ranges,  fish-ponds,  deep  wells,  hillocks,  artificial 
landscapes,  and  gardens  were  scattered  in  all  parts  of 
the  extensive  yashiki  grounds. 

Near  the  palace  were  many  acres  devoted  to  a mag- 
nificent grove  of  rare  and  beautiful  trees,  and  a beautiful 
garden  containing  rare  and  costly  plants,  many  of  which 
had  been  imported  through  the  Dutch  and  Chinese  mer- 
chants in  Nagasaki.  Just  in  the  rear  of  the  barracks 
were  extensive  gardens  of  exquisite  beauty,  filled  with 
shrubbery,  flower-beds,  and  even  vegetable-beds.  A 
beautiful  hedge  of  boxwood  and  hollyhock  enclosed  the 
ground  back  of  the  various  barracks,  thus  shutting  off 
the  road  and  ensuring  privacy.  These  large  tracts  of 


1 20 


Mito  Yets  Juki. 


land  were  laid  out  with  sanded  walks,  landscape  scenery, 
clumps  of  bamboos,  rniiniature  fish-ponds,  and  flower- 
beds. Beside  the  various  gates,  that  led  through  the 
hedgerows  into  the  road,  were  the  picturesque  lodges  of 
the  gardeners.  Throughout  the  gardens  were  stately 
jars  and  flower-pots  containing  rare  and  beautiful  plants. 
Sea-shells  and  white  pebbles  lined  the  walks,  and  were 
occasionally  piled  up  in  grotesque  little  rockeries  tufted 
with  moss  and  ferns. 

Such  was  the  scene  that  spread  out  like  a scroll  through 
the  shojees  opening  out  upon  the  veranda.  In  a few 
minutes  the  captain  made  his  appearance.  He  was  a 
tall,  stately  gentleman,  about  forty  years  of  age.  As  he 
entered  the  room  the  rustling  of  his  silken  hakama  (frock) 
sounded  like  the  breeze  among  the  leaves.  All  four 
gentlemen  prostrated  themselves  upon  the  tatamis  in 
profound  salutation — the  humbler  in  rank  doing  rever- 
ence to  the  superior  officer,  while  the  superior  in  rank 
(lest  he  be  deemed  haughty  and  ignorant  of  etiquette) 
bowed  equally  low  in  response  to  the  obeisances. 
“ Honored  sir,”  said  Konishi,  when  the  oft-repeated 
compliments  had  been  duly  exchanged,  “the  gentlemen 
from  Yamashiro,  whom  you  ordered  me  to  bring  into 
your  worshipful  presence,  are  now  with  me  praying  for 
an  interview  with  you  in  reference  to  their  connecting 
themselves  with  the  service  of  our  most  august  master, 
the  lord  of  Mito.  You  will  remember  that  in  your  inter- 
view with  my  unworthy  self  yesterday  that  you  appointed 
this  hour  for  the  ceremony  of  an  introduction.” 

“ You  indeed  state  the  case  most  truly,”  replied  Captain 
Matsuda,  bowing  low,  “ and  I now  most  respectfully  wel- 
come these  worthy  gentlemen  to  the  service  of  our  august 
master.  Honored  sirs,  have  you  been  long  on  the  way 
from  Kioto  ? ” 

“Your  unworthy  servants  have  been  nearly  twenty-two 
days  on  the  journey,”  replied  the  young  men. 

“ And  in  what  way  did  you  travel  ? ” continued  the 
officer,  fastening  his  clear  brown  eyes  upon  their  feat- 
ures with  a kindly  yet  keen  gaze. 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


1 2 1 


“We  insignificant  youths  travelled  entirely  on  foot,” 
they  replied. 

“ Truly  a most  soldierly  method  of  journeying  ! ” ex- 
claimed the  captain. 

Here  the  captain  clapped  his  hands  for  an  attendant 
in  the  adjoining  room  to  bring  in  tea  and  tobacco.  The 
party  now  became  very  sociable,  and  discussed  at  con- 
siderable length  the  incidents  of  the  overland  trip  and 
the  features  of  life  in  the  great  metropolis. 

“Most  estimable  sirs,”  said  Captain  Matsuda,  taking 
up  his  pen  and  preparing  to  make  entries  in  a large  book 
that  lay  open  in  his  lap,  “ it  has  been  arranged  that  for 
the  present  you  §hall  be  attached  to  the  guard  of  this 
southern  gate,  under  my  direct  command  ; and  I may 
truly  say  that  two  more  soldierly  gentlemen  have  rarely 
come  under  my  orders.  All  that  Mr.  Konishi  has  urged 
in  your  favor,  I find  to  be  entirely  accurate.  If  you  will 
now  kindly  favor  me  with  your  full  names,  the  place  of 
your  birth,  your  respective  ages,  and  a few  items  about 
your  family  history,  I will  enter  them  in  this  ledger,  and 
will  then  see  to  it  that  they  are  duly  transcribed  to  the 
great  register  of  our  clan. 

“You  are  perhaps  aware  that  our  clan  has  been  with- 
out its  proper  head  for  the  space  of  nearly  thirteen  years. 
Our  noble  lord  had  become  imbued  with  the  scholastic 
distinction  between  the  Emperor  and  the  Shogun,  and 
urged  the  Bakufu  to  surrender  their  usurped  prerogatives 
into  the  imperial  hands,  whence  Tokugawa  had  snatched 
them  two  centuries  ago.  But,  very  naturally,  the  Bakufu 
failed  to  see  the  matter  in  that  light,  and  notified  him  to 
abstain  from  his  wild  schemes.  But  he  persisted  in  his 
efforts  to  arouse  public  sentiment  in  favor  of  a reinstate- 
ment of  the  Emperor  in  his  ancient  power.  He  even 
went  so  far  as  to  melt  down  the  monastery  bells  into  can- 
non in  order  to  wage  war  against  the  Shogun.  When 
matters  had  been  carried  to  that  extreme,  the  Bakufu 
bestirred  themselves  and  promptly  quashed  the  revolt, 
and  ordered  him  into  close  confinement,  where  he  has 
remained  until  the  present  time.  The  son  who  has  rep- 


122 


Mito  Yashiki. 


resented  him  during  these  years  is  now  in  Mito,  so  that 
there  is  no  prince  at  present  in  our  yashiki.  Some  of  the 
members  of  the  family,  however,  and  some  of  the  ladies 
of  the  household,  are  up  at  the  palace  ; but  they  have 
little  control  over  affairs  here.  Practically,  the  command- 
ant of  the  yashiki , Mr.  Hattori,  is  managing  matters  in 
the  absence  of  our  liege  lord.  We  will  therefore  report 
ourselves  to  him  this  afternoon. 

“ Mr.  Konishi,  although  in  the  employ  of  the  Bakufu 
as  interpreter  of  barbarian  documents,  is  yet  a sojourner 
within  our  gates,  and  occupies  an  apartment  with  his 
father  in  the  picturesque  lodge  west  of  the  palace.  He 
has  requested  me  to  allow  you  to  occupy  an  apartment 
adjoining  his.  As  a member  of  my  guard  you  should  be 
quartered  in  one  of  the  rooms  in  this  line  of  barracks, 
but  I see  no  objection  to  your  reaping  the  advantage  of 
having  a friend  at  court,  and  so  long  as  you  report 
promptly  for  duty  at  midday,  I see  no  reason  why  you 
should  not  stay  with  him.  And  now,  gentlemen,  as  I 
have  finished  my  clerioal  duties,  if  you  will  honor  me 
with  your  presence  at  my  humble  midday  meal,  we  will, 
after  that,  go  around  the  barracks  and  the  grounds,  and 
will  report  for  duty  at  the  office  of  the  commandant.” 

So  saying,  Mr.  Matsuda  clapped  his  hands  for  an  at- 
tendant to  bring  in  the  repast.  Throughout  the  empire 
the  meals  of  all  classes  were  substantially  the  same  on 
all  ordinary  occasions.  Boiled  rice  constituted  fully 
ninety  per  cent,  of  every  meal  year  in  and  year  out.  The 
only  difference  between  the  meals  of  the  wealthy  and 
those  of  the  poor  lay  in  the  variety  of  the  little  side 
dishes.  Where  the  lower  classes  could  only  afford  a few 
morsels  of  broiled  fish  or  of  salt  radish,  the  upper  classes 
would  have  four  or  five  little  side  dishes  containing  bean- 
paste,  salted  shrimps,  sea-weed,  poached  eggs,  brook 
trout,  pickled  fruits,  and  vegetables  of  various  descrip- 
tions. Centuries  of  Buddhism  had  practically  abolished 
a meat  diet.  As  a matter  of  course,  state  dinners  were 
very  elaborate,  and  comprised  forty  or  fifty  courses, 
drawing  on  sea,  air,  and  land  for  materials. 


Mi  to  Yas/iiki. 


The  meal  now  being  served  was  quite  martial  in  its 
simplicity.  Before  each  guest  was  placed  a tiny  lac- 
quered stand,  whereon  stood  little  bowls  containing 
string-bean  emulsion  somew'hat  resembling  soup,  tiny 
clams  boiled  in  soy , and  delicate  morsels  of  boiled 
chicken.  Little  bottles  of  warm  sake  were  also  provided. 
The  attendant  dished  out  the  steaming  rice  quite  as 
daintily  as  any  lady  would  have  done.  The  conversation 
grew  quite  animated  under  the  influence  of  the  warm 
beverage,  and  a great  variety  of  topics  rotated  rapidly 
under  discussion,  for  the  natives  were  always  exceedingly 
talkative  while  eating. 

Soon  after  the  repast,  Mr.  Matsuda  took  his  long  sword 
from  the  rack,  and,  thrusting  it  into  his  girdle,  led  the 
way  on  the  tour  of  inspection.  Reaching  the  gateway, 
he  pointed  out  the  first  chamber  as  the  one  to  be  used 
by  them  as  an  office  when  on  duty.  Just  back  of  the 
gateway,  upon  the  right  hand  and  upon  the  left  hand, 
stood  massive,  square,  deep-blue  porcelain  flow'er-pots, 
containing  small  orange-trees,  whose  glossy  dark  green 
leaves  and  whose  golden  fruit  rustled  and  nodded  with 
every  passing  breeze.  Strolling  leisurely  to  the  right 
hand,  they  passed  the  hedgerows  that  enclosed  the  gar- 
dens which  lay  behind  the  barracks.  After  that  they 
took  no  particular  course,  but  rambled  leisurely  along, 
enjoying  the  delicious  sunshine  and  the  balmy  air.  They 
frequently  met  squads  of  samurai , who  bowed  half-wray 
to  the  ground  in  salutation  of  the  captain.  Around  the 
lawms  were  spruce  pines  and  boxwood  shrubs  that  had 
been  trimmed  to  represent  herons,  storks,  turtles,  stags, 
and  junks  under  full  sail. 

In  one  place  our  party  halted  in  the  shadows  of  a 
stately  grove  to  watch  some  gorgeous  pheasants  that 
were  being  reared  by  the  prince.  In  another  part  of  the 
grounds  they  watched  with  great  interest  the  majestic 
peacocks  and  the  speckled  guinea-fowds  that  some  former 
prince  had  imported  through  the  Dutch.  In  one  place 
where  the  greensward  sloped  tow'ard  the  warm  and  sunny 
south,  there  had  been  constructed  quite  a menagerie. 


Mito  Y as  Juki. 


1 24 

There  were  monkeys  tied  to  posts  ; there  were  myriads 
of  birds  of  numerous  varieties,  singing  and  chattering 
away  in  wire  cages  ; there  were  little  spaniels  known  as 
“chins”;  and  there  was  a small  black  bear  from  Yesso 
shut  up  in  an  iron  cage,  and  looking  very  hungrily  at 
some  deer  roaming  about  the  park.  In  another  place 
mounted  archers  were  riding  at  full  speed  down  a long 
avenue,  and  delivering  blunted  arrows  at  sundry  luckless 
curs  chained  at  regular  intervals  along  the  route.  The 
snarling  and  the  howling  of  the  luckless  brutes  abun- 
dantly testified  to  their  hearty  disapprobation  of  the  pro- 
ceedings. 

Just  before  turning  their  steps  toward  the  lodge  of 
their  friend,  they  sauntered  through  the  choicest  part  of 
the  grounds, — the  far-famed  botanical  gardens  of  the 
lord  of  Mito.  This  was  the  costliest  and  the  most  beau- 
tiful collection  of  trees,  shrubs,  and  plants  to  be  found 
within  the  empire,  and  they  covered  many  acres  of 
ground.  No  money  had  been  spared  by  the  princes  of 
Mito  in  making  this  collection.  Rare  and  beautiful  pro- 
ductions from  all  parts  of  the  empire  had  been  gathered 
there.  Shrubs  and  plants  from  China,  from  Batavia,  and 
from  Loo-Choo  had  been  imported  regardless  of  ex- 
pense. The  place  was  a veritable  paradise,  and  our 
friends  lingered  long  amid  the  shade  and  the  sunshine 
of  the  enrapturing  locality,  until  the  lengthening  shadows 
of  the  stately  camphor-trees  warned  them  of  the  speedy 
approach  of  eventide. 

Then  they  extricated  themselvelves  from  the  labyrinth 
of  flowers  and  trees,  and  turned  their  steps  toward  that 
wing  of  the  palace  where  the  commandant  had  his  head- 
quarters. The  building  was  surrounded  on  all  sides 
with  exquisite  gardens  and  waving  trees.  A hedge  of 
dense  boxwood,  trimmed  square,  kept  intrusion  at  a 
respectable  distance  from  the  precincts  of  the  palace.  A 
long  covered  way  led  from  the  wicket-gate  in  the  hedge 
up  toward  the  main  entrance  of  the  magnificent  structure. 
The  roof  of  this  shed  was  covered  with  thin  sheets  of 
bronze,  and  it  was  sustained  by  immense  square  columns 


Milo  Yashiki. 


125 


of  kayakt  wood  carved  with  chaste  arabesque  designs. 
Its  farther  end  merged  in  a stately  vestibule,  from  which 
numerous  doors  opened  into  the  grand  chambers  of  the 
palace.  This  edifice,  like  all  similar  structures  in  Japan, 
was  but  one  story  in  height  ; but  that  single  lofty  story, 
when  surmounted  by  an  exceedingly  massive  roof,  caused 
the  white  gable  ends  to  loom  far  above  the  trees. 

The  entire  underlying  idea  of  a yashiki  was  that  of  a 
camp.  Every  thing  was  presumed  to  be  characterized 
by  military  simplicity.  Of  course,  those  who  could 
afford  it,  made  every  thing  as  elaborate  as  possible  ; but, 
even  then,  the  air  of  simplicity  that  characterized  every 
thing  was  most  noticeable  to  the  eye  of  the  foreigner. 
The  immense  structure  was  surrounded  by  a broad 
veranda,  with  floors  so  highly  polished  that  every  bit  of 
graining  stood  out  with  utmost  clearness.  The  many 
suites  of  lofty  chambers  that  opened  from  the  verandas 
into  the  great  building  were  uniformly  matted  with  soft 
white  tatamis  well  bound  with  silken  borders.  Th eshojces 
were  magnificent  works  of  art,  and  were  set  in  wide  lac- 
quered frames  that  slid  in  metallic  grooves  above  and 
below.  Yet  the  rooms  were  comparatively  destitute  of 
furniture.  Some  chaste  and  costly  pieces  of  bronzes, 
some  superb  specimens  of  porcelain,  and  some  exquisite 
articles  of  lacquer-ware  were  scattered  tastefully  about 
in  various  nooks  and  comers,  either  upon  little  ebony 
stands  or  upon  the  floor.  An  occasional  rug  or  fur-skin 
would  trip  you  up  with  its  clumsy  folds.  In  the  innu- 
merable closets  was  a vast  assortment  of  books,  silken 
garments,  bedding,  and  general  household  effects.  On 
all  sides  the  rooms  looked  out  upon  beautiful  gardens 
filled  with  shrubbery,  flower-beds,  and  weird  spruce-pine 
and  boxwood  figures  of  birds,  fishes,  and  animals.  From 
the  ceiling  of  the  lofty  veranda  there  dangled  threads  of 
copper  wire  suspending  bird-cages  containing  the  mourn- 
ful-voiced nightingales  of  Awomori,  and  the  sweet-toned 
larks  of  Nambu.  Half  a dozen  chins  romped  around  the 
verandas,  barking  shrilly  at  every  fancied  intrusion. 

Our  friends  entered  the  vestibule,  and  were  ushered 


Mito  Yashiki. 


1 26 

into  a suite  of  apartments  on  the  left-hand  side,  where 
dwelt  the  commandant  of  Mito  Yashiki  with  his  family. 
It  was  only  the  favored  few  that  were  allowed  to  bring 
their  families  from  home.  And  as  the  samurai  were 
thus  compelled  to  leave  their  families  in  their  native 
provinces,  the  result  was  that  the  multitudes  of  retainers 
in  the  various  j yashikis  were  leading  the  lives  of  gay  and 
merry  bachelors — each  one  being  a law  unto  himself, 
and  doing  that  which  seemed  right  in  his  own  eyes. 

The  attendant  ushered  our  party  into  a large  and  airy 
chamber,  where  sat  a pretty  young  lady  busily  working 
on  a piece  of  embroidery.  She  was  sitting  on  the  floor, 
and  a low  wooden  frame  held  the  drab-colored  piece  of 
silk  that  she  was  embroidering.  She  greeted  the  gentle- 
men with  dignified  obeisances,  and  hastened  to  communi- 
cate their  message  to  her  father,  who  was  busily  at  work 
in  his  private  office.  In  a moment  she  returned  with  the 
request  that  the  gentlemen  be  ushered  into  his  presence. 
It  was  an  airy  room  that  opened  out  upon  the  garden, 
and  it  was  littered  up  with  books  and  documents  lying 
about  on  the  floor,  whereon  he  was  sitting  before  a small 
lacquered  stand  utilized  as  a desk.  He  saluted  his 
guests  with  old-time  courtesy  and  heartiness,  and  ex- 
pressed great  pleasure  at  the  safe  arrival  of  our  .auxil- 
iaries from  Kioto,  whom  he  keenly  but  politely  scanned 
during  the  intervals  of  the  conversation  that  ensued. 
He  duly  entered  their  names  in  his  register,  and  con- 
firmed their  appointment  as  guardsmen  of  the  southern 
gateway  under  the  direct  command  of  Captain  Matsuda  ; 
and  he  further  informed  them  that  for  the  present  the 
stipend  that  had  been  assigned  to  them  would  be  five 
rios  per  month  apiece,  which  would  be  duly  transmitted 
to  them  on  the  last  day  of  each  month  through  their 
captain. 

This  sum,  by  the  way,  equalled  about  five  dollars  per 
month  ; but  it  possessed  a purchasing  capacity  in  that 
country  equal  to  the  purchasing  capacity  of  fifty  dollars 
in  the  United  States,  so  that  our  young  friends  were  pro- 
vided with  incomes  about  equal  to  those  allowed  by  the 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


127 


United  States  government  to  the  West  Point  cadets, — a 
sum  amply  sufficient  to  keep  them  comfortably.  With 
great  pleasure  he  granted  permission  for  them  to  take  up 
their  quarters  in  the  Konishi  lodge.  Then,  for  half  an 
hour  or  so,  the  conversation  branched  out  upon  general 
topics  of  interest,  and  was  brought  to  a close  by  the  vis- 
itors excusing  themselves  on  the  ground  of  the  lateness 
of  the  hour. 

Leaving  the  palace,  they  went  toward  the  western  part 
of  the  “compound  ” and  finally  reached  the  picturesque 
little  house  occupied  by  Mr.  Konishi.  It  was  on  a com- 
manding spot  and  was  surrounded  by  a beautiful  garden 
hedged  in  by  boxwood  shrubbery.  The  elder  Konishi, 
his  son,  a servant,  and  a gardener  were  the  only  occu- 
pants. At  this  point  the  kindly  captain  took  a polite 
leave  of  his  companions  and  hastened  back  to  his  post. 
A well  gravelled  walk  led  up  to  the  house.  It  was 
single-storied  and  contained  four  rooms  surrounded  by  a 
veranda.  A little  extension  at  the  back  contained  the 
kitchen  and  the  room  for  the  two  servants.  Two  rooms 
faced  to  the  warm  southern  exposure.  One  of  them  was 
occupied  by  the  Konishis,  and  the  other  was  allotted  to 
the  two  brothers  The  two  rooms  behind  these  were 
used  as  a dining-room  and  as  a reception  room.  It  did 
not  take  long  for  our  friends  to  make  themselves  quite 
at  home.  The  greeting  of  Mr.  Konishi  was  most  cordial 
and  fatherly  ; the  little  bundles  had  already  been  sent  up 
from  the  hotel ; the  contents  thereof  were  speedily  un- 
packed and  stowed  away  in  the  little  closets  ; and  then 
came  the  evening  meal  and  a long  evening  of  gossiping 
relaxation.  And  here,  having  seen  to  it  that  our  friends 
have  been  comfortably  settled  in  Mito  Yashiki,  let  us 
bid  them  good-night. 


CHAPTER  X. 


LIFE  AT  MITO  YASHIKI. 

On  the  morning  following  the  events  chronicled  in  the 
last  chapter,  Tomokichi  was  up  bright  and  early.  He 
slid  back  the  shojee  and  stepped  out  on  the  veranda.  The 
air  was  clear  and  delightfully  cool  ; and,  although  the 
trees  were  placed  so  as  to  shade  that  side  of  the  house 
from  the  powerful  rays  of  the  sun,  yet  through  the 
leaves  there  was  a view  that  stretched  beyond  moat, 
rampart,  and  hill,  and  took  within  its  scope  the  snowy 
crest  of  Fujisan  eighty  miles  to  the  southward.  The 
rosy  dawn  stole  stealthily  upon  the  scene  and  speedily 
merged  the  pinkish  hues  of  opening  day  in  the  glorious 
blue  of  full-blown  morn.  There  was  no  sound  to  break 
the  stillness  of  what  was  really  a Sabbath  morning  ; but 
in  that  land  no  such  day  had  ever  been  known,  for  the 
native  calendar  had  been  copied  after  that  of  China, 
which  began  each  year  upon  some  newly  selected  day  in 
February  and  divided  it  into  twelve  months,  thus  utterly 
ignoring  the  weekly  division  of  time.  For  over  two 
thousand  years  the  months  had  rolled  in  and  out  without 
the  slightest  suggestion  of  a Sabbath-day. 

Soon  the  mournful  blare  of  a large  Chinese  horn 
awoke  the  echoes  of  the  place  and  notified  the  guards  to 
fling  back  the  gates  and  to  commence  the  duties  of  the 
day.  Breakfast  was  served  at  seven  o’clock,  and,  after 
that,  the  younger  Konishi  hastened  off  to  his  duties  at 
the  Bakufu,  while  the  elder  Konishi  volunteered  to 
escort  his  young  guests  to  the  chrysanthemum  show  at 
Sugamo,  a village  of  florists  about  a mile  or  so  among 
the  hills  northwest  of  the  yashiki.  Strolling  out  through 

12S 


Life  at  Mito  YasJiiki. 


1 29 

the  western  gateway,  they  leisurely  rambled  through 
lanes,  cherry  groves,  orchards,  and  gardens  until  they 
reached  the  floral  exhibition  of  the  beautiful  village. 
Everybody  appeared  to  have  turned  florist  as  if  infected 
with  the  horticultural  passion  of  the  Mito  princes.  On 
every  side  were  long  rows  of  gorgeous  chrysanthemums 
blooming  in  pink,  white,  red,  violet,  orange,  blue,  purple, 
yellow,  and  lavender.  How  gay  and  inspiring  the  scene ! 
Every  yard  bloomed  with  the  varied  glories  of  the 
imperial  crest.  Busy  gardeners  zealously  trimmed  the 
plants  and  carefully  plucked  the  dead  leaves  and  twigs. 
Mothers,  with  babies  tied  on  their  backs,  blithely  flitted 
about  sprinkling  water  from  tiny  watering-pots.  Chil- 
dren, chickens,  and  puppies  tumbled  about  the  grassy 
streets  in  high  glee  under  the  warm  sunshine,  and  earn- 
ing well  merited  rebukes  when  they  romped  dangerously 
near  the  treasured  flowers. 

It  was  still  a long  time  before  noon  when  our  sight- 
seers had  finished  their  inspection  of  these  floral  beauties, 
and  it  was  decided  to  return  by  a roundabout  route 
that  would  lead  through  the  magnificent  grounds  of  some 
celebrated  Buddhist  monasteries.  Fully  two  hours  were 
spent  in  this  delightful  ramble  through  temple  parks. 
As  they  strolled  slowly  homeward  they  passed  a hill 
which  Mr.  Konishi  designated  as  Kirishitan-zaka  (Chris- 
tian slope),  a name  that  at  once  excited  the  interest  of 
Tomokichi. 

“ What  is  the  origin  of  so  extraordinary  a name  ? ” 
inquired  he  of  his  guide. 

“Oh!  perhaps  that  name  does  sound  very  strange  to 
you  Yamashiro  folks,”  was  the  reply. 

“ I will  explain  the  matter,  for  there  is  quite  a history 
connected  with  this  place.  Know,  then,  that  many 
years  after  the  extirpation  of  the  foul  and  dangerous  sect 
of  Kirishitans  (Christians)  by  our  matchless  Iyeyas  there 
came  to  the  southernmost  shores  of  our  empire  several 
priests  of  that  proscribed  sect.  They  desired  to  secure 
renown  and  martyrdom  by  attempting  to  re-establish 
their  accursed  creed  on  our  sacred  soil.  They  came 


130 


Mito  Yashiki. 


from  the  south  on  some  foreign  ship,  and,  when  near  the 
coast,  they  embarked  in  a small  boat  and  were  put 
ashore.  The  ship  then  spread  its  broad  wings  and  fled 
southward,  leaving  the  reckless  voyagers  to  their  fate. 
Had  these  fellows  landed  in  the  days  of  Iyeyas,  they 
would  certainly  have  been  slain  without  mercy.  But  the 
lapse  of  several  generations  of  profound  peace  had 
cooled  the  fierce  passions  of  the  government  to  that  ex- 
tent that  they  were  not  adverse  to  quietly  gratifying 
their  curiosity  about  this  strange  religion  and  about  the 
people  among  whom  it  prevailed,  so  long  as  there  ap- 
peared no  danger  of  a revival  of  Christianity.  They 
accordingly  sent  word  to  the  southern  Daimio,  who  was 
holding  the  prisoners  subject  to  the  government’s  de- 
cision, to  select  two  or  three  of  the  most  intelligent  of 
these  foreigners  and  to  forward  them  in  closed  cages 
under  strong  guard  to  Yedo,  but  to  behead  the  other 
prisoners  at  once,  and  to  make  public  proclamation  of 
the  execution  in  order  that  the  peopje  might  know  that 
those  who  trifled  with  the  terrors  of  the  law  could  not  do 
so  with  impunity. 

“ Thus  the  government  played  a double  game — on  the 
one  hand  striking  a wholesome  terror  into  the  people, 
and  on  the  other  hand  clandestinely  securing  some 
intelligent  and  well  informed  foreigners  to  catechise  at 
leisure  in  regard  to  their  religion,  customs,  language,  and 
history.  Upon  the  arrival  of  these  priests  at  Yedo  they 
were  taken  to  this  hill  and  were  subjected  to  a long  and 
careful  examination  upon  all  matters  relating  to  foreign 
countries.  Many  days  and  months  were  devoted  to 
these  enquiries  and  the  results  were  noted  down  accu- 
rately and  were  subsequently  published  in  several  volumes 
for  circulation  among  government  officials.  There  is  a 
set  of  this  work  in  my  possession,  which,  as  you  appear 
interested  in  the  subject,  I will  place  at  your  disposal  on 
my  return  home.  The  responses  of  these  learned 
foreigners  gave  such  satisfaction,  and  they  appeared  so 
full  of  valuable  information,  that  the  government  gave 
them  a house  on  the  slope  of  this  hill  and  allowed  them 


Life  at  Mito  Yashiki. 


131 

to  live  there  many  years  in  the  quiet  enjoyment  of  their 
peculiar  religious  practices  until  the  various  dates  of 
their  natural  death,  which  occurred  about  one  hundred 
and  fifty  years  ago.  They  were  buried  in  the  grounds 
of  the  Buddhist  cemetery  just  behind  us.  This  is  a 
strange  history.  It  is  said  that  in  their  room  they  had  a 
large  red  cross  painted  upon  the  shojee,  and  that  they 
would  kneel  daily  before  it  and  chant  mysterious  incan- 
tations and  prayers.  Oh!  sirs,  it  was  indeed  a strange 
creed,  and  the  people  greatly  feared  their  magic  spells 
and  shady  arts.  They  appear,  however,  to  have  led  just 
and  pure  lives  and  to  have  died  amid  general  regrets.” 

“ Did  these  priests  leave  any  writings,  or  books,  or 
doctrinal  essays  ? ” inquired  Tomokichi. 

“ I believe  there  were  a few  religious  books  and  some 
manuscripts  found  in  their  possession,”  replied  Mr. 
Konishi. 

“ Do  you  remember  what  became  of  these  documents  ? ” 
was  the  eager  inquiry. 

“ I understand  that  the  Bakufu,  according  to  their 
custom,  pounced  upon  every  thing  just  as  soon  as  the 
breath  had  gone  out  of  their  bodies,  and  put  every  thing 
under  seal  subject  to  future  inspection,”  was  the  reply. 
“ After  the  burial,  an  investigating  committee  was  ap- 
pointed by  the  Shogun  to  look  over  the  things,  and  to 
destroy  whatever  they  might  consider  useless  or  danger- 
ous. These  gentlemen  worried  over  the  documents  for 
several  months,  and  finally  admitted  that  the  matter 
therein  contained  quite  surpassed  their  comprehension, 
and  recommended  that  the  whole  matter  be  referred  to 
the  noted  scholars  of  Mito,  who  were  very  fond  of  all 
kinds  of  learning.  This  was  accordingly  done,  and  the 
matter  has  been  left  in  that  position  ever  since.” 

“ What'has  become  of  the  documents,  sir?”  inquired 
Tomokichi. 

“ I think  that  they  must  be  somewhere  in  the  archives 
of  our  clan,”  replied  Mr.  Konishi.  “ In  fact,  I now  re- 
member that  the  custodian  of  our  books  and  documents 
brought  them  recently  from  Mito  to  our  yashiki  at  the 


132 


Mito  Yashiki. 


request  of  my  son,  in  order  that  he  might  consult  them 
in  reference  to  certain  points  about  foreign  religions,  that 
arose  during  the  course  of  his  translation  of  foreign 
documents  at  the  Bakufu’s  office.  They  must  be  either 
in  the  palace  or  at  the  lodge.” 

“ Would  it  be  possible  for  me  to  have  access  to  them, 
from  time  to  time,  in  connection  with  my  studies  of 
foreign  subjects  ? ” timidly  ventured  Tomokichi. 

“ I do  not  think  that  there  will  be  any  objection  raised 
to  that,”  was  the  reply.  “ My  son  has  spoken  to  me 
about  your  great  interest  in  such  matters.  The  thing 
can  be  so  arranged  as  to  give  you  abundance  of 
opportunity  to  examine  these  documents  at  our  lodge. 
Our  clan  has  always  been  allowed  much  freedom  in  such 
matters,  and  the  Bakufu  is  now  giving  every  encourage- 
ment to  students  in  foreign  literature.” 

They  arrived  at  the  lodge  in  time  for  the  midday 
meal.  After  that  the  two  brothers  sauntered  down  to 
the  southern  gateway  to  report  for  duty.  Captain 
Matsuda  received  them  cordially,  and  introduced  them 
to  the  ten  other  gentlemen  who  were  to  act  with  them  as 
guardians  of  the  portal.  Six  of  the  gentlemen  occupied 
the  office  on  one  side  of  the  gateway,  and  six  of  them 
that  on  the  other  side.  The  young  fellows  were  all 
about  of  the  same  age,  and  made  very  congenial  com- 
panions. Their  duties  were  very  light,  indeed,  being 
merely  to  keep  track  of  every  one  who  came  in  or  who 
went  out  of  the  gate,  and  at  sunset  to  bar  the  doors, 
leaving  the  little  wicket-gate  in  charge  of  a relieving 
guard.  They  were  allowed  to  smoke,  read,  play  chess, 
or  do  any  thing  else  that  did  not  conflict  with  the  dis- 
charge of  their  simple  duties.  Groups  of  samurai , bent 
on  business  or  on  pleasure,  were  passing  in  and  out  all 
the  time.  Occasionally  a retainer — somewhatrthe  worse 
for  sake — would  be  skilfully  piloted  home  by  his  com- 
rades in  the  spree, — for  life  in  Yedo  meant  a gay  round 
of  pleasure  and  dissipation  for  the  thousands  of  retainers 
in  tine  yashiki. 

Late  in  the  afternoon,  as  the  gentlemen  of  The  guard 


Life  (ft  Mito  Yds  Juki. 


133 


were  stretched  around  on  the  tatamis,  variously  occupied, 
a messenger  from  the  Bakufu  hastened  up  to  the  gateway 
with  a despatch  from  Konishi  to  the  commandant.  This 
event  caused  quite  a breeze,  which  became  quite  a gale 
when  it  became  noised  abroad  through  the  yashiki  that 
the  Bakufu  had  decided  to  release  the  old  ex-Daimio  of 
Mito  from  his  long  confinement.  This  step  was  prob- 
ably taken  in  view  of  the  intense  excitement  that  had 
been  caused  by  the  arrival  of  the  American  fleet  during 
the  summer.  The  government  probably  felt  that  it 
needed  to  secure  every  ally  available,  and  that  it  could 
not  afford  to  lose  the  support  of  any  member  of  the 
Tokugawa  family. 

“ I presume,  sir,”  said  Junzo,  addressing  Mr.  Taka- 
hashi,  a bright  young  fellow-guardsman,  “ that  this 
event  will  bring  the  young  prince  of  Mito  down  to  Yedo 
at  a very  early  date.” 

“ Without  any  doubt,”  replied  his  companion.  “ It  is 
my  opinion  that  before  another  moon  has  waned  we  shall 
have  this  yashiki  filled  to  overflowing.  We  shall  then 
have  abundance  of  old-fashioned  splendor  and  pageantry. 
Ah  ! sir,  those  were  grand  times  when  thirty  thousand 
men  filled  these  grounds.  The  old  prince,  in  his 
day,  was  a great  power  in  the  land,  I can  assure 
you.  The  young  prince,  since  his  father’s  incar- 

ceration, has  filled  his  place  as  well  as  could  be 
expected,  but  the  cold  frown  of  the  Bakufu  has  rested 
like  a chilly  shadow  upon  our  entire  clan,  quite  dampen- 
ing our  animation  and  loyalty.  Of  course  the  young 
prince  will  still  be  the  head  of  our  clan,  but  the  hand  of 
his  father  will  control  his  policy,  and  will  make  things 
lively  and  highly  interesting  before  long.  Of  course  you 
are  aware  that  it  is  by  no  means  an  uncommon  occur- 
rence for  a Daimio  to  be  deposed,  either  by  government 
order  or  by  his  own  voluntary  action.  In  such  an  event 
the  heir  steps  in  and  rules  the  clan,  but  he  is  always 
mindful  of  filial  duty  as  expounded  by  the  Chinese 
sages,  and  gives  implicit  obedience  to  his  father’s  com- 
mands. The  father  being  thus  freed  from  official  tram- 


134 


Mito  Yasluki. 


mels,  has  far  greater  freedom  of  action  and  no  less 
effectually  shapes  the  policy  of  the  clan.” 

“ What  do  you  consider  the  true  inwardness  of  this 
matter?”  inquired  Tomokichi. 

“ Oh  ! well,  as  to  that,  my  private  opinion  is  that  it  is  a 
shrewd  piece  of  diplomacy  on  the  part  of  the  new 
Gotairo  (Prince  Regent).  You  will  remember  that  just 
after  the  departure  of  the  barbarian  fleet  last  summer, 
the  Shogun  suddenly  died  under  circumstances  that 
were,  to  say  the  least,  somewhat  indicative  of  foul  play 
on  the  part  of  the  anti-barbarian  faction.  However  that 
may  be,  he  was  at  once  succeeded  by  the  present  Sho- 
gun, Iyesada.  Great  excitement  and  panic  prevailed 
throughout  the  city  and  along  the  shore  provinces,  be- 
cause of  the  appearance  of  the  smoking  ships  of  the 
foreigners.  The  new  Shogun  selected  for  his  right-hand 
man  the  lord  of  Hikone,  the  head  of  the  fudai  (direct 
vassals  of  the  Shogun),  whom  he  made  the  Gotairo.  This 
man  has  extraordinary  capacity  for  both  virtue  and 
iniquity,  and  is  really  the  ruler  of  the  empire,  although 
nominally  mere  prime-minister.  Now,  it  is  always  in 
order  for  the  incoming  Shogun  to  grant  pardons  for 
political  offences  occurring  during  the  reign  of  his  pre- 
decessor. Taking  advantage  of  this  fact,  the  shrewd 
Gotairo  has  released  the  old  prince  of  Mito,  with  the  evi- 
dent intention  of  thereby  securing  his  friendship  and  of 
conciliating  our  entire  clan.  We  shall  see  whether  his 
little  game  will  work, — whether  twelve  years  of  insult 
can  be  thus  wiped  out  with  a stroke  of  the  pen.  Little 
does  the  foxy  Gotairo  dream  of  the  nature  of  the  de- 
spatch that  we  received  from  the  imperial  court  yester- 
day. Perhaps,  if  he  were  to  see  it,  he  would  feel  disposed 
to  tighten  his  grip  on  Mito  instead  of  loosening  it.” 

“ What  do  you  mean  ? ” exclaimed  several  of  the  lis- 
teners, in  almost  the  same  breath. 

“ Oh  ! you  are  all  interested,  are  you  ? Well,  I get  my 
information  from  responsible  parties,  and  as  the  matter 
vitally  concerns  our  clan,  I shall  let  you  have  the  benefit 
thereof.  Know,  then,  that  when  the  news  of  the  intru- 


Life  at  Milo  Yashiki.  135 


sion  of  these  barbarian  ships  flew  overland  to  Kioto  last 
summer,  it  very  naturally  excited  much  comment,  and 
the  Emperor  sent  messengers  to  the  shrines  of  his  an- 
cestors at  Ise  ordering  the  Shinto  priests  there  to  pray 
to  the  gods  to  drive  away  the  intruders.  But  as  the 
summer  wore  away  and  it  became  manifest  that  the 
Bakufu  meant  to  parley  with  the  barbarians,  the  kugcs  and 
the  imperial  councillors  met  and  made  an  indignant  pro- 
test against  the  action  of  the  Shogun.  This  they  sub- 
mitted to  the  Emperor,  who  at  once  seized  the  opportunity 
to  regain  his  political  importance  within  the  realm,  and 
he  sent  an  order  to  the  old  prince  of  Mito  to  aid  the 
Bakufu  with  his  advice,  and  to  help  in  quieting  the 
public  excitement,  and  thus  to  restore  peace  to  the  im- 
perial bosom.  Of  course  none  of  you  gentlemen  are  so 
blind  but  what  you  are  able  clearly  to  perceive  the 
political  significance  of  this  suggestive  commission  from 
the  Gosho. 

“ Now,  I apprehend  that  the  Bakufu  does  not  dislike 
the  barbarian  any  more  than  the  Emperor  does,  but 
the  former  realizes  most  unpleasantly  that  the  barbarian 
has  power  which  cannot  be  ignored.  Of  course  the  Em- 
peror through  “underground  channels”  is  tolerably  well 
posted,  and  comprehends  in  a general  way  that  the  new- 
comers are  disagreeable  people  to  handle,  but  he  rather 
laughs  in  his  sleeve  at  that  melancholy  circumstance, 
inasmuch  as  the  handling  happens  to  devolve  on  the 
Bakufu.  Our  imperial  sovereign  can  afford  to  crowd  his 
tongue  into  his  cheek,  loudly  call  on  the  Shogun  to  keep 
the  people  quiet,  and  then  calmly  await  further  develop- 
ments. Do  you  gentlemen  fully  grasp  the  grim  humor 
of  the  situation  ? The  Emperor,  on  the  one  hand,  while 
urging  the  Shogun  to  restore  peace  to  the  imperial 
bosom  by  keeping  peace  within  the  realm,  can,  on  the 
other  hand,  complacently  watch  the  increasing  anger  of 
the  people  at  foreign  intrusion,  and  wait  with  diplomatic 
serenity  for  a favorable  opportunity  to  step  into  the 
political  arena  with  a powerful  following  of  angry  Daimios 
quite  ready  to  sweep  away  the  Shogunate  and  to  re- 


136 


Mito  Yashiki. 


establish  his  own  sway.  Then,  if  he  finds  that  the  bar* 
barians  are  creatures  not  to  be  tampered  with,  he  can 
gracefully  tolerate  them  within  the  realm  upon  some 
pretext  or  other  that  may  suggest  itself.  Gentlemen,  I 
consider  the  situation  to  be  as  instructive  and  interesting 
as  any  that  has  arisen  within  two  centuries.” 

This  narrative  of  “ inside  facts  ” provoked  a long  dis- 
cussion, that  had  not  terminated  when  the  setting  sun 
proclaimed  the  hour  for  closing  the  gates.  The  reliev- 
ing guard  found  the  party  apparently  inclined  to  spend 
the  night  there.  When  our  friends  discussed  the  matter 
over  their  evening  meal  at  the  lodge  they  found  that 
young  Konishi  had  heard  rumors  to  the  same  effect  at 
the  castle  that  morning — rumors  that  had  come  through 
“ underground  channels  ” from  Kioto,  for  the  Gotairo 
was  also  an  adept  at  political  undermining,  and  he  had 
his  spies  at  work  everywhere.  Nothing  escaped  their 
keen  scent.  Konishi  said  that  the  Gotairo  appeared  to 
bother  himself  very  little  about  the  matter,  evidently 
looking  on  Mito  as  a spoilt  child  of  Tokugawa  that  must 
always  be  pouting  about  something  or  other, — a child 
that  always  had  been  troublesome  and  probably  always 
would  be  troublesome,  but  which  he  would  handle  with 
a rough  hand  when  too  demonstrative.  That  night  the 
message  from  Kioto  was  the  great  theme  of  conversation 
throughout  Mito  Yashiki. 

On  the  following  morning  Tomokichi  busily  occupied 
himself  with  reading  the  documents  connected  with  the 
ancient  exiles  on  Kirishitan-zaka,  while  Junzo  spent  the 
morning  in  the  target  range  practising  with  bows  and 
arrows.  In  the  afternoon,  they  again  did  duty  as  guards- 
men at  the  gate.  And  the  evening  was  spent  in  reading 
and  in  gossiping  at  the  lodge.  And  so  passed  many  de- 
lightful days  of  the  beautiful  month  of  November.  The 
young  men  from  Yamashiro  grew  daily  in  favor  with 
comrades  and  officers  because  of  the  modesty  of  their 
bearing,  their  faithful  discharge  of  duty,  and  their  high 
proficiency  in  warlike  arts.  Within  a fortnight  after  their 
arrival  at  the  yashiki  they  were  listed  for  a grand  fen- 


Life  at  Milo  Yashiki. 


137 


cing  bout  that  came  off  on  the  parade  ground.  On  that 
occasion  our  young  friends  quite  distinguished  them- 
selves. Inheriting  from  their  ancestors  a peculiar  apti- 
tude for  fencing,  and  having  developed  the  precise 
muscles  needed  for  quick  action  in  cutting  and  parrying, 
and  also  having  learned  under  their  father’s  careful 
tuition  all  of  the  intricate  possibilities  of  the  double- 
handed  sword,  their  wonderful  expertness  now  became 
very  conspicuous  when  contrasted  with  the  savage 
chopping  of  the  careless,  pleasure-loving  fellows  who  had 
learned  the  art  in  the  slip-shod  fashion  characteristic  of 
the  military  dilettanteism  that  always  prevails  during 
centuries  of  profound  peace. 

So  pleased  was  the  commandant  with  their  display  of 
skill,  not  only  with  the  sword  but  also  with  the  spear, 
that  he  at  once  promoted  them  to  the  staff  of  instructors 
to  assist  in  drilling  the  young  samurai  in  the  yashiki. 
This  promotion  from  guardsmen  to  “ professors  ” en- 
tailed an  agreeable  increase  of  income  from  five  rios  to 
ten  rios  per  month  apiece.  This  arrangement  gave  them 
much  more  time  to  themselves  and  enabled  them  to 
adjust  their  hours  to  suit  themselves.  On  some  days 
they  drilled  their  classes  early  in  the  morning  ; on  other 
days  they  drilled  them  late  in  the  afternoon  ; and,  on 
other  days,  at  midday.  This  arrangement  gave  them 
abundance  of  time  to  ramble  over  the  city  and  the  suburbs, 
for  purposes  of  sight-seeing.  Very  naturally  this  work 
of  instruction  much  increased  their  circle  of  acquaint- 
ances, so  that  many  evenings  were  spent  with  acquaint- 
ances in  different  parts  of  the  yashiki.  On  these  occa- 
sions our  Kioto  friends  were  thoroughly  informed  as  to 
the  history  of  the  Mito  clan,  and  as  to  the  history  of  the 
great  metropolis.  It  did  not  take  long  for  the  fact  to 
leak  out  that  Tomokichi  was  in  possession  of  much  inter- 
esting information  concerning  foreign  countries,  a dis- 
covery which  added  much  to  his  popularity. 

But,  as  all  roads  tended  toward  Nihon-bashi,  so  every 
conversation  drifted  into  the  all-absorbing  question  of 
the  day  : “What  shall  we  do  with  the  barbarian  when  he 


138 


Milo  Yashiki. 


returns  in  the  spring  for  an  answer  to  his  letter  of  last 
summer  ?”  This  subject  was  discussed  from  every  con- 
ceivable standpoint.  The  prevailing  sentiment  was 
strongly  against  permitting  any  intercourse  whatsoever 
with  the  interlopers.  Yet  there  were  some  who  hesitated 
to  take  this  view  upon  the  ground  that  the  time  could 
not  be  far  distant  when  the  shell  of  exclusiveness  would 
be  broken  anyhow  by  some  foreign  nation  endeavoring 
to  conquer  the  country,  and  that,  when  the  time  came,  it 
would  be  very  convenient  to  have  a few  foreign  allies  to 
assist  in  keeping  the  aggressor  in  check.  It  was  gener- 
ally conceded,  however,  that  the  samurai  could  receive 
no  possible  benefit  from  the  opening  of  the  country  to 
outsiders.  This  last  sentiment  prevailed  in  all  the.  yash- 
ikis  throughout  Yedo,  and  was  in  fact  the  sentiment  of 
the  Bakufu.  Jlut  in  those  quarters  where  the  Bakufu 
was  hated  more  than  the  barbarian,  there  was  a sly  hope 
that  the  savage  foreigner  woufd  intrude  himself  suf- 
ficiently within  the  country  to  create  an  uprising  against 
that  hated  oligarchy,  leading  ultimately  to  the  abolishing 
of  the  Shogunate.  The  excitement  that  prevailed  was 
subdued  but  intense.  The  fires  that  were  soon  to  break 
forth  and  consume  the  political  institutions  of  centuries’ 
duration  were  smouldering  in  the  Yedo  yashifcis. 

And  so  the  smiling  month  of  November  slipped  away 
amid  scenes  that  enraptured  the  imaginations  of  our 
Kioto  lads.  So  utterly  different  from  any  previous  ex- 
perience ! So  like  the  glowing  pages  of  the  romances 
that  they  used  to  read  at  Atago-yama  ! And  the  old  ex- 
Daimio  and  his  son  were  soon  to  arrive  at  the  yashiki, 
and  then  what  rejoicing  and  merry-making  would  there 
be  ! Already  the  long  train  of  retainers  had  left  the 
triple-moated  castle  beside  the  Pacific  seventy  miles  to 
the  northeast,  and  was  winding  leisurely  down  the  grand 
avenue  toward  the  metropolis.  Early  one  bright  morn- 
ing in  December  a courier  breathlessly  dashed  up  to  the 
northern  gateway  and  announced  that  the  princely  cor- 
tege was  on  the  Oshiu-kaido,  but  a few  miles  distant,  and 
that  it  might  be  expected  by  midday.  Oh  ! what  hurry- 


Life  at  Mito  Yashiki. 


*39 


ing  and  scurrying  to  complete  the  arrangements  for  the 
reception,  what  rushing  of  messengers,  what  marshalling 
of  soldiers,  what  haste  to  spread  the  emblazoned  banners 
before  the  gates,  and  to  screen  the  long  hedgerows  with 
heraldic  panoply  ! A large  body  of  horsemen  hurried 
off  northward  to  meet  the  long-exiled  lord,  and  every 
steed  within  the  stables  was  brought  forth  to  be  mounted 
by  knights  in  full  armor,  who  drew  up  in  squadrons 
around  the  gateway.  Long  rows  of  sa?nurai  lined  the 
road  outside  of  the  gate,  and  a multitude  of  them  were 
marshalled  within  the  gates  to  receive  their  master. 
Hundreds  of  servants  and  attendants  lined  the  road  near 
the  palace  to  make  obeisance  to  their  lord,  as  their  an- 
cestors had  done  for  centuries  before.  Everybody  and 
every  thing  were  in  gala  dress.  The  ladies  of  the  house- 
hold crowded  the  garden  walks  and  stood  upon  the  ver- 
andas, with  their  heads  so  bedecked  with  flowers  and 
wearing  embroidered  raiment  of  such  gorgeous  hues, 
that  one  might  well  have  been  pardoned  for  taking  them 
for  a flower  show. 

In  a short  while  the  vanguard  of  the  procession  came 
in  sight,  and  was  received  most  cordially  with  endless 
waves  of  obeisance,  after  which  it  entered  the  gate  and 
swung  into  place  among  the  bowing  ranks  within.  There 
was  neither  shouting  nor  cheering,  merely  the  most  pro- 
fuse bowing.  Profound  decorum  and  dignity  character- 
ized every  thing.  The  loud  brazen  yells  of  Saxon  races 
would  have  been  entirely  out  of  place  there.  For  two 
hours  a long  train  of  baggage,  retainers,  horsemen,  ser- 
vants, and  kagos  came  pelting  into  the  yashiki  from  the 
north,  and  were  all  received  with  utmost  cordiality.  At 
length,  when  the  dial  in  the  garden  indicated  high  noon, 
a long  line  of  norimons  bearing  the  ladies  of  the  princely 
family  came  into  view,  and  were  received  with  obeisances 
even  more  profound  and  impressive,  until  it  seemed  as  if 
there  was  a vast  wheatfield  around  the  gateway  waving 
in  continued  billows  to  the  whispering  winds,  to  which 
sound  the  sucking  inhalations  of  the  vast  multitude 
might  well  have  been  likened.  Then  came  the  squadron 


140 


Mito  Yashiki. 


of  horsemen  that  had  sallied  out  of  the  gateway  that 
morning  ; and  then  the  crowd  knew  that  the  Prince  was 
approaching.  Not  a sound  was  made  as  the  gorgeous 
norimons,  conveying  the  princely  son  and  father,  ap- 
proached. The  vast  throng  knelt  upon  the  ground  and 
bowed  down  until  the  train  had  passed.  The  subdued 
murmurs  of  welcome  and  the  hissing  breath  of  the  vas- 
sals within  the  gates,  as  they  welcomed  the  master  and 
his  sire,  were  far  more  impressive  than  cheers  or  shouts 
could  ever  have  been.  The  massive  and  beautiful  doors 
of  the  superb  vestibule,  used  only  on  such  occasions, 
were  thrown  wide  open,  and  the  lord  was  at  home. 

For  hours  afterwards  straggling  squads  of  samurai  and 
coolies  came  rambling  down  the  road  into  the  yashiki. 
But  the  crowds  and  the  pageantry  dispersed  as  soon  as 
the  mournful  horns  and  the  croupy  drums  announced 
that  the  Daimio  of  Mito  had  entered  the  palace.  Then 
was  there  grand  jollification,  not  only  for  that  day,  but 
also  for  three  days  thereafter.  Feasting,  fireworks,  and 
tournaments  ran  riot.  The  fencers  banged  each  other 
most  unmercifully  ; the  spearmen  prodded  each  other 
most  unceremoniously;  and  the  archers  pounded  away  at 
the  yelping  curs,  until  those  persecuted  brutes  lapsed 
into  a condition  of  silent  despair,  mechanically  turning 
their  flanks  to  the  whizzing  shafts  without  indulging  in 
useless  comments.  Old  friends  bivouacked  in  the  bar- 
racks, and,  over  their  sake  cups,  revived  past  events  to 
their  heart’s  content.  Groups  of  officers  were  continually 
going  to  the  palace  to  present  homage  and  congratula- 
tions. On  this  great  occasion  nearly  thirty  thousand 
men  were  crowded  within  the  walls  of  the  yashiki , and 
every  available  tatami  on  the  premises  was  occupied.  In 
a few  days,  however,  large  numbers  of  the  retainers  re- 
turned to  Mito  to  attend  to  the  routine  of  provincial 
duties,  and  then  everybody  was  able  to  settle  down  com- 
fortably. 


CHAPTER  XI. 


A BRIEF  INTERVIEW  WITH  THE  OLD  PRINCE. 

Six  or  seven  weeks  after  the  events  narrated  in  the 
previous  chapter,  the  people  inhabiting  the  region  sur- 
rounding the  magnificent  bay  of  Yedo  stood,  metaphori- 
cally speaking,  on  the  tiptoe  of  expectation  at  the  pros- 
pect of  the  promised  return  of  the  American  squadron. 
The  month  of  January  was  well  on  its  last  half,  and,  al- 
though it  was  midwinter,  yet  the  powerful  rays  of  the  sun 
were  making  the  winter  vegetation  quicken  with  fresh 
verdure,  and  caused  the  leaves  and  the  blossoms  of  the 
oncoming  spring  to  swell  in  their  green  buds  preparatory 
to  their  debut  three  or  four  weeks  later  on.  The  Naka- 
shimas  had  just  finished  their  breakfast,  and  were  prepar- 
ing to  start  out  to  the  parade  ground  to  give  a new  class 
of  valorous  warriors  some  instruction  as  to  what  consti- 
tuted the  art  of  correct  swordsmanship.  At  that  junc- 
ture, a messenger  from  the  commandant  was  announced 
by  the  servant.  Being  duly  ushered  into  their  presence, 
he  communicated  an  order  from  the  said  commandant 
to  appear  at  his  office  as  soon  as  convenient.  They  at 
once  hurried  off  at  the  very  heels  of  the  messenger,  and 
duly  reported  themselves  at  the  office  of  said  dignitary. 
They  were  informed  by  that  urbane  gentleman  that  the 
old  Prince  desired  to  have  an  interview  with  them  upon 
a matter  of  much  importance.  To  their  reply  that  they 
were  at  that  moment  due  on  the  parade  ground  to  in- 
struct their  regular  classes,  he  made  speedy  answer  by 
despatching  a messenger  there  with  notice  that  the  in- 
structors were  otherwise  engaged,  and  that  the  classes 
must  adjourn  until  the  following  day. 

14 1 


142 


Mito  Ycishiki. 


Having  adjusted  that  matter,  the  commandant  led  the 
young  men  through  several  suites  of  magnificent  apart- 
ments out  upon  the  broad  veranda,  along  which  they 
slowly  walked  until  they  came  to  the  stately  suite  of 
chambers  along  the  eastern  side  occupied  by  the  old 
Prince.  It  was  winter  time,  and  all  the  shojees  were  in 
place,  so  that  the  rooms  were  well  shut  in.  The  com- 
mandant now  slowly  called  out  his  name  in  a sonorous 
voice,  whereupon  an  attendant  slid  back  a shojee  and 
ushered  his  party  into  a stately  room,  where  they  were 
requested  to  wait  a few  minutes  until  their  message  had 
been  communicated  to  his  Grace.  They  were  not  kept 
waiting  very  long,  for  the  attendant  speedily  returned 
with  orders  to  at  once  usher  them  into  the  audience- 
room.  Here  they  found  themselves  quite  alone.  But 
they  were  informed  that  his  Grace  would  join  them  as 
soon  as  he  had  finished  some  writing  upon  which  he  was 
engaged.  Hebachis  heaped  up  with  glowing  charcoals 
were  set  before  them  to  warm  their  chilled  hands.  To- 
bacco and  tea  were  also  brought  in  for  their  refreshment. 

The  lofty  chamber  was  finished  off  with  the  highest 
native  skill.  Royal  tigers  crouched  upon  the  gilded 
panels  of  the  shojees , and  the  impassioned  hues  of  the 
lovely  lotus  flower  gleamed  amid  the  imperial  ponds. 
The  square  panels  of  the  ceiling  were  emblazoned  with 
gorgeous  phoenixes  and  dragons.  The  room  was  utterly 
destitute  of  upholstered  furniture,  for  nothing  of  that 
sort  existed  within  the  four  seas  of  Dai-Nippon.  A huge 
bronze  figure  representing  the  thunder-fiend,  and  a half- 
dozen  exquisite  porcelain  vases  and  jardinibres  completed 
the  furnishing  of  the  room.  Four  handsome  rugs  of 
foreign  manufacture  were  arranged  around  the  hebachis , 
ready  for  the  expected  occupants.  Window  glass  was 
unknown,  but  abundance  of  light  filtered  through  the 
translucent  paper  panes,  and  flooded  the  stately  apart- 
ment with  a mellowed,  dreamy  light. 

After  the  lapse  of  nearly  half  an  hour  the  old  Prince 
entered  the  audience-chamber  and,  graciously  responding 
to  the  profound  salutations  of  his  guests,  proceeded  to 


A Brief  Interview  with  the  Old  Prince.  1 43 


occupy  one  of  the  rugs,  and  invited  them  to  occupy  the 
others.  He  was  an  urbane  yet  vigorous  gentleman,  who 
possessed  many  striking  characteristics.  That  he  was 
scholarly  and  energetic  even  his  enemies  did  not  attempt 
to  deny.  It  was  also  generally  admitted  that  he  possessed 
executive  abilities  of  a high  order.  His  temper  when 
roused  was  violent  and  ungovernable.  And  he  was  a 
daring  schemer  and  recklessly  brave  in  the  carrying  out 
of  his  projects.  But,  perhaps,  you  would  not  have  de- 
tected these  qualities  beneath  his  genial  and  polished  ex- 
terior. 

As  he  sat  there  in  his  modest  silken  garments  you 
might  well  have  been  excused  in  not  suspecting  that  be- 
neath those  rustling  folds  there  dwelt  the  spirit  of  the 
bloodthirsty  beasts  upon  the  gleaming  shojees.  He  was 
glossy  and  sleek  until  the  time  came  for  the  spring,  and 
then  he  bristled  up  hideously.  His  Grace  possessed  a 
remarkably  large  family.  According  to  native  usage,  he 
had  taken  unto  himself  not  only  a wife  but,  in  addition 
thereto,  a large  number  of  concubines,  so  that  he  was 
able  to  boast  of  eighteen  sons  and  twenty-five  daughters. 
But  family  cares  and  state  affairs  had  borne  lightly  upon 
him,  and  he  appeared  in  the  eyes  of  our  young  friends  as 
an  exceedingly  gracious  old  gentleman,  in  hale  and  hearty 
condition.  Before  closing  our  brief  description  of  this 
extraordinary  old  gentleman,  it  should  be  stated  that 
there  were  two  characteristics  in  his  nature  that  loomed 
above  all  others,  and  were  conspicuous  from  their  terri- 
ble intensity.  The  first  of  these  was  his  bitter  and  un- 
mitigated hatred  of  the  Shoguns  and  the  Bakufu,  and  the 
second  was  his  merciless  contempt  toward  foreigners. 
It  is  true  that  he  had  supreme  respect  for  the  literature 
of  the  Chinese,  but  this  was  the  only  consideration  that 
he  was  known  to  show  in  an  animosity  as  sweeping  as  the 
universe. 

“I  have  obeyed  your  orders,  most  worshipful  sir,”  said 
the  commandant,  “ and  have  brought  to  you  the  two 
young  gentlemen  from  Yamashiro  whom  you  desired  to 
see.  We  await  your  orders.” 


144 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“Your  promptness  is  indeed  highly  commendable,” 
replied  the  Prince.  “ I have  been  informed,  ” con- 
tinued he,  addressing  the  young  men,  “that  you  have 
recently  resumed  your  ancient  alliance  with  the  Toku- 
gawa  family,  and  I am  pleased  to  welcome  you  per- 
sonally within  the  gates  of  our  yashiki.  At  the  time 
your  ancestors  connected  themselves  with  Iyeyas,  the 
barbarian  beasts  from  Portugal  had  created  grievous 
disturbances  within  the  realm,  which  finally  terminated 
in  dreadful  sedition  and  civil  war.  It  is  indeed  curious 
that  now,  when  you  resume  your  allegiance  with  us  after 
a lapse  of  two  hundred  years,  our  nation  should  be  again 
pestered  by  these  red-haired  dogs.  Let  us  hope  that  this 
reunion  may  prove  a good  augury  of  success  in  our  pres- 
ent efforts  to  drive  off  these  abortions  of  beasts.  Curse 
their  monkey-faces  ! ” 

It  was  manifest  that  the  old  gentleman  was  rapidly 
working  himself  up  into  a foaming  passion  over  the  com- 
plicated foreign  question  ; but,  as  his  listeners  obsequi- 
ously bowed  assent  to  every  sentiment  that  he  uttered, 
his  ire  speedily  subsided  and  he  soon  plunged  into  the 
subject  concerning  which  he  had  desired  to  interview 
them. 

“You  are  well  aware,  gentlemen,”  continued  he,  after 
having  blown  off  the  surplus  steam  that  appeared  to 
have  been  pent  up  in  his  mind,  “ that,  whatever  may  be 
our  dislike  for  these  interloping  curs,  we  must  deal  with 
them  cautiously  until  we  have  ascertained  their  precise 
strength.  Now,  the  Bakufu  appears  to  be  overwhelmed 
with  a supreme  fear  of  their  prowess.  I do  not  know 
the  grounds  of  this  fear.  I do  not  even  know  whether 
it  be  real  or  assumed.  If  the  Shogun,  whose  ancestor 
drove  forth  the  barbarians,  be  now  disposed  to  allow 
their  return,  we  of  Mito  must  know  something  about 
these  fellows  in  order  that  we  may  be  prepared  to  act 
intelligently.  We,  of  course,  have  no  special  love  for 
the  Shogun,  although  having  sprung  from  the  same 
ancestor.  Mito  has  always  been  a cipher  under  the 
Shoguns,  and,  in  view  of  the  fact  that  we  have  always 


A Brief  Interview  with  the  Old  Pri?ice.  145 


upheld  the  authority  of  the  Emperor  and  have  opposed 
the  usurping  of  imperial  power  by  the  Bakufu,  will 
probably  always  remain  so.” 

To  all  of  these  observations  a ready  assent  was 
breathed  by  the  absorbed  listeners.  The  impetuous  old 
Daimio  now  allowed  a few  minutes’  intermission  for  sip- 
ping tea  and  whiffing  pipes.  He  then  resumed  the 
thread  of  his  conversation  (if  so  one-sided  a discourse 
had  not  better  be  termed  a harangue)  : “ We  wish  to 
know  something  about  these  barbarians  from  personal 
observations  ; that  is  to  say,  from  observations  made  by 
trusted  members  of  our  own  clan.  Public  rumor  is 
very  unsatisfactory.  The  meagre  accounts  that  filter 
through  the  Bakufu  screens  and  lattices  are  not  to  be 
relied  on  at  all.  Who  knows  but  what  the  barbarians 
are  but  a weak  lot  that  could  be  brushed  aside  with  a 
puff  of  breath,  but  whom  the  Bakufu  exaggerate  into 
fierce  and  powerful  creatures,  so  as  to  inveigle  us  dis- 
satisfied Daimios  into  open  revolt,  with  the  secret  inten- 
tion of  crushing  us  unmercifully  ? On  the  other  hand, 
the  intruders  may  be  indeed  powerful,  and  it  may  be  the 
sly  game  of  the  crafty  Gotairo  to  lead  us  on  into  some 
personal  collision  with  them,  in  order  to  afford  him  the 
delightful  opportunity  of  standing  by  and  exultingly 
witnessing  our  humiliation.  Now,  we  wish  to  escape 
from  this  dilemma.  We  must  know  for  ourselves  about 
these  people.  As  you  already  know,  the  ships  of  these 
barbarians  will  be  due  here  at  any  time  during  the  com- 
ing month.  You  two  young  gentlemen  have  been  re- 
ported to  me  as  persons  full  of  energy  and  discreet  in- 
telligence. Will  you  undertake  to  watch  the  ships  on 
their  arrival  and  secure  whatever  information  you  can 
concerning  these  strange  intruders?  ” 

The  brothers  bowed  down  low  in  profound  acknowl- 
edgment of  the  honor  thus  conferred  on  them,  and  re- 
plied as  follows  : “ Your  unworthy  servants  are  duly 
mindful  of  the  supreme  confidence  that  you  have  reposed 
in  them.  We  are  willing  to  undertake  whatever  you  may 
command,  but  we  deem  it  proper  to  inform  you  that  we 


146 


Mito  Yashiki. 


are  exceedingly  inexperienced  in  matters  of  this  descrip- 
tion, as  we  have  lived  all  our  lives  in  a remote  part  of 
the  empire,  secluded  and  screened  from  matters  and 
affairs  of  importance.  We  therefore  humbly  doubt  our 
ability  to  conduct  a matter  of  such  magnitude.” 

“Your  points  have  been  modestly  taken,”  replied  the 
Prince,  “but,  under  existing  circumstances,  they  must  be 
waived.  Your  recent  journey  overland  from  Yamashiro 
demonstrates  that  you  are  not  mere  children,  and  your 
bearing  since  entering  my  employ  clearly  shows  that  you 
possess  both  skill  and  intelligence.  If  you  will  carefully 
consider  this  matter  you  will  perhaps  decide  to  venture 
on  the  undertaking.” 

“We,  your  humble  servants,”  replied  they,  “offer 
freely  our  insignificant  services  in  whatever  enterprise 
your  supreme  excellency  may  desire.  We  will  gladly 
undertake  this  matter  now  that  we  have  plainly  stated 
our  meagre  abilities.  Command,  and  we  will  obey.” 

“ Well  spoken  ! ” exclaimed  the  Prince,  gayly,  as  he 
clapped  his  hands  for  an  attendant  to  bring  in  a map 
of  the  country  surrounding  the  bay  of  Yedo.  This  he 
spread  out  upon  the  floor  and  then  proceeded  to  explain 
the  plan  of  the  campaign.  “ The  ships  will  undoubtedly 
be  here  within  a month.  They  will  enter  the  bay  between 
these  two  bold  promontories,  and  will  come  up  the 
western  side  of  the  harbor,  and  will  cast  anchor  probably 
in  the  same  place  where  they  did  on  the  occasion  of  their 
previous  visit.  Now,  two  plans  suggest  themselves. 
Either  you  can  secure  quarters  in  some  village  on  the 
eastern  side  of  the  bay,  or  you  can  secure  accommoda- 
tions of  a similar  description  on  the  western  side  of  the 
bay,  and  can  watch  for  the  incoming  of  the  vessels. 
When  the  vessels  arrive  you  can  secure  a boat  and  can 
go  out  and  inspect  them.  The  advantage  of  operating 
from  the  eastern  side  of  the  harbor  is  that  less  suspicion 
will  attach  to  your  appearance  there,  because  of  the  great 
distance  across  the  waters  to  the  ships.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  proximity  of  the  western  shore  to  the  probable 
anchorage  of  the  vessels  is  a point  to  be  carefully  con- 


A Brief  Interview  with  the  Old  Prince.  147 

sidered.  But  all  of  these  matters  of  detail  you  must  dis- 
cuss with  the  commandant,  inasmuch  as  he  is  well  ac- 
quainted with  the  region  on  both  sides  of  the  bay.” 

“ I will  endeavor  to  assist  the  gentlemen  to  the 
utmost,”  modestly  murmured  the  commandant. 

“ By  the  way,”  exclaimed  the  Prince,  “ I had  well-nigh 
forgotten  about  the  financial  part  of  this  business.  You 
must  have  plenty  of  funds,  for  you  will  find  it  very  con- 
venient at  times  to  have  money  wherewith  to  unlock 
doors  that  would  otherwise  be  closed.  In  other  words, 
you  will  frequently  be  obliged  to  bribe  your  way  among 
the  Bakufu  officials.  You  will  find  this  out  later  on. 
Therefore,  to  provide  for  this  contingency,  I will  give 
you  this  written  order  on  the  commandant  to  furnish 
you  with  whatever  money  you  may  need  for  your  ex- 
penses.” 

After  this  the  conversation  continued  for  a while  on 
general  topics,  and  was  finally  brought  to  a close  by  the 
attendant  bringing  word  that  some  gentlemen  were  wait- 
ing to  see  the  Prince  by  previous  appointment.  Our 
friends  then  bowed  themselves  out  of  his  presence  and 
retired  to  the  commandant’s  office  to  discuss  the  details 
of  their  projected  expedition.  That  practical  officer 
speedily  brought  forth  a chart  and  a globe  of  the  earth 
to  assist  in  his  investigations. 

“What  is  this  ?”  inquired  Tomokichi,  examining  the 
globe  with  great  interest.  “ It  appears  to  me  like  a 
spherical  chart.” 

“ So  it  is,”  was  the  reply  of  the  commandant.  “ It 
represents  the  actual  appearance  of  the  earth.” 

“ It  is  round,  then  ! ” exclaimed  both  of  the  brothers 
in  a breath. 

“ So  the  Dutch  scholar,  from  whom  I purchased  it 
through  young  Konishi,  alleges,”  was  the  reply. 

“We  had  heard  from  Konishi,”  replied  they,  “that 
such  was  the  case.  But  we  cannot  understand  the 
matter  at  all.  How  can  it  possibly  be  round  ? This 
fact  is  contrary  to  the  universal  and  unalterable  expe- 
rience of  our  countrymen.  It  is  also  contrary  to  our 


148 


Mito  Yashiki. 


reason.  How  can  we  believe  that,  which  we  cannot 
understand,  to  be  true  ? Can  you  explain  this  matter 
unto  us  so  that  we  may  understand  it  ? ” 

“ Ah  ! my  young  friends,”  replied  he,  “ I fear  that  I 
do  not  understand  the  matter  any  better  than  you  do. 
Nevertheless  I believe  the  earth  to  be  round.” 

“ What ! Do  you  then  believe  that  which  you  cannot 
understand  ? ” was  the  astonished  rejoinder. 

“ Yes,  my  young  friends,”  replied  he,  “ I am  prepared 
to  make  even  that  admission.  I do  not  allege  that  my 
intellect  is  any  keener  than  yours,  but  I have  lived  about 
twice  as  long  on  this  earth  (be  it  round  or  flat)  as  you 
have,  and  I have  learned  two  very  stubborn  facts,  which, 
on  sundry  occasions,  quite  paralyze  my  reason  and 
make  me  very  distrustful-  thereof.  In  the  first  place 
I have  learned  that  I am  compelled  to  believe  many 
things  that  I cannot  understand  at  all, — and  not  only  to 
believe  them,  but  also  adapt  myself  and  my  plans  just  as 
if  I did  fully  understand  those  inscrutable  things.  Let 
me  illustrate  with  a few  examples  this  first  fact.  Our 
province  you  know  is  a long  and  narrow  strip  of  territory 
stretching  along  the  shores  of  the  ocean.  Our  capital 
city,  Mito,  is  not  over  seven  or  eight  miles  from  these 
waters. 

“ During  my  boyhood  I spent  the  summer  in  my 
father’s  villa  near  the  shore.  It  did  not  take  long  for  me 
to  find  out  that  during  certain  hours  the  long  strip  of 
sandy  beach  in  front  of  our  house  was  covered  with 
water,  and  that  during  other  hours  it  was  quite  free  from 
water.  Very  naturally  I adapted  my  sports  to  the  emer- 
gency of  the  case, — romping  there  at  low  tide  and 
absconding  when  the  mighty  waves  rushed  shoreward. 
And  I soon  found  that  all  the  shore  dwellers  adapted 
themselves  to  the  emergency  of  the  same  circumstance, 
— that  every  fisherman  pulled  his  boat  and  spread  his  nets 
far  above  high-water  mark,  that  every  hamlet  stood  far 
back  of  the  line  of  sea-weed  and  drift-wood,  and  that 
even  my  father  had  built  his  villa  beyond  the  reach  of 
the  restless  waves.  I never  understood  why  those  waters 


A Brief  Interview  with  the  Old  Prince.  1 49 


rose  and  fell  at  regular  intervals  during  the  day  and 
night.  Even  now  I fail  to  comprehend  the  cause  of  this 
great  phenomenon.  Yet  I have  never  ceased  to  believe 
that  those  waters  did  rise  and  fall  at  regular  intervals 
along  the  entire  sea-coast,  and  if  I were  to  build  a 
villa  to-day  on  any  part  of  the  coast  of  Dai-Nippon, 
I would  build  it  above  high-water  mark,  even  though  I am 
unable  to  understand  why  there  should  be  any  high- 
water  mark  at  all.  I must  believe  the  stubborn  fact 
although  I fail  to  understand  it. 

“ Here  is  another  example.  I do  not  understand  how 
the  eating  of  food  sustains  life  in  my  body,  yet  I believe 
that  it  does  sustain  life  in  me,  and  accordingly  I grace- 
fully accept  and  adapt  myself  to  this  stubborn  fact. 
Again , I do  not  understand  the  process  whereby  I lift  my 
arm.  I fail  to  understand  the  subtile  power  that  moves 
the  various  muscles  of  my  body.  I fail  to  understand  the 
mysterious  connection  between  my  will  and  the  tissues  of 
my  body,  whereby  I act  and  move.  Yet  I fully  believe 
that  I can  act  and  move  whenever  I choose  to  make 
volition.  Will  either  of  you  gentlemen  in  the  midst  of  a 
fierce  fencing  bout  fail  to  believe  that  a descending  foil 
will  smite  you  on  the  head  because  you  do  not  under- 
stand the  muscular  process  whereby  that  foil  got  there  ? 
I apprehend  that  you  will  indulge  in  a masterly  parry 
even  though  you  fail  to  understand  any  better  the  theory 
of  muscular  action  than  you  do  the  theory  of  the  earth’s 
rotundity.  In  short,  gentlemen,  I could  multiply  exam- 
ples indefinitely,  but  it  will  be  time  wasted.  The  longer 
you  gentlemen  live  the  more  will  you  become  convinced 
that  you  believe  multitudes  of  things  that  you  do  not 
understand. 

“ Then  the  second  stubborn  fact  that  I have  found  out 
is  that  the  standard  of  my  reason  is  very  fluctuating. 
Many  things  appeared  reasonable  to  me  as  a boy  that  ap- 
peared ridiculous  to  me  as  a young  man.  And  many 
things  that  appeared  quite  consistent  to  me  as  a young 
man  became  laughable  when  I grew  older.  Things  that 
appeared  reasonable  to  me  ten  years  ago — yea,  even  six 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


150 

months  ago — I cannot  now  reconcile  with  my  reason. 
One  year  ago  the  reasoning  mind  of  Dai-Nippon  would 
have  laughed  to  scorn  anybody  who  had  alleged  that  a 
ship  could  sail  against  wind  and  tide  ; yet  last  summer  the 
barbarian  fleet  came  up  Yedo  bay  in  the  teeth  of  a gale 
and  against  the  bosom  of  an  ebb  tide  ! What  is  your 
reason  good  for  ? Pray,  what  is  the  standard  of  human 
reason  ? The  Dutch  report  that  when  their  ambassador 
told  the  king  of  Siam  that  water  in  Holland  sometimes 
became  quite  solid  like  stone,  he  scoffed  at  him  and 
said  that  such  could  not  be  the  fact,  because  it  would  be 
contrary  to  the  reason  and  the  universal  and  unalterable 
experience  of  all  Siam.  Yet  we  know  that  water  even 
here  in  Yedo  sometimes  becomes  solid,  and  that  up  north 
it  becomes  solid  and  remains  so  for  many  months.  Pray, 
what  kind  of  a test  is  human  reason  when  it  fluctuates 
perpetually,  so  that  what  our  ancestors  deemed  reasona- 
ble succeeding  generations  laughed  to  scorn,  what  we 
deemed  reasonable  in  youth  we  sneer  at  in  maturer 
years,  and  what  in  our  old  age  we  deem  reasonable  our 
children  will  scoff  at  within  a decade  of  our  death  ? It  is 
the  course  of  wisdom  to  hold  in  abeyance  those  matters 
not  demanding  immediate  action,  and  which  we  do  not 
understand.  It  is  silly  to  repudiate  any  statement  merely 
because  we  fail  to  understand  it. 

“ But,  young  gentlemen,  while  all  this  may  be  very  en- 
tertaining, it  is  not  business.  Let  me  see,  here  is  a map 
of  Yedo  bay,  together  with  the  adjoining  provinces.  Let 
us  proceed  to  map  out  your  course.  Now  I think  that 
the  western  side  of  the  bay  will  be  the  best  one  for  our 
operations,  but  the 'great  question  is  how  to  get  there. 
The  Bakufu  sentinels  swarm  between  here  and  Uraga.  It 
will  be  useless  for  us  to  try  to  slip  you  through  them,  for 
we  would  probably  have  your  two  heads  adorning 
our  gateposts  as  a warning  against  future  attempts  at 
such  an  offence.  Nor  can  you  very  well  skirt  the  eastern 
shore  of  the  bay,  for  the  sentinels  are  almost  as  numerous 
there.  If  we  can  only  land  you  on  the  beach  near 
Yokoska,  far  down  the  western  side  of  the  bay,  then  you 


A Brief  Interview  with  the  Old  Prince,  i 5 1 

can  hide  away  in  some  hamlet  or  fishing  village  and 
assume  but  little  risk.  But  how  shall  we  set  you  down 
at  that  spot  ? That  is  a very  difficult  question  to 
answer.” 

And,  indeed,  it  so  proved  itself,  for  they  puzzled  over 
it  nearly  all  day.  His  Grace,  the  ex-Daimio,  when  he 
spread  out  the  map  and  grandly  pointed  with  his  fan  to 
the  course  to  be  pursued,  probably  realized  the  difficulty 
of  the  situation  as  little  as  did  the  Czar  of  Russia  in  the 
matter  where  he  drew  a straight  line  from  St.  Petersburg 
to  Moscow,  and  bade  his  engineers  construct  a railway 
accordingly.  It  was  finally  decided  that  the  young  men 
should  go  up  to  Mito  ostensibly  on  business,  and  should 
embark  in  a fishing  boat  at  that  point  some  night,  and 
slyly  steal  down  the  coast  to  the  eastern  promontory  of 
Yedobay,  and  then  cut  across  to  the  western  shore  under 
cover  of  darkness  and  find  some  good  hiding-place 
around  Yokoska,  where  they  were  to  wait  until  the  fleet 
had  made  its  appearance  and  had  taken  permanent 
anchorage,  when  they  were  to  spy  out  all  they  could 
until  the  departure  of  the  ships.  Then  they  were  to 
steal  backfcy  the  same  route  by  which  they  had  gone. 

As  the  route  was  very  circuitous,  and  might,  in  case  of 
tempestuous  weather,  involve  many  weeks,  it  was  decided 
that  the  journey  should  commence  on  the  very  next  day. 


CHAPTER  XII. 


A CHANGE  OF  SCENE. 

Accordingly,  at  dawn  of  the  next  day,  two  horses 
duly  caparisoned  were  led  forth  by  the  bettos  from  the 
stables  of  Mito  Yashiki,  and  were  taken  to  the  northern 
gateway  to  await  the  arrival  of  their  riders.  These  bettSs 
were  wiry  little  grooms,  who  invariably  trotted  alongside 
of  the  horses  from  one  end  of  the  journey  to  the  other. 
Of  course  the  horses  did  not  go  at  full  speed.  They 
ambled  along  leisurely  at  the  rate  of  about  twenty-five 
miles  per  day,  and  were  carefully  cared  for  by  their  bettos 
at  each  resting-place.  Rapid  riding  was  a rare  thing  in 
that  country.  When  Julius  Caesar  left  Rome  to  place 
himself  at  the  head  of  his  legions  on  the  farther  slope  of 
the  Alps,  he  is  said  to  have  taken  but  eight  days  in  riding 
that  great  distance.  With  the  same  relays  of  horses  he 
could  have  covered  the  same  distance  on  the  highways  of 
Japan,  but  he  would  have  shaken  off  his  bettos  very  soon, 
and  he  would  have  shaken  up  the  sorry  nags  of  the  em- 
pire worse  than  he  shook  up  the  Helvetii,  and  in  a man- 
ner quite  sufficient  to  have  gained  their  eternal  enmity. 

Just  before  sunrise  the  commandant,  together  with 
the  two  brothers,  slowly  approached  the  gateway.  The 
young  men  purported  to  be  the  bearers  of  official  mes- 
sages  to  the  castle  at  Mito.  But  why  should  messengers 
have  so  much  gold  and  silver  coin  tied  about  their 
waists  beneath  their  clothing?  And  how  happened  it 
that  the  alleged  messages  never  found  their  way  within 
the  Mito  moats,  but  were  carefully  burnt  by  their  bearers 
on  the  night  of  their  arrival  in  Mito  ? But  we  must  not 
anticipate  events.  “ When  you  reach  Mito,”  said  the 


152 


A Change  of  Scene. 


153 


commandant,  as  they  neared  the  horses,  “turn  off  from 
the  street  that  leads  to  the  castle,  and  follow  the  one  to 
the  right  hand  and  go  out  toward  the  suburbs,  where  my 
father’s  house  is  situated,  and,  after  having  communi- 
cated my  message  to  him,  journey  on  in  the  night  toward 
our  sea-side  villa.  Next  day  he  will  join  you  there,  and 
will  assist  you  in  securing  a boat  suitable  for  your  pur- 
poses. Then,  on  the  very  first  favorable  day,  embark  on 
your  ‘fishing  excursion.’  Every  thing  else  connected 
with  this  expedition  will  be  left  to  your  natural  good- 
sense.  May  great  success  crown  your  journey  ! ” 

So  saying,  he  bade  them  farewell,  and  riders  and  grooms 
trotted  out  of  the  gateway  along  the  broad  road  that 
wound  among  the  green  hills  environing  the  northern 
suburbs  of  Yedo.  Long  before  midday  they  had  reached 
the  Mito-kaido,  and  were  journeying  through  the  vast 
rice  fields  that  stretched  away  to  the  northeast.  By  leis- 
urely trotting,  they  reached  the  low,  sandy  banks  of  the 
broad  and  rapid  Ton^gawa — twenty-seven  miles  on  their 
way — late  in  the  afternoon.  On  the  opposite  shore, 
among  the  trees,  stood  an  inviting  village.  It  was  de- 
cided to  spend  the  night  there.  Accordingly,  a long  flat- 
bottomed  boat  was  engaged,  the  horses,  after  consider- 
able “ moral  suasion,”  were  finally  induced  to  embark, 
and  the  ferry-men  poled  the  craft  across  to  the  other 
side. 

On  the  following  day  the  party  started  bright  and  early, 
and  trudged  through  twenty-seven  miles  of  rice-fields, 
moorlands,  and  marshy  lagoons,  until,  at  nightfall,  they 
entered  the  town  of  Inayoshi,  situated  near  the  western 
end  of  a large  lake,  which  the  retreating  waters  of  the 
Pacific  Ocean  had  left  as  a footprint  a thousand  years 
or  so  before  that  time.  This  lake  had  a circuit  of  nearly 
ninety  miles.  Its  shores  were  low  and  well  wooded. 
And  it  was  filled  with  islets  of  most  picturesque  beauty, 
one  of  them  being  of  sufficient  size  to  support  a popula- 
tion of  sixteen  hundred  people.  Dining  on  broiled  eels, 
for  which  this  section  of  Hitachi  was  celebrated,  our 
friends  fortified  themselves  for  the  last  day’s  journey  of 


154 


Mito  Yashiki. 


twenty-six  miles,  which  furnished  scenery  somewhat  sim- 
ilar to  that  already  described,  and  which  brought  them 
late  in  the  evening  to  the  southwestern  suburb  of  Mito. 

They  rode  down  the  broad,  clean  street  that  traversed 
the  lower  town  from  one  extremity  to  the  other.  Above 
them,  on  the  left-hand  side,  rose  the  lofty,  swarded  em- 
bankments of  the  castle,  draped  with  magnificent  trees, 
and  surmounted  with  white  walls  and  turrets  that  glis- 
tened weirdly  in  the  moonlight.  Passing  beyond  the  mer- 
cantile quarters,  they  came  to  the  region  where  the 
small  yashikis  of  retainers  were  spread  out  on  either  side 
of  the  great  thoroughfare.  They  speedily  found  the 
particular  one  of  which  they  were  in  quest,  and  duly  an- 
nounced themselves  at  the  wicket  gate.  After  a short 
delay,  an  elderly  gentleman  emerged  and  announced 
himself  to  be  the  person  whom  they  were  seeking. 
Tomokichi  at  once  dismounted,  and,  after  the  inter- 
change of  the  profoundest  of  salutations,  quietly  com- 
municated to  him  the  message  from  his  son,  the  com- 
mandant of  Mito  Yashiki.  Very  naturally,  the  abrupt- 
ness of  the  proceedings  created  considerable  surprise, 
with,  at  first,  a mild  flavoring  of  incredulity  ; but  Tomo- 
kichi produced  tangible  evidence  that  at  once  put  all 
suspicions  to  rest.  The  courteous  old  gentleman  at  once 
ordered  a servant  to  guide  the  visitors  to  his  villa  at  the 
sea-shore,  and  to  make  them  as  comfortable  as  possible 
until  his  own  arrival  there  next  day. 

Journeying  now  with  accelerated  speed,  our  belated 
travellers  followed  the  road  that  went  winding  among 
hills,  whose  picturesque  beauty  was  made  highly  conspic- 
uous by  the  bright  moonlight.  Finally,  reaching  some 
rising  ground,  they  halted  several  minutes  to  survey  the 
magnificent  scenery  that  spread  out  on  all  sides.  Behind 
them  glimmered  the  lights  of  the  upper  town  on  the  high 
hills  north  of  the  castle.  The  citadel,  crowning  the  crest 
of  the  loftiest  ridge,  loomed  up  grandly  in  the  shimmer- 
ing light,  with  its  white  battlements  gleaming  like  silver 
against  a dark  background  of  majestic  trees.  In  their 
immediate  front  were  sighing  pine  groves,  that  fell  rapidly 


A Change  of  Scene. 


155 


away  into  dunes  and  sand-drifts,  which  met  the  mighty 
waves  of  the  thundering  ocean  that  rolled  away  in  awful 
grandeur  to  the  distant  horizon,  where  the  queenly  moon 
paled  the  stars  with  her  brilliancy.  The  high  wind  was 
blowing  the  spray  from  the  foaming  surf  far  inland,  and 
the  gauzy  mists  sped  whispering  through  the  foliage  of 
the  groves, — “ the  voice  of  the  ocean , in  accents  disconsolate , 
ansu<ered  the  wail  of  the  forest .” 

Resuming  their  romantic  course,  the  party  soon  reached 
the  beach,  and,  after  following  its  stately  sweep  for  a con- 
siderable distance,  they  finally  reached  the  villa,  a neat 
and  pretty  Japanese  house,  surrounded  by  a beautiful 
garden.  It  was  apparently  deserted.  But  a few  loud 
knocks  at  the  front  door  speedily  brought  the  family  that 
had  been  left  in  charge  to  the  scene  of  disturbance.  The 
door  was  slid  back,  and  a very  much  demoralized  top- 
knot  was  thrust  out  upon  the  scene.  This  represented 
the  major-general  of  the  premises.  As  the  tone  of  the 
conversation  outside  became  reassuring,  there  appeared 
a head  of  dishevelled  hair,  a set  of  glittering  black  teeth, 
and  a smiling,  inquisitive  face,  slipping  out  upon  the 
veranda  beside  the  major-general.  This  second  person- 
age was  the  captain  of  the  household  forces — the  beloved 
spouse.  Then  there  gradually  glided  out  from  unknown 
quarters  sundry  infants,  who  cautiously  marshalled  them- 
selves in  line  with  their  parents,  and  timidly  clung  to- 
gether when  any  thing  in  the  strangers’  manner  or  speech 
startled  them.  And  a very  picturesque  group  they  made 
there  in  the  moonlight ! 

When  the  inmates  had  fully  comprehended  the  situa- 
tion, they  hustled  around  with  the  most  commendable 
amiability  and  efficiency.  The  best  room  was  at  once 
placed  at  the  disposal  of  the  guests.  A blazing  hebachi 
was  speedily  brought  in,  for  the  weather  was  yet  chilly 
and  the  high  wind  that  had  been  blowing  for  two  days 
sent  its  piercing  breath  through  every  crevice  of  the  frail 
structure.  Refreshments  were  then  placed  before  the 
guests,  and  they  ravenously  partook  thereof  while  the 
heavy  bedding  was  being  spread  out  on  the  floor.  Then, 


Mito  Yashiki. 


156 

undressing  themselves,  our  party  resigned  themselves  to 
that  sweet  and  mysterious  influence  whose  subtle  spell 
we  all  acknowledge  even  though  we  fail  to  comprehend 
how  the  drowsy  torpor  creeps  over  our  being. 

They  all  slept  late  into  the  following  morning.  When 
they  finally  roused  themselves  they  found  that  the  lady 
of  the  house  had  prepared  a hot  bath  for  them  in  order 
that  they  might  enjoy  their  breakfast  better  after  having 
relaxed  their  sore  muscles  and  stiff  joints.  After  break- 
fast they  found  that  the  wind  had  gone  down,  and  that 
the  day  was  one  of  those  deliciously  balmy  ones  so  com- 
mon at  that  season.  They  sat  on  the  veranda  and 
smoked  their  pipes  while  enjoying  the  warm  sunshine 
and  gazing  upon  the  roaring  surf.  Toward  midday  a 
norimon  appeared  on  the  beach.  As  it  approached  the 
house  the  young  men  correctly  surmised  that  their  host 
was  within  it.  When  he  arrived  he  most  cordially 
greeted  them  and  entered  with  immense  zest  into  their 
schemes.  He  sent  the  horses  and  the  grooms  back  to 
his  yashiki,  to  be  there  kept  until  the  return  of  the  young 
adventurers.  He  then  despatched  his  attendant  down 
to  the  fishing  hamlets  along  the  shore  to  make  enquiries 
as  to  what  boats  were  available.  As  the  water  was  too 
rough  for  any  thing  to  be  attempted  on  that  day,  the  gen- 
tlemen spent  the  time  in  talking  over  matters  of  general 
interest.  Late  in  the  afternoon  the  attendant  reported 
that  there  were  three  boats  from  which  a selection  could 
be  made.  Accordingly,  on  the  following  morning,  the 
party  strolled  along  the  beach  to  inspect  the  crafts.  One 
of  them  was  too  small.  Another  one  seeme'd  too  much 
weather-beaten.  But  the  third  one  seemed  quite  well 
adapted  for  the  purpose  in  view.  It  was  comparatively 
new  and  contained  sufficient  room  for  ten  people.  It 
carried  a single  mast,  with  a square  sail.  On  each  side 
of  the  stern  was  room  for  two  scullers.  The  boat  was 
forthwith  hired  for  one  month. 

On  the  following  day  the  water  was  so  quiet  that  our 
young  adventurers  decided  to  start.  Accordingly  they 
began  to  load  the  boat  as  it  lay  on  the  beach.  A man 


A Change  of  Scene. 


157 


climbed  on  deck  and  caught  the  bundles  that  were  tossed 
up  to  him.  Then  the  passengers  and  the  crew  went 
aboard.  In  the  stern  there  was  a little  cabin  large 
enough  for  three  or  four  Japanese  to  sit  in  comfortably. 
In  the  bow  of  the  boat  there  was  quite  a forecastle  where 
five  or  six  men  could  pack  themselves  away  and  sleep. 
Orders  were  given  for  abundance  of  warm  bedding  to  be 
brought  down  from  the  villa  and  to  be  placed  in  the 
after-cabin,  and  for  an  abundant  supply  of  provisions  to 
be  stowed  away  in  a deep  hold  beneath  the  plankings 
amidship.  When  every  thing  was  ready  for  the  start,  a 
large  number  of  fishermen  placed  their  shoulders  to  the 
graceful  craft  and  slid  her  down  the  soft  sand  into 
the  tumbling  surf,  giving  her  such  momentum  that  she 
glided  far  out  into  smoother  water  beyond  danger  of 
capsizing.  The  scullers  soon  turned  her  prow  south- 
ward, and  the  journey  was  well  under  way. 

The  crew  comprised  ten  stout  fishermen.  Four  of 
them  were  to  work  the  sculls,  two  of  them  were  to  keep 
the  vessel  in  trim,  and  the  other  four  were  to  constitute 
a relay  of  scullers.  The  distance  down  the  coast  to  the 
destined  point  in  Yedo  bay  was  fully  two  hundred  miles, 
— a journey  that  would  take  ten  days  of  very  leisurely 
travelling.  Frequent  stops  were  to  be  made  along  the 
coast,  and  the  nights  were  to  be  spent  at  anchor.  The 
morning  and  the  evening  meals  were  to  be  cooked  ashore. 
It  had  been  announced  to  the  crew  that  the  two  satnurai 
were  seeking  recreation  and  desired  to  take  a fishing  ex- 
cursion along  the  coast.  The  black-eyed  fellows  blandly 
accepted  the  statement  without  comment  ; but  they 
shrewdly  drew  their  own  conclusion  that,  inasmuch  as 
the  gentry  were  not  addicted  to  risking  themselves  in 
that  fashion  on  the  tempestuous  deep  for  a few  cheap 
fishes  that  could  be  purchased  ashore,  the  young  gentle- 
men had  probably  gotten  into  some  political  scrape  and 
were  going  boating  until  the  affair  had  blown  over.  But 
who  they  were,  or  what  their  schemes  might  be,  was  none 
of  their  business.  They  were  well  paid  for  their  services, 
and  they  well  understood  that  an  impassable  barrier  lay 


158 


Mito  Yashiki. 


between  them  and  the  samurai  class,  so  that  they  were 
not  at  liberty  to  pry  into  any  thing  pertaining  to  their 
affairs. 

As  the  wind  was  favorable  they  spread  the  sail  and 
soon  drew  away  from  the  shore,  bound  for  a hamlet 
twenty  miles  down  the  coast,  where  they  intended  to 
spend  the  night.  The  boat  tossed  about  a good  deal, 
and  the  young  men  soon  began  to  experience  those  well- 
defined  sensations  familiar  to  all  who  have  been  sea-sick. 
At  first  they  were  quite  alarmed,  not  knowing  what 
might  be  the  matter.  They  fought  valiantly  against  the 
overpowering  qualmishness,  turned  deathly  white,  and 
then  precipitately  rushed  to  the  side  of  the  boat  and 
balanced  themselves  as  gracefully  as  they  could  over  the 
gunwales,  while  “ the  voice  of  deep  answered  unto  deep.” 
This  uncouth  position  mortified  them  exceedingly,  but 
they  were  constrained  to  adopt  it  as  no  other  alternative 
appeared  available.  The  captain  of  the  crew,  however, 
speedily  assured  them  that  there  need  be  no  occasion  for 
alarm,  and  suggested  a swallow  of  salt  water  and  a re- 
tirement to  their  cabin,  where  they  could  lie  down.  The 
good-hearted  fellow  nursed  them  quite  tenderly  for  sev- 
eral hours,  and,  when  they  drew  near  to  the  hamlet,  he 
ran  the  boat  into  smooth  water  and  pulled  down  the  sail, 
ordering  the  men  to  scull  the  balance  of  the  distance. 

There  was  a secluded  cove,  locked  in  with  well-wooded 
hills,  near  the  hamlet.  Toward  this  point  the  boat  was 
steered  and  anchored  close  to  the  wide,  sandy  beach, — so 
close,  in  fact,  that  the  men  easily  stepped  overboard  and 
waded  ashore,  where  they  set  to  work  in  a sheltered  spot 
to  prepare  the  evening  meal.  When  the  rice  was  cooked 
and  the  fresh  mackerel,  procured  from  the  neighboring 
hamlet,  was  duly  broiled,  the  meal  was  handed  over  the 
side  of  the  boat,  and  was  regularly  discussed  by  the 
hungry  crew.  The  captain,  acting  in  the  capacity  of 
steward,  personally  waited  on  his  cabin  passengers,  and 
served  them  bountifully  on  the  quarter-deck.  The 
morning  meal  was  prepared  and  served  in  a similar 
fashion.  The  boat  then  started  on  her  cruise.  There 


A Change  of  Scene. 


159 


was  a light  northerly  breeze,  and  she  stood  out  well  from 
the  shore  to  take  full  advantage  of  it.  This  day  was  far 
more  enjoyable  than  the  preceding  one  had  been,  inas- 
much as  the  qualmish  sensations  were  barely  felt.  After 
having  sailed  nearly  thirty  miles,  they  put  inshore  and 
began  leisurely  sculling  along  in  search  of  a quiet  spot 
for  spending  the  night.  This  part  of  the  coast  was  low, 
sandy,  and  well  covered  with  scrub  pines.  There  were 
but  few  coves  and  inlets.  However,  late  in  the  after- 
noon, they  found  a small  inlet  where  they  moored  their 
boat  and  spent  the  night.  On  the  following  day  they 
rounded  a bold  promontory,  and  changed  their  course  so 
as  to  point  southwesterly.  They  could  now  see  the  dim 
outlines  of  Fuji-yama  standing  out  faintly  against  the 
rosy  tints  of  the  evening  sky. 

Thus  they  continued  their  delightful  journey  down  the 
coast,  avoiding  as  far  as  possible  the  habitations  of  men, 
and  occasionally  throwing  out  their  fishing  tackle  with 
varying  success.  The  weather  was  fine  during  the  entire 
trip,  so  that  none  of  the  anticipated  delays  from  tempes- 
tuous weather  were  experienced.  On  the  evening  of  the 
ninth  day  they  stole  quietly  around  the  bold  promon- 
tory into  the  bay  of  Yedo.  It  now  became  necessary  for 
them  to  be  very  circumspect  in  their  movements,  because 
the  vigilant  shore  guards  were  on  every  commanding 
eminence,  watching  for  the  arrival  of  the  expected  ships. 
They  glided  quietly  across  the  bay  and  cast  anchor  in  a 
secluded  bight  until  the  dawn  was  sufficiently  advanced 
to  enable  them  to  select  a favot&ble  location  for  beach- 
ing the  boat.  Creeping  along  the  lovely  shores  in  the 
gray  dawn,  they  finally  came  upon  a secluded  fishing 
hamlet  on  an  exquisite  inlet.  A beautiful  range  of  hills 
crowded  the  fishermen’s  cottages  quite  close  upon  the 
broad  beach  and  shut  off  the  place  from  the  gaze  of  the 
world.  It  was  not  near  any  great  thoroughfare',  and  the 
only  exit  to  the  country  behind  was  a steep  foot-path 
that  zigzagged  up  the  cliff  to  the  summit,  and  then  went 
twisting  through  miles  of  woods  and  fields  to  a distant 
village.  Our  young  voyagers  accordingly  gave  orders 


i6o 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


for  landing.  The  boat  was  pulled  high  and  dry  up  on 
the  sand  in  line  with  several  other  fishing-boats  of  almost 
precisely  similar  appearance,  so  that  nothing  but  a 
special  enquiry  would  have  revealed  the  fact  that  there 
had  been  a new  arrival  at  the  hamlet. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


SHIP  AHOY  ! 

As  a matter  of  exact  history,  Tomokichi  and  Junzo 
had  reached  their  destination  many  days  prior  to  the 
arrival  of  the  fleet  of  Commodore  Perry,  so  that  they  had 
abundance  of  time  wherein  to  survey  the  vicinity  of  the 
locality  where  they  had  decided  to  establish  their  head- 
quarters. Giving  strict  orders  to  the  crew  to  make  no 
mention  of  whence  they  had  come  (but  to  reply,  when 
interrogated  by  the  fishermen  in  the  hamlets,  that  they 
had  been  sent  down  by  the  Bakufu  from  Yedo  to  watch 
for  the  expected  arrival  of  the  barbarian  ships  and  to 
watch'  their  movements  after  arrival),  the  young  spies 
proceeded  to  engage  a desirable  room  in  one  of  the 
cottages.  The  fact  that  they  wore  the  Tokugawa  crest 
(which,  as  vassals  of  Mito,  they  were  entitled  to  wear) 
rendered  their  story  exceedingly  plausible  ; and,  so  long 
as  their  crew  kept  aloof  from  the  inhabitants  of  the  place 
(which  they  were  under  orders  to  do),  there  was  hardly 
any  possibility  of  there  being  any  discovery  as  to  their 
true  character.  And  there  was  no  danger  of  the  timor- 
ous fishermen  plying  them  with  any  improper  questions, 
for  they  had  been  brought  up  to  dread  the  samurai. 

The  house  that  our  young  spies  selected  was  that  of 
the  headman  of  the  hamlet.  It  faced  the  wide  entrance 
to  the  inlet  and  gave  a splendid  view  of  the  waters  of  the 
bay.  The  roof  was  deeply  thatched  with  straw  ; and  in 
a long  trough  along  the  ridge-pole  there  were  planted 
lilies,  irises,  and  azaleas,  which  bloomed  in  their  seasons 
and  gave  a wonderfully  jaunty  air  to  the  roof.  There 
was  but  one  story,  and  that  was  surrounded  by  a broad 

161 


162 


Mito  Yashiki. 


veranda  on  all  sides.  The  large  room  opening  out  on 
the  front  veranda  was  the  one  selected  ; and  the  shojees 
at  the  back,  that  shut  it  off  from  the  rest  of  the  house, 
were  as  effective  in  keeping  out  intrusion  as  walls  of 
adamant  would  have  been, — for  the  timid  members  of 
the  family  shrank  out  of  sight  and  kept  themselves  in  the 
remotest  chambers  at  the  rear.  The  meals  were  always 
prepared  by  the  crew  as  before,  and  were  served  by  the 
captain  in  the  front  room.  All  the  land  about  the 
cottage  (and  there  was  considerable)  was  given  up  to 
gardening.  At  the  back  were  long  rows  of  garlic, 
radishes,  and  taro.  At  the  front  were  flowers  and  shrubs 
arranged  in  a manner  that  would  have  done  credit  to 
Mito  Yashiki  itself.  A hedge  of  hollyhock  and  square- 
trimmed  cedar  bushes  surrounded  the  place.  Camellias, 
flowering  almonds,  and  cherry  blossoms  were  in  full 
bloom,  as  the  sheltered  locality  and  the  powerful  sun 
made  all  vegetation  very  forward. 

The  climate  of  this  promontory  was  balmy  and  de- 
licious, like  that  of  all  those  along  the  southern  shores 
of  the  empire,  jutting  so  boldly  into  the  warm  waters  of 
the  Pacific.  All  of  the  cottages,  in  fact,  were  quite  as 
tastefully  arranged  as  this  one.  No  matter  how  poor  a 
Japanese  was,  yet  he  delighted  in  his  garden,  and  would 
cultivate  a plot  of  ground  only  a few  feet  square  with  as 
much  assiduity  as  if  it  were  a farm.  In  the  cliff  back  of 
the  hamlet  was  a deep  and  wide  fissure  that  had  probably 
been  cleft  through  the  black  rocks  during  some  earth- 
quake. Shrubs  and  bushes  had  sprung  out  of  the 
numerous  crevices  in  its  walls,  thus  giving  the  place  the 
appearance  of  a beautiful  grotto. 

A spring  of  cold  water,  as  clear  as  crystal,  gushed 
from  the  farther  end  and  emptied  itself  into  a capacious 
granite  basin,  over  whose  sides  it  poured  in  a steady 
stream  that  gurgled  down  the  rocks  and  flowed  across 
the  sands  until  it  mingled  with  the  briny  waters  that 
lapped  the  beach.  At  various  points  along  the  course  of 
the  stream  were  deep  and  wide  pools  that  had  been 
scooped  out  and  then  walled  in  with  pebbles  so  as  to 


Ship  Ahoy  ! 


163 


form  basins  where  clothing  could  be  washed  and  where 
fishes  and  vegetables  could  be  cleaned.  Far  back  in  the 
fissure  stood  a little  Shinto  shrine,  upon  a rocky  ledge 
among  the  bushes.  A bowlful  of  rice,  a fish’s  head,  and 
a small  jar  of  sakS  stood  before  the  latticed  doors.  The 
thrifty  Buddhist  priests  had  evidently  not  considered 
this  secluded  nook  worth  the  tilling,  and  had  left  the 
simple  denizens  undisturbed  in  the  exercise  of  the 
religion  of  their  remotest  progenitors,  who  chased  the 
wild-boar  and  the  deer  through  the  primeval  forests  that 
covered  the  land  as  with  a garment.  In  short,  our 
friends  could  hardly  have  found  a lovelier  or  a more 
sheltered  spot  wherein  to  spend  a few  weeks. 

It  was  a dreamy  kind  of  existence  that  they  led  for 
the  next  week  or  so.  The  denizens  of  the  hamlet  were 
usually  astir  at  daybreak.  The  women-folk  had  break- 
fast ready  in  a very  short  space  of  time,  and  by  sunrise 
the  fishermen  had  slid  their  boats  into  the  water  and 
were  under  bellying  sails  down  the  bay.  Sometimes 
they  went  out  to  sea  for  their  prey ; sometimes  they 
fished  in  the  deep  waters  at  the  mouth  of  the  bay ; and 
sometimes  they  angled  in  the  still  waters  along  the  coast. 
Generally,  however,  the  waters  of  the  bay  provided  all 
that  they  needed,  and,  by  about  the  middle  of  the  after- 
noon, they  took  advantage  of  the  sea-breeze  and  came 
scudding  home  with  great  £clat.  Between  four  and  five 
o’clock  every  afternoon  the  waters  of  the  bay  presented 
a beautiful  sight,  with  multitudes  of  white  sails  scattered 
about  in  every  direction. 

From  the  top  of  some  one  of  the  hills  surrounding  the 
shores,  you  could  have  watched  the  on-coming  fleets 
dashing  along  in  the  glorious  sunshine,  and  slipping 
away  like  shadows  into  the  numerous  inlets  about  the 
enchanting  shores.  Sometimes  the  boats  would  glide  out 
on  moonlight  nights  and  sweep,  ghost-like,  over  the  still 
waves  in  quest  of  those  denizens  of  the  deep  that  love  to 
sport  in  the  moonbeams.  And  sometimes  they  would 
venture  out  on  dark  nights  and  kindle  torches  to  allure 
their  victims  into  the  vicinity  of  the  boats,  where  the 


164 


Mito  Yashiki. 


meshes  of  the  cruel  nets  could  be  cast  about  them. 
Weird  and  spectre-like  seemed  the  bay  on  those  occa- 
sions, with  jets  of  flame  dancing  all  over  its  surface  as  far 
as  the  eye  could  reach,  while  the  subdued  tones  of  the 
fishermen  could  be  heard  chanting  some  monotonous 
measure,  whose  mystic  rhythm  was  supposed  to  be 
freighted  with  spells  that  charmed  and  allured  the 
scaly  dwellers  of  the  deep. 

Oh  ! a hardy  and  a cheerful  set  of  fellows  were  those 
fishermen  along  the  shores  of  Dai-Nippon.  Their  vo- 
cation had  been  hereditary  for  so  many,  many  centuries, 
that  each  rising  generation  literally  took  to  the  water 
from  infancy,  for  the  little  toddlers  were  able  to  swim 
nearly  as  soon  as  they  could  walk.  After  having  received 
merely  the  rudiments  of  an  exceedingly  primitive  educa- 
tion, the  little  fellows  accompanied  their  fathers  on  their 
fishing  expeditions.  They  grew  up  to  be  densely  igno- 
rant, but  jolly  and  hearty  men,,  and  very  expert  in 
whatever  pertained  to  their  particular  occupation.  These 
simple  people,  dimly  realizing  that  behind  the  phenomena 
of  nature  there  dwelt  some  unknown  power,  endeavored 
to  propitiate  it  with  the  traditionary  rites  and  ceremonies 
of  Shinto,  the  indigenous  fetich  of  the  primeval  savages 
that  fished  and  hunted  by  forest  and  stream  so  many 
centuries  before.  And  they  had,  indeed,  developed  into 
a superstitious  and  timid  set  of  amiable  boors,  knowing 
nothing  of  the  literature  of  their  country,  and  knowing 
next  to  nothing  about  what  was  transpiring  beyond  the 
hills  back  of  their  hamlet.  So  long  as  they  caught  their 
regular  supply  of  fish  and  could  sell  it  at  a fair  price, — 
what  cared  they  for  court  and  rabble  ? So  far  as  they 
themselves  were  concerned,  the  Shoguns  might  usurp 
the  imperial  authority  for  myriads  of  years,  and  the 
emasculated  Daimios  might  make  childish  faces  at  each 
other  until  the  stars  grew  pale  over  the  scene.  The 
sparkling  waves,  the  bracing  air,  and  the  thrilling  expec- 
tancy of  the  fisherman’s  life  were  quite  sufficient  to 
satisfy  their  humble  ambition. 

After  two  or  three  days  of  rest  the  order  was  given  to 


Ship  Ahoy  ! 


165 

the  Mito  men  to  go  out  on  a fishing  excursion.  The 
greater  part  of  the  day  was  spent  just  inside  of  the  prom- 
ontory that  formed  the  western  side  of  the  bay.  Good 
luck  attended  their  exertions  and  they  spent  the  next 
two  days  in  cleaning,  salting,  and  drying  their  haul. 
Whenever  the  young  spies  accompanied  the  boat  they 
took  good  care  to  keep  themselves  well  secluded  in  the 
cabin,  lest  prying  eyes  on  shore  might  detect  their 
presence  and  institute  disagreeable  investigations.  By 
thus  keeping  their  men  occupied  they  succeeded  in 
killing  time  and  in  preventing  that  promiscuous  famili- 
arity with  the  natives  which  leisure  and  idleness  would 
surely  have  engendered. 

February  was  nearly  half  gone  when  one  day  our 
young  friends  were  lying  on  the  tatamis  enjoying  the 
delightful  prospect  over  the  blue  waters  of  the  bay. 
Their  boat  had  been  gone  several  hours  on  an  excursion 
down  the  bay,  and  they  were  languidly  sucking  their  pipes 
and  querying  as  to  whether  it  was  not  nearly  time  for  it 
to  put  in  an  appearance.  It  was  a kind  of  shore-day  for 
many  of  the  natives,  some  of  whom  were  drying  their  nets 
on  the  broad  white  sands,  while  others  were  busily 
engaged  in  curing  their  last  catch  of  fish.  The  children 
made  the  place  vocal  with  their  romping  mirth  in  the 
gardens  and  along  the  shore,  for  their  terror  of  the  two 
samurai  had  worn  off  sufficiently  to  permit  of  this  much 
of  boisterous  fun.  The  little  urchins  took  good  care, 
however,  to  keep  out  of  the  garden  where  the  strange 
visitors  could  see  them. 

“ I am  beginning  to  get  tired  of  this  kind  of  life,” 
Junzo  was  saying. 

“ So  am  I,”  was  Tomokichi’s  hearty  response.  “ It  is 
all  very  well  to  live  thus  for  a few  days,  but  the  excite- 
ment soon  dies  away  under  such  tame  surroundings. 
These  simple  people  stimulate  no  thought  and  exchange 
no  ideas  beyond  the  merest  commonplace  sentiments. 
The  sense  of  danger  has  entirely  disappeared  in  this 
atmosphere  of  peaceful  security.” 

“Yes,”  replied  Junzo,  as  he  slowly  picked  the  glossy 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


1 66 

orange  leaves  from  a twig  that  he  held  in  his  hand, 
“ these  surroundings  are  certainly  very  dull.  I am  going 
to  lie  down  here  on  the  tatami  and  take  a nap.  By  the 
way,  did  any  of  the  native  boats  accompany  our  boat  to- 
day ? ” 

“ I believe  two  of  them  did,”  replied  his  brother. 

“ I do  not  much  like  our  men  becoming  so  familiar 
with  these  natives,”  continued  Junzo,  “ but  I suppose  it 
cannot  be  helped.  I fear  something  may  leak  out. — 
Well,  here  I go  for  a nap  ; I cannot  allow  my  mind 
to  become  too  heavily  burdened  with  care.” 

So  saying,  he  spread  himself  out  on  the  floor  and  lay 
quietly  for  several  minutes.  Suddenly  he  lifted  his  head 
and  exclaimed,  “ What  is  that  throbbing  noise?” 

“ I hear  nothing,”  replied  his  brother. 

“Neither  do  I now  that  I am  sitting  up,”  said  Junzo. 
“ Nevertheless,  when  recumbent  I heard  such  a sound 
most  distinctly.  There  must  be  some  water  in  my  ear.  I 
splashed  about  tremendously  in  the  bath  this  morning.” 
So  saying,  he  again  lay  down.  But  he  soon  arose  and  ex- 
claimed in  a tone  of  growing  interest  : 

“ Surely  I cannot  be  mistaken  this  time  for  I certainly 
did  hear  a long-continued  and  regular  throbbing  louder 
than  before.  I am  positive  that  the  water  that  may  be  in 
my  ear  has  absolutely  nothing  to  do  with  the  sound. 
There  ! I hear  it  again  just  as  soon  as  I place  my  ear  to 
the  floor.  I am  not  mistaken.  Just  put  your  ear  to  the 
floor  and  listen.” 

Tomokichi,  with  considerable  interest  in  the  matter, 
did  as  his  brother  requested,  and,  placing  his  ear  to  the 
floor,  listened  attentively.  “ Surely  there  is  a throbbing 
of  a most  peculiar  nature,”  he  at  last  replied  with  ill- 
suppressed  excitement.  “ I wonder  what  it  can  be.  Let 
us  listen  for  a long  time  and  see  if  it  will  grow  any 
louder.” 

Accordingly  they  both  lay  down  and  eagerly  listened 
to  the  strange  sounds.  Steadily  and  rapidly  the  pulsa- 
tions beat  upon  their  ears  as  if  coming  up  from  the 
ground.  Yet,  when  they  compared  notes,  they  decided 


Ship  Ahoy  ! 


167 


that  the  throbbing  did  not  proceed  from  the  ground  at  all, 
but  from  some  remote  distance  on  land  or  on  water. 
And,  strange  to  say,  the  noise  became  continually  louder  ! 

“Well  ! ” finally  exclaimed  Junzo,  “ I give  this  matter 
up  ; it  is  beyond  my  comprehension.  As  we  are  in  a 
region  where  we  are  not  familiar  with  the  natural  phe- 
nomena, it  would  be  well  to  consult  with  the  headman  of 
the  village  as  to  what  this  thing  portends.  Who  knows 
but  what  it  may  be  the  precursor  of  an  earthquake  or  of 
a cyclone.  Let  us  call  him  in  to  listen.’’ 

Accordingly  the  individual  in  question  was  duly  sum- 
moned. He  approached  with  humble  manner,  and, 
kneeling  down,  awaited  their  announcement  as  to  the 
object  of  the  summons. 

“ I presume,”  said  Junzo,  “that  you  have  lived  in  this 
hamlet  all  of  the  years  of  your  life  and  are  familiar  with 
all  of  the  features  of  the  locality.  Is  this  not  so  ? ” 

“You  have  spoken  truly,”  was  the  modest  reply.  “ Not 
only  I,  but  my  father,  and  his  father,  and  unknown  gen- 
erations of  my  ancestors  have  lived  here.  I am  tolerably 
familiar  with  the  locality,  but  I am  an  ignorant  fellow 
and  do  not  have  the  full  knowledge  that  should  be  pos- 
sessed on  such  matters.” 

“Will  you  place  your  ear  close  to  the  tatami  and 
explain  to  us  the  meaning  of  those  throbbing  sounds,” 
said  Junzo,  rather  anxious  to  get  at  the  gist  of  the  matter 
without  further  delay. 

The  fisherman  looked  up  much  perplexed  at  so  abrupt 
and  extraordinary  a request.  He  had  heard  terrible  tales 
of  playful  samurai  hacking  up  common  folk  just  to  try 
their  blades.  Was  this  extraordinary  request  but  a 
pretext  for  getting  his  head  into  a convenient  position  for 
some  clever  stroke  of  practice  ? He  hesitated  to  comply, 
and  glanced  furtively  aside  to  see  if  the  veranda  was 
clear.  But  the  laugh  of  his  visitors  reassured  him,  and  he 
followed  their  example  and  placed  his  ear  close  to  the 
floor  as  requested. 

“ Truly  a strange  sound  ! ” he  soon  exclaimed.  “ The 
gentlemen  were  indeed  not  jesting.  I beg  ten  thousand 


Mito  Yashiki. 


1 68 

pardons  for  doubting  their  sincerity.”  Again  he  listened 
attentively  for  several  minutes.  “ Yea  ! a most  wonderful 
sound.  And  it  grows  louder  ! ” 

“ Does  it  portend  an  earthquake  or  a cyclone  ? ” en- 
quired Tomokichi. 

“ I do  not  think  that  it  portends  either  the  one  or  the 
other,”  he  replied. 

“ What  do  you  think  it  can  be  ?”  enquired  Junzo. 

“ I think,”  replied  he,  meditatively  scratching  his  head, 
“ that  it  must  be  some  kind  of  fish  in  the  bay  beating  the 
water  with  its  tail.  Many  years  ago  I heard  my  father 
say  that  fishes  sometimes  can  produce  sounds  like 
thunder  by  deep  rumblings  and  bellowings  in  their 
bellies.  There  must  be  some  new  variety  of  fish  in  the 
bay.  I will  enquire  of  the  other  men  and  see  if  these 
sounds  can  be  heard  on  every  tatavii  in  the  hamlet.” 

“ There  ! ” exclaimed  Junzo  in  great  excitement,  “ you 
can  now  hear  the  sounds  without  placing  your  ear  to  the 
floor.  Let  us  stand  on  the  veranda  and  listen.” 

Accordingly  they  went  and  stood  there,  and  found  that 
they  could  hear  the  throbbing  with  great  distinctness. 
Perplexed  and  amazed,  they  pondered  and  queried  for 
several  minutes.  The  headman  went  around  among 
the  houses  calling  out  everybody  to  listen.  They  all 
crowded  to  the  beach  and  closely  noted  the  sounds,  that 
seemed  to  be  growing  louder  by  the  minute.  Thus  they 
listened  and  speculated  for  fully  half  an  hour,  when  they 
observed  numerous  fleets  of  boats  hurrying  landward. 
Presently  a multitude  of  demoralized  crafts — like  a 
shoal  of  fishes  flying  before  some  monster  of  the  deep — 
shot  around  the  headland  and  rushed  northward  in  great 
haste,  while  the  crews  seemed  by  their  excited  gesticula- 
tions and  frantic  yells  to  be  in  great  agitation.  This 
scene  continued  for  half  an  hour  or  so,  creating  great 
uneasiness  among  the  people  on  the  beach,  who  were 
naturally  at  a great  loss  to  account  for  such  unpre- 
cedented conduct.  Finally  three  boats  dashed  around 
the  headland  and  rushed  into  the  inlet  as  fast  as  the 
panting  scullers  could  drive  the  trembling  keels  through 


Ship  Ahoy  / 


1 69 


the  water.  It  was  at  once  perceived  that  these  boats  be- 
longed to  the  hamlet.  “ The  ships  ! The  barbarian 
ships  ! ” yelled  the  boatmen  when  they  came  within  ear- 
shot. “ They  are  coming  up  the  bay  ! They  are  close 
behind  us  ! ” 

This  announcement  created  great  excitement  and  con- 
sternation. But  the  agitation  speedily  subsided  when  it 
was  remembered  that  the  Bakufu  was  prepared  to  punish 
the  bold  intruders  this  time  for  their  temerity.  The 
Mito  men,  in  reply  to  the  eager  questionings  of  their 
masters,  described  the  ships  as  being  like  immense 
whales  with  volcanoes  on  their  backs.  Everybody  now 
crowded  down  the  beach  to  watch  them  pass  up  the  bay. 
The  throbbing  of  the  mighty  paddle-wheels  increased  in 
volume  every  minute.  The  timorous  crowd  now  lis- 
tened in  silence  to  those  strange  sounds, — the  children 
clinging  to  their  parents  in  abject  terror  while  the  women 
huddled  together  in  the  middle  of  the  crowd. 

“ Look  there  ! Look  there  ! ” exclaimed  several  voices 
at  once  as  a large  black  object  pushed  around  the  head- 
land. Sure  enough  ! It  was  the  bow  of  a mighty  steamer. 
It  rapidly  came  into  full  view,  and  the  frightened  crowd 
(not  knowing  whether  to  stand  or  fly)  seemed  glued  to 
the  spot,  as  if  spellbound  in  fascination  of  the  hideous 
object.  There  it  went  trailing  the  blackness  of  night 
from  its  sable  funnel  and  warning  off  the  Bakufu  guard- 
boats  with  shrill  howls  and  terrific  roars  from  its  huge 
steam-whistle,  while  the  spray  dashed  up  by  the  revolv- 
ing wheels  fell  from  the  paddle-box  like  charming  cas- 
cades. Then  came  another  black  monster  around  the 
headland  ! And  another  ! And  another  ! Until  seven 
huge  leviathans  passed  up  into  the  broad  waters  of  the 
upper  bay.  Surely,  no  such  sight  had  ever  been  wit- 
nessed by  the  people  of  Dai-Nippon  ! Then  came,  for 
the  space  of  fully  half  an  hour,  mighty  billows  breaking 
upon  the  beach  in  an  almost  unbroken  roar,  as  if  they, 
too,  were  flying  in  terror  from  the  unwelcome  visitors. 
As  soon  as  the  monsters  had  passed  beyond  the  hamlet’s 
field  of  vision,  the  crowd  broke  for  the  hills,  and  from 


Mito  Yashiki. 


i 70 

their  summits  watched  the  majestic  line  of  vessels  slowly 
advancing  up  the  bay,  and  finally  casting  anchor  in  the 
bight  subsequently  called  Mississippi  Bay  in  honor  of 
the  flagship  of  the  squadron.  Late  into  the  evening, 
little  groups  would  climb  up  to  gaze  upon  the  distant 
lights  that  gleamed  from  rigging  and  port-hole  out  upon 
the  quiet  waters,  as  if  a city  had  been  anchored  there  by 
some  supernatural  influence. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


SHADOWS. 

For  several  days  after  the  arrival  of  the  steamers  and 
frigates,  the  Mito  boatmen  regularly  went  on  their  fishing 
excursions  down  the  bay  ; while  our  young  friends  as 
regularly  climbed  the  hills  and  viewed  the  fleet.  After 
several  days  they  gave  orders  to  change  the  direction  of 
the  excursions  and  to  fish  along  the  shores  of  the  bay  in 
the  direction  of  the  barbarian  ships.  These  trips  they 
accompanied,  and,  from  the  seclusion  of  their  cabin, 
they  took  note  of  many  matters  of  interest  as  their  boat 
crept  nearer  and  nearer  toward  the  black  leviathans 
each  day.  After  eight  or  ten  days  of  this  distant  inspec- 
tion, they  came  to  the  conclusion  that  they  had  obtained 
about  all  the  information  possible  under  such  conditions, 
and  that,  unless  they  could  by  some  means  get  within 
the  cordon  of  Bakufu  guard-boats  and  obtain  a closer 
view  of  the  foreigners,  there  was  not  much  use  in  their 
assuming  the  risk  of  a more  protracted  stay. 

They  pondered  long  as  to  how  they  could  secure  a 
nearer  inspection  of  the  vessels.  There  did  not  appear 
to  be  more  than  two  courses  available.  Either  they 
must  slip  through  the  cordon  unobserved  some  dark 
night,  or  they  must  bribe  the  officers  commanding  one 
of  the  guard-boats  to  allow  them  to  pass  through  under 
cover  of  darkness.  It  was  finally  decided  to  adopt  the 
latter  plan.  Accordingly,  about  nine  o’clock,  one  night, 
the  boat  was  quietly  slid  down  the  beach,  and  they  em- 
barked for  this  new  venture  in  espionage.  Noiselessly 
the  craft  slipped  out  of  the  inlet  into  the  still  waters  of 
the  sombre  bay,  where  they  headed  their  prow  toward  the 


Mito  Yashiki. 


i 72 

dim  lights  that  faintly  glimmered  across  the  wide  expanse 
of  waters  that  lay  between  them  and  the  American  fleet. 
Rapidly  they  skimmed  through  the  gloom,  until  first  the 
lofty  masts  and  then  the  massive  hulls  of  the  ships 
loomed  up  in  the  uncertain  light.  The  vessels  lay  sev- 
eral cable-lengths  from  shore,  and  were  marshalled  in 
line  of  battle  with  broadsides  shoreward.  Formidable 
and  forbidding  enough  they  appeared  there,  shooting 
forth  from  many  port-holes  baleful  gleams  of  warning 
light.  At  a respectful  distance,  a circle  of  Bakufu  guard- 
boats  surrounded  the  fleet  with  a cautious  but  vigilant 
embrace. 

As  the  Mito  boat  drew  near,  they  were  suddenly  chal- 
lenged by  a craft  that  seemed  to  rise  up  from  the  waves 
at  their  bow  : “ Halt ! What  is  the  nature  of  your  busi- 
ness here  ? Do  you  not  know  that  this  is  prohibited  ter- 
ritory ? ” 

“ Some  samurai  on  board  of  our  boat  desire  to  com- 
municate a message  to  the  officer  in  command  of  your 
boat,”  was  the  answer  that  went  softly  back  from  the 
Mito  boat  in  response  to  the  challenge. 

“ Remain  where  you  are  until  we  come  alongside,” 
was  the  prompt  order  that  came  back  through  the  night 
from  the  Bakufu  boat. 

The  young  spies  were  now  thoroughly  committed  to 
their  hazardous  undertaking,  and  their  hearts  beat  quickly 
as  they  realized  that  they  were  prisoners  in  the  hands  of 
the  merciless  Bakufu  and  were  about  to  be  subjected  to  a 
searching  inspection.  The  guard-boat  quickly  came  up 
and  laid  itself  alongside, — prow  to  prow  and  stern  to 
stern.  A dozen  hands  reached  forth  and  grasped  the 
gunwales  of  the  Mito  boat  and  firmly  held  it  against  the 
side  of  the  Bakufu  boat.  A tall  Yakunin  then  stepped 
over  the  side  and  began  looking  around  the  decks  for 
whatever  might  indicate  the  true  character  of  the  craft. 
Seeing  merely  a harmless  fishing-boat  with  a cowering 
crew  of  timid  fishermen,  he  haughtily  walked  aft  and 
presented  himself  before  the  two  samurai  and  critically 
surveyed  them  in  the  dim  light  furnished  by  the  paper 


Shadows. 


173 


lanterns  that  the  guards  were  holding  up  over  the  sides 
of  the  boat.  The  young  men  were  standing  on  the 
quarter-deck.  They  had  donned  their  best  clothes  for 
the  occasion,  well  knowing  the  respect  that  an  elegant 
attire  always  inspired  among  their  countrymen, — espe- 
cially among  the  mercenary  and  venal  Bakufu  officials. 
Their  features  were  most  effectually  disguised  by  the 
customary  black  dominos  worn  in  winter-time  through- 
out the  country,  thus  exposing  merely  their  eyes,  noses, 
and  mouths.  The  haughty  stare  of  the  Yakunin,  as  he 
glanced  at  their  intelligent  faces  and  aristocratic  raiment, 
relaxed  into  an  expression  of  respect,  which  became  one 
of  downright  amiability  when  he  caught  sight  of  the 
glittering  ornaments  on  their  sword-hilts. 

“ I perceive,”  said  he,  slowly,  in  the  polite  and  con- 
ciliatory language  with  which  samurai  invariably  address 
members  of  their  own  class,  “ that  the  gentlemen  are 
travelling  ne'bon."  1 

“ We  are,  honorable  sir,”  was  the  respectful  and  fear- 
less reply. 

“May  I enquire,”  continued  their  inquisitor,  perceiv- 
ing from  their  tones  and  accent  that  they  were  samurai 
of  no  ordinary  stamp,  “ what  business  has  brought  you 
out  at  such  an  unseasonable  hour  ? ” 

“ Most  certainly,  honorable  sir,”  replied  Tomokichi. 
“ We  are  from  one  of  the  Yedo  yashikis,  and  you,  as  a 
fellow-samurai  (profoundly  bowing),  will  readily  com- 
prehend our  reason  for  not  designating  it.  Being  much 

1 The  word  incognito  does  not  fully  express  the  meaning  conveyed 
in  the  word  ne'bon.  To  travel  m!boti  was  one  of  the  peculiar  privileges 
granted  to  Japanese  of  the  very  highest  rank.  The  party  thus  travel- 
ling adopted  some  sort  of  disguise  and  went  forth  into  the  world  to 
see  the  sights.  By  a refinement  of  fiction  he  became  turned  into  the 
character  of  his  disguise,  leaving  his  proper  and  correct  self  behind, 
to  be  resumed  when  the  wandering  character  should  return.  To 
everybody  he  must  be  known  merely  as  ne'bon, — even  though  recog- 
nized. He  had  left  behind  every  particle  of  his  former  self ! 
Even  emperors  are  reported  to  have  travelled  ne'bon.  Consequently 
every  Japanese  accorded  instinctive  courtesy  to  everybody  thus 
travelling. 


1 74 


Mito  Yashiki. 


interested  in  these  barbarian  ships,  concerning  which 
there  have  been  innumerable  wild  rumors  afloat  in  Yedo 
for  many  days  past,  we  became  consumed  with  a desire 
to  examine  them  for  ourselves  in  order  to  gratify  that 
overpowering  curiosity  and  that  thirst  for  accurate  in- 
formation for  which  we  samurai  have  always  been 
famous.  Perceiving  that  our  government  had  received 
the  strangers  in  a friendly  manner,  we  very  naturally 
came  to  the  conclusion  that  there  could  not  be  any 
reasonable  objection  to  our  visiting  this  place  and  seeing 
what  we  could.  Therefore  we  hired  a fishing-boat  this 
morning  and  came  down  the  bay  to  carry  out  our 
purpose.” 

“ That  which  you  have  just  spoken  is  indeed  reason- 
able,” replied  the  Yakunin  in  gracious  accents,  “and,  so 
far  as  I am  personally  concerned,  there  would  not  be  the 
slightest  objection  to  your  seeing  every  thing.  But,  as 
you  gentlemen  well  know,  we  are  under  strict  orders 
from  the  Bakufu  to  prevent  all  intrusion  within  this 
cordon  of  boats  about  the  ships.  It  would  be  highly 
presumptuous  for  me  to  attempt  to  instruct  you  gentle- 
men regarding  the  duty  that  devolves  on  a subordinate 
to  obey  the  orders  of  his  superiors.  What  can  I do  but 
inform  you  that  this  is  prohibited  territory  ? ” 

“ Well  and  honorably  spoken,  most  dutiful  officer,”  re- 
plied Tomokichi,  readily  inferring  from  that  most  dutiful 
officer’s  tone  and  manner  that  much  method  lurked  be- 
neath his  overwhelming  sense  of  duty  ; “ but  orders,  as 
you  and  I well  know,  in  times  of  peace  are  not  made  of 
stone,  but  admit  of  much  judicious  bending.  Had  we 
come  before  it  was  manifest  that  the  barbarians  meant 
no  harm  to  our  country,  then  would  we  be  guilty  of  su- 
preme contempt  of  knightly  honor  in  trying  to  induce 
you  to  violate  the  letter  of  your  instructions.  But  your 
orders  were  given  many  days  ago  when  hostilities  ap- 
peared imminent.  When  every  thing  showed  the  peace- 
ful nature  of  the  intruders,  you  should  have  received 
modified  orders.  This  matter  has  doubtless  been  over- 
looked. Undoubtedly  you  will  receive  less  stringent 


Shadows. 


*75 


orders  within  a few  days.  However  that  may  be,  you 
undoubtedly  feel  convinced  that  your  ‘ stone  orders  ’ 
need  not  be  harshly  and  inflexibly  applied  under  existing 
circumstances.  Of  course  we  will  obey  if  you  give  the 
order  to  turn  back  ; but  we  cannot  help  thinking  that 
the  case  is  one  of  those  rare  emergencies  where  induce- 
ments may  be  legitimately  offered  and  received.  The 
night  is  dark  and  the  other  guard-boats  will  not  see  us, — 
or,  if  they  do,  they  will  take  us  for  you,  owing  to  the 
great  similarity  of  our  boats.  We  can  prowl  around  the 
ships  for  a little  while  and  then  come  out  by  this  way. 
What  think  you,  sir,  of  our  suggestion  ? ” 

“ It  is  cleverly  put,  noble  sirs,”  replied  the  dutiful 
official,  fully  comprehending  the  covert  meaning  of  the 
broad  suggestion,  “ but  in  a matter  of  such  importance  I 
must  consult  with  my  colleagues  in  the  boat.  If  you  will 
remain  here  a little  while  I will  soon  report  our  decision 
in  the  matter.”  So  saying,  he  turned  around  and  walked 
toward  the  gunwales  and  stepped  over  into  his  boat, 
where  three  samurai  were  standing  on  the  quarter-deck 
waiting  to  hear  the  result  of  the  interview. 

“Who  are  the  gentlemen?”  exclaimed  they,  addressing 
the  Yakunin. 

“ Two  samurai  from  Yedo,”  was  the  reply.  “ They 
are  exceedingly  anxious  to  see  these  barbarian  ships  and 
are  travelling  nebon  in  a fishing-boat  that  they  hired  in 
Yedo  this  morning.” 

“ So  far,  so  good,”  said  a thick-set  fellow  whose  coarse 
features  and  bleared  eyes  bespoke  the  voluptuary  and 
the  debauchee  louder  than  words  could  have  done, 
“ but  of  course  you  notified  them  that  this  was  pro- 
hibited territory.  Furthermore,  if  your  good  sense  did 
not  forsake  you,  they  were  duly  notified  that  it  would 
cost  them  just  four  rios  to  get  out  of  this  pretty  scrape 
into  which  their  unbridled  inquisitiveness  had  lured 
them.  Eh  ? ” 

“ For  shame,  Yamagata  ! ” exclaimed  a tall,  genteel 
young  man,  whose  reproachful  countenance  betokened 
his  nobler  nature.  “ Remember  that  we  are  dealing  with 


Mito  Yashiki. 


i 76 

samurai  and  not  with  vulgar  fishermen.  Courteous  and 
knightly  behavior  is  now  in  order.” 

“ Well  ! ” exclaimed  Yamagata,  utterly  unabashed  at 
his  companion’s  rebuke,  “ you  can’t  expect  us  fellows  to 
mount  guard  these  blustering  nights  without  any  prospect 
of  a little  fun  when  we  go  ashore.  Even  though  they  be 
samurai , they  have  no  business  to  be  prowling  around 
here,  and  we  are  under  strict  orders  to  make  things  very 
disagreeable  for  such  as  they.  Judging  from  their  dress, 
it  looks  as  if  they  could  well  afford  to  pay  four  rios  for 
their  little  spree.  That  sum,  you  know,  means  one  rio 
apiece  for  us  ; and  a rio  means  a night  of  very  respect- 
able and  comfortable  carouse  in  the  Yoshivvara.” 

“While  you  two  extremists  are  quarrelling,”  put  in  the 
third  samurai , a plump  morsel  of  sleek  humanity  who 
had  not  yet  spoken,  “ I shall  proceed  to  business  by  in- 
quiring what  our  distinguished  prisoners  intend  doing 
about  this  scrape  ? They  must  take  the  initiative  in  the 
matter  and  offer  some  suggestion.  Of  course  we  must 
bear  in  mind  the  fact  that  they  are  knightly  gentlemen 
and  treat  them  accordingly  ; but  so  doing  does  not  imply 
that  we  should  forego  the  perquisites  of  our  position. 
They  must  be  presumed  to  have  come  into  this  matter 
with  open  eyes.  Unless  they  can  show  that  they  have  just 
come  from  their  cups  they  cannot  expect  us  to  endure 
our  hardships  for  nothing.  Truly  a night  in  the  Yoshi- 
wara  would  be  a fitting  solace  for  some  of  our  bleak 
vigils  ! What  word  do  they  send  to  us,  Sir  Yakunin  ? ” 

“ They  wish  to  say  that,  as  the  barbarian  ships  have 
shown  a friendly  spirit,  and  are  upon  good  terms  with 
the  Bakufu,  that  there  can  be  no  reason  why  our  * stone 
orders  ’ should  not  be  made  flexible  for  respectable 
samurai  desirous  of  securing  information,  and  they  think 
that  this  is  one  of  those  rare  occasions  where  inducements 
for  us  to  waive  a strict  application  of  our  instructions  can 
be  legitimately  offered  by  them.” 

The  student  of  human  nature  would  surely  have  been 
edified  at  the  variety  of  effects  produced  by  this  simple 
announcement.  Yamagata’s  bleared  eyes  fairly  glowed 


Shadows. 


1 77 


with  excitement,  and  he  licked  his  heavy  chops  in  antici- 
pation of  the  forthcoming  rios.  “ Ha  ! ha  ! ” he  ex- 
claimed, in  hoarse,  guttural  tones,  “ the  question  then 
merely  resolves  itself  into  one  of  ‘how  much?’  Four 
rios  to  let  them  out  of  the  scrape,  and  ten  rios  to  let  them 
inspect  the  ships,  is  what  I should  say.” 

“ I say  the  whole  matter  is  too  disreputable  for  us  to 
handle,”  said  the  genteel  man,  in  disgusted  tones.  “ I 
move  that  we  order  them  back  home,  with  notice  of 
arrest  in  case  they  come  again.” 

“ Now  don’t  you  spoil  our  fun  with  your  country 
ideas,”  exclaimed  the  plump  morsel  of  sleek  humanity. 
“ When  you  have  lived  in  Aidzu  Yashiki  another  six 
months,  I promise  you  that  it  will  not  be  my  fault  if  you 
be  so  squeamish.  How  can  it  be  expected  of  samurai  to 
bear  up  under  the  hardships  of  their  position  without 
occasional  relaxation  ? I vote  to  make  the  price  ten  rios 
for  release,  and  twenty-five  rios  for  permission  to  inspect 
the  ships.” 

A long  series  of  gurgling  chuckles  from  the  direction 
of  Yamagata  announced  that  the  hearty  approval  of  that 
gentleman  was  given  to  the  amendment. 

“ It  seems  to  me,”  said  the  Yakunin,  in  thoughtful 
tones,  “ that  you  gentlemen  have  lost  your  heads  over  the 
question  of  spoils.  Perhaps  these  gentlemen  are  Bakufu 
officials,  trying  to  see  whether  we  are  faithfully  fulfilling 
orders.  Their  language  and  bearing  indicate  that  they 
are  not  ordinary  samurai.  And  when  the  wind  blew 
open  the  folds  of  their  sleeves,  I perceived  the  Tokugawa 
crest  stamped  thereon.  They  certainly  are  either  gov- 
ernment officials  in  disguise,  or  they  belong  to  the 
Gosanke.  In  the  former  case,  we  must  warn  them  off. 
In  the  latter  case,  we  may  negotiate  for  ‘ inducements,’ 
to  permit  an  inspection  of  the  ships.  The  way  they 
spoke  about  fresh  orders  coming  from  Yedo  to  relax  the 
severity  of  our  surveillance,  rather  makes  me  fear  that 
they  are  government  officials  in  disguise.” 

Again  would  the  student  of  human  nature  have  been 
amused  at  the  variety  of  effects  produced  by  this  last 


1 78 


Mito  Yashiki. 


announcement.  The  blear-eyed  man  muttered  a fierce 
imprecation  against  the  god  of  luck,  and  looked  very 
much  as  if  on  the  verge  of  a fit. 

The  genteel  young  man  smiled  resignedly. 

The  plump  young  man  wore  a most  doleful  counte- 
nance, and  looked  as  if  he  were  being  dunned  for  a bill. 

“ In  order  to  help  us  to  decide  this  matter,”  continued 
the  Yakunin,  “ I will  call  these  two  gentlemen  over  into 
our  boat,  and  we  will  cautiously  feel  our  way  and  arrive 
at  some  definite  conclusion.”  So  saying,  he  went  over 
and  brought  them  back. 

“Honorable  sirs,”  said  the  Yakunin,  “you  spoke  of 
having  come  from  Yedo  this  morning.  Have  you  heard 
what  the  Gotairo  intends  doing  in  reference  to  these  bar- 
barian demands  for  a treaty  ? ” 

“ We  regret  our  inability  to  give  you  the  information 
that  you  seek,”  replied  Tomokichi.  “Although  we  live 
in  Yedo,  yet,  being  in  no  way  connected  with  the  govern- 
ment, we  have  no  means  of  hearing  of  any  thing  new 
until  such  time  as  the  government  may  choose  to  inform 
the  public  at  large, — an  occurrence  that  may  not  transpire 
for  many  days  subsequent  to  an  event.” 

This  welcome  intelligence  produced  a fresh  cast  of 
features  among  the  four  gentlemen.  The  Yakunin  looked 
immensely  relieved.  The  blear-eyed  man  burst  into 
smiles.  The  genteel  man  looked  very  much  interested. 
The  plump  morsel  of  humanity  coughed  significantly. 

The  ground  now  being  open  for  negotiations,  the 
Yakunin  continued  as  follows  : “ Did  I understand  you 
gentlemen  correctly  when  you  spoke  of  certain  induce- 
ments being  offered  for  certain  permission  to  inspect 
certain  ships  ? ” 

“You  most  certainly  did  so  understand  us,”  replied 
Tomokichi. 

“ Are  you  aware  that  you  are  tempting  government 
officers  to  violate  their  duty  ?”  slyly  suggested  the  plump 
young  man  in  measured  tones. 

Tomokichi,  who  at  once  understood  the  tone  and  the 
shuffling  gesture  that  accompanied  it,  turned  to  the 


Shadows. 


179 


speaker,  and  replied  : “ I do  not  think  that  the  govern- 

ment will  care  so  much  about  your  duty  since  the  bar- 
barians have  conducted  themselves  in  so  friendly  a 
manner.  Besides  this,  you  well  know  that  ‘ inducements  ’ 
are  winked  at  by  the  government,  when  their  interests  are 
not  jeopardized.  And  how  can  it  possibly  jeopardize 
government  interests  to  allow  two  harmless  samurai  to 
gratify  their  curiosity  by  inspecting  barbarian  ships  on  a 
dark  night  ? ” 

Sure  enough,  how  could  it  ? That  was  a new  idea  for 
them  to  consider. 

“ Never  mind  that  matter,”  exclaimed  the  blear-eyed 
man  impatiently.  “ Of  course  you  know  that  you  are  in 
our  power  for  daring  to  approach  as  near  as  you  have 
done  already.  Now  what ’s  your  price  for  our  letting 
you  off  ? ” 

“ Oh  ! We  care  nothing  either  about  arrest  or  being 
let  off.  We  do  not  care  to  offer  inducements  for  matters 
that  are  immaterial  to  us.  But  we  will  do  handsomely 
T>y  you  if  you  will  allow  us  to  inspect  the  ships,  for  we  do 
care  about  that  matter  very  much  indeed.” 

This  cool  reply  astonished  and  pleased  the  four  officers 
immeasurably.  After  a short  whispered  consultation, 
the  Yakunin  said  : “ Well,  if  we  allow  your  boat  to 

inspect  the  ships,  you  must  not  object  to  our  boat  follow- 
ing you  at  a short  distance.  This  is  a very  necessary 
precaution.” 

“We  shall  have  no  objection  to  that,”  was  the  prompt 
response. 

“ What  say  you  to  twenty-five  rios  for  this  extraordi- 
nary privilege  that  we  are  granting  you  ? ” suggested  the 
plump  young  man. 

“ Of  course,  that  is  a very  large  sum  of  money,” 
replied  Tomokichi  (who,  by  the  way,  had  come  prepared 
to  pay  double  and  triple  that  sum  if  necessary),  “but  we 
can  meet  you  there.” 

“ Call  it  twenty-five  rios  then,”  said  the  blear-eyed 
man,  nearly  bursting  with  ill-suppressed  emotion  at 
the  prospect  of  an  entire  week’s  debauch  in  the  Yoshi- 


i8o 


Mito  Yashiki. 


wara.  “ Pay  the  amount  over  to  our  commanding 
officer.” 

Accordingly  the  young  spies  accompanied  the  Yakunin 
to  the  cabin,  where,  by  the  light  of  a paper  lantern,  the 
gold  coin  was  duly  counted  out  and  paid  over.  After 
this  ceremony  they  were  escorted  with  supreme  respect 
to  their  own  boat.  The  Bakufu  boatmen  then  released 
their  grip  on  the  gunwales,  the  lanterns  were  put  out,  and 
the  two  boats  (within  easy  hailing  distance  of  each  other) 
plunged  into  the  gloom.  The  fleet  comprised  three  ma- 
jestic steamers  and  four  sailing  vessels.  The  Mito  boat 
went  flitting  around  among  the  latter  craft,  and  the 
young  men  inspected  them  to  their  hearts’  content. 
These  sailing  frigates  did  not  present,  however,  as  many 
points  of  interest  as  the  steamships.  Accordingly  our 
friends  decided  to  spend  the  most  of  their  time  in  ex- 
amining the  latter. 

Their  boat  was  therefore  headed  toward  the  mighty 
flagship  of  the  squadron,  the  stately  Mississippi,  whose 
lofty  masts  and  massive  spars  were  destined  nine  years 
later  to  crumble  into  ashes  while  lighting  up  the  dark 
waters  of  its  namesake  at  Port  Hudson.  It  stood  out  in 
the  darkness  like  a magician’s  palace.  Brilliant  lights 
were  swinging  aloft  amid  the  meshes  of  the  rigging  ; 
the  grim  guns  were  trimmed  for  immediate  action  and 
thrust  forth  their  iron  mouths  threateningly  into  the 
night  ; long  rows  of  port-holes  shot  forth  shafts  of  light 
that  fell  glimmering  and  twinkling  on  the  waves  ; steam 
was  being  kept  up,  and  clouds  blacker  than  the  hues  of 
night  rolled  lazily  out  of  the  gloomy  smoke-stack,  and, 
mingling  with  the  hissing  steam,  trailed  seaward  on  the 
wings  of  the  wind  ; the  shadowy  guards  were  carelessly 
pacing  the  deck,  and  the  uneasy  wheels  (as  if  trying  to 
keep  in  practice)  occasionally  churned  the  waves  with 
their  broad  blades  ; while  the  vast  hull,  like  some  pant- 
ing thing  of  life, — some  weird  creation  of  the  fancy, — 
fitfully  rolled  from  larboard  to  starboard  in  the  restless 
ground  swell.  The  scene  was  indeed  awe-inspiring,  and 
the  wonder-stricken  fishermen  hesitated  to  draw  nigh 


Shadows. 


1 8 1 


unto  the  sleeping  “ volcano  on  the  whale’s  back.”  So 
they  prowled  around  in  the  deep  shade  abaft  the  stern. 
Being  urged  to  advance  closer,  they  finally  slipped 
noiselessly  and  unobserved  beneath  the  projecting  quar- 
ter-deck and  halted  for  a reconnoissance.  Upon  the 
planks  overhead  they  heard  the  tramp,  tramp,  tramp, 
of  the  tireless  watch  ; beside  them  the  colossal  rudder 
creaked  and  moaned  most  dismally,  as  it  helplessly 
writhed  in  the  surging  waves  created  by  the  swaying  of 
the  vessel  from  side  to  side  ; and  within  the  cavernous 
sides  of  the  black  monster  they  heard  the  boisterous 
merriment  of  some  late  convivial  gathering. 

Leaving  the  stern  and  creeping  along  the  sides  of  the 
leviathan,  they  finally  came  to  the  frothing  wheel  and  they 
were  obliged  to  make  a slight  detour  in  order  to  pass 
that  uneasy  fin.  Then  they  came  to  a square  hole  in  the 
side  of  the  vessel  that  had  been  left  open  for  the  purpose 
of  allowing  fresh  air  to  pour  into  the  stokers’  room.  The 
shutter  opened  outward,  so  that  the  captain  of  the  boat 
was  able  to  have  a convenient  place  where  to  hold  fast 
while  he  stood  on  tiptoe  and  gazed  down  into  what 
seemed  to  him  to  be  the  mouth  of  hell  and  the  portals  to 
dens  of  iniquitous  sorcery.  He  could  not  have  been 
more  amazed  if  he  had  been  gazing  down  a square 
tunnel  into  the  bowels  of  the  earth. 

Within  there  was  a vast  chamber  lit  up  with  the 
crackling,  seething  flames  of  perdition,  such  as  the 
Buddhist  temples  in  Mito  pictured  on  their  walls ! 
Huge  black  devils  were  firing  up  the  furnaces  for  some 
carnival  of  horrible  torment  ! The  gigantic  fellows  had 
monstrous  bandanna  hankerchiefs  tied  around  their 
woolly  heads,  and  the  glaring  ends  of  the  cloths  were 
knotted  in  front  so  as  to  stand  out  like  glaring  horns. 
Their  white  eyes  rolled  horribly,  and  their  glistening 
teeth  shone  hideously,  as  they  conversed  in  savage  tones 
over  their  hellish  work.  Their  bodies  above  and  below 
the  waist  were  bare,  and  the  black  skin  glistened  with 
streams  of  perspiration  as  they  bent  to  their  fearful  task, 
gleefully  swinging  back  the  clanging  doors  of  massive 


182 


Mito  Yashiki. 


iron,  and  exultingly  shovelling  vast  quantities  of  black 
stones  into  the  fiery  throats  of  gigantic  furnaces  that 
glowed  so  fiercely  that  the  terrified  fisherman  would 
willingly  have  closed  his  eyes  but  for  the  absorbing 
fascination  of  the  horrible  scene.  “ This,  then,  is  the 
root  of  the  volcano  ! ” he  muttered  to  himself,  as  he  made 
way  for  his  young  masters,  who  long  gazed  in  awe- 
stricken wonder  and  mute  silence  upon  the  weird  scene, 
where  the  playful  negroes  were  dancing  and  howling 
around  the  lurid  furnaces  in  boisterous  merriment  over 
their  work.  Truly,  the  scene  was  one  quite  sufficient  to 
have  suggested  demons  revelling  over  some  carnival  of 
anguish  in  Hades!  Tomokichi  finally  drew  a long 
breath  and  murmured  : “ I understand  ! ” 

“ What  is  it  ? ” whispered  Junzo,  as  they  crept  onward 
toward  the  bow  of  the  steamer. 

“ It  is  connected  in  some  way  with  the  making  of 
watery  vapor  for  moving  the  ship  through  the  water. 
There  is  a scientific  work  at  Mito  Yashiki  that  fully 
explains  the  matter.  But  I do  not  understand  the 
subject  fully  enough  to  go  into  details.  How  supremely 
hideous  those  black  devils  appeared  ! Can  it  be  possible 
that  such  beings  exist  in  foreign  countries  ?” 

The  boat  had  now  reached  the  bow  of  the  flagship  and 
was  headed  for  the  next  steamer  in  the  line.  The  fore- 
castle watch  sighted  them  as  they  slipped  away,  but  as 
they  appeared  to  be  moving  off  it  was  not  deemed 
necessary  to  challenge  what  was  considered  to  be  a party 
of  harmless  sight-seers.  The  same  tactics  were  followed 
when  the  next  steamer  was  reached, — slipping  under  the 
stern  and  creeping  along  the  side.  Here  they  found  one 
of  the  cabin  port-holes  open  so  that  they  could  look  into 
the  stateroom  of  one  of  the  officers. 

Now  that  particular  officer  happened  to  be  the  second 
lieutenant,  who  had  a very  peculiar  and  inveterate  habit 
of  always  washing  his  hands  with  scented  soap  just 
before  retiring  to  rest  for  the  night.  Precisely  what 
hygienic  principle  lurked  beneath  this  idiosyncrasy  no 
one  had  ever  been  able  to  ascertain, — not  even  after  a 


Shadows. 


183 

purloined  cake  of  the  soap  had  been  subjected  to  a 
chemical  analysis.  He  had  been  twitted  and  teased 
most  unmercifully  by  his  messmates  about  his  peculiar 
habit,  but  to  no  purpose  except  to  make  him  sensitive 
and  irritable.  They  had  nicknamed  him  Pontius  Pilate, 
not  merely  because  he  washed  his  hands  at  unseasonable 
hours,  but  because  they  intended  to  ungenerously  inti- 
mate that  his  nightly  fetich  signified  that  he  washed  his 
hands  of  the  daily  iniquities  of  his  sinful  messmates. 
Now,  it  happened  on  this  particular  evening  that  this 
particularly  particular  young  gentleman  was  engaged  in 
his  ablutions  just  as  the  grinning  head  of  the  Mito 
captain  peered  into  the  port-hole  of  his  stateroom.  Pie 
was  standing  in  his  night-dress  before  the  tin  wash-bowl 
from  whose  foaming  suds  he  had  just  lifted  his  dripping 
hands  in  order  to  dry  them  on  the  towel.  Looking  up 
and  turning  around,  he  beheld  the  smiling  features  in  the 
port-hole.  Without  stopping  to  think,  he  at  once  sur- 
mised this  intrusion  to  be  another  trick  of  his  tormentors, 
and  immediately  resented  the  insult  by  dashing  the  con- 
tents of  the  basin  into  the  face  of  the  intruder.  The 
soapy  emulsion  went  into  the  eyes  of  the  luckless  fisher- 
man, causing  him  to  howl  and  to  drop  with  great  noise 
from  the  ratlines  down  into  the  boat.  This  disturbance 
roused  the  deck  watch  to  a realizing  sense  of  their  duty. 
And  then  was  enacted  the  second  scene  of  the  comedy. 

It  seemed  that  the  vessels  of  the  fleet  had  frequently 
been  annoyed  by  sight-seers  prowling  around  at  night. 
Uncouth  heads  had  frequently  appeared  at  port-holes  and 
windows,  causing  annoyance  to  the  officers,  and  amuse- 
ment to  the  sailors.  On  several  occasions,  venturesome 
spies  had  even  climbed  up  the  chains  to  the  deck,  in 
order  to  view  things  more  fully.  Consequently,  strict 
orders  had  been  given  to  keep  all  boats  off  at  a respect- 
ful distance,  but  to  inflict  no  injury  (if  possible  to  avoid 
doing  so).  The  precise  methods  to  be  employed  in 
carrying  out  these  orders  had  been  left  pretty  much  to 
the  discretion  of  the  crew.  The  American  tar,  when 
left  to  his  own  resources,  rarely  displays  any  lack  of  in- 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


1 84 

genuity,  and  invariably  rises  quite  equal  to  any  situation 
requiring  diplomatic  fijiesse.  In  the  China  ports,  the 
favorite  method  employed  had  been  to  hurl  lumps  of 
coal  and  sundry  superannuated  eggs,  accompanied  by 
potatoes  in  advanced  stages  of  dissolution,  upon  the 
heads  of  the  thieving  Chinamen  prowling  about  the 
vessels. 

But  such  heroic  treatment  was  deemed  too  harsh  for 
the  amiable  natives  of  Dai-Nippon.  Jack,  however,  did 
not  long  puzzle  his  head  over  what  specific  to  employ 
for  the  case  in  hand.  During  the  daytime  he  found  that 
a shake  of  his  tatooed  fist  was  quite  sufficient  to  head  off 
the  most  venturesome  intruder.  But  at  nighttime  he 
found  that  such  mild  treatment  was  of  no  avail.  Ac- 
cordingly, he  would  clandestinely  fill  up  during  the  day 
half-a-dozen  or  so  of  buckets  with  swill,  collected  from 
the  galley  barrel,  and  secrete  them  in  divers  nooks  and 
corners  about  the  forecastle.  This  unofficial  proceeding, 
of  course,  defrauded  the  swine  of  their  just  allowance  of 
rations,  for  the  crafty  tars  filled  up  the  barrel  with 
water,  and  thus  foisted  on  the  helpless  porkers  some 
highly  diluted  diet.  Well,  well,  all  that  is  neither  here 
nor  there.  Suffice  it  to  say  that  when  the  disturbance 
occurred  on  this  particular  evening  the  boat  had  sped 
forward  and  was  below  the  forecastle  chains  when  the 
grinning  faces  of  the  forward  watch  peered  over  the  sides 
of  the  vessel  to  view  the  situation.  “ Lay  ’em  aboard, 
my  hearties  ! ” was  the  laconic  order  overhead.  Then 
down  came  a deluge  such  as  our  cheerful  fishermen  had 
never  experienced  in  all  of  their  years  of  battling  with 
the  elements,  and  it  was  a deluge  that  well-nigh  swamped 
the  boat. 

Pure,  undiluted  swill,  such  as  the  hearts  and  the 
stomachs  of  the  aforesaid  hogs  had  been  yearning  after, 
constituted  the  prime  ingredient  of  that  downpour. 
Masses  of  soaked  bread,  huge  lumps  of  hardtack,  and 
disgustingly  mushy  biscuits  formed  a few  of  the  interesting 
items.  Yards  upon  yards  of  potato  peelings,  hosts  of 
cabbage  leaves,  muddy  coffee-grounds  by  the  jugful,  and 


Shadows. 


185 


the  prosaic  odds  and  ends  of  hash,  puddings,  and  pies, 
were  a few  other  articles  that  served  to  eliminate  the  last 
vestige  of  romance  from  the  situation.  The  decks  of  the 
boat  betwixt  the  after  cabin  and  the  forecastle  was 
turned  into  a condition  of  nameless  horror  much  resem- 
bling a pig  trough, — a scene  that  would  have  rendered  the 
luckless  swine  frantic  with  resentment  at  such  prodigal 
waste  of  their  food.  Tomokichi,  Junzo,  and  the  four 
scullers  were  but  slightly  spattered  with  this  avalanche, 
as  they  happened  to  be  astern.  But  the  remainder  of 
the  crew  came  in  for  full  dividends. 

The  gleeful  chucklings  from  above  grew  rapidly  fainter 
as  the  unhappy  fishermen  fled  in  wild  haste.  This  mirth 
was  not  appreciated  nor  in  any  way  entered  into  by  the 
crew  until  they  began  to  unwind  long  festoons  of  potato 
peelings  entwined  about  their  necks,  and  to  skate  around 
on  the  decks  on  oranges  and  quarter  loaves  of  bread. 
Then  the  humor  of  the  situation  dawned  upon  all  of 
them  (especially  those  astern),  and  they  indulged  in  im- 
moderate laughter.  They  soon  met  the  guard-boat,  and 
were  duly  escorted  beyond  the  cordon  of  boats.  Then 
they  rushed  homeward.  The  crew  whiled  away  the  time 
by  removing  the  debris  from  the  decks,  and  in  picking 
dough  and  mush  out  of  hair,  eyes,  and  ears.  On  the 
whole,  they  voted  it  a very  jolly  thing  to  shadow  the 
barbarian  ships  in  the  dusky  night, — but  they  unani- 
mously hoped  that  there  might  not  be  another  such  an 
expedition  very  soon.  On  the  morrow  they  were  kept 
very  busy  cleaning  the  boat  and  in  bailing  out  the  swill 
that  had  flowed  into  the  cabin,  the  forecastle,  and  the 
storeroom  amidships.  Many  of  the  articles  fished  out 
of  the  boat  created  much  lively  comment,  and  Tomo- 
kichi was  constrained  to  confess  that  no  scientific  work 
at  Mito  Yashiki,  so  far  as  he  knew,  could  throw  any 
light  on  their  nomenclature. 


CHAPTER  XV. 


WHEN  GREEK  MEETS  GREEK. 

After  the  events  narrated  in  the  last  chapter  our 
young  friends  began  to  consider  the  advisability  of  turn- 
ing the  prow  of  their  boat  homeward.  They  had  acquired 
about  all  the  information  possible  to  be  gathered  under 
the  conditions  whereunder  they  were  conducting  their 
investigations  ; yet  they  were  loath  to  quit  the  waters  of 
the  bay,  and  they  lingered  day  after  day,  as  if  fascinated 
by  the  novelty  and  by  the  danger  of  their  surroundings. 
They  did  not  again  attempt  to  make  a close  inspection 
of  the  vessels  ; but  hardly  a day  passed  without  their 
boat  being  seen  hovering  about  outside  of  the  cordon  of 
guard-boats  watching  with  profoundest  interest  the 
minutest  manoeuvres  of  fleet  and  crew, — for  the  experi- 
ences of  that  night  of  shadowing  had  filled  their  bosoms 
with  the  sincerest  respect  for  every  thing  pertaining  to 
the  foreigners  and  their  mysterious  vessels.  After  a 
week  thus  spent  they  reluctantly  came  to  the  conclusion 
that  no  adequate  reason  existed  for  any  further  delay, 
and  that  both  duty  and  prudence  required  their  speedy 
departure  from  the  place.  Accordingly,  they  issued 
orders  to  have  the  boat  put  in  readiness  for  the  return 
voyage. 

On  the  afternoon  of  the  day  preceding  that  of  their 
intended  departure,  Tomokichi  was  busily  engaged  in 
entering  in  his  little  book  copious  notes  and  comments 
concerning  the  “barbarians,”  and,  as  he  appeared  to  be 
settled  down  for  several  hours  of  steady  work,  Junzo 
decided  to  stroll  up  the  path  that  zigzagged  up  the  cliff 
and  to  walk  along  the  tops  of  the  hills  and  to  take  a last 


When  Greek  Meets  Greek. 


187 

look  at  the  stately  squadron  riding  at  anchor  to  the  north- 
ward. The  day  was  warm  and  bright,  and,  after  taking 
another  look  at  the  boat  to  see  if  the  preparations  for 
departure  had  been  properly  made,  he  leisurely  followed 
the  cliff  path  in  its  windings  through  underbrush  and 
thicket  until  it  finally  emerged  at  the  summit.  There  he 
tarried  awhile  to  gaze  upon  the  picturesque  hamlet  nest- 
ling peacefully  on  the  white  sands,  and  to  sweep  with  his 
eyes  the  broad  expanse  of  blue  waves  that  stretched  away 
to  the  distant  shores.  Then,  resuming  his  course,  he 
took  the  path  through  the  woods  and  finally  emerged  at 
a clearing  on  a hill-top  which  overlooked  that  portion  of 
the  bay  where  the  ships  lay  uneasily  champing  at  the 
cables  that  fretted  their  iron  mouths.  The  site  was  cov- 
ered with  grass  and  was  ornamented  with  a little  wooden 
shrine  in  honor  of  Ebisu,  the  ubiquitous  god  of  fisher- 
men. The  little  fat  fellow  was  peeping  out  from  behind 
some  wooden  bars,  and  was  gazing  stupidly  on  the  beau- 
tiful scene  with  eyes  begrimed  with  the  smoking  incense 
that  many  decades  of  votaries  had  placed  beneath  his 
very  nostrils.  The  shrine  belonged  to  the  circuit  of  a 
large  Buddhist  monastery  situated  many  miles  back 
among  the  hills,  and  whose  priests  came  hither  on  fete- 
days  to  perform  ceremonies  and  to  receive  the  offerings 
of  the  simple-minded  denizens  of  the  coast. 

On  this  particular  afternoon  there  was  nobody  there. 
The  only  visitor  that  day  had  been  an  old  woman  from 
some  hamlet  along  the  shore,  who  had  journeyed  thither 
to  burn  incense  and  to  beseech  good-natured  Ebisu  to 
bring  back  her  son  who  had  been  too  long  away  on  a 
fishing  excursion.  The  place  was  indeed  too  lovely  for 
any  thing  but  peace  and  happiness.  Yet  inexorable  fate 
had  marked  it  for  the  scene  of  a tragedy  to  be  speedily 
enacted  thereon. 

That  very  day,  a samurai , wearing  on  his  sleeves  the 
Tokugawa  crest,  had  left  a fishing  hamlet  some  miles 
northward,  and  had  been  diligently  making  a tour  of 
every  fishing  village  and  hamlet  that  lay  in  his  way  as  he 
journeyed  southward.  At  each  place  visited  he  sought 


Mito  Yashiki. 


1 88 

out  the  headman  of  the  village  or  hamlet,  and  imperi- 
ously demanded  whether  there  were  any  strangers 
within  his  jurisdiction,  or  whether  any  had  recently  been 
there.  He  had  received  various  replies  to  his  enquiries, 
but  in  no  case  did  he  seem  to  secure  the  information 
which  he  desired.  It  was  not  until  he  came  to  the  ham- 
let just  to  the  north  of  the  one  where  our  friends  were 
sojourning  that  his  eyes  brightened  as  he  was  informed 
that  there  were  several  strangers  in  the  next  hamlet,  and 
that  among  them  were  two  gentlemen  who  appeared  to 
be  samurai.  When  he  was  informed  that  these  gentle- 
men claimed  to  be  Bakufu  officials  acting  as  shore- 
guards,  he  drew  forth  from  his  sleeve  a book  that  he 
spent  several  minutes  in  thoughtfully  consulting.  Then, 
with  the  eagerness  of  a bloodhound  that  has  caught  the 
scent,  he  tapped  his  forehead  and  hastily  continued  his 
journey  along  the  shore. 

The  path  soon  left  the  beach  and  wound  up  through 
woods  to  the  top  of  the  hill  where  stuffy  old  Ebisu  held 
his  dreary  vigil.  Junzo  had  been  there  nearly  two  hours 
and  was  just  beginning  to  think  about  returning  to  his 
quarters  in  the  hamlet,  when  he  heard  somebody  coming 
through  the  thickets  near  where  he  was  sitting  on  a grassy 
knoll.  His  first  impulse  was  to  slip  behind  the  shrine 
and  hide  himself  from  view.  But  long  immunity  from 
alarm  had  rendered  him  somewhat  reckless,  and  he 
furthermore  reflected  that  it  might  be  only  a fisherman 
coming  to  worship  at  the  shrine,  and  that  it  would  be 
very  undignified  for  a sa?nurai  to  be  found  skulking  be- 
hind it.  He  therefore  boldly  held  his  ground  and  fear- 
lessly awaited  the  approach  of  the  stranger. 

There  was  a swaying  of  the  bushes,  a few  labored  puffs 
for  breath,  the  crackling  of  twigs,  and  the  falling  of  loose 
stones  down  the  steep  hill — and  then  the  climber 
emerged  panting  from  the  woods  and  stood  facing  Junzo 
Nakashima.  A hasty  glance  at  each  other’s  faces,  and 
the  recognition  was  mutual  and  instantaneous.  Junzo 
had  met  this  stalwart  samurai  on  several  occasions  hov- 
ering around  the  precincts  of  Mito  Yashiki  during  the 


When  Greek  Meets  Greek. 


189 


winter,  and  knew  him  to  be  the  most  adroit,  the  most 
fearless,  and  the  most  merciless  bloodhound  in  the  secret 
service  of  the  Shogun’s  government.  He  was  the  most 
successful  and  the  most  dreaded  of  all  the  swarms  of 
spies  that  flitted  like  bats  and  owls  around  the  latticed 
windows  of  every  suspected  Yashiki  in  Yedo.  This  man 
had  dared  to  enter  Satsuma  on  the  heels  of  a score  of 
other  spies,  who  had  perished  there,  and  had  returned 
alive!  Junzo’s  heart  stood  still.  The  very  blood  in  his 
veins  seemed  turning  to  ice.  He  required  no  sooth- 
sayer to  tell  him  that  this  dreaded  sleuth-hound  had  been 
on  his  track  and  had  finally  hunted  him  down.  While 
his  physical  powers  seemed  benumbed  with  mortal  fear, 
his  mental  powers  worked  with  unwonted  activity,  and 
there  flashed  through  his  brain  within  the  space  of  but  a 
moment  of  time  a course  of  action  that  will  take  long  for 
my  slow  pen  to  describe  and  which  his  quick  brain  would 
have  but  slowly  evolved  under  ordinary  circumstances. 
It  is  at  such  supreme  crises  that  noble  spirits  soar  above 
physical  frailties  and  seem  to  imbibe  inspired  powers 
from  mysterious  sources  in  the  very  atmosphere. 

From  remotest  times  in  the  history  of  mankind,  there 
has  been  but  one  fate  reserved  for  the  detected  spy, — 
death!  Junzo  fully  realized  that  he  was  caught  in  the 
very  act.  He  well  knew  that  this  dreaded  fellow  had 
doubtless  been  on  his  track  for  many  months,  had  noted 
his  absence  from  Mito  Yashiki,  and  had  probably  been 
delegated  to  run  him  down.  He  well  knew  that  from 
the  native  standpoint  his  guilt  was  clearly  proven  ; that 
while  the  gentleman  before  him  might  smile  and  affably 
greet  him  in  friendly  conversation  (which  he  seemed 
quite  disposed  to  do),  yet  that  on  the  return  of  his 
brother  and  himself  to  Yedo,  their  bodies  would  be  de- 
manded by  the  terrible  Gotairo  in  the  name  of  the  Sho- 
gun, and  would  be  put  to  terrible  torture  in  order  to 
force  the  disclosure  of  presumed  accomplices,  and  would 
finally  be  subjected  to  ignominious  and  horrible  muti- 
lation. 

Unlucky  Junzo  well  knew  that  both  he  and  his  brother 


190 


Mito  Yashiki. 


were  in  the  dread  power  of  this  terrible  man  who  stood 
there  with  unruffled  features  and  serene  countenance  as 
if  ready  to  enter  upon  a most  amicable  interview.  Then 
there  rushed  over  him  the  shame  and  the  humiliation  of 
having  failed  in  a grand  enterprise  almost  consummated. 
He  seemed  to  see  the  sorrowful  and  the  reproachful 
countenances  of  his  Mito  friends.  And  there  rose  the 
vision  of  a hamlet  in  a glen  and  a bereaved  family  mourn- 
ing over  two  sons  cut  down  on  the  threshold  of  life  and 
perishing  in  ignominy  and  shame.  It  was  then  that  the 
numbness  left  his  arms,  that  the  chill  fled  from  his  veins, 
that  the  heart  leaped  and  bore  on  its  angry  floods  up  to 
the  ready  brain  a fierce,  a desperate,  a murderous  resolve. 
The  Bakufu  spy  must  die  then  and  there  ! Spy  had  met 
spy,  and  war  to  the  death  must  ensue  ! No  mercy  ! No 
quarter ! This  was  his  only  salvation  ! There  would  be 
no  witnesses  to  the  scene.  Escape  for  the  Bakufu  spy 
was  impossible,  as  he  could  not  fly  through  the  tangled 
woods  without  exposing  his  back  to  his  adversary’s  deadly 
blade,  nor  could  he  leap  over  the  cliff  without  meeting 
with  sure  death.  He  was  completely  entrapped,  and 
must  fight  out  the  issue  in  a lonely  spot  far  away  from 
human  habitations. 

Even  in  such  an  emergency  the  true  samurai  abides 
by  his  notions  of  chivalric  honor  and  does  things  in  ac- 
cordance with  prescribed  rules  and  ceremony.  Instead 
of  drawing  his  sword  at  once  on  his  adversary  so 
as  to  take  him  unawares,  Junzo  quietly  threw  his  loose 
garments  back  first  from  his  right  shoulder  and  then  from 
his  left  shoulder,  thus  leaving  his  body  bare  down  to  the 
waist.  Then  deliberately  drawing  his  long,  sharp  sword 
and  pointing  it  downward  into  the  green  turf,  he  looked 
steadily  into  the  eyes  of  his  adversary. 

His  enemy  knew  full  well  the  meaning  of  this  action, 
and  the  color  left  his  cheeks  an  instant  as  he  realized 
that  he  must  now  try  the  mortal  issue  with  a person 
whom  he  already  knew  to  be  the  most  expert  swordsman 
in  Mito  Yashiki.  He  glanced  furtively  around  to  see  if 
any  avenue  of  escape  remained  open.  He  saw  that  he 


When  Greek  Meets  Greek. 


191 

was  completely  shut  in.  But  why  fear  this  young  man  ? 
True  he  was  very  expert  with  the  sword,  but  were  not  ex- 
perience and  endurance  on  his  side  ? And  was  he  not 
also  an  adept  in  the  use  of  the  blade  ? Had  he  not  slain 
twenty  men  in  his  venturesome  career  ? Had  he  not  met 
at  a hotel  in  Satsuma  three  of  the  deadliest  swordsmen 
in  that  clan,  and  had  he  not  dashed  out  the  light  when 
they  attacked  him,  and  knelt  upon  the  tat  amis,  and  cut 
them  all  down  while  groping  about  the  room  in  the  dark, 
sweeping  the  air  over  his  head  with  their  swords  ? Had 
he  not  met  single-handed  some  of  the  best  blades  in  the 
Yedo  yashikis  during  his  various  adventures,  and  had 
he  not  come  off  victor  ? Why  then  fear  this  country- 
bred  youth  from  Atago-Yama,  now  about  to  engage  in  his 
first  mortal  combat,  and  who  probably  would  fight  in 
strict  accordance  with  the  ceremonious  methods  drilled 
into  him  by  his  punctilious  father,  and  who  would  prob- 
ably not  resort  to  the  tricky  methods  so  well  known  and 
so  unscrupulously  employed  by  himself? 

Thus  bracing  himself  up  with  a resume  of  his  deeds  of 
valor,  and  remembering  the  many  tight  places  out  of  which 
he  had  adroitly  crawled  during  his  extraordinary  career, 
he  proceeded  not  only  to  throw  off  his  upper  garments, 
but  also  his  lower  ones,  and  stood  forth  with  merely 
a clout  about  his  loins  and  sandals  on  his  feet.  This  was 
his  first  unfair  trick,  for,  when  Junzo  began  to  make 
motions  as  if  to  disrobe  himself  in  a similar  fashion 
in  order  to  secure  agility  equal  to  that  of  his  wily  antag- 
onist, the  sly  scoundrel  at  once  advanced  to  the  attack 
and  compelled  him  to  fight  with  his  lower  limbs  ham- 
pered with  frock-like  hakamas.  Junzo  deftly  parried  his 
adversary’s  blow,  and,  kicking  off  his  wooden  clogs, 
fought  in  his  stockings.  Truly  it  was  a weird  sight  ! 
The  nervous  tremor  that  falls  upon  the  hands  for  the  first 
time  raised  to  destroy  the  life  of  a fellow-being  had 
completely  fled,  and  the  small  hands  of  our  young  friend 
closed  upon  the  hilt  of  his  weapon  with  a firm  and 
dextrous  grip,  while  the  steady  fire  in  his  eyes  bespoke 
his  deadly  purpose  and  dauntless  courage  in  language 


192 


Mito  Yashiki. 


far  more  effective  than  reams  of  Homeric  verses  could 
have  done.  With  his  shaven  head  and  jet-black  top- 
knot,  together  with  his  clumsy  petticoats,  you  might  well 
have  taken  him  for  some  heathen  goddess  pirouetting  over 
the  greensward  with  some  savage  partner, — for  the  brown 
body  of  the  spy,  glistening  like  that  of  an  eel  in  the  sun- 
light, twisted  itself  into  all  manner  of  shapes  as  he 
whirled  around  his  adversary  delivering  cuts  with  the 
rapidity  of  lightning. 

It  was  about  four  o’clock  in  the  afternoon  and  the 
western  sun  was  in  a position  to  greatly  annoy  that 
swordsman  who  had  to  face  it.  It  is  needless  to  say  that 
the  cunning  spy  speedily  noted  this  fact  and  got  into  a 
position  where  his  back  was  toward  it.  Matters  thus 
opened  very  inauspiciously  for  our  young  friend.  He 
advanced,  however,  undaunted  to  the  attack,  and  by  a 
few  quick  and  skilful  passes  soon  compelled  his  enemy 
to  abandon  his  vantage-ground  and  to  turn  sideways 
toward  the  sun  ; and  from  that  time  onward  to  the  close 
of  the  combat  they  shifted  their  positions  all  over  the 
greensward,  so  that  each  one  took  his  turn  in  facing  the 
sun. 

For  the  first  ten  minutes,  neither  party  gained  any  de- 
cided advantage.  The  spy  was  indeed  a powerful  and  a 
skillful  swordsman,  and  in  the  opening  attacks  it  re- 
quired all  of  Junzo’s  agility  and  skill  to  ward  off  the  ter- 
rible blows  that  poured  down  like  hail.  He  had  resolved 
to  let  his  antagonist  do  all  of  the  fighting  at  first,  in  order 
that  he  might  study  his  style  of  fencing,  and  also  to  allow 
him  to  become  tired  with  his  tremendous  exertions  and 
thus  neutralize  the  agility  derived  from  his  nude  condi- 
tion. For  the  next  ten  minutes,  however,  he  pressed  the 
fighting  more  vigorously  and  followed  the  spy  all  over  the 
grounds. 

Then  came  a quarter  of  an  hour  of  exceedingly  bitter 
and  vigorous  fencing,  wherein  each  combatant  displayed 
wonderful  skill  and  power.  It  now  became  manifest 
that  the  younger  man  had  thoroughly  mastered  the  elder 
one’s  style,  so  that  victory  could  only  come  to  the  latter 


When  Greek  Meets  Greek. 


193 


either  from  the  exhaustion  of  his  adversary  or  from  some 
accident  befalling  him.  Then  came  a period  of  slower 
and  more  cautious  warfare,  for  Junzo  had  perceived  that 
his  adversary  was  continually  edging  over  to  the  path  by 
which  he  had  climbed  up,  and  it  was  manifest  that  his 
intention  was  to  seize  a favorable  opportunity  and  leap  to 
one  side  and  rush  down  the  hill,  where  his  escape  would 
be  very  easy,  inasmuch  as  his  youthful  foe’s  long  flowing 
garments  would  catch  in  the  underbrush  and  check  most 
effectually  his  pursuit.  It  required  no  small  amount  of 
skill  and  patience  to  guard  against  this  contingency. 

Then  came  an  incident  that  well-nigh  brought  the 
fight  to  an  abrupt  and  unexpected  termination.  The  spy, 
despairing  of  slipping  out  of  the  fatal  arena,  suddenly 
picked  up  one  of  the  heavy  wooden  clogs  that  his  adver- 
sary had  kicked  off  at  the  commencement  of  hostilities, 
and  hurled  it  most  unexpectedly  into  his  face,  striking 
him  heavily  on  the  forehead  therewith.  He  followed  up 
this  unfair  advantage  with  a terrific  onslaught.  For  a 
moment  it  seemed  as  if  the  game  was  up  for  our  brave 
young  friend.  He  staggered  back  and  nearly  fell  down 
on  the  slippery  grass.  That  backward  movement,  how- 
ever, saved  his  life,  for  the  blows  that  followed  up  his 
demoralization  all  fell  short  of  the  mark  and  wounded 
him  but  slightly  in  the  leg  and  on  the  shoulder  ; and, 
before  the  treacherous  knave  could  follow  up  his  advan- 
tage, his  antagonist  had  recovered  from  the  effect  of  the 
stunning  blow. 

But  it  is  a long  lane  that  has  no  turn.  The  comba- 
tants had  now  been  fighting  for  nearly  an  hour,  and  the 
advantage  seemed  to  be  with  the  Bakufu  man.  He 
had,  however,  in  his  violent  efforts  to  force  the  fighting, 
nearly  exhausted  himself,  and,  although  he  had  inflicted 
two  wounds  on  his  adversary,  they  were  of  so  slight  a 
character  as  to  be  quite  harmless.  On  the  other  hand, 
he  had  awakened  a spirit  of  savage  vindictiveness  in  his 
adversary  that  seemed  to  add  fresh  strength  to  his  youth- 
ful arms  and  to  intensify  the  vigor  of  his  attacks.  He 
made  one  more  attempt  to  escape  by  the  path,  and  then 


i94 


Mito  Yashiki. 


edged  over  slowly  toward  a large  stone,  which  he  hoped 
to  be  able  to  pick  up  and  to  repeat  therewith  his  previ- 
ous tactics.  But  his  design  was  frustrated  by  his  wiry 
antagonist,  who  now  seemed  transformed  into  a perfect 
demon,  and  who  fought  with  a ferocity  and  an  energy 
incredible.  Hereditary  aptitude  and  a lifetime  of  train- 
ing were  fused  together  in  white  heat,  and  blow  followed 
blow  with  bewildering  celerity  until  the  ringing  of  the 
blades  made  one  continued  clangor.  The  spy  retreated 
slowly  to  the  middle  of  the  open  space  near  the  shrine, 
and  fought  on  the  strict  defensive  for  several  minutes. 
Then  there  was  a -sudden  cessation  of  turmoil,  and  the 
stalwart  Bakufu  man  threw  up  his  arms  and  fell  back- 
ward. Junzo’s  blade  had  at  last  reached  solid  flesh,  and 
had  cut  through  his  foeman’s  abdomen  from  right  to 
left,  severing  the  great  veins  and  arteries  of  that  region 
at  one  fell  stroke.  It  was  his  favorite  cut,  and  it  was 
one  that  he  had  been  holding  in  reserve  to  use  at  an  un- 
expected moment. 

There  are  six  cuts  and  one  thrust  known  to  Japanese 
fencers.  Cut  straight  down  for  the  head  ; cut  obliquely 
at  the  left  shoulder  ; cut  across  the  left  side,  bending 
your  right  knee  in  order  to  give  delivery  thereto  : re- 
cover position  j cut  again  for  the  head  ; cut  obliquely  at 
the  right  shoulder  ; cut  across  the  right  side,  bending 
the  left  knee  : recover  position  j draw  the  hilt  of  the 
sword  close  up  to  your  chest  and  lunge  forward  with 
both  hands  at  the  breast.  These  cuts,  like  the  rules  of 
war,  are  certainly  simple  enough  ; but  in  their  combina- 
tions and  application  there  is  room  for  boundless  skill 
and  complexity.  The  right-handed  man  will  naturally 
cut  across  his  adversary’s  abdomen  from  left  to  right 
with  far  more  readiness  than  from  right  to  left.  But 
Junzo  had  learned  to  cut  from  either  direction  with 
equal  celerity.  In  this  fight  he  had  continually  deliv- 
ered the  stroke  from  left  to  right,  in  order  to  lead  his 
adversary  to  suppose  that  he  could  not  deliver  the  re- 
verse cut  from  right  to  left  with  equal  skill.  And  when 
the  supreme  moment  had,  in  his  opinion,  arrived,  he 


When  Greek  Meets  Greek. 


1 95*. 


feinted  as  if  to  deliver  his  regular  left-side  abdominal 
cut,  and  then  with  marvellous  dexterity  reversed  the 
stroke  and  came  in  upon  the  unguarded  right  side  of  his 
enemy  with  the  full  sweep  of  a powerful  cut  delivered 
with  both  hands  upon  the  soft  tissues  of  a bare  body. 
The  result  was  horrible.  The  hideous  gash  reached 
across  the  body,  and  the  contents  of  the  abdominal 
cavity  gushed  forth  through  the  ghastly  fissure.  The 
stalwart  warrior  survived  but  a moment.  The  grass  be- 
came deluged  with  blood,  the  hands  stretched  out  con- 
vulsively for  the  fallen  sword,  the  feet  were  spasmodically 
drawn  up,  and  the  gurglings  in  the  throat  announced 
that  the  end  had  come,  and  that  the  secrets  locked  up  in 
his  bosom  would  never  disturb  his  adversary. 

Junzo  stood  for  several  minutes  as  if  spellbound 
with  horror  gazing  on  his  dead  enemy.  Then  he  pro- 
ceeded to  a little  spring  near  the  shrine  and  washed  the 
blood  from  his  blade  and  carefully  sheathed  it.  He 
then  grasped  his  enemy  by  the  heels  and  dragged  him 
far  into  the  thickets.  The  sword  and  the  clothes  he 
hid  away  carefully  in  the  underbrush,  after  having  re- 
moved from  the  grass  every  possible  trace  of  the  bloody 
fray.  Then  he  washed  off  his  own  wounds  and  pro- 
ceeded to  dress  himself.  It  was  quite  dusk  when  he 
found  his  way  back  into  the  hamlet,  where  his  brother 
with  great  anxiety  awaited  his  return.  It  did  not  take  long 
to  explain  matters  to  him.  His  admiration  and  astonish- 
ment were  unbounded.  His  brother’s  prowess  had  in- 
deed saved  their  lives,  for  the  spy  never  trusted  any 
matter  to  paper  nor  to  third  parties,  so  that  the  results 
of  his  investigations  since  leaving  Yedo  died  with  him, 
and  they  could  slip  back  to  Yedo  long  before  any  dis- 
covery could  possibly  be^made  (if  any  ever  were  made) 
as  to  his  fate,  for  it  was  always  expected  that  when 
these  creatures  started  out  on  their  secret  tours  they 
would  take  their  own  time  and  adopt  whatever  methods 
seemed  best  to  them.  And  then  who  would  ever  think 
of  connecting  their  purported  absence  in  Mito  with  a 
murderous  combat  down  on  Yedo  Bay  ? 


Mito  Yashiki. 


*96 

But  no  time  was  to  be  lost  ! They  must  be  off  that 
very  evening.  Calling  their  boatmen,  they  at  once  is- 
sued orders  to  embark,  saying  that  an  accidental  tumble 
down  the  cliff  path  had  rendered  it  necessary  for  Junzo 
to  consult  medical  advisers  in  Mito, — a statement  which 
appeared  plausible  enough  when  his  lumpy  forehead  and 
limping  gait  were  considered.  Hastily  settling  up  their 
accounts  with  the  village  people,  they  started  off  in  the 
dark  and  had  gone  well  up  the  coast  before  daylight. 
Junzo  lay  quite  ill  for  two  days.  The  feverish  reaction, 
however,  was  soon  blown  away  by  the  southwest  mon- 
soon before  which  they  were  gayly  scudding  homeward. 
So  fair  was  the  breeze,  and  so  steadily  did  the  crew  keep 
to  their  work,  that  they  took  but  five  days  to  make  the 
trip  back  to  Mito  ; and  when  the  keel  of  their  boat  slid 
up  the  sands  near  the  villa,  our  young  adventurers  looked 
none  the  worse  for  their  experience.  Hurrying  on  to 
the  stables,  they  hastily  mounted  the  nags  that  awaited 
them  there,  and  were  back  in  Mito  Yashiki  safe  and 
sound  on  the  evening  of  the  fourth  day  after  leaving  the 
sea-shore  villa. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 


A CONVOCATION  AT  THE  CITADEL. 

Soon  after  the  return  of  our  young  friends  to  Mito 
Yashiki,  there  was  a grand  convocation  of  the  Daimios, 
called  by  the  Gotairo  in  the  name  of  his  master,  the 
Shogun  Iyesada.  They  were  convened  to  discuss  the 
ratification  of  the  great  treaty  made  with  Commodore 
Perry,  whereby  certain  commercial  privileges  were  to  be 
granted  to  the  Americans,  and  wherein  it  was  stipulated 
that  two  seaports  were  to  be  thrown  open  to  the  vessels 
of  that  country.  The  council-chambers  of  the  Shogun’s 
palace,  within  the  innermost  moat,  had  been  placed  in 
readiness  to  receive  the  assembly,  and  special  guards  of 
honor  had  been  placed  at  all  the  gates  of  the  castle  to 
receive  with  due  ceremony  the  pompous  trains  of  lords, 
who  flocked  from  all  parts  of  Yedo  to  participate  in  the 
momentous  debate.  The  very  cherry  blossoms  that 
bloomed  in  myriad  clusters  throughout  the  royal  gardens 
appeared  to  be  in  a flutter  of  excitement,  and  profusely 
showered  their  snowy  petals  upon  the  well  gravelled 
avenues  and  over  the  velvety  lawns.  The  council-cham- 
bers opened  out  upon  the  beautiful  gardens,  and  a host 
of  servants  in  their  best  attire  were  flitting  about  per- 
fecting the  arrangements  for  receiving  their  master’s 
guests  with  the  befitting  and  comforting  “pomp  and  cir- 
cumstance ” of  tea  and  tobacco,  in  order  that  the  debate 
might  be  alternately  stimulated  and  soothed.  The  great 
terror  that  had  seized  upon  the  city  when  the  fleet  first 
appeared,  had  subsided  as  soon  as  the  amicable  disposi- 
tion of  the  strangers  had  become  manifest.  But  there 
yet  pervaded  both  yashiki  and  mart  a feeling  of  sub- 


197 


198 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


dued  but  most  intense  excitement.  A political  volcano 
indeed  slumbered  beneath  the  very  feet  of  the  people. 

At  about  ten  o’clock  in  the  morning,  the  various  reti- 
nues began  to  sally  forth  from  the  gateways  of  the 
various yashikis,  and  to  wend  their  way  toward  the  cita- 
del. At  the  second  moat  the  lords  were  obliged  to  alight 
from  their  norimons,  and  to  enter  the  citadel  enclosure 
with  but  a few  personal  attendants,  who  escorted  them  to 
the  commodious  anterooms  to  await  the  signal  that 
should  announce  to  them  the  fact  that  they  were  to  be 
ushered  into  the  council-chambers.  Every  thing  was 
done  with  utmost  decorum  and  with  the  utmost  delibera- 
tion. There  was  an  utter  absence  of  turmoil  and  con- 
fusion, and  the  groups  of  dignitaries  were  silently 
ushered  in  by  the  attendants,  who  glided  about  like  well- 
oiled  machines,  manipulating  the  preliminaries  of  some 
state  funeral.  No  salutes  were  fired,  no  trumpets  gave 
tongue  to  their  inspiring  notes,  no  cheers  from  the  spec- 
tators awoke  the  drowsy  proceedings.  Each  Daimio  was 
courteously  received  at  the  gateway  of  the  palace  by  an 
attendant,  who  slowly  walked  ahead  of  him  down  the 
long  corridor,  while  a page,  carrying  his  lordship’s 
sword  (hilt  upward),  brought  up  the  rear.  Like  shadows 
they  looked  as  triplet  after  triplet  steadily  and  stealthily 
followed  each  other  with  noiseless  tread  down  the  long 
corridors  toward  the  waiting-rooms,  where  each  lord 
silently  knelt  upon  the  cushion  assigned  to  him,  while 
his  page  stood  behind  him  with  upheld  sword. 

Toward  midday  the  anterooms  had  become  well 
filled  with  a silent  and  expectant  throng,  that  awaited  the 
Gotairo’s  arrival  with  meek  quiescence  and  decorous 
patience.  As  yet  that  important  personage  had  not  left 
his  yashiki  near  the  western  entrance  to  the  Shogun’s 
parks.  He  tarried  there  with  his  councillors,  worrying 
over  some  diplomatic  point  involved  in  the  treaty.  At 
last  light  broke  upon  their  perplexity,  and  the  order  was 
given  for  the  norimon  to  be  brought  to  the  door,  and  for 
his  Lordship's  retinue  to  be  in  readiness  for  immediate 
departure.  Finally  his  Lordship  emerged  from  the 


A Convocation  at  the  Citadel. 


*99 


massive  doorway  of  his  mansion  ; his  bearers  prostrated 
themselves  in  the  dust  at  his  feet  ; his  retainers  did  unto 
him  profound  obeisance  ; and,  entering  his  elegantly 
lacquered  vehicle,  he  gave  the  command  to  start. 
Slowly  the  train  moved  across  the  courtyard  and  out 
through  the  main  gateway,  upon  the  broad  road  that 
skirted  the  moat.  Following  it  for  a short  distance  to 
the  left,  they  came  to  the  Hanzo  Gate  that  led  within  the 
Shogun’s  park.  They  were  not  to  enter  here,  but  were 
to  turn  to  the  right,  and  follow  the  edge  of  the  moat 
down  the  hill  until  they  came  to  the  Sakurada  Gate. 

It  will  therefore  appear  that  the  main  gateway  of  the 
Gotairo’s  stood  nearly  opposite  to  the  upper  gate 

that  furnished  ingress  to  the  royal  park.  In  ancient 
times  this  entire  locality  was  the  crown  of  a hill ; but 
when  the  castle  was  constructed  it  was  deemed  best  to 
carry  the  second  system  of  circumvallation  right  through 
the  hill.  Accordingly  the  indefatigable  architects  dug 
their  way  through  the  very  foundations  of  the  bluff, 
leaving  only  a narrow  causeway  in  front  of  the  gate, 
thus  making  one  of  those  mighty  cuttings  for  which 
Yedo  Castle  was  so  justly  famous,  and  leaving  the  two 
gateways  to  ogle  each  other  across  the  intervening 
ravine.  The  precipitous  sides  of  this  cutting  were  well 
swarded,  and  the  deep,  broad  waters  of  the  moat  beneath 
were  filled  with  water-lilies  and  lotus-flowers,  amid  which 
the  wild  fowl  from  northern  lakes  sported  unmolested 
during  the  winter  months.  The  opposite  side  of  the 
steep  embankment  was  fringed  along  its  top  with  stone 
ramparts,  upon  which  were  planted  pine-trees,  whose 
green  boughs  showered  needle-leaves  and  long  resinous 
cones  upon  hillside  and  water,  startling  the  wayward 
teal  with  their  rustlings  and  splashings  as  they  slid  down 
into  the  waves. 

The  long  retinue  of  Nawosuke,  Lord  of  Hikone, 
turned  aside  from  the  lofty  causeway  and  marched 
leisurely  down  the  hill  and  entered  the  Sakurada  Gate  by 
means  of  a fragile  wooden  bridge  thrown  across  the 
moat  at  that  point.  The  procession  was  not  a very  im- 


200 


Mito  Yashiki. 


posing  one,  for  his  Lordship  was  a man  of  simple  habits, 
loving  decisive  action  above  all  things,  and  having  but 
little  regard  for  pompous  display.  At  the  head  of  his 
procession  stalked  a retainer  who  bore  aloft  on  a long 
pole  the  black  tufted  tassel  that  betokened  the  rank  of 
a Daimio  of  the  realm.  Then  came  other  retainers 
bearing  aloft  the  heraldic  insignia  that  betokened  the 
approach  of  the  Lord  of  Hikone,  whom  it  had  pleased 
the  Shogun  to  constitute  the  Gotairo  (or  Prince  Regent, 
as  foreigners  were  accustomed  to  designate  him).  Then 
came  some  mailed  warriors  on  horseback,  followed  by 
some  spearmen  and  archers.  Then  came  the  norimon  of 
his  Highness,  borne  on  the  shoulders  of  eight  coolies,  and 
surrounded  by  a body-guard  of  stately  samurai  in  full 
regalia  costume.  And  the  rear  was  brought  up  by  a 
score  of  armed  horsemen. 

The  entire  procession  did  not  comprise  over  two  hun- 
dred men.  But  what  cared  his  Highness  for  display? 
Was  not  he  the  actual  ruler  of  the  “ Empire  of  the 
Gods  ” ? Were  not  the  barracks  of  his  yashiki  bristling 
with  warriors  ? Did  not  twenty  thousand  trusty  retain- 
ers await  his  commands  at  Hikone  Castle,  on  the  distant 
shores  of  Biwa  Lake  ? And  did  not  eighty  thousand 
armed  Hattomotos,  enrolled  under  the  Shogun’s  ban- 
ners, await  the  beck  and  call  of  Nawosuke,  Lord  of  Hikon6, 
Prince  Regent  of  the  realm  ? Why,  then,  with  the 
forces  of  the  realm  in  his  hand,  should  he  waste  money 
on  useless  pomp  ? Thus  reasoned  the  active  and  ener- 
getic mind  of  the  Gotairo.  Through  the  Sakurada  Gate, 
across  the  broad  parade  ground,  over  the  innermost 
moat,  and  into  the  private  grounds  of  the  Shogun’s 
palace,  swept  the  train  that  escorted  his  Highness,  until 
the  main  entrance  of  his  master’s  mansion  had  been 
reached,  when  the  order  to  halt  was  given,  and  the 
cramped  figure  of  his  Lordship  crept  out  of  the  comfort- 
less norimon  and  stood  beside  the  massive  portals  of  the 
vestibule. 

“ Honorable  Miyoshi,”  said  the  Gotairo  in  a low  tone 
addressing  one  of  his  attendants,  “ command  the  gen- 


A Convocation  at  the  Citadel. 


201 


tlemen  and  the  bearers  to  return  here  when  the  shadow 
of  the  sun-dial  indicates  the  hour  of  sunset.  In  the 
meantime  they  can  make  themselves  as  comfortable  as 
possible  in  the  barracks  beside  the  Exalted  Gateway.  It 
is  likely  that  our  session  will  be  a very  protracted  one.” 
So  saying,  he  mounted  the  steps  that  led  up  to  the 
veranda,  and  then,  with  his  councillors,  passed  down  the 
long  corridor  that  led  to  the  private  apartments  of  his 
master,  the  Shogun,  in  order  that  he  might  present  his 
respects,  and  also  might  make  arrangements  for  the  in- 
terview with  the  Daimios.  The  timid  and  delicate  young 
man  before  whom  he  and  his  councillors  prostrated 
themselves  in  the  reception  chamber  of  the  “ Barbarian 
Exterminating  Lord,”  did  not  much  resemble  the  en- 
shrined majesty  held  up  to  the  gaze  of  the  outside  world 
by  the  astute  Bakufu  officials, — a majesty  so  dread  that 
ambassadors  and  Daimios  must  creep  into  his  sacred 
presence  on  hands  and  knees  without  venturing  to  gaze 
thereon  ! Thus,  in  all  countries  do  courtiers  and  syco- 
phants pull  the  strings  that  manipulate  the  puppets  in 
whose  hands  thD  destinies  of  empires  are  presumed  to 
be  held. 

“ Profoundly  venerated  and  dreadsome  sir,”  said  the 
Gotairo,  after  the  preliminary  ceremonies  had  been  con- 
cluded, “ we,  your  silly  and  incapable  servants  are  ready 
to  make  report  to  the  Daimios,  as  to  what  course  should 
be  pursued  in  regard  to  these  foreigners  who  have  vexed 
the  minds  of  the  people  so  persistently  during  the  last 
seven  or  eight  months.” 

“ I have  no  doubt  that  your  able  report  will  be  satis- 
factory, and  that  the  solution  of  the  difficulty  therein 
suggested  will  pacify  the  hearts  of  the  people,  and  will 
comfort  the  imperial  bosom,  thus  immeasurably  gratifying 
and  quieting  my  greatly  perplexed  mind,”  slowly  and 
hesitatingly  replied  Iyesada.  “ When  I was  advised  to 
appoint  the  Lord  of  Hikone  as  my  prime-minister,  I was 
informed  that  no  abler  vassal  dwelt  within  the  domain 
of  Tokugawa.  Since  your  appointment  I have  had  no 
occasion  to  distrust  either  the  loyalty  or  the  astuteness 


202 


Mito  Yashiki. 


of  your  honored  self.  Learned  sir,  kindly  unfold  your 
plans  without  reserve,  and  take  full  charge  of  the  august 
assemblage  of  my  vassals,  now  gathered  in  this  palace.” 

“ Your  unworthy  servants,”  replied  the  Gotairo, 
“ would  suggest  that  our  Lord  take  his  place  behind  the 
screen  in  the  alcove  of  the  audience-hall,  where  his 
presence,  not  being  noted,  can  not  overawe  the  timorous 
vassals  there  assembled.  We  will  sit  in  front  of  the 
screen,  and  will  conduct  the  deliberation  of  the  Daimios. 
Your  Majesty  will  then  hear  all  about  our  plans,  and  can 
whisper  to  us  through  the  bamboo  gauzework  in  the 
screen  any  question  that  may  suggest  itself  to  your 
mind,  and  we  will  write  out  our  answers  thereto  and 
clandestinely  slip  the  notes  under  the  screen.  Such  is 
the  humble  suggestion  that  awaits  your  approval.” 

“ Your  suggestion  is  a wise  one,  and  I will  now  authorize 
its  immediate  adoption,”  replied  Iy^sada.  “ Do  that 
which  you  deem  advisable.  Affairs  are  now  entirely  in 
your  hands.  Order  whatever  you  may  wish  the  attend- 
ants to  do  without  consulting  further  with  myself.  I 
shall  now  proceed  to  the  alcove,  and  will  there  await 
further  developments.” 

So  saying,  the  ruler  of  the  Japanese  empire  quietly 
slipped  out  of  the  room,  leaving  the  Gotairo  to  do  what- 
ever might  seem  wise  in  his  own  eyes.  And  his  Lord- 
ship  did  not  hesitate  to  seize  the  reins  with  a firm  grip. 
Clapping  his  hands,  to  summon  an  attendant,  he  ordered 
that  personage,  when  he  had  put  in  an  appearance,  to 
instruct  the  ushers  to  marshal  the  Daimios  in  the  audi- 
ence-hall according  to  rank,  and  then  to  bring  him  word 
when  every  thing  was  ready  for  opening  the  convention. 
Another  attendant  then  brought  in  tea  and  tobacco  for 
the  councillors  to  discuss  while  matters  were  converging 
toward  a focus.  Then  some  ink  and  paper  were  called 
for,  and  his  Lordship  busied  himself  with  writing  for  the 
space  of  half  an  hour,  until  the  obsequious  attendants 
announced  that  the  assembled  Daimios  awaited  his 
pleasure.  He  then  proceeded  with  his  suite  through  a 
labyrinth  of  apartments  and  corridors  until  he  came  to 


A Convocation  at  the  Citadel. 


203 


the  stately  chamber  where  the  assembly  had  been  con- 
vened,— a fact  that  was  heralded  by  the  subdued  hum- 
ming of  many  voices. 

At  one  end  of  the  hall  was  a platform  raised  about  one 
foot  from  the  floor.  This  place  was  for  the  presiding 
officer  and  his  suite.  To  the  left  of  this  platform  was 
the  screened  alcove  already  alluded  to.  Around  upon 
the  main  floor  of  the  hall  were  sitting  about  two  hun- 
dred persons,  constituting  the  great  Daimios  of  the  realm 
and  their  personal  attendants.  They  had  been  provided 
with  silken  cushions,  on  which  they  knelt,  and  then  sat 
upon  their  heels  in  the  peculiar  manner  characteristic 
of  the  country.  The  s/tojee  beside  the  platform  was 
slid  gently  back,  and  the  Gotairo  with  his  suite  glided  in 
and  seated  themselves  upon  the  embroidered  cushions 
that  had  been  arranged  there  on  the  soft  tatamis.  When 
these  gentlemen  had  taken  their  seats  they  were  the  re- 
cipients of  profound  and  profuse  salutations  from  the 
assembly,  which  compliments  they  duly  returned  with 
salutations  equally  profound.  After  the  waves  of 
obeisances  had  subsided,  the  Gotairo  made  an  address, 
which,  if  it  had  been  condensed  in  terse  English,  would 
not  have  taken  up  more  than  five  minutes  of  time  ; but 
which,  when  inflated  with  continual  bowing  and  sucking 
in  of  the  breath  between  the  teeth,  together  with  endless 
circumlocutory  expressions,  padded  to  death  with  hon- 
orific verbiage,  occupied  twenty-five  minutes  of  time. 
His  remarks,  when  condensed  in  shockingly  abrupt  Eng- 
lish, were  about  as  follows  : 

“ I,  the  insignificant  and  utterly  unworthy  servant  of 
the  Shogun  (the  mighty  power  of  whose  ancestors  has 
smitten  barbarians  with  abject  fear  for  many  centuries, 
thereby  giving  peace  and  consolation  to  the  imperial 
bosom),  have  been  appointed  (although  but  a creature 
of  lowly  rank)  by  the  mighty  Lord  of  Dai-Nippon  to 
lay  before  the  noble  vassals  of  the  realm  here  convened 
a matter  of  vast  importance,  and  also  one  that  will  re- 
quire much  careful  and  profound  investigation.  After 
the  matter  has  been  fully  laid  before  you,  it  is  the  wish 


204 


Mito  Yashiki. 


of  my  master  that  you  freely  discuss  the  questions  in- 
volved in  so  momentous  a subject,  so  that  he  may  be 
benefited  and  soothed  with  whatever  valuable  sugges- 
tions there  may  be  garnered  in  the  matured  minds  of 
thoughtful  and  learned  vassals  here  convened  in  awe- 
some assemblage. 

“ You,  honored  sirs,  well  know  that  last  year  there  ap- 
peared on  our  coasts  four  ships  belonging  to  a barbarian 
nation  beyond  some  distant  seas.  As  you  have  already 
been  informed,  these  intruding  people,  with  boundless 
arrogance  and  defiance,  even  ventured  to  push  the  prows 
of  their  ships  far  into  the  waters  of  our  own  bay, — 
hitherto  unmolested  by  outside  barbarians, — thus  openly 
violating  the  edicts  of  Tokugawa  Iyeyas,  at  which  the 
nations  of  the  earth  have  trembled  for  over  two  hundred 
years,  and  by  which  a profound  peace  has  been  caused 
to  settle  down  upon  our  agitated  country  like  heavy 
mists  upon  a mountain.  Being  warned  to  leave  our 
waters,  these  barbarians  persisted  in  remaining ; and, 
furthermore,  they  insisted  upon  making  personal  delivery 
of  a letter  from  the  ruler  of  their  nation  to  the  ruler  of 
our  nation.  With  unparalleled  impudence  they  refused 
to  hand  over  that  epistle  to  a yakunin , but  they  insisted 
on  our  delegating  a lord  of  the  realm  to  be  the  person 
upon  whom  they  would  be  satisfied  to  make  what  they 
deemed  a suitable  service. 

“ So  greatly  had  the  country  become  alarmed  by  this 
unexpected  advent  of  the  barbarians,  and  so  utterly  un- 
prepared were  we  to  repel  the  intrusion  by  force,  that 
we  deemed  it  advisable  then  in  convention  to  humor 
them  in  their  whim,  and  to  allow  them  to  depart  in  peace. 
But  with  yet  greater  assurance  they  notified  us  that  they 
would  return  in  the  spring,  in  orderto  receive  our  answer 
to  their  letter.  And  they  have  shown  themselves  to  be 
as  good  as  their  word,  for  last  month  they  again  put  in 
an  appearance,  and  clamored  most  persistently  and  men- 
acingly for  our  reply.  They  have  rendered  the  situation 
more  awkward  by  returning  with  a fleet  containing  twice 
as  many  vessels  as  were  in  their  previous  fleet.  You 


A Convocation  at  the  Citadel. 


205 


already  are  familiar  with  the  contents  of  that  letter. 
Upon  its  reception  by  the  worshipful  and  mighty  Iy£yo- 
shi  last  summer,  he  laid  it  before  you  in  council.  At 
that  time  I was  a member  of  the  assembly, — not  yet 
having  been  appointed  as  servant  to  our  puissant  lord. 
I then  counselled  delay  in  the  matter  and  a friendly  an- 
swer, which  advice  the  great  Lord  of  Nippon  did  me  the 
overwhelming  honor  to  accept.  But,  in  the  meantime, 
momentous  changes  have  transpired.  Our  Lord  Iyeyo- 
shi,  soon  after  his  friendly  message  to  the  barbarians, 
fell  grievously  ill  of  some  mysterious  malady,  and  entered 
upon  the  shadowy  way,  so  that  his  office  devolved  upon 
our  present  master,  the  gracious  and  supreme  Lord 
Iy^sada,  who  has  seen  fit  to  constitute  me  to  be  his  right 
hand. 

“ And  now,  gentlemen  of  the  GosankS,  and  of  the 
Daimiates,  what  shall  we  do  with  this  letter  ? You  per- 
ceive that  it  is  directed  to  the  ‘ Ruler  ’ of  the  Japanese 
empire,  and  not  to  the  supreme  and  Imperial  Majesty 
that  has  dwelt  unseen  within  the  sacred  precincts  of  the 
Gosho  for  over  one  thousand  years.  Although  the 
fountain  of  honors  has  dwelt  in  such  prolonged  seclusion 
within  the  imperial  moats  in  Kioto,  yet  the  Shoguns 
have  been  delegated  by  the  invisible  majesty  of  sovereign- 
ty to  perform  the  functions  of  a ruler,  and  to  see  to  it 
that  the  empire  was  well  governed.  For  nearly  three 
hundred  years  has  the  house  of  Tokugawa  acted  as 
rulers  of  Dai-Nippon,  having  been  duly  delegated  by 
the  Son  of  Heaven  to  act  in  that  capacity.  As  the 
properly  constituted  and  the  legal  rulers  of  this  empire, 
it  therefore  falls  within  our  province  to  take  under  con- 
sideration this  letter,  inasmuch  as  all  matters  relating  to 
commerce,  and  all  matters  relating  to  the  regulation  ot 
intercourse  with  barbarians  were  duly  delegated  to 
Iyeyas  and  his  descendants,  when  he  drove  forth  the 
pestiferous  Kirishitans  and  received  the  title  of  ‘ Bar- 
barian Exterminating  Lord  ’ from  grateful  Tenshi. 

“ The  question,  then,  is  this  : Shall  the  Shogun,  the 
duly  delegated  ruler  of  Dai-Nippon,  reconsider  the  ac- 


206 


Mito  Yashiki. 


tion  of  his  great  ancestor,  and  change  or  modify  his 
policy  as  regards  the  total  exclusion  of  the  barbarians  ? 
We  must  first  act  and  then  report  our  action  to  Kioto, 
for  Tenshi  has  already  given  us  authority  to  act  as  rulers 
in  such  matters.  Gentlemen  of  resplendent  ancestry ! 
shall  we  attempt  to  drive  away  these  barbarians  by  force, 
or  shall  we  accede  to  their  demands  and  allow  their 
vessels  to  trade  freely  at  two  of  our  seaports  under 
strict  regulations  ? There  is  no  middle  position  that 
we  can  take  in  this  matter,  for  we  have  already  ex- 
hausted their  patience  with  the  dallying  policy  recom- 
mended by  this  august  assembly  when  convened  in  such 
haste  last  summer,  and  these  people  are  now  surly  and 
peremptory  in  their  demands,  although  wearing  smiling 
faces  and  bearing  amicable  outward  appearances.  The 
sharp  claws  lie  beneath  the  soft  hair  ! The  iron  mouths 
are  carrying  iron  balls  ! What  do  you  honorable  gentle- 
men advise  my  master  to  do  in  this  great  emergency  ? 
I,  for  my  part,  speaking  as  an  individual  of  dull  parts, 
must  candidly  say  that,  while  it  is  against  my  wishes  to 
subvert  the  long-established  policy  of  our  government 
regarding  barbarians,  yet  I cannot  see  as  any  great  harm 
will  result  from  allowing  their  vessels  to  trade  at  a couple 
of  our  seaports  for  a few  years.  In  the  meantime,  we 
can  watch  the  progress  of  events,  and  be  in  a position  at 
some  near  date  to  again  close  the  ports.  The  matter  is 
now  before  you  for  discussion.  What  say  you  ? ” 

“Welland  shrewdly  spoken,  thou  astute  and  diplo- 
matic knave  ! ” muttered  the  old  Prince  of  Mito  in  a 
savage  undertone  as  he  turned  toward  Konishi,  who 
attended  him  as  adviser  on  matters  pertaining  to  barba- 
rian customs  and  history.  “The  adroit  rogue  has 
shuffled  things  so  that  I am  puzzled  to  know  what  posi- 
tion to  take  in  this  matter.  My  hate  is  so  equally 
divided  between  him  and  the  barbarians,  that  I could 
oppose  either  of  them  with  supreme  joy.  Well,  I shall 
have  to  take  sides  against  him  anyway.  Let  us  hear 
what  the  Lord  of  Kaga  has  to  say  as  he  has  commenced 
to  speak.” 


A Convocation  at  the  Citadel. 


207 


The  Daimio  of  Kaga  was  the  wealthiest  nobleman  in 
the  realm,  and,  very  naturally,  the  weight  of  his  utter- 
ances was  vastly  enhanced  by  the  weight  of  his  money- 
bags. He  was  not  celebrated  for  any  very  brilliant 
qualities  of  intellect,  but  it  was  generally  noted  that  his 
conclusions  were  usually  sound,  notwithstanding  his 
lumbering  and  clumsy  method  of  expressing  himself 
while  getting  at  them. 

“ Although  it  may  not  be  becoming,”  said  his  Lordship, 
in  measured  tones,  as  he  bowed  his  head  downward  in 
profound  salutation  of  the  Gotairo,  “for  an  individual  of 
my  dull  parts  and  obtuse  faculties  to  criticise  the  state- 
ments of  so  capable  a person  as  the  chief  councillor  of  the 
awesome  Shogun,  yet  will  I venture  to  state  that  the  copy 
of  the  foreign  ruler’s  letter  that  is  in  my  possession  does 
not  purport  to  be  directed  to  the  ‘ Ruler  ’ of  Dai-Nip- 
pon,  but  is  very  clearly  addressed  to  ‘ His  Imperial 
Majesty,  the  Emperor  of  Japan.’  Such  being  the  case, 
it  seems  to  me  (unskilled  as  I truly  am  in  matters  of 
diplomacy  and  of  statesmanship)  that  this  entire  matter 
should  be  referred  to  Tenshi  at  Kioto  for  discussion  and 
approval.  When  some  decision  has  been  proclaimed  from 
the  Gosho,  then  will  it  be  the  proper  time  for  us  to  act.” 

The  murmur  of  applause  that  greeted  this  most  unex- 
pected speech  clearly  showed  that  many  Daimios  there 
present  considered  that  the  phlegmatic  Lord  of  Kaga 
had  made  a decided  hit,  for  President  Fillmore’s  letter 
was  indeed  addressed  to  “ His  Imperial  Majesty,  the 
Emperor  of  Japan.” 

“ Sure  enough  ! The  entire  matter  should  be  referred 
to  Kioto,”  exclaimed  several  lordlings,  who  delighted  to 
bask  in  the  smiles  of  overshadowing  Kaga,  and  the  chief 
end  of  whose  existence  appeared  to  be  (figuratively 
speaking)  to  sneeze  whenever  their  ponderous  neighbor 
took  snuff.  The  Gosanke,  however,  were  silent,  evidently 
not  being  quite  prepared  to  give  so  much  prominence  to 
the  Gosho,  to  the  detriment  of  the  long-established 
prestige  of  the  house  of  Tokugawa.  Even  Mito, 
though  prepared  to  take  sides  against  the  Shogun  in  the 


208 


Mito  Yashiki. 


matter  of  allowing  foreigners  to  trade  with  Japan,  was 
not  willing  to  humiliate  the  pride  and  the  glory  of 
Tokugawa  by  rushing  off  to  Kioto  to  appeal  to  Tens/ii  to 
act  as  supreme  arbiter  in  such  a matter  as  that  under 
discussion.  The  wily  Gotairo,  however,  was  not  to  be 
caught  napping.  He  had  sifted  the  question  too  care- 
fully that  very  morning  to  be  unprepared  with  the 
counter-stroke  to  his  heavy  adversary’s  deft  and  unex- 
pected stroke.  Before  the  approving  applause  of  the 
assembly  could  gather  any  headway,  he  sprang  to  the 
attack  with  that  dash  and  ability  for  which  he  Avas  so 
greatly  renowned. 

“ It  is  true,  O most  subtle  and  learned  Lord  of  Kaga  ! ” 
said  the  Gotairo  in  calm  and  impressive  tones,  “ that  the 
formal  and  literal  address  of  this  letter  is  to  ‘ His  Impe- 
rial Majesty,  the  Emperor  of  Japan.’  But  I was  not 
considering  the  form  of  the  superscription,  but  the  spirit 
and  intent  of  the  letter.  It  is  clearly  manifest  that  the 
intention  of  the  ruler  of  this  foreign  nation  is  to  commu- 
nicate with  the  ruler  of  Dai-Nippon  in  regard  to 
commercial  matters.  This  intent  can  be  read  between 
the  lines  throughout  the  entire  document.  I will  read 
two  extracts  to  prove  my  statements.  Near  the  end  of  the 
letter  is  the  following  paragraph  : ‘ These  are  the  only 

objects  for  which  I have  sent  Commodore  Perry  with  a ' 
powerful  squadron  to  pay  a visit  to  your  I tnperial  Majesty's 
renowned  city  of  Yedo  : friendship , commerce,  a supply  of 
coal  and  provisions , and  protection  for  our  shipwrecked 
people.'  And  near  the  beginning  of  the  letter  carefully 
note  this  significant  paragraph  : ‘ The  Constitution  atid 

laws  of  the  United  States  forbid  all  interferetice  with  the 
religious  or  political  concerns  of  other  nations.  I have  par- 
ticularly charged  Commodore  Perry  to  abstain  from  every 
act  which  could  possibly  disturb  the  tranquillity  of  your  Im- 
perial Majesty's  dominion.' 

“ Now,  illustrious  gentlemen  of  the  Gosankl  and  of  the 
Daimiates,  please  note  how  clearly  drawn  is  the  distinc- 
tion between  commercial  matters  and  matters  spiritual 
and  political.  Had  the  barbarians  desired  to  treat  with 


A Convocation  at  the  Citadel . 


209 


us  on  matters  spiritual  and  political,  the  question  might 
well  have  arisen  as  to  the  policy  of  referring  the  matter 
to  Kioto.  But  they  utterly  repudiate  any  such  intention. 
There  can  be  no  shadow  of  doubt  about  that.  Further- 
more, they  limit  themselves  entirely  to  the  consideration 
of  commercial  matters  and  send  their  squadron  to  the 
commercial  capital  (Yedo),  where  such  matters  have 
been  managed  for  centuries.  What  then  can  be  clearer 
than  my  first  statement  that  the  foreign  * Ruler  addresses 
the  ‘ Ruler  ’ of  Dai-Nippon  upon  a subject  concerning 
which  the  latter  personage  has  full  powers  to  act  ? Was 
not  the  policy  of  the  exclusion  of  foreign  commerce 
inaugurated  by  the  house  of  Tokugawa?  Has  not  then 
that  same  house  full  authority  to  reconsider  their 
ancient  action  in  the  matter  ? Who  dare  to  gainsay  so 
patent  a fact  ? Furthermore,  who  would  think  of 
referring  such  vulgar  matters  as  the  price  of  coal,  wood, 
and  provisions  to  the  illustrious  descendant  of  the  gods? 
Has  not  the  imperial  family  for  a thousand  years 
referred  all  matters  relating  to  the  vulgar  bickerings  of 
merchants  and  sailors  to  the  Shogun  ? Who  will  dare  to 
gainsay  that  such  matters  fall  within  the  scope  of  the 
authority  of  my  master?  Who  will  dare  to  insult  the 
serene  majesty  of  Tenshi  with  long-drawn  memorials  and 
grandiloquent  petitions,  beseeching  the  scion  of  the 
immortal  gods  to  adjust  the  tariff  on  eggs  and  pork  ? ” 

The  outburst  of  applause  and  laughter  that  followed 
this  sally  of  logic  and  wit  proved  beyond  peradventure 
that  the  Gotairo  was  master  of  the  situation  and  had 
carried  an  overwhelming  majority  of  the  Daimios  with 
him.  Even  Mito  was  seen  to  smile.  Kaga  lapsed  into 
sullen  silence,  wearing  on  his  stolid  features  the  expres- 
sion of  a man  who  had  been  hard  sat  upon.  And  the 
long-drawn  breath  behind  the  screen  betokened  that  the 
“ Ruler  ” of  Dai-Nippon  fully  appreciated  the  situation. 

“ No,  gentlemen,”  continued  the  Gotairo,  striking  while 
the  iron  was  yet  hot,  “ we  have  decided  that  this  entire 
matter  falls  within  our  legitimate  jurisdiction  and  must 
not  be  referred  to  Kioto,  but  must  be  fully  discussed  here 


2 10 


Mito  Yashiki. 


in  Yedo  by  this  august  assembly  of  rulers.  From  this 
decision  there  can  be  no  appeal.  Let  us  now  discuss 
this  important  matter  unreservedly  and  fully,  for  the 
barbarians  are  clamoring  for  an  answer.” 

After  this  opening  passage  at  arms,  there  seemed  to  be  a 
disinclination  on  the  part  of  the  assembly  to  precipitate  the 
discussion  as  to  whether  or  not  the  foreigners  should  be 
admitted  into  the  land  of  the  gods.  While  the  Gotairo 
awaited  the  pleasure  of  the  assembly,  the  Daimios 
quietly  but  warmly  discussed  the  matter  in  undertones 
among  themselves.  A split  speedily  developed  itself, 
wherein  the  minority  faction  rallied  under  the  leadership 
of  Mito,  who  hotly  laid  down  his  views  to  the  meagre 
coterie  of  followers  that  craned  their  necks  toward  him 
to  catch  his  impassioned  words.  An  hour  of  verbose 
warfare  had  failed  to  close  the  breach  between  the 
factions,  and  it  became  manifest  that  the  forlorn  hope 
had  imbibed  the  obstinate  spirit  of  their  leader.  At  this 
juncture  the  Gotairo,  who,  by  the  way,  had  kept  himself 
well  informed  of  the  state  of  affairs  by  means  of  private 
communications  from  his  adherents  in  the  body  of  the 
house,  determined  to  force  the  issue  by  precipitating  the 
debate  without  further  delay.  With  the  suavity  of  a man 
who  feels  himself  to  be  already  the  victor,  he  slowly 
quaffed  a cup  of  tea  as  he  cast  his  searching  eyes  over  the 
assembly.  Then  with  boundless  good-humor  he  grasped 
his  fan  and  smilingly  smote  the  low  lacquered  stand  that 
stood  before  him  and  said  : “ Profound  and  learned 

councillors  ! The  afternoon  is  rapidly  waning  and  we 
must  to-day  make  our  reply  to  the  barbarians’  letter. 
What  shall  the  answer  be  ? ” 

“Yea!  Thou  well  sayest  that  the  afternoon  wanes,” 
muttered  the  Prince  of  Mito  in  a fierce  undertone,  “but 
what  carest  thou  for  that  when  thou  already  holdest  the 
assembly  in  thy  hands?  Yet  beware  ! The  clouds  will 
gather  over  thy  fair  sky  at  some  not  distant  day,  and 
I shall  hold  the  fan  and  smite  thy  cheek  as  thou  hast 
smitten  yonder  stand.”  And  his  choleric  lordship, 
suiting  his  action  to  his  muttered  threats,  smote  the  stand 


A Convocation  at  the  Citadel. 


2 1 1 


before  him  so  vigorously,  that  the  little  cups  and  tiny 
pipes  thereon  quaked  and  rattled  in  dismay.  The 
Gotairo  heard  the  sound,  and,  taking  it  as  a signal  to 
catch  the  presiding  officer’s  attention,  he  turned  toward 
that  part  of  the  room  and  said  : 

“ Illustrious  gentlemen  ! Be  pleased  to  maintain  silence 
while  the  noble  Lord  of  Mito  (worthy  scion  of  the 
renowned  Iy6yas)  shall  speak  and  give  to  us  the  benefit 
of  his  thoughtful  observations  on  a subject  wherein  he  is 
well  qualified  to  express  an  opinion  ; for,  as  you  already 
know,  the  noble  lords  of  Mito  have  always  been  deeply 
versed  in  the  science  and  in  the  literature  of  western 
nations.” 

Thus  introduced  to  the  house,  the  Prince  of  Mito 
voiced  the  sentiments  of  the  minority  faction  and  most 
vigorously  assailed  the  policy  of  the  Gotairo  in  the 
following  words  1 : “I  am  totally  opposed  to  the  admis- 

sion of  any  of  these  barbarian  nations  to  commercial 
privileges  with  ourselves,  upon  the  ground  that  they  will 
ruin  our  country,  as  they  came  very  near  doing  three 
hundred  years  ago.  At  first  they  will  give  us  philosophi- 
cal instruments,  machinery,  and  other  curiosities,  will 
take  ignorant  people  in,  and,  trade  being  their  chief 
object,  they  will  manage,  bit  by  bit,  to  impoverish  the 
country  ; after  which,  they  will  treat  us  just  as  they  like  ; 
perhaps  behave  with  the  greatest  rudeness  and  insult  us, 
and  end  by  swallowing  up  Japan.  If  we  do  not  drive 
them  away  now,  we  shall  never  have  another  opportunity. 
If  we  now  resort  to  a dilatory  method  of  proceeding,  we 
shall  regret  it  afterwards  when  it  will  be  of  no  use.” 

The  battle  thus  boldly  begun  was  hotly  waged  for 
three  or  four  hours  all  along  the  line.  Reasons  innu- 
merable were  adduced  for  excluding  the  horrid  savages 
of  the  West.  But  the  sentiments  of  the  Gotairo  and  of 
his  councillors,  expressed  in  the  following  language,’ 
finally  prevailed  : 

“ If  we  try,”  said  they,  “ to  drive  them  away,  they  will 
immediately  commence  hostilities,  and  then  we  shall  be 

1 F.  O.  Adams’  “ History  of  Japan,”  vol.  i.,  p.  112.  s Ibid. 


2 1 2 


Mito  Yashiki. 


obliged  to  fight.  If  we  once  get  into  a dispute,  we  shall 
have  an  enemy  to  fight  who  will  not  be  easily  disposed  of. 
He  does  not  care  how  long  a time  he  will  have  to  spend 
over  it,  but  he  will  come  with  several  myriads  of  men-of- 
war  and  surround  our  shores  completely  ; he  will  capture 
our  junks,  and  blockade  our  ports,  and  deprive  us  of  all 
hope  of  protecting  our  coasts.  However  large  a number 
of  ships  we  might  destroy,  he  is  so  accustomed  to  that 
sort  of  thing  that  he  would  not  care  in  the  least.  Even 
supposing  that  our  troops  were  animated  by  patriotic 
zeal  in  the  commencement  of  the  war,  after  they  had 
been  fighting  for  several  years  their  patriotic  zeal  would 
naturally  become  relaxed,  the  soldiers  would  become 
fatigued,  and  we  should  have  to  thank  ourselves  for  this. 
Soldiers  who  have  distinguished  themselves  are  rewarded 
by  grants  of  land,  or  else  you  attack  and  seize  the  en- 
emy’s territory,  and  that  becomes  your  own  property  ; so 
every  man  is  encouraged  to  fight  his  best. 

“ But,  in  a war  with  foreign  countries,  a man  may  un- 
dergo hardships  for  years,  may  fight  as  if  his  life  were 
worth  nothing,  and,  as  all  the  land  in  this  country  has 
already  owners,  there  will  be  none  to  be  given  away  as 
rewards  ; so  we  shall  have  to  give  rewards  in  words  or 
money.  In  time,  the  country  would  be  put  to  an  im- 
mense expense,  and  the  people  be  plunged  into  misery. 
Rather  than  allow  this,  as  we  are  not  the  equals  of  the 
foreigners  in  the  mechanical  arts,  let  us  have  intercourse 
with  foreign  countries,  learn  their  drill  and  tactics,  and 
when  we  have  made  the  nation  as  united  as  one  family, 
we  shall  be  able  to  go  abroad  and  give  lands  in  foreign 
countries  to  those  who  have  distinguished  themselves  in 
battle  ; the  soldiers  will  vie  with  one  another  in  display- 
ing intrepidity,  and  it  will  not  be  too  late  then  to  declare 
war.  Now  we  shall  have  to  defend  ourselves  against 
these  foreign  enemies,  skilled  in  the  use  of  mechanical 
appliances,  with  our  soldiers,  whose  military  skill  has 
considerably  diminished  during  a long  peace  of  three 
hundred  years,  and  we  certainly  could  not  feel  sure  of 
victory,  especially  in  a naval  war.” 


A Convocation  at  the  Citadel. 


213 


Thus  ended  the  most  momentous  debate  that  had 
occurred  under  the  Shogunate,  since  the  time  when  the 
bloody  decrees  against  the  Jesuits  were  promulgated. 
Mito  was  routed,  but  he  remained  undismayed  and 
defiant.  “ Aye  ! ” said  he  to  Konishi  that  night  at  his 
yashiki ',  “ the  battle  has  begun,  and  I have  well  un- 
masked the  hidden  springs  that  control  the  actions  of 
that  Hikone  dog.  He  fears  and  dreads  the  foreigners  ! 
Our  spies  have  indeed  rendered  us  inestimable  services. 
There  can  be  no  doubt  but  what  these  foreigners  are 
greater  and  more  powerful  than  we  are.  It  will  be  use- 
less for  us  to  fight  them.  The  councillors  spoke  truly 
there.  Henceforth  we  must  not  fight  the  foreigners,  but 
the  Shogun  himself.  The  glory  must  depart  from  Toku- 
gawa,  and  must  return  to  Tenshi.  We  must  use  our 
secret  endeavors  to  set  the  tide  of  power  and  of  influence 
in  the  direction  of  the  Gosho.  This  will  require  much 
time  and  patience.  But  who  that  knows  me  will  say  that 
I do  not  possess  the  capacity  to  wait  and  watch  when 
yonder  upstart  is  lording  it  over  the  realm  as  if  he  were 
born  of  the  gods  ? Yea,  thou  Biwa  ape  ! Thy  carcass 
shall  some  day  rot,  as  now  does  that  of  thy  sneaking 
minion  in  the  woods  beside  the  shrine  ! ” 


CHAPTER  XVII. 


HIKON1L  CASTLE. 

Again  the  scene  changes.  We  are  at  Hikone  Castle, 
on  the  shores  of  Lake  Biwa.  Soon  after  the  great  de- 
bate of  the  Daimios,  described  in  the  last  chapter,  the 
American  Commodore  was  duly  notified  that  the  Shogun 
had  consented  to  the  terms  of  the  proposed  treaty  ; and 
that  document,  after  long  negotiations,  was  duly  signed 
on  March  31,  1854.  The  fleet  then  departed  on  a cruise 
along  the  coast,  for  the  purpose  of  inspecting  the  harbors 
of  the  two  treaty  ports.  Early  in  May,  the  Gotairo,  after 
a careful  survey  of  the  political  outlook,  came  to  the  con- 
clusion that  there  were  breakers  ahead,  and  that  it  be- 
hooved him,  during  the  calm  that  had  ensued  when  the 
foreigners  had  departed,  to  put  the  affairs  of  his  Daimiate 
in  good  shape,  so  that,  when  the  storms  that  were 
evidently  brewing  around  the  political  horizon  should 
break  upon  him,  he  might  be  ready  to  weather  the  gales. 
He  considered  the  fact  that  he  might  not  have  another 
opportunity  to  visit  his  Daimiate  for  many  years,  as 
it  was  manifest  that  his  continued  presence  in  Yedo 
would  be  required  at  a very  early  date.  He  therefore  set 
out  about  the  middle  of  May  with  a small  escort,  and 
journeyed  rapidly  by  way  of  the  magnificent  Nakasendo 
through  the  inland  mountains  toward  Hikon<§,  where  he 
arrived  safely  at  the  end  of  the  month,  and  at  once  set 
vigorously  to  work  to  arrange  his  affairs,  so  that  his 
anticipated  long  absence  would  not  be  productive  of 
injury  or  embarrassments  in  the  future. 

Hikone  Castle  was  one  of  the  most  picturesquely 
located  of  any  of  the  feudal  strongholds  of  Japan.  Situ- 


214 


Hikone  Castle. 


215 


ated  about  midway  up  the  eastern  shore  of  Lake  Biwa,  it 
looked  forth  upon  the  blue  waves  of  that  placid  sheet  of 
water,  and  upon  the  lofty  ranges  that  bounded  the  west- 
ern shore.  This  beautiful  mountain  mirror  extended 
from  north  to  south  for  about  fifty  miles,  and,  in  its 
widest  part  from  east  to  west,  it  was  twenty  miles  wide. 
Its  lovely  shores  were  girt  with  well  wooded  hills  and 
majestic  mountains.  Beginning  with  the  town  of  Otsu, 
at  the  southern  end  (where  our  Nakashima  friends  sipped 
the  farewell  cup  when  starting  on  their  overland  journey), 
we  follow  the  shore  up  the  eastern  side  until  we  reach 
Shioatsu,  at  the  extreme  northern  end  of  the  lake.  The 
southern  part  of  this  side  is  low  and  hilly  ; but  as  the  vi- 
cinity of  Hikon£  is  approached,  the  country  becomes 
more  rugged  ; and,  as  the  northern  part  is  reached,  the 
converging  shores  merge  into  a grand  mountainous 
region.  Then  starting  from  Shioatsu,  and  journeying 
down  the  western  shore,  we  find  ourselves  overshadowed 
with  magnificent  mountains  during  the  entire  trip.  Far 
down  this  shore,  near  Otsu,  stand  the  white  walls  of 
another  castle,  belonging  to  some  petty  Daimio.  It  is 
perched  upon  the  brow  of  a low  hill,  while  behind  it — 
like  some  majestic  sentinel — rises  lofty  Hiyeisan,  with  its 
engroved  monastery  and  sequestered  shrines.  The  entire 
circuit  of  the  shores  is  beaded  with  villages  and  hamlets. 
And  every  available  spot  has  been  cultivated,  so  that  the 
waters  seem  to  be  clasped  with  a broad  band  of  living 
green.  Fishing-boats  fly  merrily  over  its  surface,  and 
“ oft  in  the  stilly  night  ” the  pleasure-seekers  skim  the 
waves  in  excursion  boats.  As  before  remarked,  the 
eastern  and  the  western  shores  converged  toward  the 
north,  until  they  plunged,  like  a huge  wedge,  into 
the  mighty  mountain  barriers,  and  the  lake  received  into 
its  bosom  the  never  failing  streams  that  poured  down 
the  glens  and  ravines,  thus  carrying  vast  quantities  of 
gravel  and  pebbles  into  the  lake,  and  scouring  the  north- 
ern shores  so  well  with  their  sands,  that  the  broad  ex- 
panse of  glittering  beach  and  pebbly  shore  stood  out 
spotless  in  the  bright  sunshine.  The  native  legends  say 


Mito  Yashiki. 


216 

that  this  exquisite  sheet  of  water  was  created  by  an 
earthquake  that  occurred  over  two  thousand  years  ago. 
A whole  province  sank  out  of  sight,  and,  simultaneously, 
Fujisan  upheaved  his  towering  crest  upon  the  eastern 
coast  three  hundred  miles  away  ! 

Hikone  Castle  was  built  upon  some  bluffs,  at  a point 
where  the  shore  juts  boldly  into  the  lake,  thus  giving  a 
superb  view  up  and  down  the  shores.  The  general  plan 
of  the  fortifications  resembled  that  of  the  castle  in  Yedo. 
It  was  constructed,  however,  upon  a very  much  smaller 
scale,  and  was  far  more  picturesque  in  its  details.  In 
and  about  its  massive  ramparts  had  camped  the  legions 
of  the  league,  on  the  eve  of  the  fateful  battle  of  Sekagi- 
hara.  The  misty  morning  of  that  day  beheld  the  lusty 
warriors  streaming  forth,  confident  of  victory,  and  the 
dusky  gloaming  saw  the  depleted  ranks  shrink  within  the 
moats  to  await  the  victorious  swoop  of  Iyeyas.  Multi- 
tudes of  the  vanquished  warriors  refused  to  submit  to  the 
humiliation  of  surrender,  and  plunged  their  keen  blades 
into  their  abdomens,  through  the  portal  vein  and  the 
great  arteries.  The  fair  greenswards  reeked  with  the 
fuming  blood  of  self-immolation  ; and  the  victors,  for- 
sooth, found  many  bodies,  but  there  were  but  few  heads 
to  chop  off  and  impale  on  the  gateposts  and  along 
the  battlements.  Fair  and  lovely,  however,  appeared 
the  lawns,  and  sweetly  blushed  the  roses  and  the  peonies, 
on  that  June  morning  when  Nawosuke  sat  in  the  charm- 
ing pavilion  beside  the  lake,  and  dreamily  gazed  upon 
the  beauties  of  the  enchanting  scene.  He  had  arranged 
his  affairs,  and  had  straightened  out  his  financial  matters, 
so  that  his  revenues  would  flow  steadily  into  his  Yedo 
coffers  without  any  vexatious  delay.  The  succession  to 
his  estates  (in  case  of  his  sudden  death)  had  been  duly 
secured  to  his  son,  a bright,  promising  lad,  who  now  was 
making  merry  with  a picnic  party,  fishing  in  one  of  the 
shady  coves  hard  by,  whence  the  merry  laughter  of  the 
boys  could  be  heard  as  they  frolicked  in  the  water  and 
on  the  beach.  Presently  he  was  aroused  from  his  reverie 
by  an  attendant  bringing  in  tea  and  tobacco.  After  the 


Hikone  Castle. 


217 

lapse  of  a few  minutes,  another  attendant  brought  in 
a despatch  that  had  just  been  delivered  by  special 
courier  at  the  outer  gateway  of  the  castle. 

“ Ah  ! From  Yedo,  I perceive,’’  exclaimed  his  Grace, 
as  he  glanced  at  the  box.  “ I hope  it  contains  some 
news  about  Shimidzu.  He  remains  remarkably  silent  on 
this  trip.  I cannot  imagine  what  put  it  into  his  head 
that  spies  from  some  Yedo  yashiki  were  in  communica- 
tion with  the  foreign  fleet.  Surely  we  sowed  the  country 
around  the  bay  with  enough  emissaries  to  ensnare  any 
suspicious  person  in  our  nets.  But  he  was  always  a very 
persistent  fellow,  and  would  always  work  after  his  own 
fashion.  And,  so  long  as  he  was  successful,  why  should 
I care  about  his  methods  ? 

“ Well  ! What  is  this  that  I am  reading  ? I certainly  did 
not  expect  to  hear  any  such  news  as  this  ! [He  reads 
from  the  letter  in  his  hand  :]  1 About  ten  days  ago,  the 
peasants  worshipping  at  the  shrine  erected  in  honor  of 
Ebisu  near  a fishing  hamlet  somewhere  in  the  vicinity  of 
of  Yokoska,  on  the  southwestern  shore  of  Yedo  bay,  were 
afflicted  with  a foul  and  grievous  stench,  as  if  putrid  flesh 
had  been  thrust  under  their  very  nostrils.  Following  up 
the  direction  whence  the  horrible  odor  seemed  to  ema- 
nate, they  went  into  the  woods,  and  found  the  body  of  a 
samurai , in  advanced  stages  of  putrefaction.  The  man 
had  evidently  been  killed  in  a duel,  for  his  sword  (very 
valuable),  his  money,  and  his  clothes  were  carefully 
concealed  in  the  underbrush  near  by,  thus  conclusively 
showing  that  robbery  could  not  have  been  the  motive. 
The  terrified  peasants  at  once  reported  the  matter  to  the 
nearest  town,  and  an  officer  speedily  visited  the  spot. 
He  reported  that  the  features  had  become  corrupted  be- 
yond recognition  ; that  the  man  had  evidently  been 
killed  with  a single  deep  cut  across  the  bowels  from  right 
to  left  ; and  that  the  assailant  had  apparently  met  him  in 
single  combat,  for  reasons  unknown.  A careful  inspec- 
tion of  the  clothing  failed  to  throw  any  light  upon  his 
identity,  But  the  sword  has  been  identified  in  the  office 
of  the  Bakufu,  in  Yedo,  as  that  of  Shimidzu,  the  wonderful 


2 I 8 


Mito  Yashiki. 


spy.  It  is  with  boundless  grief  that  we  are  obliged  to 
report  the  death  of  so  faithful  and  valuable  a servant.’  ” 

With  unmoved  features  his  Lordship  read  and  re-read 
the  despatch.  At  last  he  closed  it  pensively,  and  thrust 
it  into  the  folds  of  his  sleeve,  and  exclaimed  : “Well! 
It 's  no  use  mourning  now.  It  was  over  with  the  poor 
fellow  some  time  ago.  So  the  old  fox  finally  met  his 
match  ! I wonder  who  his  antagonist  could  have  been  ? 
No  tyro,  I ’ll  warrant,  but  a well  seasoned  piece  of  tim- 
ber, as  sure  as  I am  Nawosuk^,  Lord  of  Hikone.  And 
now  for  revenge  ! Ah  ! There  the  prospect  is  not  very 
encouraging.  Not  a trace  of  the  assassin  ! Not  a clue  ! 
But  let  me  see  the  letter  again.  Yes,  there  is  a slight 
clue.  It  says  that  he  was  deeply  cut  from  right  to  left. 
That  would  indicate  that  the  cutter  was  a left-handed 
man,  to  be  able  to  give  so  deadly  a stroke  on  that  side. 
Left-handed  men  are  not  so  numerous,  are  they  ? Let 
us  hereafter  keep  our  eyes  open  for  them.  The  outlook 
for  revenge  is  certainly  rather  meagre,  for  I can’t  very 
well  seize  a man  for  being  left-handed  ! Never  mind, 
my  unknown  enemy,  my  memory  is  excellent,  and  my 
patience  is  as  enduring  as  the  hills.  We  will  wait  and 
see  if  I ever  come  across  you.”  So  saying,  he  slipped 
the  letter  into  his  sleeve,  and  sadly  rested  his  head  upon 
his  hands  and  lapsed  into  a condition  of  profound  medi- 
tation, from  which  he  was  roused  at  the  end  of  about 
half  an  hour  by  the  attendant  bringing  in  another  letter. 

“ What  now  ? ” exclaimed  Nawostik£,  peevishly  ; “ some 
more  Yedo  despatches  ?” 

“ No,  my  illustrious  Lord,”  meekly  replied  the  bearer ; 
“ it  is  a note  from  the  Abbot  of  the  Buddhist  monastery 
on  Hiyeisan,  who  awaits  your  pleasure  at  the  outer 
gate.  He  submissively  presents  his  compliments  and  his 
homage.” 

“ Which,  being  construed  in  the  light  of  past  experi- 
ence, means  that  he  is  on  one  of  his  begging  excursions, 
soliciting  contributions  for  his  monastery,”  ejaculated 
his  Lordship,  snappishly.  “ These  fellows  seem  to  think 
that  I am  made  of  gold.  I wish  Tokugawa  had  never 


Hikone  Castle. 


2 19 

taken  the  Buddhists  under  state  patronage.  That  rogue 
always  manages  to  find  out  when  I am  here,  just  as  a 
crow  scents  garbage.  Well,  it  may  be  some  time  before 
he  has  a chance  to  see  me  again,  and,  as  I am  in  a mood 
for  holy  conversation,  I think  you  may  order  him  to 
come  here.  I shall  endeavor  to  vex  his  heart  with  some 
new  ideas  about  his  religion.  That  will  entertain  me.” 

In  a few  minutes  the  shaven  priest,  dresset^in  elegant 
gowns  of  brocaded  silk,  and  carrying  his  rosary  wound 
about  his  wrist,  was  ushered  into  the  pavilion.  He  pros- 
trated himself  before  the  Gotairo,  and  delivered  a series 
of  obeisances  such  as  he  was  accustomed  to  bestow  on 
Buddha  in  Nirvana  up  at  his  monastery. 

“ Well,  sir  Abbot,  what  service  can  I render  to  you  to- 
day ? ” said  his  Lordship,  after  the  salutations  had  spent 
themselves. 

“ Supremely  venerated  sir,”  slowly  replied  the  monk 
in  reverential  cadences,  acquired  through  having  intoned 
the  ritual  so  many  thousand  times,  “ it  is  well  known  to 
your  honorable  self  that  Gongen-sama  condescended  to 
smile  upon  our  monastery  at  Hiyeisan,  and  that  his  suc- 
cessors have  continued  to  show  us  boundless  favor, — al- 
though we  have  but  slightly  merited  such  attentions.  We 
have  endeavored  to  requite  such  friendship  by  continu- 
ing to  chant  the  services  for  their  souls.  But  such 
ceremonies  entail  expenditure.  Therefore,  it  becomes 
necessary  for  us,  from  time  to  time,  to  solicit  assistance. 
Be  pleased,  most  honorable  sir,  to  remember  us  in  the 
matter.” 

“ It  is  well  to  be  mindful  of  the  dead,  and  to  revere  their 
memories  with  becoming  ceremonies,”  said  the  Gotairo. 
“ I have  been  considering  the  matter,  and  I now  decide 
that  the  sum  of  ten  thousand  kokus  of  rice  shall  be  appor- 
tioned to  your  irstitution,  for  the  purpose  of  defraying 
the  expenses  connected  with  the  services  mentioned  by 
you.  I will  now  write  out  an  order  on  the  warehouse 
keeper  for  the  delivery  of  that  amount.” 

“ Profoundly  venerated  sir,”  intoned  the  priest  in  his 
most  solemn  cadences,  placing  his  forehead  on  the 


2 20 


Mito  Yashiki. 


iatami,  “ your  liberality  is  munificent  indeed,  and  we 
shall  endeavor  in  our  mystic  way  to  requite  the  favor 
thus  shown  by  propitiating  the  unseen  powers  of  the  other 
world.” 

“ And  now,  sir  Abbot,”  said  the  Gotairo,  as  he  handed 
him  the  order  that  he  had  just  written,  “ as  I have  dealt 
frankly  and  liberally  with  you,  I hope  that  you  will  deal 
with  me  after  a similar  fashion  in  regard  to  a few  ques- 
tions that  I desire  to  put  to  you.” 

“ Your  worthy  and  obscure  beneficiary  will  do  all  that 
may  lie  within  the  scope  of  his  limited  intelligence  to 
give  you  satisfactory  answrers,”  replied  the  priest. 

“ Generously  spoken  ! ” exclaimed  his  Lordship,  smiling 
gloomily.  “ Now,  sir  Abbot,  be  pleased  to  explain  to 
me  what  you  mean  by  that  which  you  just  now  said  about 
chanting  services  for  the  souls  of  the  dead.  If  the  spirit 
of  Gongen-sama  has  entered  upon  that  Nirvana  about 
which  Shaka,  the  founder  of  your  religion,  taught  us, 
what  need  has  he  for  your  prayers  ? ” 

“ Truly  spoken,  most  honorable  sir,”  replied  the  priest, 
“ but  he  may  now  be  struggling  through  some  lower  forms 
of  existence  trying  to  regain  his  human  form.  We  there- 
fore pray  that  his  struggles  may  be  shortened.” 

“ But  to  whom  do  you  pray  ? ” 

“ We  pray  to  Shaka.” 

“ But  Shaka,  according  to  your  teachings,  entered  Nir- 
vana over  twenty-five  centuries  ago.  You  define  Nirvana 
to  be  an  eternity  of  utter  and  absolute  unconsciousness. 
How  can  he  aid  you  in  any  way  ? Do  you  not  see  that 
your  definition  of  Nirvana  has  practically  annihilated 
him  ? ” 

“ But,  sir,  there  may  be  unseen  powers  that  require 
propitiating.” 

“ How  can  that  be,  O Monk,  when  Shaka  taught 
that  there  was  no  creator  ; that  this  universe  was  a mere 
accident  of  matter  ; and  that  the  destiny  of  the  human 
soul  was  annihilation  ? Do  you  not  see  that  such  doc- 
trines rule  unseen  powers  out  of  existence  ? Shaka  never 
taught  any  thing  about  unseen  powers.  Why  then  do 
you  teach  such  doctrines  ?” 


Hikone  Castle. 


22  1 


“ Sir,  the  founders  of  our  sect  taught  that  there  were 
unseen  powers.” 

“ But,  O learned  Monk,  they  had  no  right  to  tamper 
with  the  fundamental  principles  of  Shaka’s  religion  in 
that  manner.  The  fundamental  principles  of  any  religion 
are  those  principles  incorporated  into  it  by  the  founder 
thereof.  This  proposition  is  self-evident.  But  you  priests 
in  Thibet,  Ceylon,  China,  and  Japan  have  gone  to  work 
since  Shaka’s  death  and  have  invented  a vast  mass  of 
doctrine  that  does  not  belong  to  the  religion  of  Shaka. 
You  have  made  a hopeless  mess  of  every  thing.  As 
matters  now  stand,  a man  can  believe  any  thing  he  likes, 
and  can  prove  himself  to  be  a good  Buddhist  by  citing 
some  monastery  or  monk  as  authority.  You  must  cite 
Shaka  as  your  authority,  and  not  the  monasteries.  See 
what  you  Buddhists  did  when  you  came  to  Dai-Nippon  ! 
You  found  our  Shintoism  recognizing  the  existence  of 
some  power  behind  the  phenomena  of  nature,  and  teach- 
ing that  our  islands  were  created  by  the  gods  above,  and 
that  the  inhabitants  of  our  empire  had  descended  from 
some  god  who  had  come  down  with  his  wife  and  dwelt 
here.  You  fellows  then  went  to  work  and  coined  the 
fiction  that  Shaka  had  come  back  from  lower  animal 
forms  to  human  form  eighty  thousand  times  before  he 
finally  succeeded  in  entering  Nirvana,  and  that  on  one  of 
those  occasions  he  became  incarnated  in  the  form  of  this 
particular  god,  and  became  the  progenitor  of  our  race. 
By  this  fraud  you  captured  the  land  and  pushed  our 
native  religion  into  the  remote  valleys  and  glens,  where 
but  little  money  was  to  be  made. 

“ When  the  Kirishitans  came  here  three  hundred  years 
ago,  you  found  that  you  could  not  capture  their  god  by 
the  same  trick,  because  he  happened  to  have  been  born 
five  hundred  years  after  Shaka  had  entered  Nirvana. 
As  a person  cannot  very  well  be  annihilated  more  than 
once,  you  hadn’t  the  face  to  say  that  their  god  was  an 
incarnation  of  Shaka.  Come,  now,  tell  me  candidly 
what  you  really  do  believe.” 

“ It  is  manifest  that  your  Lordship  is  deeply  versed  in 
matters  pertaining  to  our  religion,”  replied  the  priest. 


222 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“ It  will,  therefore,  not  be  well  for  me  to  converse  as  if 
I were  talking  to  a common  person  having  but  little  in- 
telligence. I will  be  very  frank  with  you,  and  will  state 
exactly  all  of  my  views.  Of  course  we  know  almost  noth- 
ing concerning  what  Shaka  himself  taught.  His  teach- 
ings and  sayings  were  not  recorded  in  writing  until  (as 
some  writers  put  it)  two  hundred  years  after  his  death, 
or  (as  other  writers  put  it)  five  hundred  years  after  his 
death.  Under  such  conditions,  what  can  be  depended 
upon  ? But  the  fundamental  principles  that  he  incor- 
porated into  his  religion  were  treasured  up  by  his  fol- 
lowers and  became  so  welded  into  the  creed,  that  we 
may  be  reasonably  certain  that  they  were  Nirvana,  trans- 
migration, and  mercifulness  to  all  living  creatures.  Be- 
yond this,  of  course,  every  thing  is  uncertain,  and 
abundant  room  has  been  left  for  speculation  and  inven- 
tive imaginations  in  the  monasteries  everywhere.  Of 
course  he  taught  that  there  was  no  creator,  and  that 
matter  was  a mere  chance  concerning  whose  origin  he 
cared  nothing.  It  was  sufficient  to  know  that  organized 
matter  entailed  on  humanity  a most  miserable  existence, 
and  that  the  only  way  out  of  that  wretched  condition 
was  to  merge  the  soul  into  Nirvana,  and  thus  forever 
end  matters.  Of  course  there  is  no  immortality.  The 
soul  becomes  annihilated  eventually.” 

“ Then  why  do  you  bring  in  the  doctrine  of  transmi- 
gration ? ” 

“ Because  we  wish  to  terrify  humanity  into  striving  to 
attain  Nirvana.  We  teach  men  that  if  they  neglect  to 
attain  it  now  they  will  be  compelled  to  keep  coming 
back  to  human  form  after  having  lived  as  degraded  rep- 
tiles, insects,  and  animals,  until  they  finally  consent  to 
attain  Nirvana.” 

“ But  what  right,  O Monk,  have  you  to  terrify  hu- 
manity? You  have  no  proof  that  such  a thing  as  a soul 
exists  in  man.  It  is  a pure  assumption  on  your  part. 
You  can  no  more  prove  the  existence  of  a soul  than 
you  can  that  of  a creator.  There  is  no  more  evidence  in 
support  of  one  hypothesis  than  there  is  for  the  other. 


Hikone  Castle. 


223 

If  there  be  no  creator  and  no  Supreme  Being  presiding 
over  the  affairs  of  men,  then  one  man  has  no  right  to 
dictate  to  another  one  on  such  matters.  There  is  noth- 
ing to  base  your  authority  upon.  Following  your  plan, 

I could  invent  a little  scheme  of  my  own  and  force  it 
upon  humanity.” 

“Ah  ! Now  your  Lordship  has  plunged  deeper  into  the 
subject  than  I ever  knew  anybody  to  do.  You  compel 
me  to  say  that  there  is  no  authority  for  our  scheme.  But 
listen.  Know,  then,  that  all  men  crave  immortality. 
That  religion  which  promises  immortality  to  man  will 
win  the  day.  Men  shrink  from  annihilation,  although 
such  will  be  their  ultimate  destiny.  Therefore,  to  be  in 
a condition  to  meet  this  peculiarity  of  our  natures,  we 
say  that  men,  if  they  do  not  attain  Nirvana,  can  keep  on 
living  in  lower  forms  of  existence  until  they  have  be- 
come tired  of  that  sort  of  thing,  and  decide  to  attain 
thereto.  This,  you  will  perceive,  gives  them  practical 
immortality  in  this  world  should  they  chance  to  desire  that 
kind  of  immortality.” 

“ But,  sir  Abbot,  you  have  no  right  to  say  this.  You 
have  no  authority  on  which  to  base  your  action.  Your 
entire  scheme  is  a pure  fabrication.  You  have  no  right 
to  say  to  your  fellow-men  that  such  a thing  is  wrong. 
One  man  is  as  good  as  another.  Only  some  higher 
power — a creator,  for  example — can  say  to  his  created 
beings  : ‘ This  is  wrong,  that  is  right.’  By  his  mere  will 
he  may  create  the  distinction  between  right  and  wrong, 
and  may  implant  within  the  hearts  of  his  creatures  in- 
tuitive convictions  on  the  subject.  Right  and  wrong  do 
not  exist  in  the  nature  of  things,  as  some  philosophers 
dogmatically  assert.  The  idea  of  right  and  wrong  can  * 
only  spring  from  the  relations  that  some  Supreme  Being 
has  arbitrarily  caused  to  exist  between  sentient  beings 
created  by  himself, — between  man  and  man,  between 
man  and  beasts,  between  man  and  God.  If  there  be  no 
such  Supreme  Being,  then  nobody  has  authority  to  set 
himself  up  as  an  arbiter  in  such  matters, — to  dictate  to 
his  fellow-men  what  they  shall  or  shall  not  do. 


224 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“ A fine  time  we  would  have  in  this  world  if  everybody 
were  to  set  up  his  own  standard  of  right  and  wrong  and 
force  it  upon  humanity  ! Who  shall  dare  to  step  between 
me  and  the  gratification  of  every  desire  ? Did  not  the 
Kirishitan  priests  rebuke  the  great  Hideyoshi  and  the 
Daimios  for  their  lustful  indulgences,  alleging  that  such 
practices  were  against  the  laws  of  God  ? Were  they  not 
eventually  swept  out  of  the  country  for  such  insolent 
presumption  ? Who  will  now  venture  to  dictate  in  such 
matters  ? 

“ It  is  all  very  well,  O Priest,  for  a father  with  a fam- 
ily of  beautiful  daughters  to  lift  up  his  hands  in  holy 
horror  and  pronounce  debauchery  to  be  a crime,  and  to 
assert  that  whoever  commits  such  an  offense  must  do 
his  utmost  to  make  full  and  ample  restitution  both  in 
this  world  and  in  the  world  to  come, — nay,  more,  he 
may  even  go  so  far  as  to  grandiloquently  and  pompously 
assert  that  ‘ no  man  can  be  perfectly  happy,  either  in 
this  world  or  the  other,  who  has  by  his  perfidy  broken  a 
loving  and  confiding  heart,’ — but  all  such  talk  is  merely 
the  individual  opinion  of  an  interested  party  trying  to 
terrify  humanity  into  his  own  notions  of  morality,  and 
it  goes  in  at  one  ear  of  the  libertine  and  out  at  the  other, 
for  the  simple  reason  that  none  but  a creator  has  a right 
to  dictate  in  such  matters.  If  men  be  merely  creatures 
of  chance,  then  each  one  becomes  a law  unto  himself, 
and  is  at  liberty  to  do  whatsoever  seemeth  desirable  and 
expedient  in  his  own  eyes,  just  like  the  beasts  of  the 
fields.  What  have  you  to  say  to  this,  O Monk?” 

“ Ah  ! you  plunge  yet  deeper  into  the  subject,  O 
Lord  of  Hikone.  Know,  then,  that  religion  is  necessary 
• to  control  men.  Mankind  will  not  be  submissive  unless 
you  hold  out  either  the  hope  of  reward  or  the  fear  of 
punishment.  Therefore,  when  governments  first  began 
to  rule  over  society,  it  became  speedily  apparent  that 
anarchy  would  ensue  unless  these  two  motives  were  ap- 
pealed to.  Therefore,  the  rulers  of  the  nation  early  saw 
the  policy  of  calling  to  its  assistance  the  aid  of  religion. 
The  history  of  our  government  has,  from  the  remotest 


Hikone  Castle. 


225 


times,  been  interwoven  with  religion  of  some  kind. 
And  if  I am  not  greatly  mistaken,  you  will  find  that  in 
all  countries  the  various  governments  have  been  wedded 
to  some  kind  of  religion.  Those  religions  that  best  con- 
trol men  are  generally  the  most  popular  with  govern- 
ments ; while  those  religons  that  promote  seditions  and 
disturbances  are  quickly  rooted  out  as  pestiferous.  By 
nature  all  men  are  more  or  less  religious  in  their  inclina- 
tions. When  these  religious  impulses  are  degraded  by 
profound  ignorance,  they  become  unreasoning  and  fanat- 
ical, and  become  known  as  superstitions.  And  these 
superstitions  can  best  be  controlled  by  terror  of  future 
punishments.  I presume  that  this  is  why  the  various 
sects  of  our  religion,  since  Shaka’s  time,  have  invented 
hells  of  torment.  Very  naturally,  superstitious  people 
soon  become  imbued  with  the  idea  that  souls  of  friends 
could  be  bought  out  of  these  places, — or  their  sufferings 
therein  greatly  reduced, — if  the  priests  would  exert  their 
mystic  influence  in  propitiating  the  unseen  powers  of  the 
other  world  (whoever  or  whatever  they  may  be).  So 
long  as  the  pandering  to  these  superstitious  ideas  tended 
to  soothe  the  disquieted  minds  of  ignorant  people,  and 
to  fill  the  coffers  of  the  monasteries,  there  seemed  to  be 
no  harm  in  keeping  up  the  delusions, — especially  as  the 
government  was  vastly  benefited  by  having  the  people 
kept  in  a tractable  state  of  mind.” 

“ That  which  you  have  just  spoken,  O learned  Monk, 
savors  largely  of  political  wisdom.  I presume  that  you 
have  really  given  the  true  reason  why  Tokugawa  took 
your  religion  under  the  patronage  of  the  state.  It  is  for 
this  reason  that  I do  not  grudge  the  contributions  that 
we  have  poured  forth  upon  the  various  monasteries 
throughout  the  empire.  But  there  are  other  matters 
concerning  which  I wish  to  interrogate  you  in  a frank 
spirit.  Our  minds  have  become  bared  to  each  other’s 
inspection,  and  you  need  not  hesitate  to  speak  freely 
and  fearlessly.  But  at  present  we  cannot  continue  the 
discussion.  It  is  the  hour  for  the  midday  meal.  Be  so 
kind  as  to  dine  with  me,  and  to  spend  the  balance  of  the 


226 


Mito  Yashiki. 


day  with  me,  as  I am  desirous  of  continuing  the  discus- 
sion. It  is  very  rarely  that  I feel  disposed  to  talk  on 
such  subjects. 

“ But  to-day  I have  received  the  news  of  the  sudden 
death  of  a faithful  vassal,  and  this  fact  has  opened  up  a 
vista  of  queries  that  reach  out  into  unknown  regions  of 
thought  and  speculation.  I am  very  much  like  Shaka, 
in  that  I do  not  believe  in  any  creator,  and  do  not  be- 
lieve in  any  future  world.  I have  lived  this  life  for  all 
that  it  is  worth,  and  I shall  continue  to  do  so.  But  occa- 
sionally the  inquiry  comes  unsought, — Am  I right  in  my 
belief  ? Is  there  positively  no  hereafter  ? If  there  be 
no  creator  and  no  future  spirit-world,  is  there  any  spirit 
at  all  ? On  such  occasions  I desire  to  converse  with 
learned  and  candid  minds  like  yours.” 

“ The  honor  that  you  confer  on  me,”  responded  the 
Abbot,  “ is  indeed  great.  I will  endeavor  to  give  you 
£he  benefit  of  such  meagre  information  as  I may  possess. 
Although  believing  substantially  as  you  believe,  yet 
there  has  arisen  in  my  mind,  on  those  evenings  among 
the  moon-lit  pines  when  we,  in  accordance  with  our  an- 
cient usages,  reduce  to  ashes  the  body  of  some  deceased 
member  of  our  brotherhood,  the  same  questionings  that 
agitate  you.  As  the  flames  leap  up  against  the  pallid 
features  and  dissolve  them  into  dust,  I would  feign  ask  : 
Where  is  the  spirit  that  animated  those  features  ? If 
there  be  no  spirit  at  all,  what  was  it  then  that  formerly 
shone  forth  from  those  eyes  and  communicated  intelli- 
gible ideas  to  my  mind  ? What  has  become  of  that  subtle 
yet  real  influence  ?” 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


A METAPHYSICAL  SIESTA. 

“ O Learned  Monk,”  said  the  Gotairo  when  he  re- 
sumed his  tcte-h-tete  with  the  Abbot  at  the  pavilion  after 
dinner,  “ reveal  unto  me  the  mystery  that  I am  about  to 
propound  unto  thee.  Behold  ! last  night  a subtle  in- 
fluence crept  over  my  body,  my  eyelids  drooped,  my  limbs 
were  relaxed,  and  I merged  into  a condition  of  pro- 
found unconsciousness  until  the  morning  light  dissolved 
the  charming  spell, — and  I awoke  to  find  that  seven 
hours  of  time  had  been  forever  blotted  out  of  my  exist- 
ence while  I slumbered.  No  dream,  no  smothered 
thought  had  crept  in  upon  my  brain  ; and  I started  up 
to  grasp  the  volume  that  I had  been  reading  when  I sur- 
rendered myself  to  the  sweet  influence.  O Monk,  tell 
me  what  was  that  subtle  influence  ? ” 

“ O awesome  Lord  of  Hikone,”  replied  the  Abbot, 
‘it  was  merely  the  lapsing  of  your  system  into  a period 
of  sweet  sleep.  Your  brain  had  become  tired  with  stu- 
dious application,  your  nerves  and  muscles  had  become 
wearied  with  many  hours  of  unremitting  toil,  and  your 
body — unable  any  longer  to  bear  the  strain — clamored 
for  repose  and  sank  into  the  comatose  condition  that 
you  have  so  well  described.  In  short,  your  mighty 
Lordship  went  to  sleep  like  all  mortals  are  wont  to  do.” 
“O  Monk,  as  you  have  well  said,  my  body  was  indis- 
posed any  longer  to  perform  its  functions  and  drifted 
into  unconsciousness.  But  where  was  my  soul  during 
that  period  ? Did  that  also  sleep  ? Behold  ! this  is  the 
mystery  that  I would  have  you  reveal  unto  me.  If  it 
sleep  not,  then  where  abideth  it  while  the  body  enters 
upon  its  temporary  Nirvana?” 


227 


228 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“ O philosophic  Lord,  your  question  is  indeed  hard 
to  answer.  I presume  the  soul  lapses  into  its  natural 
condition, — utter  and  absolute  unconsciousness  ; but  it 
is  roused  into  conscious  existence  just  as  soon  as  the 
body  awakes  from  its  period  of  repose.  So  long  as  it 
is  linked  to  a mortal  body,  just  so  long  must  it  be  sub- 
jected to  the  horrors  of  being  perpetually  dragged 
back  into  conscious  existence.  Behold  ! how  desirable 
a thing  it  is  to  enter  upon  that  eternal  repose — that 
Nirvana — wherein  no  shadowy  dreams,  no  smothered 
thoughts  ever  flit  across  the  midnight  of  the  soul  to  vex 
it  with  the  miserable  consciousness  of  its  own  existence.” 
“ But  wherein  does  this  partial  and  periodical  annihila- 
tion differ  from  eternal  anihilation,  O Priest  ? ” 

“ In  the  same  way  that  this  drop  of  water  that  I hold 
in  the  palm  of  my  hand  differs  from  the  vast  body  of 
water  in  the  lake.  I now  cast  it  over  the  balcony  railing, 
and  it  becomes  merged  into  that  glorious  sheet.” 

“But,  O Priest,  suppose  an  enemy  had  crept  upon 
me  unawares,  and  had  smitten  off  my  head  with  one 
dread  stroke  before  consciousness  could  have  been 
regained,  would  then  the  unconscious  condition  of  my 
soul  have  been  prolonged  forever?  Would  it  have  en- 
tered Nirvana  even  though  I had  not  desired  nor  had 
ever  endeavored  to  enter  therein  ?” 

“ Our  religion,  sir,  teaches  that  nobody  can  enter 
Nirvana  unless  he  desire  to  enter  therein  and  has  labori- 
ously striven  to  enter  therein.” 

“ But,  O Priest,  if  the  soul  sleep  not,  but,  as  you 
say,  merely  lapses  into  its  natural  condition  of  uncon- 
sciousness until  such  time  as  the  body  to  which  it  is 
linked  may  be  good  enough  to  rouse  it  therefrom,  what 
shall  rouse  it  when  that  body  is  instantly  dashed  out  of 
existence  with  one  mighty  blow?  Under  such  condi- 
tions, what  shall  prevent  the  soul’s  temporary  Nirvana 
becoming  eternal — just  as  you  forced  the  drop  of  water 
to  merge  into  the  body  of  the  lake  ? ” 

“ Such  a doctrine,  sir,  would  be  opposed  to  our 
theories.” 


A Metaphysical  Siesta.  229 

“ O most  sagacious  Monk,  have  you  ever  seen  the 
soul ? ” 

“ O penetrating  mind,  I never  have.” 

“ Have  any  of  your  friends  ever  seen  it  ?” 

“ They  never  have.” 

“ Has  anybody,  to  your  knowledge,  ever  seen  it  ?” 

“ No  one  ever  has.” 

*'  Then  what  evidence  have  you  that  there  is  any  soul 
at  all?  You  say  that  there  is  no  creator,  or  Supreme 
Being,  no  immortality  for  the  soul,  why  not  finish  up 
matters  by  saying  that  there  is  no  soul  ? What  is  the 
use  of  a soul  anyway  ? Why  do  you  halt  on  the  thresh- 
cold  of  your  own  existence  after  having  wiped  out  the 
universe  ? Why  are  not  you  consistent  ? Why  not  come 
forth  candidly  and  say  that  there  is  no  soul  ?” 

“ Because,  sir,  there  is  overwhelming  evidence  of 
some  personal  intelligence  in  the  human  body.  Surely 
at  the  present  moment  there  is  something  in  my  body  ex- 
changing intelligible  ideas  with  something  in  your  body  ! ” 

“ But  that  evidence  is  no  stronger  than  is  the  evidence 
of  some  personal  intelligence  behind  the  phenomena 
of  nature.  Yet,  in  one  case,  you  deny  a personal  intel- 
ligence, and,  in  the  other  case,  you  admit  the  personal 
intelligence.  And  in  each  case  the  evidence  is  precisely 
the  same  ! Then,  again,  how  do  you  know  that  there  is 
but  a single  soul  in  a body  ? Each  varied  thought,  each 
sentiment,  each  emotion,  may  emanate  from  a distinct 
soul  lurking  within  our  mysterious  mechanisms.  For  all 
you  can  show  to  the  contrary,  each  person  may  have  a 
hundred — yea,  a million — souls  instead  of  one,  as  you 
assume.” 

“ Sir,  the  unity  of  sentiment  and  of  action  that  char- 
acterizes each  individual,  argues  the  existence  of  a sin- 
gle soul.” 

“ No  more,  O Priest,  than  does  the  unity  of  design 
and  of  plan  in  the  universe  argue  the  existence  of 
a Supreme  Being.” 

“ Sir,  I cannot  answer  you  otherwise  than  I have 
done.” 


230 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“0  Monk,  be  candid.  You  have  merely  assumed  the 
existence  of  a soul  in  order  to  account  for  the  phe- 
nomena of  this  life.  In  other  words,  know  that  the  fun- 
damental principle,  or  principles,  of  every  theory  must 
be  taken  on  faith, — they  can  never  be  demonstrated.” 

“ I do  not  think  that  you  are  right,  sir.  What  room 
for  faith  is  there  in  the  science  of  mathematics  as  taught 
in  those  wonderful  books  imported  by  the  Hollanders  ? 
The  laws  of  lines,  angles,  and  triangles  are  so  immutable 
that  they  can  measure  distances  in  space  far  beyond  our 
earth,  and  can  calculate  eclipses  with  the  utmost  preci- 
sion. Pray,  what  fundamental  principle  do  you  accept 
on  faith  in  mathematics  as  developed  in  geometry, 
trigonometry,  and  astronomy  ?” 

“ O Priest,  the  entire  science  of  mathematics  is  based 
upon  the  single  fundamental  principle  that  there  are 
such  things  as  straight  lines.  You  must  accept  on  faith 
this  underlying  fact.  You  can  never  demonstrate  that 
any  given  line  is  straight.  But,  believing  in  the  exist- 
ence of  such  a thing  as  an  absolutely  straight  line,  then 
you  can  build  thereon  your  wonderful  science  that 
measures  so  many  millions  of  leagues  into  space.  No 
progress  can  be  made  unless  you  assume  that  your  lines 
are  straight.” 

“ But,  sir,  observe  me  draw  this  line  with  this  pen  and 
ruler.  Can  you  prove  that  this  line  is  not  straight  ? ” 

“ I can,  O Priest. 

“ How,  sir  ? ” 

“ With  this  lens  imported  from  Holland.  It  magni- 
fies an  object  many  thousand  times.  Now  look  at  the 
side  of  your  ruler  with  it.  See  how  rugged  it  is, — just 
like  the  teeth  of  a saw  ! How  could  you  draw  a 
straight  line  with  such  a thing  as  that  ? Now  look  at 
your  alleged  straight  line  with  it.  See  how  jagged  and 
wavering  it  is  ! Do  you  call  that  a straight  line  ? ” 

“ I see,  sir,  where  you  are  crowding  me.  If  I accept 
the  fundamental  principles  of  mathematics,  then  must  I 
accept  the  fundamental  principles  of  the  universe  on 
faith  and  accept  the  fact  that  there  is  a Supreme  Being. 


A Metaphysical  Siesta. 


231 


Therefore,  I deny  that  there  are  such  things  as  straight 
lines  ! I demolish  the  entire  science  of  mathematics.  I 
can  be  just  as  happy  without  knowing  any  thing  about 
the  subject.” 

“But  what  progress  will  humanity  make,  O Priest  ? ” 

“ Let  humanity  stagnate  if  it  so  desire.  I do  not  care 
for  humanity.  There  is  no  Supreme  Being,  I insist ! 
There  are  no  such  things  as  straight  lines  even  in  theory  ! ” 
“ But,  O Priest,  the  books  of  the  foreigners  describe 
parallel  lines  as  being  straight  lines  in  the  same  plane 
which  never  intersect  even  if  produced  to  infinite  dis- 
tances from  either  end.  Surely  such  lines  must  be 
straight  in  theory  or  in  the  abstract ! ” 

“ I deny  the  fact  that  there  are  such  things  as  parallel 
lines.  I can  be  just  as  happy  without  believing  that.” 

“ In  order  to  be  consistent  you  must  also  deny  that 
hvo  and  two  make  four,  because  there  may  be  a class  of 
beings  in  this  world,  or  somewhere  in  the  universe,  who 
consider  that  two  and  two  make  forty,  or  four  hundred,  or 
four  thousand.  You  must  start  by  assuming  that  all 
minds  are  alike,  and  that  to  all  of  them  two  and  two 
appear  to  make  four.” 

“ But,  sir,  I can  prove  that  two  and  two  make  four.” 

“ How  will  you  do  it  ? ” 

“ I take  these  two  oranges  and  add  them  to  these  other 
two  oranges.  I now  have  four  oranges.  What  better 
proof  can  there  be  than  that?” 

“ O Priest,  you  have  utterly  failed  to  make  out  your 
case.  These  oranges  are  all  of  different  sizes.  Now  if 
this  smallest  one  be  your  unit  of  measure,  it  follows  that 
this  next  larger  one  must  be  more  than  one  orange.  You 
should  trim  it  down  to  exactly  the  size  of  your  unit  of 
measure  before  adding.  When  you  took  these  two  small 
oranges  and  added  them  to  these  two  large  oranges,  you 
must  have  had  more  than  four  oranges,  because  your 
units  of  measure  were  all  unequal.  What  you  mean  to 
say  is  that  if  two  equal  units  be  added  to  two  other  equal 
units,  the  result  will  be  four  units.  But  you  must 
assume  at  the  start  that  there  are  such  things  in  the 


232 


Mito  Yashiki. 


abstract  as  equal  units,  because  you  can  never  demon- 
strate any  given  set  of  units  to  be  equal.  Your  proof,  sir, 
has  vanished  into  air.” 

“ I see  your  point,  sir.  Therefore  I deny  that  two  and 
two  make  four  invariably,  inexorably,  and  under  every 
conceivable  form  of  existence.” 

“Yet  you  believe  in  the  existence  of  a soul  without 
proof  ! ” 

“ Sir,  for  social  and  political  reasons  it  is  best  to  teach 
the  existence  of  a single  responsible  soul.  As  a matter 
of  fact,  I am  quite  willing  to  confidentially  intimate  to 
you  that  I deny  the  existence  of  any  such  thing.” 

“O  Priest,  why  did  you  just  now  withdraw  your  hand 
from  the  sunlight  ? ” 

“ Because,  sir,  the  heat  was  so  intense  that  it  was  blis- 
tering my  tender  skin.” 

“If  I were  to  tell  you  that  the  sun  had  stretched  forth 
his  finger  across  an  abyss  over  ninety  millions  of  miles 
wide  and  had  touched  your  hand,  I fear  you  would  not 
believe  me.” 

“ Most  assuredly  I could  not.” 

“Yet  as  a matter  of  science  explained  in  the  mysteri- 
ous books  of  the  Hollanders,  the  sun  sends  forth  subtle 
vibrations  of  heat  and  of  light  that  travel  across  an  abyss 
of  ether  and  reach  the  earth,  producing  light  and  heat. 
That  warm  finger  touched  your  hand  and  you  shrank 
from  it.  In  this  science  the  theory  of  light  and  heat  has 
reached  its  wonderful  development  by  its  discoverers 
accepting  the  fundamental  principle  that  such  a sub- 
stance as  ether  intervenes  between  the  sun  and  our  earth. 
In  order  for  you  to  be  consistent  it  will  be  necessary  for 
you  to  demolish  all  such  theories.  But,  tell  me,  did  you 
believe  that  you  felt  the  heat  of  the  sun  a few  moments 
ago?” 

“ Certainly  I did.” 

“ Why  ? " 

“ Because  such  matters  fall  within  the  cognizance  of 
my  senses.” 

“ Are  your  senses  infallible  ? ” 


A Metaphysical  Siesta.  233 

“ I have  never  known  them  to  deceive  me  in  such 
matters.” 

“ But  do  you  think  that  they  never  can  deceive  you  ? ” 
“ I presume  that  they  may  at  some  time  deceive  me.” 

“ Then,  O Priest,  the  basis  of  your  belief  after  all  is 
faith  in  the  correctness  of  your  impressions.  You  begin 
by  assuming  that  your  nerves  are  in  sound  condition  and 
are  capable  of  transmitting  correct  impressions.  You  can- 
not prove  that  your  nerves  are  in  sound  condition,  nor 
are  you  in  a position  to  prove  that  you  have  any  nerves 
at  all,  because  neither  you  nor  anybody  else  has  ever 
seen  them.  You  assume  that  you  have  a nervous  system 
like  that  of  mankind  at  large  ; then,  having  faith  in  the 
correctness  of  your  assumption,  you  proceed  to  act 
thereon.  According  to  the  wonderful  books  of  the 
Hollanders  treating  about  the  science  of  astronomy, 
there  are  stars  which  we  mortals  can  see,  which  have 
ceased  to  exist  for  many  thousands  of  years  ; but  so 
immense  is  the  distance  intervening  between  those  stars 
and  this  earth,  that  their  radiance  does  not  reach  us  for 
thousands  of  years, — long  after  the  fiery  worlds  have 
ceased  to  exist.  If  I were  to  point  out  to  you  one  of 
those  points  of  light  in  the  heavens,  you  would  at  once 
say  that  it  was  a star.  Yet  no  star  exists  there  ! How 
then  can  you  trust  the  correctness  of  your  senses  ? It  is 
absurd  to  assert  that  they  can  be  always  trusted.  The 
eyes  of  men  very  frequently  deceive  them.  All  that  you 
can  allege  is  that  because  the  general  results  of  the 
various  impressions  upon  our  senses  have  been  found 
to  agree  in  the  majority  of  instances,  therefore  we 
assume  that  our  nervous  organizations  are  similar,  and 
that  they  are  in  sound  condition  and  transmit  impres- 
sions correctly  from  the  outward  world  to  our  brains.” 

“ Sir,  that  which  you  say  sounds  very  extraordinary 
indeed,  and  I am  not  prepared  to  contradict  what  has 
been  stated.  Nevertheless  I assert  that  reason  must 
always  remain  the  supreme  and  final  test  in  all  matters 
pertaining  to  this  life.  Whatever  conflicts  with  our 
reason  must  be  rejected  as  false.” 


234 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


“ But  whose  reason  shall  be  accepted  as  the  supreme 
and  final  test  ? Surely  not  your  reason,  nor  mine,  nor 
that  of  any  single  individual.  Is  the  reason  of  each  man 
to  be  presumed  to  be  absolutely  correct  ? Are  not  you, 
O Priest,  rendering  human  reason  infallible  ? Surely  you 
cannot  believe  that  it  is  not  liable  to  error.  How  often 
have  conclusions  that  have  appeared  to  be  entirely  con- 
sonant with  our  reason  been  shown  to  be  entirely  wrong  ! 
Then  if  it  cannot  be  each  man’s  reason  that  is  to  be  the 
supreme  and  final  test,  whose  or  what  reason  shall  it  be  ? 
Shall  it  be  the  reason  of  this  race  of  men  or  of  that  race 
of  men  ? Shall  it  be  the  reason  of  this  age  or  that  of 
some  previous  age  ? Shall  it  be  the  reason  of  to-day  or 
that  of  to-morrow?  You  must  bear  in  mind  that  the 
human  reason  fluctuates  like  the  tides  of  the  ocean  ; it  is 
as  evanescent  as  the  dews  upon  the  lilies  ; it  is  as 
changeable  as  the  clouds  of  heaven.” 

“Yet,  sir,  human  reason  is  the  only  test.  It  is  our 
only  light.  If  you  extinguish  that,  nothing  but  darkness 
remains.  To  be  consistent,  I presume  that  I must  be 
prepared  to  admit  that  there  is  no  such  thing  as  human 
reason  anyhow.” 

“ But  how  do  you  know  that  no  other  light  remains  ? 
How  do  you  know  that  no  other  faculty  may  lie  dormant 
within  us  ? Perhaps  some  minds  may  possess  peculiar 
faculties  of  comprehension  quite  independent  of  reason, 
— some  faculty  not  possessed  by  the  average  man. 
Surely  you  cannot  say  that  such  may  not  be  the  case. 
No,  sir  Abbot,  you  must  allow  me  to  score  another 
point ; you  are  at  your  old  subterfuges  again.  You 
assume,  first,  that  your  reason  is  generally  correct,  and 
then  you  assume  that  all  men’s  reasons  resemble  your 
own.  Then,  having  faith  in  these  fundamental  principles, 
you  start  out  and  say  that  whatever  meets  the  general 
approval  of  the  average  intellect  of  intelligent  humanity 
must  be  correct  or  nearly  so.  That  is  all  that  you  can  do 
or  say  on  that  point.  But  certain  great  truths  that  are 
essential  to  our  welfare  and  to  our  happiness,  we  take 
cognizance  of  quite  independent  of  reason.  When  you 


A Metaphysical  Siesta. 


235 


suddenly  withdrew  your  hand  from  the  scorching  heat 
just  now,  you  took  cognizance  of  the  fact  without  stop- 
ping to  reason  about  it.  We  know  positively  when  we 
are  hungry,  or  thirsty,  or  sleepy,  without  reasoning  to  a 
definite  conclusion  about  it.  Therefore,  O Priest,  I say 
that  although  I individually  do  not  believe  in  any 
Supreme  Being,  or  in  immortality,  or  in  any  soul  at  all, 
yet  I am  not  prepared  to  say  that  other  races  of  men  may 
not  possess  subtle  faculties  of  perception  whereby  to  take 
cognizance  of  such  tremendous  mysteries.  Nor  am  I 
prepared  to  say  that  minds  of  my  own  countrymen  may 
be  so  peculiarly  constituted  that  the  existence  of  such 
mysteries  may  be  certainties  quite  above  their  reasoning 
faculties, — invisible  yet  real  facts  of  the  universe.” 

“ Then,  sir,  what  solace  is  there  for  that  large  portion 
of  humanity  born  under  hard  conditions  of  life  ? Multi- 
tudes are  born  poor,  remain  poor  during  life,  and  die 
poor.  The  few  have  always  held  the  wealth  in  this 
country,  while  the  majority  have  always  struggled  for  a 
bare  existence.  Nay,  more,  the  greater  portion  of 
humanity  are  born  with  the  certainty  of  remaining  poor 
during  their  whole  lives.  What  possible  inducement  do 
you  offer  to  such  unfortunate  ones  to  continue  the  hard 
and  thankless  struggle  for  existence  ? Upon  your  theory 
life  is  merely  a struggle  to  keep  forty  or  fifty  feet  of 
alimentary  canal  flush  with  nutritive  fluids.  Eat  ! eat  ! 
eat ! What  for  ? Oh,  just  for  the  sake  of  keeping  up  the 
hopeless  struggle.  If  every  thing  be  mere  chance,  and 
we  be  merely  freaks  of  chance,  then  the  most  philosophic 
course  for  a poor  man  to  pursue  would  be  to  take  things 
into  his  own  hands  at  once  and  end  his  ill-starred  ex- 
istence. In  common  parlance,  he  should  call  for  a fresh 
shuffle  of  the  cards,  and  see  if  the  next  deal  will  not  pro- 
duce better  luck.  Pray,  sir  what  is  human  life  worth 
under  your  theory  ? ” 

“ Pray,  what  is  it  worth  under  yours,  sir  Abbot  ? ” 

“ It  certainly  is  worth  more  than  it  is  under  yours.” 

“Well,  perhaps  it  may  be  so.  Of  course  it  is  just  as 
well  that  the  people  do  not  venture  into  such  subjects  as 


236 


Mito  Yashiki. 


deeply  as  we  do.  I will  admit  that  your  theory  is  better 
for  the  common  people.  Nevertheless,  when  men  become 
more  cultivated  in  their  intellects,  like  the  samurai , then 
they  adopt  my  theory,  which,  after  all,  seems  to  be  the 
most  philosophic  one.  As  you  already  well  know,- we  do 
take  matters  into  our  own  hands  when  hard  times  come 
upon  us.  Multitudes  have  shortened  their  unhappy  lives 
with  the  knightly  hara-kiri.  Multitudes  of  the  common 
people  have  drowned  themselves.  What  course  can  be 
more  philosophic?  Yes,  take  matters  into  your  own 
hand  ; that ’s  our  doctrine  precisely.  Get  all  the  pleasure 
out  of  life  that  you  can  while  it  lasts.  Then  call  for  a 
fresh  deal  of  the  cards,  a new  throw  of  the  dice.  Here- 
tofore I have  been  studious  and  diligent  in  my  habits. 
Henceforth  I shall  make  the  funds  at  my  command  pro- 
duce the  utmost  pleasure.  What  course  can  be  more 
philosophic  ? I now  hold  the  reins  of  power,  and  grasp 
the  revenues  of  the  realm.  I shall  never  surrender  either. 
Having  once  tasted  of  supreme  authority  I become  as  in- 
satiable as  the  tiger  that  has  once  tasted  human  blood. 
When  my  power  shall  end,  then  shall  end  my  life  ! ” 

“ It  is  well,  sir,  that  such  teachings  are  not  communi- 
cated to  the  people  of  Dai-Nippon.  Pray,  what  would 
be  the  end  of  the  horrors  that  would  ensue?” 

“Oh,  it  of  course  would  not  be  well  to  instruct  the 
vulgar  crowd  in  matters  beyond  their  comprehension. 
But  when  that  time  does  come,  sir  Abbot, — mark  my 
words, — when  the  masses  shall  think  as  I think,  then 
matters  must  adjust  themselves  as  best  they  can.  By 
that  time  I expect  to  be  safely  out  of  the  way.  And  then 
what  shall  I care  about  matters  pertaining  to  humanity  ? ” 
“Your  doctrine,  sir,  is  terribly — nay,  inhumanly — 
selfish.  What  progress  would  humanity  ever  make  under 
such  teachings?  The  results  following  their  application 
to  practice  would  be  too  horrible  to  contemplate.” 

“What  care  1 for  that?  Your  religion  teaches  self- 
extinction ; why  then  do  you  complain  at  the  logical  ap- 
plication of  your  creed  ? Every  man  has  the  right  to 
destroy  himself  whenever  he  ceases  to  crave  any  further 


A Metaphysical  Siesta. 


237 


existence  under  hardships.  Who  shall  dare  step  in  and 
dictate  to  me  as  to  what  constitutes  right  and  what  con- 
stitutes wrong  ? There  being  no  Supreme  Being,  then 
who  shall  decide  such  matters,  since  one  man’s  opinion  is 
as  correct  as  another  one’s, — so  far  as  we  can  tell  ? 
Don’t  you  perceive,  O Priest,  that  to  be  consistent  with 
your  alleged  beliefs  and  public  teachings,  you  must  ad- 
mit that  there  is  no  right,  no  wrong,  in  this  universe  ; 
that  every  thing  is  reduced  to  a mere  question  of  ex- 
pediency and  policy  for  those  who  chance  to  hold  the 
power  ? That  is  right  which  agrees  with  the  will  of  the 
prince,  and  that  is  wrong  which  conflicts  with  the  will 
of  the  prince.  That  is  all  there  is  about  it.  I hold 
the  supreme  power  in  Dai-Nippon — ” 

“Yea!  O mighty  Prince,”  solemnly  intoned  the  Ab- 
bot, bowing  low. 

“ And  whoever  displeases  me  I catch  and  slay,  pro- 
vided I can  lay  my  hands  on  him.” 

“Verily!  verily!”  came  the  response  in  mournful 
cadences. 

“ In  other  words,”  continued  the  Gotairo,  “ the  will  of 
him  who  holds  the  reins  of  power  is  the  only  arbiter  of 
expediency  and  policy  in  Dai-Nippon.  As  regards  me, 
right  and  wrong  have  no  existence.  It  is  merely  a ques- 
tion of  whether  I have  the  power  to  back  up  my  wishes. 
When  some  mightier  power  overshadows  mine,  it  then 
becomes  expedient  and  politic  for  me  to  back  down.” 

“ Well  and  truly  spoken  ! ” chimed  in  the  Abbot. 

“ Yet,  O Priest,  on  days  like  this  I am  not  satisfied 
with  my  own  theories  and  beliefs.  Restless  queryings 
disturb  the  repose  of  my  being.  Deeply  have  I meditated 
on  this  subject,  and  my  mind  is  ill  at  ease.  I am  wearied 
with  doubt  and  speculation.  Recently  a superior  power 
has  menaced  the  supreme  will  that  rules  Dai-Nippon,  and 
that  will  now  bends  before  a mightier  influence.  It  was 
compelled  to  surrender  the  policy  of  two  centuries,  and 
to  submit  to  the  arrogant  dictation  of  a superior  power 
that  hovered  on  our  shores.  A race  of  beings  fashioned 
after  our  own  similitude  is  to-day  mightier  than  we. 


238 


Mito  Yashiki. 


Our  strength  is  but  as  an  egg-shell  compared  with  the 
power  of  that  dread  nation.  Long  and  wearily  has  my 
heart  vexed  itself  with  speculation  as  to  the  cause  of 
such  pronounced  superiority. 

“ In  the  books  furnished  by  the  Hollanders  I read 
strange  things.  The  history,  the  religion,  the  customs  of 
this  western  nation  are  indeed  wonderful.  Through  my 
spies  I have  studied  their  personal  characteristics.  Nay, 
more,  I myself  in  person  have  studied  them  nebon  on 
various  occasions.  With  but  trifling  variations  these  for- 
eigners are  in  all  particulars  the  same  as  we  are.  They 
eat,  drink,  sleep,  laugh,  see,  hear,  smell,  taste,  and  touch, 
just  as  we  do.  On  the  day  when  the  great  feast  was 
given  on  board  of  their  flagship  in  Yedo  bay,  to  celebrate 
the  ratification  of  the  treaty,  I went  ndbon  unknown  to 
anybody  present  except  my  two  Commissioners.  What 
a scene  it  was  ! Awnings  were  stretched  overhead,  and 
tables  were  spread  in  the  shade  beneath.  Flags,  flowers, 
and  bunting,  in  most  gorgeous  profusion,  decorated 
every  thing.  And  a band  of  musicians  performed  on 
mighty  brazen  and  silver  instruments  with  such  power 
that  the  massive  timbers  of  the  ship  quaked  beneath  my 
feet.  Multitudes  of  officers,  gorgeously  dressed  in  gold 
and  silver  trappings,  moved  about  the  decks.  Multitudes 
of  stately  soldiers,  with  gleaming  muskets,  marched  and 
countermarched  with  majestic  tread  to  the  sounds  of 
sonorous  drums  and  throbbing  music.  And  immense 
black  cannon  vomited  forth  at  intervals  clouds  of  flame 
and  smoke  with  concussions  that  shook  the  heavens  and 
smote  the  very  hills  with  terror.  Truly  the  grandest  of 
our  state  dinners  would  be  tame  in  comparison  with  such 
stupendous  pageantry  ! 

“ And  then  everybody  sat  down  like  brothers  to  the 
magnificent  collation.  The  very  gods  might  well  have 
hungered  after  the  boiled  ham  and  wondrous  wine  called 
champagne  ! My  Commissioners  carried  away  from  the 
feast  abundant  samples  of  every  article,  and  I examined 
them  at  leisure  on  shore,  and  they  were  indeed  wonder- 
ful concoctions  of  skilful  cuisine,  for  the  ingredient  sub- 


A Metaphysical  Siesta. 


239 


stances  were  familiar  to  me  in  many  cases.  The  feast 
flowed  on  like  a mountain  stream  let  loose  from  the  up- 
lands,— rapidly  becoming  noisier  and  more  tumultuous 
as  it  gathered  volume  and  headway.  Ye  gods  ! At  the 
close  of  the  convivialities  I could  not  distinguish,  so  far 
as  actions  went,  my  own  countrymen  from  the  strangers. 
They  might  all  have  been  members  of  the  same  family 
descended  from  centuries  of  common  ancestors,  so  far  as 
methods  of  expressing  joviality  and  good-fellowship 
went.  About  the  only  persons  not  hilariously  inclined 
were  my  Commissioners  and  a few  of  the  ship’s  officers. 
Such  shouting,  such  laughter,  such  affectionate  em- 
bracings between  foreigners  and  sons  of  Dai-Nippon,  I 
never  could  have  dreamed  possible  ! Dignity  and 
decorous  propriety  were  slid  under  the  table  to  keep 
company  with  the  susceptible  fellows  already  there. 

“ Of  course  in  our  own  feasts  we  have  abundance  of 
hilarity,  but  we  confine  our  potations  entirely  to  sake,  so 
that  drinks  do  not  get  mixed.  But  these  foreigners  mix 
up  fully  a dozen  kinds  of  wonderfully  stimulating  bever- 
ages, so  that  our  systems,  unaccustomed  to  such  doses, 
become  unduly  exhilarated.  Then  we  drink  from  small 
cups,  while  they  drain  large  goblets.  And  the  foreign 
officers,  apparently  possessed  with  a droll  combination  of 
humor  and  hospitality,  persisted  in  pouring  the  wine 
called  champagne  down  the  willing  throats  of  my  country- 
men, just  as  soon  as  it  became  manifest  that  that  quality 
of  wine  was  their  favorite  potation.  I can  excuse  their 
partiality  for  this  drink,  for  it  is  truly  a most  delightful 
beverage.  From  my  vantage-ground  I could  observe  all 
these  things  deliberately  and  philosophically.  And  I was 
forced  to  the  conclusion  that  these  foreigners  were  men 
just  like  ourselves,  but  having  constitutions  developed 
more  powerfully  by  stronger  food.  Even  those  sailors 
who  were  as  black  as  this  lacquered  box — coming  from 
an  entirely  different  race,  as  the  Hollanders  say — moved 
about  and  acted  like  human  beings.  Yet,  behind  this 
wonderful  similarity  between  three  different  races  of 
men,  I detected  about  the  Commodore,  his  officers,  and 


240 


Mito  Yashiki. 


many  of  his  men,  a loftiness  of  bearing  and  an  exaltation 
of  mien  that  betokened  their  superiority  over  ourselves. 
It  was  an  expression  of  countenance  that  betokened  a 
loftier  mind,  and  a more  refined  sentiment  and  spirit.” 

“Yet,  O Lord  of  Hikone,  according  to  your  doctrine 
so  ably  enunciated  just  now,  there  can  be  no  such  thing 
as  a spirit  or  a soul.  You  merely  assumed  that  there 
was  a loftier  mind  dwelling  within  those  foreign  bodies. 
You  cannot  prove  that  any  such  elements  existed 
there.” 

“ Quite  true,  O Priest.  And  that  is  the  very  thing 
that  has  puzzled  me  ever  since.  Of  course  I can  prove 
nothing  in  the  matter.  Yet,  just  as  you  were  bound  to 
recognize  some  outside  force  when  you  withdrew  your 
hand  from  the  sun,  so  was  I compelled,  in  the  presence 
of  those  foreigners,  to  feel  the  power  oi  something  in  their 
inner  natures  that  impressed  and  appealed  to  something 
in  my  nature.  And  I am  convinced  that  that  something 
in  my  nature  took  cognizance  of  some  superior  force  in 
their  natures.  Furthermore,  this  process  of  recognition 
was  quite  distinct  from  reason.  And  I am  also  con- 
vinced that  this  intangible  power  is  the  secret  of  their 
great  physical  and  material  power  as  a nation.  There 
must  be  some  spring  whence  this  effect  flows, — some  prin- 
ciple that  inspires  their  natures  with  exalted  aspirations.” 

“Yet,  O Prince,  there  can  be  no  such  spring  or  princi- 
ple, if  your  theories  be  correct.” 

“I  know  that  well  enough,  O Priest.  Yet  I am  in 
search  of  power,  and  when  I see  any  thing  tending  to 
promote  and  strengthen  power,  I want  to  get  hold  of  it. 
These  strangers  have  something  in  their  natures  that  we 
do  not  possess.  They  have  a loftiness  of  spirit  that  I am 
compelled  to  recognize,  and  to  admit  to  be  the  secret 
source  of  their  greater  power  as  a nation.  And  it  is  this 
intangible  something  that  I want  to  get  at.  We  can  imi- 
tate their  ships,  cannon,  and  houses,  but,  unless  we  pos- 
sess ourselves  of  this  secret  inspiration,  our  labors  will 
be  fruitless.  We  shall  be  like  the  mountain  boor  who 
puts  on  the  garments  of  a samurai — his  vulgar  spirit  will 


A Metaphysical  Siesta. 


241 


crop  out  and  make  him  a source  of  ridicule  and  con- 
tempt to  all  the  world.” 

“ Yet,  O most  learned  Prince,  this  is  all  a delusion, 
according  to  your  learned  deductions  of  this  afternoon.” 
“ I know  it,  O Priest.  But  I want  power.  And,  by  the 
shades  of  Taiko-Sama,  I am  going  to  have  it  ! ” 

“ Then,  after  all,  O Prince,  it  would  appear  as  if  power 
were  the  only  reality  in  this  universe,  because  you  are 
able  to  feel  it.  In  other  words,  the  tangible  is  not  real 
because  it  cannot  be  demonstrated  to  exist  ; but  the  in- 
tangible, that  appeals  to  something  in  us  that  is  above 
reason,  can  be  felt  by  a responsive  something  that  we 
designate  the  spirit.  Are  you  aware,  sir,  that,  if  we  ac- 
cept any  such  theory,  you  and  I will  be  forced  to  admit 
all  the  conclusions  that  we  have  been  so  vigorously  re- 
pudiating this  afternoon  concerning  a Supreme  Being, 
the  soul,  and  immortality  ? Do  you  mean  to  tell  me  that, 
because  I cannot  demonstrate  the  fact  that  I am  sitting 
here  and  talking  to  you,  therefore  this  lovely  lake  and 
yonder  lordly  mountains  do  not  exist  ? If  I shut  my 
eyes  and  sweep  the  vision  away,  yet  will  the  substance  of 
the  landscape  exist  as  before.  These  beauties  will  be 
here,  even  if  there  be  no  eye  to  gaze  on  them.  Surely 
this  present  moment  is  real ! Surely  I am  here  talking 
to  you  ! Surely  we  are  environed  by  these  fields  and 
mountains  ! These  things  must  be  true  even  if  every 
thing  else  in  the  universe  be  mere  phantasms  ! ” 

“ Nay,  O Monk,  you  merely  assume  that  these  things 
exist.  If  I choose  to  deny  your  assumptions,  you  have 
no  demonstrations  at  hand  that  could  force  conviction 
upon  me.  Also  bear  in  mind  that,  if  these  things  be  true, 
then,  by  the  same  method  of  assumption,  a multitude  of 
other  things  are  equally  true.  Either  every  thing  exists, 
or  nothing  exists.  You  cannot  assume  that  just  a few 
things  that  you  enumerate  do  exist,  and  then  forbid  the 
existence  of  the  balance  of  the  universe,  that  other  minds 
assume  to  exist  as  well  as  the  few  things  that  you  have 
seen  fit  to  dignify  with  existence.” 

“ Then,  O Prince,  I presume  that  this  intangible  power 


2\2 


Mito  Yashiki. 


in  the  foreigner  does  exist,  as  truly  as  yonder  shadow  that 
Hiyeisan  is  casting  upon  the  waters  of  this  lake.  If  this 
concession  be  made,  I do  not  see  where  you  will  land  me 
short  of  the  accursed  doctrines  of  the  Kirishitans.” 

“ I do  not  care  where  it  will  land  you.  All  I know  is 
that,  so  far  as  I am  concerned,  there  are  certain  phe- 
nomena that  I consider  it  politic  and  expedient  to  recog- 
nize as  realities,  even  though  they  be  invisible  realities. 
Did  not  my  mind  wrestle  with  the  minds  of  these  for- 
eigners over  the  terms  that  should  be  incorporated  into 
the  treaty,  and  am  I not  positive  that  in  matters  of 
diplomacy  and  reasoning  their  minds  are  constructed  on 
the  same  plan  as  mine  ? What  can  be  more  real  than 
that  fact  ? Let  the  treaty  speak  for  itself.” 

“ O most  profound  and  learned  Prince,  you  are  tread- 
ing upon  very  dangerous  ground  if  you  intend  to  adhere 
to  your  first  declarations  about  the  universe.” 

“ Never  mind  about  that,  O Priest,  but  look  to  your 
own  laurels  and  to  those  of  your  religion,  for  I am  about 
to  make  some  marvellous  revelations  unto  thee.  Know, 
then,  that  in  my  researches  to  discover  what  was  the 
secret  power  of  these  foreigners,  and  whence  flowed  their 
inspiration,  I came  across  the  following  historic  record  : 
It  appears  that  nearly  four  centuries  ago  there  dwelt  on 
the  shores  of  a far  distant  sea  a man  who  not  only 
assumed  this  earth  to  be  spherical  in  shape,  but  who 
also  asserted  the  same  to  be  a fact  with  endless  persist- 
ency. He  spent  many  years  in  navigating  his  native 
seas,  and  also  the  shores  of  a vast  ocean  contiguous 
thereto.  All  the  wise  and  learned  men  of  those  days 
laughed  him  to  scorn.  Yet  did  he  persist  in  his  assertion, 
and  endeavor  to  verify  his  allegation,  that  land  lay  be- 
yond those  apparently  boundless  waters,  by  showing  cer- 
tain berry-bushes  and  sundry  curiously  carved  pieces  of 
wood  that  had  drifted  across  that  vast  expanse  of  waters 
and  had  floated  upon  the  shores  of  those  countries  that 
bordered  the  eastern  shores  of  that  ocean.  Still  persist- 
ing in  placing  absolute  faith  on  the  correctness  of  his 
assumption,  he  even  dared  to  venture  upon  that  unex- 


A Metaphysical  Siesta. 


243 


plored  waste  of  waters,  and  to  sail  westward  for  many 
months,  until  he  actually  came  upon  the  shores  of  an  un- 
known continent.  Further  voyages  and  discoveries  veri- 
fied his  theory  beyond  all  possible  doubt.  And,  within 
fifty  years  from  the  time  that  he  reached  the  shores  of 
that  new  world,  another  navigator,  sailing  in  an  opposite 
direction,  came  upon  our  own  shores. 

“Now,  the  strange  part  of  this  matter  is,  that  the  in- 
habitants of  this  new  continent,  who,  by  the  way,  are 
the  descendants  of  the  race  to  which  the  discoverer  be- 
longed, are  the  very  people  who  now  come  to  our  shores 
and  demand  commercial  intercourse  with  us.  Now  the 
actions  of  this  great  discoverer  reveal  unto  me  the  prin- 
ciple, not  only  of  his  own  success,  but  also  of  the  success 
of  the  race  to  which  he  belongs.  He,  being  convinced 
of  the  correctness  of  his  conclusions,  then  by  faith  laid 
hold  of  things  unseen,  and  thus  out  of  his  intangible 
theories  revealed  a new  world  to  humanity.  And  the 
race  to  which  he  belongs  are  given  to  acting  on  faith  in 
many  matters  that  are  extremely  practical  in  their  nature. 
They  appear  to  have  imbibed  this  principle  from  their 
extraordinary  religion,  of  which  this  great  discoverer  was 
a very  devout  follower.  Having  accustomed  their  minds 
to  this  peculiar  method  of  procedure,  they  very  naturally 
drift  into  the  habit  of  applying  this  wonderful  principle 
of  human  nature  to  things  outside  of  their  religion.  In 
their  sciences  and  arts  they  appear  to  have  assumed 
certain  fundamental  principles  to  be  correct,  and  then  to 
have  gone  ahead  and  constructed  their  comprehensive 
theories  and  their  marvellous  mechanical  productions. 
This  principle  of  laying  hold  on  the  invisible  and  the  in- 
tangible and  building  thereon  in  accordance  with  their 
enlightened  reason,  appears  to  be  the  secret  of  their 
superior  power  as  a race.  The  people  of  this  very  race 
were  savages  a thousand  years  after  our  nation  had 
adopted  Chinese  civilization  ! Yet,  under  the  subtle  in- 
fluence of  this  principle,  they  appear  during  the  last 
thousand  years  to  have  made  immeasurable  progress, 
while  we  have  stagnated.  This  race  of  savages  has  de- 


244 


Mito  Yashiki. 


veloped  a boldness  and  a keenness  in  metaphysical  and 
scientific  speculation,  an  exalted  devotion  in  the  search 
for  truth,  and  a magnanimity  of  spirit  that  will  eventually 
cause  them  to  crowd  out  of  existence  all  races  not  devel- 
oping such  characteristics.” 

“ But  hold  on,  O Prince  ! Whither  will  you  lead  me  ? 
If  that  which  you  say  be  true,  then  the  meteoric  stones 
and  foreign  substances  that  drift  across  the  boundless 
ocean  of  space  upon  our  shores  prove  the  existence  of 
other  worlds  beyond  this  mighty  abyss,  for  the  books  of 
the  Hollanders  say  that  the  elements  composing  these 
pieces  of  drift  from  unknown  realms  beyond  us  are  iden- 
tical with  the  mineral  substances  entering  into  the  com- 
position of  our  earth.  Pray,  where  will  your  next  step 
lead  us  ? ” 

“ Now  zealously  guard  the  laurels  of  thy  creed,  O 
Priest.  Know  that  this  foreign  race  has  applied  this 
same  principle  of  faith  to  the  intangible  and  invisible 
spirit-world,  as  they  call  it.  They  assume  the  existence 
of  a Supreme  Being  and  of  a soul,  and  they  believe  that 
this  Supreme  Being  has  promised  immortality  to  man- 
kind. Assuming  and  believing  these  fundamental  prin- 
ciples to  be  correct,  they  have  built  thereon  their  hopes 
and  their  energies.  They  also  allege  that  this  Supreme 
Being  has  revealed  unto  them  a magnificent  and  perfect 
system  of  moral  ethics,  whereby  to  guide  and  to  direct 
them  in  this  life,  and  to  prepare  them  for  a future  life 
after  death.  Upon  this  system  of  ethics  they  have  built 
their  social  and  political  institutions,  which  appear  to 
have  developed  into  something  quite  superior  to  ours. 
Now,  even  if  there  be  no  Supreme  Being,  no  soul,  no  im- 
mortality, yet  the  very  principle  of  laying  hold  on  the 
reality  of  such  profound  mysteries  by  faith,  and  acting 
thereon,  appears  to  develop  a nobler  spirit  in  mankind 
than  the  rejection  of  these  mysteries,  or  the  remaining  in 
a state  of  uncertainty  concerning  them,  seems  to  develop. 
The  application  of  this  principle  seems  to  produce  higher 
types  of  races.  Therefore  I am  convinced  that  this  is 
the  source  of  the  foreigners’  exalted  aspirations  and 


A Metaphysical  Siesta. 


245 


inspired  sentiments,  which  have  developed  in  their  na- 
tures lofty  and  noble  impulses,  that  stamp  their  existence 
on  their  very  faces. 

“ O Priest,  what  chance  has  your  weak  and  childish 
creed  against  such  vitalized  and  glorious  beliefs  ? Look 
to  your  laurels,  sir  Abbot.  I foresee  great  changes  in 
this  country.  The  day  may  soon  come  when  this  foreign 
religion  will  again  challenge  your  creed.  Three  hundred 
years  ago  it  swept,  within  forty  years,  over  Kiushiu  like 
wildfire,  and,  but  for  the  intervention  of  the  State,  where 
would  your  sect  have  been  ? Beware  of  its  second  ad- 
vent, and  make  ready  your  weapons.  Be  assured  that 
the  religion  which  can  offer  a reasonable  hope  of  immor- 
tality to  man  will  soothe  the  cravings  of  the  human  heart, 
and  will  sweep  your  dead  creed  out  of  existence.  As  for 
myself,  I shall  continue  to  live  and  to  believe  as  I have 
heretofore  done.  I cannot  understand  these  mysteries. 
Therefore  I reject  them.  But  your  creed  is  under  our 
patronage,  and  it  behooves  us  to  give  you  timely  advice 
and  warning  whenever  our  forecast  becomes  gloomy. 

“ It  is  now  getting  toward  the  close  of  the  day,  and  you 
must  hasten  homeward.  My  swiftest  boat  with  eight 
lusty  scullers  will  bear  you  across  the  lake  directly  to  the 
base  of  Hiyeisan.  Return,  then,  to  thy  engroved  mon- 
astery on  yonder  summit,  and  ponder  well  my  warnings. 
Seek  the  shadows  of  the  moon- lit  pines,  and  brood  yet 
more  deeply  over  the  profound  mysteries  of  life,  of  death, 
and  of  immortality  ; and  when  thy  sombre  communings 
shall  disclose  whither  hath  fled  the  spirit  that  erstwhile 
shone  forth  in  the  countenance  of  thy  departed  brother, 
then  hasten  to  reveal  unto  me  the  dread  truth.  Fare- 
well ! ” 


CHAPTER  XIX. 


ORANGE  BLOSSOMS. 

On  the  same  day  that  the  Lord  of  Hikone  wrestled  so 
nonchalantly  with  the  Abbot  of  Hiyeisan  on  matters  per- 
taining to  the  dread  mysteries  of  life  and  of  death,  there 
came  a messenger  to  the  gateway  of  Mito  Yashiki,  en- 
quiring for  the  sons  of  Nakashima.  He  was  duly  escort- 
ed to  the  lodge,  where  dwelt  the  two  gentlemen  for  whom 
he  was  searching.  The  messenger  reported  himself  to  be 
the  bearer  of  letters  from  their  father  at  Atago-Yama, 
With  reverent  hands  the  despatches  were  received,  and 
quickly  opened.  The  one  addressed  to  Junzo  contained 
merely  a few  items  of  family  news  and  some  expressions 
of  general  pleasure  at  the  auspicious  commencement  of 
his  vassalage  to  Mito. 

The  letter  to  Tomokichi,  however,  was  far  different  in 
its  import.  To  the  Caucasian  reader  it  would  have  ap- 
peared a droll  specimen  of  literature.  It  ran  thus  : 

“ My  son,  it  has  been  truly  said  that  he,  who  leaves  no 
children  to  burn  incense  before  his  shrine,  well  merits 
the  commiseration  of  both  gods  and  men.  To  have  one’s 
name  pass  into  utter  oblivion,  to  become  extinct  in  root 
and  in  branch,  are  calamities  to  be  guarded  against  with 
great  care  by  judicious  and  thoughtful  members  of  the 
community.  Has  not  our  name  been  handed  down  from 
generation  to  generation  for  more  than  one  thousand 
years  ? Should  not  we,  therefore,  see  to  it  at  this  day 
that  the  proper  precautions  be  taken  to  prevent  the  con- 
tingency of  so  dire  a calamity  as  the  decadence  of  so 
ancient  a family  ? Profoundly  have  I dwelt  upon  this 
subject,  until  my  meditations  have  brought  me  to  definite 

246 


Orange  Blossoms.  247 

conclusions  and  action  in  the  matter.  It  is  already  well 
known  to  you  that  our  worthy  friend  Yamada  grieves 
deeply  over  his  supreme  misfortune  in  being  deprived  of 
male  offspring.  In  accordance  with  the  ancient  and 
praiseworthy  custom  of  our  country,  he  has  offered  to 
adopt  as  his  heir  my  youngest  son,  your  brother  Kunisa- 
buro,  thus  perpetuating  his  family  and  transmitting  his 
name  to  posterity.  It  is  needless  for  me  to  say  how 
supremely  honored  I feel  at  this  token  of  confidence  on 
the  part  of  so  discriminating  a person  as  this  gentleman 
of  renowned  lineage  undoubtedly  is.  Another  pleasing 
feature  of  this  matter  was  developed  when  our  illustrious 
friend  also  proposed  a marriage  between  his  younger 
daughter  and  Kunisaburo  (between  which  frivolous  crea- 
tures it  appears  that  a weak  and  silly  attachment  has  long 
existed).  The  generous  offers  of  Mr.  Yamada  have  been 
accepted  by  me  after  long  and  profound  reflection  ; and 
the  marriage  will  be  consummated  next  month.  Immedi- 
ately thereafter,  the  adoption  of  my  son  will  be  ratified. 

“ But  there  is  another  matter,  allied  to  the  one  under 
discussion,  that  more  directly  concerns  yourself,  and 
concerning  which  I now  notify  you.  I,  being  consumed 
with  the  very  natural  and  laudable  desire  to  hand  down  my 
name  to  posterity,  have  proposed  a marriage  between  you 
and  Mr.  Yamada’s  elder  daughter.  This  proposal,  after 
due  deliberation,  he  has  condescended  to  accept,  thus 
honoring  us  very  greatly  by  the  alliance.  We  have  de- 
cided to  have  this  marriage  consummated  a few  days 
before  the  nuptials  of  your  brother  are  celebrated. 
Therefore  I have  written  this  letter  to  you  asking  that  you 
will  obtain  leave  of  absence  for  three  months  from  Yedo, 
and  that  you  will  forthwith  journey  home  in  order  that 
the  bridal  ceremonies  be  not  held  in  abeyance  after  an 
unseemly  fashion.  It  will  not  be  necessary  for  your 
brother  Junzo  to  leave  his  duties  in  Mito  Yashiki.  At 
the  end  of  three  months  you  may  resume  your  duties  in 
Yedo,  and  your  wife  can  make  her  home  with  us  at 
Atago-Yama.  We  are  all  in  good  health  and  wish  you 
much  joy  and  a pleasant  journey.” 


248 


Mito  Yashiki. 


Such  was  the  substance  of  the  epistle.  Strange 
enough  does  it  seem  to  our  Caucasian  ears.  Yet,  in  a 
land  where  the  family  and  the  government  were  based 
upon  patriarchal  principles,  it  was  deemed  just  and 
proper  that  the  father  should  dictate  in  what  manner  and 
with  whom  his  name  should  be  perpetuated, — and  from 
his  decision  there  was  practically  no  appeal.  If  a matri- 
monial alliance  seemed  proper  in  the  eyes  of  the  parents, 
orders  in  council  were  forthwith  issued  to  the  young 
couple,  and  they  meekly  obeyed.  Making  love  after  the 
manner  of  the  Caucasians,  to  them  would  have  appeared 
coarse  and  tumultuous.  For  a love-lorn  swain  to  have 
confessed  his  passion  to  the  object  of  his  admiration, 
would  have  been  regarded  as  vulgar  and  indecent.  In 
such  matters  the  services  of  a mutual  friend  were  always 
employed  to  discuss  the  affair  with  the  young  lady’s  par- 
ents, who  pondered  and  rendered  final  decision  in  the 
premises. 

As  a general  thing,  the  young  people  were  very  rarely 
consulted  as  to  their  own  wishes  in  the  matter.  From 
beginning  to  end,  the  entire  transaction  was  viewed  from 
a purely  business  standpoint,  and  every  vestige  of 
romance  was  duly  eliminated  therefrom.  Of  course,  if 
there  existed  a very  violent  antipathy  on  the  part  of  one 
toward  the  other,  then  the  indulgent  parents  would 
doubtless  act  cautiously  and  wisely.  But  where  a match 
was  otherwise  desirable,  then  no  question  of  personal 
preference  would  be  allowed  to  intervene.  The  only 
escape  from  the  will  of  inexorable  parents  lay  in  suicide, 
— a ghastly  measure  occasionally  resorted  to  by  thwarted 
lovers,  who  would  tie  themselves  together  with  cords  and 
then  jump  into  the  friendly  waters  of  some  river  or  inlet, 
whence  their  unhappy  souls  drifted  out  upon  the  unknown 
seas  above,  while  their  hapless  bodies  drifted  about  with 
the  uneasy  tides  that  ceaselessly  pounded  the  shores. 

Whilst  this  despotic  method  of  procedure  in  the 
highest  compact  known  to  mankind  may  not  be  desir- 
able, yet  it  would  be  well  if  we  Caucasians  learned  to 
conduct  our  campaigns  in  the  domain  of  Cupid  with  more 


Orange  Blossoms. 


249 


sober  judgment  and  with  less  of  gushing  and  tumultuous 
pyrotechnics,  so  to  speak.  Now,  owing  to  this  peculiar 
method  of  match-making,  I fear  that  there  will  not  be 
found  to  be  much  of  wooing  and  winning  within  the 
pages  of  this  book.  Romantic  incidents  of  that  descrip- 
tion will  necessarily  be  very  meagre,  because  the  consci- 
entious novelist  will  not  try  to  picture  the  Oriental  lover 
as  making  love  after  methods  peculiar  to  Caucasians. 
However  much  of  latitude  may  be  given  to  the  novelist 
in  matters  of  detail,  yet  the  critical  reader  notices  with 
displeasure  any  liberty  taken  with  matters  of  general 
principle.  To  weave  through  the  web  of  my  romance 
the  subtle  fibres  of  a charming  tale  of  wooing  and  win- 
ning might  be  very  tempting,  but  it  would  be  violently 
introducing  ardent  foreign  methods  into  the  mild  and 
unpoetic  marital  customs  of  the  Far  East. 

Yet  the  essence  of  love  was  the  same  as  with  us.  It 
differed  only  in  the  manner  of  expression.  The  Japan- 
ese maiden  loved  coyly  and  demurely,  scorning  to  ex- 
hibit any  outward  sign  of  emotion  as  being  unwomanly 
and  silly.  The  young  man  loved  deeply,  and,  instead  of 
publishing  that  fact  to  the  world  with  serenades  and 
motiveless  meanderings  about  the  premises  of  his  dul- 
cinea’s  parents,  at  once  retained  the  services  of  some 
astute  and  diplomatic  friend  to  press  his  suit  before 
mademoiselle’s  father,  who  was  generally  disposed  to 
give  kindly  attention  to  the  young  swain’s  advance,  pro- 
vided his  connections  were  respectable. 

I will  not  waste  time,  however,  in  moralizing  upon 
the  possible  advantage  to  be  derived  by  us  from  a care- 
ful study  of  the  practical  and  business-like  methods  of 
conducting  Oriental  matrimonial  alliances.  Suffice  it  to 
say  that  Tomokichi  read,  comprehended,  and  obeyed. 
As  a matter  of  fact,  I feel  justified  in  confidentially 
stating  that  the  young  man  was  not  entirely  unprepared 
for  his  father’s  abrupt  announcement  and  peremptory 
command.  He  had  long  had  his  eyes  open  to  the  way 
matters  appeared  to  be  shaping  themselves  (observing 
young  man  as  he  was)  and  he  perceived  the  thorough 


250 


Mito  Yashiki. 


appropriateness  of  the  entire  proceeding.  In  addition  to 
this  he  long  had  admired  and  esteemed  the  stately  and 
modest  Masago.  Had  the  customs  of  the  country  per- 
mitted him  to  take  the  initiative  in  the  matter,  he  would 
long  before  have  bloomed  forth  in  the  role  of  the  ardent 
lover.  But  the  chilling  proprieties  of  the  social  atmos- 
phere wherein  he  had  been  brought  up  discouraged  any 
open  advances  on  his  part,  and  so  he  had  plunged  yet 
deeper  into  his  studies  and  had  patiently  awaited  devel- 
opments. 

And  how  about  Masago  herself,  I hear  you  asking  ? 
Had  she  been  consulted  in  the  matter  ? Nay,  not  as  we 
understand  such  things.  Her  father  briefly  notified  her 
one  morning  that  within  two  months  she  was  to  be  mar- 
ried to  the  eldest  son  of  Mr.  Nakashima,  and  that  her 
arrangements  must  be  accordingly  made.  She  bowed 
her  head  to  the  tatamis  and  said  : “Very  well,  father,” 
and  forthwith  set  to  work  to  make  her  exceedingly  sim- 
ple trousseau.  But  she  also  had  kept  her  eyes  open  and 
had  drawn  shrewd  conclusions  as  to  how  matters  were 
shaping  themselves.  And  in  her  little  Japanese  head 
she  saw  the  thorough  appropriateness  of  the  whole  plan. 
And,  then,  had  she  not  always  admired  the  grave  and 
courtly  youth  ? Had  she  not  always  felt  happy  when  he 
visited  her  father’s  house,  and  had  she  not  felt  inex- 
pressibly lonely  whenever  he  departed  ? Did  she  not 
love  to  recall  the  time  when  he  forgot  his  fan  and  she 
ran  after  him,  all  blushes  and  smiles,  and  returned  it  to 
him  at  the  gateway  ? Could  she  forget  his  profound  and 
gracious  acknowledgments,  and  how  he  touched  her 
hand  so  gently  (accidentally,  of  course)  when  he  reached 
forth  and  took  it  back  ? Ah,  mademoiselle,  your  father’s 
announcement  fell  upon  ready  ears.  It  was  not  unwel- 
come news,  and  it  filled  your  heart  with  strange  joy. 

It  did  not  take  long  for  our  young  knight  to  com- 
plete his  arrangements  for  his  overland  trip.  His  first 
plan  was  to  foot  it  over  the  Nakasendo.  But  when  the 
impulsive  old  Prince  heard  about  it  he  at  once  gave 
orders  for  a horse  and  bettd  to  be  furnished  from  his 


Orange  Blossoms. 


251 


own  stables  for  the  journey.  And,  when  our  young 
friend  went  up  to  take  leave  of  his  Lordship,  that  gracious 
old  gentleman  handed  him  one  hundred  rios  for  his  nup- 
tial expenses,  quite  overwhelming  him  with  confusion 
and  astonishment.  Early  on  the  following  day  he  rode 
forth  on  the  Nakasendo  and  journeyed  for  ten  days  over 
the  road  traversed  nearly  a year  before  by  the  fleet- 
footed  couriers  of  the  Shogun.  About  midway  through 
the  mountains  he  met  the  retinue  of  the  Gotairo  returning 
to  Yedo.  At  last  he  drew  near  the  base  of  Atago-Yama, 
and  his  heart  beat  with  proud  and  happy  emotions  as 
he  anticipated  the  pleasure  that  his  honored  return 
would  produce.  Late  in  the  afternoon  he  rode  into  the 
mouth  of  the  glen  and  began  to  ascend  the  winding 
road  that  led  up  toward  the  hamlet. 

“ A gallant  knight  comes  riding  up  the  glen  ! ” whis- 
pered the  children  with  bated  breath  as  they  rushed 
home  to  report  the  news  to  their  parents  in  the  hamlet. 

“Sure  enough!  Who  can  it  be?”  exclaimed  the 
startled  villagers  as  they  gathered  about  their  gateways 
and  gazed  curiously  down  the  road,  for  it  was  indeed  an 
unusual  occurrence  to  have  a horseman  enter  the  secluded 
hamlet,  and  the  timid  people  had  learned  to  shrink  from 
the  lawless  blades  that  occasionally  roamed  abroad  to 
test  their  cruel  swords  on  any  luckless  subject  that 
chanced  to  fall  in  their  way.  The  terrible  tales  of  reck- 
less ronins  had  served  to  subdue  the  insubordination  of 
many  a peevish  youngster  in  the  peaceful  hamlets  of  the 
realm. 

Presently  a little  fellow,  somewhat  bolder  than  his 
companions,  crept  cautiously  through  the  thickets  that 
bordered  the  hillside  and  peeped  down  directly  upon  the 
approaching  horseman  as  he  toiled  up  the  steep  ascent. 
The  little  fellow  was  not  long  in  recognizing  the  stranger, 
and  dashed  back  shouting  at  the  top  of  his  voice  : “ It  is 
Tomokichi,  the  son  of  Nakashima  ! ” The  last  trace  of 
fear  fled  at  the  sound  of  these  magic  words,  for  the 
young  man  was  loved  and  respected  by  everybody  who 
had  ever  known  him.  Fathers  leading  their  little  ones, 


252 


Mito  Ycishiki. 


mothers  with  babies  tied  on  their  backs,  maidens  with 
hastily  plucked  flowers  in  their  hands,  all  flocked  about 
the  gateway  of  the  Nakashima  cottage  to  bid  welcome 
to  the  returning  wanderer,  whom  they  greeted  with  pro- 
foundly respectful  obeisances  as  he  came  up  to  the  en- 
trance. Great  was  the  joy  and  the  pride  of  the  simple 
people  to  see  one  of  their  neighbors  thus  enter  the  gate- 
way of  his  home. 

Dismounting  at  the  veranda  and  handing  the  reins  to 
the  betto,  Tomokichi  was  received  by  his  family  with 
that  affectionate  and  decorous  ceremony  so  admirable 
in  the  Japanese  people.  And  then  the  neighbors  poured 
in  with  warm  congratulations.  In  the  meantime  the 
meek  betto  held  the  horse  beside  the  gateway,  the  centre 
of  an  admiring  group.  At  last  the  animal  became  restive 
under  the  close  inspection,  and  lashed  out  with  his  hoofs 
at  an  old  gentleman  who  had  ventured  too  near  so  as  to 
obtain  a good  view  of  the  handsome  saddle.  This  mani- 
festation of  equine  rudeness  precipitated  upon  the  nag’s 
devoted  head  a torrent  of  harsh  rebuke  from  the  bettd, 
together  with  a volley  of  sarcastic  admonition  from  the 
same  source,  to  the  effect  that  his  Yedo  manners  had  bet- 
ter not  be  laid  aside,  unless  he  was  hungering  “ to  taste  a 
bit  of  stick.”  This  cutting  observation  appeared  to  over- 
whelm the  nag  with  confusion,  for  he  forthwith  subsided 
into  demure  contemplation  of  the  scenery,  and  the 
people  filled  up  the  measure  of  their  curiosity  even  to 
overflowing. 

After  the  levee  had  lasted  for  about  an  hour,  Tomo- 
kichi suddenly  became  mindful  of  the  companions  of 
his  journey  and  came  out  to  order  that  the  horse  be 
stabled.  But  presto  ! there  was  not  a stable  in  the  ham- 
let. The  people  themselves  had  always  been  the  carriers 
of  burdens,  so  that  the  interesting  disclosure  was  made 
that  from  the  remotest  generations  nobody  had  ever 
owned  a horse.  The  next  question  was  “ What  was  to  be 
done?”  Surely,  it  would  never  do  to  send  the  noble 
animal  down  into  the  stables  in  the  city.  At  this  per- 
plexing juncture  a good  neighbor  came  forward  and 


Orange  Blossoms. 


253 


offered  the  use  of  a shed,  where  in  the  winter  season 
he  was  accustomed  to  store  bags  of  charcoal.  And  he 
bettd  himself  was  billeted  to  chum  with  the  old  man- 
servant in  the  Nakashima  kitchen. 

Having  thus  settled  down,  Tomokichi  plunged  into  a 
description  of  his  adventures  and  experiences  that  held 
the  household  entranced  far  into  the  night.  In  fact,  the 
next  two  days  were  given  up  very  largely  to  smoking  and 
to  conversation,  and  O-Hana  allowed  her  household  work 
to  run  sadly  behind  in  order  that  she  might  hear  about 
the  thrilling  wonders  that  were  transpiring  beyond  the 
mountains  that  environed  her  home.  To  the  Caucasian 
reader  it  may  appear  strange  that  the  young  man  did  not 
cut  a swell  on  his  steed  and  dash  down  to  Yamada’s  at 
once  to  see  his  dulcinea.  But  such  exhibitions  of  vulgar 
show  and  inordinate  haste  were  not  according  to  refined 
Japanese  taste.  Such  matters  were  conducted  with  sim- 
plicity and  decorum. 

Therefore  three  days  were  allowed  to  pass  before  he 
called  on  Mr.  Yamada.  On  the  morning  of  that  day  the 
entire  family  went  to  Kioto,  and  spent  a couple  of  days. 
The  Misses  Yamada  were,  to  all  outward  appearances, 
the  same  courteous  young  ladies  of  last  summer  enter- 
taining their  friends.  They  acted  their  parts  to  perfec- 
tion. And  it  required  a keen  observer  to  see  and  to  ap- 
preciate the  many  delicate  attentions  of  which  the  two 
young  men  were  the  recipients  from  their  respective 
fiancees.  Why  was  it  that  whenever  Masago  dipped  out 
the  rice  the  elder  brother  was  always  first  helped,  while, 
when  Seisho  dipped  it  out,  the  same  fate  befell  the 
younger  brother  ? Why  was  it  that  the  side-dishes  of  the 
two  young  men  always  contained  delicate  morsels  of 
some  dainty  not  seen  on  the  other  less  fortunate  side- 
dishes  ? Why  was  it  that  the  sisters  always  happened  to 
be  on  hand  when  the  gentlemen  went  out  calling,  so  as  to 
be  ready  to  hand  from  the  rack  the  swords  of  their 
respective  lovers,  while  the  old  gentlemen  had  to  help 
themselves  to  theirs.  You  do  not  know  what  Tomo- 
kichi’s  favorite  flower  is,  yet  Masago  always  wears  it  in 


254 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


her  hair.  And  Seisho  always  wears  the  silken  girdle  pre- 
sented to  her  by  Kunisaburo  on  her  last  birthday.  Do 
you,  my  Caucasian  friend,  call  these  but  tame  manifesta- 
tions of  love  ? Do  you  shrug  your  shoulders  and  remark 
that  such  servile  attentions  do  but  disgust  your  more 
rugged  nature  ? 

Well,  well,  my  carnivorous  countryman,  it  may  seem 
tame  to  your  beef-fed  constitution,  and  it  may  appear 
servile  to  your  modern  democratic  perceptions,  but  you 
must  bear  in  mind  that  the  feudal  theory  upon  which  so- 
ciety was  founded  in  that  country  rendered  such  attentions 
eminently  becoming  and  proper.  The  structure  of  their 
society  was  based  upon  the  idea  of  lord  and  vassal.  As 
every  man  was  the  vassal  of  some  lord  to  whom  he  bowed 
down  in  homage,  so  every  woman  was  the  vassal  of  some 
man  (whether  father,  brother,  or  husband)  to  whom  she 
owed  allegiance  and  rendered  homage.  Man  was  the 
bulwark  that  girded  the  prince  about  with  a living  wall, 
standing  betwixt  him  and  every  danger,  and  he  was  also 
the  lion  that  stood  at  the  threshold  of  the  home  to  rend 
asunder  the  spoiler  and  the  ravisher.  What  then  could 
have  been  more  appropriate  and  dignified  than  for  hands 
unfitted  for  mortal  combat  to  gently  gird  on  the  keen 
blade  and  to  minister  to  the  wants  of  the  warrior,  the 
guardian  of  the  home  ? 

We  will  not  detain  you  with  such  scenes,  but  will 
hasten  with  the  story  of  the  simple  wedding  that  took 
place  within  a fortnight  after  the  return  of  our  gallant 
knight  from  Yedo.  It  was  indeed  very  simple.  There 
were  no  wedding  bells,  no  organ  marches,  no  church 
processions,  no  temple  ceremonies.  It  was  viewed 
almost  entirely  as  a business  transaction.  Yet  to  the 
maidenly  hearts  of  the  sisters  the  occasion  was  one  of 
supreme  importance  and  happiness.  On  the  morning  cf 
the  eventful  day  the  Nakashimas  went  in  norimons  to  the 
mansion  of  Mr.  Yamada.  A few  friends  had  been  in- 
vited to  the  sumptuous  feast  prepared  by  the  host.  It 
was  spread  out  on  the  floor  of  the  upper  story,  which  had 
been  ornamented  with  silken  hangings  and  flowers  until 


Orange  Blossoms. 


255 


it  resembled  a lovely  bower.  A bevy  of  servants  from 
some  renowned  caterer  flitted  about  noiselessly  arranging 
the  dishes  and  the  cushions  on  the  tatamis. 

The  Nakashimas  were  quietly  ushered  into  the  lower 
rooms,  where  they  chatted  with  their  host  and  with  the 
assembled  guests,  while  the  bearers  were  sent  to  the 
quarters  of  the  gate-keeper,  where  a feast  had  been  pre- 
pared for  them  and  for  the  household  servants.  At 
about  midday  the  guests  were  ushered  upstairs,  where 
they  were  duly  arranged  around  on  the  floor, — and  the 
feast  began.  It  was  one  of  those  interminable  Orien- 
tal repasts  that  beggars  description.  It  comprised  forty 
courses,  served  up  in  little  messes  of  fish,  flesh,  and 
fowl.  Of  course  none  of  the  courses  were  very  heavy. 
Some  of  them  might  well  have  been  characterized  as 
merely  a nibble  and  a bite.  Little  bowls  of  soup,  tiny 
morsels  of  some  choice  vegetable  or  fruit,  and  rare 
selections  of  roots  and  confectionery  comprised  the  bulk 
of  the  courses.  The  entire  afternoon  was  given  up  to 
eating,  drinking,  and  smoking  between  times.  The 
utmost  good-humor  and  hilarity  characterized  every 
thing.  Choice  brands  of  saktf  flowed  freely,  and  the 
band  of  musicians  downstairs  at  intervals  wrestled  with 
sundry  stringed  instruments  and  flutes  after  a fashion 
that  would  have  impressed  a Caucasian  with  the  idea  that 
the  tune  was  rapidly  getting  the  better  of  the  performers. 

The  bride  sat  with  her  parents  on  one  side  of  the  room, 
while  the  groomsman  dined  with  his  family  at  the  other 
end  of  the  room,  where  he  was  the  recipient  of  consider- 
able good-natured  chaffing  and  badgering.  As  the  feast 
merged  into  its  closing  courses  there  gradually  settled 
down  upon  the  convivial  gathering  a hush  of  expectancy, 
as  if  the  supreme  moment  of  the  entertainment  were  ap- 
proaching. At  last  an  attendant  brought  in  a beautiful 
tray  whereon  were  placed  a tiny  cup  and  an  exquisite 
little  porcelain  jar  containing  the  choicest  of  sake.  He 
ceremoniously  deposited  his  burden  before  two  vacant 
cushions  beside  the  balcony.  Then,  amid  the  plaudits 
and  the  congratulations  of  their  friends,  the  bride  and 


256 


Mito  Yashiki. 


the  groom  slowly  rose,  and,  advancing  to  the  cushions, 
seated  themselves  thereon.  Then  Masago,  with  nervous 
hands,  filled  the  cup  with  sak /,  and  handed  it  to  Tomo- 
kichi  to  quaff ; and  he,  in  turn,  refilled  it  and  handed  it 
back  to  her  to  quaff. 

And  this  pretty  ceremony — emblematical  of  the  fact 
that  from  thenceforth  they  were  to  imbibe  pleasures  and 
sorrows  at  the  same  bowl — constituted  the  happy  couple 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Nakashima.  And  from  that  time  until  the 
close  of  the  feast  they  ate  and  drank  together  as  husband 
and  wife,  receiving  from  and  giving  back  to  the  p ompany 
much  witty  and  pleasant  badinage.  There  was  no  kiss- 
ing of  the  bride,  no  handshaking,  no  dancing  ; but  verbal 
congratulations  poured  forth  freely  from  all  parts  of 
the  room.  And  quite  bride-like  did  Masago  appear  with 
her  blushing  cheeks  and  lavender-colored  robe.  On  this 
interesting  occasion  Kunisaburo  and  Seisho  sat  side  by 
side,  and  graciously  helped  each  other  to  choice  morsels 
of  edibles.  Late  in  the  evening  the  jovial  revellers  dis- 
banded. The  newly  married  couple  departed  in  their 
norimons  for  the  glen  that  very  night,  but  the  rest  of  the 
family  did  not  return  until  late  the  following  day. 

About  ten  days  after  the  events  chronicled  above, 
Kunisaburo’s  wedding  came  off.  It  was  a great  day  in 
the  hamlet.  The  guests  assembled  in  the  upper  story  of 
the  cottage,  and  feasted  far  into  the  night.  Good  old 
neighbor  Yenzo  called  for  a fiddle,  and  essayed  an  am- 
bitious flight  in  the  realms  of  harmony,  but  his  efforts 
merely  served  to  increase  the  volume  of  the  prevailing 
hilarity.  At  the  supreme  moment  the  attendant  again 
brought  in  the  cup  and  the  jar,  and  pretty  Seisho  daintily 
dealt  forth  the  beverage  to  her  new  lord.  The  congratu- 
lations of  the  kind-hearted  neighbors  then  poured  forth 
in  a steady  stream.  Good  old  Yenzo,  undismayed  at  his 
previous  shortcomings  in  the  realms  of  harmony,  now 
launched  forth  into  an  improvised  rhapsody  in  the  dread 
realms  of  Chinese  poetry  to  the  unbounded  amusement 
of  the  company.  The  little  children  of  the  hamlet  were 
furnished  with  a juvenile  entertainment  downstairs,  and 


Orange  Blossoms. 


257 


feasted  to  their  hearts’  content  on  cake,  fruit,  and  candy. 
Late  in  the  evening  the  party  broke  up,  and,  a few  days 
thereafter  the  bride  and  the  groom  returned  to  the  house 
of  her  father,  where  her  husband’s  formal  adoption  as  the 
heir  to  the  estates  of  Mr.  Yamada  was  duly  ratified. 


CHAPTER  XX. 


A RETROSPECT. 

Four  years  have  elapsed  since  the  events  chronicled 
in  the  previous  chapter  transpired.  The  course  of  public 
affairs  has  flowed  on  steadily,  but  there  have  been  abun- 
dant indications  of  ill-disguised  and  deep-seated  resent- 
ment on  the  part  of  the  conservative  element  in  the 
country  against  the  liberal  concessions  made  to  the 
foreign  treaty  powers  by  the  Shogun’s  government. 
Unwonted  earthquakes,  storms,  and  pestilence  have 
sorely  vexed  the  country  until  the  people — naturally 
superstitious — cry  out  that  the  gods  are  angry  at  the 
actions  of  the  government  in  subverting  the  ancient  anti- 
foreign  policy  of  the  nation.  The  year  1854  was  one  of 
great  seismic  agitation  throughout  the  empire,  and  the 
native  chroniclers  assert  that  during  that  entire  twelve- 
month  the  islands  of  Dai-Nippon  never  ceased  to  quake 
and  to  tremble  in  some  portion  or  other  with  continuous 
vibrations.  The  Vries  islands,  situated  to  the  eastward 
of  the  mouth  of  Yedo  bay,  were  in  a state  of  violent  and 
continued  eruption,  so  it  is  not  unlikely  that  the  native 
accounts  are  true. 

In  the  month  of  November,  just  after  Tomokichi  had 
returned  from  Atago-Yama,  these  seismic  disturbances 
seemed  to  culminate  in  intensity  around  Yedo  as  a centre, 
and  produced  one  of  the  most  terrific  disasters  on  record. 
In  the  vivid  language  of  the  native  historians,  Yedo  was 
reduced  to  a rubbish  heap.  The  massively  built  yashikis 
and  temples  were  not  thrown  down  ; but  all  of  the  com- 
mon structures  were  demolished.  The  shocks  com- 
menced early  in  November,  and  continued  for  many 

258 


A Retrospect. 


259 


days  almost  uninterruptedly,  and  spasmodically  stirred 
the  country  even  up  to  the  close  of  December.  Tomo- 
kichi  was  in  his  room  at  the  lodge  manfully  wrestling 
with  the  mysteries  of  a Dutch  grammar,  when  the  deep- 
toned  booms,  like  suppressed  thunder,  caused  him  to 
start  up  and  listen  to  what  seemed  to  be  a distant  can- 
nonade. Presently  the  leaves  of  the  trees  began  to  rustle 
as  if  blown  by  some  unseen  tempest,  and  the  shock  struck 
Mito  Yashiki  with  a rush  and  a roar  that  threw  him  off 
his  feet. 

Then  ensued  scenes  of  appalling  horror.  Shrieks  and 
yells  could  be  heard  arising  from  all  parts  of  the  city. 
With  one  impulse  the  inmates  of  Mito  Yashiki  rushed 
forth  from  the  buildings  and  sought  the  groves  that  filled 
their  spacious  grounds,  so  that  in  case  the  earth  should 
split  open,  then  would  the  interlacing  roots  of  the  trees 
keep  them  from  falling  into  the  yawning  fissures.  The 
shocks  were  so  violent  and  rapid  that  before  Tomokichi 
could  regain  his  feet  he  was  most  unceremoniously  rolled 
about  the  room  and  out  upon  the  veranda,  whence  he 
was  tumbled  out  upon  the  ground,  along  with  the  debris 
of  numerous  flower-pots  and  porcelain  vases.  He  picked 
himself  up  and  staggered  out  under  a tree  and  tried  to 
stand  up  beside  it,  but  the  swaying  motion  rendered  him 
so  deathly  sick  that  he  felt  constrained  to  lie  down  on 
the  grass  and  allow  himself  to  be  rolled  about  at  the 
mercy  of  the  successive  waves  that  beat  against  the  hill. 
It  seemed  as  if  the  lodge  would  surely  be  set  on  end. 
Large  patches  of  tiles  slid  off  until  the  rafters  were  laid 
entirely  bare.  It  swayed  from  side  to  side  like  a ship  in 
a gale.  The  shojees  were  twisted  out  of  their  grooves 
and  thrown  down,  while  the  timbers  creaked  and  groaned 
most  dismally.  The  long  lines  of  barracks  were  thumped 
and  twisted  until  their  roofs  slid  off  with  horrid  din. 
They  writhed  and  squirmed  like  vast  serpents  when  the 
seismic  waves  rolled  beneath  their  foundations.  The 
stately  palace,  with  its  massive  roof,  sustained  but  little 
damage,  although  it  swayed  and  rattled  with  deafening 
turmoil.  During  the  intervals  between  the  shocks,  our 


26o 


Mito  Yashiki. 


young  friend  hastily  removed  the  tatamis  from  the  lodge, 
and  spread  them  out  under  the  trees,  so  that  his  com- 
panions and  himself  might  spend  the  night  there  if 
necessary.  He  then  started  out  to  find  his  brother. 
Whenever  the  vibrations  commenced  he  threw  himself 
flat  on  the  grass  and  waited  until  they  had  subsided. 

Everywhere  the  wildest  confusion  and  consternation 
prevailed.  Twenty  thousand  men  had  simultaneously 
rushed  forth  and  sought  the  open  air,  and  were  now 
scattered  all  about  the  lawns  and  groves,  excitedly  dis- 
cussing the  catastrophe.  During  the  intermissions,  ta- 
tamis and  bedding  were  brought  forth,  and  they  prepared 
to  camp  out  all  night.  Finding  his  brother  at  last,  he 
returned  with  him  to  the  trees  beside  the  lodge,  and 
there  awaited  further  developments.  The  shocks  con- 
tinued at  intervals  all  through  the  night,  and  the  crash  of 
falling  houses,  together  with  the  glare  of  conflagrations 
caused  by  overturned  hebachis,  made  it  a scene  of  inde- 
scribable horror.  And  from  that  time  onward  to  the 
close  of  December  they  camped  out  most  of  the  time  in 
the  open  air.  According  to  estimates,  twenty  thousand 
houses  and  sixteen  hundred  fire-proof  godowns  were 
destroyed  during  the  continuation  of  these  shocks.  Over 
one  hundred  thousand  people  were  reported  killed.  The 
great  cities  along  the  southern  coast  were  nearly  de- 
stroyed. Osaca  and  Hiogo  were  well-nigh  demolished, 
and  Kioto  was  very  badly  shaken  up.  The  little  hamlet 
in  the  glen  of  Atago-Yama  was  off  the  great  vein  of  seis- 
mic vibration,  and  escaped  with  a slight  shaking  up. 

Toward  the  close  of  November  the  disturbances 
seemed  to  break  up  the  fountains  of  the  great  deep,  for 
the  ocean  rose  up  and  dashed  itself  in  mighty  billows 
against  the  coast,  and  created  incalculable  havoc  to  har- 
bors and  seaside  villages.  The  Russian  frigate  Diana 
lay  at  anchor  in  Shimoda,  one  of  the  two  ports  just 
thrown  open  to  foreign  commerce,  and  the  water  rushed 
out  of  the  harbor,  leaving  her  bumping  on  the  rocks, 
while  the  thoughtless  people  on  shore,  following  their 
first  impulse,  rushed  down  the  beach  to  catch  the  fishes 


A Retrospect. 


261 


floundering  in  the  mud.  Then  back  came  the  wave 
from  the  ocean  in  a billow  thirty  feet  high  and  rushed 
over  the  town  and  broke  in  surges  against  the  base  of  the 
bluffs  beyond,  while  the  Diana , on  beams’  end,  was 
swirled  around  her  anchor  with  sickening  rapidity.  Then 
back  went  the  wave,  and  crash  went  the  frigate  against 
the  bottom  of  the  harbor.  Five  successive  times  did  the 
mighty  billows  advance  shoreward,  and  then  recede 
oceanward,  until  the  town  had  been  washed  away,  and 
all  the  mud  had  been  swept  off  the  floor  of  the  harbor, 
thus  utterly  destroying  it  for  commercial  purposes  ; and 
the  noble  frigate  was  so  badly  wrecked  that  it  sank 
shortly  afterward.  Then  the  water  resumed  its  normal 
level,  and  so  peacefully  lapped  the  beach  of  Shimoda 
that  a stranger  would  not  have  known  any  such  disaster 
had  befallen  the  place,  until  he  beheld  the  fields  covered 
with  the  mud  and  slime  deposited  there  by  the  ocean 
waves.  It  truly  seemed  to  the  native  mind  as  if  the  gods 
had  stepped  in  and  had  destroyed  the  harbor  that  had 
been  desecrated  by  foreign  anchors, — for  the  place  had 
to  be  abandoned  as  a seaport. 

By  the  commencement  of  1855,  however,  nature  settled 
herself  down,  and  matters  resumed  their  accustomed 
course.  During  the  three  years  that  succeeded  the  great 
earthquake,  Tomokichi  and  Junzo  pursued  their  perilous 
vocation  with  great  success,  and  without  exciting  any 
suspicion  as  to  the  real  nature  of  their  presence  at  Mito 
Yashiki.  And  Mr.  Yamada,  at  Kioto,  pursued  so  peace- 
ful and  exemplary  a life  that  he  regained  favor  in  the 
eyes  of  the  Shiro  people,  and  his  name  was  accordingly 
crossed  from  their  lists.  About  a year  after  the  wedding 
of  his  brothers,  Junzo  was  duly  lassoed  with  the  paternal 
halter,  and  was  meekly  led  up  to  the  marital  altar — so  to 
speak, — where  he  was  tied  to  a very  delightful  morsel  of 
humanity,  known  as  Miss  Akashi.  She  was  the  only 
daughter — in  fact  the  only  child — of  a warm  friend  of 
Mr.  Yamada.  She  was  pretty,  blithesome,  and  highly 
educated  according  to  Japanese  ideas.  Her  father  was 
the  retainer  of  a kug/,  and,  unlike  most  gentlemen  of  that 


262 


Mito  Yashiki. 


description,  he  was  quite  wealthy,  and  owned  a very 
choice  tea  plantation  not  far  from  Kioto.  The  marriage 
was  celebrated  with  great  zest,  for  the  old  Prince  of  Mito 
had  generously  put  down  another  hundred  rios  where- 
with to  celebrate  the  nuptials.  This  showed  to  the  Kioto 
people  that  the  Lord  of  Mito  was  highly  pleased  with  his 
new  vassals  from  Atago-Yama,  for  some  reason  unknown 
to  the  public.  As  old  Mr.  Akashi  had  no  heir,  he  very 
naturally  adopted  this  surplus  son  of  Mr.  Nakashima  as 
the  heir  to  his  estates. 

With  matters  thus  arranged,  these  two  brothers  had 
most  excellent  pretext  for  alternately  visiting  their  homes 
in  Yamashiro  every  six  months  or  so,  and  staying  a few 
weeks  with  their  wives  and  children,  for  at  the  date  of 
the  opening  of  this  chapter,  Masago  rejoiced  in  two 
robust  sons,  while  young  Mrs.  Akashi  smiled  upon  a 
lovely  daughter.  Nor  was  Seisho  to  be  outdone  by  her 
sisters,  for  she  boasted  of  a sturdy  son  and  a merry  little 
daughter,  the  very  image  of  herself.  It  would  be  need- 
less to  say  that  on  the  occasion  of  these  visits  our  young 
spies  fully  posted  Mr.  Yamada  on  all  that  was  going  on 
in  Yedo.  With  young  Konishi  in  the  office  of  the  Bak- 
ufu  in  daily  communication  with  the  ministers  of  state, 
it  is  not  surprising  that  they  were  able  to  keep  marvel- 
lously well  informed  about  affairs  in  general,  without  any 
apparent  exertion  on  their  part.  No  wonder  the  Gotairo 
frequently  found  himself  headed  off  in  many  of  his  pet 
schemes,  and  felt  obliged  to  sharply  admonish  the  com- 
mandant of  the  Shiro  in  Kioto  to  increase  his  vigilance 
over  suspected  characters  in  that  city.  Yet,  in  spite  of 
every  thing,  matters  at  Kioto  shaped  themselves  after  a 
fashion  that  plainly  showed  that  secret  information  was 
being  regularly  transmitted  from  Yedo.  It  became  mani- 
fest that  there  was  a leak  somewhere.  In  vain  did  the 
Gotairo  storm  at  his  subordinates.  The  foxy  Yamada 
only  laughed  the  more  in  his  sleeve  while  his  crafty  lieu- 
tenants demurely  and  unobtrusively  plied  their  vocation 
without  exciting  the  least  suspicion.  Could  the  sands 
of  the  Kamogawa  shoals  have  voiced  the  many  conver- 


A Retrospect. 


263 


sations  that  took  place  in  their  picnic  booths  during  these 
years,  the  Gotairo  would  soon  have  stopped  the  leak  in 
his  office. 

During  the  years  1855  and  1856,  it  became  manifest  to 
the  Gotairo  that  a knowledge  of  the  English  language 
would  be  indispensable  in  the  office  of  the  Bakufu,  inas- 
much as  that  language  appeared  to  be  the  commercial 
vernacular  of  the  outside  world.  Accordingly,  orders 
were  given  to  discourage  the  study  of  Dutch  and  to  take 
up  that  of  English.  As  Mito  ranked  as  the  most 
scholarly  of  all  of  the  clans,  he  very  naturally  looked  in 
that  direction  for  material  wherewith  to  organize  a corps 
of  English  linguists.  Through  young  Konishi,  he  had 
already  heard  of  Tomokichi’s  scholarly  attainments,  and 
accordingly  gave  orders  that  he  and  Konishi  should  go 
down  to  Shimoda  and  connect  themselves  with  the  cus- 
tom-house at  that  port,  in  order  to  learn  as  much  as  pos- 
sible from  the  American  and  English  merchants  trading 
there.  With  diligent  application,  they  not  only  acquired  a 
fair  mastery  of  the  English  language  during  their  sojourn 
there,  but  they  also  gained  an  insight  into  foreign  commer- 
cial usages  that  was  of  great  service  to  them.  They  also 
reaped  a rich  harvest  of  information  as  to  the  peculiar 
methods  of  the  Bakufu  in  conducting  a custom-house. 

In  all  countries  a prejudice  of  corruption  has  always 
existed  against  those  who  “sit  at  the  receipt  of  customs.” 
It  will  not  be  too  much  to  say  that  under  the  Shoguns’ 
administration  this  service  was  probably  as  corrupt  as 
any  thing  that  ever  existed  in  the  political  history  of  this 
world.  The  officers  of  the  government  well  understood 
the  unfriendly  spirit  of  their  master  toward  foreign  com- 
merce, and  were  aware  that  they  were  at  full  liberty 
to  make  trade  as  uncomfortable  as  possible,  both  for 
the  native  merchant  and  for  the  outside  trader.  They 
hovered  like  a flock  of  harpies  over  every  transaction. 
Every  sale  had  to  be  conducted  under  their  directions. 
They  craftily  compelled  their  own  countrymen  to  tuck 
on  the  prices,  and  then  pounced  down  upon  the  luckless 
dealers  and  plucked  them  of  their  inflated  profits. 


264 


Mito  Yashiki. 


As  produce  and  merchandise  began  to  be  drained  from 
the  country,  scarcity  and  corresponding  high  prices  began 
to  prevail  everywhere.  The  people  groaned,  the  mer- 
chants tamely  allowed  themselves  to  be  plundered  of 
their  profits,  and  the  Bakufu  grew  enormously  rich  with 
ill-gotten  spoil.  This,  in  connection  with  storms,  pesti- 
lence, and  earthquakes,  which  seemed  to  be  rampant 
during  these  four  years,  created  deep-seated  and  wide- 
spread murmurings  throughout  the  empire.  But  what 
cared  the  Gotairo  for  that  ? With  the  purse  in  his  hands, 
he  could  afford  to  smile  at  the  situation  and  continue  on 
his  course.  At  no  time  had  his  power  been  so  great. 
And  it  seemed  to  grow  stronger  every  day.  With  this 
vast  source  of  foreign  income  he  was  rendered  indepen- 
dent of  the  Daimios.  He  defied  the  conservative  ele- 
ment in  the  land,  and,  metaphorically  speaking,  snapped 
his  fingers  in  the  face  of  the  Emperor  himself.  In  the 
estimation  of  his  own  party  the  Gotairo  was  the  ablest 
and  most  upright  individual  in  the  empire.  But  in  the 
estimation  of  his  adversaries  he  was  a cesspool,  wherein 
stagnated  the  slimy  ooze  of  villainous  corruptions  and 
fiendish  cruelties.  Thus,  even  in  that  remote  corner  of 
the  globe,  did  political  nomenclature  enshrine  public 
characters  in  a manner  to  indicate  very  strongly  the 
common  origin  of  the  human  race. 

And  thus  opened  the  year  1858.  Shimoda  had  been 
abandoned  as  a treaty  port,  and  Kanagawa,  just  eighteen 
miles  below  Yedo,  was  opened  as  a new  port  in  lieu 
thereof.  In  addition  to  this,  Osaca  and  Hiogo  on  the 
Inland  Sea — or  rather  at  the  entrance  thereof — were  to  be 
thrown  open  in  the  following  year,  thus  bringing  the 
hated  foreign  traffic  within  a day’s  march  of  the  sacred 
precincts  of  the  Gosho.  Loud  and  bitter  were  the  im- 
precations of  the  conservatives  against  this  unhallowed 
action  on  the  part  of  the  Gotairo,  but  he  laughed  them 
to  scorn.  So  threatening,  however,  became  the  attitude 
of  the  hostile  clans,  that  his  Lordship  deemed  it  prudent 
to  persuade  the  foreigners  to  settle  in  Yokohama,  a little 
fishing  village  a short  distance  below  Kanagawa,  thus 


A Retrospect. 


265 


getting  them  off  the  line  of  the  Tokaido,  where  hostile 
clans  were  perpetually  streaming  along  with  thousands  of 
fierce  retainers.  Thus  he  still  held  the  reins  with  a firm 
grasp  and  seemed  assured  of  an  indefinite  lease  of  power, 
when  an  event  occurred  that  seriously  disturbed  his  cal- 
culations and  threatened  dire  disaster  to  his  cause. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 


IYILSADA. 

“ Iy^sada  the  Shogun  is  dead  ! ” exclaimed  a breath- 
less messenger  from  the  citadel  one  morning  in  August, 
when  he  had  been  ushered  into  the  presence  of  the  Go- 
tairo  at  his yashiki.  This  abrupt  communication  fell  like 
a thunder-clap  upon  his  Lordship.  Doubtless  the  reader 
but  dimly  comprehends  the  full  significance  of  this  dread 
message.  It  meant  that  the  Gotairo  was  down.  His 
authority  to  govern  the  realm  had  lapsed.  A new  Shogun 
must  now  be  chosen  by  the  grand  council  of  Daimios — 
for  there  was  no  heir, — and  he  well  knew  that  their  choice 
would  be  Keiki,  the  seventh  son  of  the  old  Prince  of 
Mito,  a brilliant  young  man  who  had  been  adopted  by 
the  house  of  Hitotsubashi.  With  the  scion  of  the  hostile 
house  of  Mito  in  power,  then  Nawosuk£  becomes  merely 
Lord  of  Hikone,  a common  Daimio  of  the  realm.  Then, 
being  thus  stripped  of  his  power,  would  his  enemies 
jump  on  him  for  his  alleged  misdeeds  while  in  office,  and 
badger  and  humiliate  him  until  his  life  would  cease  to  be 
desirable.  Nay,  they  might  even  bring  against  him 
charges  of  treason  toward  the  Emperor,  and  send  him  to 
the  blood  pit. 

This  was  the  direful  situation  in  which  his  Lordship 
was  placed  by  the  death  of  Iyesada,  his  liege  lord.  It 
all  flashed  upon  him  in  one  moment.  Yet  did  he  not 
lose  his  balance.  Even  his  enemies  credited  him  with 
prompt  energy  and  daring  boldness  in  action,  although 
they  took  pains  to  modify  this  complimentary  admission 
with  the  allegation  that  he  was  thoroughly  unscrupulous 
as  to  his  methods  of  securing  an  end.  Admirably  did 

266 


Iyesada. 


267 


his  great  qualities  shine  forth  in  the  present  emergency, 
and  his  spirit  rose  to  the  momentous  struggle  with 
wonderful  promptness.  When  the  messenger  was  so 
hastily  ushered  into  his  presence,  he  was  in  his  office 
looking  over  some  papers  relating  to  the  new  treaty 
recently  negotiated  with  the  Shogun  by  the  American 
Minister,  Mr.  Townsend  Harris.  This  fresh  batch  of 
concessions  had  created  boundless  fury  among  the  con- 
servative Daimios,  and  had  given  rise  to  dark  threaten- 
ings  against  Iyesada  and  himself.  Although  he  was 
overwhelmed  with  astonishment  and  regret  at  the  mes- 
sage, yet  did  he  not  for  one  moment  show  by  any  out- 
ward sign  how  deeply  he  was  affected  by  the  sudden 
announcement.  He  coolly  invited  the  messenger  to  sit 
down,  and  then  ordered  in  some  tea  and  tobacco.  With 
the  utmost  deliberation  he  then  proceeded  to  sip,  to 
whiff,  and  to  interrogate. 

“Your  master’s  illness  appears  to  have  culminated 
very  suddenly,”  said  his  Lordship.  “ I was  aware 
that  he  was  ailing  last  night,  but  I did  not  under- 
stand from  the  physician  that  any  thing  serious  was 
to  be  apprehended.  He  seemed  to  be  troubled  with 
slight  spasms  in  his  stomach.  I understood  that  the 
symptoms  merely  indicated  a slight  attack  of  indigestion.” 

“Quite  so,”  replied  the  messenger,  “ but  soon  after 
the  spasms  commenced  they  increased  very  rapidly  in 
frequency  and  in  violence.  In  a very  few  hours  they 
culminated  in  the  most  frightful  convulsions,  and  he  died 
in  great  agony.” 

“ Why  did  nobody  send  me  word  ?” 

“ Every  thing  was  in  such  utter  confusion,”  replied  the 
messenger,  “ that  it  never  occurred  to  anybody.  Besides 
that,  none  of  us  for  one  moment  anticipated  death.  Our 
master  was  too  ill  to  give  orders,  and  there  was  nobody 
to  assume  authority.  The  attendants  were  running  about 
in  every  direction  bringing  warm  water,  plasters,  and  hot 
drinks.  The  members  of  the  household  were  so  over- 
whelmed with  the  suddenness  and  the  terrible  violence  of 
the  spasms  that  they  were  dazed.  The  truth  is,  that  we 


268 


Mito  Yashiki. 


all  thought  that  by  morning  the  illness  would  yield  to 
treatment.  Alas  ! sir,  but  that  was  not  to  be.” 

“This  matter  must  be  kept  profoundly  secret  until  a 
successor  has  been  chosen,”  replied  his  Lordship.  “ Speak 
to  nobody  concerning  it,  and  carefully  caution  every  one 
at  the  citadel  to  keep  the  matter  quiet  until  notice  from 
me.  I will  now  accompany  you  to  the  saddened  home 
of  our  unfortunate  master  and  arrange  matters.”  So 
saying,  he  clapped  his  hands  and  ordered  the  responding 
attendant  to  notify  his  retinue  to  be  in  readiness  within 
half  an  hour. 

At  the  appointed  time,  he  was  borne  down  the  hill, 
through  the  Sakurada  Gate,  and  up  to  the  main  entrance 
of  the  citadel.  Every  thing  was  quiet.  There  was 
nothing  to  indicate  that  so  momentous  an  event  as  the 
death  of  the  ruler  of  the  land  had  taken  place.  To  the 
outside  world  Iyesada  was  still  the  Shogun.  And  he 
continued  to  be  such  for  many  days  thereafter.  Leaving 
his  retinue  at  the  entrance,  his  Lordship  went  with  two  of 
his  officers  to  the  palace,  where  he  met  the  weeping  ladies 
of  Iyesada’s  household.  They  were  overcome  with  grief 
and  horror.  He  was  then  ushered  into  the  darkened 
chamber  where  lay  the  body.  So  sudden  had  been  the 
catastrophe,  and  so  unnerved  had  all  the  members  of  the 
royal  household  become,  that  the  lifeless  form  of  the  un- 
fortunate prince  had  been  left  just  as  it  was  when  the 
spirit  fled,  lying  in  the  middle  of  the  room  on  a heap  of 
silken  quilts.  His  Lordship  carefully  examined  the  body 
and  satisfied  himself  that  life  was  extinct. 

He  then  gave  orders  that  the  body  should  be  prepared 
for  private  burial  until  such  time  as  a public  funeral  be- 
came feasible.  Then,  convening  the  entire  household  in 
the  audience-hall,  he  enjoined  on  everybody  the  strictest 
secrecy  until  such  time  as  a successor  might  be  chosen. 
He  then  went  to  the  death  chamber  and  called  in  each 
inmate  of  the  palace  and  instituted  searching  inquiries  as 
to  the  cause  of  the  illness, — (for  the  preceding  Shogun 
had  died  under  very  suspicious  circumstances  at  the  time 
of  the  granting  of  the  first  treaty  in  1853,  and  it  was 


269 


doubly  suspicious  that  his  successor  should  suddenly  die 
just  after  signing  the  second  treaty).  In  fact,  his  Lord- 
ship  felt  morally  certain  that  there  had  been  foul  play.  A 
searching  examination  revealed  nothing  of  importance. 
Everybody  told  the  same  story.  The  master  had  been 
taken  ill  with  slight  spasms  in  the  stomach  on  the 
previous  day  ; the  illness  rapidly  increased  in  intensity 
toward  night,  but  was  still  supposed  to  be  nothing 
serious  ; but  in  the  night  the  spasms  merged  into  horrible 
convulsions,  causing  an  agonizing  death  before  morning. 
It  was  so  terrible  for  one  so  young  and  so  amiable  to  be 
thus  stricken  down  ! 

But  his  Lordship  was  not  yet  satisfied.  He  submitted 
the  personal  attendants  to  a further  series  of  questions  as 
to  what  their  master  had  been  eating  and  drinking  just 
before  his  illness.  It  did  not  appear  from  their  replies 
that  the  diet  of  the  deceased  had  varied  from  the  usual 
routine.  It  is  true  that  he  had  eaten  some  watermelon 
and  had  taken  a glass  of  foreign  wine  ; but  these  articles 
appeared  to  have  come  from  proper  hands,  so  that  no 
suspicion  of  poisonous  substances  injected  therein  could 
arise.  Had  the  science  of  chemical  analysis  been  under- 
stood in  those  days,  the  body  of  the  deceased  would 
surely  have  been  subjected  to  a post-mortem  examina- 
tion ; but,  nothing  of  the  sort  being  known,  the  secret 
locked  up  in  the  tissues  of  the  stomach  remained  untold. 
His  Lordship  then  subjected  the  entire  premises  to  a close 
scrutiny  for  some  clue  that  would  indicate  the  presence 
of  intruders,  but  every  thing  appeared  in  good  order. 
He  then  placed  guards  in  all  parts  of  the  palace  with 
strict  instructions  not  to  allow  any  one  to  go  forth  or  to 
come  in  until  further  orders. 

He  then  returned  to  his  yashiki  and  sent  for  his  coun- 
cillors. These  elderly  gentlemen  were  the  head  men  of 
the  Hikone  clan,  and  had  been  his  advisers  from  youth 
upward.  On  all  important  matters  they  were  invariably 
consulted. 

“ Revered  Councillors,”  said  he  when  they  had  assem- 
bled in  his  private  office,  “ it  is  my  sad  duty  to  notify  you 


2 JO 


Mito  Yashiki. 


that  our  noble  and  generous  master,  the  Shogun  Iy£sada, 
has  entered  upon  the  shadowy  way.  We  are  now  with- 
out a head.  It  therefore  becomes  of  paramount  import- 
ance for  us  to  take  counsel  and  to  devise  measures  to 
prevent  popular  panic  and  public  disturbance  until 
matters  have  become  again  settled.  For  this  purpose 
have  I caused  you  to  be  here  assembled  in  consultation.” 

“ Most  worthy  Lord,”  replied  the  senior  member  of  the 
council,  a gray-haired  gentlemen  whose  wisdom  and 
loyalty  had  rendered  him  highly  esteemed  by  the  entire 
clan,  “this  news  is  sudden  and  terrible  indeed,  but  not 
altogether  unexpected  in  view  of  the  threats  breathed 
forth  lately  by  those  who  opposed  the  second  treaty.  Of 
course  our  mighty  Lord  perished  by  violence  ? ” 

“ There  I am  at  a loss  to  answer  you,”  replied  his 
Lordship,  smiling  at  the  clever  declarative  interrogation 
of  the  senior  councillor,  “ because  there  is  no  appearance 
of  any  violence  on  his  person.  Of  course  I am  morally 
certain  that  there  has  been  foul  play  somewhere.  Matters 
would  be  somewhat  simplified  if  I could  establish  death 
by  violence.” 

“ What  are  the  facts  in  the  case  ? ” enquired  the  senior 
councillor. 

“It  appears,”  replied  his  Lordship,  “that  he  was  in 
good  health  until  taken  ill  yesterday.  The  case  seemed 
to  be  merely  an  attack  of  indigestion,  or  some  such 
slight  stomach  ailment.  But  he  grew  rapidly  worse 
toward  night,  and,  before  morning,  died  in  terrible  con- 
vulsions.” 

“ Then,  sir,”  said  the  councillor,  “ in  view  of  the 
political  situation,  it  seems  to  me  that  the  presumption  is 
conclusive  that  there  has  been  foul  play.  This  is  the 
second  time  within  five  years  that  this  thing  has  hap- 
pened under  precisely  similar  circumstances.  I have  no 
doubt  but  what  some  attendant  is  in  collusion  with  our 
enemies.  He  has  been  bribed  to  mix  some  deadly 
foreign  poison  with  the  wine.  Either  this  or  some 
attendant  has  allowed  an  outsider  to  scale  the  ramparts 
at  night  and  to  clandestinely  mix  the  poison  in  the  wine. 


lyesada. 


271 


I do  not  doubt  for  a moment  but  what  this  thing  has 
been  done  in  some  such  way.  In  this  corrupt  age,  what  will 
money  not  accomplish  ? Dangle  before  the  eyes  of  the 
average  samurai  the  prospect  of  a grand  carouse  in  the 
Yoshiwara  and  what  can  you  not  induce  him  to  do  ? 
Under  such  circumstances,  honor  and  loyalty  become 
shadows  that  vanish  in  the  glare  of  the  brothels.  Sir,  we 
should  trim  our  sails  to  the  breeze  that  whispers  ‘foul 
play,’  and  act  accordingly.  This  is  my  humble  advice.” 

“You  have  spoken  wisely,  most  revered  councillor,” 
replied  his  Lordship.  “ Your  theory  as  to  the  cause  of  the 
death  of  our  most  unfortunate  Lord,  agrees  with  mine.  I 
shall  therefore  adopt  it  as  correct  in  view  of  the  circum- 
stances of  the  case.  I have  long  since  come  to  the 
conclusion  that  there  is  a powerful  coalition  of  conspira- 
tors somewhere  in  Yedo  working  against  us.  And 
recently  I have,  through  my  spies,  come  across  some 
clues  that  indicate  Mito  Yashiki  as  the  head-quarters  of 
this  gang  of  traitors.  I need  but  one  or  two  more  con- 
necting links  to  complete  my  chain  of  evidence.  And 
then  beware,  you  sneaking  curs  over  there  ! The 
operations  of  these  fellows  are  conducted  with  consum- 
mate skill.  They  never  leave  behind  them  any  foot- 
prints. This  work  of  last  night  is  a fair  specimen  of 
their  way  of  conducting  their  campaigns  of  iniquity.  Not 
a clue  ! Not  a shred  of  evidence  ! Yet,  beyond  doubt, 
traitors  have  murdered  their  liege  lord.  O my  fine 
fellows,  don’t  laugh  in  your  sleeves  too  much.  I shall  yet 
run  you  down.” 

“ The  manner  of  death  rather  indicates  the  use  of 
some  powerful  foreign  poison,”  suggested  .one  of  the 
councillors. 

“ Quite  true,”  replied  his  Lordship. 

“ And  who  can  more  easily  secure  foreign  poison  than 
these  same  Mito  men,  who  are  continually  communicating 
with  the  foreigners  ? ” suggested  another  one. 

“ Equally  true,”  replied  his  Lordship. 

“ And  who  but  Mito  will  reap  the  benefit  of  this 
deed  ? ” suggested  yet  another  one. 


272 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“ Who,  indeed  ? ” queried  his  Lordship. 

“ It  would  appear,”  said  the  senior  councillor,  “ as  if 
we  had  a very  strong  case  against  Mito,  and  I fail  to  see 
how  this  case  can  be  shaken.  We  are  all  familiar  with 
their  ancient  grievance  against  the  Shoguns  ; and  we 
also  are  well  aware  of  their  present  hostility  against  the 
Bakufu.  We  all  know  that  they  expect  to  reap  vast  ben- 
efits from  the  death  of  Iyesada,  inasmuch  as  young 
Hitotsubashi  will  surely  be  the  choice  of  the  Daimios. 
And  we  are  fully  informed  of  their  recent  threats,  and 
well  know  the  readiness  with  which  they  can  procure 
subtle  and  deadly  substances  from  foreigners  wherewith 
to  poison  their  adversaries.  Thus,  having  the  means  and 
the  disposition  to  perpetrate  this  foul  deed,  they  traded 
on  the  weakness  of  human  nature  somewhere  and  gained 
access  to  the  royal  premises.  With  the  aid  of  a friendly 
rope  let  down  from  above,  a person  could  easily  scale 
the  ramparts  in  the  rear  of  the  garden  at  night  and  slip 
into  some  closet  in  the  palace,  where  he  could  mix  up 
his  accursed  drug  in  a glass  of  wine,  and  have  it  slyly 
administered  by  his  coadjutor  when  the  victim  (perhaps) 
is  in  a condition  not  to  be  cognizant  of  any  peculiar 
taste  about  any  thing  he  may  chance  to  put  into  his 
mouth.  Promises  of  promotion  under  a Mito  Shogun 
would  be  a powerful  inducement  just  now,  when  so  many 
are  dissatisfied  with  the  present  administration  of  affairs. 
Sir,  after  all,  the  fault  in  this  disaster  will  be  found  to 
rest  very  largely  with  us,  for  we  did  not  carefully  weed 
out  from  the  members  of  our  master’s  household  all  per- 
sons suspected  of  having  conservative  ideas.  In  case 
we  secure  control  of  the  next  Shogun,  we  must  carefully 
select  his  household  and  know  exactly  what  people  serve 
him.  Even  his  concubines  should  be  thoroughly  scruti- 
nized. Women  frequently  make  very  dangerous  con- 
spirators.” 

“ Well  and  truly  spoken,”  exclaimed  his  Lordship. 
“ Our  plan,  then,  shall  be  to  accuse  Mito  of  causing  the 
death  of  the  Shogun  by  violence.  This,  of  course,  they 
will  deny.  But  the  effect  of  this  public  announcement 


Iyesada. 


273 

will  be  to  create  a prejudice  against  their  candidate  for 
the  office.  I do  not  anticipate  that  this  will  defeat  his 
election  by  the  grand  council  of  Daimios,  but  it  will 
serve  as  a cover  under  which  to  introduce  my  candidate 
and  force  him  on  them.  Desperate  cases  require  despe- 
rate remedies.  We  are  not  going  out  of  office  in  the 
natural  order  of  things,  but  are  being  forced  out  by  our 
adversaries  resorting  to  foul  and  treasonable  methods. 
This  patent  fact  will  justify  us  in  using  extraordinary 
methods  to  circumvent  our  enemies.  We  are  compelled 
to  meet  violence  with  violence.  The  sympathies  of  a 
large  part  of  the  people  are  with  us  in  our  foreign 
policy  ; and  when  it  shall  be  proclaimed  that  Iyesada 
was  the  victim  of  the  enemies  of  this  popular  policy, 
then  will  our  violent  course  be  deemed  praiseworthy. 
The  people  will  say  that  Mito  had  been  justly  punished 
for  such  unscrupulous  and  treasonable  conduct.  Then, 
in  addition  to  this,  our  enemies  are  scattered,  while  we 
are  concentrated  here  in  Yedo, — thanks  to  the  wise  pol- 
icy of  Tokugawa  Iyeyas.  Their  forces  cannot  success- 
fully cope  with  our  army  here.  I hold  the  power,  and 
shall  not  resign  it  without  good  cause.  The  murder  of 
our  gentle  master  I shall  certainly  feel  called  upon  to 
punish.” 

“ But,  sir,  have  you  selected  your  candidate  ? ” enquired 
the  councillors. 

“ I have  been  thinking  over  that  matter  very  carefully,” 
was  the  reply,  “ and  I have  decided  upon  the  young 
prince  of  Kii-shiu.” 

“ But,  sir,  he  is  only  twelve  years  old  ! ” 

“ So  much  the  better  for  me,  inasmuch  as  I myself 
cannot  be  a candidate  for  the  office.” 

This  witty  reply  provoked  loud  laughter  among  the 
councillors,  who  shook  their  sides  immoderately  over  the 
shrewd  scheme  of  their  lord. 

“ Besides  that  fact,”  continued  he,  “ this  plan  has  the 
merit  of  placing  the  minds  of  you  councillors  at  ease 
concerning  female  conspirators  within  the  citadel,  for  we 
shall  not  be  called  on  to  select  his  wife  and  concubines 


Mito  Yashiki. 


274 

for  a long  time  to  come.  In  the  meantime  we  can  have 
the  most  absolute  control  of  his  household  matters,  and 
shall  see  to  it  that  nobody  enters  his  service  until  we 
have  passed  upon  him.  How  does  all  this  impress  you, 
my  worthy  councillors  ? ” 

This  sly  hit  was  received  with  unbounded  good-humor 
by  all  present.  The  details  of  the  plan  were  then  fully 
discussed,  and  the  minutest  points  were  carefully  ana- 
lyzed with  that  exhaustiveness  which  rendered  his  Lord- 
ship  so  difficult  a person  to  catch  unprepared.  It  was 
midnight  before  the  council  adjourned,  and  by  that  time 
a scheme  had  been  perfected  to  keep  the  power  in  the 
hands  of  his  lordship  for  an  indefinite  period. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 


lYlsMOCHI. 

“ Long  live  Iyemochi  the  Shogun  ! ” Such  would 
have  been  the  greeting  of  a Caucasian  mob  to  their  new 
ruler.  But  no  such  welcome  awaited  the  new  Shogun. 
In  fact,  the  populace  knew  nothing  about  the  death  of 
the  prior  incumbent  until  the  successor  had  been  duly 
installed  in  office.  The  Lord  of  Hikone  had  again  car- 
ried the  day,  and  the  little  Prince  of  Kii-shiu  was  now 
the  “Ruler  of  the  Four  Coasts  ” and  the  “Barbarian- 
Exterminating  Lord.”  His  Lordship  continued  on  as  the 
Gotairo,  and  could  afford  to  smile  upon  his  enemies,  who 
sneered  at  him  as  the  “ swaggering  Prime-Minister.” 
Truly  he  had  carried  matters  with  a high  hand,  and  had 
done  most  unprecedented  things  that  had  filled  the  hearts 
of  the  conservative  Daimios  wuth  rage  and  fear. 

On  the  day  following  the  death  of  his  liege  lord,  as  set 
forth  in  the  preceding  chapter,  the  Gotairo  succeeded  in 
extracting  from  the  attendants  at  the  palace  evidence 
that  criminated  the  old  Prince  of  Mito.  Popular  rumor 
alleged  the  use  of  torture,  and  it  is  not  unlikely  that  such 
measures  wrere  resorted  to  by  this  bold  and  desperate 
man.  At  all  events,  depositions  w'ere  procured  by  some 
means  or  other  to  the  effect  that  the  luckless  Iyesada  had 
come  to  his  death  by  poison  administered  at  the  instiga- 
tion of  the  old  Prince.  Without  delay  the  Gotairo  sent 
notice  to  Mito  Yashiki,  ordering  that  old  gentleman  to 
retire  at  once  into  banishment  at  Mito, — for  reasons  best 
known  to  himself, — and  to  remain  there  in  close  confine- 
ment in  his  palace  until  permission  to  come  out  had  been 
decreed  by  the  Bakufu.  This  peremptory  mandate  was 


275 


276 


Mito  Yashiki. 


accompanied  with  a suggestive  intimation  that,  if  he  in- 
stantly obeyed,  matters  would  be  allowed  to  rest,  but 
that,  if  he  did  not  at  once  obey,  then  he  would  be  com- 
pelled to  perform  seppuku  (hara-kiri),  and  his  estates 
would  be  confiscated.  This  ominous  notice  it  was 
deemed  best  to  obey,  and  the  old  Prince  forthwith  de- 
parted from  Yedo,  vowing  eternal  vengeance  against  the 
wily  author  of  his  woes,  as  well  as  against  “ that  nest  of 
robbers,”  the  Bakufu.  When  the  choleric  old  gentleman 
arrived  at  his  place  of  exile,  he  allowed  his  wrath  to  ex- 
plode in  terms  of  unmeasured  denunciation  at  the  out- 
rageous indignity  imposed  upon  him,  and,  in  the  highly 
expressive  political  colloquialism  of  the  nineteenth  cen- 
tury, “ he  painted  the  town  red.”  The  reverberations  of 
his  wrath  reached  Yedo,  and  he  received  speedy  notice 
to  subside,  else  extreme  measures  would  be  taken  against 
him.  Pressed  against  the  Pacific  Ocean,  surrounded  by 
powerful  Tokugawa  clans,  with  fiery  Aidzu  on  the  north- 
west ready  to  swoop  down  on  him  like  a mighty  ava- 
lanche, his  position  was  indeed  isolated  and  defence- 
less. He  sulkily  subsided.  But  his  deep  mutterings 
reached  Kioto  through  underground  channels,  and  found 
the  imperial  ear  ready  to  listen  to  his  complaints. 

But  the  Gotairo  did  not  stop  here.  He  preferred 
charges  against  the  most  powerful  of  the  conservative 
Daimios  (even  Satsuma  and  Tosa),  and  commanded  that 
they  should  consider  themselves  under  arrest  and  impris- 
onment within  the  seclusion  of  their  respective  yashikis 
until  further  notice,  under  penalty  of  incurring  the  dire 
displeasure  of  the  Bakufu.  Loud,  angry,  and  ominous 
were  the  threatenings  of  the  enraged  clans  at  this  extra- 
ordinary action.  A less  intrepid  man  than  he  would 
have  quailed  before  the  storm  of  indignation  that  arose 
from  within  the  walls  of  almost  every  yashiki  in  Yedo. 
But,  unterrified,  he  steadily  pursued  his  course  and 
heeded  not  the  mutterings  of  the  tempest  that  he  had 
created. 

With  these  preliminary  steps  thus  energetically  taken, 
he  proceeded  to  convene  the  Daimios  with  a fair  chance 


Iyemochi. 


2 77 


of  winning  the  election.  His  manoeuvrings  would  have 
done  credit  to  the  methods  of  a modern  ward  caucus. 
How  admirably  convenient  to  be  able  thus  to  bottle  up 
your  opponents  until  after  the  campaign  ! Nevertheless, 
even  with  this  handicapping,  the  election  was  a most 
hotly  contested  one,  for  young  Hitotsubashi  was  not 
only  exceedingly  popular,  but  was  also  eminently  fitted 
for  the  office  both  by  maturity  and  ability.  Most  stub- 
bornly did  his  adherents  wage  battle  for  him  in  the  con- 
vention, and  most  eloquently  did  they  urge  that  the 
national  crisis  demanded  a man  and  not  a boy  at  the 
head  of  the  state.  Vain  ! When  the  tide  seemed  setting 
in  their  favor,  and  when  victory  seemed  almost  within 
their  grasp,  the  Gotairo  played  his  trump  card  and  won 
the  game.  He  asserted  that  Iy^sada  had  verbally 
designated  to  him  the  young  Prince  of  Kii-shiu  as  his 
heir  and  successor.  True,  no  formal  adoption  had  ever 
been  consummated,  but  the  wish  and  the  intention  to 
adopt  had  been  so  strongly  and  so  frequently  intimated, 
that  the  behest  must  be  looked  upon  as  a binding  will. 
Such  being  the  facts  in  the  case,  he  felt  called  upon  to 
see  that  the  wishes  of  his  late  master  were  scrupulously 
complied  with,  and  that  his  estates  and  his  succession 
should  revert  to  that  one  whom  he  had  manifestly  chosen 
to  inherit  them,  and  who,  but  for  an  unexpected  contin- 
gency, would  have  inherited  them. 

This  statement  overwhelmed  the  Daimios  with  amaze- 
ment and  confusion.  The  wishes  of  the  dead  are 
respected  in  all  lands.  And  when,  as  in  this  case,  those 
wishes  are  urged  for  adoption  by  a man  who  clearly  inti- 
mates that,  unless  they  are  adopted  peaceably,  then 
he  must  endeavor  to  enforce  them  with  all  the  power  at 
his  command,  the  chances  stand  decidedly  in  favor  of 
their  adoption.  In  the  present  case  they  were  adopted. 
The  shrewd  schemer  precipitated  the  balloting  just  as 
soon  as  he  had  played  his  trump  card  and  before  his  ad- 
versaries could  put  their  heads  together  for  consultation  ; 
and,  as  a very  natural  consequence,  the  young  Prince  of 
Kii-shiu  was  declared  elected.  The  little  fellow  was 


278 


Mito  Yashiki. 


brought  from  chasing  butterflies  and  flying  kites  in  the 
vast  enclosures  of  his  father’s  yashiki , and  was  duly 
installed  in  the  stately  halls  of  the  palace  amid  all  the 
pomp  and  circumstance  of  royal  power,  and  was  bowed 
down  to  and  reverenced  by  every  one  who  entered  his 
presence  as  Iyemochi  the  Shogun.  And  the  crestfallen 
Daimios  were  dismissed  to  their  respective  yashikis,  to 
chew  at  leisure  the  cud  of  bitter  reflection  over  this 
brilliant  illustration  of  how  the  realm  was  indeed  ruled 
by  one  master-mind,  and  how  helpless  they  all  were  to 
frustrate  the  ambitious  schemes  of  this  bold  man. 

The  Gotairo  then  announced  the  death  of  Iyesada  to 
the  public  and  allowed  the  people  to  manifest  whatever 
emotions  they  pleased.  The  English  and  the  American 
Ministers,  who  had  recently  come  to  Yedo  to  reside, 
were  duly  notified  of  the  event  and  were  allowed  to  send 
in  their  somewhat  tardy  condolences.  Lord  Elgin,  the 
Plenipotentiary  from  Great  Britain,  whose  fleet  had  been 
riding  at  anchor  before  the  city,  found  that  he  had  been 
negotiating  with  a Shogun  dead,  for  nobody  knew  how 
long  a time.  But  he  did  not  allow  this  Oriental  idiosyn- 
crasy to  disturb  his  diplomatic  relations,  and,  with  the 
sang-froid  of  an  experienced  hand,  he  proceeded  “ to 
sign,  to  seal,  and  to  deliver”  as  if  nothing  had  happened. 

Then  did  the  councillors  of  the  Gotairo  arrange  the 
household  matters  of  the  new  Shogun  after  a fashion  to 
suit  themselves.  There  was  a thorough  overhauling  of 
the  domestic  economy  of  the  entire  establishment.  In  the 
first  place,  all  the  attendants  of  their  late  master  sud- 
denly found  themselves  out  of  employment,  being  sum- 
marily dismissed  under  the  vague  charge  of  implied 
negligence  in  the  matter  of  the  sudden  death  of  Iyesada. 
Then  their  places  were  slowly  filled  with  persons  whose 
loyalty  could  not  be  in  any  way  doubted.  The  guards 
about  the  citadel  were  doubled.  And  the  gardens 
surrounding  the  palace  were  placed  under  the  surveil- 
lance of  the  keenest  spies.  So  thoroughly  did  the  coun- 
cillors perform  their  work,  that  the  new  treaties  of  that 
year,  granting  greater  concessions  to  foreigners  than  had 


Iyemochi.  2 79 

ever  yet  been  conceded,  were  not  followed  by  the  usual 
death  of  the  Shogun. 

Having  thus  rendered  his  position  almost  impregnable, 
the  Gotairo  turned  his  attention  to  punishing  his 
political  adversaries  in  Yedo  and  Kioto,  and  he  entered 
upon  one  of  the  bloodiest  and  most  cruel  campaigns  of 
vengence  on  record  in  Japanese  history.  He  arrested 
his  enemies  on  every  side  and  consigned  them  to  the 
blood-pit  and  to  disembowelment.  He  sent  orders  to  the 
commandant  of  the  Shiro  at  Kioto  to  arrest  and  send 
to  Yedo,  under  close  guard,  all  persons  known  to  be 
plotting  against  the  Shogun.  Thanks  to  his  vigilant  spies, 
he  knew  exactly  where  to  lay  his  hands.  Scores  of 
avowed  imperialists  were  arrested  and  forwarded  to 
Yedo,  where  some  were  beheaded  and  others  were 
granted  the  privilege  of  performing  seppuku , in  order  to 
save  their  estates  from  confiscation  and  their  families  and 
kindred  from  blood-attainder,  consequent  on  their  overt 
acts  of  treason.  The  old  Prince  of  Mito  was  ordered  to 
remain  in  perpetual  banishment.  He  was  also  compelled 
to  hand  over  all  authority  to  his  son.  Having  thus 
finished  off  his  more  formidable  enemies,  his  Lordship 
exultingly  turned  to  crush  the  ring  of  spies  that  had  so 
long  been  pestering  him  at  Mito  Yashiki.  With  the 
tiger’s  thirst  for  blood,  and  with  deep  rancor  long  goaded 
beyond  endurance  by  the  gadflies  that  had  so  long  buzzed 
about  his  ears,  he  set  out  upon  a campaign  of  inhuman 
atrocity,  in  order  not  only  to  gratify  his  thirst  for  revenge, 
but  also  to  strike  terror  into  the  fearless  spirits  that  had 
tampered  with  his  secret  plans. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 


THE  ENTERING  IN  OF  THE  WEDGE. 

In  the  spring  of  1859,  the  Gotairo  one  morning  was 
deeply  involved  in  consultation  with  his  councillors,  when 
a messenger  handed  to  him  a note  from  a gentleman 
waiting  at  the  gateway  of  the  yashiki.  After  reading  the 
note,  he  hastily  dismissed  his  cabinet  and  ordered  the 
attendant  to  usher  the  visitor  into  his  private  office. 

“Well,  sir  Fox,”  said  he,  good-humoredly,  when  the 
spy  (for  such  was  the  gentleman)  had  been  brought 
into  his  presence,  “have  you  succeeded  in  kidnapping 
your  man  ? ” 

“ I have,  most  honored  sir,”  modestly  replied  the  spy. 

“ Well  done  ! ” exclaimed  the  Gotairo.  “ Now  we  shall 
have  some  fine  sport  I can  assure  you.  Pray  how  did 
you  manage  the  matter  ? ” 

“ I heard  last  week  that  the  fellow  was  going  back  to 
Mito  with  some  horses  for  the  stables  of  the  old  Prince, 
so  I lay  in  wait  for  him  among  the  groves  beyond  the 
tombs  of  the  Shoguns,  north  of  the  suburbs,  and  arrested 
him  just  as  he  came  out  on  the  Mito-kaido." 

“ Was  he  alone  ? ” 

“ Entirely  so.” 

“ What,  then,  became  of  the  horses  ? ” 

“ I turned  them  loose  to  take  care  of  themselves,”  said 
he.  “They  will  wander  back  to  Mito  Yashiki,  and  the 
powers  there  can  puzzle  their  heads  over  the  spiriting 
away  of  their  bettd  at  their  leisure.” 

“Ha!  ha!”  chuckled  the  Gotairo,  as  he  gleefully 
rubbed  his  hand,  “ now  we  shall  soon  see  whether  we 
have  caught  the  right  man.  Does  Yamagata  still  fre- 
quent the  Yoshiwara  ? ” 


280 


The  Entering  in  of  the  Wedge. 


281 


“ He  does,  sir  ; and  whenever  he  becomes  exhilarated 
over  his  cups  he  invariably  launches  forth  into  that  same 
old  tale  that  he  has  been  rehearsing  down  there  for  the 
last  four  or  five  years,  about  his  wonderful  cleverness  in 
bleeding  a couple  of  high  officials  travelling  ne'bon  one 
dark  night  whilst  shadowing  the  fleet  of  Commodore 
Perry.  He  keeps  adding  to  the  amount  levied  on  those 
gentlemen  until  his  hearers  will  some  of  these  days 
gather  the  impression  that  he  struck  a gold  mine  that 
night.” 

“ Nevertheless,”  said  the  Gotairo,  “ the  bloated  fool 
has  given  me  the  clue  whereby  to  follow  up  the  assassin 
of  Shimidzu  the  spy.” 

“ I am  well  aware,  sir,  that  you  have  always  regarded 
that  tale  as  a clue  of  some  sort,  but  I must  confess  that 
I have  never  been  able  in  any  way  to  connect  it  with 
the  murder." 

“ Do  you  remember  the  testimony  of  the  fishermen 
near  Yokoska  ? ” 

“ Certainly,  sir.  They  said  that  two  Bakufu  officials 
stayed  there  several  weeks  about  the  time  of  Perry’s 
visit,  and  appeared  to  take  great  interest  in  the  fleet, 
visiting  it  in  their  boat  at  all  hours  of  the  day  and  night. 
They  also  said  that  the  young  men  were  in  the  habit  of 
climbing  the  neighboring  hills  and  spending  hours  in 
watching  the  vessels.  But  how  does  that  connect  them 
with  the  murder  of  Shimidzu  ? Surely  sa?nurai  travel- 
ling nebon  would  not  ruthlessly  slay  an  inoffensive  gen- 
tleman sight-seeing  like  themselves.” 

“Very  true,”  said  the  Gotairo,  “but  the  testimony  of 
the  villagers  further  stated  that  one  afternoon,  when  one 
of  those  young  men  came  back  from  a solitary  tour 
among  the  hills,  he  reported  himself  so  badly  injured 
from  a fall  that  it  would  be  necessary  at  once  to  leave 
for  home,  in  order  to  consult  a physician,  and  that  forth- 
with they  all  hurried  off  that  very  night.  About  two 
weeks  after  their  departure,  Shimidzu’s  body  was  dis- 
covered on  a neighboring  hill-top,  having  evidently 
been  slain  in  single  combat  with  somebody.  It  always 


282 


Mito  Yashiki. 


seemed  extraordinary  to  me  that  he  should  have  fought 
on  that  lonely  hill,  so  I visited  the  place  and  clearly 
saw  that  he  must  have  walked  inadvertently  into  a trap, 
and  was  compelled  to  fight  for  his  life.” 

“ But,  sir,  at  that  time  many  of  our  Yedo  people  went 
down  the  bay  nebon 

“Very  true,  but  the  two  men  shadowing  the  fleet  wore 
the  Tokugawa  crest,  according  to  this  Yamagata.  There- 
fore they  belonged  to  the  Gosank/,  for  I know  that  none 
of  the  Bakufu  officials  were  down  there.  This  limits  the 
investigation  to  the  three  clans  of  Kii,  Owari,  and  Mito. 
I am  on  good  terms  with  Kii,  and  know  that  none  of 
their  men  were  down  there.  The  issue,  then,  is  nar- 
rowed down  between  Owari  and  Mito.  I am  reasonably 
certain  that  no  Owari  men  were  down  there.  Therefore 
during  nearly  five  years  I have  confined  my  investiga- 
tions to  Mito.  My  theory  is  that  the  old  Prince  sent 
these  men  down  the  bay  to  spy  out  the  foreign  fleet,  and 
that  Shimidzu,  in  some  unknown  manner,  got  wind  of 
the  matter  and  started  down  to  catch  them,  and  that  he 
inadvertently  came  upon  one  of  them  on  that  lonely 
hill-top,  and,  being  recognized,  was  obliged  to  fight  to 
the  death.  At  any  rate,  the  animus  of  Mito  makes  my 
theory  seem  very  plausible. 

“ Now,  the  people  at  Mito  Yashiki  are  so  exceedingly 
close-mouthed  that  I have  not  been  'able  during  these 
years  to  obtain  a single  clue.  Every  batch  of  the  rollick- 
ing blades  that  has  visited  the  Yoshiwara  has  been  shad- 
owed by  my  most  expert  spies,  and  not  a single  com- 
promising word  has  ever  passed  over  their  cups.  This 
convinced  me  that  they  knew  nothing  about  the  matter, 
and  that  it  was  a close  secret  limited  to  a few  persons 
within  the  yashiki , and  that  those  individuals  were  evi- 
dently not  in  the  habit  of  visiting  the  Yoshiwara.  This 
limited  me  to  a very  small  circle  indeed,  as  you  may 
well  imagine.  I have  long  known  that  the  two  sons  of 
Nakashima  from  Yamashiro  were  studious  young  men, 
not  given  to  corrupt  practices,  and  that  they  have  always 
been  exceedingly  interested  in  the  affairs  of  foreigners. 


The  Entering  in  of  the  Wedge.  283 


Furthermore,  they  are  exceedingly  expert  swordsmen. 
The  slayer  of  Shimidzu  must  indeed  have  been  expert ! 
But  just  at  this  point  I am  non-plussed.  It  seems  mani- 
fest that  the  antagonist  of  Shimidzu  must  have  been  a 
left-handed  person.  But  both  of  these  young  men  are 
right-handed  men  ! But  for  this  fact  I should  have  laid 
hands  on  them  long  ago.  But  I think  that  we  shall 
catch  them  this  time.  If  they  be  so  close-mouthed  in 
Yedo,  perhaps  they  are  a little  more  communicative 
when  they  visit  their  homes  in  Yamashiro.  It  occurred 
to  me  some  time  ago  that  the  human  propensity  to  brag 
and  to  swagger  might  manifest  itself  in  the  bosom  of 
one’s  family  when  it  did  not  show  itself  away  from  home. 
And  now  we  shall  see  what  this  clever  bettb  has  heard 
during  his  frequent  visits  to  Yamashiro.  Where  have  you 
put  him  ? ” 

“ He  is  at  the  guard-house  beside  your  gateway,  in  the 
care  of  my  two  assistants.” 

“ Bring  him  in  at  once.” 

Within  ten  minutes  the  pale  and  trembling  bettS,  filled 
with  a nameless  fear  at  the  uncertainty  that  clouded  the 
reasons  for  his  arrest,  came  slowly  into  the  dread  presence 
of  the  Gotairo,  where  he  prostrated  himself  in  the  grov- 
elling fashion  that  characterized  the  salutation  of  the 
plebeian  in  those  days  of  despotic  oligarchy. 

“ Bid  the  fellow  sit  up,”  commanded  the  Gotairo.  An 
attendant  forthwith  punched  the  prostrate  form  in  the 
back  with  a stick,  saying  : “ You  are  bidden  to  arise  ! ” 
Then  the  attendants  took  their  positions, — one  on  each 
side  of  him  and  one  behind  him, — and  tapped  his  bare 
pate  with  sticks  whenever  his  answers  came  slowly  and 
his  ideas  seemed  to  need  enlivening.  When  the  unhappy 
fellow  sat  up,  he  found  himself  looking  into  the  keen 
eyes  of  the  Gotairo,  who  cast  upon  him  a fierce  look 
that  smote  him  with  terror.  Those  snapping  gray  eyes 
seemed  to  pierce  his  very  soul. 

“Fellow!”  said  his  Lordship,  in  severe  tones,  “in 
affairs  of  this  kind  the  safety  of  the  culprit  always  depends 
upon  the  truthfulness  of  his  replies.  Let  that  one 


284 


Mito  Yashiki. 


tremble  who  dares  to  conceal  facts,  or  to  prevaricate 
when  I question  him.” 

“ Tremble,  indeed  ! ” groaned  the  attendants,  in  har- 
rowing tones  as  they  mildly  punched  the  culprit  in  the 
back,  and  gently  tapped  his  head  to  emphasize  his  Lord- 
ship’s awful  statement. 

“ Know,  then,”  continued  the  Gotairo,  “ that  satisfac- 
tory answers  must  be  given  to  all  of  the  interrogatories 
that  will  now  be  put  to  you,  and  that  false  and  careless 
replies  will  entail  nameless  miseries  and  profound  an- 
guish.” 

“ Lay  this  well  to  heart,  fellow  ! ” moaned  the  assist- 
ants in  doleful  accents,  as  they  proceeded  to  emphasize 
as  before. 

The  luckless  culprit  murmured  his  willingness  to 
answer  all  questions,  and  replied  falteringly  to  a long 
series  of  inquiries  as  to  his  name,  birth-place,  age,  kin- 
dred, occupation,  and  so  forth.  A brief  summary  of  his 
replies  divulged  that  he  was  Kochiki  Bandu,  of  the  city 
of  Mito,  aged  thirty  years,  a betto  by  birth  and  by  choice. 
Thus  far  his  answers  had  been  entirely  satisfactory  to  the 
dread  tribunal,  and  no  enlivening  of  ideas  had  been 
necessary.  But  as  his  remorseless  interlocutors  plunged 
deeper  into  matters  concerning  which  he,  in  his  con- 
fidential relations  to  the  Nakashimas,  had  become  con- 
versant, the  interview  became  much  less  cheerful.  By  a 
long  series  of  questions  the  Gotairo  had  elicited  from 
him  the  fact  that,  in  the  beginning  of  1854,  he  had  ac- 
companied the  two  young  men  on  a trip  to  Mito,  and 
that  after  several  weeks  he  had  returned  with  them.  But 
he  was  unable  to  give  any  information  as  to  where  his 
young  masters  had  gone  during  the  interim, — except  that 
he  supposed  that  they  had  amused  themselves  at  the  sea- 
shore villa,  where  he  left  them  while  he  tarried  in  the 
town  of  Mito. 

The  unfeigned  exultation  with  which  the  Gotairo  re- 
ceived this  information  revealed  to  the  bettb  that  his 
terrible  inquisitor  was  upon  the  track  of  his  young 
masters  and  not  upon  his  own  track.  His  little  black 


The  Entering  in  of  the  Wedge.  285 

eyes  saw  far  deeper  than  anybody  credited  them  with 
seeing  ; and,  behind  the  mask  of  his  stolid  features,  he 
was  taking  in  the  situation  and  maturing  his  course  of 
action.  Now,  beneath  the  boorish  exterior  of  this  man, 
there  dwelt  a kind  and  a brave  heart.  He  was  bound  to 
the  Mito  clan  by  sentiments  of  loyalty  and  affection. 
His  ancestors  for  many  generations  had  served  the 
house  of  Mito  in  the  capacity  of  bettds,  and  had  received 
kind  and  considerate  treatment.  An  unwritten  law  of 
honor  bound  him  to  the  masters  of  whose  salt  he  had 
partaken.  In  addition  to  this,  the  kind  and  generous 
treatment  that  he  had  received  from  the  entire  Naka- 
shima  family  had  kindled  within  his  simple  mind  feelings 
of  gratitude  and  sincere  affection.  And  now,  when  he 
clearly  saw  from  the  trend  of  the  questions  that  his 
replies  were  manifestly  getting  his  young  masters  into 
trouble,  he  determined  to  suppress  and  to  equivocate. 
He  well  knew  that  he  had  overheard  at  Atago-Yama  suf- 
ficient confidential  matter  to  condemn  the  young  men  to 
a cruel  death,  if  divulged  before  this  heartless  tribunal.  At 
first  he  denied  having  accompanied  the  young  men  on 
their  trips  home.  But  his  Lordship  coolly  informed  him 
that  he  himself  had  seen  him  on  the  first  trip  about  half- 
way down  the  Nakasendo , and  that  his  subsequent  visits 
could  be  proved  by  a witness  on  hand.  Addressing  an 
attendant  he  ordered  him  to  usher  in  Mr.  Honda.  Very 
soon  a tall,  well-dressed  samurai  responded  to  the  sum- 
mons, and  came  in  and  sat  down  where  all  could  clearly 
see  him. 

“ Do  you  recognize  this  gentleman  ? ” said  the  Gotairo, 
softly,  as  he  exultingly  beamed  upon  the  astonished 
bettd. 

“ I do,  most  revered  sir,”  faltered  that  luckless  indi- 
vidual. 

“ Who  is  he,  then  ? ” 

“ It  is  he  who  formerly  kept  a stand  for  fruit  and 
confectionery  beside  the  road  that  entered  the  glen  of 
Atago-Yama,”  replied  the  crestfallen  culprit. 

“ Precisely  so,  fellow  ! ” thundered  the  Gotairo  ; “ and 


286 


Mito  Yashiki. 


he  has  seen  you  on  every  occasion  that  you  went  there  in 
company  with  your  young  masters.  He  is  my  pet  spy. 
It  is  manifest  that  you  are  not  giving  heed  to  my  admo- 
nition about  veracity.  Be  admonished  now  to  adhere 
henceforth  to  rigid  and  exact  statements.  Failing  in 
this,  you  shall  feel  my  power  in  unpleasant  ways  ! ” 

“Take  heed  and  tremble  ! ” shrieked  the  chorus  of 
assistants,  as  they  proceeded  to  admonish  him  with  a 
series  of  sharp  taps  and  vicious  punches. 

But  the  poor  fellow  had  more  pluck  than  they  credited 
him  with  possessing.  His  regard  for  his  masters  was  so 
great,  and  his  sense  of  gratitude  and  loyalty  was  so  strong, 
that  he  determined  to  adopt  the  perilous  course  of  keep- 
ing his  mouth  shut  about  every  thing  pertaining  to  his 
visits  to  Atago-Yama.  The  same  spirit  that  is  shown  by 
the  North  American  Indian  while  under  torture  is  fre- 
quently found  in  the  Japanese  nature.  That  admirable 
vein  of  fortitude  and  endurance  crops  out  among  all 
classes  at  the  most  unexpected  times.  Bandu,  the  betto, 
belonged  to  this  type.  In  vain  did  the  whacks  rain  down 
upon  his  defenceless  head.  In  vain  did  blows  and  punches 
descend  upon  his  poor  shoulders  and  back.  He  remained 
as  mute  as  an  oyster  whenever  the  questions  related  to 
the  visits  of  his  young  masters  to  their  home.  His  Lord- 
ship  wheedled,  badgered,  and  bullied  to  no  purpose. 
Smiles,  cajoleries,  and  threats  were  all  thrown  away.  In 
a moment  of  extreme  wrath  his  Lordship  so  far  forgot  his 
dignity  as  to  draw  forth  his  fan  from  his  belt  and  smite 
the  sulky  culprit  a stinging  blow  on  the  cheek.  All  in 
vain  ! The  man  was  obdurate. 

“ It  is  manifest,”  said  his  Lordship,  finally,  in  savage 
tones,  “ that  we  shall  be  compelled  to  put  our  questions 
under  less  comfortable  surroundings.  Adjourn  to  the 
warehouse  ! ” 

This  warehouse  was  a large  fire-proof  godowrt,  built 
into  a distant  wing  of  the  palace  in  order  to  store  valu- 
ables in  case  .of  fire.  Its  immensely  thick  walls  and 
massive  flanged  doors  fitted  it  admirably  for  a dungeon 
and  a torture-chamber.  Cries  and  groans  would  not 


The  Entering  in  of  the  Wedge. 


287 


reach  far  beyond  its  solid  masonry.  Of  late  it  had  wit- 
nessed the  agonies  of  many  political  offenders.  In  about 
half  an  hour  the  tribunal  reassembled  within  the  dark 
chamber  of  the  godown, — the  judge  and  his  associates 
having  refreshed  themselves  betimes  with  some  hot, 
spiced  sakt,  wherewith  to  restore  their  shaken  equipoise. 
They  seated  themselves  on  a little  platform  at  the  farther 
end  of  the  gloomy  vault,  and  ordered  the  culprit  to 
be  brought  in  for  further  questionings.  The  dim  candles 
flickered  in  a ghostly  fashion  as  the  poor  fellow  was  led 
into  the  sepulchral  place  by  two  fierce-looking  torment- 
ors, whose  naturally  savage  features  had  been  painted 
and  blackened  in  a hideous  manner,  in  order  to  strike 
terror  into  the  heart  of  the  timid  peasant.  The  Gotairo 
did  not  condescend  to  put  the  questions  in  person,  but 
handed  a written  list  of  interrogatories  to  the  inquisitors, 
who  savagely  shouted  them  forth  at  the  culprit,  and 
menacingly  demanded  answers  thereto.  There  was  no 
response.  Then,  with  fierce  imprecations,  they  rushed 
upon  their  trembling  victim  and  roughly  removed  the 
cords  that  bound  his  arms  and  hands.  Then  they  rudely 
stripped  him,  and  laid  him  face  downward  on  the  ground. 
Calling  a couple  of  assistants,  they  directed  one  of  them 
to  hold  his  head  down,  and  ordered  the  other  one  to 
press  his  toes  close  together  on  the  ground,  while  holding 
the  heels  as  far  apart  as  possible, — a position  in  itself 
painful.  Then  the  tormentors,  with  rods  in  their  hands, 
stood,  one  on  each  side  of  the  victim,  and  thundered 
forth  the  final  question  : 

“ Base-born  fellow  ! Do  you  still  refuse  to  answer  the 
questions  put  to  you  ? ” 

There  was  no  reply.  Then  the  luckless  fellow  was 
most  unmercifully  flogged  from  neck  to  heels.  His  pluck 
was  indeed  admirable.  Nothing  but  a few  groans  indi- 
cated his  anguish.  Whenever  he  writhed  in  his  agony 
the  cruel  assistants  crowded  his  face  into  the  ground  and 
violently  wrenched  his  heels  from  side  to  side,  thus  add- 
ing sprained  joints  to  the  torture  of  the  mangled  back. 
Fully  two  hundred  blows  had  poured  down  before  a stop 


288 


Mito  Yashiki. 


was  called.  He  still  refused  to  answer.  It  was  manifest 
that  the  man  would  permit  himself  to  be  beaten  to  death 
before  any  answer  could  be  elicited.  This  was  not  what 
the  Gotairo  desired.  “ That  will  do  for  to-day,”  said  he. 
“To-morrow  you  may  apply  the  copper  moxa  to  the  raw 
spots  on  his  body.  Perhaps  that  course  of  treatment 
will  loosen  his  tongue  a bit.”  Accordingly,  the  court 
adjourned. 

On  the  morrow  the  court  again  convened  in  thegodown. 
The  miserable  betto  was  carried  in,  for  he  was  too  stiff 
and  lame  to  walk.  Again  the  tormentors  shouted  at  him 
the  interrogatories  of  the  previous  day.  Again  did  he 
refuse  to  answer.  And  again  was  he  stripped  and  thrown 
flat  on  his  face.  A glowing  hebachi  holding  an  iron  pot 
brimful  of  molten  copper  was  then  brought  in.  While 
the  assistants  held  the  wretched  fellow  down,  the  tor- 
menting fiends  dipped  forth  small  quantities  of  the  hor- 
rible fluid  and  poured  it  upon  the  raw  spots  on  his  poor 
back.  But  the  only  response  that  they  could  elicit  was  a 
heartrending  groan.  With  devilish  deliberation  they 
applied  moxa  after  moxa , but  with  the  same  unsatisfactory 
results.  It  soon  became  manifest  that  the  fellow  would 
allow  himself  to  be  burnt  to  death  before  he  would  reveal 
any  information  damaging  to  his  masters. 

“ That  will  do  for  the  moxa”  finally  exclaimed  the 
Gotairo,  “ now  apply  the  stomach  test,  and  let  him  die 
under  that  if  he  chooses  so  to  do.” 

This  stomach  test  was  a horrible  form  of  torture  in- 
vented during  the  days  of  persecution  against  the  Jesuits. 
The  victim  was  thrown  on  his  back  and  held  down.  A 
funnel  was  then  thrust  down  his  throat  and  water  was 
forced  into  his  stomach  until  it  was  full.  Then  a board 
was  laid  across  his  body  just  over  the  distended  member, 
and  a man  would  jump  upon  it  with  all  his  might,  thus 
causing  water  and  blood  to  gush  from  the  victim’s  nose, 
mouth,  and  ears,  causing  the  most  excruciating  agony. 
This  operation  would  be  repeated  again  and  again,  until 
the  unhappy  wretch  either  recanted  or  died.  'Now,  this 
bcttb  would  probably  have  stood  any  amount  of  external 


The  Entering  in  of  the  JVedge.  289 


torture,  and  have  died  under  it,  rather  than  to  have  re- 
vealed any  thing  detrimental  to  his  young  masters  ; but  he 
was  filled  with  a peasant’s  superstitious  horror  at  having 
his  internal  organs  tampered  with.  When  the  funnel 
was  thrust  down  his  throat  and  he  perceived  the  devilish 
atrocity  of  the  torment  about  to  be  inflicted  on  him,  then 
arose  in  his  mind  a feeling  of  undefined  terror  at  having 
the  mysterious  organs  of  his  existence  wrenched,  rup- 
tured, and  mangled  in  this  horrible  manner.  In  his  ig- 
norance he  conjured  up  agonies  not  only  more  painful 
than  what  he  had  already  endured,  but  also  anguish  of 
an  unknown  description,  concerning  which  he  could  form 
no  conception  in  his  mind.  He  had  defied  that  which 
was  known,  but  he  surrendered  to  that  which  was  un- 
known. He  therefore  made  a sign,  and  the  funnel  was 
withdrawn. 

“ What  do  you  wish  to  say  ? ” inquired  the  torturers. 

“ I will  answer  the  questions,”  was  the  feeble  reply. 

“ The  culprit  consents  to  answer  your  Lordship’s  ques- 
tions,” reported  the  tormentors. 

“ Then  remove  him  at  once  to  my  private  office,  and 
let  us  note  his  replies,”  was  the  brief  response. 

In  a few  minutes  the  conclave  reassembled,  and  the 
unhappy  culprit  was  laid  on  his  face  before  the  inquisi- 
tors. The  Gotairo  took  up  the  list  of  interrogatories,  and 
proceeded  to  catechise. 

“ Have  you  ever  heard  the  two  elder  sons  of  Naka- 
shima,  during  their  visits  to  Atago-Yama,  tell  about  any 
extraordinary  experience  or  exploit  in  or  about  Yedo  ?” 
was  the  first  question. 

“ I have,”  was  the  reply. 

“ Clearly  state  what  you  heard.” 

“On  the  night  of  Tomokichi’s  wedding  I heard  him 
state  to  his  father  that  Junzo  had  killed  in  terrific  com- 
bat a Bakufu  spy.” 

“ Well,  what  else  ? ” 

“ When  Junzo  went  down  on  the  occasion  of  his  wed- 
ding I heard  the  family  inquiring  about  the  particulars  of 
the  affair,  He  told  them  that  he  and  his  brother  had  been 


290 


Mito  Yashiki. 


sent  by  the  old  Prince  of  Mito  to  shadow  the  American 
fleet  in  Yedo  bay,  and  that  while  so  engaged  he  one  day 
met  the  famous  spy  Shimidzu,  on  a hill-top  near  some 
woods,  and  that  he  killed  him  after  a long  fight,  in  order 
to  shut  his  mouth.  On  one  or  two  occasions  I have 
heard  the  family  discussing  the  matter.” 

“ Is  Junzo  a left-handed  man  ?” 

“ No,  but  he  is  equally  skilful  with  either  hand.  I 
have  heard  him  say  that  in  that  combat  he  held  his  left- 
handed  stroke  in  reserve,  and  then  suddenly  delivered  it 
at  an  unexpected  moment,  and  gashed  Shimidzu  across 
the  bowels  from  right  to  left.  He  is  celebrated  at  Mito 
Yashiki  for  this  peculiar  stroke.” 

“ I understand  every  thing  now,”  graciously  responded 
his  Lordship.  “ Remove  the  culprit  to  the  dungeon,  and 
keep  him  there  under  close  guard  until  I send  for  him.” 

Like  a bloodhound  that  has  caught  the  scent,  so  sped 
the  Gotairo  on  the  track  of  his  victims.  He  at  once  sent 
a messenger  to  Mito  Yashiki,  requesting  young  Konishi 
and  the  two  sons  of  Mr.  Nakashima  to  call  on  him  at  his 
yashiki  in  reference  to  some  business  of  importance.  He 
had  rightly  conjectured  that  their  suspicions  had  not  yet 
been  aroused,  and  that  it  would  not  occur  to  them  that 
the  notice  was  any  thing  more  than  to  do  some  translat- 
ing for  the  Bakufu.  His  surmises  were  sound.  The 
messenger  delivered  his  message  at  the  gateway  of  the 
yashiki , where  it  did  not  excite  any  thing  more  than  a 
passing  comment.  The  note  was  then  duly  forwarded  to 
the  Konishi  lodge,  where  it  found  Tomokichi  and  young 
Konishi  playing  chess.  Junzo  was  down  on  the  parade 
ground  and  had  to  be  sent  for.  Within  an  hour  they  all 
met  at  the  main  gateway,  where  the  messenger  awaited 
them.  Interchanging  a few  bantering  remarks  with  their 
friends  as  to  the  probability  of  their  notice  being  the 
harbinger  of  promotion  to  some  fat  office,  they  started 
down  the  hill,  crossed  the  moat,  and  walked  straight  into 
the  trap. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 


THE  CAT  PLAYS  WITH  THE  MOUSE. 

As  soon  as  our  young  friends  stepped  within  the  gate- 
way of  Hikon£  Yashiki,  the  heavy  portals  were  closed 
behind  them,  and  they  were  requested  to  step  into  the 
guard-room.  Somewhat  surprised  at  such  unusual  pro- 
ceedings, they  nevertheless  did  as  they  were  directed  to 
do.  Presently  ten  samurai  came  into  the  room,  and 
ranged  themselves  around  its  sides,  so  as  to  completely 
surround  the  visitors,  who  were  demurely  sitting  in  the 
middle  of  the  floor  warming  their  hands  over  a hebachi. 
Nothing  was  said,  and  no  salutations  were  interchanged. 
In  about  five  minutes  three  gentlemen  of  forbidding 
aspect  came  in  bearing  huge  bundles  of  stout  hempen 
cord  in  their  hands.  Bowing  low,  they  demanded  of  the 
three  young  men  the  surrender  of  their  swords,  which 
were  reluctantly  handed  over  without  comment.  After 
having  complied  with  this  order  they  were  directed  to 
stand  up  and  permit  themselves  to  be  bound.  At  this 
juncture  the  strangeness  of  the  proceedings  caused 
Konishi  to  exclaim  that  they  were  being  made  prisoners 
for  some  unknown  reason.  “Oh,  no,  indeed,”  replied  the 
gentlemen  in  waiting  ; “ you  are  merely  to  be  the  hon- 
ored guests  of  the  Lord  of  Hikone  for  a brief  period.” 

“You  will  kindly  excuse  our  rudeness,”  said  the  three 
jailers  (for  such  they  were)  as  they  unrolled  the  cord, 
“ but  we  are  acting  under  the  orders  of  our  master.  Our 
noble  lord  sometimes  honors  his  guests  after  an  extra- 
ordinary fashion.  Be  pleased  to  hold  forth  your  wrists 
in  order  that  we  may  tie  your  hands  together,  most  hon- 
orable sirs.” 


291 


292 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“We  fail  to  comprehend  the  meaning  of  such  actions,” 
said  Konishi,  with  affected  surprise  and  nonchalance. 

“ His  Lordship  will  soon  explain  matters  to  you,”  was 
the  reply.  “ Who  knows  but  what  this  is  merely  a prel- 
ude to  some  delightful  promotion?” 

“ Sure  enough  ! Who  knows  ? ” exclaimed  all  the 
samurai , as  they  bowed  low  in  mocking  salutation. 

It  took  fully  half  an  hour  to  perform  the  very  intricate 
operation  of  binding  the  prisoners.  First  the  wrists  were 
tied  so  tightly  together  as  to  nearly  stop  the  circulation 
of  the  blood.  Then  the  elbows  were  drawn  as  far  back 
as  possible  and  tied  together  behind  the  back  as  closely 
as  possible.  Then  a complicated  system  of  knots  and 
loops  was  woven  all  over  the  upper  part  of  their  bodies, 
so  that  it  appeared  as  if  a net  had  been  cast  about 
their  trunks.  These  knots  and  loops  were  drawn  so 
tight  that  respiration  became  difficult,  and  the  arms  and 
shoulders  became  almost  immovable.  The  position  was 
not  only  uncomfortable,  but  was  positively  painful. 
When  prisoners  have  been  left  bound  for  many  days 
there  have  been  instances  where  the  flesh  on  the  hands 
and  arms  has  mortified.  When  the  binding  had  been 
completed,  each  jailer  tied  a rope  about  the  neck  of  his 
charge  and  prepared  to  lead  him  out  of  the  guard-house 
into  the  presence  of  the  Gotairo.  In  the  meantime  the 
news  had  spread  like  wildfire  throughout  the  Yashiki  to 
the  effect  that  his  Lordship  having,  after  years  of  patient 
burrowing,  finally  unearthed  a nest  of  dangerous  Kioto 
spies  in  Mito  Yashiki,  was  going  to  amuse  himself  by 
perpetrating  one  of  his  grim  jokes  on  them  by  receiving 
them  as  if  they  were  imperial  ambassadors  worthy  of  dis- 
tinguished notice. 

When  the  prisoners  reached  the  courtyard  they  found 
an  elaborate  guard  of  honor  waiting  to  escort  them  to 
the  Gotairo’s  palace.  A trumpeter  sounded  the  signal, 
and  the  procession  took  up  its  line  of  march.  Throngs 
of  retainers  crowded  the  roadside,  and  showered  profuse 
salutations  with  mocking  humility  upon  the  unfortunate 
ones.  Everybody  caught  the  spirit  of  the  huge  jest  with 


The  Cat  Plays  with  the  Mouse. 


293 


that  marvellous  readiness  of  impersonation  so  prominent 
in  the  Japanese  character,  and  profound  bowings  and 
scrapings  were  showered  upon  the  party  as  if  they 
indeed  were  ambassadors,  and  not  culprits,  whose  ap- 
pearance presented  a laughable  contrast  to  the  elaborate 
ceremony  of  their  mocking  reception.  With  due  decorum 
the  young  men  were  slowly  led  by  their  jailers  through 
the  maze  of  courtiers  up  to  the  main  entrance  of  the 
palace.  Here  they  were  reverently  received  by  the 
entire  staff  of  councillors,  all  dressed  in  regalia  costume. 
It  took  them  fully  five  minutes  to  sufficiently  humble 
themselves  in  the  presence  of  such  renowned  personages 
as  their  visitors  presumably  were.  The  contrast  pre- 
sented by  the  crestfallen  and  forlorn  appearance  of  the 
prisoners  caused  the  immensity  of  the  joke  to  dawn  with 
such  power  upon  the  crowds  of  retainers  flocking  about 
the  entrance  that  they  could  no  longer  suppress  their 
merriment,  but  exploded  in  fits  of  jeering  laughter,  which 
swelled  into  roars  of  derision  as  it  was  communicated  to 
the  outside  mob. 

The  prisoners  were  then  escorted  through  long  corri- 
dors and  lofty  suites  of  chambers,  where  the  household 
attendants  carried  out  the  colossal  jest  of  receiving  im- 
perial ambassadors  from  Kioto  by  prostrating  themselves 
on  the  floor  as  the  solemn  procession  stalked  majestically 
along.  After  endless  marchings  and  countermarchings 
for  the  sport  of  the  palace,  the  jailers  finally  led  their 
prisoners  into  the  private  office  of  the  Gotairo,  who 
arose  to  meet  them  with  the  most  elaborate  exhibition  of 
the  profoundest  respect.  Bidding  them  to  be  seated 
upon  some  elegant  cushions,  he  ordered  an  attendant  to 
set  tea  and  tobacco  before  them.  The  drollery  of  this 
bit  of  humor  was  too  good  to  keep  within  the  palace,  and 
was  speedily  communicated  to  the  barracks,  where  shouts 
of  immoderate  laughter  greeted  the  announcement  of  how 
his  Lordship  had  set  refreshments  before  fellows  who 
could  not  even  brush  away  the  flies  that  tickled  their 
noses  ; and  he  was  the  recipient  that  evening  from  the 
flunkies  of  the  palace  of  many  compliments  on  the 
extreme  brilliancy  of  his  most  amusing  paradox. 


294 


Mito  Yashiki. 


And  how  did  our  young  friends  take  all  this  bitter 
mockery  ? They  were  mortified  beyond  expression.  It 
was  bad  enough  to  be  ridiculed  by  strangers,  but  to  see 
the  faces  of  their  numerous  acquaintances  distorted  with 
derision  and  contempt  was  unendurable.  When  the  farce 
commenced  at  the  guard-room  they  had  not  time  to  make 
up  their  minds  as  to  the  meaning  of  the  strange  proceed- 
ings, but,  as  the  play  progressed,  they  overheard  remarks 
among  the  retainers  that  left  no  doubt  that  they  were 
under  arrest  on  the  charge  of  being  secret  spies  in  the 
service  of  the  Kioto  faction.  Gradually  the  grave 
seriousness  of  their  position  dawned  upon  them.  They 
had  no  opportunity  to  converse  with  one  another,  but  they 
all  came  to  the  same  conclusion  as  to  the  nature  of  the 
proceedings.  The  deep  blushes  of  intense  humiliation 
and  overwhelming  mortification  that  had  at  first  tinged 
their  cheeks  slowly  faded  into  the  blanched  pallor  of  sup- 
pressed fear  and  stern  resolve.  The  equipoise  that  had 
been  so  sadly  disturbed  in  the  guard-room  was  speedily 
regained  in  the  court-room.  From  behind  screens  and 
shades  his  Lordship  had  watched  with  intense  gratifica- 
tion the  shame  of  his  victims,  and,  when  he  perceived 
that  the  gibes  and  the  scoffs  of  his  retainers  were  begin- 
ning to  lose  their  force,  he  cut  short  further  teasing,  and 
ordered  the  prisoners  into  his  private  office,  where  he 
hoped  to  continue  the  sport  for  a while  longer.  He  well 
knew  that  he  could  not  have  chosen  a more  distressing 
method  of  revenge  than  to  badger  the  proud  and  sensitive 
spirits  in  his  power  by  such  refined  mockery  as  that  to 
which  he  was  subjecting  them,  and  he  purposed  keeping 
up  the  game  just  as  long  as  it  produced  the  desired 
effects. 

“ Most  honorable  gentlemen  from  Kioto,”  said  he,  in 
the  blandest  tones,  as  he  bowed  before  them,  “ permit  me 
to  congratulate  you  on  your  safe  arrival  after  your  long 
and  circuitous  journey.  Allow  me  to  express  the  hope 
that  your  health  may  continue  good  in  this  insignificant 
city,  and  that  you  may  successfully  prosecute  your 
mission  in  behalf  of  your  august  master  within  the  Gosho.” 


The  Cat  Plays  with  the  Mouse. 


295 


“ We  do  not  understand  you,  most  honorable  sir,”  re- 
plied Konishi,  putting  a bold  face  on  the  matter  in  order 
to  compel  his  Lordship  to  fall  back  on  his  proofs  to  meet 
this  plea  of  Not  Guilty. 

“ Oh  ! indeed,  do  you  not  ? ” exclaimed  his  Lordship, 
with  leering  eyes  and  sneering  lips. 

“ Indeed  we  do  not,”  was  the  reply.  “ We  are  the 
vassals  of  Tokugawa,  and  now  you  intimate  that  Tens/ii 
is  our  master.  Pray,  sir,  what  is  the  meaning  of  this 
unexpected  treatment  to  which  we  are  now  being  sub- 
jected ? ” 

“ Oh  ! indeed,  do  you  not  understand  that  ? ” slowly 
drawled  his  Lordship,  as  he  daintily  filled  his  pipe  and 
quizzically  ogled  his  prisoners  with  half-closed  eyes. 

“ Will  you  kindly  explain  this  matter  to  us  ? ” said 
Tomokichi. 

“ Oh  ! you  have  found  your  tongue,  have  you  ? ” said 
his  Lordship,  as  he  turned  a severe  look  on  him. 

“Sir,”  exclaimed  Junzo,  “there  must  be  a mistake 
somewhere  in  this  matter.  Will  you  kindly  explain  your 
action,  in  order  that  we  may  justify  ourselves  ? ” 

“ And  so  you  thought  it  about  time  for  you  to  com- 
mence your  little  speech,  did  you  ? ” replied  his  Lord- 
ship,  as  his  eyes  lit  up  with  a dangerous  glare.  “You 
also  are  hungering  after  an  explanation,  are  you  ? You 
must  be  very  obtuse,  young  man,  not  to  be  able  to  read 
the  signs  of  the  times.  Don’t  you  see  that  I am  tender- 
ing you  folks  a reception  as  the  accredited  envoys  of  his 
Imperial  Majesty,  the  Mikado  ? ” 

“ How  can  that  be,  sir,  since  we  are  in  the  employ  of 
the  Shogun,  and  have  been  so  employed  for  many  years 
past  ? ” exclaimed  Konishi,  with  a well-feigned  air  of 
bland  astonishment. 

“ Oh  ! you  gentlemen  speak  by  turns,  do  you  ? And 
it  has  swung  around  again  for  you  to  open  your  mouth, 
has  it  ? ” was  the  insulting  reply. 

Thus  did  the  Gotairo  chaff  and  dally  with  his  prison- 
ers for  fully  an  hour,  to  the  unbounded  amusement  of 
his  retainers.  Scores  of  listening  ears,  pressed  close  to 


296 


Mito  Yashiki. 


the  shojees,  caught  each  choice  repartee  and  reported  it 
to  the  courtiers  outside,  who  duly  published  the  brilliant 
saying  in  the  barracks  for  the  edification  of  their  com- 
rades. Sometimes  he  was  humorous  ; sometimes  severe. 
Sometimes  he  would  appear  on  the  point  of  making 
some  explanation,  when  the  spirit  would  suddenly  move 
him  to  branch  off  on  to  a line  of  cutting  sarcasm  and 
biting  irony  intended  to  crush  the  recipients  thereof  into 
abject  silence.  Sometimes  he  insulted  them.  Sometimes 
he  spoke  in  elaborate  riddles  or  lengthy  parables.  Some- 
times he  indulged  in  familiar  jests.  Sometimes  he  gave 
expression  to  harsh  and  gloomy  threats  of  mysterious 
torments.  But  the  young  men  adhered  to  their  policy 
of  demanding  an  opportunity  to  justify  themselves,  and 
would  neither  be  cowed  nor  silenced,  so  that  the  sport 
finally  lost  all  savor  of  interest.  In  addition  to  this,  his 
Lordship’s  supply  of  wit  was  becoming  rapidly  ex- 
hausted. At  last  he  smote  the  rim  of  the  hebachi  a 
sounding  blow  with  his  pipe  and  exclaimed  : 

“ So  it  is  an  explanation  that  you  fellows  want,  is  it  ? 
Well,  you  shall  have  it.  Dost  thou,  Junzo,  son  of 
Nakashima,  recognize  this  sword  that  I now  place  upon 
the  stand  before  thee  ? ” 

“ I fail  to  recognize  it,”  replied  Junzo,  after  looking 
at  it  carefully.  It  is  needless  to  remark  that  the  sword 
was  the  one  with  which  Shimidzu  the  spy  fought  his 
famous  duel.  As  a matter  of  fact,  Junzo  did  at  once 
recognize  it,  but  there  was  nothing  in  his  creed  of  moral 
ethics  to  prevent  his  prevaricating  under  the  somewhat 
foreboding  circumstances  that  environed  him. 

“ If  you  fail  to  recognize  the  sword,”  leered  his  Lord- 
ship,  “ perhaps  you  will  remember  the  circumstances 
under  which  you  murdered  its  possessor.” 

“ I do  not  understand  you,  sir.  I have  never  mur- 
dered anybody.  My  life  has  been  peacefully  spent  in 
Yamashiro,  and  in  attending  to  my  duties  at  Mito 
Yashiki.” 

“ Nevertheless,  you  went  down  the  bay  spying  out 
the  American  fleet  five  years  ago,”  replied  his  Lordship, 


The  Cat  Plays  with  the  Mouse.  297 

fastening  his  piercing  eyes  upon  the  young  man  with  a 
searching  gaze.  This  unexpected  announcement  might 
have  thrown  a less  ready  antagonist  into  confusion.  But 
Junzo  betrayed  not  the  slightest  trace  of  surprise,  and 
he  returned  the  gaze  with  a look  of  bland  innocence 
and  said  : 

“ You  are  mistaken,  sir.  I never  went  on  any  such 
expedition.” 

“ Nevertheless,  you  did  do  so.  And,  furthermore, 
when  caught  on  the  hill-top  by  my  spy  you  foully  slew 
him  and  concealed  his  body  and  sword  in  the  adjacent 
woods.” 

“ I deny  this  most  respectfully.” 

“ Nevertheless,  you  did  do  so.  And,  furthermore, 
you  boasted  of  the  act  in  the  presence  of  witnesses.” 

“Never  having  done  the  act,  it  would  have  been  im- 
possible for  me  to  have  boasted  of  it.” 

“ Perhaps  this  little  document  will  refresh  your  mem- 
ory,” said  his  Lordship,  as  he  spread  out  before  his  eyes 
the  confession  of  the  luckless  bettd. 

Junzo  read  it  with  a terrible  sensation  of  fear  at  his 
heart.  But,  after  a careful  perusal,  failing  to  see  any 
name  attached  thereto,  he  concluded  that  it  would  be 
best  to  put  in  a bold  denial  of  its  truthfulness. 

“ I do  not  know  what  this  paper  means.  It  is  quite 
true  that  I have  been  to  Kioto  on  visits  during  the  last 
three  or  four  years.  It  is  also  true  that  I described  the 
exciting  incidents  of  my  Yedo  life  to  my  friends.  But 
no  such  story  as  that  contained  here  ever  passed  my 
lips.  This  thing  is  a pure  fabrication.” 

“ Perhaps  this  distinguished  gentleman  here  is  also  a 
pure  fabrication,”  sweetly  replied  his  Lordship,  as  he 
drew  aside  a screen  and  showed  the  unhappy  bettd  held 
up  by  two  stout  samurai. 

It  would  be  very  difficult  to  describe  the  exact  feel- 
ings of  our  young  friends,  when  they  recognized  in  the 
pale  and  pitiful  countenance  before  them  the  features  of 
their  bettd.  In  a brief  period  of  time  their  minds  had 
travelled  over  much  ground,  and  speedily  arrived  at  the 


2gS 


Mito  Yashiki. 


same  conclusions  as  to  what  course  of  action  to  pursue. 
To  all  outward  appearances  they  were  cool  and  self- 
possessed,  yet  at  heart  they  were  faint  and  sick  as  the 
utter  hopelessness  of  their  position  dawned  upon  them. 
The  Duke  of  Wellington  defined  a brave  man  as  one 
who  clearly  perceives  his  danger,  yet  faces  it.  In  the 
light  of  this  definition  our  young  friends  were  indeed 
brave,  for  during  five  years  they  had  faced  the  perils  of 
their  situation,  and  now  when  entrapped  by  their  crafty 
enemy  they  intrepidly  faced  torture  and  death.  For 
years  past  they  had  again  and  again  discussed  their  line 
of  action  in  case  of  detection.  They  well  knew  that 
the  detection  of  any  one  of  them  would  involve  the 
conviction  of  all  of  them,  and  so  they  had  planned  that 
in  case  any  one  of  them  should  be  caught,  that  then  the 
others  should  at  once  become  ronins  and  fly  to  the 
mountains  of  the  interior,  and  organize  bands  of  ronins 
to  prey  on  the  Bakufu  at  all  points,  and  to  annoy  them 
as  much  as  possible.  By  becoming  ronins  they  for- 
mally severed  their  allegiance  with  the  Prince  of  Mito, 
and  thus  absolved  him  from  all  responsibility  for  their 
acts.  In  case  all  of  them  should  be  caught  at  the  same 
time,  they  had  decided  to  stand  and  fall  together  with- 
out implicating  any  one  else. 

That  time  had  now  arrived.  During  the  past  year 
Konishi  had  noticed  a growing  coldness  on  the  part  of 
the  Gotairo  toward  himself,  and  had  felt  that  the  eyes 
of  suspicion  were  upon  him.  He  was  shrewd  enough 
to  perceive  that  criminating  evidence  had  been  wrung 
from  the  hapless  bettd,  and  that  a network  of  evidence 
had  been  woven  about  himself  and  his  friends  quite 
sufficient  to  crush  them.  The  same  conviction  forced 
itself  upon  the  minds  of  the  brothers.  In  advance  they 
had  discussed  this  precise  situation  so  frequently  that 
they  were  prepared  for  it,  and  were  ready  without  con- 
sultation to  act  harmoniously.  The  samurai  was  taught 
to  despise  death,  so  that  when  he  was  brought  face  to 
face  with  it  he  defied  it.  When  he  had  abandoned  all 
hope  of  life  he  hurled  defiance  at  his  enemies,  and 


The  Cat  Plays  with  the  Mouse.  299 

courted  their  utmost  fury  with  the  reckless  coolness  of 
the  North  American  Indian.  Our  young  friends,  with 
fainting  hearts,  read  the  handwriting  on  the  wall,  and 
then  sorrowfully  but  unflinchingly  faced  their  destiny. 
With  unruffled  demeanor  they  met  gibe  with  suavity,  and 
parried  insolence  with  urbanity. 

“Well,  young  gentlemen,”  said  his  Lordship,  after  a 
long  pause,  “ are  you  prepared  to  pronounce  this  indi- 
vidual a pure  fabrication  ? ” 

“Oh!  he  is  genuine  enough,”  replied  Junzo.  “I 
perceive  that  he  appears  quite  ill.  Probably  he  is  under 
your  charge  for  medical  treatment.” 

“ None  of  your  impudence,  you  beast ! ” thundered  his 
Lordship  ; “ answer  me  and  tell  me  if  you  recognize  him.” 
“ He  is  one  of  the  bettds  belonging  to  Mito  Yashiki. 
But  I do  not  see  what  he  has  to  do  with  our  case.” 

“ Don’t  you  ? Well,  he  is  the  author  of  that  docu- 
ment. And  by  that  document  your  heads  fall  into  the 
blood-pit  at  noon  to-morrow.  Do  you  see  any  connec- 
tion now  ? ” 

“ I see  that  you  have  kidnapped  him,  and  have  tried 
in  vain  to  get  some  voluntary  testimony  out  of  him, 
and,  failing  in  that,  you  wrung  out  of  his  mangled  body 
some  sort  of  crazy  confession  like  what  you  have  there 
in  writing.  Under  torture  a peasant  like  that  will  con- 
fess any  thing  after  a while.  If  you  deem  it  proper  to 
convict  satnurai  on  such  testimony  as  that  you  are  at 
liberty  to  do  so.  But  we  assert  our  innocence,  and  con- 
tinue to  demand  some  proof  of  the  charges  made 
against  us.  Of  course  you  have  us  in  your  power,  and 
can  do  what  you  like  with  us,  but  we  are  true  samurai 
and  shall  fear  nothing.” 

This  bold  reply  awakened  a feeling  of  admiration  in 
the  hearts  of  those  who  stood  by,  but  it  was  like  the 
flaunting  of  a red  flag  in  the  face  of  an  enraged  bull  so 
far  as  the  Gotairo  was  concerned.  His  passion  had 
been  steadily  rising  for  some  time,  and  now  it  burst 
forth  in  ungovernable  fury  and  broke  upon  the  unpro- 
tected heads  of  the  prisoners. 


300 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


“Yea!  you  speak  truly.  Most  assuredly  are  you  in 
my  power,  and  most  assuredly  shall  I do  with  you  as  I 
deem  best.  Know,  then,  ye  miserable  whelps,”  roared 
he,  as  he  drew  forth  his  fan  and  smote  each  one  of  them 
a stinging  blow  on  the  cheek,  “ that  I have  this  year 
condemned  fellows  like  you  on  evidence  far  less  satis- 
factory.” 

The  look  of  hatred  and  defiance  that  gleamed  forth 
from  their  eyes  in  response  to  this  shameful  insult  but 
stimulated  his  Lordship’s  wrath,  and  he  proceeded  to 
beat  upon  the  shaven  tops  of  their  heads  a series  of  re- 
sounding tattoos,  remarking  meanwhile  that  their  skulls 
made  most  excellent  drums.  This  vigorous  exercise 
served  to  cool  him  down  somewhat,  and  he  called  for 
his  papers  and  proceeded  to  read  off  his  sentence  against 
them. 

“ Know,  then,  ye  miserable  abortions  of  monkeys, 
that  have  so  long  disturbed  my  peace,”  said  he,  in  savage 
tones,  “ that  according  to  the  ancient  customs  of  Dai- 
Nippon  nobody  is  executed  until  after  he  has  made  due 
confession  of  his  guilt.  Although  your  iniquity  has 
been  established  beyond  peradventure  or  doubt,  yet 
you  persist  in  stubbornly  denying  it.  But  we  have 
means  of  loosening  tongues.  Beware  ! beware  ! there- 
fore to-morrow  morning  you  shall  feast  to  your  heart’s 
content  on  stick,  copper,  and  water,  and  if  you  choose 
to  die  under  that  course  of  treatment, — well  and  good. 
It  is  a matter  of  utter  indifference  to  me  how  you  die. 
But  by  putting  your  signatures  at  any  time  to  this  con- 
fession that  I hold  in  my  hand  you  can  be  ushered  out 
of  this  life  at  once  and  with  but  a single  stroke.” 

“ Take  heed  ! take  heed  ! Beware  ! beware  ! beware  ! ” 
groaned  in  harrowing  accents  a chorus  of  doleful  voices 
in  an  adjoining  room. 

“ Furthermore,”  continued  his  Lordship,  when  the 
impressive  admonition  had  subsided,  “ know  that  the 
punishment  will  not  end  with  your  death.  By  ancient 
custom,  whosoever  perpetrates  treason  against  the  Sho- 
gun, thereby  entails  blood-attainder  on  his  family  and 


The  Cat  Plays  with  the  Mouse. 


301 


kindred,  and  they  become  extirpated  root  and  branch. 
Therefore,  O Konishi,  I condemn  your  father  and  his 
entire  family  to  death,  and  his  entire  estate  to  confisca- 
tion. As  regards  you,  O sons  of  Nakashima,  I condemn 
your  father  and  his  entire  family,  together  with  his  re- 
motest kindred  and  your  own  families,  and  all  of  their 
estates  shall  escheat  to  the  Shogun.  And  your  respect- 
ive fathers,  as  heads  of  the  family,  being  responsible  for 
the  acts  of  all  members  thereof,  shall  die  by  crucifixion. 
All  the  others  shall  die  by  decapitation  and  impalement. 
But  in  your  case,  O Konishi,  I am  pleased  to  be  lenient 
in  view  of  the  services  rendered  by  you  to  the  Bakufu. 
I therefore  commute  the  sentence  passed  on  your  family 
to  perpetual  banishment  in  the  island  of  Yesso,  and 
your  father  shall  be  allowed  to  wipe  out  the  blood- 
attainder  for  treason  by  being  permitted  to  perform 
seppuku.  But  thou  shalt  die  like  a dog  to-morrow  at 
high  noon  ! And  thy  head  shall  grin  from  the  gate- 
posts of  Mito  Yashiki  before  sundown  ! As  for  you, 
ye  sneaking  curs  from  Yamashiro,  I decline  to  remit  one 
jot  or  one  tittle  of  your  sentence.  Die  like  dogs  ! And 
may  the  soil  of  Dai-Nippon  be  forever  purged  from 
such  an  accursed  litter  of  traitorous  whelps  ! Ye  and 
your  polluted  breed  shall  perish  root  and  branch  so  that 
coming  generations  shall  point  to  the  dunghills  and  say  : 
‘ There  lie  the  remains  of  the  malignant  and  treacherous 
Nakashima  family  ! ’ This,  then,  shall  be  your  doom. 
To-night  I shall  send  my  orders  to  Kioto,  and  within 
twenty  days  the  heads  of  your  corrupted  kindred  shall 
be  impaled  on  spears,  and  shall  garnish  the  shoals  of  the 
Kamogawa  as  a warning  to  the  traitorous  dogs  hovering 
about  the  Gosho  when  they  cross  and  re-cross  the  bridge 
on  their  sneaking  tours.  As  they  gaze  down  upon  the 
long  row  of  picketed  heads  that  roll  their  sightless  eye- 
balls upward  toward  the  moon  and  open  their  gaping 
mouths  as  if  to  speak,  then  shall  those  who  pass  by 
know  what  it  is  to  arouse  the  lion  of  Lake  Biwa.  Ye 
have  had  your  sport  for  full  five  years.  Behold  the 
accounting  ! ” 


302 


Mito  Yashiki. 


A deep  silence  followed  the  uttering  of  this  horrible 
sentence,  that  had  been  raked  up  from  the  fearful  annals 
of  the  Ashikaga  period,  when  proscription  perched  as  in- 
variably on  the  banners  of  the  victor  as  buzzards  flock 
around  carrion.  Five  centuries  had  failed  to  expunge 
from  the  unwritten  law  of  the  land  the  horrible  customs 
of  a most  cruel  age,  thus  leaving  it  in  the  power  of  the 
infuriated  “ swaggering  prime-minister  ” to  resurrect  a 
sanguinary  law  that  had,  during  the  dark  times  of  the 
thirteenth  and  sixteenth  century,  swept  hundreds  of 
families  out  of  existence  amid  scenes  of  the  most  hellish 
cruelty.  The  prisoners  had  not  anticipated  such  a terri- 
ble sentence.  They  were  chilled  to  the  heart  with  horror, 
and  their  countenances  became  as  stone.  Many  of  the 
attendants  had  sympathetic  hearts  and  could  not  endure 
the  pitiful  sight  of  the  mute  agony  of  the  prisoners.  One 
by  one  they  slipped  away  and  whispered  with  bated 
breath  to  those  outside  the  details  of  the  awful  decree. 
Terrible  indeed  was  the  wrath  of  Nawosuke,  Lord  of 
Hikone  ! 

But  his  Lordship  glared  on  his  victims  with  an  ex- 
pression of  the  most  devilish  hate,  and  cruelly  taunted 
them  in  their  silent  misery  with  gibes  and  jests  so  heart- 
less and  brutal  that  his  own  councillors  would  fain  have 
interposed  to  check  the  torrent  of  his  fury.  His  vituper- 
ation poured  forth  in  raging  floods  until  his  courtiers  trem- 
bled and  wondered  whether  or  not  their  master  was  beside 
himself.  Finally  his  foul  denunciation  subsided,  and  he 
mopped  the  dripping  perspiration  from  his  brow  and 
wiped  the  frenzied  foam  from  his  mouth,  glaring  mean- 
while with  the  most  unutterable  hate  at  his  victims,  and 
spasmodically  clutching  at  his  sword-hilt  as  if  he  could 
hardly  restrain  himself  from  drawing  the  keen  blade  and 
hewing  them  to  pieces  on  the  spot.  As  the  swollen  veins 
in  his  forehead  relaxed  their  tension  he  became  more 
composed,  and  gazed  with  manifest  satisfaction  upon  the 
compressed  lips  and  blanched  faces  before  him.  Our 
young  friends  had  defied  all  that  his  Lordship  might  have 
been  able  to  heap  upon  themselves  individually  ; but 


The  Cat  Plays  with  the  Mouse. 


303 


they  had  affectionate  hearts,  and  they  loved  their  families 
and  kindred,  and  were  appalled  at  the  frightful  catas- 
trophe overshadowing  them.  Too  haughty  to  make  any 
plea  for  themselves,  yet  did  they  relax  their  pride  to  beg 
mercy  for  their  families.  They  bowed  low  and  said  as 
follows  in  humble  and  eloquent  tones  : 

“ Do  as  you  please  with  us.  But  spare  the  old  men, 
the  women,  and  the  little  children,  for  they  are  helpless 
and  in  no  way  to  blame  for  our  actions.  We  alone  are 
guilty.  We  have  plotted  against  the  Shogun  entirely  un- 
beknown to  our  kindred  and  families.  Punish  us  but 
spare  them.” 

“ Ha  ! ha  ! ” roared  the  Gotairo,  “ then  you  confess 
every  thing  charged  against  you  ? ” 

“ We  do,  most  humbly,”  was  the  low  response. 

“ Then  sign  this  written  confession,”  said  he. 

“We  will  sign  it  if  you  will  remit  that  part  of  the  sen- 
tence relating  to  our  family  and  kindred  and  will  limit 
your  punishment  to  ourselves,”  was  the  noble  answer. 

“ Dogs  ! ” yelled  his  Lordship  in  uncontrollable  fury, 
“ Dare  you  dictate  terms  to  me  ? I swear  by  the  gods  of 
Dai-Nippon,  not  only  that  you  shall  sign  it,  but  also  that 
your  accursed  breed  shall  be  exterminated  before  the 
new  moon  ! Were  it  not  for  the  lateness  of  the  hour  I 
would  commence  operations  on  you  to-day.” 

“ We  shall  not  sign  it  until  the  sentence  be  remitted,” 
replied  the  young  men,  as  their  meek  expressions  changed 
into  glances  of  deadly  hate  and  unconquerable  determi- 
nation. 

“ Then  to  the  dungeon  with  them  ! ” yelled  the  Gotairo 
to  the  jailers. 

“ What  shall  we  do  with  the  betto  ? ” inquired  those 
gloomy  and  forbidding  gentlemen. 

“ He  is  of  no  further  use.  Finish  him  off  to-night  in 
reward  for  his  obstinacy,  and  send  his  head  up  to  Mito 
Yashiki  with  my  compliments  when  you  go  up  after  the 
old  Konishi.  Who  knows  but  what  that  ,may  bring 
down  some  weak-kneed  betid  up  at  the  stables  ? ” 

And  so  the  meeting  adjourned. 


CHAPTER  XXV. 


AND  THE  MOUSE  ESCAPES. 

The  prisoners  were  conducted  from  the  dread  presence 
of  the  Gotairo  into  a long  corridor  that  led  out  toward  the 
distant  wing  where  was  located  the  so-called  dungeon,  or, 
more  properly  speaking,  the  godown  that  had  been  ex- 
temporized as  a dungeon.  It  had  already  become  dusk 
when  they  reached  the  gloomy  chamber,  so  that  candles 
were  needed  to  illumine  the  place.  The  heavy  doors 
were  swung  back  and  the  funereal  procession  entered 
the  sombre  vault  whose  massive  walls  had  so  often  stifled 
the  moans  of  agonized  victims.  The  dim  flicker  of  the 
lights  revealed  a room  comparatively  bare.  In  the  cor- 
ners and  along  the  sides  were  stored  sundry  articles  of 
vertu  and  value.  There  were  no  windows,  and  the  black 
walls  rose  up  on  four  sides  like  lofty  shadows  and  were 
merged  in  the  deep  gloom  above.  The  jailers  brought 
in  three  tatamis  and  laid  them  in  the  middle  of  the  room 
and  seated  their  prisoners  thereon.  Then  they  brought 
in  some  rice  and  fish  and  invited  their  unwilling  guests 
to  partake  thereof  after  their  arms  had  been  sufficiently 
loosened  for  them  to  feed  themselves.  But  the  poor 
fellows  made  but  a sorry  meal,  for  their  hearts  were 
heavy  and  they  were  parched  and  feverish.  The  merest 
nibble  seemed  to  appease  their  hunger.  Then  the  food 
was  removed  and  they  were  tightly  bound  hand  and  foot. 
Some  pillows  and  quilts  were  then  brought  in  and  they 
were  requested  to  lie  down  on  the  mats  and  allow  them- 
selves to  be  covered  up  for  the  night. 

Then  the  guards  bid  them  good-night  and  withdrew  to 
the  outside  of  the  doorway,  where  they  made  prepara- 
tions for  making  themselves  as  comfortable  as  possible 


304 


And  the  Mouse  Escapes. 


305 


for  the  death-watch  during  the  long  hours  of  the  night. 
They  divided  the  time  into  three  equal  parts,  arranging 
that  while  two  of  them  kept  awake  smoking  and  sipping 
sakJ  the  third  one  should  sleep  in  a room  adjoining  the 
one  into  which  the  godown  doors  swung  open.  A light 
was  left  inside  the  dark  vault  so  that  they  could  observe 
every  movement  of  the  prisoners  through  the  open  door- 
way. Then  they  ensconced  themselves  on  the  tatamis 
just  beyond  the  threshold  and  chatted  away  late  in  the 
evening.  At  about  nine  o’clock  one  of  them  retired  to 
rest  according  to  the  plan  already  agreed  upon.  The 
other  two  talked  and  smoked  for  another  hour  and  then 
began  to  yawn  very  vigorously  over  their  pipes.  Occa- 
sionally they  would  turn  their  eyes  in  the  direction  of 
their  prisoners  and  then  would  nod  and  doze  over  their 
tea  and  saM.  They  felt  that  their  prisoners  were  abso- 
lutely secure.  In  the  first  place,  no  human  being  could 
possibly  break  loose  from  that  complicated  network  of 
knots.  In  the  second  place,  they  were  within  the  walls 
of  Hikone  Yashiki,  surrounded  by  thousands  of  valorous 
warriors  within  easy  beck  and  call.  In  the  third  place, 
their  master,  the  Gotairo,  was  the  lord  of  the  realm  with 
the  armies  of  the  nation  at  his  back.  Who  then  could 
have  the  rashness  to  beard  the  lion  in  his  den  ? What 
possible  contingency  could  arise  wherein  the  prisoners 
could  escape  ? The  poor  fellows  indeed  seemed  doomed. 

In  the  meantime,  how  fared  the  prisoners  ? When  the 
jailers  withdrew  they  had  their  first  opportunity  to  ex- 
change ideas  since  the  time  when  the  gates  had  closed 
behind  them  that  afternoon.  Their  swollen  hands  and 
aching  arms  were  giving  them  great  pain,  and  their  fever- 
ish blood  was  beating  and  throbbing  violently  against 
their  burning  temples.  Their  parched  throats  and 
months  could  hardly  articulate  the  trembling  words  to 
which  they  gave  utterance  when  the  guards  had  retired 
beyond  earshot. 

“ Well,”  said  Konishi,  “ I fail  to  see  how  we  are  to  ex- 
tricate ourselves  from  this  scrape.  And  yet  I do  not 
see  how  we  could  have  avoided  it.” 


3°6 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“ Nor  I either,”  replied  Junzo.  “ The  betto  could  hardly 
have  been  blamed  in  any  way.  I did  not  credit  him 
with  the  great  pluck  that  he  has  manifestly  shown  in 
this  matter.  Poor  fellow  ! Whatever  shortcomings  he 
may  have  been  guilty  of  he  has  ere  now  most  dearly 
atoned  therefor.  I consider  myself  to  be  the  chief  one 
to  blame  in  this  whole  matter,  because  of  my  ill-starred 
loquacity  at  Atago-Yama.” 

“I  do  not  see  as  anybody  is  to  blame,”  said  Tomo- 
kichi.”  The  simple  fact  is  that  the  Gotairo  has  thoroughly 
outwitted  us,  and  we  are  fairly  caught  in  his  net.  When 
I consider  what  a sly  old  fox  he  is,  I am  amazed  at  our 
success  in  evading  him  for  so  long  a time.  I have  the 
mournful  consolation  of  knowing  that  Yamada  has  de- 
rived much  valuable  information  through  us  which  he 
could  not  otherwise  have  obtained.  I can  at  least  die  feel- 
ing that  our  great  cause  has  perceptibly  advanced  during 
the  last  five  years,  and  that  though  we  may  not  live  to 
see  the  fruit  of  our  efforts,  yet  have  we  been  the  means 
of  that  fruit  ripening.  So  far  as  I am  concerned,  I have 
but  little  to  regret.  But  the  dire  calamity  that  I have 
brought  upon  our  families  is  breaking  my  heart.  It  is 
cruel  ! It  is  awful ! I swear  by  all  the  foul  fiends  that 
infest  the  Buddhist  hells  that  if  there  be  a soul  in  this 
body  of  mine  it  shall  roam  heaven  and  earth  in  its  en- 
deavors to  wreak  revenge  on  the  savage  beast  that  has 
crushed  us  ! Unseen  hands  shall  stretch  forth  from 
those  shadowy  regions  and  shall  terrify  and  torment 
him  with  their  subtle  influences  ! Flaming  tongues  and 
hideous  faces  shall  haunt  his  life  until  his  misery  shall 
become  unbearable  ! I shall  lead  the  pestilential  miasms 
from  swamps  and  cess-pools  into  his  palace,  and  shall 
rot  him  with  their  fetid  breath  ! I shall  discover  the 
springs  of  corrupting  disease  and  shall  fill  his  bond  to 
overflowing  with  the  deadly  mildew  of  corroding  leprosy 
and  the  blasting  virus  of  dropsy  and  marasmus,  until  his 
fevered  limbs  shall  split  open  and  crumble  to  pieces  in 
the  fierce  viewless  flames  that  warp  and  twist  his  tortured 
nerves  ceaselessly  both  day  and  night ! And  when  his 


And  the  Mouse  Escapes. 


307 


foul  spirit  shall  be  withdrawn  from  the  putrid  tissues 
that  enchain  it,  I shall  be  there  to  seize  it  and  to  drag  it 
through  the  torments  of  the  deepest  hells,  where  it  shall 
steep  in  the  seething  dregs  of  substances  that  will  dissi- 
pate his  molten  copper  into  vapor— so  intense  will  be 
their  heat  ! ” 

“ Well  spoken  ! Well  spoken  ! ” exclaimed  his  two 
companions  in  fierce  and  exulting  whispers.  “ We  swear 
by  the  same  powers  that  we  shall  be  there  to  aid  thee  in 
thy  praiseworthy  work.  This  miserable  fiend  shall  find 
that  there  are  kindred  spirits  somewhere  in  the  vast  uni- 
verse that  also  delight  to  feed  on  anguish  and  despair.” 

Thus  they  conversed  in  low  and  sullen  whispers  for 
nearly  two  hours.  They  had  arranged  all  the  details 
for  the  horrors  that  they  anticipated  on  the  following 
day.  Each  one  agreed  to  watch  for  a favorable  oppor- 
tunity when  their  cords  were  removed,  preparatory  for 
torture,  to  snatch  one  of  the  short  swords  from  the  belts 
of  the  jailers  and,  after  disabling  or  killing  those  gentle- 
men, to  slay  themselves,  thus  escaping  the  agonies  about 
to  be  inflicted  on  them.  There  was  a very  good  pros- 
pect of  this  scheme  being  successfully  carried  out,  for 
those  gentlemen  seemed  to  repose  absolute  confidence 
in  the  power  of  their  master,  and  were  careless  and 
exceedingly  deliberate  in  all  of  their  actions,  thus  ren- 
dering themselves  fit  subjects  for  some  such  sudden 
onslaught.  In  vain  did  our  young  friends  try  to  sleep. 
Slumber  deserted  their  eyelids.  They  turned  restlessly 
from  side  to  side  until  midnight.  At  this  hour  they  heard 
one  of  the  guards  go  and  rouse  the  sleeping  man  in  the 
adjoining  room.  They  could  plainly  hear  him  calling  to 
the  man  that  his  turn  to  watch  had  come,  and  they  heard 
the  drowsy  fellow  shuffle  out  and  take  his  place  beside 
the  doorway.  In  a few  minutes  his  loud  snoring  pro- 
claimed the  fact  that  he  had  again  succumbed  to  the 
sweet  influence  of  his  interrupted  slumbers.  Presently 
the  responsive  snorings  of  the  other  two  men  proclaimed 
the  fact  that  the  entire  guard  was  asleep. 

But  still  the  poor  fellows  vainly  courted  the  shadowy 


3°8 


Mito  Yashiki. 


influence.  They  rolled  from  side  to  side  in  feverish 
uneasiness.  Finally  Tomokichi  dropped  into  a troubled 
slumber  and  dreamed  that  he  was  riding  his  horse  over 
the  mountain  passes  of  the  Nakasendo  in  frantic  efforts 
to  escape  from  some  enemy.  Onward  he  rushed  at  break- 
neck speed,  for  the  pursuers  were  close  upon  his  heels. 
He  wound  the  reins  tightly  about  his  wrists  and  arms. 
This  gave  him  great  pain,  but  there  was  no  time  to  con- 
sider that,  for  it  was  of  the  utmost  importance  that  he 
should  reach  Atago-Yama  before  his  enemies,  so  as  to 
warn  his  family  to  fly  to  the  mountains. 

Twice  did  the  sun  rise  and  set  on  his  mad  gallop. 
His  head  spun  with  aching  pain,  his  wrists  writhed 
within  the  agonizing  grip  of  the  reins,  his  blood  boiled 
with  fever,  but  he  could  not  stop.  The  life  of  his  entire 
family  depended  on  his  efforts  ! Though  fainting  and 
sore  and  almost  ready  to  drop  from  his  horse,  yet  he 
chased  the  western  sun  until  he  drew  near  to  his  native 
glen.  One  more  supreme  effort  and  all  would  be  well ! 
He  had  gained  on  his  pursuers,  and  there  was  yet  time 
to  save  his  loved  ones.  Onward  he  dashed  into  the 
glen  just  as  the  lengthening  shadows  were  commencing 
to  coquet  with  the  mists  that  rose  from  the  brook. 
Over  the  bridge,  past  the  shrines,  and  up  the  steep  road 
he  rushed  with  reckless  speed  until  the  gateway  of  his 
cottage  home  had  been  reached.  He  was  just  making 
ready  to  dash  through,  when  somebody  from  behind 
seized  his  arm  and  held  him  back.  Without  turning  to 
see  who  had  thus  rudely  grasped  his  arm,  he  shouted  to 
his  loved  ones  to  fly.  But  they  did  not  seem  to  hear, 
for  nobody  paid  him  the  slightest  attention. 

His  father  was  calmly  smoking  his  pipe  on  the  balcony 
and  was  gazing  vacantly  down  at  the  very  spot  where 
the  frantic  horseman  was  struggling  to  enter.  Masago 
sat  demurely  on  the  veranda  sewing  on  some  children’s 
garments.  O-Hana  was  under  the  cherry-trees  romping 
with  her  little  nephews  in  noisy  glee.  Loudly  did  he  call 
to  her,  but  she  heeded  him  not.  Drat  that  girl  ! Would 
she  not  cease*her  frolic  even  on  the  threshold  of  death  ? 


And  the  Mouse  Escapes. 


309 


What  could  all  this  mean  ? Nobody  paid  him  the  slight- 
est attention — and  he  there  shouting  forth  tidings  of 
life  and  death  ! Perhaps  he  was  not  calling  loud  enough. 
He  must  make  a greater  effort.  Then  somebody  from  be- 
hind clapped  a hand  tightly  over  his  mouth  and  bent  his 
head  backward.  As  his  eyes  rolled  upward  he  saw  Mr. 
Yamada  standing  on  the  balcony  serenely  looking  at 
him.  Surely  he  would  hear  him  and  help  him  ! With 
a supreme  effort  he  shook  the  hand  from  his  mouth  and 
shouted  out  at  the  top  of  his  voice  : “ O Mr.  Yamada ! 
Bid  my  people  fly  at  once  to  the  distant  mountains  ! An 
enemy  is  at  the  gate  ready  to  destroy  them  ! Oh  ! Save 
my  wife  and  children  from  cruel  death  ! ” — But  Mr. 
Yamada  heeded  him  not.  With  provoking  indifference 
he  stared  blankly  down  at  the  gateway  as  if  buried  in 
profound  thought.  Oh  ! The  horror  of  the  situation  ! 
Again  was  the  hand  clasped  over  his  mouth,  and  he  was 
dragged  from  his  horse  and  shaken  most  violently.  And 
he  awoke  dripping  with  perspiration  and  sobbing  bit- 
terly, to  find  that  there  was  indeed  somebody’s  hand 
pressed  tightly  over  his  mouth,  while  another  hand  was 
holding  him  tightly  by  the  arm  and  shaking  him  most 
violently. 

“ Be  still,  Tomokichi ! In  the  name  of  Jimmu-Tenno, 
don’t  ruin  us  with  your  uproar  ! Wake  up,  sir  ! Wake 
up,  I say  ! There,  that  is  better.  Now  keep  quiet.  I 
came  just  as  you  reached  the  climax  of  your  nightmare, 
and  if  I had  n’t  taken  hold  of  you  with  a strong  hand, 
every  thing  would  have  been  lost.” 

Tomokichi  lifted  his  head  from  somebody’s  shoulder 
and  stared  about  him  in  the  dim  light  with  a bewildered 
gaze.  Junzo  and  Konishi  were  sitting  up  looking  at 
some  apparition  behind  him,  with  eyes  that  seemed  to  be 
starting  from  their  sockets  in  unutterable  amazement. 
The  voice  had  sounded  strangely  familiar,  and  he  turned 
around  in  joyous  haste  that  was  almost  delirious  in  its 
excess,  and  found  himself  face  to  face  with  the  smiling 
countenance  of 

“ Mr.  Yamada  ! ” exclaimed  Tomokichi,  in  wild  aston- 
ishment. 


3io 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“It  is  indeed  Mr.  Yamada  ! ” whispered  Junzo,  in  a 
low  tone  to  Konishi.  “ How  under  the  wide  heavens  he 
ever  got  here,  I can’t  imagine.  I thought  I heard  an  un- 
usual gurgling  and  shuffling  sound  outside  the  door  a few 
moments  ago  ; and  after  that  I heard  somebody  creeping 
toward  us.  But  I did  not  pay  any  attention  to  the 
sounds,  as  I attributed  .them  to  the  guards.  I could  not 
be  more  surprised  if  a thunderbolt  had  dropped  from  the 
skies.  Surely  this  man  is  the  veriest  devil  for  adroitness 
and  boldness  ! ” 

“Honorable  sirs,  I salute  you,”  said  Mr.  Yamada,  in  a 
low  voice,  as  he  bowed  down  to  the  ground.  “You  seem 
surprised  at  my  visit.  Nevertheless,  I am  here  at  your 
disposal.” 

“ How  came  you  here  at  so  opportune  a moment?” 
inquired  Junzo. 

“ That  would  take  a long  time  to  explain, — in  fact, 
rather  more  time  than  I have  to  spare.  Nevertheless, 
while  I am  cutting  loose  your  bonds,  I can  give  you  the 
general  details  of  this  my  latest  trip.  I heard  mutterings 
of  coming  trouble  over  three  weeks  ago  in  Kioto.  Ha  ! 
ha  ! The  old  fox  does  not  forget  its  cubs.  If  that 
Bakufu  dog  can  burrow,  he  will  find  that  I can  also  bur- 
row. If  he  can  have  his  spies  under  the  “ phenix-car  ” in 
Kioto,  I can  have  mine  beneath  his  latticed  windows  in 
Yedo.  Through  underground  channels  I have  long 
known  that  this  vicious  cur  was  scowling  on  you,  and,  as 
soon  as  I heard  that  some  blow  was  about  to  be  directed 
at  you,  I at  once  announced  that  my  regular  attack  of 
spring  fever  was  at  hand,  and  forthwith  disappeared.  I 
left  my  family  most  assiduously  nursing  an  old  dummy 
carefully  tucked  beneath  the  quilts,  with  instructions  to 
report  slow  convalescence  of  the  invalid.  Vanishing 
from  Kioto,  I went  to  Osaca  and  engaged  a stout  and 
swift  boat  for  a coast  trip.  When  we  had  left  the  city 
far  behind  we  put  to  sea,  and  with  favorable  winds,  to- 
gether with  steady  sculling,  we  reached  a secluded  village 
on  the  shores  of  Yedo  bay,  within  ten  days.  I ordered 
the  boat  to  be  pulled  up  on  the  beach  in  line  with  some 


And  the  Mouse  Escapes.  3 1 1 

other  boats,  and  left  it  in  care  of  the  headman  of  the 
village. 

“Then  I hired  a much  smaller  boat  to  take  me  up  near 
to  Yedo  and  land  me.  I left  my  own  crew  down  the  bay, 
with  instructions  to  go  out  fishing  every  day  in  our  large 
boat  and  await  my  return.  During  the  last  week  I have 
been  in  the  Yoshiwara  taking  notes.  If  that  Bakufu  cur 
can  make  men  drunk  and  extract  information  from  them, 
he  will  find  that  to  be  a little  game  at  which  two  can 
play.  This  afternoon  I found  out  all  about  your  arrest, 
and  I heard  about  the  abusive  treatment  heaped  upon 
you  through  hordes  of  Hikone  retainers  that  flocked 
down  to  the  brothels  for  their  regular  carouse.  I kept 
my  eyes  open,  and  laid  my  plans  accordingly.  I first 
secured  a stout  rope  and  a small  saw,  which  I hid  away 
under  my  clothes.  I then  retired  to  my  room  and  drew 
forth  my  plan  of  Hikone  Yashiki,  which  you  gentlemen 
kindly  sent  me  a couple  of  years  ago.  I found  by  the 
specifications  there  laid  down  that  in  a certain  part  of  the 
walls  there  was  a window  that  was  but  a short  distance 
from  the  ground.  I then  hunted  up  a jovial  Hikone 
samurai  and  invited  him  to  partake  of  a repast  that  I had 
prepared,  and,  in  the  course  of  a long  conversation,  elici- 
ted from  him  the  very  interesting  fact  that  that  portion 
of  the  barracks  was  at  present  used  for  a kind  of  store- 
room for  armor  and  spears.  As  it  was  getting  very  late, 
and  as  he  was  pretty  far  gone  in  his  cups,  I accompanied 
him  home,  under  the  pretext  of  seeing  that  he  came  to  no 
grief.  This  brought  me  up  to  the  gates  of  his  yashiki , 
where  I parted  company  with  him,  he  going  inside,  while 
I prowled  about  the  dark  walls  until  near  midnight,  when 
everybody  appeared  to  be  asleep. 

“ I then  cautiously  crept  to  the  designated  window  and 
listened  carefully.  All  was  silent.  To  one  end  of  my 
rope  I fastened  an  iron  hook  that  I had  secured  for  this 
purpose.  With  a stick  I managed  to  hook  it  around  one 
of  the  wooden  bars  in  the  window.  Then  I pulled  my- 
self up,  and  looked  in  to  inspect  the  room.  There  was 
nobody  there.  Then  I went  to  work  and  quietly  sawed 


312 


Mito  Yashiki. 


out  two  of  the  bars  and  let  myself  into  the  room.  I had 
found  out  from  the  tipsy  braggarts  in  the  Yoshiwara 
precisely  where  you  were  confined,  and  so  had  no  diffi- 
culty in  marking  out  my  course.  Slipping  out  of  the 
room,  I picked  my  way  through  the  shrubbery  and  crept 
about  under  verandas,  until  I came  to  the  wing  where 
this  dungeon  is  located.  I crept  up  on  the  veranda  and 
wet  the  shojee  with  my  tongue  and  pushed  my  finger 
through  it.  Through  this  aperture  I could  see  the  two 
guards  asleep  beside  the  hebachi.  I then  slipped  the 
shojee  back  and  crept  in  upon  them.  The  nearer  one 
was  lying  flat  on  his  back,  so  that  I had  a splendid 
chance  at  his  throat,  and  was  able  to  cut  it  so  deeply  that 
no  outcry  or  noise  was  made,  the  windpipe  having  been 
entirely  severed.  But  the  other  fellow  turned  partly  over 
as  I crept  upon  him,  and  turned  his  drowsy  eyes  upon 
me,  so  that  I was  obliged  to  clutch  him  tightly  by  the 
throat  to  prevent  an  outcry,  and  then  stab  him  through 
the  heart.  This  created  a slight  disturbance.  When 
every  thing  had  settled  down,  I crept  in  to  inspect'  the 
inside  of  the  dungeon,  and  found  this  young  man  wrest- 
ling with  a nightmare,  and  came  just  in  time  to  prevent 
an  outcry.” 

Thus  this  extraordinary  man  kept  up  in  low  tones  a 
running  conversation  while  he  cut  the  cords  that  bound 
the  prisoners  and  brought  in  the  swords  of  the  guards 
and  armed  them  therewith.  It  was  found  that  there  was 
need  of  another  set  of  swords  for  Konishi. 

“Was  there  not  another  jailer?”  inquired  Mr.  Ya- 
mada. 

“There  was,  sir,”  replied  Junzo. 

“ Where  is  he,  then  ? ” 

“ He  is  asleep  in  that  room  to  the  right.” 

“ Well  then,  please  wait  here  a moment,  and  I will 
bring  another  pair  of  swords.  Our  dangers  are  but 
beginning,  and  we  must  be  well  armed.  We  must  be  pre- 
pared to  die  like  samurai , and  not  like  dogs.” 

So  saying,  Mr.  Yamada  crept  cautiously  across  to  the 
room  where  slept  the  third  jailer.  A dim  light  was  burn- 


And  the  Mouse  Escapes.  3 1 3 

ing  within  the  chamber.  Slyly  making  a hole  in  the 
paper,  he  carefully  inspected  the  premises.  The  man 
appeared  to  be  soundly  asleep.  Noiselessly  sliding  back 
the  s/iojee,  he  stealthily  crept  upon  his  victim.  The 
sleeper  had  buried  his  head  beneath  his  quilt,  and  heard 
nothing.  Mr.  Yamada  slowly  folded  back  the  heavy 
coverlid,  and  unintentionally  disturbed  the  sleeper,  who, 
supposing  that  his  time  to  relieve  guard  had  come,  sat 
up  in  bed  and  began  rubbing  his  eyes,  thus  exposing  the 
back  of  his  neck  to  a fair  blow.  Mr.  Yamada  rose  with 
cat-like  rapidity,  and  with  one  swift  stroke  severed  the 
head  from  the  body.  It  fell  forward  noiselessly  upon  the 
well-padded  quilts,  while  the  body  sank  back  on  the  floor 
with  a sighing  sound,  where  its  flounderings  were  quickly 
smothered  beneath  the  heavy  coverlids  at  once  drawn 
over  it.  In  a moment  every  thing  had  quieted  down. 
Mr.  Yamada  then  took  possession  of  the  coveted  swords, 
and  hastily  returned  to  the  young  men,  who  had  been 
watching  him  from  the  doorway  of  the  dungeon. 

“That  was  no  mean  stroke,”  remarked  Junzo  in  an 
undertone. 

“ I have  not  been  practising  fencing  with  Kunisaburo 
during  the  last  two  years  for  nothing,”  was  the  laconic 
reply.  “ Now,  gentlemen,”  continued  he,  “ we  have  but 
little  time  to  spare.  Here  are  some  straw  sandals  for 
you  to  put  on  while  I am  washing  my  sword  in  this 
bucket  of  water  here.  Make  great  haste,  for  we  have  no 
time  to  lose.  Our  perils  now  begin.” 

In  about  five  minutes  all  were  ready  to  start.  Leaving 
the  lights  burning,  Mr.  Yamada  directed  the  young 
men  to  form  in  a line  behind  him,  and  take  hold  of  each 
other’s  skirts  in  order  not  to  become  separated  in  the 
darkness.  Then  sliding  back  the  shojee  they  slipped  out 
into  the  yard,  where  they  were  soon  obscured  by  the 
gloom.  The  lynx-eyed  leader,  however,  seemed  to  be 
familiar  with  every  nook  and  corner  of  the  yashiki,  for 
he  picked  his  way  along  with  the  most  unerring  certainty. 
Every  thing  was  hushed  in  the  profoundest  repose.  Fi- 
nally they  reached  the  room  where  the  entrance  had  been 


3H 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


forced.  It  was  undisturbed.  Going  to  the  window,  Mr. 
Yamada  directed  the  young  men  to  slide  down  the  rope. 
Then  he  slid  down  after  them.  Again  they  formed  line, 
and  with  stealthy  step  stole  down  the  edge  of  the  moat 
to  the  Sakurada  gateway.  Here  they  turned  abruptly  to 
the  right  and  directed  their  course  toward  the  Tora 
gateway  that  led  beyond  the  outermost  moat  of  the 
castle. 

Mr.  Yamada  had  entered  this  same  gateway  but  a short 
time  before  with  the  rollicking  Hikone  samurai,  and  had 
carefully  remembered  the  password  hiccoughed  forth  by 
that  very  jovial  gentleman.  In  addition  to  this  he  was 
dressed  in  one  of  the  garments  of  Tomokichi  bearing 
the  Tokugawa  crest,  which  he  had  been  far-sighted 
enough  to  borrow  from  that  young  man  on  one  of  his 
visits  to  Kioto  over  a year  before.  These  crests  on  their 
dresses  at  once  stamped  them  as  men  intimately  con- 
nected with  the  Tokugawa  interests.  So  that  when  Mr. 
Yamada  boldly  stepped  up  to  the  drowsy  guard  and 
gave  the  countersign  he  was  at  once  allowed  to  pass 
through  the  wicket-gate  with  his  companions.  Once  out- 
side the  castle  and  their  course  was  much  simplified. 
They  turned  abruptly  to  the  left,  and  followed  the  moat 
for  a long  distance  towards  the  bay.  At  intervals  they 
met  revellers  returning  from  some  rollicking  cruise.  But 
no  one  interfered  with  them  in  any  way.  Finally  they 
reached  the  waters  of  the  bay,  and  followed  its  shores 
southward  a short  distance  to  where  it  made  junction  with 
a deep  and  broad  canal. 

Here  they  paused  while  their  leader  peered  into  the 
darkness  as  if  looking  for  some  person  with  whom  he 
had  pre-arranged  a meeting.  Finally  he  spied  a boat 
moored  close  to  the  bank.  He  crept  up  to  the  top  of 
the  embankment,  and  uttered  a word,  to  which  the 
countersign  at  once  came  back  from  somebody  in  the 
boat.  After  a short  conversation  with  the  invisible  per- 
son, he  returned  to  the  young  men  and  said  that  every 
thing  was  ready  for  immediate  embarkation,  as  this  was 
the  boat  he  had  engaged  by  secret  messenger  that  very 


And  the  Mouse  Escapes. 


315 


afternoon.  It  was  now  about  three  o’clock  in  the  morn- 
ing, and  daylight  was  drawing  on  apace.  Quickly  they 
cast  loose  from  their  moorings,  and  slipped  out  into  the 
bay.  They  sculled  far  out  beyond  the  Shinagawa  shoals, 
and  then  spread  their  sails,  and  went  scudding  down  the 
bay  before  a brisk  breeze.  About  midday  they  reached 
the  hamlet,  where  Mr.  Yamada  had  beached  his  large 
boat.  Sending  the  smaller  boat  back  to  Yedo,  they 
launched  their  sea-going  boat  without  delay,  and  by 
nighttime  were  far  out  to  sea,  scudding  southward  on  the 
swift  wings  of  the  northeast  monsoon. 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 


AN  UNEXPECTED  MEETING. 

Again  at  dawn  a swift-footed  courier  is  standing  be- 
side the  western  gateway  of  Yedo  castle  patiently  waiting 
for  the  delivery  of  the  despatches  that  he  has  been 
ordered  to  call  for  and  forward  to  the  next  station. 
Long  does  he  wait,  but  the  despatches  come  not.  The 
guards  have  swung  back  the  massive  portals,  but 
still  he  lingers  there  on  the  threshold  while  the  glorious 
sun  rides  high  into  mid-heaven.  After  long  hours  of 
monotonous  delay  a messenger  rushed  up  with  a despatch- 
box  for  the  commandant  of  the  Kioto  shiro.  The 
courier  overheard  sundry  remarks  about  the  delay  being 
caused  by  the  intense  excitement  prevailing  in  Hikon6 
Yashiki  over  the  miraculous  escape  during  the  night  of 
three  dangerous  spies  under  sentence  of  death,  who  were 
immured  in  the  godown  under  a strong  guard  that  had 
been  found  by  the  attendants  early  that  morning  butch- 
ered in  cold  blood.  Great  was  the  anger  of  the  Gotairo  ! 
Everybody  in  the  yashiki  trembled  lest  the  rigid  exami- 
nations that  had  been  instituted  might  bring  some  friend 
or  companion  under  the  suspicions  of  that  dreaded  man. 
It  was  manifest  that  there  must  have  been  a coadjutor, 
for  how  could  human  beings  have  escaped  unaided 
from  the  meshes  of  the  net  woven  so  strongly  about  their 
bodies  ? But  all  clues  ceased  abruptly  at  the  window 
whence  flight  had  been  effected.  Beyond  that  point 
nothing  was  known, — not  a trace  of  the  prisoners  could 
be  found  anywhere  to  tell  in  what  direction  they  had 
fled.  Couriers  had  been  hurried  off  to  all  the  mountain 
passes  to  caution  the  guards  to  exert  the  utmost  vigi- 

316 


An  Unexpected  Mecti?ig. 


317 


lance  in  examining  all  suspicious  characters.  But  of 
what  consequence  was  all  that,  since  the  prisoners  had 
escaped  torture  and  execution  anyhow  ? 

Such  were  a few  of  the  hurried  and  excited  remarks 
caught  by  the  ear  of  the  courier  as  he  gave  his  receipt  for 
the  box  and  made  his  preparations  for  starting.  Then 
away  went  the  box  like  a hunted  deer  from  station  to 
station,  until  it  reached  the  distant  mountains.  As  it 
was  borne  deeper  into  those  mighty  ranges  its  progress 
became  much  slower,  for  it  found  the  streams  swollen  by 
the  melting  snows  of  the  highlands.  Although  the  skies 
were  bright  and  clear  overhead,  yet  angry  floods  filled 
the  ravines,  and  the  little  rivulets  were  raging  torrents. 
Frequent  delays  were  experienced,  and  many  vexatious 
detours  became  necessary. 

In  one  place  a rivulet  deep  down  in  a valley  had  re- 
ceived an  unexpected  accession  of  water,  so  that  the 
stepping-stones  had  disappeared  far  beneath  the  yellow 
waves.  The  stream  was  not  deep,  and  could  easily  have 
been  forded  under  ordinary  circumstances,  but  the  swift- 
ness of  the  current  was  such  that  no  person  could  have 
kept  his  footing  on  the  slippery  stones.  There  was  no 
bridge  at  this  point,  for  the  stream  had  always  been 
forded,  even  during  freshets.  So  the  courier  had  to  sit 
on  the  banks  and  wait  for  the  floods  to  subside.  Not 
until  late  on  the  following  day  was  he  able  to  resume  his 
interrupted  journey.  Then  the  box  flew  from  summit  to 
summit  until  it  came  to  a place  where  the  torrents  had 
swept  away  a bridge.  A long  and  vexatious  detour  here 
became  necessary.  Far  up  the  rugged  valley  the  courier 
slowly  picked  his  way  through  paths  overgrown  with 
underbrush  and  reeking  with  mud,  until  he  came  to  a 
place  that  could  be  safely  forded  ; and  when  he  came 
back  on  the  other  side  and  resumed  the  road,  he  found 
that  he  had  lost  nearly  an  entire  day.  But  onward  sped 
the  box. 

At  one  or  two  other  points  on  its  way  through  the 
mountains  it  was  delayed  in  its  course  for  a few  hours,  so 
that  the  despatch  was  fully  three  days  behind  time  when 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


318 

its  bearer  finally  leaped  forth  from  the  frowning  gorges  of 
Shinano  and  sped  across  the  plains  of  Mino  toward  the 
hill  country  encompassing  the  southern  shores  of  Lake 
Biwa.  Toward  evening  a fresh  courier  seized  the  box, 
and  plunged  into  a ravine  among  the  hills.  With  bated 
breath  and  bowed  head  he  rushed  along  as  if  he  were 
some  express  train  behind-time.  His  glistening  body 
gleamed  through  the  trees  as  he  sped  by  copse  and 
thicket.  Now  he  has  reached  the  base  of  the  range,  and 
is  slowly  climbing  the  steep  road  that  winds  up  through 
the  woods.  He  has  reached  the  summit,  and  is  starting 
off  on  another  spurt  of  speed  when  he  suddenly  utters  a 
wild  screech  of  pain  and  terror,  and  tumbles  down  in  a 
heap  in  the  middle  of  the  road, — hamstrung  in  both  legs. 
The  next  instant,  his  head  rolls  into  the  dust  ; and  the 
body,  that  but  a moment  before  had  been  bounding 
along  with  the  grace  and  the  buoyancy  of  a gazelle, 
now  lies  twitching  and  floundering  convulsively  on  the 
ground. 

This  bloody  deed  was  perpetrated  by  a band  of  ronins , 
who  had  sprung  from  a thicket  with  the  swiftness  and 
the  fury  of  a man-eating  tiger.  As  they  washed  their 
swords  in  a spring  that  bubbled  along  the  roadside,  they 
glanced  hurriedly  up  and  down  the  road  to  make  sure 
that  nobody  was  in  sight.  Then  they  dragged  the  body 
far  into  the  thickets,  and  sprinkled  sand  over  the  bloody 
traces  along  the  road.  Then  they  seized  the  despatch- 
box  and  bounded  into  the  woods.  They  picked  their 
way  for  a mile  or  so  along  a wild  and  rugged  foot-path 
until  they  came  to  a deserted  hut,  near  a little  stream 
that  flowed  down  the  rugged  sides  of  a deeply  wooded 
ravine.  Here  they  took  up  their  quarters,  and  eagerly 
broke  open  the  box  and  proceeded  in  the  dim  light 
to  peruse  the  contents  thereof.  But,  O quick-witted 
reader,  you  have  already  guessed  who  these  ronins  are. 
Therefore  an  introduction  will  be  needless. 

Our  friends  had  scudded  day  and  night  before  the 
favoring  monsoon  all  the  way  down  the  coast  until  they 
had  outstripped  the  tardy  couriers.  On  the  third  day 


An  Unexpected  Meeting. 


3*9 


after  their  departure  from  Yedo,  they  entered  Owari  bay 
and  beached  their  boat  at  a fishing  village  in  the  friendly 
Daimiate  of  Ise.  Then  they  had  cut  across  country 
by  forced  marches,  and  had  intercepted  the  fatal  de- 
spatches. Within  an  hour  after  leaving  Yedo  bay,  Mr. 
Yamada  had  fully  posted  himself  about  the  details  of  the 
Gotairo’s  horrible  sentence.  When  he  realized  that  Ku- 
nisaburo,  Seisho,  and  the  children  were  included  within 
the  text  of  this  exterminating  decree,  he  became  moody 
and  silent  for  several  hours.  There  did  not  appear  to  be 
any  earthly  chance  of  saving  these  innocent  and  unfortu- 
nate victims  of  the  Gotairo’s  savage  fury.  Allowing  four 
days  (the  usual  time)  for  the  despatch  to  reach  Kioto, 
then  that  would  mean  the  arrest  of  the  proscribed  indi- 
viduals on  the  morning  of  the  fifth  day  after  the  escape 
of  the  prisoners  from  Hilcone  Yashiki.  And  how  could 
he  himself  possibly  reach  Kioto  in  less  than  ten  days  ? 
Impossible  ! All  seemed  lost. 

Far  into  the  night  he  sat  on  the  deck  buried  in  deep 
thought.  The  young  men  respected  his  grief,  and  sought 
the  cabin,  where  they  quietly  discussed  the  thrilling  inci- 
dents of  the  last  twenty-four  hours.  They  were  indeed 
ronins,  and  could  now  do  just  what  they  pleased,  without 
any  danger  of  involving  their  Mito  friends,  for  it  ap- 
peared that  the  far-sighted  Yamada  had  sent,  on  the 
afternoon  of  the  previous  day,  a letter  with  their  (forged) 
signatures  to  the  Daimio  of  Mito,  announcing  their  in- 
tention of  immediately  withdrawing  from  his  service  for 
political  reasons,  and  of  forthwith  becoming  ronins , — 
thus  absolving  him  and  his  clan  from  all  responsibility 
for  their  acts.  Henceforth  they  were  to  be  lawless  des- 
peradoes ! Long  and  anxiously  did  they  discuss  their 
future  prospects,  until  overpowering  drowsiness,  superin- 
duced by  the  protracted  vigils  of  the  previous  night, 
settled  down  upon  them  and  buried  them  in  the  pro- 
foundest  slumbers. 

But  Yamada  slept  not  that  night.  His  bold  and  busy 
brain  was  exerting  all  of  its  extraordinary  powers  to  ex- 
tricate his  friends  from  their  horrible  dilemma.  How 


320 


Mito  Yashiki. 


could  it  be  done  ? Ah  ! there  lay  the  supreme  difficulty. 
In  vain  did  he  struggle  in  the  meshes  of  the  perplexing 
net.  Toward  midnight  he  rose  with  a sigh  and  went  be- 
low. He  soon  found  it  utterly  impossible  to  sleep,  and 
so  returned  to  his  former  position  on  deck.  Whether  or 
not  the  motion  had  quickened  his  circulation,  and  had 
thus  brightened  his  ideas,  I cannot  say.  But  his  eyes 
now  lit  up,  as  if  inspired  with  a hopeful  thought.  He 
called  the  captain  of  the  boat,  and  inquired  whether  there 
were  any  more  sails  that  could  be  set  to  his  craft. 

“ There  are  two  other  sails  that  can  be  set,  most  hon- 
ored sir,”  was  the  humble  reply. 

“ Then  spread  them  at  once,”  was  the  laconic  order. 

“ With  such  a strong  wind,  most  honored  sir,  it  would 
be  dangerous,  for  our  boat  is  already  struggling  under  as 
much  sail  as  she  can  safely  carry.” 

“ Do  as  I tell  you,  Mr.  Captain,  and  spread  every  sail 
you  can.  I will  be  responsible  for  the  risk,”  was  the 
prompt  command. 

“Very  well,  sir,”  replied  the  startled  captain,  as  he 
proceeded  to  set  the  sails.  It  was  indeed  a risky  thing 
to  do  in  that  stiff  gale,  for  the  boat  careened  as  if  about 
to  capsize,  and  the  masts  bent  as  if  about  to  snap  off. 

But  Mr.  Yamada  had  well  balanced  the  chances  and 
had  come  to  the  conclusion  that  nothing  but  this  course 
of  action  could  save  his  friends.  He  knew  that  the 
monsoon  blew  steadily  from  the  northeast  for  many  days 
at  a time  during  this  time  of  the  year.  Instead  of  stop- 
ping at  night  he  purposed  to  keep  right  on  through  the 
entire  period  of  darkness.  With  such  a breeze  he  cal- 
culated that  they  were  averaging  fully  six  miles  per 
hour.  If  the  wind  kept  up  they  would  make  during 
twenty-four  hours  fully  one  hundred  and  forty-four 
miles.  The  distance  from  Yedo  to  Osaca  would  be  fully 
four  hundred  miles  by  sea.  But  he  well  knew  that  he 
could  not  make  this  distance  under  eight  days,  even 
under  the  most  phenomenal  circumstances,  because  the 
course  would  have  to  be  changed  into  the  teeth  of  the 
wind  after  rounding  the  Kii  promontory.  By  that  route 


An  Unexpected  Meeting. 


321 


he  could  not  possibly  reach  Kioto  under  ten  days.  And 
that  would  be  too  late  ! But  the  Daimiate  of  Is£  lay  on 
this  side  of  the  promontory,  and  was  only  about  three 
hundred  miles  from  Yedo,  and  it  could  be  reached  on 
one  tack  with  the  present  winds.  This,  then,  would 
land  him  at  Is£  within  three  days  after  leaving  Yedo. 
So  far,  so  good. 

But  the  courier  with  his  fatal  despatch  would  by  that 
time  be  nearing  the  southern  end  of  Lake  Biwa,  fully  two 
days’  journey  to  the  northward.  Too  late  to  intercept 
him  ! But  then  he  bethought  himself  of  the  fact  that 
the  freshets  in  Shinano  were  always  very  bad  in  the 
spring,  owing  to  the  floods  of  water  let  loose  by  the 
melting  snows  that  had  draped  the  mighty  crests  during 
the  winter.  The  despatches  might  be  delayed  ; — they 
frequently  were  at  this  season.  But  how  long  would 
they  be  delayed  ? Two  days’  delay  would  suffice  to 
carry  out  his  daring  scheme.  Should  he  take  the  risk  ? 
Certainly  ! It  was  his  only  hope.  Accordingly  they 
had  scud  along  under  full  sail  for  nearly  three  days. 
The  boat  was  an  unusually  swift  one,  and  the  breeze 
favored  them  all  the  way  down  the  coast,  so  that  on  the 
third  day  they  were  enabled  to  land  at  their  destination 
safe  and  sound.  At  once  they  pressed  northward  across 
the  hills  and  mountains. 

When,  they  reached  the  Tokaido,  the  southern  high- 
way between  Yedo  and  Kioto,  the  thought  occurred  to  Mr. 
Yamada  that  possibly  the  Gotairo  might  have  sent  his 
despatch  by  this  route  instead  of  the  midland  one,  thus 
avoiding  delays  from  freshets.  But  he  well  knew  that 
important  despatches  were  far  safer  on  the  secluded 
Nakasendo,  away  from  the  frisky  antics  and  kittenish 
humors  of  the  swarming  retainers  of  the  hostile  southern 
Daimios,  who  invariably  travelled  by  the  southern  road 
along  the  coast.  The  bare  bodies  of  the  couriers  pre- 
sented too  tempting  a bait  for  the  endless  groups  of 
rollicking  samurai  from  Satsuma,  Tosa,  and  Choshiu,  to 
render  it  advisable  to  trust  them  to  the  fickle  moods  of 
those  dangerous  gentlemen.  A fleeting  courier  bound- 


322 


Mito  Yashiki. 


ing  around  a sharp  bend  into  a company  of  these  irasci- 
ble characters  would  probably  never  have  been  heard 
from  again.  And  for  a courier  to  surrender  the  right  of 
way  invariably  demanded  by  these  punctilious  gentle- 
men, would  have  entailed  endless  delays.  Better  take 
the  Nakasendo  with  its  freshets,  than  the  Tokaido  with 
its  swaggering  blades.  So  thought  the  Bakufu.  Never- 
theless, Mr.  Yamada  made  diligent  inquiry  at  this  point, 
as  to  whether  any  couriers  had  come  through  lately  from 
Yedo,  and  was  informed  that  there  had  been  none  ex- 
cept a few  local  ones  from  cities  along  the  road. 

Accordingly  he  pressed  swiftly  northward  toward 
where  the  Nakasendo  made  junction  with  the  ranges 
skirting  the  eastern  shores  of  Lake  Biwa,  and  had  ar- 
rived at  the  lonely  spot  on  the  highway  but  a few  hours 
before  the  arrival  of  the  ill-fated  courier.  That  half  a 
day  of  delay  in  Yedo  had  rendered  this  possible.  But 
they  still  did  not  know  whether  they  were  attacking  the 
right  man.  They  took  their  risks  on  that.  They  knew 
that  a courier  came  through  from  Yedo  every  four  or  five 
days  or  so,  but  they  could  not  tell  whether  this  one  was 
carrying  the  fatal  orders  presumed  to  have  been  sent  on 
the  morning  following  their  escape.  With  nervous  hands 
Mr.  Yamada  tore  off  the  coverings  and  unrolled  the 
despatch  and  read  it  through  with  features  absolutely 
unruffled  in  their  cool  placidity.  The  young  men 
watched  him  anxiously  but  could  draw  no  inference 
from  his  countenance.  Schooled  in  the  art  of  self-con- 
trol, the  samurai  wore  an  air  of  nonchalance  where  a 
Caucasian  would  have  thrown  his  cap  into  the  air  and 
have  shouted  himself  hoarse.  At  last  Mr.  Yamada 
cleared  his  throat  and  quietly  remarked  : 

“ It  is  all  right.  This  is  the  despatch  that  we  are  after. 
Read  for  yourselves.” 

The  young  men  eagerly  conned  the  contents  of  the 
letter.  It  ordered  the  commandant  of  the  Shiro  to  place 
the  entire  Nakashima  family  under  arrest,  because  of  the 
blood-attainder  that  had  been  decreed  against  them  for 
treason  toward  the  Shogun.  Directions,  however,  were 


Ah  Unexpected  Meeting . 


323 


given  that  the  prisoners  should  not  be  removed  from 
their  houses,  but  should  be  allowed  to  remain  there 
under  the  surveillance  of  strong  guards  secreted  about 
the  premises,  in  order  that  when  the  condemned  sons  of 
Nakashima,  who  had  recently  escaped,  should  be  de- 
coyed thither,  they  might  be  pounced  upon  and  cap- 
tured ; but,  if  after  the  lapse  of  thirty  days  they  did  not 
put  in  an  appearance,  then  the  prisoners  were  to  be  ex- 
ecuted in  accordance  with  specifications  to  be  forwarded 
from  Yedo  within  a few  days. 

“ The  miserable  scoundrel  has  laid  his  plans  with  his 
usual  foresight  and  cunning,”  remarked  Konishi,  after 
the  perusal. 

“ He  has  indeed,”  replied  Mr.  Yamada,  thoughtfully. 

“ I see  that  while  Kunisaburo  and  his  family  are  speci- 
fied within  the  terms  of  this  sentence,”  said  Junzo,  “ yet 
you  and  your  wife  do  not  come  within  its  terms.  It  is 
manifest  that  suspicions  have  not  yet  been  excited  against 
yourself.  It  is  only  the  unlucky  Nakashima  family  that 
is  to  be  exterminated.” 

“ That  seems  to  be  the  case,”  was  the  mournful  reply, 
“but  what  will  life  be  to  me  without  my  children  and 
grandchildren  ? My  house  will  be  as  desolate  as  a 
sepulchre  ! That  Bakufu  whelp  might  just  as  well  have 
made  a clean  job  of  it  while  he  was  about  it,  and  have 
swept  me  also  out  of  existence.  However,  things  are 
very  much  simplified  by  the  fact  that  I am  free  from 
suspicion  as  yet.  But  we  have  not  any  time  to  lose  if  we 
wish  to  save  our  friends.  It  is  evident  from  the  terms  of 
this  letter  that  another  courier  will  be  on  the  heels  of  this 
one  in  a few  days.  Until  then  we  can  walk  the  streets  of 
Kioto  with  impunity.  Do  you  feel  equal  to  the  exertions 
of  a night  march  ? ” 

“ I am  ready  for  any  thing,”  replied  Konishi. 

“ And  so  are  we,”  exclaimed  the  brothers  in  one  breath. 

“ Then  let  us  be  off  now,”  said  their  leader.  “ There 
will  be  a bright  moon  to-night,  and  we  can  reach  the 
city  by  daylight,  for  we  can  resume  the  road  and  press 
on  with  greater  speed  than  we  made  while  cutting  across 
the  country  through  by-paths.” 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 


THE  FLIGHT. 

When  the  moonbeams  had  faded  away  from  the  lofty 
crest  of  Hiyeisan,  and  the  blue  peak  of  that  lordly  moun- 
tain stood  forth  clear  and  sharp  against  the  hues  of 
dawning  day,  our  band  of  ronins  had  just  crossed  the 
granite  range  of  high  hills  that  serve  as  a water-shed 
between  Lake  Biwa  and  Yamashiro.  Yonder  lay  Kioto, 
embosomed  in  the  shadows  of  the  vale.  The  mists  that 
had  risen  up  from  the  rice-fields  and  from  the  Kamo- 
gawa  shoals  during  the  night  had  become  chilled  by  the 
cool  breath  of  the  morning,  and  had  shrunk  down  near 
the  earth,  until  their  white  billows  vied  with  the  myriad 
clouds  of  cherry  blossoms  that  embowered  the  foothills 
around  the  city.  The  throbbing,  deep-toned  bells  of  the 
engroved  temples  and  monasteries  were  calling  in  mourn- 
ful tones  the  many  thousands  of  priests  to  chant  the 
orisons  before  numberless  altars.  The  stupendous  voice 
of  the  Chionin  bell  boomed  forth  accents  of  despair- 
ing melody  that  trembled  through  the  vale  at  regular 
intervals. 

But  what  cared  the  ronins  for  all  this  ? Rapidly  did 
they  descend  through  the  woods  on  the  reverse  slope  of 
the  hills,  and  hasten  along  the  highway  toward  the  city. 
As  they  neared  Mr.  Yamada’s  house,  that  crafty  gentle- 
man left  them  at  the  gateway,  while  he  stole  around 
behind  and  entered  the  premises  through  a wicket  in  the 
boxwood  hedge.  The  members  of  his  household  had 
become  accustomed  to  his  abrupt  methods  of  appearing 
before  them,  and  consequently  were  not  alarmed  when 
he  crept  up-stairs  and  blandly  inquired  after  the  health 


324 


The  Flight. 


325 


of  the  invalid.  He  found  all  well.  Going  to  the  gate- 
way he  directed  Tomokichi  to  hasten  at  once  to  Ata- 
go-Yama  and  warn  his  people  to  prepare  for  flight  that 
very  night.  Junzo  was  ordered  off  on  a similar  errand 
in  the  direction  of  Mr.  Akashi’s  plantation.  Konishi  was 
to  come  into  the  house  and  rest  for  the  day.  And  as  soon 
as  darkness  came  on  they  were  all  to  journey  by  cir- 
cuitous routes  to  a given  point  on  the  rugged  borders  of 
the  friendly  Daimiate  of  Iga,  thirty  miles  southeast  of 
Kioto.  After  resting  for  a day  or  so  at  that  point  he 
would  lay  out  their  future  line  of  march.  So  saying,  he 
dismissed  them  with  the  admonition  to  keep  their  hoods 
well  drawn  over  their  faces,  so  as  to  disguise  their 
features. 

Tomokichi  hastened  home  as  fast  as  he  could,  and 
arrived  there  just  as  the  folks  were  sitting  down  to 
breakfast.  Nobody  recognized  the  cowled  figure  as  it 
came  up  to  the  veranda.  Mr.  Nakashima  approached 
with  a stately  bow,  and  inquired  what  might  be  the  ob- 
ject of  the  stranger’s  early  call.  A low  voice  from  the 
depths  of  the  hood  replied  that  there  was  business  of  the 
utmost  importance  that  must  be  communicated  privately. 
Accordingly  Mr.  Nakashima  led  his  strange  visitor  up- 
stairs and  ushered  him  into  one  of  the  back  rooms.  His 
surprise  was  unbounded  when  the  disguise  was  removed. 
For  several  minutes  he  stared  at  his  son  in  blank 
amazement  before  he  could  find  words  to  express  his  as- 
tonishment. 

“ There  seems  to  be  no  doubt  but  what  my  son  Tomo- 
kichi is  now  before  me  ; but  what  is  the  meaning  of  this 
unprecedented  freak  ? ” exclaimed  Mr.  Nakashima  when 
he  had  recovered  from  his  dumbfounded  wonder. 

“ It  means,  my  father,  that  we  have  been  detected  as 
spies  in  Yedo,  and  have  escaped  to  warn  our  families  to 
flee  to  the  mountains,”  replied  Tomokichi. 

“ Oh  ! Is  that  all  ? ” was  the  quiet  response  of  his 
father.  “ Well,  I am  free  to  admit  that  this  event  was 
not  entirely  unexpected.  I did  not  think  that  you  boys 
would  be  able  to  play  your  game  as  long  as  you  have 


326 


Mito  Yashiki. 


already  done.  During  your  first  year  at  Mito  Yashiki  I 
lived  in  constant  dread  of  exposure.  Since  that  time, 
however,  I have  become  calloused  and  indifferent,  just 
like  people  who  live  at  the  base  of  a volcano.  I might 
almost  say  that  I feel  somewhat  relieved  to  know  that  it 
is  all  over  with.  But  why  should  I and  my  family  fly  as 
you  suggest  ? It  seems  to  me  that  you  and  Junzo  are 
the  ones  to  fly.  Let  us  be  up  and  planning  without  de- 
lay. There  are  lots  of  monasteries  about  here  where  you 
can  easily  secrete  yourselves.” 

“ O father  ! You  little  know  that  our  entire  family 
now  trembles  on  the  very  brink  of  a raging  volcano.  It 
is  concerning  this  that  I have  hastened  to  warn  you.” 

“ My  son,  what  do  you  mean  ? I perceive  from  the 
serious  aspect  of  your  countenance  that  you  are  pro- 
foundly agitated, — otherwise  I would  deem  you  to  be 
jesting.” 

“ Know  then,  O father,  that  the  Gotairo,  in  his  blind 
rage,  was  not  satisfied  with  sentencing  Konishi,  Junzo, 
and  myself  to  a painful  death,  but,  in  his  savage  fury,  he 
leaped  beyond  all  bounds  of  moderation,  and  decreed 
blood-attainder  for  treason  against  all  of  our  families, 
thus  exterminating  them  root  and  branch.  As  an  act  of 
special  favor  he  allowed  Konishi’s  father  to  perform 
seppuku , thus  wiping  out  the  blood-attainder  as  to  his 
family.  But  the  unfortunate  Nakashima  family  he  has 
doomed  to  utter  extermination,  root  and  branch.  It  is 
cruel ! It  is  horrible  ! Little  did  we  dream  that  our 
plottings  would  terminate  so  terribly  ! The  thought  that 
my  deeds  should  bring  such  misery  upon  so  many  inno- 
cent people  has  filled  my  heart  with  unutterable  horror 
and  anguish,  causing  me  boundless  humiliation  and 
grief.” 

“ Compose  yourself,  my  son,”  gently  replied  Mr.  Naka- 
shima, “ and  do  not  fret  yourself  needlessly.  VVe  must 
now  act  like  men,  and  not  like  children.  So  that  fiend  has 
decreed  blood-attainder,  has  he  ? Well,  I presume  he 
has  precedent  in  his  favor.  What  a great  misfortune  it 
is  that  our  nation  has  no  written  laws,  such  as  exist  in 


32  7 


The  Flight. 


foreign  countries  ! Here  is  this  unscrupulous  savage 
raking  up-  an  ancient  and  obsolete  custom  to  glut  his 
frightful  vengeance,  and  there  is  no  help  for  it,  simply 
because  this  humane  age  has  not  had  sense  enough  to 
close  the  gates  of  the  barbaric  past  with  a few  statutes  of 
definite  purport  ! Well,  well,  there  is  no  help  for  it.  Our 
enemy  holds  the  hilt,  and  it  behooves  us  to  get  out  of  the 
way  of  the  blade.  Have  you  any  plans  for  escape  ? ” 

“ Every  thing  is  already  arranged.  Make  your  prep- 
arations for  flight  to-night.  Leave  the  house  in  charge 
of  our  faithful  servants.  Then  we  will  journey  around 
to  the  borders  of  Iga,  and  meet  the  others.  From  that 
point  we  will  journey  in  accordance  with  further  instruc- 
tions from  Mr.  Yamada.  I must  sleep  as  much  as  possible 
to-day,  for  I have  had  but  little  rest  for  several  nights.” 

“ I will  order  the  breakfast  to  be  served  up  here,”  said 
Mr.  Nakashima,  “and  we  will  break  the  news  as  gently 
as  possible  to  the  women.  The  time  has  now  come  when 
they  must  be  made  conversant  with  every  thing.” 

The  old  gentleman  then  called  to  his  wife,  and  re- 
quested her  to  bring  the  breakfast  up-stairs.  In  a few 
moments  the  three  ladies  came  up, — Madame  Nakashima 
carrying  the  dishes  on  a tray,  Masago  carrying  the  tub  of 
rice,  and  O-Hana  carrying  the  little  side-dishes.  As  they 
modestly  entered  the  room,  with  downcast  eyes,  they 
did  not  at  first  recognize  Tomokichi,  but,  when  they  had 
set  their  burdens  on  the  floor,  they  looked  up  and  saw 
him.  The  old  lady  stared  in  mute  astonishment.  O- 
Hana  gasped  forth  “ Tomokichi  ! ” in  tones  of  mingled 
joy  and  surprise.  And  Masago,  utterly  oblivious  of  all 
proprieties,  and  acting  on  her  first  impulse,  rushed  for- 
ward, clasped  her  soft,  plump  arms  about  his  neck,  and 
kissed  him  lovingly, — for  all  the  world  like  a demon- 
strative Caucasian  ! The  little  boys,  who  had  brought 
up  the  rear  of  the  procession,  stood  looking  in  at  the 
door  upon  the  strange  actions  of  their  mother,  and 
seemed  undecided  whether  to  advance  or  retreat. 

When  Masago  had  recovered  her  equilibrium,  and  had 
sat  down  beside  her  husband,  with  hands  demurely 


328 


Mito  Yashiki. 


folded  in  her  lap  and  a countenance  wreathed  with  beam- 
ing smiles,  the  little  fellows  then  had  a chance  to  see 
their  father’s  face,  and  they  toddled  forward  and  bowed 
their  heads  to  the  floor  in  reverential  salutation, — well- 
bred  sons  of  a well-bred  mother  as  they  were.  Then 
followed  the  tardy  salutations  of  the  mother  and  daughter, 
together  with  a flood  of  congratulations  and  questions. 
By  degrees  the  sombre  nature  of  the  catastrophe  that 
had  befallen  the  Nakashima  family  was  revealed  to  the 
poor  creatures.  It  took  them  long  to  understand  the 
matter  fully, — for  the  reader  must  bear  in  mind  that 
they  had  never  been  informed  as  to  the  real  nature  of  the 
young  men’s  mission  at  Mito  Yashiki,  but  had  always 
supposed  that  they  were  gentlemen-in-waiting  on  the 
Daimio  of  Mito.  When  the  full  extent  of  the  disaster 
had  dawned  upon  them,  the  reaction  was  most  painful 
to  witness.  The  old  mother  seized  the  hands  of  her 
son  and  bowed  her  head  down  to  the  floor,  overwhelmed 
with  grief.  O-Hana  buried  her  face  in  the  wide  folds 
of  her  sleeves,  and  wept  convulsively.  Masago  clung 
to  her  husband  and  hid  her  face  in  his  bosom.  The 
little  boys,  seeing  such  universal  grief  prevailing  on  all 
sides  of  them,  began  to  cry.  Old  Nakashima  alone  re- 
mained unmoved.  But  his  blanched  face  told  plainly  of 
the  bitter  sorrow  at  his  heart.  He  reached  forth  his 
hands  and  drew  the  little  ones  toward  him,  and  patted 
their  heads,  while  his  bright  eyes  shone  with  moisture. 

It  took  a long  time  for  this  distressing  exhibition  of 
grief  to  subside.  Finally  those  qualities  of  fortitude  and 
devotion,  that  have  rendered  the  frail  and  gentle  coun- 
sellors of  men  so  admirable  in  the  estimation  of  mankind, 
gained  the  mastery  of  their  emotions,  and  they  settled 
down  to  a joyless  breakfast  and  a quiet  deliberation  of 
their  perils.  Toward  the  close  of  the  meal  the  happy 
volatility  of  the  native  temperament  had  gained  the  com- 
plete ascendancy,  so  that  a stranger  glancing  at  the  group 
would  never  have  imagined  that  they  were  sitting  under 
the  shadow  of  death. 

“ It  is  one  consolation,”  sighed  the  mother,  “ to  know 
that  if  we  must  perish,  we  can  all  die  together.” 


The  Flight . 


329 


“ Yea,  verily ! ” exclaimed  Masago,  with  an  emphasis 
suggestive  of  a fierce  exultation,  “and  also  to  know  that 
I shall  not  die  by  the  hand  of  a stranger,  and  that  my 
face  shall  not  mirror  itself  in  the  waters  of  the  Kamo- 
gawa.  Oh,  my  husband,  remember  that  you  have  pledged 
me  this  upon  your  knightly  word.” 

“ But  why  talk  of  death  at  all  ? ” chimed  in  the  blithe- 
some sister,  unable  longer  to  endure  the  gloomy  tone  of 
the  conversation.  “ Surely  we  all  have  many  days  of  life 
yet  to  live,  and  who  knows  but  what  we  may  escape  en- 
tirely ? We,  too,  are  ronins,  and  shall  join  this  desperate 
band  of  wayward  desperadoes  in  their  wild  rambles  over 
the  country.  How  gay  ! How  gay  ! ” — and  the  merry 
young  lady  actually  clapped  her  hands  in  glee  at  the 
thought. 

“ Daughter,  be  still ! ” said  her  father  in  rebuking 
tones.  “ This  is  no  time  for  merriment.  Our  condition 
is  far  too  serious  to  be  discussed  otherwise  than  in  the 
most  solemn  manner.” 

“ Sir,”  said  Tomokichi,  “ I do  not  know  but  what  she 
is  adopting  the  wisest  course.  Let  us  all  act  cheerfully 
even  if  we  feel  gloomy,  and  let  us  try  to  live  the  balance 
of  our  lives  as  happily  as  possible.” 

“ Perhaps  you  are  right,  my  son,”  sadly  replied  his 
father,  “ perhaps  it  would  be  better  to  get  all  the  enjoy- 
ment we  can  out  of  what  remains  to  us  of  this  life.  But 
we  must  now  be  making  our  preparations  for  flight.  You 
women  keep  up  your  spirits  and  act  just  as  if  nothing 
had  happened.  You,  my  son,  go  to  sleep  and  take  no 
further  care  about  things  until  we  wake  you  up  to  start. 
And  I will  go  out  and  engage  some  kagos.” 

And  so  the  sad  company  dispersed.  Tomokichi  slept 
peacefully  until  sundown.  The  ladies  packed  up  a few 
small  bundles  and  were  ready  for  the  journey, — so  simple 
a thing  was  it  in  that  land  to  go  travelling  ! The  stranger 
glancing  in  at  the  gateway  would  never  have  imagined 
that  the  quiet  and  cheerful  household  were  beneath  a 
sword  that  hung  by  a thread.  The  evening  meal  was 
served  an  hour  later  than  usual,  and  the  sleeper  was  duly 
roused  to  partake  of  it.  When  it  was  over  the  house  was 


330 


Mito  Yashiki. 


closed  and  placed  in  charge  of  the  faithful  servant  who 
had  served  the  family  so  long.  Instructions  were  left  to 
answer  all  inquiries  by  saying  that  the  family  had  gone 
to  Osaca  on  a visit.  Then  the  ladies  and  the  children 
were  carefully  put  into  the  kagos,  the  bundles  were  tied 
on  the  top,  and  the  party  was  ready  to  depart. 

“ O,  dear  me  ! ” exclaimed  that  maiden  O-Hana,  “ I 
surely  must  not  forget  my  battledoor  and  shuttlecock. 
And  there  is  my  precious  kitten  also  ! It  would  never 
do  to  leave  her  behind.  That  would  indeed  precipitate 
bad  luck.”  And  out  she  jumped  from  her  kago  and 
rushed  into  the  house  to  secure  her  treasures. 

“ Silly  child,  come  back  ! ” exclaimed  her  father  in 
severe  tones.  “ This  is  not  the  time  for  such  folly.  When 
will  you  ever  learn  to  act  otherwise  than  as  a foolish 
child  ? ” 

“ Never  mind  her  whims,  father,”  interposed  Tomo- 
kichi ; “ let  her  have  them.  It  will  be  good  policy  to  put 
on  an  air  of  pleasure  as  we  are  starting,  in  order  to  give 
our  neighbors  the  impression  that  we  are  pleasure-seek- 
ers. It  will  not  do  for  our  departure  to  have  either  the 
appearance  of  a flight  or  of  a funeral  procession.  The 
more  jolly  and  cheerful  we  seem  the  better  will  it  be  for 
us.” 

“ Very  well,  my  son,”  replied  the  old  gentleman,  as  the 
scowl  faded  from  his  brow  while  watching  the  young  man 
help  to  chase  the  frisky  kitten  about  the  yard.  When  it 
had  finally  been  caught  and  placed  in  the  kago  in  the  lap 
of  its  mistress,  he  slowly  shook  his  fan  at  his  wayward 
daughter  and  exclaimed  : “ Take  warning,  young  woman  ! 
I am  going  to  marry  you  to  the  very  next  eligible  young 
man  that  makes  application  for  you.  Too  long  have  I 
put  this  matter  off  in  deference  to  your  childish  protests. 
Before  I know  it  I shall  have  an  old  woman  on  my 
hands.  Now  remember  that  hereafter  no  excuses  will 
avail.  You  are  entirely  too  lively.  We  shall  see  if  there 
be  any  way  of  sobering  you  down  a bit  at  a very  early 
date.” 

“ Oh,  my  father  ! Do  not  overwhelm  me  with  con- 


The  Flight. 


33i 


fusion  before  these  strangers,”  protested  that  lively  young 
lady,  as  she  fanned  the  kitten  vigorously  with  her  battle- 
door.  “ Indeed  I am  very  obedient,  and  will  marry  the 
very  next  young  fellow  that  you  may  choose  for  me  ! ” 

“ Remember  your  promise,  young  miss,”  said  her 
father,  as  he  gave  the  signal  for  starting. 

They  went  down  the  glen  as  far  as  the  Kioto  road,  and 
then  turned  southward  toward  Osaca,  and  journeyed 
many  miles  until  they  came  to  a village  where  they 
changed  bearers.  Then  they  changed  their  course  and 
went  eastward,  passing  across  the  flat  region  of  country 
that  lay  south  of  Kioto.  All  night  did  they  travel. 
Every  few  miles  they  changed  their  bearers.  Toward 
morning  they  entered  the  delightful  hill  country  border- 
ing the  Daimiates  of  Iga  and  Yamato.  For  mile  after 
mile  did  they  press  onward  through  this  beautiful  region, 
gradually  approaching  the  mighty  mountains  of  those  two 
Daimiates.  Late  in  the  day  they  reached  the  designated 
village  on  the  frowning  borders  of  Iga.  Here  they  met 
the  tearful  families  of  Junzo  and  Kunisaburo.  These 
sorrowful  people  had  been  through  scenes  much  resem- 
bling those  already  described  in  this  chapter.  Mr.  Ya- 
mada  and  Konishi  were  to  arrive  on  the  next  day.  Until 
their  arrival  everybody  was  to  make  time  pass  as  pleas- 
antly as  possible.  Four  rooms  were  engaged  in  a hotel 
picturesquely  situated  near  a stream  that  rushed  down 
the  glade.  The  ladies  at  once  got  together  in  an  upper 
room  and  had  a good  cry  ; after  which  they  appeared  as 
fresh  and  bright  as  a June  day  after  a shower. 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 


MOUNTAIN  SCENES. 

The  territory  that  stretches  for  one  hundred  and  fifty 
miles  due  south  of  Kioto,  and  which  terminates  in  the 
magnificent  promontory  of  Kii,  comprises  one  of  the 
grandest  mountain  regions  of  the  Japanese  empire. 
Jutting  boldly  far  out  into  the  deep  waters  of  the  Pacific 
Ocean,  where  the  mighty  whales  sport  amid  the  waves 
that  wash  its  stupendous  foundations,  the  rugged  shores 
of  this  rock-bound  promontory  bend  back  and  trend 
toward  the  northwest  and  toward  the  northeast,  thus 
forming  a gigantic  wedge,  cleaving  the  ocean’s  bed.  The 
northwest  bend  terminates  in  the  peaceful  waters  of  the 
Inland  Sea,  while  the  northeastern  one  terminates  in 
Owari  bay.  In  the  widest  part — about  midway  up  the 
coasts — this  Alpine  region  is  about  one  hundred  and 
fifty  miles  wide.  The  important  Daimiates  of  Senshiu, 
Kawachi,  Kii,  Yamato,  Ise,  and  Iga  were  situated  within 
this  large  district. 

The  Daimiate  of  Kii,  or  Kii-shiu  as  it  was  generally 
designated,  was  the  southernmost  one,  and,  conforming 
as  it  did  to  the  coast  lines,  it  was  triangular  in  shape.  It 
was  grandly  and  superbly  rugged  throughout  its  entire 
length  and  breadth,  especially  so  along  its  eastern  face. 
With  its  southern  exposure,  and  with  the  tepid  floods  of 
the  Black  Stream  laving  its  shores,  it  had  a mild  and  de- 
lightful climate.  The  mighty  ranges  behind  it  screened 
it  from  the  north  winds,  thus  making  it  the  choicest 
orange  district  in  the  empire.  Forty  different  varieties 
of  this  delicious  fruit  were  cultivated  upon  the  slopes  of 
the  hills  fringing  the  shores.  To  descend  into  the  sweet 


332 


Mountain  Scenes. 


333 


valley  of  the  Arida  during  the  heavenly  winter  months, 
when  the  hills,  as  far  as  the  eye  could  reach,  were  covered 
with  the  golden  fruit,  was  one  of  the  sights  of  earth. 
Kii-shiu  was  truly  one  of  the  choicest  Daimiates  in  the 
realm.  Watered  with  innumerable  streams  that  dashed 
across  it  in  speedy  course  from  the  highlands  to  the  sea, 
bathed  in  perpetual  sunshine,  and  fanned  with  the  warm 
southern  zephyrs, — what  wonder  that  this  should  have 
been  the  home  of  the  camphor  tree  and  of  the  citrus  ? 
Here  the  camellia  shrub  grew  to  the  full  stature  of  a tree, 
and  the  magnolia  and  the  cape  jessamine  assumed  gi- 
gantic proportions.  Verily,  the  place  might  well  have 
been  the  home  of  the  gods,  for  temples  innumerable  were 
scattered  all  over  the  province, — from  the  magnificent 
monastery  of  Koya-san,  that  lifted  its  deeply  shaded  crest 
nearly  five  thousand  feet  above  the  sea,  down  to  the  little 
shrines  beside  the  deep  inlets  where  the  devout  fisherman 
needs  must  ring  the  bell  to  rouse  the  drowsy  gods  from 
their  dreamy  siestas. 

Then  came  the  classic  province  of  Yamato,  which  was 
yet  grander  in  its  mountain  scenery.  This  Daimiate 
split  its  way  deep  into  the  back  of  Kii-shiu  like  a gigan- 
tic plough,  until  its  southernmost  point  came  within 
twenty  miles  of  the  Pacific  Ocean.  Its  scenery  was  sur- 
passingly sublime  and  beautiful,  the  superb  mountains 
being  packed  together  in  awful  grandeur,  and  rolling 
away  in  adamantine  billows  as  far  as  the  eye  could  reach. 
The  lofty  peaks  towered  to  an  altitude  of  over  six  thou- 
sand feet.  Here  dwelt  the  bear,  the  wild  boar,  the  goat- 
faced deer,  the  monkey,  and  the  panther.  The  oak,  the 
beech,  the  chestnut,  the  cryptomeria,  and  the  camphor 
tree  draped  the  landscape  with  sylvan  beauty.  Hamlets, 
shrines,  temples,  and  monasteries  were  scattered  in  all 
available  spots.  In  the  heart  of  this  province,  near  the 
town  of  Tosamachi,  was  located  the  tomb  of  Jimmu 
Tenno,  who  founded  the  dynasty  of  the  Mikados  over 
twenty-five  centuries  ago. 

To  the  northeast  of  Yamato  lay  Iga,  which  was  almost 
equally  mountainous.  The  Daimiate  of  Ise  skirted  the 


334 


Mito  Yashiki. 


shores  of  Owari  bay,  and  was  quite  flat  in  its  northern 
part,  but  became  very  rugged  and  grand  in  its  southern 
portions. 

Thus,  it  will  be  perceived,  our  refugees  had  succeeded 
in  escaping  into  a region  where  it  would  be  very  difficult 
to  catch  them.  They  could  most  effectually  secrete 
themselves  among  the  vast  solitudes  of  this  promontory. 
It  would  take  a large  force  to  hunt  them  down  in  those 
secluded  regions,  where  they  could  easily  fly  from  valley 
to  valley  without  leaving  any  tracks  behind  them.  When 
driven  from  human  habitations  they  could  fly  to  the  vast 
and  pathless  forests  upon  the  remotest  slopes,  and  defy 
pursuit.  Even  if  driven  from  these  forest  solitudes  they 
still  could  slip  down  to  the  shore  and  escape  to  the  broad 
ocean  in  a boat.  And  if  supreme  misfortune  should  over- 
take them,  they  could  with  their  own  hands  free  their 
spirits  from  further  pursuit  and  vex  their  enemies  with 
the  empty  cages.  But  it  was  not  at  all  likely  that  the  Go- 
tairo  would  have  either  the  time  or  the  inclination  to 
send  an  army  chasing  over  the  mountains  after  the  fugi- 
tives. His  plan  would  be  to  wait  until  his  spies  made  re- 
port as  to  the  Daimiate  into  which  they  had  fled,  and 
then  to  demand  of  the  Daimio  their  immediate  surrender, 
and  holding  him  responsible  for  their  capture  and 
delivery.  But  with  Daimios  hostile  to  him,  as  were 
those  of  Iga  and  Yamato,  this  would  not  be  a very  easy 
task,  for  these  magnates  would  probably  refuse  to  take 
official  cognizance  of  the  presence  of  strangers  within 
their  borders,  and  thus  deny  the  allegation  of  the  Gotairo 
that  any  such  individuals  were  there.  If,  upon  proof, 
the  presence  of  strangers  should  be  forced  upon  their  at- 
tention, then  they  would  probably  be  so  dilatory  in  their 
movements  that  the  fugitives  would  be  thereby  enabled 
to  escape  over  the  border  into  somebody  else’s  jurisdic- 
tion. Secret  warnings  could  always  be  communicated  in 
advance,  so  that  capture  would  be  impossible.  In  those 
days  they  managed  such  things  very  well  in  Japan. 

Therefore,  the  Nakashima  family  was  comparatively 
safe  for  a time  at  least.  But  Mr.  Yamada  did  not  intend 


Mountain  Scenes. 


335 


to  let  them  remain  where  they  were  ; he  intended  to 
send  them  southward,  far  into  the  mountain  fastnesses  of 
Yamato.  He  selected  a lofty  plateau  nearly  five  thou- 
sand feet  above  sea-level,  known  as  the  Odaigahara,  and 
situated  in  the  wildest  and  most  broken  section  of  the 
promontory,  at  a point  where  the  three  provinces  of  Ise, 
Kii,  and  Yamato  join  corners,  about  twenty  miles  from 
the  ocean.  They  would  thus  be  in  a position  to  step 
from  province  to  province  with  the  utmost  ease,  and 
finally  to  take  to  water  in  case  the  land  became  too  hot 
to  hold  them.  With  such  admirable  foresight  did  that 
cunning  man  lay  his  plans  ! 

After  resting  a day,  the  journey  was  resumed  along 
the  rapidly  ascending  road  that  led  up  into  the  mountain 
barriers  that  looked  down  upon  the  rice  flats  of  Ise  and 
the  blue  waters  of  Owari  bay.  Here  Mr.  Yamada  took 
leave  of  the  party  and  returned  to  Kioto,  bent  on  further 
schemes  of  daring  espionage.  He  placed  Mr.  Nakashima 
in  command  of  the  expedition,  and  left  in  his  hands  a 
full  description  of  the  country  through  which  he  was  to 
pass  ; for  this  far-sighted  man  had  during  the  five  pre- 
vious years  of  leisure  made  extensive  and  minute  geo- 
graphical surveys  of  this  entire  promontory  in  anticipa- 
tion of  some  such  emergency.  While  the  young  men 
were  on  duty  at  Mito  Yashiki  he  had  improved  the  time 
in  making  pilgrimages  to  all  the  shrines  and  temples  south 
of  Kioto.  As  the  entire  promontory  was  full  of  holy 
places,  this  devout  man  tramped  over  every  section  of 
Kii-shiu,  Iga,  Ise,  and  Yamato,  thus  becoming  perfectly 
familiar  with  the  entire  country  and  able  to  follow  every 
by-path.  Every  village  was  known  to  him,  for  he  had 
maps  showing  every  thing.  He  had  taken  particular  pre- 
caution each  summer,  as  he  started  out  on  his  pilgrim- 
ages, to  let  everybody  know  the  object  of  his  journey,  so 
that  his  reputation  for  sanctified  devotion  permeated 
even  the  moats  and  walls  of  the  Shiro  where  the  com- 
mandant took  special  delight  in  twitting  Captain  Murata 
about  his  early  suspicions  concerning  this  holy  man  of 
pilgrimages  and  prayers. 


336 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


By  degrees  he  had  footed  it  over  every  road  in  the 
promontory  without  exciting  the  slightest  suspicion,  for, 
during  the  summer  months,  multitudes  flocked  through 
that  region  visiting  the  innumerable  shrines  and  temples 
scattered  by  sea-shore  and  mountain  stream.  Nor  had 
he  confined  his  exertions  to  this  region,  but  had  dili- 
gently visited  the  shrines  to  the  east,  north,  and  west  of 
Kioto  also.  It  was  thus  that  he  was  able  with  such 
swiftnesss  to  cut  across  the  country  from  Ise  to  Lake 
Biwa  and  intercept  the  despatches.  He  was  thoroughly 
familiar  with  every  by-road  and  mountain  path.  While 
he  had  found  much  wild  and  rugged  mountain  country 
to  the  north  of  Kioto,  yet  did  he  prefer  the  confused 
medley  of  ranges  in  the  promontory  to  the  south,  partly 
because  of  the  friendly  character  of  the  Daimios  of  Iga 
and  Yamato,  partly  because  of  the  proximity  of  the 
ocean,  and  partly  because  of  the  extreme  difficulty  in- 
volved in  finding  anybody  once  lost  in  those  vast  forests 
and  broken  valleys. 

And  so  he  left  them  with  cheerful  words  of  parting 
and  journeyed  back  to  Kioto  to  await  further  develop- 
ments. He  had  calculated  that  the  despatches  from 
Yedo  would  be  due  within  four  or  five  days  after  his 
return.  In  the  meantime  he  could  be  industriously  cir- 
culating the  report  that  the  Nakashima  family  had  gone 
on  a pilgrimage  to  some  shrines  among  the  moun- 
tains north  of  Kioto.  With  the  system  of  espionage 
that  he  had  so  carefully  developed  during  the  last  few 
years  in  and  about  the  city  he  could  keep  posted  on  all 
the  movements  of  his  enemies  without  being  detected. 
Although  as  yet  free  from  suspicion,  nevertheless  he 
very  well  knew  that  this  state  of  affairs  could  not  very 
long  continue.  He  weighed  the  chances  carefully,  how- 
ever, and  had  come  to  the  conclusion  that  he  could  do 
more  good  at  home  for  the  present,  and  that  he  would 
stay  there  until  his  spies  signalled  the  approach  of  some- 
body from  the  Shiro,  when  he  would  leave  his  wife  and 
servants  in  charge  of  the  premises  and  would  retire  from 
the  scene  until  the  purport  of  the  visit  should  be  dis- 


Mountain  Scenes. 


337 


closed.  The  risk  was  certainly  very  great,  but  the  man 
was  eminently  daring  and  crafty. 

After  taking  leave  of  Mr.  Yamada,  the  party  jour- 
neyed by  easy  stages  for  many  days  far  into  the  moun- 
tains toward  the  point  of  destination.  Sometimes  they 
would  spend  nearly  an  entire  day  in  slowly  climbing  the 
precipitous  sides  of  some  lofty  range  where  human  habi- 
tations were  very  few  and  very  far  between  ; where,  for 
hours,  at  a time,  they  heard  nothing  but  the  voices  of 
the  cascades  and  torrents  echoing  the  breezes  that  whis- 
pered through  the  immense  forests  of  oak,  cryptomeria, 
and  chestnut  ; where,  from  some  overhanging  crag,  the 
goat-faced  deer  peered  at  them  curiously  as  they  climbed 
upward  ; and  where  the  spotted  gazelles  fled  deeper  into 
the  sylvan  solitudes  as  the  unaccustomed  sounds  of 
shouting  and  of  laughter  disturbed  the  silence  of  those 
rocky  heights.  They  would  spend  the  night  at  some 
hamlet  perched  far  up  among  the  crags  at  the  summit, 
where  they  would  find  the  startled  inhabitants  ready  to 
fly  at  the  sight  of  such  an  unusual  incursion  of  strangers. 
But  their  fears  would  soon  be  put  to  flight  by  the 
friendly  appearance  of  the  party,  and  then  they  would 
hasten  to  place  at  the  disposal  of  their  guests  the  best 
accommodations  in  the  hamlet.  Brook  trout  from  the 
neighboring  streams  would  be  daintily  broiled  over  the 
hebachi.  Delicious  sweet  potatoes,  that  had  been  culti- 
vated in  stockaded  clearings  to  save  them  from  the  dep- 
redations of  wild-boars  and  porcupines  that  dearly 
loved  to  revel  over  them,  were  nicely  boiled  in  earthen 
pots  and  made  ready  for  the  evening  meal.  The  good 
people  then  brought  forth  their  treasures  of  soy,  pickled 
plums,  and  salted  shrimps,  to  tempt  the  appetites  of  the 
travellers. 

When  the  rice  was  thoroughly  cooked  the  meal  would 
be  served  in  that  room  whence  the  most  picturesque 
outlook  could  be  obtained.  As  far  as  the  eye  could 
reach,  the  blue  mountains  rolled  away  to  the  horizon  in 
endless  waves  and  were  bathed  in  the  shadows  and  mists 
that  heralded  the  speedy  approach  of  night.  Joyous 


338 


Mito  Yashiki. 


and  hearty  would  be  the  repast.  After  it  had  terminated 
the  little  ones  would  be  carried  off  by  their  mothers  to 
be  duly  put  to  bed,  where  they  would  soon  be  found 
asleep  beneath  the  heavy  quilts,  for  in  those  altitudes  the 
night  air  was  very  chilly  even  in  mid-summer.  Then  the 
company  of  ladies  and  gentlemen  would  gather  on  the 
veranda  overlooking  the  vast  and  motionless  panorama 
stretched  before  them,  and  would  view  the  serene  majesty 
of  the  scene  as  they  talked  over  the  events  of  the  day 
and  ventured  timid  surmises  as  to  the  future.  Long 
after  the  moon  had  cast  its  spectral  mantle  over  the  bil- 
lowy landscape  did  they  tarry  and  sip  their  tea.  At 
length  they  dispersed  and  were  soon  buried  in  slumbers 
known  only  to  those  who  have  journeyed  over  lofty 
mountains  and  have  quaffed  with  their  lungs  the  crisp 
atmosphere  of  great  altitudes.  But  the  moon  shone  on, 
and  cast  his  beams  into  the  dark  ravines  where  dwelt 
the  panther,  the  wolf,  and  the  fox,  to  guide  them  as  they 
scoured  the  remote  fastnesses  for  their  prey. 

Bright  and  early  in  the  morning  our  friends  would  de- 
scend the  reverse  slope  of  the  range.  Down,  down, 
down  through  the  endless  forests  of  beech,  maple,  kayaki , 
hinoki , and  camphor  trees,  would  they  slowly  sink  like  a 
balloon  settling  in  clouds.  The  monkeys  gibbered  at 
them  from  the  boughs.  The  ibex  glanced  askance  at 
the  uncanny  sight  and  leaped  into  the  bamboo  copses  to 
ruminate  over  the  matter  at  leisure.  An  occasional  wild- 
boar,  returning  from  his  depredations  in  some  barley 
field  or  potato  patch,  halted  as  he  crossed  their  path  and 
then  fled  in  terror  lest  these  might  be  the  avenging  Ne- 
mesis of  his  night’s  devastations.  Down,  down,  down, 
yet  lower  into  the  land  of  terraced  rice  fields  and  millet 
patches,  down  where  the  trout  sported  in  the  brooks 
and  where  the  complaining  wheel  of  some  rustic  mill 
filled  the  valley  with  its  dreary  music, — went  the  strag- 
gling procession.  The  peasant  shades  his  eyes  and  gazes 
in  blank  amazement  at  the  sworded  knights  and  fair 
ladies,  and  wonders  whether  these  people  have  fallen  from 
the  clouds  upon  his  native  village.  A few  kind  words, 


Mountain  Scenes. 


339 


however,  dispel  all  fears  ; and  the  gracious  manners  of 
the  ladies  quite  win  the  hearts  of  the  simple  rustics,  who 
forthwith  bestir  themselves  to  prepare  the  midday  meal 
for  their  unexpected  guests.  Then  the  journey  is  resumed 
up  the  other  side  of  the  deep  valley,  and  evening  overtakes 
the  travellers  at  a romantic  little  hamlet  about  half-way 
to  the  summit  where  they  pass  the  night  and  resume 
their  journey  in  the  morning. 

And  thus  they  journeyed  for  ten  days,  doing  little  else 
but  to  commence  climbing  one  mountain  just  as  soon  as 
they  had  descended  one.  Sometimes,  however,  the  road  led 
among  the  hamlets  at  the  base  of  the  valley.  Sometimes 
it  followed  the  mountain  side  for  many  miles.  But  such 
variations  were  not  common.  The  road  soon  became 
tired  of  the  monotonous  level  and  sought  the  air  of  the 
bracing  altitudes.  On  the  morning  of  the  tenth  day 
they  began  to  climb  up  to  the  lofty  plateau  of  Odaiga- 
hara,  where  they  were  to  rest  until  further  orders.  The 
grandeur  and  the  magnificence  of  this  promontory 
seemed  to  culminate  about  this  black  mass  of  mountains. 
Up,  up,  up  through  vast  forests  of  hinoki , cryptomeria, 
beech,  yew,  oak,  chestnut,  and  maple,  crept  the  kagos 
until  they  had  attained  an  elevation  of  nearly  five  thou- 
sand feet  above  sea-level.  Here,  as  they  emerged  from 
the  woods,  they  came  out  upon  a grassy  district,  con- 
taining fully  thirty  square  miles  of  meadow  and  forest, 
around  which  towered  summits  to  yet  loftier  heights, — 
that  of  Odaigahara-yama,  attaining  an  altitude  of  nearly 
six  thousand  feet.  From  its  top  there  was  a superb  out- 
look. On  one  side  you  gazed  down  upon  Iga,  Ise,  and 
Yamato,  while  on  the  other  side  your  eye  took  in  the 
coast  of  Kii-shiu,  the  deep-blue  billows  of  the  Pacific, 
and  (on  a clear  day)  even  the  crests  of  Fujisan,  fully  two 
hundred  miles  up  the  coasts.  Beautiful  groves  of  maple, 
oak,  and  chestnut  were  scattered  about  in  this  vast 
mountain  basin,  and  many  wild  animals  similar  to  those 
found  in  the  regions  already  traversed  by  our  party 
abounded  in  the  vicinity,  while  the  streams  were  filled 
with  trout. 


34° 


Mito  Yashiki. 


Mr.  Nakashima  decided  to  halt  here  for  the  midday 
meal.  Accordingly,  head-quarters  were  established  be- 
neath an  immense  maple  tree  that  overshadowed  a brook. 
While  the  children  tumbled  about  on  the  grass  the  kago 
bearers  industriously  built  an  oven  with  stones  from  the 
stream  and  proceeded  to  boil  the  rice  in  a large  iron  pot 
that  had  been  brought  along  in  anticipation  of  such 
“camping  out.”  And  the  young  men,  after  securing 
some  bait,  went  a little  distance  up  stream  and  tried  their 
luck  at  fishing.  In  a short  time  they  had  captured  a 
dozen  fine  specimens  of  trout  and  brought  them  back  to 
be  broiled  for  lunch.  It  was  a very  jolly  pic-nic  party 
that  gathered  about  the  steaming  rice  and  demolished 
innumerable  bowls  full  of  that  snowy  substance.  While 
they  ate  their  meal,  the  bearers  respectfully  withdrew  to 
a deep  pool  some  distance  down  stream  and  bathed  and 
shouted  to  their  hearts’  content.  After  that  they  came 
back  with  most  formidable  appetites  and  utterly  annihi- 
lated the  allowance  of  rice  and  fish  that  had  been  set 
aside  for  them.  Mr.  Nakashima,  in  token  of  his  appre- 
ciation of  their  faithful  and  arduous  services,  warmed  up 
some  sake  and  dealt  it  out  liberally  to  them  until  the 
happy  fellows  were  ready  to  pledge  themselves  to  carry 
him  to  the  uttermost  limits  of  the  empire. 

Everybody  was  in  the  most  jovial  spirits  when  the 
journey  was  resumed,  and  they  set  out  on  the  last  stretch 
that  intervened  between  them  and  their  destination. 
Journeying  slowly  through  this  beautiful  region  of  ver- 
dure and  streams,  they  finally  reached  its  southern 
boundary,  where  they  took  a road  that  led  out  to  the 
edge  of  the  mountain  barrier  overlooking  the  ocean,  that 
lay  but  a few  miles  beneath.  At  that  point  there  was  a 
little  monastery  romantically  perched  among  the  crags. 
Mr.  Yamada,  on  one  of  his  excursions,  had  noted  the  de- 
lightful spot,  and,  on  his  return  to  Kioto,  had  used  his 
influence  to  have  one  of  his  friends  appointed  as  the 
abbot  of  the  institution.  To  this  individual  Mr.  Naka- 
shima was  now  carrying  letters  of  introduction.  Late  in 
the  afternoon  our  party  rounded  a bold  spur  of  the 


Mountain  Scenes. 


341 


mountains  and  saw  before  them,  through  the  trees,  the 
blue  waves  of  the  ocean  rolling  against  the  rock  ribbed 
shores  far  beneath  them.  A few  more  steps  brought 
them  to  the  sequestered  retreat  of  the  monks. 

The  massive  bell  was  booming  forth  in  melancholy 
tones  the  vesper  summons,  and  the  yellow-robed  priests 
were  marching  in  solemn  procession  from  their  dormi- 
tories toward  the  main  temple  to  chant  Sanskrit  rhythms 
before  the  gloomy  altars.  The  priest  at  the  main  en- 
trance directed  our  friends  up  the  steep  mountain  side 
to  the  house  of  the  abbot.  They  climbed  up  quite  a 
distance  through  the  forest  and  finally  came  to  a terrace 
having  its  front  walled  up  to  a height  of  about  twenty 
feet  with  rough  stones.  Hereon  was  perched  the  very 
comfortable  abode  of  the  abbot,  which  was  approached 
by  a long  flight  of  moss-grown  steps  leading  up  through 
the  crvptomeria  groves  on  the  right-hand  side.  But  that 
reverend  gentleman  was  at  that  moment  conducting  the 
services  in  the  temple.  An  attendant  hastily  went  down 
and  handed  to  him  Mr.  Yamada’s  letters  of  introduction. 
Quickly  summoning  his  assistant,  the  abbot  directed  him 
to  continue  the  services  and  then  hurried  up  to  the 
house,  glancing  over  the  letters  as  he  went.  He  at  once 
comprehended  the  situation.  With  great  cordiality  he 
invited  his  guests  into  the  house,  after  having  soundly 
berated  the  servants  for  having  left  them  standing  at  the 
gateway.  The  kagos  were  then  carefully  stowed  away  in 
a shed,  and  the  bearers  were  paid  and  dismissed  with  a 
few  presents,  which  the  grateful  fellows  dropped  flat 
down  on  the  ground  to  acknowledge. 

Orders  were  then  given  for  the  hot  bath  to  be  prepared 
for  the  stiff  and  weary  travellers,  and  for  the  larder  to  be 
taxed  to  its  uttermost  capacity  in  preparing  the  evening 
meal.  Cushions  were  spread  on  the  tatamis  in  the  front 
room,  Jiebachis  filled  with  glowing  charcoal  were  brought, 
— for  the  evenings  were  as  yet  quite  chilly, — and  the 
choicest  tea  and  tobacco  were  served.  After  a little 
rest  the  ladies  were  allotted  the  corner  room  that  opened 
out  on  the  veranda,  and  which  adjoined  the  reception- 


342 


Mito  Yashiki. 


room,  where  they  were  then  sitting  ; and  the  gentlemen 
were  allotted  the  other  corner  room  on  the  opposite  side. 
Then  the  bath  was  announced  to  be  ready.  When  every- 
body had  boiled  themselves  therein  to  their  full  satisfac- 
tion, the  rice  was  declared  ready.  An  assault  thereon 
was  at  once  delivered,  which  speedily  developed  into  a 
systematic  and  well  sustained  attack  that  lasted  until  the 
host  feared  that  with  such  appetites  on  his  hands  there 
would  soon  be  a famine  in  those  regions. 

After  dinner  the  gentlemen  gathered  in  the  reception- 
room  and  fully  discussed  the  situation.  The  letters  had 
only  furnished  information  of  a general  nature,  so  that 
Mr.-  Nakashima  was  obliged  to  explain  matters  more 
fully.  When  the  abbot  had  thoroughly  grasped  the 
situation  he  most  cordially  extended  the  hospitality  of 
his  roof  to  the  fugitives  for  an  indefinite  length  of  time, 
— for  he  detested  the  Bakufu  most  heartily  and  rejoiced 
in  being  able  to  aid  in  sheltering  its  enemies.  * * * 

Four  months  have  passed  away.  The  fugitives  are 
still  at  the  monastery.  A few  days  after  their  arrival  Ko- 
nishi  and  Junzo  were  absorbed  in  a game  of  chess  upon 
the  front  veranda,  when  they  were  disturbed  by  a small 
pebble  falling  on  the  ground  near  them.  Looking  up 
they  perceived  the  head  and  shoulders  of  a strange  man 
peering  over  the  boxwood  hedge  at  them.  This  beauti- 
ful barrier  of  evergreen  surrounded  the  premises  on  all 
sides,  and,  at  the  point  where  the  stranger  was  standing, 
it  separated  the  yard  from  the  forest.  When  he  saw  that 
their  attention  had  been  attracted  he  cautiously  beckoned 
for  them  to  approach.  Puzzled  at  this  curious  proceed- 
ing, Konishi  and  Junzo  went  toward  the  man,  and,  after 
noting  that  he  was  quite  alone  and  apparently  unarmed, 
they  came  close  up  to  the  hedge  and  inquired  what  he 
wanted. 

“ I am  the  bearer  of  private  despatches  from  Mr. 
Yamada  to  Mr.  Konishi,”  was  the  low  response,  “ and  I 
must  deliver  them  in  person  and  take  his  receipt.  Can 
either  of  you  gentlemen  tell  me  where  he  is  ?” 

“ I am  Konishi,”  replied  that  young  gentleman. 


Mountain  Scenes. 


343 


“ Then  if  you  will  kindly  come  into  the  woods  here  I 
will  deliver  the  despatches,”  said  the  stranger,  “and  I 
have  a receipt  already  drawn  up  and  ready  for  your  sig- 
nature, so  that  you  need  not  take  more  than  a moment 
of  time.  I do  not  wish  to  be  seen  by  anybody,  for  in  my 
line  of  business  it  is  the  safest  policy  to  be  seen  by  as  few 
persons  as  possible.  By  the  way,  here  is  the  countersign 
which  you  can  compare  with  the  code  placed  in  your 
hands  by  Mr.  Yamada,  and  thus  identify  me  to  your 
entire  satisfaction.  I will  now  hasten  to  the  large  rock 
beside  the  spring  back  there  in  the  woods,  and  will  meet 
you  there.” 

The  young  men  hurried  back  to  the  house,  and  found 
that  the  countersign  tallied  with  the  code.  Then  they 
slipped  out  by  a wicket  gate  in  the  hedge,  and  were  soon 
lost  in  the  forest.  After  a brisk  walk  they  reached  the 
spring,  and  found  the  stranger  sitting  on  the  rock,  with 
writing  materials  spread  out  ready  for  immediate  use. 
He  drew  forth  from  beneath  his  garment  a small  package, 
which  he  respectfully  handed  to  Konishi,  at  the  same 
time  politely  requesting  him  to  sign  the  receipt  without 
delay,  as  he  must  start  on  his  return  at  once.  Konishi 
did  as  the  man  requested. 

“ Honorable  sirs,  I bid  you  adieu,”  said  that  myste- 
rious gentleman,  as  he  took  the  receipt  and  vanished  into 
the  forests. 

Konishi  then  sat  down  upon  the  rock  and  unrolled 
the  paper  wrappings  from  the  parcel,  and  found  a short 
sword  and  a letter  in  Mr.  Yamada’s  handwriting  addressed 
to  himself.  Konishi  at  once  recognized  the  sword  as  his 
father’s,  and,  drawing  it  from  its  scabbard  and  perceiving 
the  blood-stains  along  its  keen  edge,  he  at  once  read  the 
ghastly  tale  that  it  told.  An  extract  from  Mr.  Yamada’s 
letter  will  make  the  matter  clear  to  the  reader  : “ Soon 
after  my  return  to  Kioto  private  despatches  were  received 
from  Mito  Yashiki,  stating  that  your  father  had  been 
compelled  to  perform  seppuku  by  the  enraged  Hikone 
beast.  It  was  his  dying  request  that  the  weapon  with 
which  he  made  the  fatal  stab  should  be  carefully  pre- 


344 


Mito  Yashiki. 


served  and  forwarded  to  you,  with  the  request  that  you 
should  bide  your  time  and  some  day  plunge  it  into  the 
body  of  this  mortal  enemy  of  the  house  of  Konishi.  I, 
having  received  this  weapon  from  secret  messengers,  do 
now  with  reverent  hands  send  it  to  the  son  and  heir  of 
him  who  has  been  so  greatly  wronged,  and  do  most  de- 
voutly hope  that  the  day  may  be  near  at  hand  when  this 
blade  shall  drink  the  blood  of  the  foul  aggressor.” 

Konishi  held  the  bare  sword  in  his  hands  in  a dazed 
sort  of  fashion,  and  gazed  upon  it  with  moistened  eyes. 
Junzo  fully  comprehended  the  situation,  and  stood  by 
with  silent  lips  and  pitying  face.  Not  a word  was  spoken 
for  several  minutes.  At  length  Konishi  dreamily  slipped 
the  sword  back  into  its  scabbard,  and  handed  the  letter 
to  Junzo  without  comment.  He  read  it  through,  and  then 
handed  it  back  in  silence. 

“ This  means,”  said  Konishi,  in  determined  tones,  “ that 
either  the  Lord  of  Hikone  or  I must  perish  by  this  blade.” 

“Verily!  verily!”  responded  Junzo,  with  decision, 
“and  at  no  very  distant  day  either.  We  must,  while  we 
now  have  leisure,  lay  our  plans  for  ridding  the  country 
of  this  ferocious  beast.” 

Returning  to  the  house  the  young  men  told  the  sad 
news  to  their  friends,  and  Konishi  at  once  became  the 
recipient  of  sincere  and  sympathetic  condolences.  The 
tender-hearted  ladies  wept  over  the  letter,  and  shuddered 
at  the  sword.  In  deep  and  angry  voices  the  men  pro- 
claimed a vendetta  of  eternal  duration  between  the 
houses  of  Konishi  and  Nakashima  and  that  of  HikonA 
And  the  abbot,  not  to  be  behindhand  in  maledictions, 
launched  upon  the  Gotairo’s  head  bitter  curses  in  pure 
Sanskrit,  the  very  translations  of  which  would  doubtless 
have  frozen  the  hearers  with  horror  ; and  he  decreed  that 
daily  during  the  hundred  days  of  mourning  that  were  to 
be  observed  by  the  son  the  monks  should  chant  at  the 
vespers  the  mass  for  the  dead. 

One  day,  after  the  period  for  mourning  had  ter- 
minated and  Konishi  had  allowed  the  razor  to  touch  his 
head,  the  young  men  were  returning  from  a fishing  ex- 


Mountain  Scenes. 


345 


cursion  in  the  Odaigahara  when  they  were  stopped  in  a 
lonely  part  of  the  road  by  the  same  mysterious  messen- 
ger, and  were  politely  requested  to  sign  a receipt  for  an- 
other despatch  from  Mr.  Yamada.  This  time  the  letter 
contained  no  disagreeable  news.  It  stated  that  a clan- 
destine message  had  come  through  from  the  Prince  of 
Mito  to  the  effect  that  if  the  son  and  heir  of  the  Konishi 
estates  could  be  found  it  would  be  well  for  him  to 
secretly  return  to  the  city  of  Mito  and  attend  to  his 
property,  inasmuch  as  matters  were  becoming  confused 
owing  to  the  long  absence  of  a responsible  head.  The 
letter  went  on  to  state  that  the  son,  although  under  sen- 
tence of  death,  could  easily  evade  capture,  as  he  would 
be  in  the  midst  of  friends  who  would  conceal  his  presence. 
In  conclusion,  Mr.  Yamada  stated  that  his  position  in 
Kioto  was  becoming  so  dangerous  that  he  might  be  com- 
pelled to  fly  at  any  time.  The  Shiro  people  had  now 
commenced  to  follow  him  with  suspicious  and  angry 
looks,  and  were  evidently  on  some  strong  scent.  The 
announcement  that  the  Nakashima  family  were  off  on 
pilgrimages  had  long  since  been  branded  by  Captain 
Murata  as  a most  outrageous  “cock-and-bull  ” story,  and 
that  shrewd  officer  fairly  fumed  to  lay  hands  on  the  “ old 
fox.”  But  the  commandant  of  the  Shiro  hesitated  to 
take  this  step  without  positive  evidence  of  guilt.  That 
observing  gentleman  had  noted  how  the  tide  of  power 
had  begun  to  set  toward  the  Gosho.  The  authority  and 
the  ancient  prestige  of  the  Mikado  were  commencing  to 
revive  and  to  assume  formidable  proportions, — such  as 
they  had  not  borne  for  many  centuries.  The  powerful 
southern  Daimios  were  already  transferring  their  al- 
legiance from  the  Shogun  to  the  Emperor  (Mikado). 
Their  fierce  warriors  were  gradually  gathering  about 
Kioto  for  some  bold  coup-cTetat.  Five  years  ago  it  would 
have  been  quite  safe  to  have  carried  matters  with  a high 
hand  ; but  as  affairs  were  now  shaping  themselves  it  be- 
hooved the  emissaries  of  the  Shogun  in  Kioto  to  conduct 
themselves  circumspectly  if  they  did  not  wish  to  pre- 
cipitate a revolution. 


346 


Mito  Yashiki. 


On  the  day  following  the  receipt  of  this  second 
despatch  (and  after  a very  exhaustive  discussion  thereof), 
the  ladies  took  the  children  and  went  down  to  a rustic 
arbor  on  a jutting  crag,  whence  a most  glorious  view 
could  be  obtained  of  the  ocean  and  sunny  coasts.  There 
they  spent  the  morning  in  sewing  and  chatting  over  the 
Kioto  news.  Mr.  Nakashima  and  his  two  sons  borrowed 
an  old  musket  from  a hunter  in  the  vicinity  and  went  off 
into  the  forests  to  shoot  deer  and  wild-boar.  Konishi 
complained  of  a headache  and  remained  at  home.  The 
day  was  very  warm.  So  he  placed  a mat  upon  the  grass 
beneath  one  of  the  magnificent  cryptomeria  that  so 
deeply  shaded  the  terrace,  and  lay  there  meditatively 
smoking  his  pipe  and  gazing  down  through  the  trees  on 
the  blue  waves  beneath.  Finally,  he  appeared  to  have 
been  smitten  with  a brilliant  idea,  for  he  eagerly  called 
to  the  abbot,  who  was  lounging  on  the  veranda,  to  come 
out  and  keep  him  company.  That  jovial  gentleman  was 
always  ready  to  converse  with  his  intelligent  guest,  and 
at  once  hastened  to  spread  his  mat  also  beneath  the 
shade  trees.  After  having  exhausted  quite  a number  of 
topics  of  conversation,  Konishi  suddenly  turned  to  his 
companion  and  said  in  a grave  voice  : 

“ I have  something  of  great  importance  to  communi- 
cate to  you.  It  is  a matter  wherein  I shall  need  your 
friendly  assistance.  Can  I rely  on  having  it  ? ” 

“ Surely,  surely  ! ” replied  the  abbot,  somewhat  taken 
aback.  “ I very  willingly  place  my  humble  services  at 
your  disposal.  Whether  or  not  I can  aid  you  much, 
remains  to  be  seen.” 

“Be  quite  easy  on  that  point,”  replied  Konishi,  “ for  I 
have  carefully  considered  the  matter  and  feel  assured 
that  your  services  will  be  of  the  utmost  benefit  to  me.” 

“ What  will  be  the  nature  of  the  services  ? ” languidly 
inquired  the  abbot  after  a pause  which  he  had  improved 
by  taking  several  brisk  whisks  from  his  pipe. 

“ I wish  you  to  act  as  a go-between  to  negotiate  a mar- 
riage for  me,”  replied  Konishi  with  charming  bluntness 
and  a mischievous  smile. 


Mountain  Scenes. 


347 


The  startled  priest  looked  incredulous  at  this  announce- 
ment. He,  a priest  sworn  to  celibacy,  negotiate  a 
marriage  contract ! Shades  of  Kobu-Daishi  ! What 
could  this  mean  ? Was  protracted  loneliness  making  the 
young  man  crazy  ? Konishi  laughed  at  his  friend’s  con- 
fusion and  then  tapped  him  on  the  shoulder  and 
exclaimed  : — “ Don’t  be  frightened,  austere  and  holy 
priest,  for  I shall  not  ask  you  to  speak  to  the  lady  herself. 
Her  father  is  living,  therefore  your  communications  will 
be  addressed  to  him.  This  will  remove  all  awkwardness 
from  the  situation.” 

“ Ah  ! Very  well.  That  is  as  it  should  be,”  replied  the 
abbot,  greatly  relieved  : “ In  that  case  I will  very  willingly 
assist  you.  Speak  freely  that  which  you  have  on  your 
mind.” 

“ Know  then,  O man  of  prayers,  that  I have  decided 
to  return  to  my  home  in  Mito  within  a few  days.” 

“ So  I heard  you  say  last  night.  I congratulate  you  on 
being  so  soon  re-united  to  your  friends.” 

“ That  is  all  very  well,  O priest,  but  I do  not  wish  to 
return  alone.” 

“ Ha ! ha ! I now  see  where  the  lady  comes  in,” 
chuckled  the  priest  as  he  patted  Konishi  on  the  shoulder  : 
“ I have  not  been  blind,  my  young  friend,  during  these 
months  of  your  sojourn  here.  Your  choice  is  a good  one, 
and  I will  gladly  assist  you.  Of  course  it  would  be  too 
much  to  expect  that  a susceptible  young  layman  like  you 
should  be  travelling  around  with  a bright  and  pretty  girl 
and  not  be  smitten  with  her  charms.  Love-making  is,  by 
the  rules  of  our  order,  prohibited  on  our  premises.  But 
I can  afford  to  shut  my  eyes  on  this  occasion  and  help  the 
thing  along.” 

“ O priest,  your  guesses  do  credit  to  your  powers  of 
observation.  Know  then  that  I have  long  loved  the 
daughter  of  Mr.  Nakashima,  and  do  now  desire  to  make 
her  my  wife  and  carry  her  back  to  Mito.  Now  will  you 
kindly  favor  me  by  interviewing  the  old  gentleman  and 
obtaining  his  consent  to  the  match  ? I imagine  the  young 
lady  will  not  be  shocked  at  the  proposal,  for  she  has 


348 


Mito  Yashiki. 


manifested  increasing  kindness  toward  myself  during 
many  weeks  past,  so  that  I am  inclined  to  think  that  she 
and  I are  in  the  same  predicament  and  that  we  both  need 
go-betweens.  What  say  you  ? ” 

“ I will  arrange  matters  this  very  afternoon,”  was  the 
hearty  response. 

And  he  was  as  good  as  his  word.  For  the  midday 
repast  had  no  sooner  been  concluded  than  he  beckoned 
to  Mr.  Nakashima  to  follow  him  into  his  room.  Having 
closed  the  shojees,  he  proceeded  to  open  the  negotiations 
with  a lengthy  and  verbose  exordium  wherein  he  con- 
tritely begged  his  guest’s  pardon  for  intruding  in  family 
affairs,  but  humbly  justified  his  action  by  pleading 
friendship  for  the  scion  of  the  house  of  Konishi.  After 
patiently  listening  for  quite  a while  to  this  oratorical 
effusion,  it  finally  dawned  upon  Mr.  Nakashima’s  mind 
that  the  abbot  was  acting  as  a go-between  to  secure  the 
hand  of  his  daughter  for  Konishi.  It  is  hardly  necessary 
to  add  that  he  was  not  at  all  averse  to  this  state  of  affairs. 
In  fact,  he  also  was  not  blind  and  had  been  watching  the 
course  of  events  with  great  inward  satisfaction.  Conse- 
quently he  was  not  quite  unprepared  for  the  present 
demonstration.  So  the  negotiations  dragged  their  slow 
length  along  most  amiably  and  satisfactorily.  After  the 
lapse  of  an  hour,  the  abbot  was  duly  commissioned 
to  inform  Konishi  that  his  suit  had  been  favorably  con- 
sidered and  that  the  wedding  would  be  celebrated  in  time 
for  him  to  return  with  his  bride  to  Mito  and  with  what- 
ever ceremonies  the  peculiar  environments  would  permit. 
Then  Mr.  Nakashima  called  O-Hana  into  the  room  and 
stated  the  case  to  her  with  abundance  of  flowery  verbiage. 
That  young  lady  became  very  sober  and  very  pale.  She 
sat  with  downcast  eyes  and  with  hands  demurely  folded 
in  her  lap,  listening  respectfully.  When  her  father  had 
concluded  by  expressing  it  as  his  wish  that  she  should 
now  accept  the  suitor,  thus  pressing  his  claims,  she 
bowed  her  head  to  the  floor  and  signified  her  willingness 
to  obey  his  wishes  in  the  matter.  She  then  retired  into 
- her  room  where  her  mother  and  her  three  sisters-in-law 
crowded  around  her  to  know  what  the  matter  was. 


Mountain  Scenes. 


349 


“ My  father  has  commanded  me  to  marry  Mr.  Kon- 
ishi,”  said  O-Hana  in  response  to  their  inquiries. 

“ Indeed  ! ” exclaimed  Seisho  ; “ well,  you  do  not  look 
as  if  that  were  going  to  be  a very  hard  command  to  obey.” 

“ I presume  that  it  will  be  my  duty  to  obey  my  father,” 
said  O-Hana,  with  an  air  of  resignation. 

The  ladies  all  laughed  at  her  when  she  had  given 
utterance  to  this  martyr-like  sentiment,  and  commenced 
to  tease  and  to  banter  her  most  unmercifully  ; for  they 
revelled  in  this  delicious  opportunity  to  turn  the  tables 
on  this  lively  young  lady  who  had  teased  them  all,  indi- 
vidually and  collectively,  on  so  many  occasions. 

“ She  is  indeed  to  be  pitied  ! ” exclaimed  Masago,  in 
tones  of  mocking  condolence,  as  she  offered  her  some 
sugar  on  a tray. 

The  clever  innuendo  that  lurked  beneath  this  act  made 
them  all  laugh  again.  Then  Masago  got  hold  of  one  of 
her  hands,  and  Seisho  got  hold  of  the  other  one,  and 
they  all  sat  down  and  discussed  matters  at  length.  Be- 
fore the  afternoon  was  half  spent  she  was  as  gay  as  ever, 
and  laughed  at  her  sombre  first  impressions  of  matri- 
mony. It  was  arranged  that  the  wedding  was  to  take 
place  within  a week,  and  that  she  was  to  depart  with  her 
husband  immediately  thereafter. 

The  appointed  day  came  around  and  the  feast  was 
spread  in  the  reception-room.  It  did  great  credit  to  the 
ingenuity  of  the  cook.  The  limited  nature  of  the  market 
rendered  it  impossible  to  have  over  a dozen  courses,  but 
the  sake  was  most  excellent,  and  the  good-fellowship  was 
unbounded.  None  were  present  save  the  members  of 
the  family  and  the  abbot.  It  may  seem  incredible,  yet 
the  presence  of  the  strangers  was  hardly  noticed  by  the 
monks.  In  those  days  it  was  a common  thing  for  fugi- 
tives escaping  from  the  vengeance  of  political  adversaries 
to  fly  to  the  monasteries  for  protection.  So  that  when 
our  party  of  fugitives  had  settled  themselves  in  the  house 
of  the  abbot,  the  only  comment  provoked  by  this  event 
was  that  they  were  merely  political  refugees.  That  ex- 
plained every  thing  to  the  satisfaction  of  everybody,  and 
no  further  questions  were  asked  and  no  acquaintanceship 


35° 


Mito  Yashiki. 


was  sought.  Consequently  our  friends  were  as  much 
strangers  as  they  were  on  the  day  of  their  arrival.  The 
feast  progressed,  nevertheless,  with  great  Zclat.  The 
bride  and  groom  drank  from  the  same  cup,  and  duly  were 
declared  husband  and  wife  amid  the  usual  bantcrings. 
Late  in  the  afternoon  the  entertainment  came  to  an  end. 

Then  the  happy  couple  prepared  to  depart.  The  kago 
was  ready  at  the  gate,  and  the  boat  was  ready  on  the 
shore.  After  a season  of  protracted  farewells  the  ladies 
finally  surrendered  the  bride  to  her  husband  to  be  car- 
ried off.  The  children  were  greatly  grieved  at  her  de- 
parture, for  she  had  indeed  made  herself  one  of  them, 
with  her  sprightly  ways  and  joyous  temperament.  After 
she  had  been  tenderly  packed  in  her  kago  the  gentlemen 
escorted  her  down  to  the  shore.  The  road  was  exceed- 
ingly steep  and  rugged.  It  wound  down  through  most 
magnificent  scenery.  Although  the  distance  traversed 
was  not  over  twenty  miles,  yet  it  was  late  in  the  evening 
before  they  reached  the  deep  inlet  where  the  boat  had 
been  moored.  It  was  a bright  moonlight  night,  however, 
so  that  they  were  enabled  to  embark  without  difficulty. 
The  scullers  then  made  for  the  open  sea,  where  the  sails 
were  quickly  spread,  and  the  wings  of  the  southwest 
monsoon  bore  them  rapidly  up  the  coast  toward  the 
bridegroom’s  home,  where  they  arrived,  in  leisurely 
course  of  sailing,  in  about  three  weeks,  and  settled  down 
in  the  Konishi  homestead,  where  they  were  warmly  re- 
ceived by  innumerable  friends.  * * * 

It  is  now  autumn,  and  still  the  fugitives  linger  at  the 
monastery.  Mr.  Yamada  continues  to  tarry  in  Kioto,  as 
if  bent  on  challenging  fate  itself.  News  has  just  been 
received  of  the  safe  arrival  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Konishi  at 
their  home  in  Mito,  and  the  ladies  have  been  made  ex- 
ceedingly happy  thereby.  On  the  day  following  the 
receipt  of  this  information  the  three  brothers  started  out 
for  a day’s  fishing  among  the  streams  qf  the  Odaigahara. 
They  were  returning  well  ladened  with  spoil,  late  in  the 
afternoon,  when  they  were  met  in  a lonely  part  of  the 
road  by  a monk  coming  in  breathless  haste  toward  them. 


Mountain  Scenes. 


35i 


Upon  nearer  approach  they  were  much  surprised  to 
recognize  the  abbot. 

“ O worthy  monk,  what  brings  you  to  this  spot  in  such 
haste  at  this  unseasonable  hour?”  inquired  Junzo,  as 
the  priest  stood  panting  before  them. 

“ Alas  ! There  is  reason  enough,  my  luckless  young 
friends,”  replied  the  abbot,  ruefully.  “ Dire  disaster  has 
most  unexpectedly  befallen  your  family,  and  I come  to 
warn  you  not  to  return  to  the  monastery,  but  to  fly  to 
parts  unknown.” 

“Your  words  are  freighted  with  fearful  significance; 
yet  I am  unable  to  catch  your  meaning,”  said  Kunisa- 
buro,  anxiously. 

“ Then  I might  as  well  frankly  tell  you  the  worst  at 
once,  as  you  are  men,  and  can  stand  the  shock,”  replied 
the  abbot.  “ Know,  then,  that  a short  time  after  you  left 
the  house  this  morning,  as  I was  going  down  to  the  gate- 
way, I was  much  surprised  to  find  several  strange  samurai 
standing  guard  there.  I asked  them  who  they  were  and 
what  they  wanted.  They  replied  that  they  were  the  retain- 
ers of  the  Daimio  of  Kii-shiu  and  had  come  to  arrest,  in 
the  name  of  the  Shogun,  the  members  of  the  proscribed 
Nakashima  family  abiding  in  my  house.  I at  once  told 
them  that  we  were  not  within  the  jurisdiction  of  their 
Daimio  and  that  consequently  they  had  no  authority  to 
come  across  our  borders  and  seize  people  by  violence.  To 
this  they  respectfully  replied  that  it  had  long  been  in  dis- 
pute as  to  which  Daimiate  had  jurisdiction  over  my  mo- 
nastery, as  boundary  lines  and  landmarks  had  long  been 
in  a very  confused  state  in  that  vicinity.  They  said  that 
the  Daimio  of  Kii-shiu  had  always  laid  claim  to  the  juris- 
diction,— although  they  were  quite  willing  to  admit  that 
the  Daimios  of  Ise  and  Yamato  had  contested  that  claim 
as  being  one  that  conflicted  with  their  own  claims. 

“ But  it  seems  that  the  foxy  Gotairo  had  found  out 
through  his  spies  that  the  Nakashima  family  had  sought 
refuge  in  my  monastery  and  were  being  harbored  in  my 
house.  That  man  appears  to  be  able  to  ferret  out  any 
thing  ! As  soon  as  he  had  satisfied  himself  that  his  in- 


352 


Mito  Yashiki. 


formation  was  correct,  he  laid  his  plans  accordingly.  He 
induced  the  Kii-shiu  people  to  trump  up  this  ancient 
claim  as  to  jurisdiction  and  to  quietly  submit  the  matter 
to  him  for  arbitration.  Of  course  he  decided  in  their 
favor.  And  this  decision  cannot  be  reversed  except  by 
the  Shogun  or  the  Emperor.  The  Shogun,  being  of  the 
house  of  Kii,  will  not  reverse  it,  and  the  Emperor  has  no 
power  to  do  so  at  present.  In  other  words,  your  crafty 
enemy  has  stolen  a march  on  you.  He  quietly  sent  word 
to  Kii-shiu  to  have  a strong  force  of  armed  men  steal  up 
to  the  mountains  and  surround  the  monastery,  and,  after 
capturing  the  Nakashima  family,  to  hold  them  there  under 
arrest  subject  to  his  further  order.  The  entire  place  is 
now  surrounded.  The  very  woods  are  alive  with  soldiers. 
During  the  conversation  with  the  samurai  at  the  gateway, 
I looked  about  me  and  beheld  guards  stationed  at  every 
wicket  and  at  every  angle  of  the  hedge  about  the  prem- 
ises. Escape  was  impossible.  They  were  all  very  re- 
spectful, however,  and  were  not  inclined  to  use  violence. 
In  fact,  it  was  merely  a nominal  arrest.  Their  orders 
were  to  keep  the  prisoners  confined  within  the  house  and 
yard,  and  not  to  touch  their  persons  unless  they  ventured 
to  escape.  These  Kii-shiu  gentlemen  seemed  to  be  some- 
what ashamed  of  the  whole  business,  and  were  disposed 
to  grant  every  privilege  consistent  with  their  orders. 
Their  captain  then  accompanied  me  back  to  the  house 
and  made  a list  of  all  the  prisoners  and  notified  them  of 
their  arrest. 

“ When  your  father  comprehended  the  unfortunate  situ- 
ation it  was  as  much  as  I could  do  to  prevent  his  slaying 
the  entire  family  and  himself.  Your  wives  were  almost 
beside  themselves  with  hysterical  frenzy,  and  begged  him 
to  at  once  end  their  unhappy  existence  and  thus  save 
them  from  falling  alive  into  the  hands  of  their  cruel  ene- 
mies. I finally  succeeded  in  quieting  them  all  down  by 
explaining  that  the  arrest  was  nominal  for  the  present, 
and  that  there  would  be  abundant  time  thereafter  to  resort 
to  violent  measures.  I told  them  that  I would  slip  away 
to  give  you  warning  at  the  time  when  I was  supposed  to 


Mountain  Scenes. 


353 


be  conducting  the  vesper  service,  and  that  I would  tell 
you  to  hasten  to  Kioto  and  lay  the  matter  before  Mr. 
Yamada,  who  might  perhaps  prevail  on  the  Emperor  to 
exert  some  of  his  ancient  authority  in  this  matter  and 
thus  save  them  from  the  Gotairo’s  fury.  By  forced 
marches  you  can  reach  Kioto  long  before  the  news  will 
reach  Yedo.  Therefore  fly  with  all  speed.  I will  take 
good  care  of  your  families  in  the  meantime.  A month 
or  two  anyhow  will  elapse  before  definite  orders  will  be 
received  from  the  Gotairo.  Hasten  ! Fly  at  once  ! ” 

“ All  except  me,”  said  Kunisaburo,  firmly. 

“ Are  you  crazy  ! ” exclaimed  the  abbot. 

“ No  ; but  you  will  bear  in  mind  that  I am  not  under 
sentence  of  death  like  my  brothers.  I merely  come  under 
the  blood-attainder  for  treason.  Two  can  attend  to  the 
business  in  Kioto  just  as  well  as  three.  I shall  be  needed 
at  the  house.  If  my  brothers  succeed  in  having  the 
blood-attainder  set  aside,  I shall  be  free.  If  they  do  not 
succeed,  my  position  will  be  no  worse,  and  I can  then  be 
of  service  to  my  father  in  cheating  the  fox  of  his  prey.  I 
will  therefore  return  with  you  to  the  house  and  deliver 
myself  up  to  nominal  arrest.” 

“ Well  spoken  ! Well  spoken,  indeed  ! ” exclaimed  the 
abbot  in  admiring  tones. 

And  so  they  parted.  The  two  elder  brothers  started 
off  with  heavy  hearts,  but  with  an  unconquerable  deter- 
mination. They  journeyed  far  into  the  night  and  tarried 
a few  hours  for  rest  at  a little  hamlet  beyond  the  plateau. 
Then  they  pressed  onward  by  forced  marches  for  five 
days,  until  they  drew  near  to  Kioto.  At  night  they  stole 
through  the  deserted  streets,  and  came  to  the  gateway  of 
Mr.  Yamada’s  house.  The  gate-keeper  recognized  them 
and  ushered  them  into  the  house,  where  an  attendant 
desired  them  to  sit  down  while  he  summoned  his  master. 
On  this  occasion  it  will  be  necessary  to  record  that  Mr. 
Yamada  was  surprised.  He  cautiously  glided  into  the 
room  as  if  in  doubt  as  to  whether  these  gentlemen  might 
not  be  enemies  in  disguise.  Then,  subduing  all  mani- 
festations of  surprise,  he  ordered  the  attendant  to  bring 


354 


Mito  Yashiki. 


in  tea  and  tobacco,  while  he  suavely  inquired  after  the 
health  of  their  respective  families.  His  manner  was  so 
cool  and  matter-of-fact  that  you  or  I would  never  have 
dreamed  that  his  heart  was  thumping  in  the  utmost 
agitation,  as  his  keen  eyes  read  in  the  faces  before  him 
a tale  of  serious  import.  It  was  not  long,  however, 
before  he  was  fully  posted  on  the  exact  state  of  affairs, 
and  then  his  countenance  became  exceedingly  grave, 
and  for  full  half  an  hour  he  smoked  in  silence,  while  he 
gazed  upon  the  floor  in  an  absent-minded  fashion.  At 
last  he  drew  his  pipe  from  his  mouth  and  vigorously 
smote  the  rim  of  the  hebachi,  as  if  inspired  with  an  idea. 

“ This  is  truly  a sad  predicament,”  he  ejaculated. 
“ That  Hikone  beast  has  indeed  stolen  a march  on  us  ! 
He  could  outwit  a fox, — so  devilish  is  his  cunning  ! But 
never  mind.  We  shall  see  if  we  cannot  head  him  off  in 
his  little  game.  Have  you  that  pen-holder  containing 
the  imperial  signet  and  the  cake  of  yellow  ink  ? You 
will  remember  that  I gave  it  to  you  six  years  ago  when 
you  were  commissioned  by  our  imperial  master  to  act  as 
spies  in  Mito  Yashiki.” 

“ I have  it  here  in  my  sleeve,”  replied  Tomokichi. 
“ You  instructed  me  always  to  carry  it  about  my  person, 
and  I have  not  failed  to  do  so  these  many  years.  Here 
it  is.” 

“ That  is  well,”  said  Mr.  Yamada.  “ I see  that  you 
obey  orders  most  faithfully.  I hope  that  you  may  now 
reap  your  reward.  You  will  remember  that  I told  you  that 
this  paper,  ink,  and  signet  were  only  to  be  used  in  some 
great  emergency,  when  it  became  necessary  for  you  to  go 
over  my  head  and  address  the  Emperor  in  person.  That 
time  has  now  come.  You  gentlemen  will  now  go  up-stairs 
and  sleep  on  the  bedding  that  has  been  spread  out  for  me. 
While  you  slumber  I will  draw  up  a memorial  stating  all 
the  facts  in  your  case,  and  respectfully  petitioning  the 
Emperor,  in  view  of  your  faithful  services  in  his  cause,  to 
exercise  his  authority  over  the  Shogun  and  secure  the 
repeal  of  your  cruel  and  unjust  sentences.  You  see, 
Yamato  was  the  ancient  heritage  of  the  Mikados,  and 


Mountain  Scenes. 


355 


the  Gotairo  has  trespassed  on  this  ancient  domain.  I 
think  that  he  feels  rather  weak  himself  in  this  matter, 
else  he  would  have  acted  with  his  usual  vigor  and  have 
used  extreme  measures  at  once.  This  transgression  we 
shall  magnify  and  make  political  capital  out  of.  I shall 
have  this  petition  all  neatly  copied  before  daylight.  Then 
I shall  rouse  you  up  to  sign  it  and  to  seal  it  with  this 
signet.  Then  you  must  at  once  return  to  the  little  ham- 
let on  this  side  of  the  Odaigahara  and  there  await  my 
coming.  To-morrow  I shall  have  this  memorial  pre- 
sented to  the  Emperor.  A grand  council  of  kngcs  will 
probably  be  convened  to  consider  this,  in  connection 
with  some  other  matter  that  I have  to  submit,  and  im- 
mense pressure  will  be  brought  to  bear  on  the  Gotairo — 
both  directly  and  indirectly — to  compel  him  to  recon- 
sider his  action  and  rescind  his  barbarous  decrees.  Our 
party  has  grown  so  much  in  power  during  the  last  year 
that  I have  great  hopes  of  your  petition  being  successful. 
As  soon  as  something  definite  has  been  accomplished  I 
will  hasten  to  join  you  at  the  designated  hamlet.” 

So  saying,  that  able  and  crafty  man  bid  his  guests 
good-night  and  labored  over  the  important  memorial  far 
into  the  small  hours  of  the  morning.  Then  the  servant, 
in  accordance  with  his  previous  instructions,  brought  in 
the  breakfast  and  went  up-stairs  to  rouse  the  young  men. 
After  the  meal  the  important  document  was  duly  signed 
and  sealed.  Then  the  young  men  stole  forth  like  moun- 
tain wolves  into  the  darkness  and  were  far  beyond  city 
limits  before  sunrise.  By  nightfall  they  had  again 
reached  the  hill  country  and  were  again  comparatively 
safe.  They  rested  abundantly  and  journeyed  leisurely 
for  seven  days,  at  the  end  of  which  time  they  reached 
the  designated  hamlet  at  the  base  of  the  Odaigahara, 
where  they  took  up  their  quarters  in  a comfortable 
cottage  belonging  to  the  headman  of  the  place,  who  re- 
ceived them  with  that  mixture  of  fear  and  veneration 
that  so  peculiarly  characterized  the  peasantry  of  old 
Japan  in  their  intercourse  with  the  samurai. 

They  waited  there  nearly  a month  without  hearing  any 


356 


Mito  Yashiki. 


thing  from  the  outside  world.  As  day  after  day  rolled 
away  they  began  to  feel  very  uneasy.  Yet,  as  they  were 
under  orders,  they  patiently  waited  for  further  develop- 
ments. At  last  Mr.  Yamada  arrived  one  evening  in  a 
drenching  rain.  Laying  aside  his  dripping  garments  to 
be  dried  beside  the  kitchen  hebachi,  he  plunged  into  the 
hot  bath,  and  then  emerged  to  don  some  dry  garments, 
kindly  lent  by  the  gracious  host.  Then  he  proceeded  to 
discuss  over  the  evening  meal  the  results  of  his  efforts  in 
their  behalf.  It  appeared  that  a grand  council  of  kug/s 
had  been  summoned  early  in  the  year  to  consider  the 
outrageous  actions  of  the  Gotairo  in  arresting  and  exe- 
cuting so  many  of  the  prominent  imperialists  in  Kioto, 
as  well  as  for  his  arbitrary  imprisonment  of  so  many 
great  Daimios  in  Yedo.  It  was  thought  that  the  occasion 
was  a proper  one,  either  for  imperial  interference  or  for 
some  manifestation  of  disapprobation  on  the  part  of  the 
Emperor.  After  a protracted  and  exciting  session  it  was 
decided  that  the  edge  of  the  wedge  could  best  be  in- 
serted by  notifying  the  old  Prince  of  Mito  that  his  pro- 
tests had  been  duly  considered  and  that  the  Emperor 
had  commissioned  him  to  look  after  the  imperial  inter- 
ests in  Yedo. 

Accordingly,  the  following  letter  was  drawn  up  and 
clandestinely  forwarded  to  that  irascible  old  gentleman 
while  in  banishment,  who  went  into  ecstasies  of  delight 
over  its  receipt  : “ The  Bakufu  has  shown  great  disre- 

gard of  public  opinion  in  concluding  treaties  without 
waiting  for  the  opinion  of  the  court,  and  in  disgracing 
princes  so  closely  allied  by  blood  to  the  Shogun.  The 
Mikado’s  rest  is  disturbed  by  the  spectacle  of  such  mis- 
government  when  the  fierce  barbarian  is  at  our  very 
door.  Do  you,  therefore,  assist  the  Bakufu  with  your 
advice,  expel  the  barbarians,  content  the  mind  of  the 
people,  and  restore  tranquillity  to  his  Majesty’s 
bosom.”  1 

Accordingly,  many  of  the  Mito  samurai  at  once  be- 
came ronins  and  began  prowling  around  the  treaty  ports 
1 Kinse  Shiriaku. 


Mountain  Scenes. 


357 


to  slay  some  of  these  fierce  barbarians,  in  order  to  create 
diplomatic  complications  between  the  Bakufu  and  foreign 
governments.  During  the  past  few  months  several  French 
and  Russian  sailors  from  the  men-of-war  in  port  had  been 
hacked  to  pieces  in  the  streets  of  Yokohama.  No  clue  as 
to  the  assassins  could  be  obtained  by  the  government. 
These  atrocities  had  caused  the  Bakufu  great  annoyance 
and  uneasiness,  inasmuch  as  if  they  were  to  be  continued 
there  would  surely  be  trouble  with  the  foreign  powers. 
Consequently  it  became  manifest  to  the  officers  of  the 
government  that  it  would  be  good  policy  to  conciliate 
the  hostile  clans  and  to  curry  favor  with  the  Mikado,  and 
thus  to  check  these  outrages  on  foreigners.  Accordingly, 
when  it  became  known  that  the  court  had  championed 
the  cause  of  the  proscribed  Nakashima  family,  tremen- 
dous pressure  was  at  once  brought  to  bear  on  the  Gotairo 
to  prevail  on  him  to  repeal  his  cruel  and  barbarous  sen- 
tence. That  vindictive  and  savage  man,  however,  was 
for  a long  time  deaf  to  all  appeals. 

Then  the  councillors  of  the  Hikone  clan  were  induced 
to  use  their  powerful  influence  to  secure  the  repeal  of 
the  sentence.  Those  able  and  astute  gentlemen  had 
many  interviews  with  their  lord,  and  finally  led  him  to 
see  that  the  times  had  changed,  so  that  it  would  not  be 
advisable  for  him  to  do  now  what  he  might  have  done  a 
few  years  before.  The  old  Prince  of  Mito,  with  the  im- 
perial commission  in  his  hands,  loomed  up  as  a possible 
rival  in  the  near  future,  when  the  tide  of  power  had  set 
more  strongly  toward  Kioto.  In  short,  so  skilfully  did 
the  councillors  analyze  the  political  situation,  that  they 
finally  induced  their  obstinate  lord  to  reconsider  his 
action.  After  a long  and  stubborn  contest  he  was  finally 
prevailed  on  to  allow  that  portion  of  his  sentence,  which 
had  decreed  confiscation  and  blood-attainder  against  the 
Nakashima  family,  to  be  wiped  out  by  allowing  the  head 
of  the  family  to  perform  seppuku.  But  no  inducement 
could  make  him  rescind  the  sentence  of  death  passed  on 
Konishi,  Tomokichi,  and  Junzo.  According  to  Japanese 
ideas  this  adjustment  of  the  matter  was  a just  and  merci- 


358 


Mito  Yashiki. 


ful  one.  As  the  Gotairo  was  obdurate,  the  imperial  party 
was  obliged  to  be  contented  with  this  compromise.  Two 
Bakufu  officers  were  then  sent  overland  to  Kioto,  bearing 
the  decree  of  seppuku  against  old  Mr.  Nakashima.  They 
were  instructed  to  be  present  at  the  ceremony  which  was 
to  take  place  in  the  monastery  among  the  mountains. 
These  officers  had  arrived  in  Kioto  about  ten  days  be- 
fore, and  were  now  journeying  toward  the  monastery  by 
a longer  but  easier  route  along  the  coast. 

Such  was  the  sad  situation  as  described  by  Mr.  Yamada 
during  the  course  of  the  meal.  The  brothers  heard  the 
recital  with  mingled  feelings  of  grief  and  anger.  Yet, 
according  to  the  customs  of  that  country,  the  penalty 
was  a very  mild  one.  Seppuku , or  hara-kiri  (belly-cut) 
as  Europeans  term  it,  was  a merciful  institution  that 
originated  during  the  terrible  civil  wars  of  the  Ashikaga 
period  in  the  twelfth  century  of  our  era.  By  immemorial 
usage  the  victorious  party  in  war  had  the  right  to  pro- 
scribe its  adversaries  and  to  exterminate  them  root  and 
branch.  The  scenes  of  carnage  that  invariably  ensued 
when  a victorious  party  came  into  power  were  more 
frightful  than  the  proscriptions  that  soaked  Rome  with 
the  blood  of  her  best  citizens  during  the  memorable  con- 
tests between  Marius  and  Sylla.  First  one  faction  and 
then  the  other  would  be  victorious,  and  the  land  was 
filled  with  the  slaughtering  of  multitudes  of  innocent 
and  helpless  people,  until  it  was  found  that  the  flower  of 
the  land  was  being  ruthlessly  swept  out  of  existence. 
The  wild  horror  of  the  scenes  beggared  description. 
The  kind  nature  of  the  natives  shrank  back  from  the 
spectacle,  and  set  about  devising  some  scheme  whereby 
needless  bloodshed  might  be  spared  and  innocent  lives 
might  be  saved. 

They  finally  hit  upon  the  horrible  yet  beautiful  cere- 
mony of  seppuku — horrible  when  considered  in  its  ghastly 
details,  and  beautiful  when  considered  in  the  light  of  its 
humane  and  beneficent  effects.  By  this  ceremony  the 
leaders  of  the  vanquished  party  were  allowed  to  take 
their  short  swords  and  cut  through  their  bowels  into 


Mountain  Scenes. 


359 


the  portal  vein,  and  thus  terminate  their  lives.  By 
this  sanguinary  act  they  washed  away  blood-attainder 
from  their  families  and  kindred  (thus  saving  them  from 
proscription)  and  also  cleansed  their  own  honor  from  all 
stains.  Their  political  shortcomings,  whatever  they 
might  have  been,  were  thus  fully  atoned  for.  After  a 
battle,  thousands  of  warriors,  instead  of  flying  from  the 
victors,  would  calmly  kneel  down  and  perform  this 
ghastly  rite  upon  the  bloody  field,  thereby  limiting  the 
consequences  of  their  political  acts  to  their  own  per- 
sons. 

As  the  nation  settled  down  to  its  long  repose  under 
the  Tokugawas,  it  became  customary  to  extend  this  cere- 
mony so  as  to  include  the  families  and  kindred  of  offenders 
guilty  of  treason  against  the  Shogun.  But  in  such  cases 
it  was  discretionary  with  the  Shogun  to  grant  or  with- 
hold the  privilege  of  seppuku.  It  was  necessary  that  the 
Bakufu  should  make  a judicial  decree  or  sentence  per- 
mitting the  offender  to  perform  the  ceremony,  otherwise 
his  bloody  act  lost  its  efficacy  so  far  as  confiscation  and 
blood-attainder  were  concerned.  It  was  essential  that 
the  government  should  grant  him  permis-ion  to  disem- 
bowel himself  in  the  presence  of  two  duly  appointed 
officers.  Without  this  formal  permission  a man  might 
slay  himself  and  yet  not  redeem  his  property  from  con- 
fiscation and  his  kindred  from  extermination.  Viewed 
in  the  light  of  a redemption  of  innocent  people  from 
the  fearful  effects  of  blood-attainder,  the  ceremony 
of  seppuku  was  indeed  grand  and  beautiful.  It  was  a 
great  boon  to  the  families  of  political  offenders.  In  the 
case  of  the  Nakashima  family  the  Gotairo  had  intended 
to  withhold  this  favor  and  to  extirpate  them  in  a spirit 
of  bitter  revenge.  But,  as  already  stated,  the  pressure 
brought  to  bear  on  him  had  compelled  him  most  reluc- 
tantly to  forego  his  fierce  resolve. 

On  the  following  morning  Mr.  Yamada  started  out  to 
climb  over  the  Odaigahara.  As  the  two  brothers  were 
yet  under  sentence  of  death,  he  directed  them  to  remain 
at  the  hamlet  until  he  returned  with  the  fugitives.  They 


360 


Mito  Yashiki. 


gloomily  obeyed.  That  energetic  man  was  soon  far  up 
the  deeply  wooded  slopes  of  the  mighty  range,  and 
toward  evening  he  drew  near  the  monastery. 

As  shadows  of  the  parting  day  hasten  in  their  course,  so 
must  our  closing  scenes  be  brief  and  quickly  told.  It  was 
dusk  when  Mr.  Yamada  halted  before  the  gateway  of  the 
abbot’s  house  in  response  to  the  challenge  of  the  guard 
stationed  there.  Upon  due  explanation  of  the  nature  of 
his  mission  he  was  permitted  to  enter  the  yard.  Every 
thing  was  quiet  and  orderly.  The  guards  had  never  in- 
truded themselves  within  the  barriers,  so  that  the  prison- 
ers had  remained  undisturbed  in  their  possession  of  the 
premises.  Crossing  over  to  the  veranda,  he  surprised 
his  friends  at  their  evening  meal.  Great  was  their  joy 
at  his  unexpected  appearance.  But  no  questions  were 
asked  as  to  the  nature  of  his  visit  until  after  supper. 
Then,  when  the  little  ones  had  been  put  to  bed,  they 
all  crowded  around  him  and  anxiously  inquired  for 
news.  The  entire  evening  was  given  up  to  discussing 
what  had  transpired  since  the  abbot  had  met  the  broth- 
ers in  the  woods  more  than  a month  before.  That  por- 
tion of  the  narrative  which  related  to  the  freeing  of 
their  property  from  confiscation  and  the  redemption 
of  the  family  from  blood-attainder  was  received  with 
unbounded  delight  by  the  ladies.  But,  when  the  woful 
recital  of  sepptiku  was  rehearsed,  a dark  cloud  rested 
upon  the  household.  Mr.  Nakashima  was  perfectly  com- 
posed, but  wore  a solemn  countenance  that  told  full  well 
how  he  realized  the  gravity  of  the  situation. 

“ After  all,”  said  he,  during  a lull  in  the  conversation, 
“ I do  not  know  but  what  the  termination  of  this  affair  is 
about  as  satisfactory  as  I could  desire.  I have  well-nigh 
lived  the  full  span  of  my  life,  and  I now  have  an  hon- 
orable opportunity  of  terminating  it  in  a highly  distin- 
guished and  creditable  manner.  By  the  way,  I will  now 
nominate  Kunisaburo  as  my  second  in  this  matter. 
And  I desire,  O most  worthy  abbot,  that  my  body  shall 
be  incinerated  under  your  friendly  supervision,  and  that 
the  ashes  shall  be  carefully  placed  in  an  urn  and  taken 


Mountain  Scenes. 


361 


back  to  Atago-Yama  and  deposited  in  the  cemetery  be- 
hind the  upland  temple,  where  repose  the  bones  of  my 
ancestors.  I appoint  you,  Mr.  Yamada,  my  trusted  and 
honored  friend,  as  my  executor,  to  see  that  my  wishes  be 
properly  carried  out.  As  a matter  of  course,  my  estate 
will  descend  to  my  eldest  son  and  his  heirs.  And  this 
short  sword,  with  which  I shall  terminate  my  life,  I be- 
queath to  my  sons,  to  be  used  as  an  avenging  blade 
upon  the  accursed  carcass  of  the  miserable  villain  who 
has  hounded  me  to  death.  It  is  my  wish  that  from 
henceforth  you  shall  all  be  cheerful  and  thus  render  the 
balance  of  my  life  as  pleasant  as  possible.  On  such 
occasions  tears  are  useless  and  merely  serve  to  cast  a 
gloom  over  the  departing  spirit.  Let  us  now  all  retire 
to  rest,  inasmuch  as  you,  my  kind  friend,  must  be  very 
weary  after  your  long  and  toilsome  journey.” 

Several  days  elapsed  before  the  Bakufu  officers  put  in 
an  appearance  at  the  monastery.  When  they  arrived  it 
did  not  take  very  long  to  complete  the  simple  prepara- 
tions for  the  awesome  ceremony.  Mr.  Nakashima  was 
imbued  with  the  classical  ideas  about  seppuku  and  dis- 
dained all  modern  degenerations  of  this  ancient  rite. 
Under  his  directions  the  ancient  regime  was  most  scrup- 
ulously adhered  to.  Four  lofty  cryptomeria  that  grew 
in  the  backyard,  very  nearly  on  the  corners  of  an  im- 
aginary quadrangle,  were  selected  as  the  spot  where  the 
ceremony  should  be  performed  out  under  the  open 
heavens.  The  abbot  then  suspended  several  temple 
curtains  between  these  trees,  thus  enclosing  a large  rec- 
tangular space.  Then  he  took  a tatami  from  the  house 
and  laid  it  at  one  end  of  the  enclosure,  and  placed  two 
camp-stools  at  the  other  end,  in  order  that  the  judges 
mighfrsit  above  the  culprit.  This  completed  the  arrange- 
ments for  the  performance  of  the  bloody  rite. 

In  order  to  conform  to  his  punctilious  notions,  Mr. 
Nakashima  delayed  the  ceremony  until  night  in  order 
that  it  might  take  place  under  the  starry  heavens  amid 
the  baleful  flickerings  of  torches  and  paper  lanterns.  At 
the  appointed  hour  he  left  the  house  and  entered  the 


362 


Mito  Yashiki. 


enclosure,  where  he  knelt  down  upon  the  tatami  awaiting 
the  coming  of  the  officers.  Presently  those  elegantly 
dressed  personages  came  in  and  seated  themselves  on  the 
camp-stools.  Mr.  Yamada  and  Kunisaburo  then  seated 
themselves  on  the  grass  behind  the  principal.  After  pro- 
found salutations  had  been  interchanged,  one  of  the 
officers  drew  forth  from  his  bosom  a long  scroll  which  he 
slowly  unrolled  and  proceeded  to  read  in  solemn  tones. 
It  was  the  sentence  of  death  pronounced  by  the  Bakufu 
on  the  responsible  head  of  the  Nakashima  family  for  al- 
lowing members  of  said  family  to  disturb  the  Shogun’s 
peace  of  mind  by  hatching  conspiracies  in  Yedo  and 
elsewhere.  Could  the  Generalissimo  of  the  Four  Coasts 
allow  such  things  to  transpire  with  impunity  under  the 
very  shadow  of  his  citadel  ? After  the  reading  of  this 
solemn  document,  Mr.  Nakashima  bowed  low  to  signify 
his  submission  to  the  decree,  and  then  returned  to  the 
house  to  make  ready  for  the  ordeal. 

On  these  supreme  occasions  the  true  samurai  never 
manifested  the  slightest  emotion,  and  treated  death  with 
the  utmost  contempt.  Nor  was  it  considered  proper  for 
his  family  to  give  way  to  grief.  Every  thing  was  con- 
ducted with  such  cool  and  hideous  precision  that  the 
blood  of  the  foreign  spectator  would  have  been  well-nigh 
frozen  at  the  sight.  Bidding  adieu  to  his  heart-broken 
wife  and  children  and  friends,  the  stately  old  gentleman 
reentered  the  screened  enclosure  dressed  in  garments  of 
pure  white.  After  he  had  seated  himself  again,  Mr. 
Yamada  brought  in  upon  a white  tray  the  short  sword 
with  which  the  deadly  cut  was  to  be  made.  This  he 
placed  within  easy  reach  in  front  of  the  principal.  A 
bucket  of  water  and  a bamboo  dipper  were  then  brought 
in  and  placed  near  the  tray.  . 

While  this  was  going  on  within  the  curtains,  the  trem- 
bling women  and  the  terrified  children  huddled  them- 
selves together  on  the  back  veranda,  where  they  could  be 
present  at  the  ceremony,  and  yet  not  actually  witness  its 
ghastly  details.  Down  in  the  temple  the  abbot  and  the 
priests  were  intoning  a solemn  mass,  while  the  booming 


Mountain  Scenes. 


363 


drum  responded  in  measured  tones  to  the  mellow  notes 
of  the  mournful  bell.  And  yet  farther  down,  the  eternal 
ocean  rumbled  amid  the  caverns  along  the  shore.  Truly 
it  was  a weird  and  dreary  scene  ! 

After  a brief  silence  Mr.  Nakashima  reached  forward 
and  grasped  the  sword  with  one  hand  while  with  the  other 
one  he  threw  open  his  robe  and  laid  bare  his  abdomen. 
According  to  modern  usage  it  was  not  necessary  to  do 
more  than  inflict  a slight  wound  and  then  bend  the 
head  forward  for  the  stroke  from  behind.  But  the  old 
warrior  scorned  such  effeminate  proceedings,  and  plunged 
the  cruel  blade  deep  into  his  bowels  in  the  most  approved 
ancient  style,  and  then  drew  it  entirely  across  his  abdo- 
men, making  a sickening  gash  nearly  a foot  long.  By 
this  time  an  expression  of  intense  pain  had  settled  upon 
his  rigid  features,  and  he  bent  his  head  forward  for  the 
stroke  that  should  terminate  his  existence.  Kunisaburo, 
who  from  behind  had  been  watching  every  gesture  with 
the  utmost  vigilance,  now  swept  his  sword  from  its  scab- 
bard, and,  with  one  swift  and  sure  blow,  severed  the  head 
from  the  body  with  such  force  that  it  bounded  against 
the  enclosing  curtain.  Mr.  Yamada  hastily  threw  a cloth 
over  it  until  the  facial  contortions  had  subsided.  Then 
he  lifted  it  tenderly  and  washed  off  the  blood  and  the 
sand.  After  which  he  held  it  up  by  the  top-knot,  and 
exhibited  it  to  the  two  officers.  After  due  inspection, 
those  gentlemen  retired.  And  within  a few  minutes  they 
and  the  guards  had  disappeared  and  thus  left  the  fugi- 
tives free  to  go  and  come  as  they  chose. 

On  the  following  day  preparations  were  at  once  made 
for  incinerating  the  body.  In  the  grove  beside  the  main 
temple  there  was  a large  open  space  where  the  bodies  of 
the  brotherhood  had  been  consumed  for  many  centuries. 
Here  was  speedily  collected  a huge  pile  of  underbrush 
and  resinous  fagots.  The  body  was  then  placed  on  top 
of  the  heap,  and  the  severed  head  was  placed  upon  the 
breast.  The  torch  was  quickly  applied,  and  in  a short 
time  nothing  was  left  of  Nakashima  Yotori  except  a few 
handfuls  of  ashes.  These  were  sorrowfully  collected  by 


364 


Mito  Yashiki. 


the  widow,  and  were  tenderly  placed  in  a small  bronze  urn 
presented  to  her  by  the  abbot.  After  which,  the  lid  was 
tightly  soldered  down  by  one  of  the  monks  who  had 
grown  very  expert  in  that  occupation.  The  bereaved 
wife  carried  the  receptacle  up  to  her  room  and  carefully 
wrapped  it  in  a piece  of  yellow  brocaded  silk,  which  the 
thoughtful  abbot  had  provided  for  this  purpose.  Then 
she  placed  it  on  a shelf  preparatory  to  departure  for 
Atago-Yama. 

As  there  was  now  nothing  to  detain  the  fugitives  at 
the  monastery,  they  made  preparations  for  an  immediate 
return  homeward.  Two  days  after  the  tragic  death  of 
the  head  of  the  family,  the  kagos  were  brought  up  to  the 
side  of  the  veranda,  and  the  ladies  and  children  were 
duly  seated  therein,  while  the  grunting  coolies  speedily 
bore  them  out  through  the  gateway  into  the  road  that 
led  to  the  Odaigahara.  The  abbot  escorted  them  far 
into  the  woods  and  finally  bade  them  a reluctant  farewell 
as  he  turned  his  steps  back  to  the  solemn  groves  of  his 
sequestered  retreat,  there  to  intone  for  one  hundred 
days  a Sanskrit  requiem  for  the  dead.  Late  in  the  day, 
as  Tomokichi  and  Junzo  were  strolling  along  the  road 
that  led  up  from  their  hamlet  into  the  mountain,  they 
perceived  a procession  of  kagos  coming  down  the  moun- 
tain side,  and  at  once  surmised  that  their  families  were 
returning  from  the  monastery. 

Hastening  forward  they  first  met  their  mother,  who, 
as  she  recognized  her  sons,  immediately  removed  the 
silk  from  the  urn  that  she  was  holding  in  her  lap,  and 
held  it  up  for  them  to  view.  The  procession  at  once 
came  to  a dead  halt,  for  all  understood  the  significance 
of  the  gesture.  Not  a word  was  spoken  by  anybody. 
And  the  young  men,  at  once  comprehending  the  mourn- 
ful meaning  of  these  proceedings,  prostrated  themselves 
in  the  dust  before  the  ashes  of  their  father.  Long  did 
they  thus  kneel  and  rub  dust  by  the  handful  into  their 
hair  in  token  of  boundless  grief.  At  length  they  slowly 
arose  and  saluted  their  mother.  Then  Tomokichi,  as 
the  present  head  of  the  family,  reverently  took  the  urn 


Mountain  Scenes. 


365 


and  led  the  way  back  to  the  hamlet.  The  reunion  was 
sad,  yet  joyful.  The  incidents  of  the  mournful  scenes  at 
the  monastery  were  rehearsed  with  a fierce  exultation, 
and  the  tarnished  blade  was  received  as  a sacred  trust. 
Then  and  there  the  brothers  vowed  that  it  should  taste 
the  Gotairo’s  blood  at  no  distant  date.  Ah  ! Nawosuke, 
Lord  of  Hikonti,  beware  ! beware  ! The  avenger  is 
abroad  ! 


CHAPTER  XXIX. 


THE  CONSPIRACY. 

Several  months  have  elapsed  since  the  closing  scenes 
of  the  last  chapter.  We  are  again  at  the  sea-shore  villa, 
whence  our  young  spies  started  down  the  coast  in  a 
boat  on  their  famous  shadowing  expedition  six  years 
ago.  It  is  the  first  day  of  March,  and  the  blustering 
gales  are  sending  the  frothing  billows  rolling  far  up  the 
beach  in  their  vain  attempts  to  smite  the  keen-prowed 
boats  that  the  experienced  fishermen  have  taken  the  pre- 
caution to  draw  up  far  beyond  their  insidious  attacks. 
The  square-trimmed  boxwood  hedge  surrounding  the 
front  of  the  yard  is  coated  on  its  seaward  face  with  salt 
spray,  and  the  garden  paths  of  broken  shells  resemble 
strips  of  driven  snow  ; so  that  there  is  a wintry  aspect 
to  the  landscape  even  though  it  be  the  first  day  of  spring. 
The  villa  appears  to  be  closed,  and  the  rain-doors  are 
rattling  noisily  as  the  boisterous  winds  dash  against 
them  as  if  clamoring  for  entrance. 

That  appearances  are  deceptive  is  an  old  adage  and 
one  that  is  very  true  in  the  present  instance,  for  behind 
those  doors  is  gathered  in  the  seclusion  of  the  inner 
chambers  of  the  villa  a band  of  eighteen  rotiins  discuss- 
ing in  excited  tones  the  details  of  some  blood-curdling 
scheme  of  carnage.  The  bright  sunlight  sifts  through 
the  rifts  in  the  doors  sufficiently  to  reveal  the  faces  of 
these  fierce  men.  They  were  formerly  Mito  samurai , but 
they  have  recently  absolved  that  clan  from  all  responsi- 
bility for  their  acts  and  have  dedicated  themselves  to 
wage  eternal  warfare  against  the  Bakufu.  Their  faces 
are  mostly  strange  to  us  ; yet,  as  our  eyes  become  accus- 

366 


The  Conspiracy. 


367 


tomed  to  the  dim  light,  we  recognize  the  countenances 
of  the  centre  group  near  the  blazing  hebachi.  Yes,  the 
blood-avengers  are  in  grave  and  earnest  consultation  with 
their  friends  from  Mito  Yashiki  as  to  the  best  method 
of  assassinating  the  Gotairo.  Mr.  Yamada  has  just 
spread  out  a large  map  of  Yedo  upon  the  floor  near  a 
lamp,  and  is  addressing  in  his  usual  free  and  easy  style 
the  company  crowded  about  him. 

“ Honorable  sirs,”  said  he,  “ this  enterprise  upon 
which  we  are  now  engaged,  is  one  of  the  utmost  gravity.  It 
is  not  likely  that  any  of  us  will  come  out  of  it  alive.  Do 
you  fully  comprehend  this,  and  are  you  willing  to  under- 
take it  ? ” 

A hoarse  shout  of  assent,  more  resembling  the  deep- 
chested  growling  of  a wild  beast  than  the  utterances  of 
human  beings,  was  the  response. 

“ It  is  well  spoken,”  exclaimed  Mr.  Yamada  ; “Now 
let  us  proceed  to  business.  In  the  first  place,  however,  I 
must  apologize  to  you,  honorable  gentlemen,  for  my  tardy 
appearance  here.  A succession  of  mishaps  has  delayed 
me  and  my  three  friends  until  we  began  to  think  that  the 
gods  were  not  propitious  to  our  enterprise.  In  return- 
ing to  Kioto  from  the  Odaigahara  we  were  storm  bound 
among  the  mountains  for  many  days,  inasmuch  as  we  could 
not  face  the  tempests  while  escorting  women  and  chil- 
dren. Then  it  took  much  time  to  arrange  our  affairs  at 
home,  as  they  had  become  confused  during  our  absence. 
Then,  again,  I had  to  wait  until  the  spring  season  was 
reasonably  near  at  hand  before  I could  succumb  to  my 
regular  attack  of  spring-fever.  Even  then  I was  com- 
pelled to  seclude  my  person  from  the  public  gaze  a 
month  ahead  of  time.  But  as  it  will  probably  be  my 
last  attack,  I do  not  know  as  it  will  make  much  differ- 
ence. After  leaving  Kioto  and  rejoining  my  two  young 
friends  in  the  hamlet  at  the  base  of  the  Odaigahara,  we 
journeyed  through  the  mountains  and  descended  upon 
the  shore  of  Ise,  where  we  had  made  arrangements  for  a 
boat  to  meet  us  and  bear  us  up  the  coast  to  this  place. 
We  had  a very  rough  time  beating  up  in  the  teeth  of  the 


368 


Mito  Yashiki. 


gales,  and  were  so  delayed  that  we  could  not  reach  our 
destination  until  last  night.  This  is  our  humble  apology 
for  detaining  you  for  so  many  days  at  this  bleak  place.” 

This  speech  was  interrupted  by  peals  of  laughter  that 
shook  the  house  when  the  playful  allusion  was  made  to 
the  spring-fever,  for  Konishi  had  been  regaling  his  com- 
panions during  the  long  evenings  of  their  waiting  with 
humorous  accounts  of  those  mysterious  spells  of  illness, 
until  the  subject  had  become  a standing  joke  at  the  villa. 
At  the  conclusion  of  the  speech  they  all  begged  him  to 
make  no  excuse  for  this  delay  and  to  take  no  account  of 
their  detention.  They  one  and  all  expressed  themselves 
ready  for  whatever  he  might  propose,  and  urged  him  to 
divulge  his  schemes  without  delay. 

“ Well,  honorable  sirs,”  resumed  Mr.  Yamada  in  re- 
sponse to  their  request,  “ the  plan  itself  is  simple  enough  ; 
it  will  be  the  execution  of  it  that  will  tax  to  the  utmost 
our  ingenuity  and  courage.” 

“Say  on,  say  on.  We  are  ready  for  any  thing,”  was 
the  hearty  response. 

“ Well,  then,”  said  Mr.  Yamada,  “ we  will  consider  the 
subject  under  three  general  heads.  First,  how  shall  we 
get  to  Yedo  ? second,  what  shall  we  do  there  ? third,  how 
shall  we  get  away  ? Now  as  to  the  first  part  there  will 
not  be  much  trouble.  You  can  all  embark  in  my  boat, 
and  sail  down  the  coast.  When  we  enter  Yedo  bay  a 
dozen  of  you  must  consent  to  be  stowed  away  under  the 
planks,  so  as  to  be  kept  out  of  sight.  The  rest  of  us  will 
seclude  ourselves  in  the  cabin.  We  will  arrange  so  as  to 
approach  Yedo  after  dark,  and  will  land  at  this  point 
here  on  the  map  just  below  the  southern  suburbs.  We 
will  then  leave  our  boatmen  under  the  command  of  the 
captain,  with  instructions  to  go  down  the  bay  and  play 
fishermen,  returning  each  night  to  this  point  for  secret 
orders  from  us. 

“ After  landing,  we  must  break  up  in  small  parties, 
and  take  these  various  roads  here  to  this  point  in  the 
citizens’  quarter,  where  we  will  meet  at  the  house  of  a 
friend.  There  we  can  keep  concealed  until  the  morning 


The  Conspiracy. 


369 


of  the  appointed  day.  In  an  upper  room  of  that  house 
have  been  clandestinely  collected  eighteen  suits  of  chain 
armor,  together  with  an  equal  number  of  oil-paper  over- 
coats for  rainy  weather.  Having  reached  our  destination, 
we  will  act  as  follows  : Every  morning  the  Gotairo  goes, 
in  the  discharge  of  his  official  duties,  from  his  yashiki 
to  the  palace  of  the  Shogun,  by  way  of  the  Sakurada 
gateway.  We  will  wait  for  the  first  rainy  day  ; then  put 
on  our  water-proof  overcoats  over  our  armor,  and  will  lie 
in  wait  for  his  Excellency  at  the  bridge  that  crosses  the 
moat  before  the  gateway.  We  will  then  slay  him  without 
delay.  Should  luck  favor  us  we  must  take  his  head  and 
escape  with  it  to  our  boat,  and  come  back  to  Mito. 

“ This,  of  course,  is  a very  rough  outline  of  the  matter. 
I shall  now  go  more  into  details,  and  will  divide  up  the 
work,  so  that  we  may  act  like  a single  machine.  On  the 
first  rainy  day  after  reaching  Yedo  we  must,  after  putting 
on  our  chain  armor  and  overcoats,  as  just  described, 
firmly  tie  on  our  feet  strong  straw  sandals,  so  that  we  can 
run  about  nimbly  on  the  slippery  and  muddy  ground. 
Around  our  legs  we  will  tie  oil-paper,  in  accordance  with 
the  custom  of  travellers  in  rainy  weather,  thus  completely 
covering  up  the  chained  mail  protecting  our  calves  and 
thighs,  and  inviting  our  enemies  to  waste  many  harmless 
blows  on  those  parts.  Thus  disguised,  we  will  leave  the 
house  in  little  groups,  and  make  our  way  over  toward  the 
Sakurada  gateway.  We  will  loiter  about  there  in  a man- 
ner not  to  attract  attention,  and  will  await  the  approach 
of  his  Excellency’s  retinue.  You  will  perceive  from  this 
map  that  the  distance  between  his  yashiki  and  the  gate- 
way is  less  than  five  hundred  yards.  Being  within  the 
first  moat  of  the  castle,  he  feels  comparatively  safe.  As 
soon  as  he  crosses  the  second  moat  and  enters  the  Saku- 
rada gateway  into  the  second  system  of  ramparts,  he 
feels  absolutely  safe.  The  only  place  then  where  any 
danger  can  befall  him  is  on  this  short  stretch  of  causeway 
that  comes  down  the  hill  from  his  yashiki  to  the  gateway. 
Once  over  the  bridge,  and  none  but  traitors  can  touch 
him. 


370 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“ Now  during  the  last  five  years  he  has  gone  back  and 
forth  between  thej yashiki  and  the  palace,  until  he  has  be- 
come careless  and  indifferent  about  his  body-guard.  Not 
over  two  hundred  persons  comprise  his  retinue, — and 
these  are  not  all  samurai.  No  member  of  the  Gosanke 
would  move  out  of  his  yashiki  so  ill  attended.  None  of 
the  great  Daimios  would  condescend  to  enter  the  castle 
with  less  than  five  hundred  retainers  in  his  retinue.  I 
presume  he  considers  himself  merely  moving  from  one 
part  of  his  grounds  to  another  when  he  goes  from  his 
yashiki  to  the  palace.  Except  on  very  extraordinary 
occasions,  his  men  are  never  in  armor.  He  usually  starts 
out  with  about  twenty  swordsmen  and  spearmen  in  his 
van-guard.  Then  he  follows  close  on  their  heels  in  his 
norimon,  with  three  samurai  walking  on  either  side.  Then 
the  rear-guard  of  about  a dozen  samurai  follow  at  a short 
distance  behind  their  master.  And  after  that  come  the 
rest  of  the  retinue,  comprising  led  horses,  coolies,  relief- 
bearers,  servants,  and  quite  a number  of  samurai , all 
straggling  along  behind  in  a most  careless  and  demoral- 
ized fashion,  so  that  it  frequently  happens  that  when  the 
norimon  has  reached  the  bridge,  the  tail  end  of  the  pro- 
cession is  only  just  emerging  from  the  yashiki,  thus 
leaving  great  gaps  between  the  van-guard  and  the  rear. 
I presume  his  Excellency  rather  enjoys  thus  swaggering 
down  to  the  palace,  just  as  if  he  were  merely  non- 
chalantly straggling  in  slippered  feet  with  his  personal 
servants  from  his  room  to  the  bath-tub.  He  seems  to 
regard  the  entire  castle  as  merely  a part  of  his  yashiki, 
and  that  he  can  lounge  about  from  one  part  to  the  other 
regardless  of  strict  etiquette  and  ceremony. 

“ Now  you  gentlemen  can  readily  see  that  when 
eighteen  mailed  warriors  hurl  themselves  against  the 
norimon,  that  the  inmate  thereof  is  liable  to  sustain  serious 
injuries, — the  long,  thin  column  cannot  concentrate  with 
sufficient  quickness  to  avert  such  a catastrophe.  So  far, 
so  good.  The  slaying  of  our  enemy  can  thus  be  readily 
accomplished,  but  it  will  be  quite  another  thing  to  get 
away  with  the  head  in  order  that  we  may  hold  it  up  to 


The  Conspiracy. 


37i 


well-merited  public  scorn  and  contempt.  But  that  matter 
must  be  left  to  me  alone, — I will  shower  personal  atten- 
tions upon  it.  Now,  the  order  of  attack  will  be  as  follows  : 
My  young  friend,  J unzo,  must  avail  himself  of  his  previous 
knowledge  of  your  skill  and  prowess,  and  must  select 
four  of  the  best  swordsmen,  whose  duty  it  shall  be  to 
throw  themselves  across  the  line  of  march  of  the  van- 
guard as  it  approaches  near  to  the  bridge.  Of  course 
every  member  of  his  Excellency’s  escort  will  rush  for- 
ward to  punish  the  insolence  of  these  presumed  country 
boors.  The  four  gentlemen  selected  for  this  purpose 
must  be  prepared  to  fight  to  the  death.  Then  two  other 
skilful  swordsmen  must  rush  upon  the  rear  of  these 
samurai  of  the  van-guard  and  body-guard,  and  thus  not 
only  serve  to  confuse  them,  but  also  to  prevent  their 
turning  back  to  the  norimon.  Then  seven  other  men 
must  throw  themselves  into  the  gap  behind  the  norimon , 
and  rush  upon  the  approaching  rear-guard  with  the  utmost 
fury. 

“ These  assaults,  if  properly  delivered,  will  so  confuse 
and  demoralize  the  enemy  that  the  norimon  will  be  left 
entirely  exposed  for  at  least  a minute.  This  time  will  be 
faithfully  and  vigorously  utilized  by  Konishi,  the  three 
sons  of  Nakashima,  and  myself,  to  pay  our  personal  com- 
pliments to  his  Excellency.  Then  I will  secrete  his  head 
under  my  water-proof  cloak,  and  will  run  down  this  road 
here  on  the  map  to  the  gateway  that  crosses  the  first  moat ; 
and  escape  through  the  suburbs  to  our  boat.  At  the  mo- 
ment I fly  from  the  norimon , one  of  you  must  cut  off  the 
head  of  one  of  the  bearers  whom  we  shall  have  cut  down, 
and  run  down  this  long  stretch  of  road  beside  the  moat 
in  plain  view  of  everybody,  toward  the  other  gateway.  He 
who  does  this  must  be  prepared  to  fight  to  the  death,  for 
he  will  surely  be  overtaken  and  slain.  It  will  not  be  pos- 
sible for  me  at  this  moment  to  designate  who  shall  per- 
form this  heroic  feat.  In  the  melee , let  him,  who  can,  at 
once  avail  himself  of  the  opportunity. 

“You  will  please  to  note  very  carefully  this  part  of  the 
map.  Here  near  the  centre  is  the  Sakurada  gateway. 


37  2 


Mito  Yashiki. 


This  bridge  crosses  to  it  from  south  to  north.  The  road 
from  the  Hikone  Yashiki  comes  down  the  hill  from  the 
northwest,  and,  when  it  reaches  the  southern  end  of  the 
bridge,  continues  on  past  it  due  east  for  a long  distance 
beside  the  southern  side  of  the  moat  toward  the  gateway 
through  which  the  man  with  the  decoy  head  must  dash 
when  he  has  led  the  pursuit  down  in  that  direction.  This 
road  that  trends  nearly  due  south  from  the  bridge  is  the 
one  down  which  I will  run  with  his  Excellency’s  head. 
It  is  built  up  with  yashikis  on  both  sides,  so  that  my 
movements  will  be  well  screened  until  I escape  beyond 
the  first  moat  into  the  streets  of  the  city.  Just  as  soon 
as  you  observe  me  run  from  the  ?iorimon,  all  of  you  who 
are  able  to  do  so  must  form  a line  across  the  road  down 
which  I have  escaped  and  must  fight  to  the  death. 
While  the  hue-and-cry  goes  off  on  the  wrong  trail,  your 
desperate  struggles  across  the  true  line  of  retreat  will  so 
retard  pursuit  that  I shall  be  enabled  to  effect  my  escape 
to  the  boat.  From  the  time  when  the  signal  for  attack  is 
given  by  the  four  men  flinging  themselves  across  his 
Excellency’s  line  of  march  until  I run  off  with  the  head, 
ten  seconds  must  not  elapse.  So  you  must  now  improve 
your  time  in  practising  the  details  of  a sham  attack  and 
by  studying  this  map  with  the  greatest  minuteness.” 

Such  in  substance  was  the  running  talk  of  Mr.  Yamada, 
that  lasted  for  the  entire  morning,  being  frequently  inter- 
rupted with  eager  questions  from  the  excited  listeners. 
The  afternoon  was  given  up  to  the  arrangement  of 
details  and  to  practising  rapid  manoeuvres.  The  build- 
ing shook  beneath  the  rush  of  many  feet  and  the  strug- 
gles of  an  imaginary  conflict.  By  nightfall  the  situation 
had  been  thoroughly  mastered.  On  the  following  day 
the  entire  company  embarked  and  went  scudding  down 
the  coast  under  tempestuous  gales,  very  much  to  the 
discomfort  of  everybody  aboard.  In  due  course  of  sailing 
they  reached  Yedo  and  concentrated  their  forces  at  the 
designated  rendezvous  in  the  citizens’  quarter. 


CHAPTER  XXX. 


“ BEWARE  THE  IDES  OF  MARCH  ! ” 

On  the  23d  day  of  March,  i860,  there  prevailed  in 
in  the  city  of  Yedo  a violent  storm.  The  equinoctial 
torrents,  hastening  up  from  the  south,  had  come  in 
violent  collision  with  freezing  blasts  from  the  north,  and 
came  down  in  blinding  sheets  of  sleet  and  snow.  The 
conspirators  had  been  impatiently  waiting  for  a rainy 
day,  and  were  up  bright  and  early  on  this  tempestuous 
morning,  making  their  arrangements  for  the  momentous 
work  of  the  day.  Breakfast  was  speedily  washed  down 
with  abundance  of  sak /,  and  the  ronins  quickly  donned 
their  armor  and  rain  cloaks  and  slipped  out  of  the  house 
in  groups  of  twos  and  threes.  Mr.  Yamada  and  his 
young  assistants  were  the  last  to  leave,  as  it  was  neces- 
sary that  they  should  remain  behind  to  superintend 
matters,  and  to  aid  the  others  in  dressing. 

At  length  the  last  greave  was  strapped  on  and  the  last 
sandal  thong  was  knotted.  Then  Mr.  Yamada,  the  three 
brothers,  and  Konishi  slipped  down-stairs  and  made 
ready  to  depart.  As  they  stood  there  on  the  veranda, 
equipped  with  large  straw  rain-hats,  and  cumbersome 
oil-paper  cloaks,  they  looked  like  a company  of  harmless 
travellers, — for  they  carried  their  swords  close  to  their 
bodies,  beneath  their  water-proofs,  and  their  legs  were 
well  wrapped  in  oil-paper.  The  lull  before  a naval 
battle,  when  the  decks  are  being  sprinkled  with  sand,  has 
been  pronounced  to  be  the  most  depressing  part  of  an 
engagement.  The  quaffing  of  several  cups  of  warm  sakJ 
by  our  friends  at  this  point,  rather  indicated  that  this 
was  their  mauvaise  quatr  heure.  When  they  went  forth 


373 


374 


Mito  Yashiki. 


into  the  streets  they  found  the  weather  all  that  they  could 
have  desired.  The  fitful  gusts  that  always  accompany 
these  changes  of  the  monsoon, — blowing  from  all  points 
of  the  compass  within  an  hour, — render  travelling  very 
disagreeable.  Nobody,  who  can  avoid  doing  so,  will 
venture  out  on  such  occasions.  The  streets  are  aban- 
doned to  the  sweeping  deluge,  the  rain-doors  are  partly 
closed,  and  the  people  huddle  within  doors  over  blazing 
hebachis.  Nothing  but  urgent  business  will  take  a native 
out-doors  on  such  days. 

Our  friends,  therefore,  found  the  streets  entirely  de- 
serted. Even  the  patrols  found  the  inside  of  their 
guard-houses  unusually  comfortable.  In  addition  to  all 
this,  the  sleet  and  snow  alternated  so  as  to  greatly  aid 
the  conspirators  in  their  enterprise.  When  the  snow 
came  down  heavily  it  became  impossible  to  see  very  far 
ahead,  and,  when  the  stinging  sleet  hurled  itself  into  the 
face,  the  head  had  to  be  bent  downward  so  that  the 
broad-brimmed  hats  might  protect  the  eyes,  thus  greatly 
obscuring  the  vision.  Altogether  it  was  an  ideal  day  for 
a dark  deed.  After  strolling  about  for  nearly  an  hour 
they  crossed  the  first  moat  and  leisurely  picked  their 
way  through  the  mud  toward  the  Sakurada  gateway. 

Nobody  appeared  to  be  abroad.  Reaching  the  cause- 
way that  ran  alongside  the  southern  border  of  the  second 
moat,  they  turned  their  steps  towards  the  bridge  de- 
scribed at  the  villa.  With  their  heads  bent  well  forward 
against  the  wind  that  came  rushing  down  the  wide  stretch 
of  moat  and  causeway,  our  ronins  looked  innocent 
enough.  As  they  drew  near  the  gateway  they  saw  three 
or  four  groups  of  travellers  dressed  just  like  themselves, 
straggling  along  at  irregular  distances  down  the  road. 
These  turned  out  to  be  their  coadjutors.  The  time  was 
now  not  far  distant  from  the  hour  when  the  massive 
portals  of  Hikon6  Yashiki  on  the  hill-top  were  usually 
flung  back  to  let  pass  the  retinue  of  the  Gotairo.  It  was, 
therefore,  full  time  for  Mr.  Yamada  to  dispose  of  his 
forces.  Approaching  the  four  young  men,  who  had  been 
delegated  to  commence  the  attack  by  flinging  themselves 


375 


Beware  the  Ides  of  March  ! 

across  his  Lordship’s  line  of  march,  he  directed  them  to 
stroll  leisurely  up  and  down  the  causeway  bordering  the 
moat  until  they  perceived  him  signal  to  them  that  the 
norimon  was  approaching,  at  which  juncture  they  were 
to  go  toward  the  bridge  so  as  to  arrive  there  when  the 
van-guard  was  but  a few  feet  distant  from  it.  Then  he 
distributed  the  rest  of  the  band  in  such  a manner  as  not 
to  attract  attention,  at  irregular  distances  along  the  street 
that  ran  southward  from  the  bridge.  Then  he  and  his 
assistants  loitered  up  the  road  that  led  to  Hikone  Yashiki. 
The  snow  and  sleet  served  greatly  to  screen  their  move- 
ments. 

Just  then  occurred  two  unexpected  events  that  nearly 
dashed  his  well-planned  schemes  to  the  ground.  As  he 
was  strolling  back  to  the  beginning  of  his  beat  at  the 
bridge,  he  chanced  to  look  down  the  street,  and  saw  ap- 
proaching the  large  retinue  of  the  Daimio  of  Kii-shiu, 
brother  of  the  Shogun.  At  the  same  moment  he  dimly 
espied  the  head  of  the  retinue  of  the  Daimio  of  Owari 
coming  up  the  causeway  beside  the  moat.  They  were 
both  headed  for  the  bridge,  and  would  cross  it  not  many 
moments  apart.  It  seems  that  this  day  had  been  pre- 
viously selected  as  the  one  whereon  the  great  Daimios 
were  to  make  congratulatory  visits  to  the  Shogun’s 
palace.  If  the  Gotairo  were  now  to  approach  he  would 
be  surrounded  by  a multitude  of  allies,  for  the  retainers 
of  these  powerful  members  of  the  Gosanke  numbered 
fully  three  thousand  men. 

At  first  it  seemed  to  Mr.  Yamada  as  if  the  execution  of 
the  scheme  must  be  postponed  to  some  future  day. 
Then  he  remembered  that,  after  all,  the  objective  point 
was  the  Gotairo’s  death,  and  that  that  could  probably  be 
accomplished  even  in  the  midst  of  such  an  array  of 
friends, — for  the  attack  would  be  so  sudden  and  unex- 
pected that  the  opposing  samurai  would  not  have  time  to 
disengage  themselves  from  their  cumbersome  rain-cloaks 
and  clumsy  lacquered  hats  before  they  would  be  cut 
down  while  their  swords  remained  sheathed.  Of  course, 
there  would  be  no  prospect  of  getting  away  with  the 


376 


Mito  Yashiki. 


head.  But,  however  gratifying  that  exploit  might  be,  the 
brave  man  bore  in  mind  that  the  main  object  must  not 
be  sacrificed  to  a secondary  consideration.  He  there- 
fore resolved  to  slay  the  Gotairo,  and  then  die  selling  his 
life  as  dearly  as  possible. 

He  accordingly  signalled  to  his  companions  to  hold 
themselves  in  readiness  for  speedy  attack.  Feudal  eti- 
quette prescribed  that  travellers  should  stand  aside  when 
a princely  procession  came  along  the  road.  Accordingly 
the  ronitts  respectfully  gave  up  the  right  of  way,  and 
stood  to  one  side.  Just  as  the  head  of  the  retinue  of 
Kii-shiu  stepped  upon  the  creaking  planks  of  the  bridge 
the  portals  of  Hikone  Yashiki  were  flung  back  and  the 
lacquered  norimon  of  the  Gotairo  was  borne  forth  and 
was  escorted  slowly  down  the  hill.  Here,  then,  were 
three  processions  converging  toward  the  same  point,  and 
likely  to  meet  at  nearly  the  same  moment ! The  situa- 
tion was  indeed  a most  critical  one.  A weaker  head  or 
a fainter  heart  would  have  succumbed  to  the  dilemma. 

But  Mr.  Yamada  never  for  one  moment  lost  his  head, 
although  his  cool  courage  was  taxed  to  its  uttermost 
capacity.  He  took  his  position  at  the  corner  of  the 
street  a few  feet  westward  of  the  bridge.  All  the  groups 
were  in  position  ready  for  the  attack  just  as  soon  as  the 
retainers  of  Kii-shiu  had  crossed  over  the  bridge,  and 
just  before  the  head  of  Owari’s  column — now  slowly  ap- 
proaching in  the  teeth  of  the  wind,  that  was  hurling  the 
sleet  hissing  into  the  murky  waters  of  the  moat — could 
debouch  thereon.  Therefore  they  could  with  good  ex- 
cuse, and  without  exciting  either  comment  or  suspicion, 
stand  around  until  the  Daimios  had  passed  them. 

The  Kii-shiu  men,  having  sighted  the  approach  of  the 
Gotairo’s  norimoti , hastened  their  steps  so  that  their  last 
man  had  disappeared  through  the  gateway  just  as  his 
Lordship’s  van-guard  came  abreast  of  Mr.  Yamada. 
With  a stately  tread  the  two  spearmen,  who  held  aloft 
on  their  long  shafts  the  tufts  of  black  feathers  that 
always  indicated  the  presence  of  a nobleman  of  the  realm, 
slowly  led  the  way  to  the  bridge.  Ah  ! Nawostik£,  Lord 


Beware  the  Ides  of  March  ! 


377 


of  Hikone,  Prince  Regent  of  the  realm,  hast  thou  made 
thy  peace  with  God  ? The  avenger  is  at  hand  ! Beware  ! 

When  the  van-guard  had  almost  reached  the  bridge,  and 
when  the  norimon  had  come  abreast  of  Mr.  Yamada,  that 
gentleman  of  iron  nerves  gave  the  first  signal,  and  in- 
stantly four  mud  bespattered  travellers  trotted  across  the 
line  of  march.  As  had  been  anticipated  by  the  conspir- 
ators, everybody  around  the  norimon  rushed  forward  to 
punish  the  vile  peasants  for  their  infamous  conduct. 
Instantly  the  second  signal  was  given,  every  rain-coat 
fell  simultaneously  to  the  ground,  and  eighteen  mail-clad 
demons,  with  drawn  swords,  rose  from  the  earth  and 
hurled  themselves  upon  the  dumbfounded  warriors  with 
a yell  so  fierce  and  wild  that  the  startled  teal  among  the 
sedges  of  the  moat  arose  in  a cloud  and  fled  to  less  noisy 
regions.  It  will  take  my  slow  pen  a long  time  to  describe 
what  transpired  within  the  next  few  seconds.  The 
Hikond  men  lost  their  wits,  while  the  Owari  men  stared 
in  helpless  bewilderment.  Many  of  the  van-guard  were 
cut  down  before  they  could  draw  their  swords  ; some  of 
them  fled  over  the  bridge  to  call  back  the  Kii-shiu  men 
to  their  aid  ; some,  in  their  efforts  to  secure  a firm  foot- 
hold on  the  muddy  ground,  slipped  and  fell  never  again 
to  rise  ; others  were  dashed  over  the  embankment  into 
the  waters  of  the  moat,  and  a few  were  able  to  draw  their 
swords  and  wage  a desperate  but  unequal  combat. 

In  an  incredibly  short  space  of  time  the  entire  van- 
guard had  been  swept  away.  At  the  very  instant  that 
this  assault  had  been  delivered  on  the  van-guard,  seven 
ronins  hurled  themselves  with  the  utmost  fury  against  the 
rear-guard.  The  astonished  Hikone  men,  unable  to 
quickly  draw  their  swords,  as  they  were  encumbered 
with  their  rain-cloaks,  were  cut  down  in  great  numbers. 
The  head  of  the  column  was  swept  away,  and  the  long 
line  was  rolled  back  up  the  hill  in  the  wildest  confusion. 
A few  samurai  made  a desperate,  but  unavailing,  struggle 
to  resist  the  onslaught.  They  were  either  cut  down,  or 
were  tumbled  over  into  the  moat.  The  majority  of 
those  behind  at  once  took  to  their  heels,  and,  after  cast- 


378 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


ing  aside  their  rain-gear  and  drawing  their  swords, 
returned  valorously  to  the  attack. 

Simultaneously  with  these  two  assaults,  Mr.  Yamada  and 
his  four  assistants  rushed  furiously  upon  the  norimon  and 
instantly  cut  down  the  bearers,  together  with  a solitary 
samurai  lingering  behind.  The  norimon  fell  to  the 
ground.  The  door  was  slid  back,  and  Mr.  Yamada 
grasped  his  Lordship  by  the  hair,  and  dragged  him  out 
upon  his  hands  and  knees.  Instantly  the  avenging 
blades  of  Konishi  and  Tomokichi  stabbed  their  way 
deep  into  his  back,  while  the  long  sword  of  Kunisaburo 
went  whistling  and  crashing  through  his  neck.  Quick  as 
a flash  Mr.  Yamada  placed  the  head  beneath  his  arm, 
caught  up  a rain-cloak  to  throw  over  his  shoulders,  and 
started  to  run  down  the  street.  Three  or  four  samurai, — 
perhaps  from  the  ranks  of  Owari — rushed  forward  to  in- 
tercept him,  but  they  were  instantly  tackled  by  the 
young  assistants,  and  were  cut  down  after  a brief  but 
ferocious  struggle. 

By  this  time  the  routed  samurai  of  the  rear-guard  had 
rallied,  and  were  pouring  down  the  hill,  and  bearing 
back  their  assailants,  several  of  whom  had  been  slain  ; 
and  the  men  of  Kii-shiu  were  now  swarming  back  over 
the  bridge  like  angry  bees  from  a hive.  Quick  as  a flash 
Junzo  sprang  forward  and  cut  off  the  head  of  the 
samurai  lying  beside  the  body  of  theGotairo,  and,  grasp- 
ing it  by  the  top-knot,  brushed  past  the  pursuers  down 
the  long  causeway  beside  the  moat.  The  hue-and-cry 
went  after  him  in  full  halloo.  By  this  time  five  of  the 
ronins  had  been  killed.  The  remaining  ones  now  threw 
themselves  across  the  true  line  of  escape,  and  prepared 
to  die  inflicting  as  much  loss  as  possible  upon  their  ad- 
versaries. 

Tomokichi,  Kunisaburo,  and  Konishi  were  ordered  by 
the  samurai  who  had  assumed  command  upon  the 
departure  of  Mr.  Yamada,  to  run  down  the  street  and 
escape  with  that  gentleman,  as  he  would  undoubtedly 
require  their  further  assistance.  Catching  up  their 
water-proofs,  they  dashed  off,  and  soon  disappeared  in  the 


Beware  the  Ides  of  March  ! 


379 


falling  snow.  This  entire  series  of  transactions  had 
transpired  within  one  minute  ! The  remaining  eight 
ronins  now  formed  a line  across  the  street,  and  dearly 
sold  their  lives  in  a furious  combat  with  the  on-coming 
Hikond  men,  in  which  several  of  the  leading  men  of  that 
clan  were  slain.  Before  the  last  ronin  had  been  cut 
down  the  young  men  had  overtaken  Mr.  Yamada  far 
down  in  the  southern  suburbs. 

But  what  had  become  of  Junzo?  He  had  led  the 
chase  far  down  the  causeway  past  the  entire  length  of  the 
Owari  column,  whose  petrified  warriors  gaped  in  stupid 
wonder  at  the  wild  proceeding.  By  degrees  they  realized 
the  nature  of  the  catastrophe  that  had  happened  at  the 
head  of  the  column,  and  some  of  them  joined  in  the  pur- 
suit. It  was  a long  and  a hard  one.  Down  the  long 
stretch  of  causeway,  through  the  gateway,  over  the 
bridge,  and  beside  the  edge  of  the  outermost  moat,  did 
the  swift  ronin  lead  the  hounds.  Panting  for  breath  and 
sadly  hampered  with  his  armor,  he  steadily  lost  ground. 
At  a short  distance  from  the  bridge  he  was  overtaken  by 
two  samurai.  Throwing  the  head  into  the  waters  of  the 
moat,  he  turned  suddenly  on  them,  and  cut  them  both 
down  before  they  could  check  their  speed.  Then  he 
turned  to  resume  his  flight,  but  found  that  the  delay  had 
enabled  several  other  samurai  to  head  him  off. 

Escape  was  now  impossible.  The  pursuers  were  clos- 
ing in  on  all  sides.  Like  a lion  at  bay  he  fought,  with  his 
back  to  the  moat  for  quite  a while  with  the  grim  fury  of 
despair,  and  cut  down  so  many  of  his  adversaries  that 
they  grew  cautious,  and  sent  for  some  spears  in  the 
guard-house  at  the  gateway.  Then  they  formed  a semi- 
circle of  bristling  steel,  and  advanced  to  impale  him. 
But  our  hero  did  not  relish  this  kind  of  a death.  So  he 
slid  down  the  sloping  side  of  the  moat  and  waded  out 
Waist-deep  into  the  water,  where  he  defied  his  adversa- 
ries to  come  on.  But  they  had  no  desire  to  expose  their 
unarmored  bodies  to  the  strokes  of  a mail-clad  madman, 
who  fought  with  the  fury  and  the  skill  of  an  incarnate 
devil.  So  they  proceeded  to  lay  siege  to  him.  Several 


380 


Mito  Yashiki. 


spears  were  hurled  down  at  him,  but  he  deftly  parried 
them  with  his  sword.  Presently  an  arrow  from  behind 
whizzed  past  his  ear  and  went  hissing  into  the  reeds  in 
front  of  him.  T urning  around, he  beheld  the  ramparts  lined 
with  archers  and  spearmen.  He  was  now  merely  a target 
for  arrows  and  spears.  Escape  was  absolutely  impossi- 
ble. With  sullen  visage  he  glared  up  at  his  enemies  and 
signalled  his  intention  to  avail  himself  of  the  privilege  of 
a samurai.  The  warriors  at  once  sheathed  their  swords, 
the  spearmen  held  their  shafts  at  rest,  and  the  archers 
unbent  their  bows  and  slipped  the  arrows  back  into  their 
quivers.  Everybody  waited  in  respectful  silence  for  the  san- 
guinary act  that  was  to  end  the  tragedy.  Junzo  first  thrust 
his  long  sword  deep  down  into  the  mire.  Then  he  slowly 
drew  forth  his  short  sword  and  cut  the  leathern  thongs 
that  bound  the  armor  to  his  body.  Then,  throwing  open 
his  tunic,  he  plunged  the  blade  deep  into  his  abdomen 
and  severed  the  great  veins  and  arteries  of  that  region 
with  one  swift  and  skilful  stroke.  With  his  expiring 
strength  he  withdrew  the  dripping  blade  and  thrust  it 
through  his  throat,  amid  the  admiring  murmurs  of  his 
adversaries.  His  arm  then  fell  powerless  to  his  side  and 
he  sank  slowly  down  beneath  the  crimson  waves. 

When  the  last  bubble  had  come  to  the  surface,  two 
men  waded  out  and  drew  the  body  to  the  shore  and  laid 
it  upon  the  greensward  beside  the  road.  Thus  perished 
Junzo,  the  second  son  of  Nakashima  Yotori, — as  brave  a 
youth  as  any  whose  deeds  have  been  chronicled  in  classic 
song.  When  the  head  had  been  fished  up  from  the 
depths  of  the  moat  and  had  been  pronounced  to  be 
merely  a decoy,  then  the  old  warriors,  gazing  upon  the 
refined  and  youthful  features  that  lay  there  on  the  grass 
before  them,  knew  full  well  the  heroic  nature  of  the  deed 
that  had  been  accomplished  by  the  devoted  ronin. 

When  the  fight  was  over,  the  warriors  of  the  Hikond 
clan  crowded  around  the  norimon  to  see  whether  their 
lord  had  sustained  any  injury.  Nothing  but  the  head- 
less trunk  remained.  According  to  the  traditions  of 
feudalism,  any  Daimio  who  allowed  himself  to  be  caught 


Beware  the  Ides  of  March  ! 


38i 


napping  and  to  be  ignominiously  slain  beyond  the  walls 
of  his  yashiki  might  have  his  estates  confiscated  by  the 
Shogun.  Therefore  the  body  was  hastily  put  back  in  the 
norimon , and  the  Hikone  men,  by  a legal  fiction,  carried 
him  back  grievously  wounded  to  his  yashiki , where  his 
subsequent  death  was  duly  and  formally  reported.  When 
the  foreign  ministers  residing  in  Yedo  made  inquiries 
after  his  Lordship’s  health,  they  were  graciously  informed 
that  he  was  “no  worse.”  Within  two  hours  of  the  assas- 
sination, every  ward  gate  in  Yedo  was  closed,  so  that 
nobody  could  leave  the  city  without  the  knowledge  of 
the  Bakufu. 


CHAPTER  XXXI. 


THE  FATE  OF  THE  HEAD. 

Mr.  Yamada  and  his  young  companions  settled  down 
to  a long  swinging  trot  when  they  reached  the  suburbs, 
and  they  kept  it  up  all  the  way  to  the  point  on  the  bay 
where  they  had  ordered  their  boat  to  meet  them.  They 
met  but  few  people,  and  these  did  not  pay  them  the 
slightest  notice,  as  they  were  also  hurrying  along  to  get 
out  of  the  storm  as  soon  as  possible.  Even  the  patrols 
at  the  ward  gates  gazed  unsuspiciously  after  them  as 
they  trotted  past, — evidently  considering  it  quite  natural 
for  travellers  to  make  all  haste  to  shelter  themselves  from 
such  weather.  Within  half  an  hour  from  the  time  when 
the  attack  was  made  on  the  Gotairo,  our  ronins  had 
passed  the  last  ward  gate,  and  within  an  hour  they  were 
at  the  point  of  embarkation.  Here  they  paused  a mo- 
ment to  take  breath. 

“Where  is  Junzo?”  inquired  Mr.  Yamada,  with  anx- 
ious surprise,  as  he  for  the  first  time  noticed  the  absence 
of  that  young  gentleman. 

“ It  was  he  who  ran  off  with  the  decoy  head,”  replied 
Konishi,  ruefully. 

“ Ah,  well,  then  he  has  ere  this  died  the  soldier’s 
death  ! ” exclaimed  Mr.  Yamada. 

“ It  was  a brave  and  gallant  deed,”  said  Konishi  ; “ he 
put  us  all  to  shame  in  the  matter,  for,  after  your  depart- 
ure, we  were  like  people  without  heads,  and  were  stupidly 
gazing  around,  not  knowing  what  next  to  do.  He  alone 
kept  his  wits  about  him  and  remembered  your  directions 
about  the  decoy  head.  The  Kii-shiu  men  took  after  him 
like  hunters  after  a wild  boar,  and  left  only  a few  Hikon£ 
men  to  settle  accounts  with  us.” 

382 


The  Fate  of  the  Head . 383 

“ How,  then,  did  you  manage  to  escape  so  as  to  rejoin 
me  ? ” 

“ Mr.  Tanaka  assumed  command  after  your  departure, 
and  ordered  us  off  to  aid  you  in  escaping  with  the  head,” 
replied  Konishi. 

“ He  indeed  acted  wisely  and  honorably,”  said  Mr. 
Yamada,  thoughtfully. 

“ We  have  paid  a dear  price  for  our  revenge,”  remarked 
Tomokichi,  sadly. 

“ Well,  we  have  the  beast’s  head  anyhow  ! ” exclaimed 
Mr.  Yamada,  as  he  drew  forth  the  gory  trophy  from  be- 
neath his  water-proof  and  held  it  out  at  arm’s  length, 
shaking  it  savagely  by  the  ear.  His  companions  crowded 
around  it  and  contemptuously  spat  in  its  face. 

“Now,  gentlemen,  jump  into  the  boat  without  further 
delay,”  said  Mr.  Yamada,  as  he  replaced  the  luckless  head 
beneath  his  arm. 

In  a minute  they  were  under  full  sail,  and  were  soon 
far  down  the  bay,  rushing  before  the  gale  at  a terrific 
pace.  All  day  long  the  billows  broke  over  them,  and  the 
frightened  boatmen  begged  repeatedly  to  be  allowed  to 
shorten  sail  and  to  seek  shelter  under  some  headland. 
But  the  stern  command  was  to  proceed  at  all  hazards. 
After  dark  they  put  into  a secluded  cove  and  waited  for 
daylight. 

“ Bring  those  two  casks  of  sakS  that  I ordered  to  be 
placed  under  the  planks  when  we  left  the  villa,”  said 
Mr.  Yamada,  addressing  one  of  the  boatmen. 

The  casks  were  accordingly  brought  and  placed  in  the 
little  after-cabin.  On  the  downward  voyage  the  con- 
tents of  one  of  them  had  become  well-nigh  exhausted. 
The  top  of  this  one  was  removed,  and  the  Gotairo’s 
head  was  placed  therein.  Then  the  top  was  replaced 
and  the  hoops  were  driven  tightly  down.  After  that  the 
bung  was  removed,  and  the  sake  from  the  other  cask  was 
poured  in  until  it  was  full.  When  the  bung  was  re- 
placed there  appeared  to  be  nothing  but  a very  innocent 
cask  of  sake,  and  no  one  would  ever  have  imagined  that 
it  contained  the  head  of  the  ruler  of  the  Japanese  em- 


38  4 


Mito  Yashiki. 


pire.  On  the  following  morning  the  gale  had  subsided 
sufficiently  to  render  it  safe  to  put  to  sea,  although  the 
billows  were  exceedingly  tempestuous  outside.  The 
voyage  up  the  coast  was  a long  and  stormy  one.  They 
finally  reached  their  destination  in  safety,  however,  and 
ran  their  boat  on  the  beach  in  front  of  the  villa,  where 
they  tarried  until  a pack-horse  could  be  engaged.  Then 
they  tied  the  sake  cask  on  his  back  and  started  off  in- 
land to  pay  their  respects  to  the  old  Prince  of  Mito  at 
his  capital.  They  had  so  timed  their  departure  from 
the  villa  that  they  entered  the  city  under  cover  of  dark- 
ness. Mito  is  built  upon  and  around  a high  hill  that 
rises  abruptly  from  a wide  plain.  The  lower  town  is 
built  about  the  southern  and  eastern  base  of  the  hill, 
and  the  upper  town  is  built  upon  the  high  ground 
westward  of  the  summit.  The  crown  of  the  hill  is 
occupied  by  the  castle, — one  of  the  most  picturesque 
and  beautiful  in  the  whole  empire.  The  precipitous 
sides  of  the  hill  have  been  used  to  form  mighty  grassy 
ramparts  for  the  eastern  and  southern  sides  of  the 
massive  fortifications, — while  immense  cuttings  separate 
the  other  sides  from  the  parks  and  gardens  of  the  upper 
town. 

Our  party  wended  their  way  unobserved  through  the 
long  street  that  led  around  by  the  southern  ramparts  to 
the  upper  town.  Reaching  the  summit  they  followed 
a clean  broad  street  out  toward  the  outskirts  of  the  town, 
where  was  located,  the  estate  of  Konishi.  At  about  ten 
o’clock  they  reached  the  gateway  and  roused  up  the 
gatekeeper,  who  thrust  forth  his  head  from  a window  to 
inquire  what  was  wanted.  Hearing  his  master’s  voice, 
he  at  once  threw  back  the  heavy  doors  and  admitted  the 
party  into  the  courtyard. 

“ Where  is  the  honorable  mistress  ? ” inquired  Konishi. 

“ She  has  long  since  retired  to  rest,”  replied  the  gate- 
man. 

“ Well,  do  not  disturb  her  until  morning,”  said 
Konishi,  “ but  at  once  unload  this  sak / tub  from  the 
horse,  and  place  it  in  your  room  for  the  night.  We  will 


The  Fate  of  the  Head. 


3*5 


sleep  in  one  of  the  chambers  of  the  western  wing  of  the 
house.  Order  the  servants  to  prepare  the  bath  in  the 
morning.  Serve  breakfast  at  the  usual  hour.  Let  the 
horse  occupy  our  stables  for  the  night,  and  in  the  morn- 
ing pay  off  the  man  and  let  him  depart.  Deliver  this 
letter  to  the  chief  councillor  of  the  Prince  early  in  the 
morning.” 

So  saying,  Konishi  led  the  way  quietly  across  the 
yard  and  around  by  the  gardens  until  he  came  to  the 
entrance  of  the  western  wing.  Here  he  gently  roused 
the  attendant  and  gained  admittance  into  the  apartments, 
where  a comfortable  night  was  made  of  it.  O-Hana 
was  an  early  riser,  and  was  speedily  informed  by  her 
maids  on  the  following  morning  of  the  arrival  of  her 
husband  during  the  night.  Rushing  over  to  that  part 
of  the  house,  she  bounded  into  the  room  while  the  gen- 
tlemen were  yet  vigorously  snoring.  In  an  incredibly 
short  space  of  time  their  slumbers  were  terminated, 
and  their  gay  and  amiable  hostess  was  nearly  beside 
herself  with  delight  at  the  unexpected  presence  of  her 
brothers.  She  poured  forth  a perfect  torrent  of  orders 
to  the  servants,  and  deluged  her  guests  with  a multitude 
of  questions, — the  answers  to  many  of  which  had  to  be 
diplomatically  doctored  in  order  to  suppress  information 
not  intended  for  anybody  but  the  Prince  and  his  coun- 
cillors. 

“ I am  so  glad  that  you  were  so  thoughtful  as  to  visit 
me  in  my  new  home  ! ” exclaimed  that  vivacious  young 
lady,  as  she  dipped  forth  the  rice  at  breakfast.  “ But 
why  did  not  you  bring  Junzo  along  with  you?  Surely 
he  has  not  lost  his  interest  in  what  concerns  me,  has  he  ? ” 

“ He  could  not  very  well  get  away  from  his  duties  this 
time,”  replied  Mr.  Yamada,  with  a forced  smile  ; — “ but 
you  will  surely  hear  from  him  very  soon.” 

After  breakfast  the  attendant  announced  the  presence 
of  a visitor  at  the  gateway.  Konishi  hurried  out,  and, 
in  a few  minutes,  word  came  back  for  the  other  gentle- 
men to  join  him  at  the  gatekeeper’s  lodge.  When  they 
arrived  there  they  were  introduced  to  a very  distin- 


386 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


guished-looking  gentleman,  who  turned  out  to  be  the  chief 
councillor  of  the  Prince.  After  profuse  congratulations 
upon  the  brilliancy  of  their  daring  exploit,  he  requested 
them  to  meet  him  with  their  trophy  at  midday  beside 
the  western  gateway  of  the  castle.  Accordingly,  when 
that  hour  drew  near,  they  secretly  removed  the  Gotairo’s 
head  from  the  cask,  and,  slipping  it  into  a blue  silken 
bag,  hastened  toward  the  designated  spot.  The  coun- 
cillor received  them  most  graciously,  and  escorted  them 
over  the  bridge  into  the  exquisite  gardens  of  the  Prince. 
Tarrying  at  a beautiful  pavilion  long  enough  to  place 
the  head  upon  an  elegantly  lacquered  tray,  they  covered 
it  with  a piece  of  red  brocaded  silk,  and  handed  it  to 
an  attendant  to  carry. 

Then  the  councillor  led  them  through  the  winding 
paths  of  the  lovely  garden-like  park  to  another  pavilion 
where  the  old  Prince  was  busily  engaged  in  reading 
some  Chinese  classic.  Prostrating  themselves  in  his 
presence,  they  remained  in  that  position  until  the  old 
gentleman  bade  them  rise  and  state  the  nature  of  their 
mission.  As  they  rose  up  he  recognized  Tomokichi  and 
addressed  him  in  kind  and  courteous  phrases,  inquiring 
after  his  health  and  that  of  his  family.  It  appeared  that 
no  news  had  been  received  from  Yedo  for  many  days,  as 
the  Bakufu  had  established  so  strict  a surveillance  over 
the  city  that  even  the  matter  of  the  assassination  had 
been  suppressed.  When  the  facts  in  that  thrilling  epi- 
sode had  been  laid  before  him  his  excitement  and  ex- 
ultation were  boundless.  His  eyes  gleamed  with  alter- 
nate flashes  of  anger  and  triumph,  while  his  face  fairly 
beamed  with  jubilant  emotions.  He  apostrophized  the 
heroic  deed  in  the  extemporized  measures  of  a Chinese 
sonnet  that  he  evolved  on  the  spur  of  the  moment  from 
his  inner  consciousness,  and  praised  in  exalted  strains 
the  magnificent  achievement.  He  ordered  an  attendant 
to  place  refreshments  before  his  honored  guests.  Again 
and  again  did  he  go  over  the  details  of  the  tragic  affair 
until  it  seemed  as  if  he  would  never  get  through  with  his 
interrogations. 


The  Fate  of  the  Head. 


33  7 


After  two  hours  of  the  most  animated  conversation 
imaginable,  Mr.  Yamada  bowed  down  low,  and  modestly 
begged  leave  to  present  a small  gift.  The  old  gentleman 
graciously  consented,  and  the  covered  tray  was  accord- 
ingly brought  forward  by  Tomokichi  and  placed  upon  a 
low  marble  table  that  stood  before  the  Prince.  The 
cloth  was  then  removed,  and  the  ghastly  eyes  of  the 
Gotairo  leered  up  into  the  countenance  of  his  deadliest 
enemy.  At  first  the  old  gentleman  was  somewhat  taken 
aback, — for  all  information  about  the  head  had  been 
suppressed.  Not  expecting  such  a surprise,  he  failed  to 
recognize  at  once  the  blackened  visage  before  him  as 
that  of  the  Gotairo.  When  he  finally  did  recognize  the 
features,  however,  he  became  wild  with  rage  and  hate. 
He  poured  forth  a torrent  of  bitterest  malediction  upon 
the  defenceless  head,  and  repeatedly  spat  in  its  face. 
Then  he  drew  forth  his  fan  and  smote  its  cheeks  repeat- 
edly, in  order  to  give  emphasis  to  the  flood  of  abuse  that 
he  was  showering  upon  it.  When  his  fury  had  spent 
itself,  he  gave  orders  that  the  head  should  be  stuck  on  a 
pole,  and  be  exhibited  in  the  streets  of  Mito.  He  took 
a pen  and  wrote  a vile  and  scurrilous  placard,  to  be  ex- 
hibited along  with  it.  Shortly  after  this  the  interview 
terminated,  and  the  ronins  went  back  to  Konishi’s  house, 
while  the  councillor  busied  himself  with  carrying  out  his 
master’s  instructions.  On  the  following  day,  after  the 
luckless  head  had  been  exposed  to  the  insulting  jeers 
and  taunts  of  the  populace,  it  was  returned  to  Mr. 
Yamada,  with  the  compliments  of  the  Prince. 

It  was  again  placed  in  the  sake  tub,  and  carried  back 
to  the  sea-shore  villa  for  another  voyage.  Here  Konishi 
bade  farewell  to  his  fello vt-ronins,  and  returned  to  his 
home  in  Mito,  inasmuch  as  his  services  were  no  longer 
requisite.  The  others  embarked,  and,  after  a quick  pas- 
sage down  the  coast,  landed  on  the  shores  of  Ise  and 
journeyed  through  Iga  and  Yamato  in  the  guise  of  sakt 
merchants,  transporting  a cargo  of  that  beverage  on 
pack-horses.  They  slipped  into  Kioto  under  cover  of 
night,  and,  after  ascertaining  that  every  thing  was  peace- 


388 


Mito  Yashiki. 


ful  at  Mr.  Yamada’s  house,  entered  therein  and  stored 
the  fateful  cask  in  an  upstair  closet.  Then  they  dis- 
missed their  horsemen  and  went  to  bed.  On  the  follow- 
ing morning  word  was  sent  to  the  Emperor  that  the  head 
awaited  his  pleasure.  In  a few  hours  orders  came  back 
that  it  should  be  exposed  for  two  hours  upon  the  public 
execution  ground  with  the  following  placard  posted  over 
it : “ This  is  the  head  of  a traitor  who  has  violated  the 

most  sacred  laws  of  Japan, — those  which  forbid  the  ad- 
mission of  foreigners  into  the  country.”  1 

It  was  quite  safe  to  make  this  exposure,  because  the 
features  had  become  unrecognizable,  so  that  the  Shiro 
people  could  not  suspect  that  the  head  of  their  late  mas- 
ter was  being  thus  ignominiously  treated.  At  dusk  it 
Avas  taken  down,  and  clandestinely  conveyed  back  to 
Mr.  Yamada’s  house.  That  indefatigable  gentleman  then 
repacked  it,  and,  after  leaving  Kunisaburo  in  charge  of 
his  house,  and  directing  Tomokichi  to  secretly  abide  Avith 
his  OAvn  family  at  Atago-Yama  until  his  return,  he  set  out 
alone  for  the  coast  of  Ise,  where  he  arrived  with  his  load 
of  sakd  in  due  course  of  pack-horse  travel.  Embarking 
again  in  a boat,  he  set  out  for  Yedo,  where  he  arrived 
after  the  excitement  connected  Avith  the  assassination 
had  entirely  subsided.  Storing  his  merchandise  in  a re- 
mote part  of  the  city,  he  sought  the  brothels  of  the 
Yoshiwara,  and  soon  had  posted  himself  on  all  the  neAvs 
of  the  day,  and  particularly  about  Avhat  Avas  going  on  at 
Hikone  Yashiki. 

Tavo  or  three  nights  after  his  arrival,  he  escorted  one 
of  the  rollicking  blades  of  that  ardent  clan  through  the 
Tora  gateway  up  the  road  toward  his  home.  The  tipsy 
fellow  hiccoughed  forth  innumerable  barbaric  odes  all 
the  way  up  the  hillside,  and  on  one  or  two  occasions, 
when  he  lurched  unexpectedly  and  violently  to  starboard, 
came  very  near  overturning  his  obliging  companion  into 
the  moat.  After  endless  trouble  Mr.  Yamada  finally 
brought  him  up  to  the  gateAvay  of  his  yashiki,  Avhere  he 
handed  him  over  to  the  care  of  his  friends,  Avho  thanked 
' Alcock’s  “ Capital  of  the  Tycoon.” 


The  Fate  of  the  Head. 


389 

the  courteous  samurai  most  cordially  for  his  kindness  in 
the  matter.  Tarrying  in  the  shadow  of  the  walls  until 
the  gates  had  been  closed,  Mr.  Yamada  then  opened 
a silken  bag  and  drew  forth  the  ill-fated  head  that  but  a 
short  time  before  had  proudly  emerged  from  those  same 
portals,  and,  waiting  until  all  was  quiet  within  the yashiki, 
he  threw  it  over  the  walls  and  glided  away  in  the  dark- 
ness. Passing  the  Tora  gateway  on  the  strength  of  the 
countersign,  adroitly  filched  from  his  late  boon  compan- 
ion, he  made  his  way  back  to  his  quarters.  On  the 
following  day  he  started  back  overland  for  Kioto,  jour- 
neying by  secluded  mountain  paths  well  known  to  himself, 
and  arrived  there  safely  in  about  three  weeks  to  find 
every  thing  serene. 


CHAPTER  XXXII. 


A BRIEF  HISTORIC  R^SUMlL 

Eight  years  have  slipped  away  since  the  closing 
scenes  of  the  last  chapter  transpired.  During  this  time 
momentous  changes  have  taken  place  in  the  empire  of 
Japan.  The  Shogunate  has  been  swept  away,  and  the 
Mikado  is  now  in  Yedo  (rechristened  Tokio),  ruling  the 
land  as  Emperor  in  fact  as  well  as  in  name.  The  current 
of  political  events  during  these  years  has  ebbed  and 
flowed  with  the  swift  impetuosity  of  the  tides  that  sweep 
through  the  straits  of  Shimonosdki.  The  star  of  Toku- 
gawa  slowly  faded  as  the  imperial  splendor  rose  above 
the  political  horizon  and  cast  its  rays  over  the  entire 
land.  In  order  that  we  may  fully  understand  the  present 
situation,  let  us  review  briefly  the  principal  events  of  this 
epoch  of  mighty  changes. 

The  death  of  the  Gotairo  proved  to  be  an  irreparable 
loss  to  the  Bakufu.  With  the  fall  of  that  able,  daring, 
and  unscrupulous  man,  the  speedy  decadence  of  feudal- 
ism became  inevitable.  Without  his  strong  and  crafty 
hand  to  direct  the  course  of  events,  bewilderment,  con- 
fusion, and  gloom  settled  upon  the  councils  of  the 
government.  Its  enemies  (and  they  were  legion  !) 
plagued  it  unceasingly.  Since  the  incoming  of  foreign- 
ers the  price  of  rice  had  steadily  risen,  until  it  had 
trebled  in  value,  so  that  the  people  were  in  great  dis- 
tress, and  the  Daimios  were  no  longer  able  to  support 
such  swarms  of  retainers,  and  were  compelled  to  disband 
multitudes  of  samurai , who,  being  thus  cast  adrift,  became 
desperate  ronins , roaming  over  the  country,  carrying  ter- 
ror whithersoever  they  went  on  their  expeditions  of  law- 

390 


A Brief  Historic  Resume.  391 

less  depredations.  These  dangerous  gentlemen  foraged 
on  the  country  at  will.  Scattered  through  the  mountains 
of  the  inland  provinces,  they  descended  like  birds  of 
prey  upon  the  highways,  and  plundered  travellers  and 
caravans  in  order  to  supply  their  necessities.  Many  of 
them  crept  like  tigers  into  the  treaty  ports,  and  merci- 
lessly slew  those  foreigners  upon  whom  they  could  steal 
unawares.  In  Yokohama  alone  there  were  twenty-three 
persons  cut  down. 

On  the  night  of  July  5,  1861,  a band  of  about  twenty 
Mito  ronins , under  cover  of  darkness,  broke  into  the 
large  temple,  in  Yedo,  where  the  British  Legation  had  its 
head-quarters,  and  came  very  near  slaying  Sir  Rutherford 
Alcock  and  his  entire  suite.  But  for  the  darkness  and 
the  skilful  use  of  firearms  nobody  would  have  escaped, 
for  the  attack  was  a complete  surprise  and  was  skilfully 
conducted  until  the  assailants  seemed  to  lose  their  way 
in  the  maze  of  rooms  and  corridors,  from  which  they 
were  forced  to  make  a hasty  retreat,  leaving  many  of 
their  comrades  dead  in  the  yard  when  the  Bakufu  guards 
attacked  them. 

As  a matter  of  course,  the  odium  of  all  these  deeds 
fell  heavily  upon  the  government.  Between  the  showers 
of  complaints  poured  upon  them  by  the  country  people 
and  the  angry  protests  and  threats  of  the  foreign  minis- 
ters, the  lot  of  the  Bakufu  officials  was  far  from  being  a 
happy  one.  To  add  to  their  confusion,  there  happened 
a most  extraordinary  event  about  this  time  that  fairly 
took  away  their  breath.  The  Emperor  served  a notice 
on  the  Shogun  to  come  to  Kioto  and  explain  the  charges 
of  misgovernment  that  were  pouring  in  from  all  sides  ! 
What  was  coming  to  pass  ? Where  would  things  end  ? No 
Shogun  had  visited  Kioto  since  the  year  1634,  and  here 
was  the  proud  descendant  of  Tokugawa  Iyeyas  sum- 
moned to  the  imperial  court  to  give  an  account  of 
himself  like  an  ordinary  vassal  ! Truly,  a mighty  change 
had  come  over  the  spirit  of  the  times  when  the  imperial 
puppet  should  dream  of  so  unprecedented  an  exercise 
of  authority.  A copy  of  this  historic  document,  as 


392 


Mito  Yashiki . 


translated  by  Mr.  Adams  in  his  diplomatic  history  of 
Japan,  will  be  here  inserted,  as  its  quaint  and  pictu- 
resque phraseology  gives  a pathetic  epitome  of  the  state 
of  affairs  that  prevailed  at  that  period,  and  also  illus- 
trates most  grotesquely  and  touchingly  the  utterly  inade- 
quate idea  of  foreign  power  that  prevailed  among  the 
higher  classes  in  Kioto  and  elsewhere  throughout  the 
interior : 

“ Since  the  barbarian  vessels  commenced  to  visit  this 
country,  the  barbarians  have  conducted  themselves  in 
an  insolent  manner,  without  any  interference  on  the  part 
of  the  Bakufu  officials.  The  consequence  has  been  that 
the  peace  of  the  empire  has  been  disturbed  and  the 
people  have  been  plunged  into  misery.  The  Emperor 
was  profoundly  distressed  at  these  things,  and  the  Bakufu 
on  that  occasion  replied  that  discord  had  arisen  among 
the  people,  and  it  was  therefore  impossible  to  raise  an 
army  for  the  expulsion  of  the  barbarians,  but  that  if  his 
Majesty  would  graciously  give  his  sister  in  marriage  to 
the  Shogun  that  then  the  court  and  camp  would  be 
reconciled,  the  people  would  exert  themselves,  and  the 
barbarians  would  be  swept  away.  Thereupon  his  Ma- 
jesty good-naturedly  granted  the  request  and  permitted 
the  Princess  Kazu  to  go  down  to  Kuanto  (Yedo).  Con- 
trary to  all  expectations,  however,  traitorous  officials 
became  more  and  more  intimate  with  the  barbarians  and 
treated  the  imperial  family  as  if  they  were  nobody  ; in 
order  to  steal  a day  of  tranquillity  they  forgot  the  long 
years  of  trouble  to  follow,  and  were  close  upon  the  point 
of  asking  the  barbarians  to  take  them  under  their  juris- 
diction. The  nation  has  become  more  and  more  turbu- 
lent. Of  late,  therefore,  the  ronins  of  the  western 
provinces  have  assembled  in  a body  to  urge  the  Mikado 
to  ride  to  Hakone,  and,  after  punishing  the  traitorous 
officials,  to  drive  out  the  barbarians.  The  two  clans  of 
Satsuma  and  Choshiu  have  pacified  these  men  and  are 
willing  to  lend  their  assistance  to  the  court  and  camp  in 
order  to  drive  out  the  barbarians.  The  Shogun  must 
proceed  to  Kioto  to  take  counsel  with  the  nobles  of  the 


A Brief  Historic  Resume.  393 

court,  and  must  put  forth  all  his  strength,  must  despatch 
orders  to  the  clans  of  the  home  provinces  and  the  seven 
circuits,  and,  speedily  performing  the  exploit  of  expel- 
ling the  barbarians,  restore  tranquillity  to  the  empire. 
On  the  one  hand,  he  must  appease  the  sacred  wrath  of 
the  Mikado’s  divine  ancestors,  and,  on  the  other,  in- 
augurate the  return  of  faithful  servants  to  their  alle- 
giance, and  of  peace  and  prosperity  to  the  people,  thus 
giving  to  the  empire  the  immovable  security  of  Taisan 
(Mountain  in  China).  Or,  secondly,  in  accordance  with 
the  law  laid  down  by  Taiko-Sama,  five  of  the  maritime 
Daimios  should  take  part  in  the  government  with  the 
title  of  the  five  tairos,  defend  the  country  against  the 
barbarians,  and  keep  up  the  defences  properly,  and 
should  then  perform  the  exploit  of  driving  out  the  for- 
eigners. Or,  thirdly,  Hitotsubashi  Giobukio  should  be 
directed  to  assist  the  Shogun,  and  the  Daimio  of  Echi- 
zen  should  be  appointed  Cairo  to  assist  the  Bakufu  in  its 
conduct  on  domestic  and  foreign  affairs.  One  of  these 
three  proposals  must  be  accepted  in  order  to  prevent 
the  disgrace  of  having  to  fold  the  left  lappet  over  the 
right.” 

The  Shogun  promised  to  obey  the  commands  set  forth 
in  this  extraordinary  letter.  In  July,  1862,  he  duly  ap- 
pointed as  Gotairo  the  Daimio  of  Echizen,  a man 
thoroughly  in  sympathy  with  the  Kioto  faction.  He 
also  promised  to  visit  Kioto  in  the  following  spring. 
Furthermore,  he  made  Keike  (Hitotsubashi  Giobukio) 
his  guardian,  thus  giving  great  prominence  to  the  Mito 
clan  by  placing  a son  of  its  old  Daimio  in  authority  over 
himself.  In  April,  1863,  the  Shogun  went  in  great  state 
to  Kioto  to  render  homage  to  his  lord-emperor,  the 
Mikado,  and  to  escort  him  to  the  Shinto  shrines  “ to 
appease  the  sacred  wrath  of  his  divine  ancestors.”  The 
camp  having  thus  bowed  down  to  the  court  and  having 
promised  to  obey  its  commands,  the  Shogun  begged 
leave  to  return  to  Yedo,  where  important  business  de- 
manded his  attention.  Upon  his  return  he  issued  his 
famous  order  (through  the  Lord  of  Echizen)  releasing  all 


394 


Mito  Yashiki. 


the  Daimios  from  their  compulsory  residence  in  Yedo. 
This  was  an  overwhelming  concession  and  admitted 
more  plainly  than  words  how  terribly  shaken  was  the 
dreaded  power  of  the  once  supreme  house  of  Tokugawa. 
Accordingly,  within  one  week,  more  than  half  a million 
warriors  marched  forth  from  the  Yedo  yashikis  and  dis- 
persed to  their  native  provinces  all  over  the  empire 
“like  wild  birds  let  loose  from  a cage”;  and  thus  the 
romantic  yashiki  life  of  that  city,  that  had  existed  nearly 
three  hundred  years,  disappeared  forever.  A few  retain- 
ers were  left  in  charge  of  the  palatial  residences  of  the 
feudal  dukes,  and  the  glory  of  Tokugawa  faded  away 
never  to  bloom  again. 

At  this  point  I cannot  forbear  quoting  the  graphic 
words  of  the  native  historian  as  found  in  Adams’  his- 
tory : “ In  consequence,  all  the  Daimios  and  the  Hatta- 
motos,  who  owned  land,  sent  their  wives  and  children 
to  their  country  residences,  and,  in  the  twinkling  of  an 
eye,  the  flourishing  city  of  Yedo  became  like  a desert ; so 
that  the  Daimios  allied  to  the  Tokugawa  family,  and  the 
vassals  of  the  Shogunate  of  all  ranks,  and  the  towns- 
people, too,  grieved  and  lamented.  They  would  have 
liked  to  see  the  military  glory  of  Kuanto  shine  again  ; 
but  as  the  great  and  small  Daimios  who  were  not  the 
vassals  of  Tokugawa  had  cut  at  the  root  of  this  forced 
residence  in  Yedo,  and  few  of  them  obeyed  any  longer 
the  commands  of  the  Bakufu,  they  also  began  to  distrust 
it,  and  gradually  the  hearts  of  the  people  fell  away. 
And  so  the  prestige  of  the  Tokugawa  family,  which  had 
endured  for  three  hundred  years  ; which  had  been  really 
more  brilliant  than  Kamakura  in  the  age  of  Yoritomo  on 
a moonlight  night  when  the  stars  are  shining  ; which  for 
more  than  two  hundred  and  seventy  years  had  forced  the 
Daimios  to  come  breathlessly  to  take  their  turn  of  duty 
in  Yedo  ; and  which  had,  day  and  night,  eighty  thousand 
vassals  at  its  beck  and  call,  fell  to  ruin  in  the  space 
of  one  morning.” 

On  August  ii,  1863,  a powerful  British  fleet,  in  re- 
venge for  the  slaughter  of  several  of  her  subjects  by 


A Brief  Historic  Resume. 


395 


Satsuma  samurai , bombarded  Kagoshima,  the  capital 
city  of  that  warlike  clan.  The  place  was  laid  in  ruins. 
This  event  seemed  to  put  fresh  life  into  the  expiring 
Shogunate.  Up  to  this  date  the  political  tide  had  borne 
the  Bakufu  along  with  irresistible  force.  But  now,  with 
a mighty  effort,  the  current  was  turned  back  for  a couple 
of  years.  During  1862  and  1863  anarchy  had  prevailed 
in  Kioto.  Multitudes  of  ronins  swarmed  in  from  all  parts 
of  the  country,  and  made  their  headquarters  there.  Many 
of  the  adherents  of  Tokugawa  were  cut  down  in  the 
streets,  and  their  heads  were  pilloried  on  the  Kamogawa 
shoals.  Matters  came  to  such  a pass  that  nobody  could 
safely  venture  into  the  streets  after  dark.  The  brutal 
ronins , running  short  of  available  material  whereon  to 
try  their  lawless  blades,  began  to  cut  each  other  down  in 
a spirit  of  pure  wantonness.  Many  a man  while  walking 
the  streets  in  broad  daylight  would  receive  a mortal  cut 
from  behind,  delivered  by  some  frolicsome  fellow  who 
had  crept  upon  him  unawares  from  some  alley.  Fre- 
quently tipsy  fellows  rushed  forth  from  the  brothels  and 
slashed  away  at  any  thing  animated  with  the  breath  of 
life.  Dogs  became  obsequiously  retiring  in  their  habits, 
and  beggars  girded  up  their  loins  and  fled  to  safer 
regions.  Desperate  street-fights  between  rival  ronins 
were  of  daily  occurrence.  Such  a carnival  of  riot  and 
bloodshed  had  not  been  witnessed  in  Kioto  for  many 
centuries.  At  the  same  time  the  city  was  a scene  of 
bustle  and  splendor  unknown  since  the  thirteenth  cen- 
tury. Daimios  flocked  hither  with  their  trains  to  tender 
homage  and  service  to  the  Emperor,  and  the  place 
rivalled  Yedo  in  its  pageantry. 

Soon  after  the  bombardment  of  Kagoshima  the  Sho- 
gun began  collecting  a powerful  army  around  Kioto. 
Suddenly  his  forces  concentrated  around  the  Gosho,  and 
expelled  Choshiu  from  the  city  upon  the  ground  that  the 
scheming  members  of  that  clan  had  formed  a conspiracy 
to  capture  the  Emperor,  and  to  compel  him  to  issue  a 
decree  abolishing  the  Shogunate.  Without  delay  the 
staunch  Tokugawa  clans  gathered  around  the  imperial 


396 


Mito  Yashiki . 


palace,  and  placed  powerful  guards  of  Aidzu  men  in 
charge  of  its  nine  gateways.  A formidable  body  of 
troops  camped  in  the  imperial  flower-gardens  in  anticipa- 
tion of  some  sudden  assault  on  the  part  of  crafty  Choshiu, 
and  due  preparations  were  made  for  repelling  a violent 
attack.  Proceedings  were  instituted  against  a large  num- 
ber of  persons  supposed  to  be  implicated  in  the  plot. 
Seven  kuge's  and  a large  number  of  ringleaders  were  con- 
victed (according  to  Bakufu  methods)  of  complicity  in 
this  affair.  The  reader  will  not  be  surprised  to  know 
that  Mr.  Yamada  found  it  very  convenient  to  per- 
manently leave  Kioto  at  this  time.  All  the  convicted 
persons  were  compelled  to  fly  to  the  distant  Daimiate  of 
Choshiu,  so  as  to  escape  the  wrath  of  the  Shogun. 

Shortly  after  this  some  Choshiu  troops  marched  upon 
the  Gosho,  and  delivered  a series  of  fierce  assaults  that 
lasted  for  two  days,  and  during  which  the  greater  part  of 
the  city  was  reduced  to  ashes.  In  the  history  already 
quoted  it  is  stated  that  811  streets,  18  palaces,  44  large 
yashikis , 630  small  yashikis,  112  Buddhist  temples,  and 
27,000  houses  were  destroyed.  Twelve  hundred  fire- 
proof godowns  were  knocked  to  pieces  by  the  cannonad- 
ing, in  order  to  prevent  their  serving  as  shelter  for  the 
enemy.  Multitudes  of  people  fled  into  the  mountains  to 
escape  the  bullets  and  the  shells.  In  the  picturesque 
diction  of  the  native  historian  : “ The  city,  surrounded  by 
a ninefold  circle  of  flowers,  entirely  disappeared  in  one 
morning  in  the  smoke  of  the  flames  of  a war  fire.  The 
Blossom  Capital  became  a scorched  desert.”  Finally 
Choshiu  was  routed  and  driven  forth  with  great  slaughter, 
and  quiet  was  restored.  In  the  following  year,  when  the 
allied  fleets  destroyed  the  Choshiu  forts  at  Shimono- 
seki,  the  humiliation  of  that  warlike  clan  seemed  to  be 
complete. 

Having  thus  gotten  rid  of  his  persistent  enemies  for 
the  time  being,  the  Shogun,  in  1865,  prevailed  on  the 
Emperor  to  ratify  the  treaties  that  had  been  made  with 
the  foreign  powers.  For  many  years  the  Bakufu  had 
vainly  tried  to  secure  the  imperial  sanction  to  these  un- 


A Brief  Historic  Resume. 


397 


popular  documents,  but  had  always  been  balked  by  the 
machinations  of  the  Kioto  faction,  headed  by  Satsuma 
and  Choshiu.  Now  they  were  triumphant,  as  they  had 
gained  their  great  diplomatic  victory.  Flushed  with 
success,  they  secured  an  imperial  decree,  commissioning 
the  Shogun  to  raise  an  army  and  march  against  Choshiu 
and  punish  them  as  traitors.  Here  the  tide  turned 
against  them  most  unexpectedly.  During  1866  disaster 
after  disaster  fell  upon  the  Bakufu  armies  that  undertook 
to  handle  this  political  hornet.  The  Choshiu  men  had 
clandestinely  adopted  foreign  methods  of  warfare,  and 
were  able  to  completely  rout  the  clumsy  mediaeval  le- 
gions of  Tokugawa  that  marched  against  them.  Rifles, 
ammunition,  and  foreign  instructors  had  been  brought 
across  the  sea  from  Shanghai,  and  landed  on  the  coast. 
Before  the  close  of  the  summer  the  Shogun’s  forces  had 
been  driven  back  upon  Kioto  in  great  confusion.  So 
mortified  and  worried  was  Iyemochi  by  these  disasters 
that  he  fell  into  a fever,  and  died  on  September  19,  1866. 
On  January  30,  1867,  the  Emperor  Komei  Tenno  died  of 
small-pox.  His  son,  the  present  Mikado  of  Japan,  suc- 
ceeded him.  The  new  Emperor  at  once  appointed 
Keik6  (Hitotsubashi  Giobukio)  as  the  new  Shogun. 
Thus  was  the  house  of  Mito  honored  at  last.  But  the 
old  Prince  was  not  there  to  enjoy  the  triumph,  for  he  had 
died  in  the  autumn  of  1861. 

Hitotsubashi  was  either  a very  weak  leader,  or  he  was 
at  heart  an  imperialist,  and  inclined  to  let  the  office  of 
Shogun  become  extinct.  There  is  every  indication  that 
the  politicians  of  that  period  were  disposed  to  let  the 
Shogunate  down  easy.  The  new  Shogun  repeatedly  re- 
signed his  office,  and  tendered  his  power  to  the  Mikado. 
But  his  Majesty  refused  to  accept  the  resignation,  and 
urged  him  to  continue  in  office.  Then  did  the  enemies 
of  the  Bakufu  pluck  up  courage  and  plot  to  seize  the  im- 
perial person,  and  establish  a new  order  of  things. 
The  warriors  of  Satsuma,  Choshiu,  and  Tosa  concen- 
trated their  armies  about  the  imperial  city.  Desperate 
battles  ensued  between  these  fiery  spirits  and  the  forces 


39^ 


Mito  Yashiki. 


of  Tokugawa.  The  Bakufu  men  were  finally  driven  out 
of  Kioto  with  great  slaughter,  and  the  Emperor  passed 
under  the  control  of  the  southern  Daimios.  Hitotsu- 
bashi,  impelled  by  fiery  Aidzu,  rallied  the  routed  forces 
at  Osaca,  and  returned  with  numerous  reinforcements  to 
the  attack.  Before  he  quite  reached  Kioto,  however,  he 
was  met  by  the  imperial  army  under  the  command  of  the 
immortal  Saigo,  and  was  driven  back  upon  Osaca  in 
hopeless  confusion.  The  discipline  and  the  weapons  of 
the  nineteenth  century  again  triumphed  over  the  clumsy 
paraphernalia  of  feudal  warfare.  Hitotsubashi  resigned 
his  office,  and  went  into  retirement  at  the  castle  of 
Shidzuoka,  about  one  hundred  miles  southwest  of  Yedo, 
where  he  is  yet  living  in  seclusion.  The  victorious  im- 
perialists then  marched  upon  Yedo,  and  abolished  the 
Bakufu,  and  the  Emperor  went  up  there  and  occupied  the 
citadel  of  the  Tokugawas,  whence  had  issued  the  man- 
dates at  which  his  ancestors  had  trembled  for  so  many 
generations. 


CHAPTER  XXXIII. 


THE  DAWN  OF  A NEW  ERA. 

One  bright  sunshiny  day  in  the  autumn  of  1868  the 
Pacific  Mail  Steamship  Company’s  steamer  China  lay  at 
anchor  in  the  harbor  of  Yokohama.  Huge  paddle-wheel 
vessels  like  this  one  had  been  plying  regularly  for  two 
years  between  San  Francisco  and  Hong  Kong  by  way  of 
Japan.  Every  month  one  of  these  black  leviathans  of 
modern  commerce  awoke  with  its  hoarse  bellowings  the 
echoes  that  slumbered  among  the  green  hills  around  the 
bay,  as  it  sought  the  shelter  of  the  peaceful  waters  after 
its  long  battling  with  the  turbulent  waves  of  the  broad 
ocean.  The  strong  arm  of  the  nineteenth  century  had 
indeed  stretched  itself  forth,  and  snatched  the  empire  of 
the  rising  sun  from  the  category  of  hermit  nations.  On 
the  afternoon  of  the  day  above  alluded  to  a sharp-prowed 
native  boat  put  off  from  the  shore,  bearing  three  samurai 
toward  the  massive  hulk  that  loomed  up  in  the  bay. 

When  these  gentlemen  reached  the  foot  of  the  long 
gangway  that  led  up  the  side  of  the  vessel  they  hesitated 
a moment,  as  if  in  doubt  whether  to  ascend  or  not,  but 
the  elderly  gentleman  in  the  group  speedily  settled  the 
question  by  quickly  mounting  to  the  deck,  with  the  other 
two  close  at  his  heels.  There  they  made  inquiries  for 
the  captain,  and  were  directed  to  go  up  the  main  stair- 
way to  the  hurricane  deck,  where  his  cabin  was  located. 
Following  these  directions,  they  came  out  on  the  upper 
deck,  and  then,  instead  of  turning  toward  the  bow  of  the 
ship,  they  went  aft  toward  a group  of  passengers  who 
were  lounging  about  in  steamer  chairs  enjoying  them- 
selves with  comparing  notes  on  their  day’s  excursion 
ashore.  Here  they  again  made  inquiries  for  the  captain, 


399 


400 


Mi  to  Yashiki . 


and  were  escorted  by  one  of  the  obliging  travellers  to  the 
cabin  of  that  august  individual. 

“ Who  are  those  gentlemen  ? ” inquired  the  compan- 
ions of  the  accommodating  passenger  when  he  had  re- 
turned to  the  group. 

“ I believe  they  are  custom-house  officers,  who  desire 
to  see  the  wonderful  foreign  steamer,”  was  the  reply. 
“ They  seem  to  be  a fine  set  of  fellows.” 

“ How  exceedingly  gracious  were  the  manners  of  that 
tall  young  man  who  spoke  English  so  well,”  exclaimed  a 
young  lady. 

“ They  are  not  ordinary  Japs,  I ’ll  bet,”  put  in  a young 
Californian,  as  he  blew  a ring  of  smoke  from  between  his 
lips  and  watched  it  float  up  against  the  awning  overhead. 

“I  rather  took  a fancy  to  the  intelligent  features  of  the 
elderly  gentleman,”  observed  another  passenger. 

“ And  I am  free  to  confess,”  replied  the  young  lady, 
“ that  I did  n’t  like  him  at  all.  I did  not  like  the  cun- 
ning and  cruel  expression  of  his  eyes  when  he  half 
closed  them  and  took  me  in  from  head  to  foot.  I felt 
afraid  of  him.  I instinctively  knew  that  the  eyes  of  a 
bold  and  crafty  creature  were  searching  me  through  and 
through.  I presume,  however,  that  I am  the  first  white 
woman  he  has  ever  seen.  Therefore,  I will  condone  his 
staring  me  out  of  countenance.” 

“Now  I must  say  that  I rather  liked  his  face,”  ex- 
claimed the  Californian  ; “ there  was  a dashing  and  dare- 
devil expression  about  it  that  I really  admired.  I ’ll 
bet  he  would  make  things  mighty  hot  if  he  ever  got  to 
swinging  those  knives  that  he  carries  in  his  belt.  Great 
Jupiter!  what  an  orbit  he  could  sweep  with  that  long 
blade  of  his.  We  would  have  to  hustle  around  mighty 
lively  to  get  beyond  his  reach.  I would  most  dreadfully 
hate  to  have  him  get  the  drop  on  me.” 

“ Oh,  well,  you  men  always  admire  a countenance  that 
has  lurking  about  it  a suggestion  of  blood  and  thunder,” 
retorted  the  young  lady  ; “ but  I don’t,  and  I never  shall. 
Now,  I must  say  that  I really  admired  the  faces  of  the 
young  men.  They  were  so  refined  and  intelligent.” 


The  Dawn  of  a New  Era. 


401 


“ They  were  fine-looking  fellows,  that ’s  a fact,”  re- 
plied the  Californian  ; “ I wonder  who  they  are  any- 
how ? There  they  go  with  the  quartermaster  on  a tour 
of  inspection.  Well,  when  they  have  gone  I will  pump 
his  royal  highness  as  to  their  pedigree.” 

Accordingly  when,  after  a thorough  examination  of  the 
ship,  the  quartermaster  had  bidden  adieu  to  his  guests  at 
the  top  of  the  gangway,  the  young  Californian  approached 
him  and  inquired  : “ Who  are  those  chaps  ? ” 

“ I ’ll  be  blowed  if  I know  who  they  be,”  exclaimed 
the  quartermaster.  “They  do  beat  any  thing  1 ever 
tackled  in  all  my  days  for  downright,  undiluted,  up-and- 
down,  double-twisted  curiosity.  They  poked  their  noses 
into  every  nook  and  cranny  of  this  ship.  That  old 
codger, — well  ! he  do  beat  any  monkey  I ever  seen.  He 
fingered  every  part  of  the  machinery  until  his  hands 
were  as  greasy  as  the  piston-rod  ! When  I offered  him 
some  soap  and  water  he  did  n’t  seem  to  understand  their 
use  until  I explained  the  matter  to  the  young  man  who 
spoke  English.  I do  believe  that  old  Jap  would  have 
had  his  head  inside  the  steam-chest  if  I had  left  him 
alone  for  a single  minute.  By  gosh  ! I breathe  freely 
now  that  they  are  gone.  No,  sir,  you  can’t  prove  by 
me  who  they  be.” 

This  unique  and  graphic  description  of  the  doings 
of  the  three  samurai  was  duly  reported  to  the  group  on 
the  quarter-deck,  who  listened  to  its  recital  with  great 
merriment.  As  the  vessel  lay  there  on  the  bosom  of  the 
peaceful  waters  they  discussed  late  into  the  evening  the 
strange  sights  and  sounds  that  surrounded  them,  and 
ventured  numberless  conjectures  as  to  what  was  tran- 
spiring beyond  the  distant  mountains  that  rose  up  so 
sublimely  against  the  dark  horizon. 

But  who  were  these  inquisitive  samurai  i The  reader 
has  probably  already  surmised  that  they  are  our  old 
friends,  Mr.  Yamada,  Tomokichi,  and  Kunisaburo. 
How  came  they  there  ? Let  us  take  a brief  retrospect 
and  inform  ourselves  on  that  point.  Mr.  Yamada,  as 
before  stated,  after  having  thrown  the  luckless  head  of 


402 


Mito  Ycishiki. 


the  Lord  of  Hikone  over  the  walls  of  his  yashiki,  returned 
overland  to  Kioto.  He  lived  there  quietly  with  his 
family  until  the  kuge  whom  he  served  was  compelled  to 
fly  to  Choshiu.  As  there  existed  no  doubt  in  the  minds 
of  the  Shiro  people  as  to  Mr.  Yamada’s  complicity  in  his 
master’s  plottings,  and  as  they  felt  strong  enough  to  take 
him  vigorously  in  hand,  this  crafty  gentleman  deemed  it 
best  to  take  his  long  anticipated  departure  from  Kioto. 
He  retreated  in  his  usual  masterly  manner,  with  his  en- 
tire family,  to  the  glen  of  Atago-Yama,  where  Tomokichi 
had  been  quietly  living  with  his  family  ever  since  his 
return  from  the  tragedy  of  the  Sakurada  gateway. 
Nobody  had  molested  him  because  the  exciting  events 
in  Kioto  had  so  absorbed  the  attention  of  the  Bakufu 
people  that  no  time  could  be  given  to  hunting  down  the 
victims  of  the  former  Gotairo’s  wrath.  When,  there- 
fore, late  one  night  Mr.  Yamada  and  his  family  entered 
the  gateway  and  announced  that  the  time  for  flight  had 
at  length  arrived,  there  was  considerable  commotion  in 
the  Nakashima  family. 

Without  delay  Tomokichi  prepared  to  join  him  in  his 
flight.  His  mother  was  dead,  so  that  there  would  only 
be  his  wife,  himself,  and  the  four  children  to  pack  off. 
The  old  lady  had  died  within  one  year  after  the  mourn- 
ful death  of  her  husband  at  the  monastery.  She  never 
recovered  from  the  shock,  and  pined  away  like  a crushed 
flower  until  the  mysterious  messenger  summoned  her  to 
the  shadowy  realms  whither  had  fled  the  stern  spirit  of 
her  departed  lord.  Leaving  the  house  in  charge  of  his 
faithful  servant,  he  set  out  before  daybreak  of  the  follow- 
ing day  in  company  with  the  Yamadas,  and  climbed  over 
the  lofty  mountains  north  of  the  glen,  and  descended  to 
the  shores  of  the  Japan  Sea  by  secret  paths  well  known 
to  Mr.  Yamada.  Here  they  embarked  on  board  of  a 
junk,  and  sailed  down  the  coast  until  they  reached  Cho- 
shiu, where  they  remained  for  three  years. 

During  the  bombardment  of  Shimonos£ki  by  the  allied 
fleets,  Mr.  Yamada,  Tomokichi,  and  Kunisaburo  watched 
the  fighting  from  a neighboring  hill-top.  Like  nearly  all 


The  Dawn  of  a New  Era. 


403 


of  their  countrymen  of  that  period  these  gentlemen  had 
supposed  that  in  warfare  the  only  difference  between 
foreigners  and  the  Japanese  lay  in  the  fact  that  the 
weapons  of  the  former  were  superior,  and  that  just  as 
soon  as  the  Japanese  had  adopted  these  weapons  then 
they  would  be  able  to  fight  the  foreigner  on  equal  terms. 
It  was  therefore  with  great  surprise  that  they  wit- 
nessed the  ease  with  which  the  foreign  vessels  destroyed 
the  native  forts  and  batteries  that  had  been  fortified 
with  imported  rifled  cannons.  Their  surprise  was  even 
greater  when  they  saw  the  foreign  soldiers  land  and 
attack  the  Choshiu  warriors  in  their  own  strongholds. 
With  their  keen  military  instincts  they  beheld  with  un- 
bounded admiration  the  scientific  formation  of  the 
troops  in  order  of  battle.  As  the  gleaming  line  of  bayo- 
nets advanced  up  the  slopes,  it  was  violently  attacked  by 
bands  of  furious  samurai  with  swords.  With  amazement 
Mr.  Yamada  saw  his  countrymen  swept  away  like  chaff 
before  an  advancing  tempest  by  that  invincible  line  of 
steel.  Whatever  might  have  been  the  individual  bravery 
of  the  assailants  they  had  no  chance  against  the  organ- 
ized troops  upon  whom  they  so  madly  hurled  themselves. 
Down  they  went  like  grass  before  the  scythe,  doing  but 
little  damage  to  their  enemies. 

As  Mr.  Yamada  beheld  the  complete  discomfiture  of 
the  Choshiu  warriors,  “ a change  came  over  the  spirit  of 
his  dreams.”  Hitherto  he  had  fondly  imagined  that  his 
countrymen  by  introducing  foreign  weapons  might  be 
able  to  drive  the  intruders  out  of  the  country  and  thus 
restore  the  peace  of  the  realm.  With  profound  astonish- 
ment he  now  perceived  that  superior  weapons  formed 
but  a single  element  in  the  problem.  He  realized 
now  that  behind  the  rifle  and  the  bayonet  there  lay  a 
moral  power  that  made  those  weapons  irresistible  in  the 
hands  of  those  possessing  that  subtle  force.  This  pe- 
culiar fact  has  made  itself  very  conspicuous  during  the 
many  wars  waged  by  the  troops  of  Great  Britain  and 
France  against  the  warriors  of  India  and  China  during 
the  last  hundred  years.  A mere  handful  of  European 


404 


Mito  Yashiki. 


troops  conquered  Hindostan.  In  the  last  war  between 
England  and  China,  twenty  thousand  British  and  French 
soldiers  marched  from  the  Taku  forts  up  to  Pekin, 
driving  before  them  in  complete  rout  an  army  of  Chinese 
warriors  estimated  as  high  as  half  a million  men.  And 
they  captured  the  city  without  firing  a single  gun  ! 

When  the  sepoys  of  India  went  into  revolt  in  1857 
they  were  armed  with  muskets  and  bayonets  and  had 
been  drilled  for  so  many  years  in  their  use  that  they 
could  handle  them  quite  as  well  as  European  troops. 
Yet  a few  shiploads  of  British  soldiers  subdued  the 
great  mutiny ! Fifty  thousand  of  the  flower  of  the 
East  Indian  sepoy  army  garrisoned  the  fortified  city  of 
Delhi,  whose  massive  ramparts  had  been  constructed  by 
skilled  European  engineers  so  as  to  be  as  formidable  as 
the  vaunted  ramparts  of  Strasburg,  planned  by  the  re- 
nowned Vauban.  Yet  a little  army  of  Englishmen  (I  had 
almost  said  company),  comprising  barely  six  thousand 
soldiers,  unhesitatingly  laid  siege  to  the  place,  and,  after 
effecting  a barely  practicable  breach  near  the  Cashmere 
gate,  unflinchingly  breasted  the  storm  of  shot  and  shell 
that  poured  down  upon  them  from  the  machicolated 
battlements,  and  carried  the  city  by  storm,  driving  forth 
ten  times  their  own  numbers ! The  sepoys  on  that 
occasion  fought  desperately  and  skilfully,  yet  were  un- 
able— although  using  the  same  weapons  as  their  adver- 
saries— to  stand  before  them,  and  were  swept  out  of  the 
city  like  dust  before  a tempest.  Such  has  been  the 
result  whenever  the  Christianized  warriors  of  Europe 
have  come  in  collision  with  the  pagan  hosts  of  Asia. 

“ Wherein  lies  the  power  of  these  foreigners  ? ” ex- 
claimed Mr.  Yamada,  as  he  admiringly  watched  their 
operations  ; “ whence  is  the  source  of  their  superiority  ? 
Surely  it  cannot  lie  entirely  in  their  weapons,  for  our 
soldiers  have  armed  themselves  with  the  same  weapons. 
Nor  can  it  be  merely  a matter  of  courage,  for  our 
soldiers  are  equally  brave,  as  is  clearly  shown  by  the 
way  they  threw  away  their  lives  just  now  in  rushing  on 
the  bayonets.” 


The  Dawn  of  a New  Era. 


405 


“Nor  can  it  lie  entirely  in  their  knowledge  of  the 
science  of  war,”  remarked  Tomokichi,  “because  these 
Choshiu  samurai  have  been  for  many  years  studying  the 
science  of  war  from  Dutch  and  French  treatises,  and 
have  had  foreign  officers  to  drill  and  instruct  them.” 

“ I do  not  think,”  said  Kunisaburo,  as  he  watched  the 
troops  with  a powerful  field-glass  that  one  of  his  Choshiu 
friends  had  lent  him  for  the  occasion,  “ that  their  supe- 
riority can  lie  entirely  in  their  bodily  strength,  because 
our  men  are  very  nearly  as  strong  when  you  take  them 
man  for  man.” 

“ Yet  this  organized  aggregation  of  foreign  soldiers,” 
exclaimed  Mr.  Yamada,  “ has  crushed  the  troops  of 
Choshiu  as  if  such  work  were  mere  child’s  play  ! If 
reports  be  correct,  there  are  in  the  foreign  ranks  many 
men  contemptible  in  their  character  and  not  over-brave 
in  their  natures,  yet  some  unseen  power  seems  to  seize 
them  and  hold  them  in  line  of  battle  as  parts  of  some 
vast  machine.  Some  inspired  purpose  animates  the 
entire  body  of  men  with  unity  of  motion  and  action. 
Some  invisible  but  mighty  force  sways  them  as  one  body 
and  hurls  them  with  overwhelming  momentum  upon  our 
unorganized  bands  of  brave  fellows.” 

“ The  single  mind  that  controls  those  forces,”  said 
Tomokichi,  “ you  will  probably  find  in  the  brain  of  the 
commanding  officer  who  is  now  standing  on  the  deck  of 
the  flagship  watching  the  operations  with  his  glass.” 
“Yes,”  replied  Kunisaburo,  “but  his  mind  has  been 
instructed  by  the  military  books  in  his  cabin.  Therefore 
you  may  say  that  the  principles  of  those  military  treatises 
constitute  the  controlling  force  moving  those  troops.” 
“Yes,”  rejoined  Tomokichi,  “but  those  military  prin- 
ciples have  been  evolved  by  other  minds  out  of  many 
bitter  experiences  in  war,  and  have  been  collected  and 
printed  by  some  mind  having  but  little  practical  knowl- 
edge of  war, — by  some  theoretical  student  perhaps.  Now 
tell  me  whose  mind  is  controlling  those  soldiers.  Is  it 
the  mind  of  the  author  writing  the  book  ? Or  is  it  the 
mind  of  the  general  (or  generals)  from  whose  experiences 


406 


Mito  Yashiki. 


the  military  principles  have  been  evolved  ? Or  is  it  the 
mind  of  the  officer  there  on  the  flagship  who  is  now  ap- 
plying those  principles  ? ” 

“ Those  are  all  factors  in  the  problem,”  said  Mr. 
Yamada.  “The  mind  of  the  officer  is  undoubtedly  the 
most  prominent  one.  But,  in  addition  to  all  this,  it  is 
manifest  that  the  moral  qualities  of  the  troops  must  be 
the  secret  of  the  success  of  those  organized  movements. 
You  might  drill  our  low-bred  peasants  in  the  same  school 
of  science  along  with  those  foreigners,  and  yet  I appre- 
hend they  would  make  but  a poor  showing  against  them 
in  battle.  Intelligence,  exalted  devotion  to  their  pur- 
pose, manly  courage,  and  self-sacrifice  are  the  most  pow- 
erful factors  in  this  matter.  Now,  the  question  in  my 
mind  is  as  to  the  process  by  which  these  foreigners  have 
developed  such  moral  qualities  in  their  troops.  The 
rank  and  file  of  their  armies  are  composed  of  common 
people.  Yet  these  sons  of  vulgar  plebs  when  brought  in 
contact  with  our  brave  and  intelligent  satnurai  are  able 
to  vanquish  them  with  the  utmost  ease  ! Truly,  we  are 
no  nearer  the  solution  of  this  mystery  than  when  we 
started.  I must  investigate  this  matter,  and  endeavor  to 
ascertain  the  cause  of  the  foreigners’  superiority  in  bat- 
tle. Until  that  has  been  done  we  can  never  hope  to 
cope  successfully  with  them.” 

Thus  reasoned  those  keen  and  observing  pagan  intel- 
lects. They  went  back  to  the  little  temple  where  they 
were  living,  and  discussed  the  matter  at  great  length. 
The  results  of  this  battle  profoundly  moved  the  thought- 
ful minds  of  the  Japanese  empire.  It  effectually  opened 
the  eyes  of  the  people  to  the  fact  that  imitation  of  the 
manners  and  customs  of  foreigners  would  be  of  little  use 
to  the  country  unless  they  also  assimilated  the  principles 
on  which  those  manners  and  customs  were  based.  From 
that  time  the  outcry  against  the  “ barbarian  ” subsided, 
and  the  treaties  were  forthwith  ratified.  Progressive 
Japan  then  set  out  to  thoroughly  investigate  the  institu- 
tions of  foreign  nations,  and  to  ascertain  the  reasons  for 
their  superiority.  From  that  time  our  exiles  in  Choshiu 


The  Dawn  of  a New  Era. 


407 


spent  their  leisure  hours  in  diligently  studying  foreign 
treatises  on  political  science  and  the  arts  of  peace,  and 
their  interest  in  fighting  the  “ barbarians  ” entirely  sub- 
sided. Their  thirst  for  knowledge  became  insatiable. 
They  soon  found  that  they  needed  more  favorable  sur- 
roundings under  which  to  prosecute  their  studies  and 
investigations.  They  felt  greatly  the  need  of  a foreign 
instructor  to  explain  many  things  that  were  obscure. 

When  the  tide  of  war  turned  against  the  armies  of  the 
Shogun,  our  friends  joined  the  forces  that  marched  tow- 
ard Kioto,  and  fought  valiantly  in  the  fierce  struggles 
around  the  imperial  city.  When  the  Shogun’s  forces  had 
been  driven  back  upon  Yedo,  they  followed  on  their 
track,  and  took  part  in  the  severe  battles  at  the  Uyeno 
Park  on  the  bluffs  north  of  the  city.  When  peace  had 
been  restored  they  embarked  on  one  of  the  Pacific  Mail 
steamers  that  plied  on  the  branch  line  to  Shanghai  via 
the  ports  of  the  Inland  Sea,  and  reached  Shimonoseki  in 
four  days,  instead  of  forty  days  as  of  yore.  Bringing 
back  their  families  to  Kioto  they  found  every  thing  deso- 
lated by  fire.  Not  a vestige  of  the  Yamada  mansion 
remained.  The  flames  of  war  had  done  their  work  only 
too  well.  Everybody  that  could  do  so  was  moving  away 
to  the  treaty  ports  in  order  to  start  in  the  new  commer- 
cial life  that  seemed  to  be  opening  up  to  the  country. 

Our  friends  decided  to  follow  the  tide.  Accordingly, 
Tomokichi  sold  out  all  his  property  at  Atago-Yama,  and 
Mr.  Yamada  sold  out  all  of  his  interests  in  Kioto,  and 
the  entire  party  embarked  on  the  steamer  at  Kobe,  and 
reached  Yokohama  within  thirty-six  hours.  Shortly  after 
their  arrival  they  received  lucrative  custom-house  ap- 
pointments at  this  port,  in  grateful  recognition  for  their 
many  services  in  behalf  of  the  Emperor’s  cause.  At 
the  same  time  Konishi  was  summoned  from  Mito,  and 
appointed  to  fill  a prominent  position  in  the  Foreign 
Office,  a position  for  which  his  experience  and  great 
linguistic  abilities  well  fitted  him.  Our  Yokohama  party 
forthwith  purchased  a fine  piece  of  property  on  one  of 
the  picturesque  hills  near  the  bay,  and  at  the  time  of  the 


408 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


opening  of  this  chapter  had  well  established  themselves 
in  housekeeping  to  the  great  satisfaction  of  the  ladies, 
who  had  become  thoroughly  disgusted  with  journeying 
from  one  end  of  the  empire  to  the  other.  And  Mr. 
Yamada  and  the  young  men  spent  all  their  leisure  hours 
in  visiting  the  ships  in  the  harbor  and  in  watching  the 
members  of  the  foreign  settlement  as  they  engaged  in 
their  business  and  sports.  They  made  their  observations 
timidly  and  shyly  at  first,  but  gradually  became  bolder  as 
they  perceived  that  the  strange  foreigners  rather  enjoyed 
having  crowds  of  natives  at  their  horse-races  and 
athletic  exhibitions. 


CHAPTER  XXXIV. 


LIGHT  BREAKS  THROUGH  THE  CLOUDS. 

Mr.  Yamada  was  sitting  on  the  veranda  of  his  house 
one  morning,  and  was  gazing  in  an  absent-minded 
fashion  out  upon  the  azaleas  and  chrysanthemums  bloom- 
ing in  his  back-yard.  At  intervals  he  filled  his  pipe  and 
listlessly  sucked  the  smoke  into  his  mouth,  whence  he 
slowly  and  meditatively  puffed  it  foith  as  he  ever  and 
anon  sipped  the  hot  tea  that  his  good  wife  occasionally 
brought  in  upon  a tray.  The  old  lady  had  become  so 
thoroughly  acquainted  with  her  husband’s  moody  spells 
that  she  knew  just  how  to  manage  him  during  their  con- 
tinuance, and  therefore  she  judiciously  let  him  entirely 
alone, — taking  the  precaution,  however,  as  already  in- 
timated, to  soothe  his  nerves  with  periodical  quaffs  of 
the  national  beverage. 

Thus  did  he  sit  and  meditate  during  the  greater  part 
of  the  forenoon.  The  elder  children  had  gone  off  to 
school,  and  the  younger  ones  had  accompanied  their 
mothers  to  a distant  wing  of  the  house,  where  their  noise 
would  not  disturb  their  grandfather.  And  what  was  that 
old  gentleman  so  profoundly  meditating  about  ? He  was 
absorbed  in  wrestling  with  the  mighty  problem  as  to  what 
constituted  the  foreigner’s  superiority  over  the  Japanese 
people.  He  had  studied  and  observed  all  phases  of  the 
characteristics  of  these  aggressive  Caucasians  without 
solving  the  mystery,  or  even  coming  nearer  to  a conclu- 
sion than  when  he  started  out  on  his  investigations. 
He  had  studied  these  energetic  creatures  in  all  parts  of 
the  settlement,  and  had  availed  himself  of  every  oppor- 
tunity to  visit  the  ships  in  the  harbor.  But  he  had  found 


409 


4io 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


himself  puzzled  and  confused  with  his  inability  to  see 
through  the  clouds.  He  had  carefully  watched  them  at 
their  business,  and  at  their  pleasures  ; he  had  seen  them 
walking,  riding,  boating,  running,  and  swimming  ; he 
had  seen  them  eating,  drinking,  smoking,  and  lounging  ; 
he  had  noted  their  many  virtues  and  their  grossly  sensual 
dissipations  ; he  had  observed  their  bodily  prowess  as 
exhibited  in  athletic  sports  ; he  had  greatly  admired  their 
exuberant  energy  in  all  their  enterprises  ; he  had  keenly 
scrutinized  their  public  behavior,  and  had  carefully 
posted  himself  on  their  domestic  affairs  ; — he  had  indeed 
subjected  them  to  a most  searching  analysis.  And  what 
was  the  result  of  all  his  investigations  ? Had  his  keen 
intellect  torn  aside  the  veil  that  seemed  to  obscure  the 
cause  of  the  foreigner’s  superiority?  From  the  great 
mass  of  facts  so  carefully  collected  had  his  bright  per- 
ceptions evolved  any  principle  that  could  explain  why  one 
set  of  human  beings  should  be  so  much  in  advance  of  an- 
other set  of  human  beings  constituted  after  a precisely 
similar  fashion?  He  is  soliloquizing.  Let  us  listen  to 
his  musings. 

“ My  perplexity  in  this  matter  seems  to  increase  in  pro- 
portion as  I plunge  deeper  into  the  subject,”  mutters  he, 
as  he  dreamily  poises  his  pipe  between  his  fingers,  and 
gazes  upon  an  orange  shrub  that  is  blooming  in  a porce- 
lain jar  beside  him.  “ I cannot  make  out  what  it  is  that 
appears  to  inspire  the  lives  of  these  foreigners  with  such 
boundless  animation,  so  that  their  existence  seems  to  be 
buoyant  with  joyousness,  and  not  depressed  with  hope- 
less and  despairing  indifference.  They  do  not  possess  a 
single  bodily  organ  that  we  Japanese  do  not  also  possess. 
They  have  hands,  arms,  legs,  heads,  and  cuticle  almost 
exactly  like  ours.  They  eat,  taste,  drink,  hear,  and  smell 
just  as  we  do.  They  walk,  swim,  run,  jump,  and  ride 
just  as  we  do.  Even  their  internal  organs  are  similar  to 
our  own  in  all  respects.  The  blood  in  their  veins  is  of 
the  same  color  and  temperature,  and  circulates  in  exactly 
the  same  way. 

“ It  is  true  that  their  food  differs  somewhat  from  ours, 


Light  Breaks  Through  the  Clouds.  4 1 1 


but  that  alone  cannot  explain  this  difference  of  tempera- 
ment, because  the  constituent  elements  entering  into 
their  diet  will  not  be  found  to  differ  very  much  from  the 
elements  entering  into  our  diet.  They  eat  more  meat 
and  consume  greater  quantities  of  cereals  and  vegetables, 
but  that  fact  will  not  account  for  the  exalted  and  hope- 
ful conceptions  of  human  existence  which  my  eye  detects 
in  their  actions,  lives,  and  customs.  Although  these  for- 
eigners be  not  cowards,  yet  they  seem  to  regard  human 
life  as  something  strangely  precious  and  exalted  in  its 
nature.  In  this  respect  how  greatly  do  they  differ  from 
ourselves  ! Although  we  inhabitants  of  Dai-Nippon  have 
a natural  shrinking  from  death,  and  an  instinctive  cling- 
ing to  life,  yet  we  treat  dissolution  with  fearless  contempt, 
and  meet  it  with  defiance.  Upon  very  slight  provocation 
we  do  not  hesitate  to  slay  ourselves.  But  these  foreign- 
ers, though  brave  as  lions  in  battle,  deem  it  a crime  to 
take  matters  into  their  own  hands  by  terminating  their 
existence,  even  under  the  most  adverse  circumstances, 
choosing  rather  to  face  the  bitterest  vicissitudes  of  mis- 
fortune to  avoiding  them  by  their  own  hands.  How  very 
strange  this  is  ! Why  should  they  consider  human  life 
of  so  much  value  ? Does  it  not  become  worthless  when 
supreme  misfortune  overtakes  us  ? How  can  it  be  other- 
wise ? Yet  these  strange  foreigners,  from  the  highest  to 
the  lowest,  seem  to  be  imbued  with  a queer  idea  about 
its  sanctity  and  desirability  ! Truly  in  this  respect  they 
differ  vastly  from  us  people  of  Dai-Nippon. 

“And  pray  what  can  be  the  cause  of  this  exalted  con- 
ception of  the  sacredness  of  human  life  ? It  surely  can- 
not be  the  outcome  of  any  mental  difference,  for  our 
brains  are  precisely  similar  ; neither  do  they  possess  any 
faculty  of  mind  with  which  we  are  not  also  endowed. 
Whence,  then,  this  peculiarity  of  ideas  ? Does  there 
dwell  within  the  human  body  some  faculty  of  mind, — 
some  subtle  and  invisible  spiritual  essence, — with  which 
they  have  become  familiar,  and  with  the  secret  of  whose 
development  they  have  become  informed  ? Surely  there 
is  a mystery  about  this  matter  that  appears  to  defy  analy- 


41  2 


Mito  Yashiki. 


sis  ! On  this  subject  my  mind  is  enswathed  in  the  mists 
of  ignorance,  just  as  the  clouds  envelop  the  distant  cone 
of  Mount  Fuji.” 

Thus  pensively  mused  that  pagan  philosopher.  As 
high  noon  drew  on  he  roused  himself  from  his  reveries 
and  called  for  some  writing  materials.  After  writing  a 
letter  he  joined  his  family  in  the  midday  meal.  In  the 
afternoon  he  went  down  to  his  office  at  the  custom-house 
to  see  how  things  were  getting  along. 

“ How  is  the  health  of  the  American  officer  on  the 
man-of-war  who  was  reported  so  dangerously  ill  yester- 
day ? ” he  inquired  of  Tomokichi  soon  after  entering  his 
office. 

“ He  died  during  the  night,”  was  the  reply. 

“ It  is  much  to  be  regretted  that  one  so  young  should 
die  before  half  the  span  of  his  life  has  been  crossed,” 
observed  Mr.  Yamada;  “I  understand  that  he  was  a 
great  favorite  among  his  companions.” 

“ Even  so,”  replied  Tomokichi,  “ and  there  is  universal 
lamentation  over  his  untimely  end.” 

“While  I regret  his  death,”  said  Mr.  Yamada,  “yet  I 
must  confess  that  I am  rejoiced  to  have  an  opportunity 
to  observe  the  funeral  rites  of  these  foreigners.  At  what 
hour  and  at  what  place  will  the  services  take  place  ? ” 

“ The  body  will  leave  the  ship  at  about  four  o’clock 
this  afternoon,  and  will  be  escorted  to  the  chapel  in  the 
settlement,  where  the  ceremonies  will  be  conducted  by  a 
foreign  priest.” 

“ How  can  we  gain  access  to  the  chapel  ? ” 

“ That  can  be  easily  arranged,”  replied  Tomokichi ; 
“ I go  there  every  Sunday  to  practise  my  ear  by  listening 
to  the  English  preaching.  In  this  way  I have  become 
acquainted  with  the  Japanese  sexton  who  has  charge  of 
the  place.  He  will  without  doubt  allow  us  to  enter  if  we 
take  the  precaution  to  get  there  about  twenty  minutes 
ahead  of  the  funeral  cortege.  We  can  then  seat  our- 
selves in  an  obscure  corner  and  watch  the  proceedings 
without  interruption.  These  foreigners  are  remarkably 
liberal  and  good-natured  about  allowing  strangers  to  ob- 
serve their  religious  services.” 


Light  Breaks  Through  the  Clouds.  413 


“ Very  well,”  said  Mr.  Yamada,  “ you  and  I will  attend 
the  services,  while  Kunisaburo  remains  in  charge  of  the 
office.  Let  me  know  when  the  boats  leave  the  ship.” 

Accordingly,  at  the  appointed  hour  our  two  friends  left 
the  custom-house  and  strolled  toward  the  chapel.  They 
were  graciously  received  by  the  sexton,  who  ushered  them 
into  a pew  beside  a pillar,  where  they  could  sit  in  the 
shadow  and  note  all  proceedings,  without  themselves  at- 
tracting attention.  Never  before  had  Mr.  Yamada  been 
inside  a Christian  edifice,  and  it  must  be  confessed  that 
the  altar  with  its  flaming  red  cross  and  the  stained  glass 
windows  with  their  array  of  Apostles  and  scriptural  texts 
made  a weird  impression  upon  his  mind.  Although  the 
place  was  deserted  and  silent,  yet  they  conversed  in 
whispered  tones  as  to  the  meaning  of  the  strange  em- 
blems and  words  on  tablet  and  window.  Long  did  they 
wait  there  in  the  chilly  room.  The  short  December  day 
had  begun  to  fade  away  before  the  long  roll  of  the  muf- 
fled drum  and  the  mournful  notes  of  the  Dead  March 
announced  the  arrival  of  the  funeral  procession  at  the 
entrance  to  the  churchyard.  Before  the  echoes  had  died 
away  in  the  vaulted  roof  overhead,  a side  door  near  the 
altar  suddenly  opened,  and  a tall,  white-robed  figure 
entered  the  chancel  and  walked  slowly  down  the  long 
middle  aisle  of  the  chapel  toward  the  main  door.  Ghost- 
like and  spectral  enough  did  it  look  as  it  rustled  past 
them  in  the  dim  light. 

“ Who  is  that  ?”  inquired  Mr.  Yamada,  addressing  his 
companion. 

“That  is  the  officiating  priest  in  his  ceremonial  robes,” 
was  the  murmured  response. 

The  clergyman — for  such  it  was — reached  the  door- 
way just  as  the  heavy  wooden  portals  swung  back  and  the 
coffin  draped  with  the  stars  and  stripes  was  borne  in  on 
the  shoulders  of  eight  stalwart  men  in  full  naval  uniform. 
There  was  a momentary  halt.  The  clergyman  placed 
himself  in  front  of  the  procession  and  opened  his  book 
as  if  to  read  therefrom.  Then  in  deep  and  solemn  tones 
that  broke  the  sepulchral  stillness  of  the  room  and  re- 


4X4 


Mito  Yashiki. 


echoed  in  the  vestibule  outside  the  door,  he  uttered  in 
measured  cadence  the  grandest  and  most  thrilling 
words  in  human  speech,  while  he  slowly  led  the  way 
down  the  shadowy  aisle  toward  the  altar: — “/  am 
the  resurrection  and  the  life,  saith  the  Lord : he  that  believeth 
in  me,  though  he  were  dead,  yet  shall  he  live : and  whoso- 
ever liveth  and  believeth  in  me  shall  never  die.  I know 
that  my  Redeemer  liveth,  and  that  he  shall  stand  at  the 
latter  day  upon  the  earth.  And  though  after  my  skin  worms 
destroy  this  body,  yet  in  my  flesh  shall  I see  God : whom  I 
shall  see  for  myself,  and  mine  eyes  shall  behold,  and  not 
another.  We  brought  ?wthing  into  this  world,  and  it  is 
certain  we  can  carry  nothing  out.  The  Lord  gave,  and  the 
Lord  hath  taken  away  ; blessed  be  the  name  of  the  Lord.” 
Thus  spake  the  minister  as  he  walked  down  the  aisle 
and  took  his  position  within  the  chancel  railing,  facing  the 
audience.  The  coffin  was  placed  before  him,  and  the 
people  noiselessly  glided  into  the  pews  on  either  hand 
and  awaited  in  silence  his  further  utterances.  The 
shadows  in  the  room  were  deepening,  and  the  purple 
light  that  came  through  the  stained  windows  cast  tremu- 
lous and  gauzy  colors  upon  his  white  robes  as  he  stood  there 
and  solemnly  uttered  the  immortal  words  of  the  Psalmist, 
whose  wailing  accents,  though  venerable  with  age,  have 
never  ceased  to  inspire  the  human  heart  with  exalted 
hope  and  strange  joy  : “ Lord,  let  me  know  my  end,  and 
the  number  of  my  days  ; that  L may  be  certified  how  long  L 
have  to  live.  Behold  thou  hast  made  my  days  as  it  were  a 
span  long,  and  my  age  is  even  as  nothing  in  respect  of  thee  j 
and  verily  every  ?nan  living  is  altogether  vanity.  For  man 
walkcth  in  a vain  shadow , and  disquieteth  himself  in  vain  ; 
he  heapeth  up  riches,  and  cannot  tell  who  shall  gather  them. 
And  now,  Lord,  what  is  my  hope  ? Truly  my  hope  is  even 
in  thee.  Deliver  me  from  all  mine  offences  ; and  make  me 
?iot  a rebuke  unto  the  foolish.  O spare  me  a little  that  L may 
recover  my  strength,  before  L go  hence , and  be  no  more  seen. 
Lord,  thou  hast  been  our  refuge  from  one  generation  to 
afiother.  Before  the  mountains  were  brought  forth,  or  even 
the  earth  and  the  world  were  made,  thou  art  God  from  ever- 


Light  Breaks  Through  the  Clouds.  4 1 5 


tasting,  and  world  without  end.  For  a thousand  years  in  thy 
sight  are  but  as  yesterday  : seeing  that  is  passed  as  a watch 
in  the  night.  As  soon  as  thou  scat tc rest  them  they  are  even 
as  a sleep  ; and  fade  away  suddenly  like  the  grass.  In  the 
morning  it  is  green,  and  groweth  up  ; but  in  the  evening  it 
is  cut  down,  dried  tip  and  withered.  The  days  of  our  age 
are  threescore  years  and  ten  ; and  though  men  be  so  strong 
that  they  conte  to  fourscore  years,  yet  is  their  strength  then 
but  labor  and  sorrotv  j so  soon  passeth  it  away,  and  we  are 
gone.  So  teach  us  to  number  our  days  that  we  may  apply 
our  hearts  unto  wisdom." 

Then  followed  the  exultant  words  of  the  apostle  Paul, 
that  were  penned  a thousand  years  later  within  the  damp 
vaults  of  some  Roman  dungeon  : “ How  is  Christ  risen 
from  the  dead  and  become  the  first-fruits  of  them  that  slept. 
For  since  by  man  came  death,  by  man  came  also  the  resurrec- 
tion of  the  dead.  For  as  in  Adam  all  die,  even  so  in  Christ 
shall  all  be  made  alive.  If  after  the  manner  of  men  I have 
fought  with  beasts  at  Ephesus,  what  advantageth  it  me,  if 
the  dead  rise  not  ? Let  us  eat  and  drink,  for  to-morrow  we 
die.  Be  not  deceived : evil  communications  corrupt  good 
manners.  Awake  to  righteousness,  and  sin  not.  But  some 
man  will  say,  How  are  the  dead  raised  up  ? Thou  fool ! 
That  which  thou  sowest  is  not  quickened  except  it  die.  And 
that  which  thou  scnvest,  thou  sowest  not  that  body  that  shall 
be,  but  bare  grain,  it  may  chance  of  wheat,  or  of  some  other 
grain.  But  God  giveth  it  a body  as  it  hath  pleased  him,  and 
to  every  seed  its  own  body.  All  flesh  is  not  the  same  flesh; 
but  there  is  one  kind  of  flesh  of  men,  another  flesh  of  beasts, 
another  of  fishes,  and  another  of  birds.  There  are  also 
celestial  bodies,  and  bodies  terrestrial ; but  the  glory  of  the 
celestial  is  one,  and  the  glory  of  the  terrestrial  is  another. 
There  is  one  glory  of  the  sun,  and  another  glory  of  the 
moon,  and  another  glory  of  the  stars  ; for  one  star  differ eth 
from  another  star  in  glory.  So  also  is  the  resurrection  of 
the  dead.  It  is  sown  in  corruption  ; it  is  raised  in  incorrup- 
tion : it  is  sown  in  dishonor  ; it  is  raised  in  glory  : it  is 
sown  in  weakness  ; it  is  raised  in  power  : it  is  sown  a 
natural  body  ; it  is  raised  a spiritual  body.  JVow  this  I say, 


416 


Mito  Yashiki. 


brethren , that  flesh  and  blood  cannot  inherit  the  Kingdom  of 
God  ; neither  doth  corruption  inherit  incorruption.  Behold, , 
I show  you  a mystery : we  shall  not  all  sleep,  but  we  shall 
all  be  changed,  in  a moment , in  the  twinkling  of  an  eye,  at 
the  last  trump  : for  the  trumpet  shall  sound,  and  the  dead 
shall  be  raised  incorruptible , and  we  shall  be  changed.  For 
this  corruptible  must  put  on  incorruption,  and  this  mortal 
must  put  on  immortality  ; then  shall  be  brought  to  pass  the 
saying  that  is  written,  Death  is  swallowed  up  in  victory.  O 
death , where  is  thy  sting  l O grave,  where  is  thy  victory  l 
The  sting  of  death  is  sin  ; and  the  strength  of  sin  is  the 
law.  But  thanks  be  to  God,  which  giveth  us  the  victory 
through  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ.  Therefore,  my  beloved 
brethren,  be  ye  steadfast,  immovable,  always  abounding  in  the 
work  of  the  Lord,  forasmuch  as  ye  know  that  your  labor  is 
7iot  in  vain  in  the  Lord." 

“ What  was  the  meaning  of  those  impressive  utter- 
ances to  which  the  people  gave  such  close  attention  ? ” 
inquired  Mr.  Yamada  of  Tomokichi,  as  they  strolled 
homeward  after  the  burial. 

“ They  were  quotations  of  profouqd  import  culled 
from  the  sacred  writings  of  the  sect  called  Kirishitan  ” 
(Christian),  was  the  reply. 

“ Did  you  fully  grasp  the  meaning  ? or  is  your  knowl- 
edge of  the  English  language  not  yet  sufficient  to  com- 
prehend sacred  phraseology  ? ” 

“ Had  the  words  of  the  service  been  entirely  new  to 
me,  I presume  that  I should  have  been  much  puzzled  to 
understand  their  meaning.  But  fortunately  the  entire 
matter  was  very  familiar  to  me.” 

“ How  does  that  happen  ?” 

Tomokichi  hesitated  a moment  as  if  greatly  embar- 
rassed how  to  reply  to  this  abrupt  question  of  his 
companion,  whose  keen  scrutiny  seemed  to  confuse  him 
the  more. 

“ There  seems  to  be  some  mystery  about  this  mat- 
ter, sir,”  said  Mr.  Yamada,  as  his  young  friend  still 
hesitated  in  his  reply. 

“There  is,  sir,”  replied  Tomokichi;  “ but  I do  not 


Light  Breaks  Through  the  Clouds.  4 1 7 


know  as  there  is  any  reason  now  why  you  should  not 
know  all  about  it.  This  is  a matter,  sir,  that  I have  kept 
secret  for  many  years.  As  the  Bakufu  no  longer  exists, 
however,  no  harm  can  result  from  making  the  matter 
public.  The  fact  is  that  nearly  twenty  years  ago  I was 
one  day  rummaging  in  an  old  book-store  in  one  of  the 
obscure  streets  of  Kioto.  I have  always  been  an  ardent 
student  of  foreign  literature,  and  in  those  days  my  thirst 
for  information  led  me  into  all  sorts  of  out-of-the-way 
places.  Not  finding  any  thing  in  the  regular  stock  to 
suit  my  tastes,  I was  about  to  depart,  when  the  proprietor 
of  the  shop  laid  before  me  a box  filled  with  ancient  and 
curious  manuscripts  that  had  come  into  his  possession 
from  various  sources  at  different  times.  I spent  nearly 
half  a day  in  examining  this  heap  of  literary  rubbish,  and 
finally  came  across  a strange  manuscript  that  impressed 
me  as  being  something  entirely  out  of  the  usual  line  of 
literature,  and  which  bore  on  its  face  the  most  unmis- 
takable evidence  of  being  of  foreign  origin. 

“ Purchasing  it  at  a merely  nominal  price,  I hurried 
home  with  it,  and  subjected  it  to  a close  and  careful 
study.  This  mysterious  document  turned  out  to  be  a 
voluminous  treatise  on  the  religion  of  the  dreaded  sect  of 
Kirishitans.  As  you  well  know,  that  sect  was  at  that 
time  branded  by  the  Bakufu  as  accursed,  and  those 
daring  to  study  its  proscribed  teachings  were  visited  with 
the  severest  punishments.  Although  our  family  was 
dreadfully  frightened  at  the  discovery  of  the  exact  nature 
of  the  document  in  my  possession,  yet,  after  long  discus- 
sion, it  was  deemed  best  to  keep  the  matter  as  a profound 
family  secret,  and  to  allow  me  to  retain  my  troublesome 
prize,  on  condition  that  I used  the  utmost  precaution  in 
preventing  anybody  outside  of  the  family  becoming 
aware  of  its  existence.  At  first,  the  greater  part  of  the 
language  in  the  manuscript  was  quite  unintelligible  to 
me.  It  appeared  to  be  composed  of  abundant  quotations 
from  the  sacred  writings  of  the  Kirishitans , together  with 
the  notes  and  comments  thereon  of  some  teacher  of  that 
religion.  Those  portions  of  it  which  I could  understand 


418 


Alito  Yashiki. 


impressed  me  as  being  profoundly  mysterious  and  won- 
derfully sublime  in  their  nature.  When  I went  to  Mito 
Yashiki,  I found  in  the  archives  of  that  clan  several 
books  descriptive  of  this  sect  of  Kirishitans.  I also 
found  a full  account  of  the  rigid  examinations  to  which 
the  Jesuit  priests  had  been  subjected  more  than  a hun- 
dred and  fifty  years  ago,  during  their  imprisonment  on 
Kirishitan-zaka,  just  behind  Mito  Yashiki.  I also  found 
several  ancient  pamphlets,  explaining  in  detail  the  mys- 
teries of  these  strange  doctrines.  I was  amazed  to  find 
that  these  things  threw  a flood  of  light  upon  my  Kioto 
manuscript,  making  clear  much  that  had  been  obscure 
to  me. 

“ All  my  leisure  hours  at  Mito  Yashiki  were  spent  in 
studying  this  matter,  until  I found  out  that  the  principles 
of  this  foreign  religion  were  something  infinitely  superior 
to  any  thing  that  we  could  boast  of  in  all  of  our  religions 
combined.  I also  found  much  that  was  profoundly  mys- 
terious and  incomprehensible.  When  the  foreign  priest 
to-day  began  to  read  from  his  book,  I was  startled  at  the 
strangely  familiar  sound  of  the  words.  I at  once  recog- 
nized them  as  the  words  contained  in  my  manuscript. 
My  careful  study  of  the  Kirishitan  literature  at  Mito 
Yashiki  enabled  me  to  understand  the  language  of  the 
funeral  service  from  beginning  to  end.  This  was  not 
only  a most  extraordinary  circumstance,  but  it  was  also 
a most  fortunate  one,  as  it  thus  enables  me  to  explain  the 
meaning  of  what  he  read.” 

“ That  which  you  say  is  indeed  wonderful,”  exclaimed 
Mr.  Yamada.  “ Pray,  what  was  the  import,  then,  of 
those  solemn  utterances, — for  I judge  them  to  have  been 
such,  inasmuch  as  the  countenances  of  the  listeners 
seemed  moved  with  the  deepest  emotions.  The  nonsensi- 
cal mummeries  of  our  priests  never  create  such  feelings  in 
our  breasts.  Why  should  the  utterances  of  a foreign 
priest,  then,  be  so  very  solemn  ?” 

“ Sir,  he  was  reading  the  utterances  of  their  sacred 
writers,  as  found  in  their  sacred  book.  The  theme  of 
the  discourse  related  to  the  profound  mysteries  of  life, 


Light  Breaks  Through  the  Clouds.  4 1 9 


of  death,  and  of  immortality.  The  service  commenced 
with  the  mysterious  words  of  the  founder  of  the  Christian 
sect,  who  claimed  to  be  the  son  of  the  Supreme  Being 
that  created  the  universe.  He  promises  immortality  to 
mankind  upon  condition  of  belief  on  him  as  the  son  of 
the  Supreme  Being.  By  so  doing,  even  those  who  are 
spiritually  dead  will  be  quickened  into  eternal  life.  He 
sets  himself  up  as  the  Redeemer  of  the  human  race 
from  the  destructive  effects  of  sin.  He  promises  to 
mortal  beings  an  immortal  existence  of  endless  duration 
and  development,  in  case  they  will  but  adopt  his  teach- 
ings and  practise  his  precepts.  Truly  the  utterances  of 
this  being  have  awakened  in  my  mind  supremely  lofty 
and  magnificent  conceptions  of  the  nobler  faculties  of  my 
spirit,  and  have  suggested  bewildering  ideas  of  the  pos- 
sibilities of  a future  life  that  overwhelm  me  with  thrilling 
hopes  and  morbid  conjectures  ! 

“After  the  weird  language  of  this  mysterious  Christ 
came  the  words  of  an  extraordinary  man  of  the  same 
nation  who  lived  many  centuries  before  his  advent.  The 
words  in  which  he  pours  forth  his  sublime  communings 
are  grand  and  thrilling.  In  prophetic  vision  he  seems  to 
catch  glimpses  of  his  Redeemer,  and  to  clearly  see  the 
blissful  existence  beyond  the  grave,  where  his  soul  shall 
take  cognizance  of  the  Supreme  Being.  After  this  superb 
rhapsody  came  the  poetic  inspirations  of  a monarch  who 
was  the  earthly  ancestor  of  this  Christ.  In  sublime 
reveries  the  uncertainty  and  the  frailty  of  human  life 
seem  to  float  before  him  like  mists  hovering  over  the 
cascades  on  a moonlit  night,  and  he  earnestly  implores 
the  Supreme  Being  in  strains  of  magnificent  eloquence  to 
teach  him  to  be  mindful  of  his  fleeting  years,  and  to  pre- 
pare himself  for  the  nobler  and  the  happier  life  after 
death, — a life  concerning  whose  existence  these  sacred 
writers  all  seem  as  positive  as  if,  forsooth,  they  had 
soared  into  those  unseen  realms,  or  had  skimmed  the 
waves  of  that  boundless  and  invisible  ocean. 

“ The  closing  words  of  the  service  are  taken  from  the 
writings  of  a man  who  was  a cotemporary  of  this  Christ, 


420 


Mito  Yashiki. 


— a person  who,  although  never  having  seen  Christ,  yet 
implicitly  believed  in  him  and  in  his  teachings.  He 
shows  that  unless  the  facts  connected  with  the  life  and 
death  of  Christ  be  true,  then  his  teachings  as  to  a future 
life  must  fall  to  the  ground.  He  also  shows  that  a future 
existence  would  be  in  analogy  with  the  facts  of  nature. 
The  life  of  the  plant  depends  upon  the  death  of  the  seed. 
The  life  of  the  butterfly  depends  upon  the  death  of  the 
worm.  The  life  of  the  bird  depends  upon  the  destruction 
of  the  egg  from  which  it  is  hatched.  So  must  the  life  of 
the  soul  hinge  upon  the  death  of  the  body.  This  learned 
and  profound  writer  claims  that  Christ  taught  men  how 
to  control  their  bodies,  so  that  after  death  the  spiritual 
essence  might  enter  upon  an  immortal  existence  of  bound- 
less happiness.  If  the  seed  be  decayed,  then  no  plant 
can  sprout  therefrom, — or,  at  best,  but  a weak  and  sickly 
one.  If  the  body  be  corrupted  by  evil  and  unhallowed 
practices,  then  there  can  be  no  blooming  of  immortal 
happiness.  Such,  sir,  is  a feeble  statement  of  the  won- 
derful language  to  which  we  have  been  listening.” 

It  was  long  after  dusk  before  our  friends  reached  the 
door  of  their  house  ; for  the  foregoing  paragraph,  though 
quickly  read,  contains  in  condensed  form  the  substance 
of  many  lengthy  replies  made  by  Tomokichi  in  response 
to  the  eager  and  searching  inquiries  of  his  companion 
during  their  homeward  walk. 

“ I can  now  understand  much  that  was  obscure  to 
me,”  exclaimed  Mr.  Yamada  as  they  entered  the  gate- 
way of  their  yard  ; “ that  which  you  have  just  told  me 
fully  explains  a matter  over  which  I have  long  puzzled 
my  brain  in  vain.  Up  to  the  present  moment  my  pro- 
foundest  investigations  have  not  availed  to  clear  away 
the  mystery  that  surrounded  the  foreigner’s  exalted  con- 
ception of  so  trivial  a matter  as  human  life.  I have  been 
able  to  trace  much  of  the  foreigner’s  superiority  to  this 
exalted  conception  of  the  great  value  of  human  life  ; 
but,  hitherto,  I have  been  utterly  baffled  in  my  attempts 
to  analyze  the  principles  and  the  reasons  that  underlay 
that  conception.  It  is  all  as  clear  now  to  me  as 


Light  Breaks  Through  the  Clouds.  421 


daylight.  Of  course  if  there  be  a Supreme  Being,  and 
if  we  human  beings  be  the  creatures  of  his  creative 
powers,  then  our  relations  with  the  universe  become 
grand  and  important.  If  we  have  been  endowed  with 
immortal  spirits  by  this  Creator  of  the  universe  and  have 
been  placed  on  this  earth  to  develop  the  subtle  and  mys- 
terious powers  of  our  souls,  then  this  life  becomes 
supremely  valuable.  If  there  be  a God,  if  there  be  a 
soul,  if  there  be  immortality  for  that  soul  after  death, 
then  this  life  becomes  worth  the  living  even  under  the 
most  adverse  circumstances.  No  condition  of  human 
existence,  no  matter  how  wretched  and  contemptible  it 
may  be,  should  be  despised.  Like  sentinels  on  the  fields 
of  war  we  are  to  stand  on  guard  until  relieved  from  duty 
by  our  commanding  officer.  It  thus  becomes  wrong  for 
us  to  take  matters  into  our  own  hands  and  to  end  our 
own  existence  by  violent  methods  when  adversity  over- 
takes us. 

“ I now  understand  why  the  Christian  warriors  of  Kiu- 
shiu,  captured  by  Tokugawa  Iyeyas  at  the  battle  of  Seki- 
gahara,  refused  to  perform  seppuku  when  overwhelmed  by 
defeat  but  allowed  themselves  to  be  ignominiously  execu- 
ted and  to  have  their  heads  pilloried  on  the  Kamogawa 
shoals  as  targets  for  the  insulting  jests  of  the  victors. 
This  theory  of  immortality  is  truly  grand  and  elevating  ! 
Even  if  it  be  merely  based  upon  the  vagaries  of  the  brilliant 
imaginations  of  highly  poetic  minds,  and  should  appear 
on  closer  investigation  to  have  absolutely  no  foundation 
in  fact,  yet  the  very  belief  in  such  a theory  would  enno- 
ble and  beautify  human  existence  as  nothing  else  possi- 
bly can  do.  Herein  lies  the  secret  power  that  has  ele- 
vated the  Caucasian  race  ! Buoyed  up  by  the  hope  of  a 
sublime  existence  beyond  the  grave,  and  believing  that 
they  have  been  created  by  a merciful  and  fatherly  God, 
whose  will  they  are  obeying  by  living  this  life  in  accord- 
ance with  his  directions,  they  very  naturally  count  the 
vicissitudes  of  this  world  as  nothing  when  compared  with 
the  immortal  glories  for  which  they  are  preparing  the 
soul.  Light  now  shines  through  the  rifts  in  the  clouds  ! 
I see  ! I understand  ! ” 


CHAPTER  XXXV. 


THE  LIGHT  OF  THE  WORLD. 


Verily,  verily,  I say  unto  thee,  except  a man  be  born  of  water  and 
the  Spirit,  he  cannot  enter  into  the  kingdom  of  God. — St.  John  iii. , 5. 

But  an  angel  of  the  Lord  spake  unto  Philip,  saying,  Arise,  and  go 
toward  the  south  unto  the  way  that  goeth  down  from  Jerusalem  unto 
Gaza  : the  same  is  desert.  And  he  arose  and  went  : and  behold  a 
man  of  Ethiopia,  a eunuch  of  great  authority  under  Candace,  queen  of 
the  Ethiopians,  who  was  over  all  her  treasure,  who  had  come  to  Jeru- 
salem for  to  worship  ; and  he  was  returning  and  sitting  in  his  chariot, 
and  was  reading  the  prophet  Isaiah.  And  the  Spirit  said  unto  Philip, 
Go  near  and  join  thyself  to  this  chariot.  And  Philip  ran  to  him,  and 
heard  him  reading  Isaiah  the  prophet,  and  said,  Understandest  thou 
what  thou  readest?  And  he  said,  How  can  I,  except  some  one  shall 
guide  me  ? And  he  besought  Philip  to  come  up  and  sit  with  him. 
Now  the  place  of  the  scripture  which  he  was  reading  was  this  : 

“ He  was  led  as  a sheep  to  the  slaughter  ; 

And  as  a lamb  before  his  shearers  is  dumb. 

So  he  openeth  not  his  mouth  : 

In  his  humiliation  his  judgment  was  taken  away  : 

His  generation  who  shall  declare  ? 

For  his  life  is  taken  from  the  earth.” 

And  the  eunuch  answered  Philip,  and  said,  I pray  thee,  of  whom 
speaketh  the  prophet  this  ? of  himself,  or  of  some  other  ? And  Philip 
opened  his  mouth,  and  beginning  from  this  scripture,  preached  unto 
him  Jesus.  And  as  they  went  on  the  way,  they  came  unto  a certain 
water  ; and  the  eunuch  saith,  Behold,  here  is  water  ; what  doth  hinder 
me  to  be  baptized  ? And  he  commanded  the  chariot  to  stand  still  : 
and  they  both  went  down  into  the  water,  both  Philip  and  the  eunuch  ; 
and  he  baptized  him.  And  when  they  came  up  out  of  the  water,  the 
spirit  of  the  Lord  caught  away  Philip  ; and  the  eunuch  saw  him  no 
more,  for  he  went  on  his  way  rejoicing. — Acts  viii. , 26-39. 

The  above  picturesque  and  simple  language,  recorded 
nearly  two  thousand  years  ago,  is  descriptive  of  the  pro- 
cess by  which  the  stupendous  spiritual  phenomena  of  the 
last  eighteen  centuries  have  been  brought  about.  The 


422 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


423 


zealous  missionaries  of  the  Cross,  armed  with  the  immor- 
tal words  of  the  Redeemer,  first  above  quoted,  have 
preached  Jesus  to  every  kindred  and  to  every  tribe  in 
Europe,  until  they  have  changed  the  face  of  that  con- 
tinent in  a most  astonishing  manner.  From  century  to 
century  the  hearts  of  devout  men  and  women  have  been 
fired  with  apostolic  zeal,  and  they  have  gone  forth  into 
strange  lands  as  missionaries  bearing  the  Gospel  tidings 
of  joy  and  peace  to  mankind.  The  leaven  of  the  king- 
dom of  heaven  and  the  sword  of  the  Spirit  have  been 
carried  into  communities  where  barbaric  stagnation  pre- 
vailed and  have  stirred  up  and  awakened  the  hearts  and 
the  brains  of  the  people  in  a manner  unknown  in  the  his- 
tory of  nations.  Spiritual  quickening  has  produced  in- 
tellectual commotion,  that  has  moved  human  society  to 
its  profoundest  depths  and  has  resulted  in  the  evolution 
of  the  great  nations  of  the  present  century.  The  process 
by  which  such  tremendous  results  have  been  achieved  is 
truly  a most  simple  one.  By  merely  preaching  “ Christ 
crucified, — to  the  Greeks  foolishness,  and  to  the  Jews 
a stumbling-block,” — there  has  been  instituted  in  this 
world  of  ours  a moral  reformation  that  has  blessed  and 
elevated  all  the  social  and  political  institutions  of  the 
nineteenth  century  and  has  developed  the  grandest 
civilization  of  all  time. 

Yea,  simple  and  foolish  enough  does  the  process 
appear  to  the  reason  of  humanity.  Yet  such  was  the 
process  ordained  by  the  Redeemer,  and,  judging  from 
its  wonderful  efficacy,  there  seems  to  be  no  good  reason 
for  modifying  it  even  if  the  philosophers  and  the  skeptics 
of  modern  times  do  sneer  at  its  workings  and  endeavor 
to  belittle  its  results.  The  language  of  that  immortal 
missionary  of  Tarsus  is  as  true  to-day  as  it  was  eighteen 
hundred  years  ago  : “ God  hath  chosen  the  foolish  things 
of  the  world  to  confound  the  wise  ; and  God  hath  chosen 
the  weak  things  of  the  world  to  confound  the  things  that 
are  mighty  ; and  base  things  of  the  world,  and  things 
which  are  despised,  hath  God  chosen,  yea,  and  things 
which  are  not,  to  bring  to  nought  things  that  are.” 


424 


Mito  Yashiki. 


The  cultured  philosopher  and  the  snarling  cynic  of 
the  present  day  do  not  appear  to  differ  much  from  the 
Greek  and  the  Jew  of  the  time  of  Paul.  With  sneering 
comments  the  modern  critic  ridicules  the  great  mission- 
ary endeavors  of  our  times.  With  note-book  in  hand  he 
swings  round  the  circuit  of  the  globe  and  loudly  clamors 
for  figures  and  statistics  wherein  to  express  the  results  of 
apostolic  labors  in  pagan  lands.  Silly  fellow  ! What 
would  there  have  been  to  jot  down  in  thy  book  on  that 
day  when  gloom  settled  down  on  Calvary  ? A mangled 
corpse,  twelve  scattered  and  apostate  disciples,  a howling 
mob  of  bitterly  disappointed  Jews  ! Was  ever  failure 
more  complete  ? Yet  the  seed  had  been  planted  ; the 
principles  of  a system  of  divine  moral  ethics,  illustrated 
by  the  life  of  the  Son  of  God,  had  been  enunciated  and 
promulgated  among  men  ; the  leaven  had  been  placed  in 
the  measure  of  meal  ; and  the  sword  of  the  Spirit  had 
gone  forth  to  subdue  the  nations  of  the  world.  Was  that 
failure  ? Of  course  not,  you  may  perhaps  say.  Yet,  pray 
tell  me,  how  could  you  have  expressed  in  figures  the 
subtle  spiritual  influence  that  had  then-already  gone  forth 
among  men  to  elevate  and  to  bless  them  ? Can  you  take 
the  measure  of  the  sword  of  the  Spirit  as  you  would  that 
of  a piece  of  merchandise  ? Can  you  circumscribe  with 
metes  and  bounds  that  resistless  power  that  has  trans- 
formed the  savages  of  Britain,  Gaul,  and  Germany  into 
civilized  human  beings  ? Who  shall  duly  estimate  by 
mathematical  equations  the  force  of  those  principles  that 
have  ground  up  and  are  yet  grinding  up  the  institutions 
of  paganism  and  evolving  therefrom  higher  and  nobler 
forms  of  human  society  ? 

Vain  task  ! Worry  not  thyself  about  the  harvest.  Do 
thou  but  plant  the  seed.  Such  is  God’s  command.  Such 
is  God’s  method, — and  such  has  it  been  in  all  ages. 
Simple,  do  you  say?  Yea,  verily, — but  profoundly  effi- 
cacious and  scientific  nevertheless.  And  until  God  shall 
reveal  unto  mankind  some  other  method  of  carrying  on 
his  work  in  this  world,  it  is  more  than  probable  that 
Christ’s  kingdom  will  continue  to  be  built  up  by  this 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


425 


“ foolishness  of  preaching,” — this  sending  of  mission- 
aries to  preach  “ Christ  crucified  ” among  the  heathen 
everywhere.  Among  all  the  wonderful  scientific  dis- 
coveries and  inventions  made  by  the  Christianized  in- 
tellects of  the  nineteenth  century  there  has  been  no 
solution  to  the  problem  as  to  how  a man  shall  be  re- 
deemed from  his  sins.  To  institute  reformation  of 
desire  in  human  nature,  and  to  rouse  the  sluggish  spirit- 
ual faculties  into  a life  of  progressive  and  endless  de- 
velopment, is  a task  that  either  lies  beyond  the  powers 
of  human  mind  or  that  lies  far  beneath  the  notice  of 
selfish  human  indifference.  The  reformation  of  desire, 
the  quickening  of  the  soul  into  active  life  through  this 
sincere  desire  being  operated  upon  by  the  Holy  Spirit, — 
this  is  the  only  method  known  to  humanity  whereby  men 
may  be  redeemed  from  their  sins.  Except  a man  be 
born  of  water  and  the  spirit,  he  cannot  enter  into  the 
kingdom  of  God. 

This  principle  is  as  true  to-day  as  it  was  eighteen  cen- 
turies ago.  And  its  faithful  promulgation  among  the 
nations  of  the  earth  has  brought  the  world  to  the  dawn 
of  an  era  whose  spiritual  possibilities  defy  human  com- 
putation. The  soul  of  man  gazes  down  a vista  of  de- 
velopment that  broadens  out  into  fields  of  such  glorious 
and  never-ending  progress  that  the  imagination  becomes 
dazzled  at  the  sight.  And  this  stupendous  result  has 
been  accomplished  by  the  “ foolishness  of  preaching.” 
Stuff  and  nonsense  do  you  call  it  ? You  do  not  speak 
scientifically,  my  friend.  It  is  spiritual  evolution.  As 
the  beauteous  forms  of  organized  matter  have  sprung 
(according  to  modern  belief)  from  protoplasmic  germs 
and  have  been  developed  by  the  influences  of  the  su- 
preme will  operating  thereon,  so  has  the  higher  spiritual 
nature  of  mankind  been  evolved  from  the  germ  of  re- 
pentance operated  upon  by  the  Holy  Spirit.  In  all  ages 
man  has  been  the  divinely  constituted  agent  for  convey- 
ing to  his  fellow-men  the  tidings  of  the  necessity  for  re- 
pentance and  moral  reformation.  When  the  soul  has 
been  awakened  to  a consciousness  of  sin  then  it  is  in  a 


426 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


condition  to  be  operated  on  by  that  subtle  and  mys- 
terious power  which  we  designate  in  human  speech  as 
the  Spirit  of  God. 

It  was  in  accordance  with  the  command  of  the  Master 
that  the  Christian  churches  of  America  sent  missionaries 
to  the  empire  of  Japan  very  soon  after  the  conclusion 
of  Commodore  Perry’s  treaty.  In  those  early  days  the 
journey  to  Japan  was  not  the  pleasure  trip  that  it  has 
since  become  by  means  of  railway  and  steamship  travel. 
It  required  at  least  four  months  to  make  the  voyage  from 
New  York  to  Yokohama.  Five  months  were  frequently 
required  for  the  passage.  Adverse  winds  and  calms 
could  easily  protract  the  voyage  from  six  to  eight 
months.  In  those  days  it  required  much  self-sacrifice 
to  become  a missionary.  Not  many  offered  themselves 
for  the  service,  and  there  were  but  few  calls  for  volun- 
teers made  by  the  home  churches  because  of  the  re- 
stricted nature  of  the  field  of  operations  in  that  distant 
realm. 

During  the  first  decade  after  the  advent  of  Perry  there 
were  barely  a dozen  missionaries  in  Japan.  Among  that 
number  was  a young  man  whom  I shall  call  Mr.  Plymp- 
ton.  This  young  man,  soon  after  completing  his  collegiate 
and  theological  studies  at  home,  had  felt  called  of  the 
spirit  to  preach  the  Gospel  of  Christ  to  the  heathen. 
Offering  himself  to  the  board  of  missions  connected  with 
his  church,  he  was  delegated  by  them  to  carry  the  tidings 
of  salvation  to  the  far-distant  shores  of  the  empire  of  the 
rising  sun.  With  tearful  partings  with  sorrowing  friends 
he  embarked  with  his  young  wife  on  one  of  the  stately 
clipper  ships  that  plied  between  New  York  and  China 
around  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope.  A favorable  voyage  of 
one  hundred  and  twenty  days  brought  them  to  the  port  of 
Hong  Kong,  where  they  embarked  on  a smaller  vessel 
that  was  loading  for  Yokohama,  where  they  safely  arrived 
after  a fortnight’s  sailing. 

His  first  efforts  were  directed  toward  securing  a com- 
fortable home  for  his  family.  Then  he  plunged  into  the 
mysteries  of  an  unknown  language  with  the  utmost 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


427 


energy.  His  progress  was  necessarily  slow  and  laborious 
in  the  absence  of  dictionaries  and  grammars.  When,  after 
a long  struggle,  he  had  obtained  a fair  mastery  of  the 
language,  he  found  nobody  disposed  to  listen  to  what  he 
had  to  say  concerning  Christianity.  The  minds  of  the 
people  were  engrossed  with  the  intense  political  excite- 
ment that  was  then  running  high.  Besides  that,  the 
lower  classes  stood  in  abject  terror  of  the  very  name  of 
Christ  as  being  that  of  the  founder  of  a creed  that  had 
been  proscribed  for  more  than  two  centuries. 

Very  naturally  Mr.  Plympton’s  evangelical  labors 
were  of  a most  limited  nature  and  were  confined  entirely 
to  the  servants  of  his  household  and  to  their  friends. 
Nevertheless  he  prosecuted  his  work  with  the  utmost 
zeal,  so  that  by  the  end  of  the  imperial  revolution  of 
1868  he  had  acquired  a correct  and  elegant  use  of  the 
vernacular,  and  had  formed  a Bible  class  of  young 
samurai , who  were  anxious  to  obtain  a knowledge  of  the 
strange  religion  that  the  new  government  appeared  to 
look  upon  with  more  favor  than  the  Bakufu  did.  During 
the  great  conflagration  of  1S66  the  residence  of  Mr. 
Plympton  was  swept  away,  along  with  nearly  the  entire 
European  settlement.  Instead  of  rebuilding  his  house  on 
the  low  land  around  the  bay,  he  secured  an  elegible  site 
upon  the  garden-like  bluffs  half  a mile  back  from  the 
water,  and  built  a neat  American  cottage,  where  his  wife 
and  children  could  have  more  sunshine  and  fresh  air 
than  were  available  in  their  cramped  quarters  in  the  set- 
tlement. He  had  just  settled  down  in  his  new  home 
when  our  Kioto  friends  received  their  appointments  at 
the  Yokohama  custom-house. 

Several  weeks  after  the  events  set  forth  in  the  last 
chapter  two  Japanese  gentlemen  were  standing  before 
the  gateway  of  Mr.  Plympton’s  house  on  the  bluffs.  After 
some  hesitation  they  entered  the  yard  and  inquired  of 
the  obsequious  gatekeeper  if  his  master  was  at  home. 
Receiving  an  affirmative  reply,  they  went  down  the  broad 
gravelly  path  that  led  to  the  house,  and  mounted  the 
short  flight  of  steps  to  the  front  veranda,  where  they 


428 


Mito  Yashiki. 


announced  their  presence  by  tapping  a little  bronze  bell 
that  hung  there  beside  the  door.  In  response  to  this 
signal  a servant  soon  appeared  and  inquired  the  object 
of  their  call. 

“We  have  come  to  pay  our  respects  to  the  foreign 
priest  living  here,  and  also  to  make  a few  inquiries  of 
him,”  replied  Tomokichi,  for  he  it  was  in  company  with 
Mr.  Yamada. 

“ I will  at  once  report  to  him  your  honorable  pres- 
ence,” bowed  the  obsequious  servant. 

In  a few  minutes  he  returned  saying  : “ My  honorable 
master  will  be  pleased  to  see  the  honorable  gentlemen  in 
his  study  in  a very  few  minutes.  If  you  will  follow  me 
I will  guide  you  there.” 

Leaving  their  wooden  clogs  at  the  door,  the  visitors 
walked  noiselessly  across  a neat  and  spacious  hall  into  a 
large  room  to  the  left-hand  side  of  the  doorway.  Here 
they  were  duly  seated  in  a couple  of  chairs,  and  were 
requested  to  wait  until  the  master  of  the  house  should 
come  down-stairs  to  see  them.  This  study  was  a model 
of  neatness  and  comfort.  Broad  windows  opened  out 
upon  the  sunny  veranda,  where  two  little  children  were 
romping  with  a half-grown  Newfoundland  dog  that  had 
been  presented  to  the  younger  members  of  Mr.  Plymp- 
ton’s  household  by  a friendly  captain  commanding  one 
of  the  superb  clipper  ships  plying  between  America  and 
Japan.  The  floor  was  covered  with  matting,  while 
tables,  chairs,  and  bamboo  settees  were  set  around  the 
room  in  convenient  places.  Beside  one  of  the  windows 
stood  a commodious  desk  covered  with  writing  material 
and  manuscript  that  abundantly  betokened  the  studious 
nature  of  the  occupant  of  the  room.  Against  the  white 
Avails  stood  wide  book-cases  containing  a library  of  theo- 
logical, historical,  and  philological  literature.  Pictures  and 
maps  filled  in  all  the  bare  spaces  on  the  walls,  so  that  the 
general  appearance  of  the  room  was  such  as  would  have 
at  once  stimulated  the  literary  appetite  of  the  scholarly 
visitor.  Our  friends  took  all  this  in  with  a few  quick 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


429 

glances  while  they  awaited  the  coming  of  their  host. 
That  gentleman  did  not  keep  them  long  in  abeyance. 
As  he  entered  the  study  the  visitors  prostrated  them- 
selves on  the  floor  in  profound  obeisance  after  the  cus- 
tom of  the  country. 

“ Arise,  most  honorable  sirs,  and  be  seated,”  said  Mr. 
Plympton,  addressing  his  guests  in  their  own  language. 

“ Most  honorable  sir,”  said  Mr.  Yamada,  after  the 
usual  preliminary  greetings  had  been  interchanged,  “we 
have  heard  many  things  concerning  your  great  learning 
and  scholarly  attainments,  and  we  have  long  been  de- 
sirous of  calling  on  you  and  making  inquiries  con- 
cerning certain  matters  of  profound  interest  to  us,  but 
we  have  hesitated,  being  doubtful  as  to  whether  such 
insignificant  persons  as  ourselves  would  be  deemed 
worthy  of  admission  into  your  honorable  presence. 
Yesterday,  however,  we  attended  the  services  conducted 
by  your  honored  self  in  the  chapel  down  in  the  native 
town,  and  heard  you  kindly  invite  inquirers  after  the 
truth  to  call  at  your  house  and  seek  for  information. 
We  have  therefore  availed  ourselves  of  this  invitation, 
and  have  come  with  much  hesitation  and  trepidation  to 
ask  certain  questions  that  have  long  puzzled  us.” 

“ Honorable  sirs,”  replied  Mr.  Plympton,  “ it  is  the 
delight  of  my  heart  to  converse  with  those  who  sincerely 
seek  information  concerning  the  pure  and  noble  religion 
that  I preach  to  your  people.  You  are  most  welcome 
visitors.  Be  perfectly  at  home  and  ask  whatever  ques- 
tion may  occur  to  you.  I cannot  promise,  however,  to 
answer  all  of  your  questions,  because  mystery  environs 
reality  on  all  sides,  the  most  commonplace  tangibili- 
ties baffle  analysis,  and  we  are  daily  compelled  to  admit 
the  existence  of  many  things  concerning  whose  cause  we 
remain  in  profound  ignorance.  I will  endeavor,  never- 
theless, to  answer  all  of  your  questions  to  the  best  of 
my  ability,  and  can  only  hope  that  the  good  Father  of 
the  Universe  will  throw  light  upon  my  feeble  remarks 
and  may  enlighten  your  minds.” 


430 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“ 0 most  honorable  sir,”  exclaimed  Mr.  Yamada,  “we 
offer  up  a myriad  of  thanks  for  your  most  generous  hos- 
pitality, and  we  shall  make  inquiries  concerning  matters 
that  have  long  troubled  us.  When  you  just  now  spoke 
concerning  the  good  Father  of  the  Universe,  you  struck 
the  keynote  of  our  inquiries.  This  is  indeed  the  mys- 
tery of  mysteries,  concerning  whose  existence  you  for- 
eigners appear  to  have  but  little  doubt.  Sir,  we  have 
carefully  studied  your  sacred  book,  and  are  prepared  to 
admit  the  sublime  morality  therein  expounded  by  para- 
ble, allegory,  historic  narrative,  and  direct  precept.  We 
find  throughout  the  pages  of  this  extraordinary  book 
three  stupendous  statements  set  forth  with  endless  and 
unvarying  persistency  and  positiveness, — statements  that 
loom  up  above  all  other  matter  therein  contained,  as  Fuji- 
san towers  above  the  bosom  of  Dai-Nippon,  and  which, 
if  they  be  true,  dwarf  into  insignificance  the  teeming  rec- 
ords of  wonderful  achievements  and  miraculous  events. 

“ The  first  statement  is  to  the  effect  that  there  exists  a 
Supreme  Being,  the  creator  and  ruler  of  the  universe. 
The  second  statement  is  to  the  effect  that  the  only  son 
of  this  Creator  became  incarnated  in  human  form  about 
eighteen  centuries  ago,  and  was  known  as  Jesus  Christ. 
The  third  statement  is  to  the  effect  that  men  possess 
souls  that  live  after  the  death  of  the  body.  Sir,  my  ques- 
tions are  briefly  stated  : Is  there  a Supreme  Being  ? 
Was  Jesus  Christ  his  son?  Is  there  immortality  after 
death  ? Answer  these  three  questions,  and  I will  admit 
all  the  rest  claimed  in  your  sacred  book. 

“ Of  course,  if  there  be  a Supreme  Being  that  created 
the  universe,  then  it  follows  that  he  can  do  what  he  likes 
with  that  which  he  has  created.  The  Creator  can  do  as 
he  pleases  with  the  creature.  With  such  a Being  in  the 
universe,  of  course  miracles  can  happen.  He  can  do  as 
it  pleaseth  him  with  his  own.  That  which  appears  im- 
possible to  us  becomes  possible  with  him.  It  goes  for 
the  saying  that  if  there  be  such  a Creator,  then  miracles 
may  happen  ; they  become,  in  the  legal  parlance  of  your 
country,  merely  part  of  the  res  gestce,  or  subordinate 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


43i 


matter  in  dispute,  whose  existence  depends  upon  the 
settlement  of  the  main  point  in  dispute,  as  to  whether  or 
not  there  be  any  Creator  at  all.  I shall  have  no  difficulty, 
sir,  in  believing  in  the  existence  of  miracles  as  stated  in 
your  sacred  book,  if  you  will  only  show  me  with  reason- 
able certainty  that  a Creator  does  really  exist.  Then 
when  you  shall  have  shown  to  my  satisfaction  that  Christ 
was  the  son  of  that  Creator,  I shall  be  prepared  to  accept 
all  of  his  wonderful  teachings  concerning  morality  and 
immortality.” 

“You  surprise  me  by  your  candor,”  exclaimed  Mr. 
Plympton,  gazing  steadily  into  the  half-closed  eyes  of  his 
visitor,  as  if  endeavoring  to  fathom  the  depth  of  his  sin- 
cerity ; “ your  concessions  are  reasonable  enough,  but 
they  are  very  unusual  ones  to  be  made  by  a person  pre- 
sumably hostile  to  the  Christian  religion.  Do  you  then 
have  no  difficulty  in  understanding  the  doctrine  of  the 
Atonement  ? This  tenet  of  our  faith  has  been  the  one 
most  ridiculed  by  infidels.  They  loudly  assert  that  ‘ no 
power  can  step  between  acts  and  consequences  ; that 
there  is  no  forgiveness,  no  atonement.’  They  jeeringly 
ask  : ‘ How  can  a criminal  be  washed  clean  and  pure  in 
the  blood  of  another  ? ’ They  make  merry  over  the  fact 
that  the  ‘ wrong  fellow  ’ gets  punished.  And  they  boldly 
proclaim  that  ‘ every  human  being  must  bear  the  conse- 
quences of  his  own  acts.’  Before  entering  upon  our 
regular  discussion,  kindly  let  me  hear  your  views  con- 
cerning this  much  ridiculed  article  of  faith.” 

“ Sir,”  replied  Mr.  Yamada,  slowly,  “ I have  thought 
over  the  matter  carefully,  and  am  in  a position  to  say 
that  I have  no  difficulty  in  believing  your  doctrine  of  the 
atonement.  Granted  that  there  be  a Creator  and  that 
Christ  was  his  son,  then  there  would  be  nothing  at  all 
impossible  in  that  son  offering  himself  as  a substitute  for 
humanity  to  receive  punishment  for  the  violation  of  some 
inexorable  law  of  the  universe  that  had  been  broken  by 
the  erring  children  of  the  earth.  It  is,  perhaps,  easy  for 
us  Japanese  to  understand  such  a doctrine,  because  we 
have  a political  custom  that  somewhat  resembles  it. 


432 


Mito  Yashiki. 


Know,  then,  O most  learned  sir,  that  in  ancient  times  the 
family  of  a political  offender  was  exterminated  for  his 
offences,  whether  those  luckless  individuals  were  inno- 
cent or  guilty  of  complicity  in  the  deeds  of  their  kinsman. 
I am  informed  that  this  same  doctrine  of  blood-attainder 
prevailed  in  the  countries  of  Europe  for  many  centuries, 
and  that  it  was  so  repugnant  to  the  humane  feelings  of 
the  framers  of  the  American  Constitution  that  they  ex- 
pressly declared,  in  that  famous  charter  of  human  rights, 
that  blood-attainder  should  never  attach  for  any  offence 
whatsoever. 

“ Now,  in  our  country  the  gentler  feelings  of  our  race 
also  revolted  against  this  cruel  custom,  and  it  was  de- 
creed several  centuries  ago  that  blood-attainder  should  be 
wiped  out  by  the  act  of  seppuku , wherein  the  offender 
was  permitted  to  take  his  own  life,  and  thus  save  his 
family  and  kindred  from  cruel  extirpation.  Therefore, 
when  I hear  of  the  innocent  and  guileless  son  of  the 
God  of  the  universe  offering  himself  as  an  atonement 
for  the  sins  of  humanity,  in  order  to  propitiate  some  su- 
preme sense  of  violated  justice,  I am  carried  away  with 
admiration  for  the  magnificent  sacrifice.  To  my  mind 
there  is  nothing  improbable  about  there  being  some 
violation  on  the  part  of  our  progenitors  of  some  great 
universal  law  or  principle  of  creation  whereby  countless 
miseries  would  have  accrued  to  the  human  race,  leading 
to  extermination  perhaps,  were  it  not  for  the  ‘ blood- 
attainder  ’ having  been  washed  away  by  the  noble  sacri- 
fice of  a single  individual.  Why  not  ? What  do  we 
mortals  know  about  the  principles  involved  in  the  crea- 
tion of  the  universe  ? 

“ But,  sir,  all  such  considerations  are  purely  secondary. 
It  will  be  useless  to  spend  time  in  speculating  thereon 
until  we  have  come  to  some  agreement  as  to  whether  or 
not  there  be  any  Supreme  Being  at  all.  And  just  at  this 
point  there  arises  in  my  mind  a question  that  seems  im- 
possible of  an  answer.  I lay  it  down,  sir,  as  a universal 
and  unalterable  proposition,  that  every  thing  that  exists 
must  have  had  a cause.  We  trace  back  on  this  line  of 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


4*>  1 

J J 


cause  and  effect  until  we  come  to  the  question  as  to  who 
made  the  universe,  and  you  reply  that  .God  made  it. 
Now  I ask  you  who  made  this  God  of  yours  ? Surely  he 
must  be  the  effect  of  some  prior  cause,  because  it  is  a 
universal  law  that  every  thing  must  have  had  a cause.” 

“ Honorable  sir,”  slowly  replied  Mr.  Plympton,  as  his 
guest  concluded  his  lengthy  remarks,  “ it  is  manifest  that 
your  questions  come  from  a full  heart  and  a keen  brain. 
You  have  propounded  a question  that  has  been  agitating 
the  human  race  from  the  remotest  times.  It  will  not  sur- 
prise you,  therefore,  if  I should  make  but  a lame  attempt 
at  answering  so  profound  a query  as  that  which  you  have 
just  propounded.  I will,  however,  do  my  best  to  throw 
some  light  on  the  subject,  so  that  it  may  appear  to  you 
as  it  does  to  me.  In  the  first  place,  I positively  deny 
your  proposition  as  to  the  universality  of  the  law  of  cause 
and  effect.  You  appear  surprised  and  incredulous  at 
this  assertion.  Yet  I boldly  say  that  the  law  of  cause  and 
effect  is  not  of  universal  application.  Now  if  I can  show 
but  a single  exception  to  this  law,  I shall  shatter  -your 
proposition.  I positively  assert  that  the  space  enclosed 
by  this  room  has  always  existed  and  has  never  had  a 
cause.  The  limitless  realms  of  space  that  stretch  beyond 
the  uttermost  confines  of  the  universe  have  eternally 
existed  and  have  had  no  cause.  I insist  that  space  never 
had  a cause.  Yet  space  is  a reality  and  has  always 
existed. 

“ Therefore,  I say  that  your  proposition  is  not  of  uni- 
versal application.  I can  show  another  exception  to  it. 
Time,  or  duration  as  some  metaphysicians  designate  it, 
has  always  existed  and  has  never  had  a cause.  Back 
through  the  cycles  of  eternity  there  never  was  a time 
when  prior  time  did  not  exist.  Time  never  had  a cause. 
Yet  it  is  a profound  reality.  And  it  exists  just  as  truly 
as  you  or  I exist.  Therefore,  I have  shown  two  excep- 
tions to  your  sweeping  proposition.  And  who  knows 
how  many  more  may  exist  ? Consequently,  when  we 
Christians  say  that  God  was  never  created,  we  do  not 
assert  an  impossibility.  You  are  not  in  a position  to  say 


434 


Mito  Yashiki. 


that  it  is  impossible,  owing  to  its  conflicting  with  a uni- 
versal and  unalterable  law  of  cause  and  effect,  because  I 
have  already  shown  you  that  your  proposition  is  not  of 
universal  application.” 

“Sir,”  exclaimed  Mr.  Yamada,  “your  reasoning  is 
shrewd  and  just.  But  how  do  you  answer  this  question  : If 
God  made  all  things,  who  then  created  time  and  space  ? ” 

“ Your  question  is  a reasonable  one,”  replied  Mr. 
Plympton,  “ and  I will  answer  it  thus  : God  has  no  be- 
ginning nor  end  ; time  and  space  have  no  beginning  nor 
end  ; therefore  I believe  that  time  and  space  are  but  at- 
tributes of  God.  If  you  ask  me  to  explain  how  or  why,  I 
candidly  reply  that  I cannot.  My  intellect  was  evidently 
made  for  use  in  this  world  only,  and  it  cannot  grasp  sub- 
jects of  such  vast  scope.  I can  merely  state  my  belief. 
And  I think  that  you  will  admit  that  my  belief  is  not  an 
unreasonable  one.  Surely  it  is  more  reasonable  to  assume 
this  position  than  to  take  the  other  horn  of  the  dilemma, 
and  assert  that  no  God  exists.  Humanity  has  attained 
to  more  exalted  spheres  of  development  by  taking  my 
attitude,  than  by  taking  the  degrading  and  cowardly  atti- 
tude of  the  infidel.” 

“ You  have  well  spoken  ! ” exclaimed  Mr.  Yamada. 

“ Having  thus  shown  to  you,”  continued  Mr.  Plympton, 
“that  there  is  nothing  inherently  impossible  about  there 
being  a Supreme  Being  existing  from  all  eternity  and 
never  having  had  any  cause,  I will  now  endeavor  to  state 
my  reasons  for  believing  that  such  a Being  does  really 
exist  in  this  universe.  Do  you  think  it  more  probable 
that  the  material  universe  was  the  result  of  chance,  or 
that  it  was  brought  about  by  some  intelligent  cause  ? ” 

“ It  would  be  impossible,  sir,  for  us  to  arrive  at  so 
ridiculous  and  improbable  a conclusion  as  that  it  came 
about  by  chance,”  replied  Mr.  Yamada,  after  a brief 
pause  ; “the  Buddhists  teach  such  a doctrine,  but  they 
are  notoriously  credulous  in  all  things.  Should  we  as- 
sume any  such  position  as  that,  we  could  not  blame  you 
if  you  were  at  once  to  shut  off  all  debate  and  to  pro- 
nounce us  to  be  too  silly  to  converse  with.  It  appears 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


435 


more  reasonable  and  probable  to  me  that  the  material 
universe  was  brought  about  by  some  intelligent  cause, — 
although  I am  free  to  confess  my  inability  to  compre- 
hend how  or  why.  As  there  does  not  appear  to  be  any 
third  hypothesis  in  this  matter,  I feel  compelled  to 
choose  what  appears  to  my  mind  to  be  the  more  reasona- 
ble of  two  very  mysterious  propositions.  Should  I deny 
the  existence  of  a creative  cause  in  the  universe,  you 
would  be  in  a position  to  force  me  to  deny  my  own 
existence,  to  say  nothing  of  compelling  me  to  deny  the 
existence  of  all  material  objects.  I can  no  more  prove 
the  existence  of  the  material  universe  than  I can  prove 
the  existence  of  a creative  cause.  Yet  my  mind  is  so 
constructed  that  I am  compelled  to  believe  in  the  former, 
and  to  attribute  its  existence  to  the  latter.” 

“ I thank  you  for  your  candor,”  replied  Mr.  Plympton 
earnestly,  “ it  will  make  a difficult  task  easier.  I will 
now  give  you  my  reasons  for  believing  that  a Supreme 
Being  does  exist  in  the  universe.  But  before  plunging 
into  this  difficult  subject,  I must  say  a few  words  about 
the  kind  of  evidence  needed  for  my  purpose.  You  must 
bear  in  mind  that  each  department  of  human  learning 
has  processes  of  proof  peculiar  to  itself.  You  must  not 
expect  me  to  prove  a historic  fact  otherwise  than  by  his- 
toric methods  of  proof.  As  a matter  of  fact,  no  fact  can 
be  demonstrated.  All  that  you  can  do  is  to  adduce  suffi- 
cient evidence  to  satisfy  reasonable  belief  that  such  and 
such  a fact  did  actually  happen  at  some  time  or  other, 
whether  recent  or  remote.  In  mathematics  you  demon- 
strate your  propositions  by  means  of  lines,  angles,  and 
figures,  after  assuming  said  lines,  angles,  and  figures  to 
be  correct.  In  chemistry  you  demonstrate  the  correct- 
ness of  your  theories  by  experimental  tests  with  various 
chemical  substances,  after  assuming  that  any  given  set  of 
substances  are  really  what  they  purport  to  be. 

“ As  an  eminent  scientific  gentleman  of  modern  times 
has  expressed  it, — ‘ the  bases  of  both  science  and  religion 
are  grounded  on  faith.’  That  is  to  say,  you  are  com- 
pelled to  take  the  fundamental  principles  of  all  sciences 


436  Mito  Yashiki. 

on  faith,  just  as  you  are  compelled  to  take  the  fundamen- 
tal principles  of  the  Christain  religion  on  faith.  In  the 
domain  of  history  and  of  law  you  prove  your  propositions 
by  means  of  certain  well-established  principles  of  testi- 
mony. To  demand  that  a mathematical  proposition 
should  be  proved  by  the  methods  used  for  proving 
chemical  or  legal  matters,  would  be  absurd.  Equally 
absurd  would  it  be  to  refuse  to  believe  an  historic  fact 
because  it  is  not  susceptible  of  mathematical  demonstra- 
tion. 

“ Now  you  gentlemen  must  bear  in  mind  that  all  proof 
at  best — no  matter  in  what  department  of  human 
learning  it  may  chance  to  be — is  but  approximate. 
Nothing  can  be  proved  absolutely,  beyond  peradventure 
or  doubt.  There  is  no  such  thing  as  infallible  demon- 
stration. You  must  always  exercise  your  faith  and 
assume  certain  fundamental  principles  to  be  correct, 
before  you  can  proceed  with  proof  of  any  description 
whatsoever.  All  that  human  law  requires  in  adjusting  the 
most  momentous  affairs  is  that  the  evidence  brought 
forward  to  prove  any  given  proposition  shall  be  sufficient 
to  satisfy  reasonable  belief.  When  the  reason  of  the 
average  community  has  been  satisfied  upon  any  given 
point,  it  will  generally  appear  that  the  evidence  adduced 
to  sustain  that  point  was  sufficient.  Now  the  existence 
of  God  and  of  Christ  can  only  be  proved  (so  to  speak) 
by  testimony,  and  this  testimony  I hope  will  be  sufficient 
to  satisfy  your  reasonable  belief,  as  it  has  been  sufficient 
to  satisfy  the  reasonable  belief  of  the  Caucasian  race  for 
many  centuries.” 

“Sir,”  exclaimed  Mr.  Yamada,  “your  remarks  are 
indeed  to  the  point.  It  is  only  with  the  testimony  that 
has  satisfied  you  and  your  race  that  I wish  to  deal.  The 
entire  field  of  argument  deducing  the  existence  of  a 
Creator  from  analogy  and  design  I have  carefully  gone 
over  with  my  intelligent  young  companion  here,  who  has 
studied  the  subject  from  your  books  during  many  years. 
I am  prepared  to  concede  the  arguments  of  your  learned 
writers.  There  is  certainly  sufficient  evidence  of  design 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


‘ 437 


in  this  world  of  ours  to  suggest  an  intelligent  Creator. 
The  tables,  books,  and  chairs  in  this  room  here  denote  an 
intelligent  cause  so  clearly  that  nobody  but  a blockhead 
would  question  the  fact.  Your  watch  and  clothes  also 
indicate  an  intelligent  cause.  Houses,  ships,  roads, 
castles,  steam-engines,  and  a myriad  of  other  things 
about  us  indicate,  beyond  peradventure  or  doubt,  intelli- 
gent causes.  Therefore  I am  prepared  to  admit  at  once 
that  the  material  universe  about  us  gives  such  abundant 
evidence  of  design  that  by  analogy  we  are  compelled  to 
attribute  some  intelligent  cause  to  the  existence  of  all  the 
wonderful  things  that  we  see  about  us.  Thus  having  the 
existence  of  a Creator  so  powerfully  suggested  to  us  on 
every  side,  and  also  having  in  our  hearts  a well-defined 
intuition  that  such  a Creator  does  really  exist  somewhere 
in  the  universe,  it  remains  for  us  to  search  for  testimony 
asserting  his  existence  as  a positive  fact.” 

“ Do  you  see  that  orange-tree  growing  in  the  yard  ? ” 
said  Mr.  Plympton,  abruptly,  as  he  turned  toward  the 
window. 

“ I do,”  replied  Mr.  Yamada. 

“ What  was  its  origin?  ” was  the  next  question. 

“ It  grew  from  an  orange  seed,  sir,”  was  the  prompt 
reply. 

“ Excuse  the  simplicity  of  my  question,”  continued 
Mr.  Plympton,  “ but  pray  tell  me  whence  came  that 
orange  seed  ? ” 

“ It  came,  sir,  from  an  orange  that  had  been  produced 
by  some  other  orange-tree.” 

“ Precisely  so,”  exclaimed  Mr.  Plympton,  “and  it  is 
thus  that  you  trace  back  from  tree  to  seed  for  many  cen- 
turies, till  you  come  to  the  original  seed  (brought  from 
China  perhaps),  whence  have  sprung  the  myriads  of 
orange-trees  that  to-day  adorn  the  islands  of  Dai-Nippon. 
Yet  none  of  us  ever  set  eyes  on  that  original  seed.  The 
millions  of  seeds  and  trees  that  have  sprung  into  exist- 
ence during  the  past  centuries  have  long  since  become 
dust.  Nobody  to-day  living  has  ever  seen  them.  Even 
the  seed  from  which  yonder  tree  sprouted  has  long  since 


438  ' 


Mito  Yashiki. 


disappeared.  Yet  there  is  no  reasonable  doubt  but  what 
the  present  orange-trees  of  Japan  have  descended  from 
the  orange-trees  of  the  middle  ages,  and  that  in  turn  those 
trees  were  the  descendants  of  some  primeval  seed  that 
first  took  root  in  the  soil  of  Dai-Nippon  many  ages 
before.  These  facts  are  established  by  human  testimony 
handed  down  from  generation  to  generation.  This  testi- 
mony is  the  only  evidence  obtainable  in  the  premises. 
You  may  call  it  weak  and  unsatisfactory,  yet  it  is  suffi- 
cient to  satisfy  humanity  of  the  reasonableness  of  the 
proposition,  that  orange-trees  grow  from  orange  seeds  and 
have  always  done  so  even  to  remotest  ages.” 

“Sir,”  exclaimed  Mr.  Yamada,  “your  proposition  is 
certainly  well  proven.  Should  anybody  be  silly  enough 
to  reject  it  upon  the  ground  of  insufficiency  of  evidence, 
I would  decree  that  he  be  forbidden  to  taste  the  fruit  of 
the  trees  until  such  time  as  his  perceptions  had  become 
clearer.” 

“ Do  you  see  this  Japanese  book  that  I am  holding  in 
my  hand  ? ’’continued  Mr.  Plympton,  taking  up  a volume 
from  the  table. 

“ I do,”  was  the  reply. 

“ What  is  it  ? ” 

“ It  is  a native  history  of  the  great  warrior  Taiko-sama 
who  lived  three  hundred  years  ago.” 

“ How  do  you  know  such  to  be  the  case  ? ” 

“ Because  I recognize  the  volume  as  being  similar  to 
one  in  my  possession.  The  two  books  manifestly  belong 
to  the  same  edition  of  the  historian’s  work.” 

“ Precisely  so,”  replied  Mr.  Plympton  ; “and  upon  the 
testimony  of  this  book  you  believe  that  such  a character 
as  Taiko-sama  existed  three  centuries  ago  and  did  really 
perform  the  deeds  credited  to  him.  You  believe  all  this 
even  though  you  never  saw  him  nor  have  ever  seen  any- 
body who  has  spoken  to  him.  All  the  witnesses  of  his 
deeds  have  long  since  passed  away,  and  many  generations 
intervene  between  you  and  the  historian  who  chronicled 
his  achievements.  The  original  manuscripts  of  the  au- 
thor have  long  since  crumbled  to  dust.  Successive 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


439 


editions  of  his  works  have  disappeared  from  the  face 
of  the  earth.  Yet  I take  up  this  modern  edition  of  his 
work  and  say  that,  like  the  orange-tree,  it  has  sprung 
from  the  seed  of  previous  editions  back  to  the  original 
manuscript  of  the  author,  and  that  his  statements  as  em- 
bodied in  that  original  manuscript  and  based  upon  the 
testimony  of  his  cotemporaries  who  were  familiar  with 
the  doings  of  Taiko-sama  I believe  to  be  substantially 
correct.  By  the  methods  of  historic  proof  the  life  and 
deeds  of  that  great  warrior  are  thus  sufficiently  proved 
to  satisfy  reasonable  belief.  But  what  book  is  this  that  I 
now  hold  before  you  ? ” 

“ Sir,”  replied  Tomokichi  to  whom  Mr.  Yamada  had 
passed  the  book  as  being  in  an  unknown  language,  “it  is 
an  English  translation  of  the  “ Commentaries  of  Julius 
Caesar  ” — a great  Roman  warrior  who  lived  two  thousand 
years  ago.” 

“ Precisely  so,”  observed  Mr.  Plympton,  “ and  it  estab- 
lishes with  reasonable  certainty  the  doings  of  that  won- 
derful man,  even  though  his  original  manuscripts  have 
long  since  crumbled  to  dust,  even  though  all  the  first 
copies  of  his  seed-germ  have  disappeared  from  the  face 
of  the  earth,  even  though  not  a single  copy  of  the  innu- 
merable editions  of  his  work  issued  during  nearly  seven- 
teen centuries  are  to-day  extant,  and  even  though  nearly 
two  thousand  years  have  elapsed  since  the  time  when  he 
was  on  earth.  And  I have  no  hesitation  in  saying  that  I 
believe  this  English  translation  that  you  now  hold  is  a 
substantially  correct  copy  of  the  statements  contained  in 
the  original  manuscript  that  came  from  the  hand  of  Julius 
Caesar.  The  historic  proof  is  sufficient  to  satisfy  reasona- 
ble belief,  and  as  such  it  is  accepted  as  satisfactory  by 
humanity.  The  people  of  the  present  age  ta.ke  judicial 
cognizance  of  the  fact  that  great  historic  characters  have 
existed  whenever  a satisfactory  chain  of  evidence  certi- 
fied by  successive  generations  of  human  testimony  reaches 
back  through  the  centuries  to  their  deeds. 

“ And  whoever  refuses  to  be  convinced  by  this  method 
of  human  testimony  generally  has  some  special  reason 


440 


Mito  Yashiki. 


for  so  doing.  Pride  of  intellect  has  led  some  scholars  to 
question  the  existence  of  the  great  Greek  poet,  Homer, 
even  after  the  very  foundations  of  ancient  Troy — the 
subject  of  his  most  famous  poem — were  discovered. 
Even  the  authorship  of  the  poems  of  the  illustrious  Eng- 
lish poet  Shakespeare,  who  lived  about  the  time  Taiko- 
sama  did,  has  been  denied  by  modern  critics,  who  seem 
to  think  it  presumptuous  for  a common  plebeian  school- 
master and  despised  playwright  to  produce  such  sublime 
thoughts,  and  consequently  attribute  their  authorship  to 
a nobleman  of  the  realm.  In  short,  honored  sirs,  I wish 
to  lay  down  this  simple  proposition,  that  to  the  candid 
mind  of  average  humanity  the  existence  and  the  deeds  of 
all  historic  characters  can  be  sufficiently  well  established 
to  satisfy  reasonable  belief,  and  that  to  the  bitterly  preju- 
diced mind  nothing  whatever  can  be  proved.  Now  let 
me  ask  you,  my  young  friend,  to  tell  us  what  is  the  nature 
of  the  book  that  I now  hand  to  you.” 

“ It  is  the  sacred  book  of  the  Christians,”  replied 
Tomokichi. 

“ Precisely  so,”  said  Mr.  Plympton,  “ and  in  it  you 
will  find  the  record  of  the  birth,  the  life,  and  the  death  of 
the  founder  of  the  Christian  faith.  The  original  records 
were  made  by  four  eye-witnesses  of  the  facts,  who  all 
substantially  agree  in  their  statements.  The  truthfulness 
of  the  records  of  these  four  historians  was  not  questioned 
by  the  generation  in  which  they  lived.  Their  assertions 
related  to  matters  of  common  knowledge.  It  did  not 
occur  to  anybody  in  that  age  to  doubt  them.  During 
the  past  eighteen  centuries  innumerable  editions  of  these 
four  histories  have  been  issued  and  scattered  over  the 
face  of  the  earth.  Successive  generations  of  men  have  tes- 
tified to  and  verified  the  authenticity  of  the  various  edi- 
tions. Copies  of  several  of  the  ancient  editions  are  to- 
day extant, — same  issued  five  hundred  years  ago,  some 
issued  over  one  thousand  years  ago,  and  one  issued  fifteen 
hundred  years  ago.  Critical  and  scholarly  comparisons 
show  that  these  editions  all  substantially  agree  in  their 
statements.  This  powerful  and  overwhelming  cumula- 


The  Light  of  the  World.  441 

tive  evidence  does  not  exist  in  the  matter  of  Caesar’s 
Commentaries. 

“ Therefore,  while  I do  not  hesitate  to  allege  that  the 
English  translation  just  shown  to  you  is  a substantially 
correct  copy  of  Caesar’s  original  manuscript,  with  how 
much  greater  assurance  am  I able  to  assert  that  these 
four  Gospels  are  correct  copies  of  the  original  manu- 
scripts of  the  four  disciples  of  Christ.  Had  these  his- 
tories been  false,  their  veracity  would  have  been  im- 
peached by  the  cotemporaries  of  the  Apostles.  But  their 
truthfulness  has  been  so  well  established  by  eighteen  cen- 
turies of  successful  defence  that  the  rules  of  testimony 
will  not  permit  them,  nor  any  portion  of  them,  to  be 
ruled  out  of  evidence  by  the  pompously  dogmatic  and 
fanatically  prejudiced  infidels  of  the  nineteenth  century. 
I therefore  lay  down  this  proposition,  which  I think  all 
candid  minds  will  accept  as  a reasonable  one — namely, 
that  about  eighteen  centuries  ago  there  lived  in  the 
vicinity  of  Jerusalem  a person  named  Jesus  Christ, 
and  that  he  lived,  taught,  and  died  substantially  as 
alleged  in  the  book  that  you  are  now  holding  in  your 
hand.” 

“Sir,”  exclaimed  Mr.  Yamada,  “what  candid  mind 
could  dispute  such  a proposition  ? Your  sacred  book  is 
better  authenticated  than  any  ancient  work  in  existence. 
When  grains  of  wheat  were  discovered  in  the  ancient 
tombs  of  the  Egyptians,  the  scientific  men  of  Europe  felt 
justified  in  asserting  that  wheat  grew  in  the  valley  of  the 
Nile  several  thousand  years  ago.  No  reasonable  mind 
will  question  this  assertion.  When  a copy  of  your 
Gospels,  fifteen  hundred  years  old,  was  found  at  a 
monastery  among  the  mountains  just  south  of  Palestine, 
the  scientific  theologians  of  Europe  were  justified  in 
alleging  that  at  that  early  date  your  sacred  book  was  in 
circulation  among  the  people.  Your  chain  of  evidence 
connecting  the  statements  contained  in  this  book  with 
the  birth,  life,  teaching,  and  death  of  Jesus  Christ  is  too 
strong  to  be  broken.  I must  admit  that  the  allegations 
of  these  Gospels  actually  transpired  as  herein  asserted. 


442 


Mito  Yashiki. 


But  what  has  all  this  to  do  with  proving  the  existence  of 
a Supreme  Being  ? ” 

“ I will  now  proceed  to  show  you  the  relevancy  of 
this  chain  of  evidence,  my  friend.  Having  shown  that 
such  a person  as  Jesus  Christ  did  actually  exist  as  stated 
in  this  volume  that  has  received  the  judicial  cognizance 
of  humanity,  and  that  he  was  a just  and  good  man,  as 
herein  alleged,  I therefore  produce  him  as  my  first 
witness  as  to  the  existence  of  a Supreme  Being.  His 
testimony,  made  in  anticipation  of  immediate  death, 
while  he  was  in  the  full  possession  of  all  his  faculties 
and  in  the  presence  of  a court  of  justice,  is  in  its  nature  a 
most  solemn  legal  deposition, — than  which  nothing  more 
trustworthy  is  known  in  the  realm  of  human  jurispru- 
dence. Dying  declarations  have  ever  ranked  as  the  best 
evidence  in  courts  of  law. 

“ Now  what  did  this  person  testify  ? Let  us  see.  It  will 
appear  upon  examining  the  records  that  he  not  only  as- 
serted that  there  was  a Supreme  Being,  seen  and  known  by 
him,  but  also  that  he  was  the  son  of  that  Supreme  Being, 
incarnated  in  human  form.  He  asserted  that  this 
Supreme  Being  was  the  creator  of  the  universe  and  of 
the  human  race,  that  he  had  existed  from  all  eternity  and 
would  continue  to  exist  for  ever,  and  that  he  had  sent 
his  only  begotten  Son  into  the  world  to  redeem  men 
from  their  sins,  and  to  prepare  their  souls  for  the  im- 
mortal existence  that  lay  beyond  the  grave.  He  persisted 
in  making  these  stupendous  statements  from  boyhood  up 
to  mature  years. 

“ The  Jewish  nation  had  already  admitted  the  existence 
of  the  Supreme  Being  upon  the  testimony  of  their  great 
lawgiver  Moses,  who,  according  to  the  well-authenticated 
volumes  of  the  Pentateuch,  had  seen  and  talked  with  him 
on  various  occasions,  fifteen  hundred  years  prior  to 
Christ’s  birth.  During  those  fifteen  hundred  years  a 
long  line  of  patriarchs,  prophets,  and  kings  testified 
repeatedly  from  personal  knowledge  that  there  existed 
behind  the  phenomena  of  nature  an  intelligent  creative 
power  or  Supreme  Being.  Their  testimony  was  reduced 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


443 


to  writing  and  was  handed  down  in  volumes  as  well 
authenticated  as  the  ‘Commentaries  of  Julius  Caesar.’ 
From  Adam  downward,  testimony  of  this  description 
had  repeatedly  been  made  both  orally  and  by  manuscript, 
until  there  existed  no  doubt  in  the  minds  of  the  Jewish 
people  that  such  a Supreme  Being  did  actually  exist. 
They  worshipped  him  with  the  profoundest  veneration, 
and  adopted  the  moral  and  political  code  that  he  gave  to 
Moses.  So  solemn  was  the  veneration  for  this  Being, 
that  they  had  decreed  that  any  Jew  guilty  of  claiming 
to  be  his  equal  should  be  put  to  death  as  being  a 
blasphemer. 

“According  to  this  law,  when  Christ  made  his  stupen- 
dous claims  he  incurred  the  death  penalty  unless  he 
could  make  good  his  assertions.  During  the  days  of  his 
youth,  but  little  attention  appears  to  have  been  given  to 
his  claims  by  the  Jewish  authorities.  But  when  he  had 
attained  to  years  of  discretion  and  still  persisted  in  his 
claims,  there  arose  angry  protests  and  ominous  threaten- 
ings.  And  when  he  began  to  preach  his  astounding 
doctrines  and  to  verify  his  allegations  with  miracles,  then 
multitudes  believed  on  him  and  accepted  him  as  the  Son 
of  God.  Three  years  of  such  work  produced  the  pro- 
foundest agitation  in  Judea.  The  authorities  were  re- 
duced to  the  necessity  of  either  proclaiming  him  to  be  a 
blasphemer  worthy  of  death  or  of  admitting  his  claims 
and  surrendering  their  own  power.  In  their  own  minds 
they  rejected  his  claims,  but  they  dared  not  arrest  him 
in  public  because  of  his  numerous  following. 

“At  length  they  succeeded  in  capturing  him  one  night, 
through  the  treachery  of  one  of  his  disciples.  Without 
delay  they  carried  him  before  the  highest  tribunal  of  the 
Jewish  nation, — the  renowned  Sanhedrim.  The  issue 
presented  at  the  trial  was  a very  simple  one  : ‘ This 
man  claims  to  be  the  Son  of  God.  Is  he,  or  is  he  not  ? ’ 
In  the  most  solemn  manner  the  presiding  judge  of  the 
court  put  the  question  to  the  prisoner  : ‘ I adjure  thee 
by  the  living  God  that  thou  tell  us  whether  thou  be  the 
Christ,  the  Son  of  God  ! ’ Jesus  answered,  ‘ I am.’ 


444 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“Then  the  judge  pronounced  him  to  be  a blasphemer, 
and  the  court  condemned  him  as  being  worthy  of  death. 
On  the  following  morning  the  Sanhedrim  with  great  diffi- 
culty secured  a permit  for  the  execution  of  their  prisoner 
from  the  Roman  pro-consul  of  Judea,  who  would  not 
grant  it  until  he  had  made  public  protest  as  to  the  in- 
justice of  sentencing  an  innocent  man  to  death.  The 
Romans,  being  pagans,  did  not  consider  blasphemy  to 
be  sufficient  ground  for  passing  sentence  of  death  on 
a man.  Christ  was  accordingly  condemned  to  a linger- 
ing death  on  the  cross  in  order  to  pacify  the  tumultuous 
mob  of  Jews  that  followed  the  Sanhedrim.  Even  in  his 
death  agonies  he  persisted  in  his  claims.  He  promised 
to  open  the  gates  of  Paradise  to  the  soul  of  the  dying 
thief  beside  him,  and  when  his  own  sad  hour  had  come 
he  exclaimed  in  a loud  voice,  ‘ Father,  into  thy  hands  I 
commend  my  spirit,’ — and  died  amid  seismic  and  atmos- 
pheric manifestations  of  so  supernatural  a character  that 
the  pagan  soldiers  of  the  Roman  guard  stationed  at  the  foot 
of  the  cross  exclaimed:  ‘ Truly  this  was  the  Son  of  God.’ 
“ Therefore,  my  inquiring  friends,  I introduce  in 
evidence  upon  the  issue  whether  or  not  there  be  a 
Supreme  Being  the  duly  recorded  living  and  dying 
declarations  of  Jesus  Christ,  who  was  crucified  for 
claiming  to  be  the  Son  of  that  Supreme  Being,  and  who 
died  testifying  to  humanity  the  existence  of  an  immortal 
life  after  death.  In  the  second  place,  I introduce  in 
evidence  the  documentary  testimony  of  Moses  and  of 
the  Hebrew  prophets  and  kings  cited  in  the  Old  Testa- 
ment,— the  correctness  of  whose  records  has  been 
vouched  for  by  the  Jewish  people  for  over  two  thousand 
years,  and  whose  pages  unequivocally  predicted  the 
coming  of  Christ,  and  also  taught  the  doctrine  of  immor- 
tality. In  the  third  place,  I introduce  in  evidence,  to 
offset  the  verdict  of  the  Sanhedrim  pronouncing  Christ 
to  be  a blasphemous  man,  the  testimony  of  eighteen 
centuries  of  intelligent  worshippers  of  all  nations  under 
heaven,  declaring  themselves  to  be  satisfied  with  his 
claims  and  believing  that  he  was  indeed  the  Son  of  God. 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


445 


Multitudes  of  these  witnesses  have  perished  in  the  arena 
and  at  the  stake  declaring  the  reality  of  the  invisible 
communion  between  their  redeemed  souls  and  God, 
thus  bearing  testimony  to  the  consolation  which  had 
been  promised  by  Christ  to  his  followers  in  all  ages  and 
lands, — that  Comforter  which  he  would  send  upon  his 
departure  from  this  earth.  And  finally,  I introduce  in 
evidence  the  steady  growth  of  this  belief  since  the  time 
of  Christ’s  crucifixion,  until  to-day  it  is  almost  uni- 
versally adopted  by  the  Caucasian  race. 

“ This  universality  of  belief  is  powerful  evidence,  not- 
withstanding the  infidel  allegation  that  ‘ in  the  world  of 
thought  majorities  count  for  nothing  and  that  truth  has 
always  dwelt  with  the  few.’  Did  not  the  idea  of  one  God 
dwell  with  a few  at  first  ? Did  it  not  first  spring  from 
one  family,  then  from  one  tribe,  then  from  one  nation, 
until  it  became  largely  spread  over  the  world  ? Has  it 
not  been  slowly  accepted  by  reasoning  mankind  as  the 
most  reasonable  hypothesis  ? Did  not  the  religion  of 
Christ  spring  from  a single  thoughtful  individual,  then 
from  a few  families,  and  then  merge  into  the  thoughtful 
portions  of  a few  nations  in  the  teeth  of  the  bitterest 
opposition  that  the  world  has  ever  seen  ? Has  not  this 
truth  dwelt  with  a thoughtful  few  ? Whilst  the  pagan 
world  went  wild  with  the  mad  carnival  of  war,  rapine,  and 
lust,  whilst  the  Roman  epicureans  pronounced  all  of  the 
countless  gods  enshrined  within  their  Pantheon  to  be 
merely  myths  and  phantoms  born  of  the  imagination,  and 
whilst  the  Greek  philosophers  declared  intelligence,  the 
expanding  of  the  human  intellect,  the  practice  of  virtue, 
the  discoveries  of  science,  the  inventions  of  genius,  and 
the  cultivation  of  the  imagination  through  art  and  music 
to  be  sufficient  to  redeem  the  human  race — to  be  the 
saviors  of  mankind  ! — did  not  a few  thoughtful  Christian 
communities  become  in  those  ages  of  shameless  debauch 
and  nameless  cruelties  the  conservators  of  virtue  and  call 
the  world  to  order  ? ” 

“O  most  learned  sir,”  exclaimed  Mr.  Yamada,  deeply 
impressed  with  the  long  and  eloquent  address  of  the 


446 


Mito  Ycishiki. 


missionary,  “ that  which  you  say  has  great  power  of  con- 
viction. So  far  as  the  laws  of  human  testimony  and  of 
historic  evidence  are  concerned  your  position  appears  to 
be  impregnable.  A reasonable  mind  should  be  satisfied 
that  Christ  was  crucified  for  claiming  to  be  the  Son  of 
God,  that  the  thoughtful  portions  of  the  Caucasian 
race  for  eighteen  centuries  have  allowed  his  claim  to  be 
a well-founded  one,  and  that  the  most  intelligent,  the 
most  powerful,  the  most  scientific,  the  most  inventive, 
and  the  most  cultured  and  virtuous  nations  of  the  nine- 
teenth century  are  at  least  nominally  Christian. 

“ But  I am  troubled  with  two  questions  that  I will  now 
propound  to  you,  sincerely  hoping  that  you  may  be  able 
to  answer  them  as  satisfactorily  as  you  have  answered 
those  already  put  to  you.  The  first  question  has  been 
culled  from  infidel  literature  by  my  young  friend  here, 
and  is  as  follows  : ‘ The  sentence  there  is  a God  could 
have  been  imprinted  on  every  blade  of  grass,  on  every 
leaf,  on  every  star  ; an  infinite  God  has  no  excuse  for 
leaving  his  children  in  doubt  and  darkness  ! ’ Of  course 
it  would  be  grotesque  to  think  of  God  as  scribbling  his 
name  all  over  the  universe,  and  from  that  standpoint  the 
demand  is  stupid  and  unreasonable.  But  it  seems  to  me 
that  on  so  important  a matter  as  the  existence  of  a Su- 
pceme  Being  there  might  have  been  some  evidence  beside 
mere  design  and  historic  evidence  corroborating  our 
intuitions  on  the  subject.  It  seems  to  me  that  there 
should  be  some  evidence  so  convincing  that  nobody 
could  dispute  it.  My  second  question  is  as  follows : 
Why  could  not  God — aside  from  the  question  of  the 
atonement — have  devised  some  other  method  of  redeem- 
ing men  from  their  sins  without  having  his  Son  pass 
through  such  a frightful  ordeal  of  suffering.  This  second 
question  is  more  speculative  than  the  first  one,  and  I do 
not  know  as  it  can  be  answered.  In  fact,  both  questions 
are  childish  and  petulant,  but  I ask  them  in  order  to  ob- 
tain your  views  on  the  subject.” 

“Your  questions,  sir,”  replied  Mr.  Plympton,  “are 
very  natural,  and  have  puzzled  the  speculative  minds  of 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


447 


Christendom  for  many  centuries.  Of  course  I can  only 
give  speculative  answers,  as  God  in  his  wisdom  does  not 
appear  to  have  deemed  it  essential  to  man’s  salvation  to 
explain  such  matters  to  him.  Your  first  question,  I 
think,  has  been  indirectly  answered  by  Christ  in  the 
famous  parable  of  Dives  and  Lazarus. 

“ You  will  remember  that  Dives,  after  having  lived  the 
life  of  an  Oriental  voluptuary,  finally  died  in  his  sins  and 
was  consigned  to  a place  of  torment  as  punishment  for 
his  numerous  transgressions.  Lazarus,  on  the  other 
hand,  was  found  at  death  to  be  pure  in  heart,  and  was 
admitted  to  the  abodes  of  the  blessed.  In  this  cele- 
brated allegory  Dives  is  represented  as  calling  to  Abra- 
ham across  the  impassable  abyss  that  intervened  be- 
tween paradise  and  hell,  and  begged  him  to  send  Lazarus 
to  earth  in  order  to  warn  his  (Dives’)  kindred  and  friends 
to  flee  from  the  wrath  to  come  by  leading  purer  lives 
than  he  himself  had  led  while  on  earth  surrounded  by 
luxury  and  refinement.  The  answer  that  went  back  across 
that  fathomless  gulf  touches  a very  peculiar  chord  in 
human  nature:  ‘ They  have  Moses  and  the  prophets  ; let 
them  hear  them.  If  they  hear  not  Moses  and  the  prophets, 
neither  will  they  be  persuaded  though  one  rose  from  the 
dead.'  In  the  matter  of  choosing  between  right  and 
wrong  man  has  always  shown  himself  to  be  a very  obsti- 
nate and  perverse  free  agent.  In  all  matters  left  open 
to  him  to  form  opinions  and  beliefs  about  he  has  gen- 
erally shown  himself  to  be  erratic  and  stubborn  in  his 
views.  In  such  matters  it  is  useless  to  drive  him. 
Your  only  course  is  to  reason  with  him  and  to  persuade 
him.  Failing  in  this,  you  had  better  let  him  alone. 
Such  is  the  matured  verdict  of  humanity.  If  you  cannot 
convince  a man  after  having  laid  before  him  a reason- 
able amount  of  evidence — such  an  amount  as  would 
satisfy  the  average  reasoning  intellect  of  mankind, — 
then  no  amount  of  cumulative  evidence  that  you  may 
choose  to  heap  up  will  be  likely  to  convince  him.  This 
is  a peculiarity  of  human  nature  that  appears  to  be  uni- 
versal. 


44-8 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“ Therefore,  when  men  refuse  to  believe  in  the  existence 
of  God,  after  having  the  testimony  of  Moses,  the  proph- 
ets, and  of  Christ  endorsed  by  the  sanction  of  eighteen 
centuries  of  devout  disciples,  and  powerfully  corroborated 
by  the  analogies  of  nature  and  the  intuitions  of  the 
human  heart,  it  is  not  likely  that  any  accumulation  of 
testimony  would  avail — not  even  if  ‘ one  rose  from  the 
dead,’  or  if  God  were  to  ‘scribble  his  name  all  over  the 
universe.’  I lay  it  down  as  a proposition  verified  by 
the  experience  of  mankind,  that  when  a reasonable 
amount  of  proof  fails  to  convince  a man  then  any 
amount  of  superabundant  testimony  rarely  suffices  to 
convince  him. 

“ This  has  been  found  to  be  so  even  in  matters  of  pro- 
foundest  importance.  People  have  been  warned  not  to 
live  in  certain  malarious  districts,  yet  they  have  done  so 
in  spite  of  friendly  advice  and  have  perished  in  untold 
thousands.  People  have  been  warned  not  to  live  at  the 
base  of  volcanic  mountains,  yet  they  have  persisted  in 
doing  so  and  have  perished  miserably.  People  have 
lived  in  narrow  valleys  with  vast  bodies  of  water  in- 
securely dammed  up  in  the  highlands,  whence,  if  once 
set  free,  the  descending  torrents  would  surely  scour  out 
the  valley.  Yet  people  have  persisted  in  living  in  such 
dangerous  places  even  after  repeated  warnings  so  strong 
in  their  nature  that  nothing  could  have  been  more  con- 
vincing. I knew  of  one  case  where  such  a dam  had 
been  known  to  be  unsafe  for  many  years  ; where,  during 
a rainy  season,  the  people  had  been  warned  weeks  be- 
forehand that  it  was  daily  weakening  ; where,  on  the 
very  morning  of  the  disastrous  day,  skilled  engineers 
had  warned  the  people  to  flee  to  the  mountains  to  es- 
cape the  flood  ; where,  but  an  hour  or  so  before  the 
catastrophe  occurred,  urgent  messengers  had  sped  down 
the  valley  and  begged  the  people  to  escape  to  places  of 
safety  ; and  where,  in  the  very  face  of  death  the  people 
laughed  to  scorn  all  warnings  and  were  swept  to  destruc- 
tion by  the  down-pouring  torrents.  In  this  case  reason- 
able proof  of  danger  failed  to  convince  the  general  com- 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


449 


raunity.  Then  cumulative  and  overwhelming  proofs  were 
produced  with  the  same  results.  Though  one  were  to 
have  risen  from  the  dead,  though  God  were  to  have 
scribbled  danger-signals  all  over  the  universe,  I doubt 
whether  the  people  living  in  that  valley  could  have  been 
convinced  after  the  failure  of  reasonable  proof. 

“ What  can  be  more  momentous  than  matters  of  life 
and  death  ? Yet  men  have  repeatedly  ignored  reason- 
able warnings  of  physical  danger.  So  is  it  in  matters 
pertaining  to  the  welfare  of  the  soul.  Men  persist  in 
ignoring  reasonable  proofs  and  warnings,  and  perish  in 
their  sins.  Men  have  received  sufficient  notice  of 
the  existence  of  a Supreme  Being  and  of  a future  life. 
Those  who  will  not  be  convinced  now,  I feel  assured, 
will  not  be  convinced  though  one  were  to  rise  from  the 
dead.  Nothing  can  be  proved  to  those  unwilling  to 
believe.  Thus  I answer  your  question.” 

“ It  is  ingeniously  and  well  answered,”  exclaimed  Mr. 
Yamada. 

“ As  regards  your  second  question,”  continued  Mr. 
Plympton,  “ I shall  answer  it  somewhat  after  this  fashion  : 
According  to  the  Gospel  records  Christ  proclaimed  his 
visit  to  our  world  to  have  a twofold  object.  In  the  first 
place,  he  came  to  atone  for  the  sins  of  humanity.  This 
mysterious  doctrine  I accept  on  faith.  I am  free  to  con- 
fess that  I do  not  comprehend  it.  It  is  a matter  that 
lay  between  God  and  his  Son.  I take  Christ’s  word  for 
it,  and  assume  that  his  sacrifice  was  essential  to  the 
redemption  of  mankind.  In  the  second  place,  he  pro- 
claimed himself  to  mankind  as  the  founder  and  the 
exemplar  of  a new  divine  system  of  moral  ethics  that  he 
desired  the  human  race  to  practise  even  as  he  prac- 
tised it. 

“ This  second  object  of  Christ’s  coming  is  of  vast  im- 
portance. The  great  trouble  with  all  human  systems  of 
morality  has  been  that  the  expounders  thereof  failed  to 
practise  what  they  themselves  urged  other  men  to  prac- 
tise. Even  in  those  exceedingly  rare  cases  where  the 
founders  of  systems  of  morality  actually  practised  their 


450 


Mito  Yashiki. 


own  doctrines,  yet  men  in  general  would  not  practise 
those  precepts  because  they  denied  the  authority  of  fel- 
low-mortals to  set  up  such  standards  and  force  them  on 
humanity.  The  result  has  been  that  while  moral  teachers 
have  said  to  men,  ‘ you  ought  to  do  this  and  you  ought 
not  to  do  that,’  nobody  obeyed  beyond  their  own  incli- 
nations in  the  matter,  and  each  one  did  as  he  pleased. 
Under  such  conditions  no  lofty  system  of  morality  re- 
quiring self-denial  and  the  crushing  of  base  animal  in- 
stincts could  ever  prevail  among  men,  because  neither 
inducement  nor  authority  were  at  hand  to  urge  men  to 
lead  lives  of  rigid  and  austere  virtue.  When  men  came 
to  the  point  where  some  pet  appetite  had  to  be  curbed 
or  some  passion  had  to  be  subdued,  they  graciously  said  : 
‘ Excuse  me,  if  you  please,’  and  passed  over  to  the  other 
side  of  the  way,  upon  the  principle  that  in  moral  matters 
men  were  born  free  and  equal,  and  that  nobody  had  the 
right  to  dictate  to  his  fellow-creatures  what  he  should  do 
and  what  he  should  not  do. 

“ But  Christ  came  teaching  the  most  sublime  system  of 
moral  ethics  that  the  world  has  ever  seen, — a system 
most  difficult  to  practise  in  many  of  its  details,  and 
directly  opposed  to  the  strongest  appetites  and  passions 
of  the  human  race.  He  not  only  taught  this  system  of 
morality,  but  he  practised  it  literally  and  rigidly  in  all 
the  details  of  his  own  life,  and  required  all  of  his  disci- 
ples to  do  the  same.  As  an  inducement  for  thus  running 
counter  to  the  currents  of  their  inclinations,  he  taught 
that  the  objective  point  of  man’s  existence  was  immortal 
life  with  him  in  paradise.  He  proclaimed  that  he  was 
the  Son  of  God,  and  that  all  power  in  heaven  and  on 
earth  had  been  given  to  him,  and  that  men  must  obey 
and  practise  his  precepts.  Thus  was  his  system  of 
moral  ethics  based  upon  authority  from  which  there 
could  be  no  appeal,  as  it  was  the  highest  in  the  universe. 
He  taught  and  practised  his  teachings  even  to  the  bitter 
end,  and  allowed  himself  to  be  slain  by  mankind,  thus 
forever  shutting  the  door  by  which  men  had  been  perpet- 
ually escaping  from  the  rigid  practice  of  austere  virtue. 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


45i 


“The  disciples  of  Christ  cannot  excuse  themselves 
from  practising  Christian  morality  because  it  is  difficult 
and  runs  against  the  fierce  currents  of  their  appetites  and 
passions — against  the  downward  tendency  of  all  their 
animal  instincts.  The  Son  of  God  allowed  himself  to  be 
crucified  for  proclaiming  and  practising  a divine  system 
of  moral  ethics,  and  his  followers  must  practise  in  the 
same  way,  even  if  called  upon  to  suffer  martyrdom  (as 
vast  multitudes  have  actually  done).  Based  upon  such 
authority  this  noble  religion  has  overcome  all  obstacles, 
and  has  shown  itself  to  be  a priceless  gift  to  humanity. 
It  is  fulfilling  the  prophecy  of  its  founder,  and  is  spread- 
ing to  the  uttermost  parts  of  the  earth  with  joy  and  heal- 
ing in  its  wings.  Do  you  wonder  that  we  Christians  glory 
in  the  cross  of  Christ  ? Are  not  the  results  worth  the 
sacrifice  ? The  cross  has  become  to  the  devout  followers 
of  the  crucified  Redeemer  the  sign  of  their  divine  author- 
ity to  preach  to  perishing  humanity.  Armed  with  this 
emblem  of  the  bitterest  anguish  that  the  world  has  ever 
witnessed,  we  shall  conquer  the  world  for  Christ.  All 
the  powers  of  evil — the  very  gates  of  hell — shall  not  pre- 
vail against  us.  This  is  the  only  answer,  honorable  sirs, 
that  I can  give  to  your  question.” 

“ O most  learned  instructor,”  exclaimed  Mr.  Yamada, 
“that  which  you  have  just  spoken  makes  clear  much  that 
was  obscure  in  my  mind.  It  is  manifest  that  you  Cau- 
casians are  a matter-of-fact  race  of  people,  who  take  a 
common-sense  business  view  of  every  thing.  Recogniz- 
ing the  fact  that  men  are  religious  by  nature  and  possess 
ineradicable  intuitions  concerning  the  existence  of  some 
supreme  and  intelligent  power  behind  the  phenomena  of 
nature,  you  then  select  that  religion  which  offers  proof  of 
its  divine  origin,  and  give  it  to  the  people  as  being  reason- 
able and  just  in  its  claims.  As  in  all  your  commercial 
transactions  your  operations  are  based,  more  or  less,  on 
speculative  estimates  that  appear  to  be  reasonably  certain 
of  producing  certain  results,  so  in  your  religious  calcula- 
tions you  proceed  on  faith  and  hard-headed  common- 
sense. 


452 


Mito  Yashiki. 


“ Certain  facts  in  this  world  are  like  mules, — if  you  ig- 
nore them  and  dash  yourself  against  them  you  are  liable 
to  be  kicked  to  death.  You  Caucasians  have  found  out 
that  popular  morality  cannot  be  developed  without  a 
religion  of  some  sort,  that  in  moral  matters  men  are  free 
agents  and  refuse  to  be  dictated  to  by  their  fellow-men, 
and  that  for  fully  ninety  per  cent,  of  humanity  this  life 
from  beginning  to  end  is  but  a series  of  hardships  and 
cheerless  strugglings  for  a bare  existence.  You  have 
found  out  that  life  for  the  toiling  masses  of  humanity  is 
not  worth  the  living.  You  have  found  out  that  men  need 
encouragement  and  sympathy  to  enter  the  bitter  and  piti- 
less contest  for  existence  that  rages  around  the  world. 

“ Therefore,  when  Christ  proclaims  the  fatherhood  of 
God  and  the  brotherhood  of  men,  and  enunciates  a 
matchless  system  of  morality  based  upon  divine  author- 
ity and  offering  priceless  inducements  to  the  struggling 
creatures  of  this  world  to  bear  up  cheerfully  under  their 
heavy  burdens,  then  you  gladly  accept  his  teachings  on 
faith  as  he  directed  his  followers  always  to  do,  and  you 
make  human  life  a glorious  and  magnificent  period  of 
probationary  existence.  And  then,  when  you  observe 
the  stupendous  effects  of  the  principles  of  Christianity 
upon  the  spiritual,  the  mental,  and  the  physical  develop- 
ment of  your  race  after  eighteen  centuries  of  practice, 
you  very  naturally  deem  the  prophecy  of  Christ  as  fully 
verified, — you  insist  that  the  effects  of  his  teachings  on 
humanity  satisfactorily  demonstrate  all  of  his  claims  to 
being  the  Son  of  One  who  thoroughly  understood  the 
minutest  peculiarities  of  human  nature.  Sir,  your  posi- 
tion is  impregnable.  It  is  based  on  the  matured  conclu- 
sions of  the  shrewdest  race  on  the  face  of  the  earth.  I 
also  believe  in  God,  and  in  Christ  his  Son  ! But,  sir, 
how  am  I to  enter  on  this  life  of  Christian  development  ?” 

“ Sir,”  exclaimed  Mr.  Plympton,  with  great  feeling, 
“ you  have  already  entered  upon  the  path.  Continue  as 
you  have  begun.  Read  the  Scriptures  daily.  Pray  at 
seasonable  and  regular  periods  to  the  Almighty  Father. 
Never  allow  the  spark  of  reformation  of  desire  to  be- 


The  Light  of  the  World. 


453 


come  extinguished  in  your  soul.  Make  public  profes- 
sion of  your  new  beliefs  before  your  countrymen,  by 
means  of  the  beautiful  ceremony  of  baptism.  Then 
indeed  will  you  be  born  of  water  and  the  Spirit ! Then 
will  you  enter  upon  that  glorious  life  of  self-conquest 
and  of  spiritual  development  that  our  blessed  Redeemer 
has  promised  to  every  soul  that  God  has  sent  into  the 
world. 

“ Sir,  I extend  to  you  the  right  hand  of  fellowship. 
It  matters  but  little  to  me  with  what  Christian  denomina- 
tion you  may  choose  to  identify  yourself.  When  I first 
set  foot  upon  your  shores  I was  zealous  to  propagate 
the  theological  views  of  my  own  peculiar  sect.  But 
now,  thanks  be  to  God,  the  beauty  and  the  grandeur  of 
Apostolic  Christianity — the  teachings  of  Christ  himself 
— have  dawned  upon  my  soul  in  their  full  majesty,  and 
have  put  to  flight  my  narrow  theories  and  metaphysical 
dogmas.  Love  God  and  keep  his  commandments.  Then 
shall  we  always  be  friends.  Honorable  sirs,  the  day  is 
drawing  speedily  to  a close,  and  other  duties  demand  my 
attention,  so  that  our  interview  must  terminate  ; but  feel 
free  to  call  upon  me  at  any  time  that  you  may  desire  so 
to  do.  Farewell  ! May  God  be  with  you  and  ever 
guide  you  in  the  spiritual  war  upon  which  you  have 
entered  under  the  leadership  of  his  beloved  Son  ! ” 


CONCLUSION. 


My  God,  I love  thee — not  because 
I hope  for  heaven  thereby  : 

Nor  yet  because,  if  I love  not, 

I must  forever  die. 

But,  O my  Jesus,  thou  didst  me 
Upon  the  cross  embrace  ; 

For  me  didst  bear  the  nails  and  spear, 
And  manifold  disgrace, 

And  griefs  and  torments  numberless, 
And  sweat  of  agony, 

E’en  death  itself  ; — and  all  for  me, 
Who  was  thine  enemy  ! 


Then  why,  O blessed  Jesus  Christ, 

Should  I not  love  thee  well  ? 

Not  for  the  hope  of  winning  heaven, 

Nor  of  escaping  hell ; 

Not  with  the  hope  of  gaining  aught, 

Not  seeking  a reward  ; 

But  as  thyself  hast  lov£d  me, 

O ever-loving  Lord  ! 

E’en  so  I love  thee,  and  will  love, 

And  in  thy  praise  will  sing  ; 

Solely  because  thou  art  my  God, 

And  my  eternal  King. 

— A translation  of  a Latin  hymn , written  by  Saint  Francis  Xavier,  apostle 
to  Japan,  1550  a.d. 


Many  years  have  elapsed  since  the  closing  scenes  in 
the  last  chapter.  Momentous  changes  have  taken  place 
in  the  Empire  of  the  Rising  Sun.  Feudalism  has  disap- 
peared from  the  face  of  the  land,  and  the  Emperor  has 
granted  a constitutional  form  of  government  to  the  peo- 
ple. A complete  system  of  telegraphic  wires  stretches 
all  over  the  country.  The  steamboat  and  the  railway 

454 


Conclusion. 


455 


have  revolutionized  methods  of  travel.  Newspapers  cir- 
culate freely,  and  a most  efficient  postal  system  makes 
it  easy  to  communicate  with  the  remotest  provinces. 
Schools  and  colleges  of  the  highest  grade  have  been 
established  in  the  great  centres  of  population,  and  gen- 
eral intelligence  and  learning  are  being  scattered  broad- 
cast throughout  the  land. 

Not  less  marked  have  been  the  changes  in  the  religious 
features  of  the  country.  Buddhism  has  been  disestab- 
lished as  the  state  religion  of  the  realm,  and  has  been 
contemptuously  set  aside  as  having  been  “ weighed  in 
the  balance  and  found  wanting,”  and  its  stagnated  life 
is  slowly  ebbing  away,  notwithstanding  the  frantic  efforts 
of  the  priests  to  assimilate  Christianity  and  to  spawn  it 
on  the  country  as  a modified  Buddhism.  During  all 
these  years  the  religion  of  Christ  has  advanced  with 
steady  strides  to  conquest  after  conquest,  until  its  con- 
verts now  cover  the  empire,  and  are  to  be  numbered  by 
the  thousands.  It  is  not  only  tolerated  by  the  Japanese 
government,  but  it  is  directly  and  indirectly  encouraged 
in  many  ways.  One  of  its  most  eloquent  and  able  advo- 
cates is  Tomokichi,  the  son  of  Nakashima. 

Shortly  after  the  interview  set  forth  in  the  last  chap- 
ter, Mr.  Yamada  and  his  entire  household  made  public 
profession  of  Christianity  by  receiving  baptism  at  the 
hands  of  Mr.  Plympton,  and  from  that  time  onward  he 
became  a most  zealous  and  valuable  supporter  of  Chris- 
tianity. The  path  upon  which  he  had  entered,  however, 
was  by  no  means  one  of  roses.  He  had  to  face  coldness 
and  derision  on  all  sides.  But  he  persisted  in  his  course, 
and  in  a few  years  saw  many  of  those  who  had  derided 
his  action  come  forth  and  acknowledge  the  saving  and 
elevating  power  of  Christ’s  teachings.  He  grew  daily  in 
favor  with  his  government,  who  gladly  availed  themselves 
of  his  adroit  ability  and  loyal  faithfulness  by  promoting 
him  to  positions  of  great  responsibility  and  trust. 

Through  his  influence  Tomokichi  and  Kunisaburo 
were  sent  abroad,  and  were  educated  in  one  of  the  great 
universities  of  the  United  States.  Tomokichi  then  grad- 


456 


Mi  to  Yashiki. 


uated  from  a theological  seminary,  while  his  brother 
went  through  a thorough  course  of  medicine  and  surgery 
in  New  York  City.  Returning  to  Japan,  they  took  charge 
of  a school  of  Christian  morality  that  had  been  founded 
by  Mr.  Yamada  during  their  absence.  Here  they  settled 
down  to  lives  of  great  usefulness.  Doctor  K.  Yamada 
(nee  Nakashima)  organized  a dispensary  and  a hospital, 
and  became  greatly  celebrated  for  his  medical  and  surgi- 
cal skill  ; and  his  name  spread  into  foreign  lands  as 
being  the  author  of  a famous  treatise  on  the  diseases 
peculiar  to  the  Japanese  people.  The  Rev.  T.  Naka- 
shima became,  as  before  intimated,  an  eloquent  and 
powerful  expounder  of  Christian  doctrines.  His  ser- 
mons were  eagerly  listened  to  by  multitudes  of  his  fel- 
low-countrymen. He  received  calls  to  preach  and  to 
lecture  in  all  parts  of  the  empire,  and  his  sermons  were 
put  into  print  and  were  eagerly  read  by  the  people  every- 
where. As  to  our  friend  Konishi,  my  report  is  equally 
flattering.  He  was  rapidly  promoted  from  one  post  of 
honor  to  another  until  he  was  finally  sent  abroad  to  rep- 
resent his  country  in  an  important  diplomatic  position, 
where  he  now  resides  with  his  family. 

The  speeding  years  are  now  leaving  deep  imprints 
upon  the  brow  of  old  Mr.  Yamada,  but  he  heeds  them 
not,  although  he  begins  to  notice  that  his  eyes  are  not 
as  clear  nor  is  his  hand  as  firm  as  in  the  days  of  yore, 
when  he  roamed  the  mountain  fastnesses  of  Yamato  and 
Shinshiu.  The  greatest  delight  of  his  old  age  is  to  see 
his  countrymen  advancing  in  all  that  pertains  to  elevation 
of  character  and  to  intellectual  and  material  develop- 
ment. It  is  the  delight  of  his  heart  to  aid  the  deserving 
and  to  encourage  the  despondent.  Thus  loved  by  his 
neighbors  and  revered  by  his  friends,  he  is  peacefully 
and  joyfully  approaching  that  spiritual  kingdom  for 
which  he  has  so  long  been  preparing  his  soul.  Like  a 
tale  that  is  told,  like  a dream  that  has  flown,  the  shadows 
of  the  past  have  faded  from  our  view  ; and,  as  the  shades 
of  the  sweet  islands  of  the  sea  float  away  from  our  gaze, 
we  bid  a long  farewell  to  the  scenes  of  Old  Japan. 


■ ' A . a : *V  A - 


A" /Alf* 


I PUJ&Ki? 

7 a . fr*.  A' . A. 


A 'A 


A ..  A 


A ,*7*  A ^A  . A 

,'!  A'  A , A,,.A,  A A.,  A 

A A~  A . A ...  A t A 


>55??^ 


p At  a.:  at  a:  ai  a:  a.  a.  a ? 


a7'->Ia'IaZ/'a^aAaAa  i 

• p Av^  PP a r A-t At 4* 

IE  ^ ^ 'A  ^ -A J 2L'  2L  ^ A A **• 

f «Y  x ^ -V  Y ,Y  Y . Y Y vY  , Y > 
-V  ’ Y V Y Y i r Y Y . Y _ Y . Y Y 
? Y V Y Y -Y  , Y 
r ,v  y ••'  ^ .-v  vY  ■■? 

f Y v . y Y y Y - Y ‘V"  Y Y Y , 

Y V 'V  V V Y ,Y  v v v 

c v v v v v v v'  y ' Y 

■ Y Y Y y , Y . Y , Y y , Y Y Y 
£ Y Y Y . Y s 'Y  Y s Y v Y vY  ~ 

' Y V ' Y Y Y Y ,Y  , 

? V Y Y Y Y Y Y > , «.  v 

Y ..  Y Y . Y Y Y . Y Y Y Y 

> .y  ,v  i Y Y . 'V  Y x Y-  . 


R /A  fV 

A & A 
I A ' A 

A ' X A 

t * fr't  A 

I Ja^ 

A'  „ #■ 


AV  fV  >3 

XA  I A; 

. A\  A'  a a * A' 

a;  A;  V 

A A 

; aX;  a . a,  * 

^ A’  ^ A A A A 

A P . A . A A . 

*p* 

Xp^  aTavp,  t 

A _ P _ P ..  p , A 

A A £ 

v A A A'  A A 

\ A 

A ~ A J! 

A 


A _ A 


A \ fcf  A X A A 1 A 
| A v A A ..  A'  A 
A A A A'  A A 

T A A-  A A ~ A ' 

A/  A & A'  A A;t  Av  At  At  At  A 

1 A-  A ' A A"  A ^ ' at.T  A v;  Afj 

A^A'  A'  A A A 
|a  Af  A A A 

7 

f A ^ pA  & A A i*  f" 

A A A A A A- 

k A A ■'’  A A A ’ A *’  k *# 

la  v^vKi1 . *• 


A ’ p ' A , A 
A A'  A A A 

***>,*£*>* 

„ A . A . * -.  - % 
A , A-  X.A  A . A 

* ****** 
'hKW 


, ^ A ; A A , A , A -A  A , A'i.AjtA' 
i ^ . A A,  A-*  ^X  A'  AX  -Ax  A^ 
**  A ^ AX  A,.  At  Ax  A . #x  fix  A x A 


A ' A ‘ A'  A 
*w  A'  A A 

&»■?>»»*# 
Ha  a;^  a 

-*■  A A A1 


A!  a 


A ' A ; A . A 

i*5^  A »**  A’ 


A A - A A '-  A ' A 


1 A J 1 A x A A . 

^ ?►?»■  ..vt 

• X A A' ' a ! «•  A 
A A A P P A 
A-  p ..  A . A p 


A A 


Aj»  J&t  <*'  A ; 

S a A A A' 

' ■ A a a ; 

A A A A 

fv- ' A A A 

E A A A ^ 


Mk  x A x A ' Ax  A 


ar  A A"  A A,.  v 
A ' A A ' A'  A , At 
A ' . A ' A A A A 
A A x A A : A , A' 

; 


A 


. *v ..  *• , x 


